ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE JAPANESE STANDARDS

ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE

JAPANESE STANDARDS

JAPAN EDITED SPECIFICATIONS

BACKCHECK DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL: VOLUME 2 OF 2

DIVISION 26 to DIVISION 33

JANUARY 2020

ADMINISTERED BY:

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS,

PACIFIC OCEAN DIVISION (POD)

PREPARED BY:

1580 MAKALOA STREET, SUITE 1100

HONOLULU, HI 96814

Japan Edited Specifications Version 1.0, 2019

JAPANSTDS TABLE OF CONTENTS

DI VI SI ON 01 - GENERAL REQUI REMENTS

01 45 35 02/15 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

DI VI SI ON 03 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 02/19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DI VI SI ON 05 - METALS

05 05 23.13 10 08/18 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF WELDMENTS05 05 23.16 08/18 STRUCTURAL WELDING05 12 00 08/18 STRUCTURAL STEEL05 30 00 05/15 STEEL DECKS05 50 13 05/17 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS05 51 33 02/16 METAL LADDERS05 52 00 02/18 METAL RAILINGS

DI VI SI ON 06 - WOOD, PLASTI CS, AND COMPOSI TES

06 41 16.00 10 08/10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

DI VI SI ON 07 - THERMAL AND MOI STURE PROTECTI ON

07 14 00 02/12 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING07 52 00 05/12 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING07 60 00 05/17 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL07 92 00 08/16 JOINT SEALANTS

DI VI SI ON 08 - OPENI NGS

08 11 13 02/10 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES08 11 16 05/17 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES08 14 00 08/16 WOOD DOORS08 32 13 11/08 ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS08 51 13 05/19 ALUMINUM WINDOWS08 71 00 02/16 DOOR HARDWARE08 81 00 05/19 GLAZING

DI VI SI ON 09 - FI NI SHES

09 22 00 02/10 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD09 29 00 08/16 GYPSUM BOARD09 30 10 08/17 CERAMIC, QUARRY, AND GLASS TILING09 51 00 08/17 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS09 65 00 08/10 RESILIENT FLOORING09 68 00 11/17 CARPETING09 90 00 05/11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

DI VI SI ON 10 - SPECI ALTI ES

10 14 00.10 08/17 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE10 14 00.20 08/17 INTERIOR SIGNAGE10 21 13 08/17 TOILET COMPARTMENTS10 28 13 08/17 TOILET ACCESSORIES

DI VI SI ON 12 - FURNI SHI NGS

MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


12 21 00 08/17 WINDOW BLINDS

DI VI SI ON 21 - FI RE SUPPRESSI ON

21 13 13.00 10 05/09 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION21 30 00 04/08 FIRE PUMPS

DI VI SI ON 22 - PLUMBI NG

22 00 00 11/15 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

DI VI SI ON 23 - HEATI NG, VENTI LATI NG, AND AI R CONDI TI ONI NG ( HVAC)

23 00 00 08/18 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

23 05 15 02/14 COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC23 07 00 02/13 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS23 23 00 10/07 REFRIGERANT PIPING23 64 10 11/16 WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE23 64 26 08/09 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER

PIPING SYSTEMS23 65 00 11/16 COOLING TOWERS AND REMOTE EVAPORATIVELY-COOLED

CONDENSERS23 81 00.00 20 11/09 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

DI VI SI ON 26 - ELECTRI CAL

26 11 16.00 33 08/19 THREE-PHASE, CUBICLE-TYPE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER

26 12 19.10 05/19 THREE-PHASE, LIQUID-FILLED PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

26 20 00 02/14 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 23 00 05/15 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR26 24 13 05/15 SWITCHBOARDS26 51 00 05/16 INTERIOR LIGHTING26 56 00 05/13 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DI VI SI ON 27 - COMMUNI CATI ONS

27 10 00 08/11 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

DI VI SI ON 31 - EARTHWORK

31 00 00 08/08 EARTHWORK31 62 13.20 08/09 PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES

DI VI SI ON 32 - EXTERI OR I MPROVEMENTS

32 01 16.71 02/17 COLD MILLING ASPHALT PAVING32 11 20 08/17 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND SUBBASES FOR FLEXIBLE

PAVING32 11 23 08/17 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES32 12 13 05/17 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS32 12 16 08/09 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS32 15 00 05/17 AGGREGATE SURFACING32 16 19 05/18 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS32 31 13 11/16 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES



DI VI SI ON 33 - UTI LI TI ES

33 11 00 02/18 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING33 30 00 05/18 SANITARY SEWERAGE33 40 00 02/10 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES33 71 02 02/15 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION33 82 00 04/06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)

-- End of Master Table of Contents --



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCESA / NASA UFGS 26 11 16. 00 33 ( August 2019) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC

UNI FI ED FACI LI TI ES GUI DE SPECI FI CATI ONS

Ref er ences ar e i n agr eement wi t h UMRL dat ed Januar y 2020**************************************************************************

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33

THREE-PHASE, CUBICLE-TYPE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER08/19

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s and i ncl ude Japanese pr oduct s, wher e f easi bl e, f or a st andar d Japan Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . The Desi gner of Recor d ( DOR) shal l t ai l or as appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Honshu and Kyushu, t ypi cal vol t age r at i ngs ar e: Pr i mar y Vol t age Rat i ngs: 77kV, 66kV, 33kV, 22kV, 6. 6kV, 3. 3kV Secondar y Vol t age Rat i ngs: 440V, 440/ 254V, 420/ 242V, 220V, 210V, 210/ 105V, 208/ 120V

For Oki nawa, t ypi cal pr i mar y vol t age i s 13. 8kV.Secondar y Vol t age Rat i ngs: 480/ 277V, 208/ 120V and 240/120V

The f ol l owi ng ar eas ut i l i ze 50 Her t z f r equency:Regi onal ar ea by Gener al El ect r i c i t y Busi ness as Hokkai do, Tohoku, Tokyo.

The f ol l owi ng r emai ni ng ar eas i n Japan ut i l i ze 60 Her t z Fr equency: Regi onal ar ea by Gener al El ect r i c i t y Busi ness as Hokur i ku, Chubu, Chugoku, Kansai , Shi koku, Kyushu and Oki nawa.

Typi cal Japan manuf act ur ed mechani cal equi pment vol t ages ar e 440V, 50Hz; 400V, 60Hz; 200V, 50/ 60Hz; 100V 50/ 60Hz. Pr ovi de appr opr i at e secondar y vol t age and f r equency r at i ngs t o suppor t mechani cal equipment.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Japan vol t age r ange cat egor i es ar e def i ned as follows:Low Vol t age ( Vol t ages l ess t han 1kV)Hi gh Vol t age ( Vol t ages 1kV t hr u 7kV)Ext r a Hi gh Vol t age ( Vol t ages over 7kV)

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 1


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For t r ansf or mer s speci f i ed f or t he Honshu and Kyushu ar ea, ut i l i ze speci f i cat i ons sect i on 26 11 16. 00 33.

For t r ansf or mer s speci f i ed f or t he Oki nawa ar ea, ut i l i ze speci f i cat i ons sect i on 26 12 19. 10.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng r el at ed gui despeci f i cat i ons f or power di st r i but i on equi pment :- - Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM- - Sect i on 26 23 00 LOW VOLTAGE SWI TCHGEAR- - Sect i on 26 24 13 SWI TCHBOARDS

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ectdrawings:

1. Si ngl e- l i ne di agr am showi ng pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer connect or s, i nser t s, sur ge ar r est er s, swi t ches, f uses, cur r ent t r ansf or mer s wi t h r at i ngs, and met er s as appl i cabl e.

2. Gr oundi ng pl an.

3. Type and number of cabl es, and si ze of conduct or s f or each power c i r cui t .

4. Tr ansf or mer pr i mar y and secondar y vol t ages. St at e t he pr i mar y vol t age ( nomi nal ) act ual l y i n ser vi ce and not t he vol t age cl ass.

5. Speci al condi t i ons, such as al t i t ude, t emper at ur e and humi di t y; exposur e t o f umes, vapor s, dust , and gases; and sei smi c r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

JAPANESE INDUSTRIAL STANDARDS (JIS)

JIS B 1178 (2015) Foundation Bolts (Amendment 1 )

JIS C 0920 (2003) Degrees Of Protection Provided By Enclosures (IP Code)

JIS C 1102-1 (2007)Direct Acting Indicating Analogue

Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 2


Accessories Part 1: Definitions And General Requirements Common To All Parts

JIS C 1102-2 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 2: Special Requirements For Ammeters And Voltmeters

JIS C 1102-3 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 3: Special Requirements For Wattmeters And Varmeters

JIS C 1102-4 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 4: Special Requirements For Frequency Meters

JIS C 1102-5 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 5: Special Requirements For Phase Meters, Power Factor Meters And Synchroscopes

JIS C 1102-6 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 6: Special Requirements For Ohmmeters (Impedance Meters) And Conductance Meters

JIS C 1102-7 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 7: Special Requirements For Multi-Function Instruments

JIS C 1102-8 (1997) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments And Their Accessories Part 8: Special Requirements For Accessories

JIS C 1103 (1984) Dimensions of Electrical Indicating Instruments for Switchboards

JIS C 1211-1 (2009) Alternating-Current Watt-Hour Meters (For Direct Connection) -- Part 1: General Measuring Instrument

JIS C 1211-2 (2017) Alternating-Current Watt-Hour Meters (For Direct Connection) -- Part 1: General Measuring Instrument

JIS C 1216 (2009) Alternating-Current Watt-Hour Meters (For Connection Through Instrument Transformer) -- Part 1: General Measuring Instrument

JIS C 1263-1 (2009) Var-Hour Meters -- Part 1: General Measuring Instrument

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 3


JIS C 1281 (1979) Weather-Proof Performance Of Electricity Meters

JIS C 1283 (2009) Watt-Hour, Var-Hour And Maximum Demand Indicators For Telemetering -- Part 1: General Measuring Instrument

JIS C 3102 (1984) Annealed Copper Wires for Electrical Purposes

JIS C 3611 (1991) Insulated Wires for Cubicle Type Unit Substation for 6.6 KV Receiving

JIS C 3814 (1999) Indoor Post Insulators

JIS C 3851 (2012) Indoor Post Insulator Of Organic Material

JIS C 4304 (2013) 6 KV Oil-Immersed Distribution Transformers

JIS C 4306 (2013) 6 kV mold transformer for distribution

JIS C 4603 (1990) Ac Circuit Breakers For 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV

JIS C 4604 (2017) High Voltage Current-Limiting Fuses

JIS C 4605 (1998) AC Load Break Switches for 3.3 KV or 6.6 KV

JIS C 4606 (R2011) Indoor Use Disconnectors for 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV

JIS C 4607 (1999) Ac Load Break Switches With Tripping Device for 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV

JIS C 4608 (2015)Surge arresters for 6.6 kV Cubicle Type Unit Substation

JIS C 4611 (1999) High-voltage alternating current switch-fuse combinations

JIS C 4620 (2018) Cubicle Type High Voltage Power Receiving Units

JIS C 8105-1 (2017) Luminaires - Part 1: General Requirements For Safety

JIS C 8105-2-2 (2003) Luminaires - Part 2. Luminaires Part 2: Particular requirements for safety - Section 2: Recessed luminaires

JIS C 8106 (2015) Luminaires With Led Light Source Fluorescent Lamp For Commercial, Industrial And Public Lighting

JIS C 8201-2-1 (2011) Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 4


Gear - Part 2-1: Circuit-Breakers

JIS C 8201-2-2 (2011) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear - Part 2-2: Circuit-Breakers Incorporating Residual Current Protection

JIS C 8201-7-1 (2016) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear -- Part 7-1: Ancillary Equipment -- Terminal Blocks For Copper Conductors

JIS C 8303 (2007) Plugs And Receptacles For Domestic And Similar General Use

JIS C 8364 (2008) Busways

JIS C 8480 (R2016) Box-Type Switchgear Assemblies for Low-Voltage Distribution Purpose

JIS G 3553 (2011) Crimped Wire Cloth (Amendment 1)

JIS G 3555 (2015) Woven Wire Cloth, 4th Edition, Incl Amendments

JIS G 3555 PW-S (2015) The most basic way of weaving, where vertical and horizontal lines are kept at regular intervals and intersect each other one by one. (Translated Japanese)

JIS H 3140 (2018) Copper Bus Bars

JIS H 8641 (2007) Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings

JIS Z 8721 (1993) Color Specification - Specification According To Their Three Attributes

JAPAN WIRE INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION STANDARD (JCS)

JCS 1226 (2003) Soft Stranded Wire

JAPANESE ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMITTEE (JEC)

JEC 2200 (2015) Transformer

JEC 2300 (1998) Vacuum Circuit Breaker

JEC 2310 (2003) Disconnector and Earthing Switch

THE STANDARD JAPAN ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S (JEM)

JEM 1425 (2011) Metal-enclosed Switch Gear and Control Gear

JEM 1459 (2013) Structure and dimensions of switchboard and control panel

JAPAN POWER CABLE ACCESSORIES ASSOCIATION STANDARDS (JCAA)

JCAA C 3102 (2016) 6600V Cross-linked Polyethylene

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 5


Insulated Power Cable Rubber Stress Cone Type Cubicle Termination Connection

MINISTRY OF LAND, INFRASTRUCTURE AND TRANSPORT JAPAN (MLIT)

MLIT DSKKS Denki Setsubi Kouji Kanri Shishin (DSKKS) Electrical Construction Supervision Guidelines

MLIT ESS (2019) MLIT Electrical Standard Specification (ESS)

1.2 RELATED EQUIPMENT

Section 26 00 00.00 20 , BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIAL AND METHOD, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Testing Methods for Each Field Test ; G[, [ ]]

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Cubicle Type Unit Substation Including Concrete Foundation; G[, [ ]]

Distribution panel; G[, [ ]]

Cubicle type unit switching station including concrete foundation; G[, [ ]]

Switchgear including concrete foundation; G[, [ ]]

SD-03 Product Data (Catalog Data)

Transformers ; G[ [, [ ]]

Primary Cutout (PC) G[, [ ]]

Disconnecting Switches (DS) ; G[, [ ]]

Load Disconnecting Switches (LDS) ; G [, [ ]]

Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB) ; G, [ ]]

Load Break Switches (LBS) ; G[, [ ]]

Load Break Switches (LBS) with tripping device ; G[, [ ]]

Load Break Switches (LBS) with fuse ; G[, [ ]]

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 6


Circuit breaker ; G[, [ ]]

Circuit Breaker with GFCI ; G[, [ ]]

Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) ; G[, [ ]]

Power Fuses (PF) ; G FIO [, [ ]]

Instruments ; G[, [ ]]

Instrument Control Switches ; G[, [ ]]

Buzzer ; G[, [ ]]

Test Terminal ; G[, [ ]]

Lightning Arrester ; G[, [ ]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance Checks and Tests ; G[, [ ]]

SD-07 Certificates

PCB Free Certificate ; G[, [ ]]

Certification of Lead Free materials; G[, [ ]]

Transformer Efficiencies; G[, [ ]]

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Transformer Test Schedule; G[, [ ]]

Transformer Routine and Other Tests; G[, [ ]]

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data Transformer(s), Data Package 5 ; G[, [ ]]

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 PCB Free Certificate

Submit results of PCB analysis in transformer oil to certify that the transformers installed under this contract are PCB free transformer as specified in Paragraph Also, analysis results shall be required maker name, serial number and other identification data of the transformers which are taken and analyzed oil samples. Analysis results appearing PCB rate shall be submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to install the transformers. The certificate shall include "PCB analysis report" prepared by the Contractor and "PCB-free certificate" prepared by the transformer manufacturer.

1.4.2 Lead-Containing Paint Material

Use of Lead-containing paint shall not be permitted. Submit the Certification of Lead Free for each enclosure, and field-applied paint in

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 7


accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

1.4.3 Cubicle Type Transformer Drawings

Include the following as a minimum:

a. An outline drawing, including front, top, and side views.

b. Nameplate data.

c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams[ with terminals identified of watthour meter and current transformers].

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es)[, current transformers, meters, and fuses].

1.4.4 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, except when more stringent requirements are specified or indicated, as though the word "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with applicable codes and standards unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.4.5 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship, and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

1.4.6 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. In addition to requirements of Data Package 5 , include the following on the actual transformer(s) provided:

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 8


a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses

[ f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block

] g. Actual nameplate diagram

h. Date of purchase

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

MLIT ESS . Substation shall be open-type switchgear for secondary distribution with transformation. The substation assembly shall consist of [one][ ] incoming section, [one][ ] transformer section and [one][ ] distribution section. Dimension and feature of the substation shall be as indicated.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

All materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of JIS where JIS Standards are established for those items, and the requirements of MLIT ESS . All items shall be new unless specified or indicated otherwise.

2.3 [MODIFICATION OF ] CUBICLE TYPE UNIT SUBSTATION

JIS C 4620 and MLIT ESS . [ Substation shall be metal enclosed station type cubicle switchgear for secondary distribution with transformation. The substation assembly shall consist of [one][] incoming section, [one][] transformer section and [one][] distribution section. External doors shall be suitable for handle key. Enclosure of the substation, inside enclosure and oil transformers shall be coated by salt-air proofing paint, heavy-duty type. Dimension and feature of the substation shall be as indicated.]

2.4 TRANSFORMER SECTION

2.4.1 Unit Frame

Unit frame shall conform to JEM 1459 .

2.4.2 Transformer

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect f i r st or second br acket ed opt i on i f pr i mar y vol t age i s t he Hi gh Vol t age r ange. Sel ect t he t hi r d opt i on i f t he pr i mar y vol t age i s t he Ext r a Hi gh Vol t age cat egor y.

**************************************************************************

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 9


Oil immersed transformer shall conform to JIS C 4304 . Transformer shall be high-efficiency type.

[Molded transformer shall conform to JIS C 4306 . Transformer shall be high-efficiency type.]

[Extra-high voltage type transformer shall conform to JEC 2200 .]

Voltage tap shall be changed by outside setting.

2.4.2.1 Transformer (Insulation) Oil

The use of PCB containing oil shall not be permitted. Before installation of transformer, the new transformer oil shall be tested in accordance with the method described in the latest Law of the Japanese Government, and submit PCB free certificate with its testing method to the Contracting Officer. Materials containing PCBs ( 0.5 ppm and above) shall not be permitted to use.

2.5 [MODIFICATION OF ] CUBICLE TYPE UNIT SWITCHING STATION

JIS C 4620 and MLIT ESS . [Switching station shall be metal enclosed station-type cubicle switchgear for feeder distribution. The switching station assembly shall consist of [one][ ] incoming section, and [one][ ] distribution section. External doors shall be suitable for handle key. Enclosure of the switching station and inside enclosure shall be coated by salt-air proofing paint, heavy-duty type. Dimension and feature of the switching station shall be as indicated.]

2.6 [MODIFICATION OF ] SWITCHGEAR

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect JI S C 4620 i f pr i mar y vol t age i s cat egor i zed as Hi gh Vol t age. Sel ect JEM 1425 i f pr i mar y vol t age i s cat egor i zed as Ext r a Hi gh Vol t age.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 4620 ] [ JEM 1425 ] and MLIT ESS . [Switchgear shall be metal enclosed [metal-clad] [cubicle] type switchgear for feeder distribution.] The switchgear assembly shall consist of [one] [_____] incoming section, and [one] [_____] distribution section. External doors shall be suitable for handle key. Enclosure of the switchgear and inside enclosure shall be coated by salt-air proofing paint, heavy-duty type. Dimension and feature of the switchgear shall be as indicated.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect f i r st br acket ed opt i on i f pr i mar y vol t age i s wi t hi n t he Ext r a Hi gh Vol t age r ange. Sel ect t he second opt i on i f t he pr i mar y vol t age i s t he Hi gh Vol t age cat egor y.

**************************************************************************

[ 2.6.1 Interrupter Switch for Extra-High-voltage

2.6.1.1 Primary Cutout (PC)

As recommended by the primary cutout manufacturer.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 10


2.6.1.2 Disconnecting Switches (DS)

Shall conform to JEC 2310 .

2.6.1.3 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)

Shall conform to JEC 2300 .

][ 2.6.2 Interrupter Switch for High-Voltage

2.6.2.1 Primary Cutout (PC)

Shall conform to JIS C 4620 , Appendix C .

2.6.2.2 Load Disconnecting Switches (LDS)

Shall conform to JIS C 4606 .

2.6.2.3 Load Break Switches (Lbs)


LDS means fuse less type of Load Break Switches (LBS).

2.6.2.4 Load Break Switches (LBS) With Tripping Device


2.6.2.5 Load Break Switches (LBS) With Fuse

Shall conform to JIS C 4611 . Power fuses (PF) shall confrm to JIS C 4604 .



] 2.7 DISTRIBUTION SECTION

Distribution switchboard shall be circuit breaker-equipped unless indicated otherwise. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by JEM. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breaker sized as indicated. Directories shall be typed to indicate load served by each circuit and mounted in holder behind transparent protective covering.

2.7.1 Unit Frame

Unit frame shall conform to JEM 1459 .

2.7.2 Cubicle Type Cabinet

Cabinet shall conform to cubicle-type [ JIS C 4620 ][ JEM 1425 ] . Additional requirements shall be attached at the end of this section as a reference.

2.7.3 Panelboard Type Cabinet

Cabinet shall conform to JIS C 8480 shall have a mounting plate, and shall

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 11


be provided with wiring gutters of adequate size at top, bottom and sides.

2.7.3.1 Steel Type

Thickness of steel sheet shall be not less than 2.3 mm .

Thickness of sheet steel for the cabinet shall be not less than 2.3 mm for outdoor installation and for indoor installation.

Cabinet located outside the building shall be of hot dip galvanized steel sheet material.

Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph FACTORY APPLIED FINISH.

2.7.3.2 Stainless Steel Type

Cabinet shall be of Stainless Steel.

2.7.3.3 Weather Proof Type

Cabinet located outside of building and exposure to weather, shall be weather-proofed box.

Weather-proof cabinet shall conform to JIS C 0920 [(IP44)] [(IP54)] [(IPXX and more)] [as indicated] and exposed screws to weather shall be non-corrosive material.

2.7.4 Interrupter Switch for Low-voltage

2.7. 4.1 Circuit Breaker

JIS C 8201-2-1 , thermal-magnetic, magnetic or solid-state (electronic) type with interrupting capacity as indicated. Plug-in circuit breakers unacceptable.

Interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be as indicated. If not shown, do not select circuit breakers less than 10,000A asymmetrical interrupting rating for voltages 240V and under, and 14,000A asymmetrical interrupting rating for 480V and under.

2.7. 4.1 Circuit Breaker with GFCI

JIS C 8201-2-2 , Plug-in circuit breakers unacceptable. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of [15] [30] milliamperes or greater per requirements or as indicated on drawings.

2.7.5 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)

As recommended by the auto transfer switch manufacturer.

2.7.6 Power Factor Improvement Equipments

[Provide as indicated on drawings.][_____]

2.7.7 Protective Relays, Metering, and Control Devices

Provide protective relays as indicated [on drawings.] [per manufacturer's

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 12


recommendations.] [_____]

2.7.7.1 Instruments

General of instruments shall conform to JIS C 1102-1 , JIS C 1102-8 and JIS C 1103 .

Ammeter (wide-range type), voltmeter (wide-range type) shall conform to JIS C 1102-2 respectively.

Wattmeters and varmeters shall conform to JIS C 1102-3 .

Frequency meters shall conform to JIS C 1102-4 .

Phase meters, power factor meters and synchroscopes shall conform to JIS C 1102-5 .

Ohmmeters (impedance meters) and conductance meters conform to JIS C 1102-6 .

Multi-function instruments shall conform to JIS C 1102-7 .

Watt-hour meter with pulse generator shall conform to JIS C 1211-1 , JIS C 1211-2 , JIS C 1216 , JIS C 1281 and JIS C 1283 .

Var-hour meter shall conform to JIS C 1263-1 .

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Kadena, met er i ng may r equi r e compl i ance wi t h AMRS speci f i cat i on. Desi gner shal l obt ai n t he cur r ent r equi r ement s f or t he AMRS el ect r i c met er f r om t he Kadena Base I nst al l at i on Ener gy Manager .

**************************************************************************

[Metering shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS) Electric Meter Specifications.]

2.7.7. 2 Instrument Control Switches

Provide rotary cam-operated type with positive means of indicating contact positions.

2.7.7. 3 Buzzer

Shall have a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 1 m .

2.7.7. 4 Test Terminal

Provide current test terminal and voltage test terminal.

2.7.7. 5 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide transformer, resistor, or diode type.

2.7.7. 6 Lightning Arrester


SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 13


2.7.7. 7 Insulators

Shall conform to JIS C 3814 , and JIS C 3851 .

2.7.7. 8 EMCS Terminal

Provide plywood ( 600 mm x 600mm x 12mm) with terminal blocks, receptacle outlet and associated wiring as indicated on drawings.

2.7.7. 9 Space Heater

As indicated on drawings.

2.7.7. 10 Receptacles

Provide receptacle outlet for maintenance.

Shall conform to JIS C 8303 , grounding-type and duplex type.

2.7.7. 11 LED Lighting Fixtures

Provide LED lighting fixtures inside cabinet.

Shall conform to JIS C 8106 , JIS C 8105-1 and JIS C 8105-2-2 .

2.7.7. 12 Roof Fan


2.7.7. 12.1 Air Intake Fan

Provide Air Intake Fan on side wall of receiving panel. Its cover (outdoor hood) shall have minimum 500mm straight portion duct below lower portion of opening for air intake on side wall. Straight portion duct shall be opened forward downside, and opening of duct shall be covered by crimped wire cloth and woven wire cloth with stainless steel (SUS304) frame. Wire clothes shall be fixed to cover by bolts or screws. Requirements for wire clothes are as follows, and their layer shall be following order from downside (outside);

(1) Crimped wire cloth, JIS G 3553 , CR-S (SUS304), Wire dia. 1.6mm, mesh size 9mm

(2) Woven wire cloth, JIS G 3555 , PW-S (SUS304), Wire dia. 0.65mm, 8 mesh(3) Woven wire cloth, JIS G 3555 PW-S (SUS304), Wire dia. 0.65mm, 10 mesh

2.8 WIRE AND CABLES

2.8.1 Current Carrying Section

2.8.1.1 Cable Head

Cable head shall be designed for terminating one single conductor cables per phase and shall be arranged for conduits entering from below. Cable head Shall conform to JCAA C 3102 .

2.8.1.2 Bus Duct (Busway)

JIS C 8364 .

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 14


2.8.1.3 Copper Bus Bars

Shall conform to JIS H 3140 .

2.8.1.4 Copper Ground Bus Terminal (Copper Bus Bar for Ground Terminal)

Provide a copper ground bus terminal of sufficient amperage and install. Bus bars shall be JIS H 3140 .

2.8.1.5 Terminal Blocks

JIS C 8201-7-1 .

[ 2.8.1.6 Extra-High-Voltage Cable (Over 6.6 kV)

Provide as specified in SECTION 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

][ 2.8.1. 7 High Voltage Wire (6.6 kV)

High voltage wire for cubicle type unit substation shall conform to JIS C 3611 , Type KIP.

][ 2.8.1. 8 Low-Voltage Cable (600 V)

Provide as specified in SECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

] 2.9 CONDUITS

Provide as specified in SECTION 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.10 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of JIS C 0920corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray,[ and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI[ Light Gray][ Dark Gray]]. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

2.10.1 Hot Dip Galvanizing

JIS H 8641 , Type HDZ35.

2.10.2 Paint of Cabinet

Provide standard factory finishes including rust inhibiting treatment. Unless otherwise specified or indicated finish of outside panels shall be applied factory finish color. Field applied paint shall not be permitted for newly installed panels. The cabinet shall include likely panelboard,

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 15


power panel, control panel, breaker box, disconnecting switch box, terminal box and steel cabinet for electrical work.

2.10.2.1 Clear Blue

Provide standard factory finishes including rust inhibiting treatment, except that the inside finish of the cabinet shall be vivid orange (2.5YR5/12 of JIS Z 8721 ) and the outside including exposed parts of trim and door shall be clear blue (2.5PB5/8 of JIS Z 8721 ).

2.10.2.2 Sand Beige

Provide standard factory finishes including rust inhibiting treatment, except that the inside finish of the cabinet shall be vivid orange (2.5YR5/12 of JIS Z 8721 ) and the outside including exposed parts of trim and door shall be sand beige (2.5Y8.5/1 of JIS Z 8721 ).

2.10.2.3 Surrounding

Provide standard factory finishes including rust inhibiting treatment, except that the inside finish of the cabinet shall be vivid orange (2.5YR5/12 of JIS Z 8721 ) and the outside including exposed parts of trim and door shall match to surrounding wall surface.

2.10.2.4 Fire Red

Provide standard factory finishes including rust inhibiting treatment, except that the inside finish of the cabinet shall be vivid orange (No. 2.5YR5/12 of JIS Z 8721 ) and the outside including exposed parts of trim and door shall be fire red (No. 7.5R4/14 of JIS Z 8721 ).

2.10.2.5 Selection of Colors Outside

Selection of color outside cabinet including exposed parts of trim shall be clear blue in the industrial area and mechanical room, unless otherwise specified or indicated. The color of the cabinet located other area shall match to surrounding or sand beige. [Directed by the Contracting Officer.]

2.10.3 Nameplate

Provide as specified in Section 26 00 00.00 20 , BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

2.11 LEAD-IN POCKET FOR TEMPORARY CABLE


2.12 WARNING SIGN

Warning sign shall be attached at the end of this section.

2.13 GROUNDING AND BONDING

[Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.]

[Provide as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.]

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 16


2.14 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE FOUNDATION

Features and dimension of the concrete foundation shall be as indicated.

2.14.1 Concrete Material

Specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.14.2 Anchor Bolt

Anchor bolts shall be JIS B 1178 , Type L. Bolts shall be stainless steel material conforming to SUS 304.

2.14.3 Anchor Bolt (Expansion Anchor )

Tubular, multi-slit, internal thread, with stud bolt having a head of the expander shape, as indicated on drawing. Do not use plastic material.

2.14.4 Anchor Bolt (Chemical Anchor)

Shall be a two-part system composed of a threaded rod stud and a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of epoxy acrylic resin, quartz sand, and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule.

2.14.5 Nuts and Washers

Material shall be stainless steel conforming to SUS 304 .

2.15 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUBSTATION SWITCHING STATION SWITCHGEAR

Additional requirements of cubicle type unit substation open type unit substation switching station switchgear shall be attached at the end of this section as a reference.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Unless otherwise indicated, installation shall be performed in accordance with MLIT ESS , MLIT DSKKS and to the requirements specified herein.

3.2 GROUNDING

Provide grounding as indicated, in accordance with [ MLIT ESS and MLIT DSKKS,] [except that grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms].

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods as specified in [Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION] [Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System]. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Transformer Grounding

Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to [the

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 17


ground girdle as indicated] [copper ground bus terminal]. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply.

3.2.3 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to copper ground bus terminal. Solid bare copper wire shall be JIS C 3102 : Stranded bare copper wire shall be JCS 1226 , except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2.4 Ground Girdle (Loop Ground)

Provide a 60 sq mm bare copper-ground girdle around substation switching station switchgear. Girdle shall be buried 305 mm (one foot) deep and placed 915 mm (3 feet) laterally from the substation enclosure. Connect girdle to enclosure at two opposite places using 6 0 sq mm copper.

3.2.5 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and ground girdle by exothermic weld or compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in [Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION] [Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System] .

3.2.6 Resistance

[Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.][Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System.]

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect cubicle type unit substation open type unit substation switching station switchgear furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Field paint shall be specified in Section 09 90 00 , PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 9 meters apart.

3.6 RESTORATION

Unless otherwise indicated, all existing objects which interfere with new work shall be removed temporary and reinstalled upon completion of new work.

3.7 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Foundation shall be in accordance with MLIT ESS .

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 18


3.7.1 Cast-in-place concrete

Cast-in-place concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.7.2 Sealing

When the installation is complete, the Contractor shall seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.8.1 Testing Methods for Each Field Test

Use design documents and requirements specified in this section to develop test procedures. Procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for a test setup, execution, and evaluation of test results.

Testing shall not proceed until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer's approval of the test procedures as specified.

3.8.2 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

First Class Construction Electric Management Engineer (1 Kyu Dekikouji Sekou Kanrigishi) shall perform acceptance checks and testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include [the following] visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with Denki Hoan Kyoukai standards, MLIT ESS and MLIT DSKKS.

a. Protection co-ordination curve line

b. Insulation resistance test

c. Withstand voltage test

d. Protective relays test

e. [Leakage current test of transformer]

f. System test

[Grounding system test are performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests.]

3.8.3 Equipment Checks and Tests

3.8.3.1 Interrupter Switches

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

(1) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 19


(3) Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

(4) Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances.

(5) Verify appropriate equipment grounding.

(6) Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.

(7) [Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.]

(8) [Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support.]

(9) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic surveying[ is not][ is]required.

(10) Test interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.

(11) Verify correct phase barrier materials and installation.

(12) Compare switch blade clearances with industry standards.

(13) Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation-resistance tests .

(2) Perform over-potential tests.

(3) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

(4) Measure closed contact-resistance across each switch blade[ and fuse holder].

(5) [Measure fuse resistance.]

(6) Verify heater operation.

3.8.3.2 Interrupter Switchgear (LDS, LBS)





(4) Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 20


(5) Verify appropriate equipment grounding.

(6) Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.

(7) [Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.]

(8) [Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support.]

(9) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(10) Test interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.

(11) Verify correct phase barrier materials and installation.

(12) Compare switch blade clearances with industry standards .

(13) Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation-resistance tests.

(2) Perform over-potential tests.

(3) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable .

(4) Measure closed contact-resistance across each switch blade[ and fuse holder].

(5) [Measure fuse resistance.]

(6) Verify heater operation.


a. Visual and mechanical inspection




(4) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

(5) Perform all mechanical operational tests on both the circuit breaker and its operating mechanism.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 21


(6) Measure critical distances such as contact gap as recommended by manufacturer.

(7) Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections by calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not][ is] required.

(8) Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform a contact-resistance test.

(2) Verify trip, close, trip-free, and antipump function.

(3) Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device.


(5) Perform vacuum bottle integrity (overpotential) test across each bottle with the breaker in the open position in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not exceed maximum voltage stipulated for this test.

3.8.3.4 Metering and Instrumentation




(3) Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Verify accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale .

(2) Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data.

(3) Verify all instrument multipliers.

(4) Verify that current transformer[ and voltage transformer] secondary circuits are intact.

3.8.3.5 Switchgear Assemblies



(2) Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.


SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 22


(4) Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.

(5) Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing hardware.

(6) Verify that[ fuse and] circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

(7) [Verify that current and potential transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.]

(8) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not][ is] required.

(9) Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.

(10) Clean switchgear.

(11) Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

(12) Verify correct barrier[ and shutter] installation[ and operation].

(13) Exercise all active components.

(14) Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

(15) Verify that vents are clear.

(16) Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer withdrawal disconnects.

(17) Inspect control power transformers.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

(2) Perform overpotential tests.

(3) Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

(4) Perform control wiring performance test .

(5) Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly.

(6) [Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to ensure correct bus phasing from each source.]

(7) Verify operation of heaters.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 23


3.8.3. 6 Transformers


(1) Compare equipment nameplate information with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks.


(4) Verify correct liquid level in tanks.

(5) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

(6) Verify correct equipment grounding.

(7) Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.

(2) Verify that the tap-changer is set at specified ratio.

(3) Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.

(4) Perform transformer test in accordance with JEC 2200 and the transformer manufacture's written instruction.

3.8.3. 7 Current Transformers




(3) Verify correct connection.

(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary circuits and secondary circuit.


(6) Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 24


b. Electrical tests


(2) Perform insulation-resistance test.

(3) Perform a polarity test.

(4) Perform a ratio-verification test.

3.8.3. 8 [Kilowatt Demand Meter][Watthour Meter]





b. Electrical tests

(1) [Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data.]

(2) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.

(3) Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.

3.8.3. 9 Grounding System


(1) Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete (not exceed 5 ohms ). On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected ( not exceed 25 ohms ). Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

(2) Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod ( not exceed 25 ohms ) and grounding system ( not exceed 5 ohm s), indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 25


3.8.4 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 26

Attachment 26 11 16.00 33 Page 1








INSERT 7 DRAWINGS -- End of Section --

SECTION 26 11 16.00 33 Page 27


**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 12 19. 10 ( May 2019) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 26 12 19. 10 ( May 2017)


Ref er ences ar e i n agr eement wi t h UMRL dat ed Apr i l 2019**************************************************************************

SECTION 26 12 19.10

THREE-PHASE, LIQUID-FILLED PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS05/19


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or t hr ee- phase pad- mount ed, l i qui d- f i l l ed t r ansf or mer s of t he dead- f r ont and l i ve- f r ont t ypes f or ext er i or appl i cat i ons.

Adher e t o UFC 1-300-02 Uni f i ed Faci l i t i es Gui de Speci f i cat i ons ( UFGS) For mat St andar d when edi t i ng t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on or pr epar i ng new pr oj ect speci f i cat i on sect i ons. Edi t t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on f or pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement s by addi ng, del et i ng, or r evi s i ng t ext . For br acket ed i t ems, choose appl i cabl e i t em( s) or i nser t appr opr i at e i nf or mat i on.

Remove i nf or mat i on and r equi r ement s not r equi r ed i n r espect i ve pr oj ect , whet her or not br acket s ar e present.

Comment s, suggest i ons and r ecommended changes f or t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on ar e wel come and shoul d be submi t t ed as a Criteria Change Request (CCR) .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer s ( pr oper l y pr ot ect ed wi t h bayonet t ype, oi l - i mmer sed, expul s i on f uses i n ser i es wi t h oi l - i mmer sed, par t i al - r ange, cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses) f or kVA r at i ngs up t o and i ncl udi ng 1500 kVA on 5 kV syst ems and f or kVA r at i ngs up t o and i ncl udi ng 2500 kVA on 15, 25, and 35 kV syst ems.

For vol t ages above 35 kV and i n r at i ngs above t hose

SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 1


pr evi ousl y i ndi cat ed, t hi s speci f i cat i on r equi r es s i gni f i cant modi f i cat i ons and addi t i onal speci f i cat i on sect i ons may need t o be added on t he project.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s f or st andar d st ep- down appl i cat i ons i n ut i l i t y di st r i but i on syst ems. For st ep- up appl i cat i ons ( i . e. sol ar / wi nd gener at i on, et c. ) , t hi s speci f i cat i on r equi r es s i gni f i cant modi f i cat i ons t o addr ess pr oper vol t age desi gnat i ons, over cur r ent and f aul t pr ot ect i on, et c.

The use of pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer s wi t h secondar y cur r ent s exceedi ng 3000 amper es i s di scour aged due t o t he s i ze and quant i t y of secondar y conduct or s. Ther ef or e, t r ansf or mer s above 1000 kVA ser vi ng 208Y/ 120 vol t l oads and t r ansf or mer s above 2500 kVA ser vi ng 480Y/ 277 vol t l oads shoul d be i n a secondar y uni t subst at i on conf i gur at i on.

Avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent l evel and ar c- f l ash ener gy become ext r emel y hazar dous at t he l ar ger kVA si ze t r ansf or mer s. Desi gner shoul d consi der t hese par amet er s and eval uat e mul t i pl e ser vi ce poi nt s.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s, t hi s speci f i cat i on i ncor por at es a " r educed shop dr awi ng submi t t al pr ocess" f or l i s t ed manuf act ur er s who pr evi ousl y sat i sf i ed r educed shop dr awi ng submi t t al pr ocess r equi r ement s. Thi s speci f i cat i on al so i ncl udes uni que r out i ne and ot her t est r equi r ement s, t r ansf or mer l oss cer t i f i cat e, t r ansf or mer t est schedul e, and f i el d qual i t y cont r ol accept ance t est s and r epor t s. The pr epar i ng act i v i t y, NAVFAC LANT, has si gni f i cant exper i ence and t echni cal exper t i se i n t hese ar eas. I f Reach- back suppor t i s desi r ed, f or a speci f i c NAVFAC or Ai r For ce pr oj ect , t he t echni cal r epr esent at i ve ( el ect r i cal engi neer ) edi t i ng t hi s document f or t hat pr oj ect must cont act t he NAVFAC LANT Capi t al I mpr ovement s El ect r i cal Engi neer i ng ( Code CI 44) Of f i ce f or consul t at i on dur i ng t he desi gn st age of t he pr oj ect , pr i or t o i ncl udi ng t he r equi r ement i n t he speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************








**************************************************************************


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For t r ansf or mer s speci f i ed f or t he Honshu ar ea, ut i l i ze speci f i cat i ons sect i on 26 11 16. 00 33. For t r ansf or mer s speci f i ed f or t he Oki nawa ar ea, ut i l i ze speci f i cat i ons sect i on 26 12 19. 10.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng r el at ed gui de speci f i cat i ons f or power di st r i but i on equi pment :--Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS I NSPECTI ON AND TESTI NG--Section 26 11 13. 00 20 PRI MARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS--Section 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNI T SUBSTATI ON--Section 26 12 21 SI NGLE- PHASE PAD- MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS--Section 26 13 00 SF6/ HI GH- FI REPOI NT FLUI D I NSULATED PAD- MOUNTED SWI TCHGEAR--Section 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM--Section 26 23 00 LOW VOLTAGE SWI TCHGEAR--Section 26 24 13 SWI TCHBOARDS--Section 26 27 13. 10 30 ELECTRI C METERS--Section 26 27 14. 00 20 ELECTRI CI TY METERI NG--Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DISTRIBUTION

Do not use t he f ol l owi ng r el at ed gui de speci f i cat i ons except f or Ar my Ci vi l Wor ks pr oj ect s. They have not been uni f i ed.--Section 26 11 14. 00 10 MAI N ELECTRI C SUPPLY STATI ON AND SUBSTATI ON--Section 26 28 00. 00 10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, SWI TCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS--Section 26 22 00. 00 10 480- VOLT STATI ON SERVI CE SWI TCHGEAR AND TRANSFORMERS



**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat i on i s r equi r ed bet ween t hi s sect i on and met er i ng equi pment speci f i cat i on sect i ons. See Section 26 27 14. 00 20 ELECTRI CI TY METERI NG or 26 27 13. 10 30 ELECTRI C METERS f or t r ansf or mer and met er i ng det ai l s, whi ch ar e avai l abl e i n met r i c ( SI ) and U. S. Cust omar y ( I P) syst em di mensi on. Use t hese f i l es t o devel op pr oj ect speci f i c dr awi ngs, including:

Fi l e Name Description

PADMDE1 Thr ee Phase, Ungr ounded or Si ngl e Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em - wi t h Sur ge Ar r est er s

PADMDE2 Thr ee Phase, Ungr ounded or Si ngl e Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em - wi t hout Sur ge Ar r est er s

PADMDE3 Thr ee Phase, Mul t i - Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em ( Del t a- Wye) - wi t h Sur ge Ar r est er s

PADMDE4 Thr ee Phase, Mul t i - Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em ( Del t a- Wye) - wi t hout Sur ge Ar r est er s

PADMDE5 Thr ee Phase, Mul t i - Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em ( Wye- Wye) - wi t h Sur ge Ar r est er s

PADMDE6 Thr ee Phase, Mul t i - Gr ounded Pr i mar y Syst em ( Wye- Wye) - wi t hout Sur ge Ar r est er s

ARCFLASH Ar c Fl ash War ni ng Label

TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHI CSGo t ohttp://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tablesPad- mount ed t r ansf or mer gr aphi cs ar e l ocat ed wi t h Met er i ng Speci f i cat i on UFGS 26 27 14. 00.

Sel ect t he appr opr i at e El ect r i cal . ZI P f i l e( s) and ext r act t he desi r ed det ai l s.

Do not i ncl ude l i s t of det ai l s, or det ai l s t hemsel ves, i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons. I nser t t he appr opr i at e det ai l s on dr awi ngs and modi f y opt i onal and bl ank i t ems. I f speci al f eat ur es ar e r equi r ed, modi f y t r ansf or mer det ai l s as r equi r ed t o i ndi cat e t he act ual r equi r ement s f or each par t i cul ar installation.

**************************************************************************



**************************************************************************NOTE: Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ect drawings:

1. Si ngl e- l i ne di agr am showi ng pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer connect or s, i nser t s, sur ge ar r est er s, swi t ches, f uses, cur r ent t r ansf or mer s wi t h r at i ngs, and met er s as appl i cabl e.


3. Type and number of cabl es, and si ze of conduct or s f or each power c i r cui t .

4. Tr ansf or mer pr i mar y and secondar y vol t ages. ( Use I EEE C57. 12. 00, Tabl e 8, " Desi gnat i on of vol t age r at i ngs of t hr ee- phase wi ndi ngs ( schemat i c r epr esent at i on) " . ) St at e t he pr i mar y vol t age ( nomi nal ) act ual l y i n ser vi ce and not t he vol t age class.

5. Speci al condi t i ons, such as al t i t ude, t emper at ur e and humi di t y; exposur e t o f umes, vapor s, dust , and gases; and sei smi c r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e.

Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.

Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan Industrial Standard (JIS) or Japan Architectural Standard Specification (JASS) for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.



AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.1 ((2014; Errata 2016) Electric Meters - Code for Electricity Metering

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A240/A240M (2018) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM D117 (2018) Standard Guide for Sampling, Test Methods, and Specifications for Electrical Insulating Liquids

ASTM D1535 (2014; R 2018) Standard Practice for Specifying Color by the Munsell System

ASTM D3487 (2016; E2017) Standard Specification for Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus

ASTM D877/D877M (2013) Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes

ASTM D92 (2012a) Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

ASTM D97 (2017b) Standard Test Method for Pour Point of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 386 (2016) Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Rated 2.5 kV through 35 kV

IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Distribution Class Current-Limiting Type Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C57.12.00 (2015) General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment



- Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C57.12.29 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

IEEE C57.12.34 (2015) Standard Requirements for Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers, 10 MVA and Smaller; High Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below; Low Voltage, 15 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below

IEEE C57.12.80 (2010) Standard Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers

IEEE C57.12.90 (2015; Corr 2017) Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.13 (2016) Requirements for Instrument Transformers

IEEE C57.98 (2011) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests

IEEE C62.11 (2012) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)

IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2017; Errata 2017) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems

JAPAN ELECTRICAL SAFETY INSPECTION ASSOCIATIONS

Denki Hoan Kyoukai Japan Standard for Acceptance Testing and Inspections




JIS C 0365 (2007) Protection Against Electric Shock - Common Aspects for Installation and Equipment

JIS C 60364-5-54 (2006) Building Electrical Equipment-Part 5-54: Selection Of Electrical Equipment and Contruction-Grounding Equipment,



Protective Conductor and Protective Bonding Conductor

JIS Z 9101 (2018) Graphical symbols -- Safety colours and safety signs -- Part 1: Design principles for safety signs and safety markings

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

ANSI C12.7 (2014) Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets

NEMA 260 (1996; R 2004) Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public Areas

NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products

NEMA Z535.4 (2011; R 2017) Product Safety Signs and Labels

NEMA/ANSI C12.10 (2011) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters - Safety Standards

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 ) National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment



UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 467 (2013; Reprint Jun 2017) UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude Sect i on 26 08 00 APPARATUS I NSPECTI ON AND TESTI NG on al l pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng hi gh and extra-high vol t age and speci al i zed power di st r i but i on equi pment .

**************************************************************************

Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary .

1.4 SUBMITTALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Revi ew Submi t t al Descr i pt i on ( SD) def i ni t i ons i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES and edi t t he f ol l owi ng l i s t t o r ef l ect onl y t he submi t t al s r equi r ed f or t he pr oj ect .

The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G. " Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a " G" t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .

For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y. Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy, Ai r For ce, and NASA pr oj ect s.

The " S" f ol l owi ng a submi t t al i t em i ndi cat es t hat t he submi t t al i s r equi r ed f or t he Sust ai nabi l i t y eNot ebook t o f ul f i l l f eder al l y mandat ed sust ai nabl e r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 29 SUSTAI NABI LI TY REPORTI NG. Locat e t he " S" submi t t al under t he SD number t hat best descr i bes t he



submi t t al i t em.

Choose t he f i r st br acket ed i t em f or Navy, Ai r For ce and NASA pr oj ect s, or choose t he second br acket ed i t em f or Ar my pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pad-mounted Transformer Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Pad-mounted Transformers ;

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance Checks and Tests ;

SD-07 Certificates

Transformer Efficiencies ;


Transformer Test Schedule ;

Pad-mounted Transformer Design Tests ;

Pad-mounted Transformer Routine and Other Tests ;

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Transformer(s) , Data Package 5;

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he br acket ed opt i on bel ow on Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s wher e " r each- back suppor t " has al r eady been coor di nat ed wi t h NAVFAC LANT per t he 3r d i nt r oduct or y Techni cal Not e. Add appr opr i at e i nf or mat i on i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES t o coor di nat e wi t h t he speci al requirements.

**************************************************************************

[ 1.4.1 Government Submittal Review

[Code CI44, NAVFAC LANT, Naval Facilities Engineering Command][_____] will review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval.



] 1.4.2 Reduced Submittal Requirements

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude r educed submi t t al r equi r ement s onl y i f US manuf act ur ed t r ansf or mer wi l l be ut i l i zed. For exampl e, US manuf act ur ed t r ansf or mer s may be pr ovi ded f or pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Oki nawa, Japan.

**************************************************************************

Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by Easton's Cooper Power Series Transformers in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in Dyersburg, TN; or by Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the entire submittal package requirements of this contract. Instead, submit the following items:

a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the manufacturer will meet the technical requirements of this specification.

b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item a).

c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item b).

**************************************************************************NOTE: The desi gner i s r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng pr oper set t i ngs f or secondar y over - cur r ent devi ce( s) t o ensur e pr oper pr ot ect i on of equi pment and coor di nat i on wi t h t r ansf or mer hi gh si de f uses. I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng opt i on f or t r ansf or mer s ser vi ng secondar y over - cur r ent devi ces cont ai ni ng adj ust abl e t r i ps.

**************************************************************************

[ d. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in electronic format suitable for import or updating into the [EasyPower] [SKM PowerTools for Windows] [_____] computer program of the transformer high side fuses (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item e).

] e. Provide transformer test schedule and routine and other tests required by submittal item "SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports".

f. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test Reports".

g. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item "SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".


1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

**************************************************************************Not e: Del et e br acket ed met er i ng i nf or mat i on f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s when separ at e met er i ng speci f i cat i on i s used. May st i l l need f or Ar my and



NASA pr oj ect s unt i l met er i ng speci f i cat i on i s unified.

**************************************************************************

Include the following as a minimum:

a. An outline drawing, including front, top, and side views.

b. IEEE nameplate data.

c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams[ with terminals identified of watthour meter and current transformers].

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es)[, current transformers, meters, and fuses].

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng opt i on f or t r ansf or mer s ser vi ng secondar y over - cur r ent devi ces cont ai ni ng adj ust abl e t r i ps.

**************************************************************************

[ e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in electronic format suitable for import or updating into the [EasyPower] [SKM PowerTools for Windows] [_____] computer program of the transformer high side fuses.

] 1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, except of NFPA 70 when more stringent requirements are specified or indicated, as though the word "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.






1.5.3.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable



if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.5.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date


1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e br acket ed i nf or mat i on f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s when separ at e met er i ng speci f i cat i on i s used. May st i l l need f or Ar my and NASA pr oj ect s unt i l met er i ng speci f i cat i on i s uni f i ed.

**************************************************************************

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses

[ f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block

] g. Actual nameplate diagram

h. Date of purchase

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and related accessories are specified in[ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION,][ Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,][ and] Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Accor di ng t o I EEE 386, 200 amper e separ abl e i nsul at ed connect or s nor mal l y used on dead- f r ont pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer s have bot h a f aul t c l osur e and a shor t - t i me cur r ent r at i ng of 10, 000 amper es. Ther ef or e, f r om a saf et y st andpoi nt , dead- f r ont conf i gur at i ons whi ch ut i l i ze t hese connect or s shoul d



onl y be used at syst em l ocat i ons whi ch have avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent s of l ess t han 10, 000 r ms symmet r i cal amper es.

Thi s speci f i cat i on does not addr ess t he mat er i al s used f or t he wi ndi ng ( copper ver sus al umi num) and i t i s assumed t hat t he manuf act ur er wi l l pr ovi de t hei r st andar d pr oduct wi t h r espect t o t he wi ndi ng const r uct i on, based on t he cost of mat er i al s at t he t i me of or der accept ance. No f ai l ur e dat a has been obt ai ned i ndi cat i ng t hat copper wi ndi ngs have a l onger l i f e t han al umi num wi ndi ngs. I f copper wi ndi ngs ar e speci f i ed, t he cost i ncr ease f or t hr ee- phase di st r i but i on t r ansf or mer s has r ecent l y been about 15 per cent . Do NOT speci f y wi ndi ng materials.

**************************************************************************

IEEE C57.12.34 , IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein. Submit manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with the transformer.

2.2.1 Compartments

Provide high- and low-voltage compartments separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments. Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and three-point latching.

2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cur r ent pol i cy i s t o use oi l - i mmer sed f uses i n ser i es wi t h cur r ent l i mi t i ng f uses t o achi eve bet t er pr ot ect i on and obt ai n l i f e cycl e cost benefits.

For 15 kV and 25 kV, 200 A bushi ngs, sel ect bushi ng wel l s and bushi ng wel l i nser t s. For 15 kV and 25 kV, 600 A bushi ngs and f or 35 kV bushi ngs, sel ect one- pi ece bushi ngs.

Do not pr ovi de st andof f bushi ngs unl ess t hi s t r ansf or mer i s t he onl y dead- f r ont t r ansf or mer on t he base. The Publ i c Wor ks Depar t ment nor mal l y car r i es st andof f bushi ngs i n t hei r vehi c l es. Pr ovi de pr ot ect i ve caps when pr ovi di ng st andof f bushi ngs and t o cover unused bushi ng wel l i nser t s when not pr ovi di ng sur ge ar r est er s.

Coor di nat e l ead- i n par agr aph wi t h br acket ed opt i ons below.

Choose mi ni mum hi gh- vol t age compar t ment di mensi ons f or t r ansf or mer s used i n l oop f eed appl i cat i ons t o accommodat e i nst al l at i on of l oop f eed, f eed- t hr ough i nser t s, and sur ge ar r est er s.

NOTE: For syst ems wi t h a f aul t capabi l i t y gr eat er



t han 10, 000 amps, f or appl i cat i ons ut i l i z i ng l oop f eed l oad- br eak swi t ches, or when t he pr i mar y cabl e s i ze i s gr eat er t han 100 sqmm, use 600A separ abl e i nsul at ed dead- br eak connect or s.

**************************************************************************

High-voltage compartment contains: the incoming line, insulated high-voltage [load-break ][dead-break ]connectors, [bushing well inserts,][ feed-thru inserts,] six high-voltage [bushing wells][one-piece bushings] configured for loop feed application, load-break switch handle(s), [access to oil-immersed bayonet fuses,][ dead-front surge arresters,] tap changer handle, connector parking stands[ with insulated standoff bushings],[ protective caps,] and ground pad.

[ Minimum high-voltage compartment dimensions: IEEE C57.12.34 , Figures 16 and 17.

][ a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386 , rated [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector must have a steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

][ b. Insulated high-voltage dead-break connectors: IEEE 386 , rated [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Current rating: 600 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 25,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector must have a [200 ampere bushing interface for surge arresters,] steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de bushi ng wel l i nser t s and f eed- t hr ough i nser t s onl y on l oad- br eak appl i cat i ons, not on dead-break.

**************************************************************************

][ c. Bushing well inserts[ and feed-thru inserts]: IEEE 386 , 200 amperes, [15][25] kV Class. Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise.[ Provide feed-thru inserts as indicated.]

][ d. One-piece bushings: IEEE 386 , [200][600] amperes, [15][25][35][_____] kV Class.

] e. Load-break switch

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose bet ween l oad- br eak r adi al - f eed swi t ch and l oad- br eak l oop f eed swi t ches.

Ther e ar e t hr ee t ypes of l oad- br eak swi t ches: t wo- , t hr ee- , and f our - posi t i on. UFC 3- 550- 01 r ecogni zes onl y t wo- posi t i on l oad- br eak swi t ch. Two- posi t i on swi t ch i s hot st i ck oper abl e and r equi r es mi ni mum i nput t or que t o oper at e.

**************************************************************************



[ Radial-feed two-position oil-immersed type rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handle in the high-voltage compartment.

][ Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing. Each switch must be rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches must be as follows:

ARRANGEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer

X X X

2 Transformer connected to Line A only

X X X

3 Transformer connected to Line Bonly

X X X

4 Transformer open and loop closed

X X X

5 Transformer open and loop open

X X X

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de bayonet t ype f uses f or al l t r ansf or mer appl i cat i ons 38 kV and bel ow.

**************************************************************************

][ f. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. The bayonet fuse links sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. Include an oil retention valve inside the bayonet assembly housing, which closes when the fuse holder is removed, and an external drip shield to minimize oil spills. Display a warning label adjacent to the bayonet fuse(s) cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the transformer has been de-energized and the tank pressure has been released.



Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.

**************************************************************************NOTE: For t r ansf or mer s wi t h l oop- f eed sect i onal i zer swi t chi ng, del et e t he br acket ed opt i on r egar di ng pl acement of cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses.

**************************************************************************

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47 ; 50,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.[ Connect current-limiting fuses ahead of the radial-feed load-break switch.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de bushi ng- mount ed el bow t ype ar r est er s at t he ends of al l r adi al s and i n nor mal l y open l ocat i ons i n l oops. Pr ovi de ar r est er s f or al l vol t age l evel s above 5 kV.

**************************************************************************

][ g. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11 , rated [3][6][9][10][12][15][18][21][24][27][30][36][_____] kV, fully shielded, dead-front, metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-graded gap.[ Provide three arresters for radial feed circuits.][ Provide [three][six] arresters for loop feed circuits.]

] h. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing.[ Provide insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized high-voltage connectors on parking stands.]

[ i. Protective caps: IEEE 386 , [200][600] amperes, [15][25][35][_____] kV Class. Provide insulated protective caps (not shipping caps) for insulating and sealing out moisture from unused bushings.

] [ 2.2.1.2 High Voltage, Live-Front

**************************************************************************NOTE: Obt ai n appr oval f r om t he Aut hor i t y Havi ng Jur i sdi ct i on ( AHJ) when l i ve- f r ont i s sel ect ed and del et e t he above par agr aphs on dead- f r ont .

**************************************************************************

High-voltage compartment contains: the incoming line, transformer high-voltage bushings, load-break switch handle(s),[ access to oil-immersed bayonet fuses,][ surge arresters,] tap changer handle, insulated phase barriers, and ground pad.

a. Cable terminators: Provide as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

b. Load-break switch

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose bet ween l oad- br eak r adi al - f eed swi t ch and l oad- br eak l oop f eed swi t ches.

**************************************************************************

[ Radial-feed two-position oil-immersed type rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current



rating and load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handle in the high-voltage compartment.

][ Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing. Each switch must be rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches must be as follows:

ARRANGEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer

X X X

2 Transformer connected to Line A only

X X X

3 Transformer connected to Line B only

X X X

4 Transformer open and loop closed

X X X

5 Transformer open and loop open

X X X

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de bayonet t ype f uses f or al l t r ansf or mer appl i cat i ons 38 kV and bel ow.

**************************************************************************

][ c. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. The bayonet fuse links sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. Include an oil retention valve inside the bayonet assembly housing, which closes when the fuse holder is removed, and an external drip shield to minimize oil spills. Display a warning label adjacent to the bayonet fuse(s) cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the transformer has been de-energized and the tank pressure has been released.

Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.



**************************************************************************NOTE: For t r ansf or mer s wi t h l oop- f eed sect i onal i zer swi t chi ng, del et e t he br acket ed opt i on r egar di ng pl acement of cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses.

**************************************************************************

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47 ; 50,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.[ Connect current-limiting fuses ahead of the radial-feed load-break switch.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de ar r est er s at t he ends of al l r adi al s and i n nor mal l y open l ocat i ons i n l oops. Pr ovi de ar r est er s f or al l vol t age l evel s above 5 kV.

**************************************************************************

][ d. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11 , rated [3][6][9][10][12][15][18][21][24][27][30][36][_____] kV.[ Provide three arresters for radial feed circuits.][ Provide [three][six] arresters for loop feed circuits.]

] e. Insulated phase barriers: NEMA LI 1 , Type GPO-3, 6.35 mm minimum thickness. Provide vertical barriers between the high-voltage bushings and a single horizontal barrier above the high-voltage bushings.

] 2.2.1.3 Low Voltage

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nst al l at i on of c i r cui t br eaker s i n t he secondar y compar t ment i s not r ecogni zed by I EEE st andar ds, and l i mi t s accessi bi l i t y by cover i ng l ugs, gages, and accessor i es. Do not use.

**************************************************************************

Low-voltage compartment contains: low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Include the following accessories: drain valve with sampler device, fill plug, pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum gage, and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Many Act i v i t i es have, or ar e i n t he pr ocess of , conver t i ng t o basewi de met er i ng syst ems. A uni f i ed met er i ng speci f i cat i on i s under devel opment t o r epl ace t he met er i ng r equi r ement s i n t hi s sect i on.

Use t he f i r st br acket ed met er i ng par agr aph bel ow f or Navy pr oj ect s and possi bl y f or Ai r For ce pr oj ect s. Navy pr oj ect s r equi r e use of sect i on 26 27 14. 00 20 ELECTRI CI TY METERI NG. Ai r For ce pr oj ect s may r equi r e use of sect i on 26 27 13. 10 30 ELECTRI C METERS.

Del et e al l ot her par agr aphs f or t he Ai r For ce and



Navy pr oj ect s.

Coor di nat e wi t h t he Act i v i t y and pr ovi de speci f i c r equi r ement s " t o mat ch exi st i ng syst ems" when necessar y. I f speci f y i ng pr opr i et ar y pr oduct s, i nsur e t hat appr opr i at e " Just i f i cat i on and Aut hor i zat i on ( J & A) " document at i on has been obt ai ned by pr oj ect manager and " pr opr i et ar y l anguage r equi r ement s" have been added t o Di v i s i on 1 as wel l as t o t hi s sect i on of t he speci f i cat i ons.

I f t her e ar e any component s ( such as met er s, housi ng, or cur r ent t r ansf or mer s) t hat wi l l be Gover nment Fur ni shed Cont r act or I nst al l ed ( GFCI ) , or Gover nment Fur ni shed Gover nment I nst al l ed ( GFGI ) , edi t Di v i s i on 1 and t hi s speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************

[ b. Metering: Provide as specified in Section [ 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING][ 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS].

][ c. Metering: NEMA/ANSI C12.10 . Provide a socket-mounted electronic programmable outdoor watthour meter, surface mounted flush against the side of the low-voltage compartment as indicated. [Metering shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS)Electric Meter Specifications.] Program the meter at the factory or in the field. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Coordinate the meter to system requirements.

**************************************************************************NOTE: When Sect i on 23 09 00 I NSTRUMENTATI ON AND CONTROL FOR HVAC i s used, coor di nat e met er r equi r ement s. For m 9S, i n t ext bel ow, i s f or t hr ee- phase, f our - wi r e wye syst ems, f or ot her syst em conf i gur at i ons, desi gner must det er mi ne t he appr opr i at e f or m desi gnat i on.

**************************************************************************

(1) Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire, [200Y/100] [208Y/120] [440Y/254][420Y/242] [480Y/277] volt system with 3 current transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS)[ as specified in Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC].

(2) Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

(3) Class: 20; Form: [9S][_____]; Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent; Finish: Class II

(4) Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal.

(5) Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type

(6) Demand Register:



(a) Provide solid state

(b) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.

(c) Demand interval length: programmed for [15][30][60] minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

(7) Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the secondary compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

(8) Socket: ANSI C12.7 . [Meter socket shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS) Electric Meter Specifications.] Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket having automatic circuit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible with requirements of the meter. Cover unused hub openings with blank hub plates. Paint box [Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green][Munsell 5BG7.0/0.4 sky gray (ANSI 70)] [_____] to match the pad-mounted transformer to which the box-mounted socket is attached. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

(9) Current transformers: IEEE C57.13 . Provide butyl-molded window type current transformers with 600-volt insulation, 10 kV BIL and mount on the low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with hook-on-ammeters. Provide three current transformers per power transformer with characteristics listed in the following table.

**************************************************************************NOTE: The f ol l owi ng gui del i nes f or speci f y i ng cur r ent t r ansf or mer s ar e based on t he st andar d cur r ent t r ansf or mer pr i mar y r at i ng whi ch i s j ust bel ow t he f ul l l oad cur r ent of t he power t r ansf or mer .

1. Sel ect t he appr opr i at e cur r ent t r ansf or mer ( CT) r at i o, cont i nuous- t her mal - cur r ent r at i ng f act or ( RF) at 30 degr ees C and ANSI Met er i ng Accur acy Cl ass val ues based on t r ansf or mer kVA si ze and secondar y vol t age. Exampl e: f or a 500 kVA t r ansf or mer at 208 vol t s - sel ect 1200/ 5, 1. 5, 0. 3 - B- 0. 5.

VOLTS

208 240

kVA CT Rat i o RF Met er Cl ass CT Rat i o RF Met er Cl ass

75 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

112.5 300/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1



VOLTS

208 240


150 400/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2 300/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

225 600/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 400/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

300 800/5 2.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 600/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

500 1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

750 2000/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8 1500/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 9

VOLTS

480 600


75 200/5, 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

112.5 200/5, 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

150 200/5, 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

225 200/5, 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

300 300/5, 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2 200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

500 600/5, 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 400/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

750 800/5, 2.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 600/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1000 1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5 800/5 2.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1500 1500/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 9 1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

2000 2000/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8 1500/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 9

2500 3000/5 1.33 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8 2000/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8

2. I ncor por at e t he appr opr i at e val ues i n t abl e below.

**************************************************************************

kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

[500] [208Y/120] [1200/5] [1.5] [0.3 thru B-0.5]



kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

[750] [480Y/277] [ 800/5] [2.0] [0.3 thru B-0.5]

] 2.2.2 Transformer

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng gui del i nes f or speci f y i ng t r ansf or mer s and i nsul at i ng l i qui ds.

1. On Navy pr oj ect s use of bi odegr adabl e l ess- f l ammabl e l i qui d i s r equi r ed.

For ot her pr oj ect s, bi odegr adabl e l ess- f l ammabl e l i qui d and mi ner al oi l ar e per mi t t ed. Pr evi ousl y t he use of mi ner al oi l - f i l l ed t r ansf or mer s was r ecommended wher ever possi bl e. Cur r ent l y, bi odegr adabl e l ess- f l ammabl e t r ansf or mer l i qui ds t hat i mpr ove t r ansf or mer oper at i ng char act er i st i cs ar e avai l abl e wi t h l i t t l e, i f any pr emi um cost . Thi s r equi r ement i s suppor t ed by UFC 3- 600- 01, " Fi r e Pr ot ect i on Engi neer i ng f or Faci l i t i es" , i dent i f i es bui l di ng and equi pment separ at i on di st ances based on i nsul at i ng l i qui d t ype. Mi ner al oi l i s mor e r est r i ct i ve t han l ess- f l ammabl e l i qui d. For exampl e, a 1500 kVA t r ansf or mer cont ai ni ng 600 gal l ons of l ess- f l ammabl e l i qui d r equi r es a bui l di ng separ at i on di st ance of 1. 5 met er s when t he const r uct i on i s f i r e- r esi st ant or non- combust i bl e. An equal l y s i zed mi ner al oi l - f i l l ed t r ansf or mer requires 4. 6 met er s and 7. 6 met er s of separ at i on f or f i r e- r esi st ant and non- combust i bl e const r uct i on, r espect i vel y. Do not speci f y s i l i cone- f i l l ed transformers.

2. Use I EEE C57. 12. 00, Tabl e 8 - Desi gnat i on of vol t age r at i ngs of t hr ee- phase wi ndi ngs, such as " 4160 V - 480Y / 277 V" . Connect i ons must be Del t a- Gr dY conf i gur at i on f or t hr ee phase syst ems. Ot her syst em connect i ons r equi r e wai ver f r om UFC 3- 550- 01 cr i t er i a.

3. I ncl ude br acket ed opt i on t o di spl ay t r ansf or mer r at i ng on encl osur e when di r ect ed by Act i v i t y. For NASA pr oj ect s onl y, i ncl ude 3 i nch yel l ow l et t er i ng br acket ed opt i ons.

4. Del et e ( 2) of i t em g r egar di ng r emovabl e gr ound st r ap i f t r ansf or mer secondar y wi ndi ng i s del t a t ype.

**************************************************************************

a. Less-flammable [bio-based] liquid-insulated[ or oil-insulated], two winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.

b. Transformer rated [_____] kVA.

c. Transformer voltage ratings: [_____] V [Delta][_____] - [_____] V



[GrdY][_____].[ For GrdY - GrdY transformers, provide transformer with five-legged core design for third harmonic suppression.]

d. Tap changer: externally operated, manual type for changing tap setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Indicate which tap setting is in use, clearly visible when the compartment is opened.

e. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C:

2.50 for units rated 75kVA and below2.87 for units rated 112.5kVA to 300kVA4.03 for 500kVA rated units5.32 for units rated 750kVA and above

f. Comply with the following audible sound level limits:

kVA DECIBELS(MAX

75 51

112.5 55

150 55

225 55

300 55

500 56

750 57

1000 58

1500 60

2000 61

2500 62

g. Include:

(1) Lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base, with base construction suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction.

[ (2) An insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.

] (3) Provide transformer top with an access handhole.

[ (4) kVA rating conspicuously displayed [using 75 mm high yellow letters ]on its enclosure.



] 2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

**************************************************************************NOTE: Tr ansf or mer l osses and ef f i c i ency r equi r ement s have been modi f i ed i nt o t he t abl e i ncl uded wi t hi n t he speci f i cat i on and t he pr evi ous Navy l oss t abl es have been del et ed.

10 CFR 431, Subpar t K i s a r esul t of t he Ener gy Pol i cy and Conser vat i on Act ( EPACT) of 2005 and i s t he " mi ni mum" i ndust r y st andar d f or di st r i but i on t r ansf or mer s manuf act ur ed on or af t er Januar y 1, 2016.

**************************************************************************

Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no-load and load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project. Reference no-load losses (NLL) at 20 degrees C. Reference load losses (LL) at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent of the nameplate load. The transformer is not acceptable if the calculated transformer efficiency is less than the efficiency indicated in the "KVA / Efficiency" table below. The table is based on requirements contained within 10 CFR 431 , Subpart K. Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance.

kVA EFFICIENCY (percent)

15 98.65

30 98.83

45 98.92

75 99.03

112.5 99.11

150 99.16

225 99.23

300 99.27

500 99.35

750 99.40

1000 99.43

1500 99.48

2000 99.51

2500 99.53



above 2500 99.54

2.2.3 Insulating Liquid

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nsul at i ng l i qui d pr ef er ence f or Kadena Ai r Base i n Oki nawa i s l ess- f l ammabl e i nsul at i ng f l ui d.

**************************************************************************

a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV tested per ASTM D877/D877M. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.

Provide a fluid that is a biodegradable, electrical insulating, and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" with the following properties:

(1) Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C

(2) Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075 , ultimately biodegradable as designated by EPA.

(3) Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203 , zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012 , pass

[ b. Mineral oil: ASTM D3487, Type II, tested in accordance with ASTM D117. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "Type II mineral oil" on the nameplate.

] 2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates

Provide nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this section. Include the following

information on the transformer nameplate: "PCB CONTENT LESS THAN 0.1 PPM AT TIME OF MANUFACTURE."

2.2.4 Corrosion Protection

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use st ai nl ess st eel bases and cabi net s f or most appl i cat i ons. I n host i l e envi r onment s, t he addi t i onal cost of t ot al l y st ai nl ess st eel t anks and met er i ng encl osur es may be j ust i f i ed. Manuf act ur er ' s st andar d const r uct i on mat er i al i s accept abl e onl y i n noncoast al and noncor r osi ve envi r onment s. Choose t he second br acket ed opt i on f or host i l e envi r onment s.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide corrosion resistant bases and cabinets of transformers, fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M , Type 304 or 304L. Base includes any part of pad-mounted transformer that is within 75 mm of concrete pad.



][ Provide entire transformer assembly, including tank and radiator, base, enclosure, and metering enclosure fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M , Type 304 or 304L. Form enclosure of stainless steel sheets. The optional use of aluminum is permitted for the metering enclosure.

] Paint entire transformer assembly [Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green][Munsell 5BG7.0/0.4 sky gray (ANSI 70)][_____], with paint coating system complying with IEEE C57.12.28 [and IEEE C57.12.29 ]regardless of base, cabinet, and tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts in accordance with NEMA Z535.4 and NEMA 260.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 , such as for pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning labels (decals, Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal) on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s)with nominal dimensions of 178 by 255 mm with the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 50 mm high letters. Include the work "WARNING" in white letters on an orange background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters on a white background.

[ b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence. Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 355 by 255 mm with the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of nominal 75 mm high white letters on an orange and black field.

] 2.4 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Japan st andar ds cur r ent l y do not i ncl ude ar c f l ash r at i ngs f or pr ot ect i ve equi pment . Pr ovi de gener al war ni ng l abel t o compl y wi t h NFPA 70E.

**************************************************************************

Provide warning label of potential electrical arc flash hazards for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers in accordance with NFPA 70E or JIS Z 9101 .


UL 467 or JIS C 60364-5-54 . Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

[ 2.6 PADLOCKS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner must assur e t hat Sect i on 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE i s i ncl uded and i s edi t ed t o i ncl ude padlocks.

Do not use t hi s par agr aph f or Navy and Ai r For ce projects.



**************************************************************************

Provide padlocks for pad-mounted equipment[ and for each fence gate], keyed [alike][as directed by the Contracting Officer]. Comply with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

] 2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f i r st br acket ed par agr aph when pr oj ect i ncl udes a concr et e sect i on i n Di v i s i on 03; ot her wi se, t he second br acket ed par agr aph may be used. Coor di nat e r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 03 30 00 CAST- I N- PLACE CONCRETE.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts rated for 30 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise. Conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: I f concr et e r equi r ement s ar e det ai l ed and no cast - i n- pl ace sect i on i s t o be i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on, r ef er t o Sect i on 03 30 00 CAST- I N- PLACE CONCRETE and sel ect such por t i ons as needed t o pr ovi de compl et e r equi r ement s i n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ement s bel ow.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide concrete associated with electrical work as follows:

a. Composed of fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, portland cement, and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable mixture.

b. Fine aggregate: hard, dense, durable, clean, and uncoated sand.

c. Coarse aggregate: reasonably well graded from 4.75 mm to 25 mm .

d. Fine and coarse aggregates: free from injurious amounts of dirt, vegetable matter, soft fragments or other deleterious substances.

e. Water: fresh, clean, and free from salts, alkali, organic matter, and other impurities.

f. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts: 30 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise.

g. Slump: Less than 100 mm . Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.

h. Exposed, unformed concrete surfaces: smooth, wood float finish.

i. Concrete must be cured for a period of not less than 7 days, and concrete made with high early strength portland cement must be repaired by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective areas with cement mortar as directed by the Contracting Officer.



j. Air entrain concrete exposed to weather using an air-entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C260/C260M.

k. Air content: between 4 and 6 percent.

] 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.8.1 Transformer Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Any/all associated costs related to Government personnel travel to witness testing will be solely at the government's expense. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

a. Test Instrument Calibration

(1) Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

(2) Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

(3) Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

(4) Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

(5) Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

(6) Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.8.2 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00 , and IEEE C57.12.90 . Section 5.1.2 in IEEE C57.12.80 states that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus of basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for[ each of] the specified transformer(s), with design tests performed prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests: certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.

b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature



rise test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA, the same cooling type (KNAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.

c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning impulse tests includes the primary windings only of that transformer.

(1) IEEE C57.12.90 , paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test Procedures," and IEEE C57.98 .

(2) State test voltage levels.

(3) Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of digitized waveforms with test report.

d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34 .

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified.

f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer specified.

2.8.3 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00 . Routine and other tests: performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on[ each of] the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site. Required tests and testing sequence as follows:

a. Phase relation

b. Ratio

c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage

e. Dielectric

(1) Impulse

(2) Applied voltage

(3) Induced voltage

f. Leak



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2 , JIS C 0365 , NFPA 70 , and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 , except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding [25][_____] ohms.


Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ensur e pl ans show t he secondar y neut r al gr oundi ng conduct or s i zed i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 70 and t he pr i mar y neut r al gr oundi ng conduct or when r equi r ed. Ensur e t he CADD det ai l used mat ches how t hi s par agr aph i s edi t ed. Tr ansf or mer i s t o have a gr ound r i ng and t he nor mal number of gr ound r ods i s ei t her f our or t wo. The one gr ound r od opt i on shoul d onl y be chosen i f r equi r ed by l ocal i nst al l at i on r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

Provide a ground ring around the transformer with [ 60][] sqmm bare copper.[ Provide four ground rods in the ground ring, one per corner.][ Provide two ground rods in the ground ring at opposite corners.][ Provide one ground rod in the ground ring with the ground rod located in the transformer cabinet.] Install the ground rods at least 3000 mm apart from each other. Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Install exothermic welds and compression connectors as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.


UL 467 or JIS C 60364-5-54 , except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as



specified herein.

[ 3.3.1 Meters and Current Transformers

**************************************************************************Not e: Del et e t hi s par agr aph f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s, t hi s i nf or mat i on i s cover ed i n t hei r associ at ed met er i ng speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

ANSI C12.1 .

] 3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

[ 3.5 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng opt i on when pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer i s guar ded by a f ence.

**************************************************************************

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 9 meters apart.

] 3.6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mount i ng s l ab connect i ons may have t o be gi ven i n det ai l dependi ng on t he r equi r ement s f or t he sei smi c zone i n whi ch t he r equi r ement i s l ocat ed. I ncl ude const r uct i on r equi r ement s f or concr et e s l ab onl y i f s l ab i s not det ai l ed on dr awi ngs. Do not pr ovi de cur bs or r ai sed edges ar ound l i qui d f i l l ed t r ansf or mer s unl ess speci f i cal l y appr oved by Techni cal Pr oponent ( l i nk pr ovi ded i n t he t echni cal not e at t he begi nni ng of t hi s sect i on) .

**************************************************************************

Mount transformer on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 200 mm thick, reinforced with a 152 by 152 mm MW19 by MW19 mesh placed uniformly 100 mm from the top of the slab.

b. Place slab on a 150 mm thick, well-compacted gravel base.

c. Install slab such that top of concrete slab is approximately 100 mm above the finished grade with gradual slope for drainage.

d. Provide edges above grade with 15 mm chamfer.

e. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 200 mm beyond the equipment.



Stub up conduits, with bushings, 50 mm into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.

3.6.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f i r st br acket ed opt i on when pr oj ect i ncl udes a concr et e sect i on i n Di v i s i on 03; ot her wi se, t he second br acket ed opt i on may be used.

**************************************************************************

Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the requirements of[ Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE].

[ 3.6.2 Sealing

**************************************************************************NOTE: Requi r e seal i ng of cabl e wel l s ( wi ndows) i n t he concr et e pad i f r odent i nt r usi on i s a pr obl em.

**************************************************************************

When the installation is complete, seal all entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing method. Provide seals of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.

] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.7.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

A First Class Construction Electric Management Engineer (1 Kyu Dekikouji Sekou Kanrigishi) shall p erform acceptance checks and testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS or Denki Hoan Kyoukai and MLIT DSKKS. Submit reports, including acceptance criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values" or Denki Hoan Kyoukai "Test Report" .

3.7.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers



(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks.


(4) Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

(5) Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.

(6) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,



or performing thermographic survey.

(7) Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.

(8) Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed transformers.

(9) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

(10) Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.

[ (11) Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

] b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.

(2) Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he br acket ed opt i on f or addi t i onal f i el d el ect r i cal t est s f or NASA pr oj ect s onl y.

**************************************************************************

[ (3) Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index. Verify that the tap changer is set at the specified ratio.

(4) Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

(5) Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data.

(6) Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.

(7) Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if applicable.

(8) Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following: Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on all silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation factor.

(9) Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating liquid.

] [ 3.7.1.2 Current Transformers

**************************************************************************



Not e: Del et e br acket ed opt i onal par agr aphs f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s. Thi s i nf or mat i on i s cover ed i n t hei r associ at ed met er i ng speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************





(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit wiring.

(5) Verify the unit is clean.


(7) Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

(8) Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation.

(9) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.

b. Electrical tests


(2) Perform insulation-resistance test.

(3) Perform a polarity test.

(4) Perform a ratio-verification test.

][ 3.7.1.3 Watthour Meter

**************************************************************************

Not e: Del et e br acket ed opt i onal par agr aphs f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s. Thi s i nf or mat i on i s cover ed i n t hei r associ at ed met er i ng speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************







b. Electrical tests


(2) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable .

(3) Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.

] 3.7.1.4 Grounding System



b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

(2) Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

[ 3.7.1.5 Surge Arresters, High - and Extra- High-Voltage




(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

(4) Verify the arresters are clean.


(6) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually



attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.

b. Electrical tests


(2) Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-ground.

(3) Test grounding connection.

] 3.7.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, notify the Contracting Officer 5 working days in advance of the dates and times of checking and testing.

-- End of Section --






26 20 00 Interior Distribution System**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 20 00 ( Febr uar y 2014) Change 1 - 08/ 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 26 20 00 ( August 2008)



SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM02/14


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or t he pr ocur ement , i nst al l at i on, and t est i ng of el ect r i cal wi r i ng syst ems f or const r uct i on pr oj ect s.

Tel ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng i s cover ed i n Sect i on 27 10 00, BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM. These wi r i ng syst ems pr i mar i l y i nvol ve vol t ages of 1, 000 vol t s and l ess and mai nl y i nvol ve i nt er i or syst ems. When vol t ages gr eat er t han 1, 000 vol t s ar e br ought i nt o a f aci l i t y , consul t and useSection 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS; Sect i on26 12 21 SI NGLE- PHASE PAD- MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS; and Section 33 71 01, OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DI STRI BUTI ON. Al so consul t Sect i on 33 71 02, UNDERGROUND ELECTRI CAL DI STRI BUTI ON and Sect i on 26 11 14. 00 10 MAI N ELECTRI C SUPPLY STATI ON AND SUBSTATI ON. Requi r ement s f or mat er i al s and pr ocedur es f or speci al or unusual desi gn shoul d be added as necessar y t o f i t speci f i c pr oj ect s.


Remove i nf or mat i on and r equi r ement s not r equi r ed i n

SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1


r espect i ve pr oj ect , whet her or not br acket s ar e present.


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ect drawings:

1. Locat i on of equi pment

2. Si ngl e- l i ne di agr ams el evat i ons, l i mi t i ng di mensi ons, and equi pment r at i ngs whi ch ar e not cover ed i n t he speci f i cat i ons

3. Remot e i ndi cat i ng or cont r ol r equi r ement s.**************************************************************************






**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e,



and t i t l e. Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es. Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan Industrial Standard (JIS), Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (MLIT), Japan Electrical Safety Inspection Associations, Japanese Electrotechnical Committee (JEC) or Japan Wire Industry Association (JCS) standards for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.




JEC 2200 (2015) Transformer




JIS C 1210 (1979) General Rules for Electricity Meters

JIS C 2336 (2012) Pressure-sensitive polyvinyl chloride tapes for electrical purposes

JIS C 2338 (2012) Polyester adhesive tape for electrical insulation

JIS C 2805 (2010) Crimp terminal for copper wire

JIS C 2806 (2003) Bare crimping sleeve for copper wire

JIS C 2810 (1995) General rules on non-separable type wire connectors for interior wiring

JIS C 3101 (1994) Hard-drawn copper wires for electrical purposes



JIS C 3105 (1994) Hard-drawn copper stranded conductors

JIS C 3341 (2000) Polyvinyl chloride insulated drop service wires

JIS C 3401 (2002) Control Cables

JIS C 3605 (R2002) 600 V Polyethylene Insulated Cables, Type CV

JIS C 3606 (R2003) High-Voltage Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated Cables, Type CV or CE

JIS C 3612 (2002) 600V Flame Retardant Polyethylene Insulated Wires

JIS C 4212 (2010) Low-Voltage Three-Phase Squirrel-Cage High-Efficiency Induction Motors (Amendment 1)

JIS C 5381-11 (2014) Low-voltage surge protective devices -- Part 11: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power systems -- Requirements and test methods

JIS C 5381-12 (2014) Low-voltage surge protective devices -- Part 12: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems -- Selection and application principles

JIS C 6436 (1995) Power transformer for electronic equipment

JIS C 8201-2-1 (2011) Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear - Part 2-1: Circuit-Breakers

JIS C 8201-3 (2009) Low-voltage switchgear and control units-Part 3: Switches,Disconnector, disconnecting switch and fuse assembly unit

JIS C 8201-5-1 (2007) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear - Part 5-1: Control Circuit Devices And Switching Elements - Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices

JIS C 8201-4-1 (2010) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -- Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters

JIS C 8201-4-2 (2010) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -- Part 4-2: Contactors and motor-starters -- AC semiconductor motor controllers and starters



JIS C 8201-7-1 (2016) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear -- Part 7-1: Ancillary Equipment -- Terminal Blocks For Copper Conductors

JIS C 8222 (2004) Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs)

JIS C 8269-1 (2016) Low-Voltage Fuses -- Part 1: General Requirements

JIS C 8269-2 (2013) Low voltage fuse-Part 2: Additional requirements for expert fuses(Mainly industrial fuses)

JIS C 8281-1 (2019) Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes -- Part 1: General requirements

JIS C 8286 (2013) Electrical accessories -- Cord sets and interconnection cord sets

JIS C 8303 (2007) Plugs And Receptacles For Domestic And Similar General Use

JIS C 8304 (2009) Small switches for indoor use

JIS C 8305 (2019) Rigid Steel Conduits

JIS C 8309 (2019) Pliable metal conduits

JIS C 8330 (1999) Fittings for rigid metal conduits

JIS C 8340 (1999)Boxes And Box Covers For Rigid Metal Conduits

JIS C 8350 (1999) Fittings for pliable metal conduits

JIS C 8364 (2008) Busways

JIS C 8380 (1993) Plastic coated steel pipes for cable-ways

JIS C 8411 (2019) Pliable plastics conduits

JIS C 8425 (1984) Plastic surface raceways for interior wiring

JIS C 8430 (2019) Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) conduits

JIS C 8432 (2019) Fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) conduits

JIS C 8435 (2018) Boxes And Box Covers Of Plastic Conduits

JIS C 8462-1 (2012) Boxes and enclosures for electrical



accessories for household and similar fixed electrical installations -- Part 1: General requirements


JIS C 60079-0 (2010) Explosive atmospheres -- Part 0: Equipment -- General requirements

JIS C 60079-14 (2008) Electrical and mechanical equipment used in explosive atmosphere- Part 14: Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas (Other Than Mines)

JIS C 60364-5-54 (2006) Building Electrical Equipment-Part 5-54: Selection Of Electrical Equipment and Contruction-Grounding Equipment, Protective Conductor and Protective Bonding Conductor

JIS C 60364-6 (2010) Low-voltage electrical installations -- Part 6: Verification

JIS C 61000-4-7 (2007) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -- Part 4-7: Testing and measurement techniques -- General guide on harmonics and interharmonics measurements and instrumentation

JIS C 61558-1 (2019) Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and combinations thereof -- Part 1: General requirements and tests

JIS K 6743 (2016) Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) Pipe Fittings for Water Supply

JIS K 6911 (2006) Thermosetting plastic general test method

JIS K 6741 (2016) Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) Pipes

JIS T 1021 (2019) Hospital grade outlet-sockets and plugs

JIS X 5150 (R2016) Information Technology-Generic Cabling for Customer Premises


JIS Z 9290-1 (2014) Protection Against Lightning - Part 1: General Principles













UL 2043 (2013) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G" . Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a “ G” t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .

For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y. Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he



Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy, Ai r For ce, and NASA pr oj ect s.

The " S" f ol l owi ng a submi t t al i t em i ndi cat es t hat t he submi t t al i s r equi r ed f or t he Sust ai nabi l i t y eNot ebook t o f ul f i l l f eder al l y mandat ed sust ai nabl e r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 29 SUSTAI NABI LI TY REPORTI NG. Locat e t he " S" submi t t al under t he SD number t hat best descr i bes t he submi t t al i t em.


**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are[ for Contractor Quality Control approval][ for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government]. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 .

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards ; G[, [_____]]

Transformers ; G[, [_____]]

Busway; G[, [_____]]

Cable trays ; G[, [_____]]

Motor control centers ; G[, [_____]]

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

Wireways ; G[, [_____]]

[ Load centers for housing units ; G[, [_____]] ]

Marking strips drawings; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles ;



Circuit breakers ; G[, [_____]]

Switches ; G[, [_____]]

Transformers ; G[, [_____]]

Enclosed circuit breakers ; G[, [_____]]

Motor controllers ; G[, [_____]]

[ Combination motor controllers ; G[, [_____]] ]

[ Load centers for housing units ; G[, [_____]] ]

Manual motor starters ; G[, [_____]]

[ Residential load centers ; G[, [_____]] ]

[ Metering ; G[, [_____]] ]

[ Meter base only ; G[, [_____]] ]

CATV outlets ; G[, [_____]]

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar ; G[, [_____]]

Surge protective devices ; G[, [_____]]

Include performance and characteristic curves.

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test ;

Grounding system test ;

Transformer tests ;

Ground-fault receptacle test ;

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses ;


Transformer factory tests

[ SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e wi t h opt i ons under par agr aphs ent i t l ed " Mai nt enance" and " Met er i ng. "

**************************************************************************

Electrical Systems , Data Package 5;

Metering , Data Package 5;



Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 , OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.

] 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of applicable codes and standards unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:





Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.



1.5 MAINTENANCE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he opt i on bel ow onl y i f t he syst em i s consi der ed compl ex and t her e wi l l be a need f or det ai l ed syst em i nf or mat i on.

**************************************************************************



[ 1.5.1 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the following:

a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.

b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere).

c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.

] 1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

[ 1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use t hi s par agr aph f or Navy pr oj ect s. When di r ect ed t o meet Sei smi c Requi r ement s, 13 48 00 [ SEI SMI C] BRACI NG FOR MI SCELLANEOUS EQUI PMENT and Section 26 05 48. 00 10 SEI SMI C PROTECTI ON FOR ELECTRI CAL EQUI PMENT must be edi t ed t o sui t t he pr oj ect and be i ncl uded i n t he cont r act document s. Edi t t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph and i ncl ude i t i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on. When a Gover nment desi gner i s t he Engi neer of Recor d, pr ovi de sei smi c r equi r ement s on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide seismic details[ conforming to[ Section 13 48 00 [SEISMIC] BRACING FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT][ and to][ Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT]][ as indicated].

] PART 2 PRODUCTS


**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he l ast br acket ed sent ence f or Ar my projects.

**************************************************************************

As a minimum, meet requirements of UL or Japanese standards , where UL or applicable Japanese codes and standards are established for those items for all materials, equipment, and devices.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use El ect r i cal Nonmet al l i c Tubi ng ( ENT. Ref er t o UFC 3- 520- 01, " I nt er i or El ect r i cal



Syst ems" f or addi t i onal i nf or mat i on.

Use mal l eabl e i r on seal el ect r i cal f i t t i ngs i n f uel val ve pi t s and si mi l ar l ocat i ons wher e f i t t i ngs ar e exposed t o pot ent i al f r eeze t haw envi r onment s. Nonmet al l i c f i t t i ngs have f ai l ed i n t hese environments.

**************************************************************************

Conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit or Type G Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit or Type G

JIS C 8305 , Type G. Diameter of conduit shall be as indicated .

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use f i ber gl ass i n bui l di ngs. Wi t h advanced appr oval , f or accept abl e r easons, i t may be used f or ser vi ce ent r ance or bel ow gr ade use.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8430 for Type VE or HIVE conduit of diameter of less than 100mm and JIS K 6741 for Type VP or HIVP conduit diameter or 100mm and larger .

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) or Type C

JIS C 8305 , Type C , zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT) or Type E Metallic Conduit

JIS C 8305 , Type E .

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit or Type G, C or E; LL or LT

JIS C 8380 .

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit

JIS C 8309 .

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

JIS C 8309 .

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

JIS C 8330 and JIS C 8350 . Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with JIS C 8330 and JIS C 8350 .

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC or Type G and Type C

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.



2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT or Type E Conduit

**************************************************************************NOTE: Moi st ur e absor bed wi t hi n di e- cast f i t t i ngs may cause t hem t o det er i or at e mor e r api dl y t han st eel f i t t i ngs. Ut i l i ze st eel f i t t t i ngs i n damp or wet l ocat i ons, or when r equest ed by Act i v i t y on I nat al l at i ons and Bases t hat have hi gh ambi ent humi di t y envi r onment s.

Set scr ew f i t t i ngs ar e accept abl e f or use wi t h EMT or Type E condui t s i n Japan.

**************************************************************************

[Die Cast][Steel] [ compression ][set screw] type.

2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use f i ber gl ass i n bui l di ngs. Wi t h advanced appr oval , f or accept abl e r easons, i t may be used f or ser vi ce ent r ance or bel ow gr ade use.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8432 for diameters less than 100mm and JIS K 6743 for diameters 100mm or larger .

2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit or Type PF

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use l i qui d- t i ght f l exi bl e nonmet al l i c condui t s i n Cont i nent al Uni t ed St at es ( CONUS) . I n over seas l ocat i ons, onl y use when speci f i cal l y al l owed by t he Aut hor i t y Havi ng Jur i sdi ct i on.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8411 , Type PF .

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY

2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway

Two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type.[ Provide multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where indicated. Provide receptacles as specified herein, spaced a minimum of one every [455] [_____] mm .][ Wire alternate receptacles on different circuits.]

2.3.2 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner shoul d coor di nat e wi t h t he Aut hor i t y Havi ng Jur i sdi ct i on r esponsi bl e f or t he const r uct i on cont r act r egar di ng t he use of t hi s wi r i ng met hod i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8425 , nonmetallic totally enclosed, snap-cover type.[ Provide



multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where indicated. Provide receptacles as specified herein, spaced a minimum of one every [455] [_____] mm .][ Wire alternate receptacles on different circuits.]

2.4 BUSWAY

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e phase sequence of vol t ages, or i ent at i on, et c. , on t he dr awi ngs f or exi st i ng t r ansf or mer s, swi t chboar ds, swi t chgear , mot or cont r ol cent er s, et c.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8364 . Provide the following:

a. Buses: [ copper][ or][ aluminum].

b. Busways: rated [_____] volts, [_____] continuous current amperes, three-phase,[ three-][ four-]wire, and include integral or internal[ 50-percent] ground bus.

c. Short circuit rating: [ [_____] root mean square (rms) symmetrical amperes minimum][ as indicated].

[ d. Busway systems: suitable for use indoors.

] e. Enclosures: [ steel][ aluminum] [ metallic].

f. Hardware: plated or otherwise protected to resist corrosion.

g. Joints: one-bolt type with through-bolts, which can be checked for tightness without deenergizing system.

h. Maximum hot spot temperature rise at any point in busway at continuous rated load: do not exceed 55 degrees C above maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C in any position.

i. Internal barriers to prevent movement of superheated gases.

j. Coordinate proper voltage phasing of entire bus duct system, for example where busway interfaces with transformers, switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and other system components.

2.4.1 Feeder Busways

Provide[ ventilated, except that vertical busways within 1830 mm of floors must be unventilated,][ unventilated, totally enclosed] low-impedance busway. Provide bus bars fully covered with insulating material, except at stabs. Provide an entirely polarized busway system.

2.4.2 Plug-In Busways

Unventilated type. Provide the following:

a. Plug-in units: [ fusible, handle-operated, switch type, horsepower-rated][ circuit breaker-type][ handle-operated, switch type, equipped with high interrupting-capacity, current-limiting fuses].



b. Bus bars: covered with insulating material throughout, except at joints and other connection points.

[ c. A hook stick of suitable length for operating plug-in units from the floor.

] 2.5 CABLE TRAYS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Show cabl e t r ay l ayout on t he dr awi ngs. When usi ng mul t i pl e t ypes and si zes, i ndi cat e s i ze and t ype of cabl e t r ays on t he dr awi ngs. When usi ng " as i ndi cat ed" opt i on, i nsur e i nf or mat i on r equi r ed i s shown on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide the following:

a. Cable trays: form a wireway system, with a nominal[ [75] [100] [150] mm] depth[ as indicated].

b. Cable trays: constructed of[ aluminum][ copper-free aluminum][ steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication].

c. Cable trays: include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.

d. Edges, fittings, and hardware: finished free from burrs and sharp edges.

e. Fittings: ensure not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have manufacturer's minimum standard radius.

[ f. Radius of bends : [305] [610] [915] mm .][ Radius of bends: as indicated.

] 2.5.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays

**************************************************************************NOTE: Basket cabl e t r ay i s a f abr i cat ed st r uct ur e consi st i ng of wi r e mesh bot t om and si de r ai l s.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ size as indicated][ of nominal [ 50,][ 100,][ 150,][ 200,][ 300,][ 450,][ and][ 600] mm width and [ 25,][ 50,][ and][ 100] mm depth] with maximum wire mesh spacing of 50 by 100 mm .

2.5.2 Trough-Type Cable Trays

**************************************************************************NOTE: Tr ough or vent i l at ed cabl e t r ay i s a f abr i cat ed st r uct ur e consi st i ng of i nt egr al or separ at e l ongi t udi nal r ai l s and a bot t om havi ng openi ngs suf f i c i ent f or t he passage of ai r and ut i l i z i ng 75 per cent or l ess of t he pl an ar ea of t he sur f ace t o suppor t cabl es.

**************************************************************************



Provide[ size as indicated][ of nominal [150] [305] [455] [610] [760] [915] mm width].

2.5.3 Ladder-Type Cable Trays

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ladder cabl e t r ay i s a f abr i cat ed st r uct ur e consi st i ng of t wo l ongi t udi nal s i de r ai l s connect ed by i ndi v i dual t r ansver se member s ( r ungs) .

**************************************************************************

Provide[ size as indicated][ of nominal [150] [305] [455] [610] [760] [915] mm width] with maximum rung spacing of [150] [225] [305] [455] mm .

2.5.4 Channel-Type Cable Trays

**************************************************************************NOTE: Channel cabl e t r ay i s a f abr i cat ed st r uct ur e consi st i ng of a one- pi ece vent i l at ed- bot t om or sol i d- bot t om channel sect i on, not exceedi ng 152 mm i n wi dt h.

**************************************************************************

Provide [ size as indicated][ of nominal [75] [100] [150] mm width]. Provide trays with one-piece construction having slots spaced not more than 115 mm on centers.

2.5.5 Solid Bottom-Type Cable Trays

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sol i d bot t om or non- vent i l at ed cabl e t r ay i s a f abr i cat ed st r uct ur e consi st i ng of a bot t om wi t hout vent i l at i on openi ngs wi t hi n i nt egr al or separ at e l ongi t udi nal s i de r ai l s.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ size as indicated][ of nominal [150] [305] [455] [610] [760] [915] mm width]. [Provide solid covers.][Do not provide solid covers.]

2.5.6 [ Cantilever

Cantilever-type, center-hung cable trays may be provided at the Contractor's option in lieu of other cable tray types specified.

] [ 2.6 OPEN TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SUPPORT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ut i l ze open t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl e suppor t s ( J- Hooks / J- Suppor t s / D- r i ngs) onl y as speci f i cal l y per mi t t ed i n UFC 3- 580- 01, Tel ecommuni cat i ons, Bui l di ng Cabl i ng Syst em.

**************************************************************************

2.6.1 Open Top Cable Supports

Provide open top cable supports in accordance with UL 2043 . Provide [[ galvanized][ zinc-coated][ stainless] steel]open top cable supports[ as indicated].



2.6.2 Closed Ring Cable Supports

Provide closed ring cable supports in accordance with UL 2043 . Provide [[ galvanized][ zinc-coated][ stainless] steel]closed ring cable supports[ as indicated].

] 2.7 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

JIS C 8340 , cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. JIS C 8435 , if nonmetallic. Rated [IP65 for wet locations] [IP66, 67 or 68 for dust-tight/hazardous locations].

2.7.1 Floor Outlet Boxes


a. Boxes: [ adjustable][ nonadjustable] and concrete tight.

b. Each outlet: consisting of[ nonmetallic][ or][ cast-metal] body with threaded openings,[ or sheet-steel body with knockouts] for conduits,[ adjustable ][, ][ brass flange] ring, and cover plate with [19][25][31.75][53.92] mm threaded plug.

c. Telecommunications outlets: consisting of[ surface-mounted, horizontal][ flush], aluminum or stainless steel housing with a receptacle as specified and[ 25 mm bushed side opening][ 19 mm top opening].

d. Receptacle outlets: consisting of[ surface-mounted, horizontal][ flush] aluminum or stainless steel housing with duplex-type receptacle as specified herein.

e. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation.

[ f. Provide plugs with installation instructions to the Contracting Officer for [5] [_____] percent of outlet boxes for the capping of outlets upon removal of service fittings.

] 2.7.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System

**************************************************************************NOTE: When usi ng " as i ndi cat ed" opt i on, ensur e i nf or mat i on r equi r ed i s shown on t he dr awi ngs. Choose 100 mm squar e boxes f or s i ngl e gang, f our out l et , copper t el ecommuni cat i ons conf i gur at i ons t hat do not have pr ovi s i on f or f i ber opt i c cabl i ng. Choose 120 mm squar e boxes f or 35 mm condui t i nst al l at i ons and f or out l et boxes t hat have or may r equi r e f i ber opt i c cabl i ng. Lar ger boxes ar e r equi r ed t o meet bend r adi i r equi r ement s f or f i ber opt i c cabl e.

**************************************************************************


a. Standard type [ 100 mm square by 54 mm deep][ 120 mm square by 54 mm deep] .

[ b. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: 100 by 54



by 54 mm deep.

] c. Depth of boxes: large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

[ d. Outlet boxes for fiber optic telecommunication outlets: include a minimum 10 mm deep single or two gang plaster ring as shown and installed using a minimum 27 mm conduit system.

][ e. Outlet boxes for handicapped telecommunications station: 100 by 54 by 54 mm deep.

] [ 2.7.3 Clock Outlet for Use in Other Than Wired Clock System

**************************************************************************NOTE: Bat t er y- oper at ed cl ocks ar e Navy st andar d. Ret ai n t hi s par agr aph onl y under speci al condi t i ons.

**************************************************************************


a. Outlet box with plastic cover, where required, and single receptacle with clock outlet plate.

b. Receptacle: recessed sufficiently within box to allow complete insertion of standard cap, flush with plate.

c. Suitable clip or support for hanging clock: secured to top plate.

d. Material and finish of plate: as specified in paragraph DEVICE PLATES of this section.

] 2.8 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 1640 mL , JIS C 8340 , hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel. Rated [IP65 for wet locations] [IP66, 67 or 68 for dust-tight/hazardous locations].

2.9 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of Japanese standards for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.

2.9.1 Conductors

**************************************************************************NOTE: Al umi num conduct or s not t ypi cal l y used f or i nt er i or el ect r i cal di st r but i on i n Japan.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n over seas l ocat i ons, f or conduct or s 5.5sqmm ( No. 10 AWG) and smal l er di amet er , consi der at i on may be gi ven t o t he use of st r anded wi r es, i f sui t abl e t er mi nal devi ces can be appl i ed whi ch enabl e pr oper connect i on. Al so, st r anded wi r es i n s i zes 5. 5sqmm (No. 10 AWG) and smal l er di amet er may be r equi r ed f or



pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng uni nt er r upt ed power suppl y ( UPS) installations.

**************************************************************************


a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Conductors 1.25 sqmm and larger diameter: stranded.

c. Conductors 3.2 mm and smaller diameter: solid.

d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.

[ e. All conductors: [copper.][ Conductors indicated to be 14 sqmm or smaller diameter: copper. Conductors indicated to be 22 sqmm and larger diameter: copper , unless type of conductor material is specifically indicated, or specified, or required by equipment manufacturer.]

][ 2.9.1.1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph onl y i f al umi num conduct or s ar e al l owed.

**************************************************************************

When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.

] 2.9.1.2 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:

a. Branch circuits: 2.0 mm .

b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: 1.6 mm .

c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: 1.2 mm .

d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: 0.65 mm .

2.9.2 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

2.9.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:

a. Grounding conductors: Green.

b. Neutral conductors: White or Gray .



c. Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each.

2.9.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:

a. [480/277][440/254V][420/242V][ 208/120 volt ] , three-phase , four-wire

(1) Phase A - red

(2) Phase B - black

(3) Phase C - blue

b. [ 480 volt ][440 volt][420 volt][220 volt][210 volt][208 volt] , three-phase , three-wire

(1) Phase A - red

(2) Phase B - black

(3) Phase C - blue

c. [105/210][ 120/240 ] volt, single phase , three-wire :

(1) Phase A - red

(2) Phase B - black

[ d. On three-phase, four-wire delta system, high leg: orange, as required.

] 2.9.3 Insulation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Be sur e condui t f i l l cal cul at i ons ar e based on l ar gest di amet er i nsul at i on t ype al l owed. Desi gner may sel ect ot her i nsul at i on t ypes whi ch may be mor e sui t abl e f or a par t i cul ar pr oj ect . For r ewi r i ng pr oj ect wher e exi st i ng condui t i s t o be ut i l i zed, speci f y t ypes THHN and THWN. Use THWN val ues ( 75 degr ees C) f or capaci t i es of THWN/ THHN.

**************************************************************************

Unless specified or indicated otherwise, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, [Type EM-IE conforming to JIS C 3612 ][ or ][Type EM-CE, EM-CET or EM-ECEQ conforming to JIS C 3605 ] , except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to JIS C 3612 , Type EM-IE ; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to JIS C 3401 , Type CEV . Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.9.4 Bonding Conductors

JIS C 3101 , solid bare copper wire for sizes 8 sqmm and smaller diameter; JIS C 3105 and JCS 1226 , Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes 14 sqmm and larger diameter.



2.9.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

**************************************************************************NOTE: A Tel ecommuni cat i on Bondi ng Backbone ( TBB) i s r equi r ed bet ween t he t el ecommuni cat i ons mai n gr oundi ng busbar ( TMGB) and al l t el ecommuni cat i ons gr oundi ng busbar s ( TGBs) . A TBB i s not r equi r ed f or i nst al l at i on wi t h onl y a s i ngl e TGB or TMGB.

Si zi ng of t he TBB

TBB l engt h l i near m f t TBB Si ze (AWG)

l ess t han 4 13 614sqmm

4 - 6 14 - 20 422sqmm

6 - 8 21 - 26 338sqmm

8 - 10 ( 27 - 33) 238sqmm

10 - 13 34 - 41 138sqmm

13 - 16 ( 42 - 52) 1/0 60sqmm

16 - 20 53 - 66 2/0 60sqmm

gr eat er t han 20301 66 3/0 1500sqmm

Choose t he second br acket ed opt i ons wher e l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on syst em i s pr ovi ded i n t he j ob and speci f i ed i n ot her sect i ons.

Choose i nsul at ed TBB when pat hway i s a di ssi mi l ar met al t han copper .

**************************************************************************

Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 with 14 sqmm minimum size, and sized at 3.3 sqmm per linear meter of conductor length up to a maximum size of 1500 sqmm .[ Provide insulated TBB with insulation as specified in the paragraph INSULATION and meeting the fire ratings of its pathway.]

2.9.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 . Size the bonding conductor for telecommunications the same as the TBB.

[ 2.9.5 Service Entrance Cables

Service Entrance (SE) and Underground Service Entrance (USE) Cables, JIS C 3341 and JIS C 3605 .



][ 2.9.6 EM-EEF Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de EM- EEF cabl e onl y f or t empor ar y power or r esi dent i al housi ng pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 3605 , Type EM-EEF Cable.

][ 2.9.7 Wire and Cable for 400 Hertz (Hz) Circuits

Insulated copper conductors.

][ 2.9.8 Metal-Clad Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type MC cabl e i s UL l i s t ed and NFPA 70 r ecogni zed f or most common bui l di ng appl i cat i ons. Revi ew NFPA 70. MC cabl e does not pr ot ect conduct or s as wel l as r i gi d condui t but i s mor e f l exi bl e t o i nst al l and r el ocat e. For Navy pr oj ect s, consul t wi t h NAVFAC cogni zant FEC el ect r i cal desi gn br anch manager and obt ai n wr i t t en appr oval bef or e speci f y i ng t hi s wi r i ng met hod.

**************************************************************************

Type MC cable.

][ 2.9.9 Armored Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type AC cabl e has mor e r est r i ct ed appl i cat i ons t han MC cabl e but of f er s t he same advant ages. Revi ew NFPA 70. For Navy pr oj ect s, consul t wi t h NAVFAC cogni zant FEC el ect r i cal desi gn br anch manager and obt ai n wr i t t en appr oval bef or e speci f y i ng AC cabl e.

**************************************************************************

Type AC cable.

][ 2.9.10 Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type MI cabl e i s used f or l ow t emper at ur e, hi gh t emper at ur e, hazar dous l ocat i ons, l i f e saf et y, and heat i ng appl i cat i ons. Ref er t o NFPA 70. Cl ear l y show t he MI cabl e on t he dr awi ngs. I f MI cabl e ut i l i zed i n hazar dous ar eas i s l i kel y t o be subj ect t o hi gh vol t age sur ges, consi der t he use of sur ge suppr essor s i n el ect r i cal panel s ser vi ng t he l oad f r om out si de of t he hazar dous ar ea. Locat e suppr essor s i n appr opr i at el y r at ed encl osur es wi t hi n t he hazar dous ar ea onl y i f t her e i s no ot her opt i on. MI cabl e i s not avai l abl e i n r at i ngs above 600 vol t s.

**************************************************************************



UL listed; Type MI cable. Do not use sheathing containing asbestos fibers.

][ 2.9.11 Flat Conductor Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type FCC cabl e has been l i s t ed by UL and r ecogni zed by NFPA 70 f or under car pet t i l e appl i cat i ons. Revi ew NFPA 70. FCC cabl e i s avai l abl e of f t he shel f f or power and t el ecommuni cat i ons t r ansmi ssi on appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

UL listed; Type FCC.

][ 2.9.12 Cable Tray Cable or Power Limited Tray Cable

UL listed; type TC or PLTC.

][ 2.9.13 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t hi s par agr aph when equi pment ut i l i z i ng cor d set s i s per manent l y connect ed t o boxes i n l i eu of use of pl ug and r ecept acl es.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8286 .

] [ 2.9.14 Polyethylene or Cross-Linked Polyethylene Cable

[Type [CV][CE] conforming to JIS C 3605 for 600V.][Type [CV][CE], conforming to JIS C 3606 for 6.6kV]

] 2.10 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

JIS C 2805 , JIS C 2806 and JIS C 2810 for wire connectors and JIS C 2336 , JIS C 2338 for insulating tapes. Connectors for 5.5 sqmm and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with JIS C 2805 , JIS C 2806 and JIS C 2810 or JIS C 2806 (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.11 DEVICE PLATES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use l ast i t em bel ow f or br i g f aci l i t i es onl y.

**************************************************************************


a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.

b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.

c. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided.



[ d. Plates on finished walls: nylon or lexan, minimum 0.792 mm wall thickness and same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted.

][ e. Plates on finished walls: satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.792 mm thick.

] f. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.

g. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.

h. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

[ i. Device plates in areas normally accessible to prisoners: brown or ivory finish nylon-device plates rated for high abuse. Test device plates for compliance with JIS C 8340 and JIS C 8435 for physical strength. Attach device plates with spanner head bolts.

] 2.12 SWITCHES

2.12.1 Toggle Switches

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use sol der l ess pr essur e t ype t oggl e swi t ches on Navy pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8304 ,[ single pole][, double pole][, three-way][, and four-way], totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:

a. Handles: [ white][ ivory][ brown] thermoplastic.

b. Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired[ or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement].

c. Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.

d. Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, [105][120][210][240][ 120/277 ] volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.

2.12.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle


a. Pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle.

b. Pilot light color: red and illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on".

c. Pilot lighted switch: rated 20 amps and [105][ 120 ] volts or [210][240][ 277 ] volts as indicated.

d. The circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.



2.12.3 Breakers Used as Switches

For [100][ 120 ] - and [200][ 277 ] -Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in accordance with JIS C 8201-2-1 . Provide label adjacent to circuit breaker indicating Breaker used as switch.

2.12.4 Disconnect Switches

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect heavy dut y- t ype f or t hose swi t ches r equi r i ng f r equent oper at i on i ndi cat e as such on t he drawings.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8201-3 . Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in IP rated enclosure[ as indicated] per JIS C 8462-1 .

2.13 FUSES

**************************************************************************NOTE: For t he Desi gner , det er mi ne t he pr oper f use cl ass and t ype based on t he r equi r ement s of t he el ect r i cal syst em and t he equi pment ser vi ced. Thi s not e br i ef l y summar i zes some of t he UL f use st andar ds and t hei r appl i cat i on. I n addi t i on t o 200, 000 amper e r ms symmet r i cal UL l i s t i ng, 300, 000 amper e r ms symmet r i cal speci al pur pose r at i ng has been wi t nessed on UL t est ed and cer t i f i ed Cl ass RK1, J and Cl ass L.

UL 198, Cl ass R: 200, 000 amper e, r ms symmet r i cal i nt er r upt i ng r at i ng, RK1 i s l abel ed cur r ent l i mi t i ng, and i s avai l abl e i n dual - el ement t i me- del ay and non- t i me- del ay opt i ons. RK5 f uses ar e dual - el ement t i me- del ay and l abel ed cur r ent - l i mi t i ng. Bot h RK1 and RK5 f uses ar e r ej ect i on t ype whi ch shoul d be used wi t h r ej ect i on mount i ng on new equi pment t o sat i sf y hi gh cur r ent i nt er r upt i ng l i s t i ng by UL. However , t hese f uses may be used on exi st i ng equi pment t hat i s non- r ej ect i on t ype as a di r ect r epl acement f or UL 198 f uses.

UL 198, Cl asses J, L, and CC: 200, 000 amper e, r ms symmet r i cal i nt er r upt i ng r at i ng i s avai l abl e wi t h t i me- del ay opt i on, i s not i nt er changeabl e wi t h any ot her UL f use cl ass, i s l abel ed cur r ent - l i mi t i ng, and i s r at ed 600 vol t s ac.

UL 198, Cl ass H: Maxi mum 10, 000 amper e, symmet r i cal i nt er r upt i ng r at i ng. Use onl y i n exi st i ng equi pment wher e t he avai l abl e f aul t i s known t o be l ess t han 10, 000 amper es.

UL 198, Cl ass T: Maxi mum 200, 000 amper e symmet r i cal



i nt er r upt i ng r at i ng. I s not i nt er changeabl e wi t h ot her UL f use cl asses.

Ut i l i ze cur r ent - l i mi t i ng t ype ( RK1 or RK5) f uses i n f usi bl e swi t chboar ds and saf et y swi t ches.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8269-1 , JIS C 8269-2 . Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible[ switch][ panel][ and control center]. Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers[ or other circuit protective devices] for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.13.1 Fuseholders

Provide in accordance with JIS C 8269-1 or JIS C 8269-2 .

2.13.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)

JIS C 8269-1 or JIS C 8269-2 , [ Class[ RK-1][ RK-5][ time-delay type] ][Fuse System [A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][L]] . Provide only Class R associated fuseholders in accordance with JIS C 8269-1 or JIS C 8269-2 .

2.14 RECEPTACLES

**************************************************************************NOTE: 1. Desi gner wi l l sel ect t he pr oper gr ade f or t he appl i cat i on. Har d use r ecept acl es ( cal l ed heavy dut y r ecept acl es by some manuf act ur er s) ar e sui t abl e f or nor mal use and heavy use. Use hospi t al gr ade r ecept acl es onl y f or t hose appl i cat i ons t hat exceed capabi l i t i es of har d use. Resi dent i al - gr ade r ecept acl es ar e not accept abl e.

2. Ther mopl ast i c component s pr ovi de super i or r esi st ance t o i mpact s, chemi cal s and sol vent s as compar ed t o t her moset mat er i al s. Nyl on, Pol ycar bonat e, Pol yest er , Acr yl i c and Pol ypr opyl ene ar e exampl es of t her mopl ast i c mat er i al . Phenol i c. Ur ea and Mel ami ne ar e exampl es of t her moset mat er i al s whi ch do not pr ovi de hi gh degr ees of r esi st ance t o i mpact .

**************************************************************************


a. [ JIS C 8303 , JIS C 8281-1 , hard use (also designated heavy-duty),][ JIS C 8303 , JIS C 8281-1 and JIS T 1021 , hospital grade,] grounding-type.

b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.

c. Bodies: [ white][ ivory][ brown].

d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.

e. Dimensional requirements: per JIS C 8462-1 .



f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.

h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.14.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles

Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle: switched when installed.

2.14.2 Weatherproof Receptacles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de di e- cast met al / al umi num cover pl at e when mat chi ng exi st i ng i nst al l at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations" or weather resistant per JIS C 8303 . Include cast metal box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use, [polycarbonate, UV resistant/stabilized][die-cast metal/aluminum] cover plate.

2.14.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Gr ound- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er s ar e spel l ed out r at her t han abbr evi at ed as " GFCI " t o avoi d a pot ent i al conf l i c t wi t h " gover nment f ur ni shed, cont r act or i nst al l ed equi pment " .

Ref er t o Par agr aphs 2. 15. 3. 2 and 2. 16. 2. 2 f or Japanese gr ound f aul t pr ot ect i on ut i l i z i ng c i r cui t br eaker s wi t h gr ound f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er (RCBOs).

**************************************************************************

Duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.14.4 Special Purpose Receptacles

Receptacles serving [_____] are special purpose.[ Provide in ratings indicated.][ [_____] configuration, rated [_____] amperes, [_____] volts.][ Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.]

2.14.5 [ Plugs

Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered[ three-,][ four-,][ or][ five-]wire cord of required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Provide UL listed plugs with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government.



] 2.14.6 Range Receptacles

[ ] ampere receptacle configuration [as indicated] ,[ flush mounted for housing units,] rated 50 amperes, [105/210][ 125/250 ] volts.[ Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.]

2.14.7 Dryer Receptacles

Receptacle configuration [as indicated] , rated [ ] amperes, [105/210][125/250 ] volts.[ Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.]

2.14.8 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 def i nes a t amper - r esi st ant r ecept acl e as one whi ch by i t s const r uct i on l i mi t s i mpr oper access t o i t s ener gi zed par t s.

**************************************************************************

Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the insertion of small objects into its contact slots.

2.15 PANELBOARDS

**************************************************************************NOTE: For r esi dent i al appl i cat i ons, use par agr aph RESI DENTI AL LOAD CENTERS or LOAD CENTERS FOR HOUSI NG UNI TS i nst ead of PANELBOARDS unl ess r equi r ed by t he l ocal Act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, use t he f i r st br acket ed par agr aph. Sel ect i t em m. bel ow f or uni que appl i cat i ons i nvol v i ng nonst andar d f r equenci es or voltages.

**************************************************************************

Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:

[ a. JIS C 8480 and JIS C 8480 , JIS C 0920 having a short-circuit current rating[ as indicated][ of 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum].

b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to manufacturer's recommendations .

c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.

d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

f. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise.



g. Main breaker: "separately" mounted[ "above"][ or][ "below"] branch breakers.

h. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

i. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

j. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP).

[ k. Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated.

] l. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

[ m. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.

] n. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

][ a. JIS C 8480 and JIS C 8480 , JIS C 0920 .

b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting: additionally conform to manufacturer's recommendations. .

c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.


e. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breaker sized as indicated.

f. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit of panelboard.

g. Directories: indicate source of service (upstream panel, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) to panelboard.

h. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

i. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

] 2.15.1 Enclosure

Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 0920 .

b. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.



d. Outdoor cabinets: Weatherproof rated IP code with[ conduit hubs welded to the cabinet][ a removable steel plate 7 mm thick in the bottom for field drilling for conduit connections].

e. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.

f. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 3 mm .

g. Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 15 mm clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface.

h. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.

i. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 600 mm long provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock.

j. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.

k. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.15.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per JIS C 8480 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.[ In addition to equipment grounding bus, provide second "isolated" ground bus, where indicated.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he br acket ed opt i on bel ow onl y i f t he non- l i near l oads ar e expect ed t o be a maj or i t y of t he downst r eam l oads.

**************************************************************************

[ 2.15.2.1 Panelboard Neutrals for Non-Linear Loads

Provide in accordance with the following:.

a. UL listed, with panelboard type specifically UL heat rise tested for use on non-linear loads.

b. Panelboard: heat rise tested in accordance with JIS C 8480 , except with the neutral assembly installed and carrying 200 percent of the phase bus current during testing.

c. Verification of the testing procedure: provided upon request.

d. Two neutral assemblies paralleled together with cable is not acceptable.



e. Nameplates for panelboard rated for use on non-linear loads: marked "SUITABLE FOR NON-LINEAR LOADS" and in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

f. Provide a neutral label with instructions for wiring the neutral of panelboards rated for use on non-linear loads.

] 2.15.3 Circuit Breakers

**************************************************************************NOTE: For r esi dent i al and BEQ/ BOQ f aci l i t y appl i cat i ons, par agr aph RESI DENTI AL LOAD CENTERS or LOAD CENTERS FOR HOUSI NG UNI TS shoul d be used i nst ead of PANELBOARDS unl ess panel boar ds wi t h bol t - on br eaker s ar e r equi r ed by t he l ocal Act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8201-2-1 ,[ thermal magnetic-type][ solid state-type] having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided.[ Where indicated on the drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices.] Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.15.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.15.3.2 Circuit Breaker With Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter or Type RCBO

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he f i r st br acket ed opt i on i f Cl ass A gr ound- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er i s pr ovi ded. Sel ect t he second br acket ed opt i on i f Japanese gr ound f aul t pr ot ect i on i s pr ovi ded.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8222 . [ Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of JIS C 8222 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter. ][Provide Residual Current Device (RCBO) circuit breaker with a leakage current detection of 15 milliamperes or 30 milliamperes to provide ground fault protection.]

2.15.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment

Provide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.15.3.4 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 r equi r es t hat al l br anch ci r cui t s t hat suppl y 120 vol t , s i ngl e phase, 15 and 20 amper e



out l et s i nst al l ed i n dwel l i ng uni t f ami l y r ooms, di ni ng r ooms, l i v i ng r ooms, par l or s, l i br ar i es, dens, bedr ooms, sunr ooms, r ecr eat i on r ooms, c l oset s, hal l ways, or s i mi l ar r ooms or ar eas ar e pr ot ect ed by an ar c- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er t o pr ovi de pr ot ect i on of ent i r e br anch ci r cui t .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: The one pol e ar c- f aul t c i r cui t - i nt er r upt er i s not desi gned f or use on ci r cui t s i n whi ch t he neut r al conduct or i s shar ed wi t h ot her c i r cui t s ( def i ned as a mul t i wi r e br anch ci r cui t i n NFPA 70) and wi l l nui sance t r i p on shar ed neut r al c i r cui t s. Pr ovi de and i ndi cat e on t he dr awi ngs one pol e ar c- f aul t c i r cui t - i nt er r upt er br eaker s f or each ci r cui t , and do not use shar ed neut r al f or t hese ci r cui t s i n new const r uct i on pr oj ect s. Wher e wi r i ng i s exi st i ng and not r epl aced and wher e a shar ed neut r al exi st s, a t wo pol e, 120/ 240 vol t ar c- f aul t c i r cui t - i nt er r upt er f or shar ed neut r al c i r cui t s may be r equi r ed. I t may al so be r equi r ed i n new const r uct i on i f 120/ 240 vol t equi pment or c i r cui t i s l ocat ed i n t he bedr oom. Coor di nat e t he r equi r ement wi t h t he cogni zant Act i v i t y.

************************************************************************** JIS C 8201-2-1 . Molded case circuit breakers: rated as indicated.[ Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters: rated 120/240 volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable.] Provide with "push-to-test" button.

[ 2.15.4 Fusible Switches for Panelboards

JIS C 8201-3 , hinged door-type. Provide switches serving as motor disconnect means rated for kilowatt .

][ 2.15.5 400 Hz Panelboard and Breakers

Provide panelboards and breakers for use on 400 Hz systems rated and labeled "400 Hz."

] [ 2.16 RESIDENTIAL LOAD CENTERS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph and subpar agr aphs i n l i eu of t he par agr aph PANELBOARD and i t s subpar agr aphs i f desi gner has chosen t o speci f y r esi dent i al l oad cent er s i n t he desi gn. Load cent er s ar e per mi t t ed onl y f or f ami l y housi ng const r uct i on/ r epai r pr oj ect s. Del et e f or ot her projects.

**************************************************************************

Provide residential load centers (RLCs) in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 8480 and JIS C 8480 , JIS C 0920 .



b. RLCs for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to manufacturer's recommendations .

c. Circuit breaker equipped.


e. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers sized as indicated.

[ f. Provide load centers with keyed locks.

] g. Provide printed directories.

2.16.1 RLC Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated groundable neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per JIS C 8480 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.

2.16.2 Circuit Breakers

JIS C 8201-2-1 , thermal magnetic-type with interrupting capacity[ as indicated][ of 10,000 minimum amperes rms symmetrical]. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided.


Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Provide a breaker design such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any two adjacent breaker poles are connected to alternate phases in sequence.

[ 2.16.2.2 Circuit Breaker With Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter or Type RCBO

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude f or al l l ocat i ons r equi r ed by NFPA 70.

NOTE: Sel ect t he f i r st br acket ed opt i on i f Cl ass A gr ound- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er i s pr ovi ded. Sel ect t he second br acket ed opt i on i f Japanese gr ound f aul t pr ot ect i on i s pr ovi ded.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8222 . [ Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of JIS C 8222 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. ][Provide Residual Current Device (RCBO) circuit breaker with a leakage current detection of 15 milliamperes or 30 milliamperes to provide ground fault protection.]



] 2.16.2.3 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 r equi r es t hat al l br anch ci r cui t s t hat suppl y 120 vol t , s i ngl e phase, 15 and 20 amper e out l et s i nst al l ed i n dwel l i ng uni t f ami l y r ooms, di ni ng r ooms, l i v i ng r ooms, par l or s, l i br ar i es, dens, bedr ooms, sunr ooms, r ecr eat i on r ooms, c l oset s, hal l ways, or s i mi l ar r ooms or ar eas ar e pr ot ect ed by an ar c- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er t o pr ovi de pr ot ect i on of ent i r e br anch ci r cui t .

**************************************************************************


************************************************************************** JIS C 8201-2-1 . Molded case circuit breakers: rated as indicated.[ Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters: rated [105/210][ 120/240 ] volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable.] Provide with "push-to-test" button.

][ 2.17 LOAD CENTERS FOR HOUSING UNITS

**************************************************************************NOTE: UFC 3- 520- 01 al l ows l oad cent er st y l e panel boar ds, wi t h pl ug- i n br eaker s, whi ch can be used i n housi ng uni t s and BEQ/ BOQ r ooms.

**************************************************************************

Provide single-phase panelboards for housing units on this project in accordance with the following:

a. Load center type, circuit breaker equipped, conforming to JIS C 8480 and JIS C 8480 or JIS C 0920 .

b. Panelboards series short-circuit current rating: 22,000 amperes symmetrical minimum for the main breaker and the branch breakers.

c. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to manufacturer's recommendations .

d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without



disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

f. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

g. Provide cover with latching door.

h. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

i. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from panel MDP).

j. Type directories and mount behind in holder with transparent protective covering on inside of panel door.

2.17.1 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide copper or aluminum bus bars, either tin plated or silver plated. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per JIS C 8480 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.

2.17.2 Circuit Breakers

JIS C 8201-2-1 thermal magnetic type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Half-size and tandem breakers are not acceptable. Provide switch duty rated 15 and 20 ampere breakers. Breakers must not require use of panel trim to secure them to the bus.


Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any two adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A and B respectively.

2.17.2.2 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 r equi r es t hat al l br anch ci r cui t s t hat suppl y 120 vol t , s i ngl e phase, 15 and 20 amper e out l et s i nst al l ed i n dwel l i ng uni t f ami l y r ooms, di ni ng r ooms, l i v i ng r ooms, par l or s, l i br ar i es, dens, bedr ooms, sunr ooms, r ecr eat i on r ooms, c l oset s, hal l ways, or s i mi l ar r ooms or ar eas ar e pr ot ect ed by an ar c- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er t o pr ovi de pr ot ect i on of ent i r e br anch ci r cui t .



**************************************************************************


************************************************************************** JIS C 8201-2-1 . Molded case circuit breakers: rated as indicated.[ Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters: rated [1050/210][ 120/240 ] volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable.] Provide with "push-to-test" button.

] 2.18 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

JIS C 8201-2-1 . Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated.[ Provide solid neutral.]

[ 2.19 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)

**************************************************************************NOTE: MSCPs, al so cal l ed mot or c i r cui t pr ot ect or s ( MCPs) , ar e component s of combi nat i on mot or cont r ol l er s r at her t han f uses or c i r cui t br eaker s and ar e per mi t t ed i f t he mot or shor t - c i r cui t pr ot ect or i s par t of a l i s t ed combi nat i on mot or controller.

**************************************************************************

Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors (MCPs): JIS C 8201-5-1 and JIS C 8201-2-1 , and provided as shown. Provide MSCPs that consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Rate MSCPs in accordance with MLIT ESS .

] 2.20 TRANSFORMERS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e t he l ocat i on of dr y- t ype t r ansf or mer s wi t h t he mechani cal desi gner t o ensur e adequat e vent i l at i on. Thi s speci f i cat i on does not appl y t o t r ansf or mer s over 500 kVA, subst at i on



t r ansf or mer s, and t r ansf or mer s r at ed gr eat er t han 600 vol t s; f or t hese t ypes, see Sect i on 26 12 19. 10 THREE- PHASE, LI QUI D- FI LLED PAD- MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS, Section 26 12 21 SI NGLE- PHASE PAD- MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS, or Sect i on 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS f or al l pr oj ect s; or Sect i on 26 11 13. 00 20 PRI MARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS f or Navy pr oj ect s; or Sect i on 26 11 14. 00 10 MAI N ELECTRI C SUPPLY STATI ON AND SUBSTATI ON f or Ar my pr oj ect s. Speci f y 80 C or 115 C t r ansf or mer s when t r ansf or mer i s l oaded above 60 per cent of namepl at e and has cont i nuous dut y cycl e. Del et e qui et t ype wher e noi se l evel does not af f ect per sonnel . Rel at i ve t o noi se: t he l east desi r abl e l ocat i on f or t he t r ansf or mer i s i n a cor ner of a r oom, especi al l y when t her e i s a l ow cei l i ng.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: NEMA ST 20 i s typically used as a r equi r ement f or gener al pur pose dr y- t ype t r ansf or mer s. Al t hough t hi s document has been wi t hdr awn by NEMA, i t i s st i l l used as a r equi r ement because manuf act ur er s st i l l use i t as a desi gn gui de.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de st ep down t r ansf or mer as necessar y f or Japan manuf act ur ed pr oduct s t hat ar e pr ovi ded power f r om t ypi cal US vol t age syst em r at i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide transformers in accordance with the following:

a. JEC 2200 and JIS C 61558-1 , general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled,[ ventilated][ unventilated][ sealed].

b. Provide transformers in indoor rated or weatherproof IP rated enclosure.

c. Transformer insulation system:

(1) 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, with temperature rise not exceeding[ 150][ 115][ 80] degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.

(2) 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding[ 150][ 115][ 80] degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.

[ d. Transformer of 150 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying continuously 100 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.

][ e. Transformer of 115 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying continuously 115 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.

][ f. Transformer of 80 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying



continuously 130 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.

][ g. Transformers: quiet type with maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated.

] 2.20.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ener gy St ar or ener gy ef f i c i ent t r ansf or mer s ar e gener al l y onl y avai l abl e i n vent i l at ed encl osur es, and not avai l abl e i n K- r at ed or qui et types.

**************************************************************************

Transformers, indicated and specified with: [420][440V][ 480V] primary, 80 degrees C or 115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results.

2.20.2 [ Transformers With Non-Linear Loads

**************************************************************************NOTE: Compl et e an anal ysi s of t he connect ed l oads t o det er mi ne t he har moni c cont ent s and t he appr opr i at e K- Fact or r at i ng. K- Fact or i s def i ned as

t he sum f r om h=1 t o i nf i ni t y of I h(pu) 2h2 wher e I h( pu) i s t he r ms cur r ent at har moni c " h" ( per uni t of r at ed r ms l oad cur r ent ) and h i s t he har moni c or der . Use K- 4 r at i ng when connect ed l oads ar e compr i sed of a l ar ge number of 100 per cent non- l i near s i ngl e phase el ect r oni c equi pment . Use K- 13 r at i ng when connect ed l oads ar e compr i sed of s i ngl e, l ar ge el ect r oni c l oads, or smal l number s of compar at i vel y l ar ge si ngl e phase l oads ( i . e. mai nf r ame comput er s or on- l i ne UPS syst ems) . Caut i on shoul d be used i n speci f y i ng K- r at i ngs above K- 13, as t he i mpedance gener al l y decr eases as t he K- r at i ngs i ncr ease. I mpedances bel ow 3 per cent ar e not r ecommended f or comput er l oads connect ed t o t r ansf or mer s wi t h hi gh K- r at i ngs, as even hi gher neut r al cur r ent s coul d r esul t and possi bl y cause mal f unct i ons or damage sensi t i ve l oad equi pment .

**************************************************************************

Provide transformers for non-linear loads in accordance JIS C 61000-4-7 .

] 2.21 MOTORS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mot or and mot or cont r ol l er speci f i cat i ons must be t hor oughl y coor di nat ed wi t h and cr oss- r ef er enced i n al l af f ect ed mechani cal sections.

**************************************************************************

Provide motors in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 4212 [ except provide fire pump motors as specified in Section



21 30 00 ] FIRE PUMPS.

b. Provide the size in terms of kW, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified.

c. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters.

d. Rate motors for operation on [200-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on [400][440] volt, 3 phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of [400][440] volts.][ 208-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts. ]

e. Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

f. Unless otherwise indicated, use continuous duty type motors if rated 745 Watts and above.

h. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

2.21.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors: high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in JIS C 4212 . In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.21.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in JIS C 4212 . In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors must meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with JIS C 4212 , including the full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.21.3 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp (746 watts) and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.



2.21.4 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment[, and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies, the conduit and wiring connecting such centers, assemblies, or other power sources to equipment] as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit: conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring: provided under, and conform to, the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.

2.22 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mot or and mot or cont r ol l er speci f i cat i ons must be t hor oughl y coor di nat ed wi t h and cr oss- r ef er enced i n al l af f ect ed mechani cal sect i ons. I ndi cat e NEMA si ze of cont r ol l er on mechani cal dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 8201-5-1 , JIS C 8201-4-1 and JIS C 8201-4-2 ,[ except fire pump controllers as specified in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS].

b. Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase, and one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact.

c. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp (746 kilowatt) and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage.

d. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

e. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector switch with the controller.

f. Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position.

g. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.

h. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.

[ i. Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position.

] j. Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative,



provide a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the open position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.

l. Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.

m. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position.

[ n. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller: [_____] rms symmetrical amperes.

][ o. Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated.

] 2.22.1 Control Wiring

Provide control wiring in accordance with the following:

a. All control wire: stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type CCE/F meeting JIS C 3401 , or Type CEE/F meeting JIS C 3401 , and passing the flame tests included in those standards.

b. Current transformer secondary leads: not smaller than 5.5 sqmm

c. Control wire minimum size: 1.6mm

d. Power wiring for [400][440][ 480 ] -volt circuits and below: the same type as control wiring with 2.0mm minimum size.

e. Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points.

2.22.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 8201-7-1 .

b. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring: molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.

c. Provide terminals with removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts.

d. Terminals: not less than 5.5 sqmm in size with sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 5.5 sqmmconductors to each terminal.

e. Terminal arrangement: subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, provided on each block or group of blocks.



f. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type.

g. Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts.

2.22.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks

a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks: furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks: comply with the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.

b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity: provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. Provide terminals of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, provide screws with hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Provide eEach connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.

2.22.3 Control Circuits

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose one of t he f ol l owi ng opt i ons.

**************************************************************************

[Control circuits: maximum voltage of [105][ 120 ] volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers: conform to JIS C 6436 , as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits: provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side.[ Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder]. Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded.[ For designated systems, as indicated, provide backup power supply, including transformers connected to[ emergency power source][_____]. Provide for automatic switchover and alarm upon failure of primary control circuit.]]

[Control circuits: maximum voltage of [105][ 120 ] volts derived from a separate control source. Provide terminals and terminal boards. Provide separate control disconnect switch within controller. Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded.[ For designated systems, as indicated, provide backup power supply, including connection to[ emergency power source][_____]. Provide for automatic switchover and alarm upon failure of primary control circuit.]]

2.22.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

**************************************************************************



NOTE: I ndi cat e weat her pr oof , st ai nl ess st eel encl osur e t ype per JI S C 0920. .

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8462-1 .

2.22.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers

Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked. Multiple-speed controllers: include compelling relays and multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.

2.22.6 Pushbutton Stations

Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor is running. Stations: heavy duty, oil-tight design.

2.22.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose one of t he f ol l owi ng br acket ed i t ems. LED cl ust er l amps have an appr oxi mat e l i f e of 20, 000 hour s and wi l l f i t i ncandescent l amp bases. I ncandescent l amps have an appr oxi mat e l i f e of 1, 000 hour s. LED col or s ar e r ed, amber , yel l ow, and gr een and ar e not avai l abl e i n c l ear or whi t e.

**************************************************************************

[Provide LED cluster lamps.][Provide transformer, resistor, or diode type.]

[ 2.22.8 Reduced-Voltage Controllers

**************************************************************************NOTE: The desi gner det er mi nes, based on t he power syst em char act er i st i cs, mot or usage, and vol t age dr op wher e r educed- vol t age cont r ol l er s ar e necessar y. See UFC 3- 520- 01 f or addi t i onal i nf or mat i on on sel ect i on and appl i cat i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide for polyphase motors [_____] kilowatt and larger. Reduced-voltage starters: single-step, closed transition[ autotransformer,][ reactor,][ primary resistor-type,][ solid state-type,] or as indicated, with an adjustable time interval between application of reduced and full voltages to motors.[ Wye-delta reduced voltage starter or part winding increment starter having adjustable time delay between application of voltage to first and second winding of motor may be used in lieu of the reduced-voltage starters for starting of[ motor-generator sets,][ centrifugally operated equipment,][ or][ reciprocating compressors provided with automatic unloaders].]

] 2.23 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)

[Single][Double][Three] pole designed for[ flush][ surface] mounting with overload protection[ and pilot lights].



2.23.1 Pilot Lights

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose ei t her t he i ncandescent or LED br acket ed sent ence.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide yoke-mounted, seven element LED cluster light module. Color:[ green][ red][ amber][ in accordance with JIS C 8201-4-1 and JIS C 8201-4-2].][Provide yoke-mounted, candelabra-base sockets rated 125 volts and fitted with glass or plastic jewels. Provide clear, 6 watt lamp in each pilot switch. Jewels for use with switches controlling motors: green; jewels for other purposes:[ white][ red][ amber].

] 2.24 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mot or cont r ol cent er shoul d be speci f i ed f or gr oups of l ar ge mot or s r equi r i ng coor di nat ed cont r ol . I n ot her appl i cat i ons, i ndi v i dual cont r ol l er s or mot or cont r ol panel boar ds shoul d be used. Gener al l y, mot or cont r ol cent er s shoul d be NEMA, Cl ass I , Type B. Coor di nat e cont r ol l er speci f i cat i ons wi t h t he mechani cal equi pment requirements.

NOTE: Cl ass I mot or cont r ol cent er s consi st of mechani cal gr oupi ngs of combi nat i on mot or - cont r ol uni t s, f eeder - t ap uni t s, ot her uni t s and el ect r i cal devi ces ar r anged i n a conveni ent assembl y. Cl ass I I mot or cont r ol cent er s ar e t he same as Cl ass I except wi t h t he addi t i on of manuf act ur er - f ur ni shed el ect r i cal i nt er l ocki ng and wi r i ng bet ween uni t s as speci f i cal l y descr i bed by t he desi gner on t he const r uct i on dr awi ngs

**************************************************************************

Provide motor control centers in accordance with the following:

a. JIS C 8201-4-1 , JIS C 8201-4-1 and JIS C 8201-4-2 .

b. Wiring: in [indoor][weatherproof][] IP rated enclosure per JIS C 0920 .

c. Provide control centers suitable for operation on [_____]-volt, [_____]-phase, [_____]-wire, [_____] Hz system with minimum short-circuit withstand and interrupting rating of[ 100,000][ 65,000][ 42,000][ 25,000][_____] amperes rms symmetrical.

d. Incoming power feeder: [ bus duct][ cable] entering at the[ top][ bottom] of enclosure and terminating on[ terminal lugs][ main protective device].

[ e. Main protective device: [ molded case circuit breaker][ low-voltage power circuit breaker][ fusible switch] rated at [_____] amperes rms symmetrical interrupting capacity.

][ f. Arrange busing so that control center can be expanded from both ends.



] g. Interconnecting wires: copper.

h. Terminal blocks: plug-in-type so that controllers may be removed without disconnecting individual control wiring.

2.24.1 Bus Systems

Provide the following bus systems. Power bus: be braced to withstand fault current of[ 100,000][ 65,000][ 42,000][ 25,000][_____] amperes rms symmetrical. Wiring troughs: isolated from horizontal and vertical bus bars.

2.24.1.1 Horizontal and Main Buses

**************************************************************************NOTE: 1, 600- amper e, 2, 000- amper e, and 2, 500- amper e r at i ngs ar e al so avai l abl e. However , equi pment at t hose r at i ngs may not be UL l i s t ed andhave not been i ncl uded as an opt i on.

**************************************************************************

Horizontal bus: continuous current rating of[ 600][ 800][ 1000][ 1200][_____] amperes. Main bus: [ aluminum, tin-plated][ copper, silver-plated] enclosed in isolated compartment at top of each vertical section. Main bus: isolated from wire troughs, starters, and other areas.

2.24.1.2 Vertical Bus

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect f r om t he br acket ed opt i ons bel ow. Hi gher r at i ngs mi ght be avai l abl e; however , equi pment at t hose r at i ngs may not be UL l i s t ed and have not been i ncl uded as an opt i on.

**************************************************************************

Vertical bus: continuous current rating of[ 300][ 450][ 600][_____] amperes, and [ aluminum, tin-plated][ copper, tin-plated][ copper, silver-plated]. Vertical bus: enclosed in flame-retardant, polyester glass "sandwich."

2.24.1.3 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus: provided full width of motor control center and equipped with necessary lugs.

[ 2.24.1.4 Neutral Bus

Insulated neutral bus: provided continuous through the motor control center; neutral full rated. Provide lugs of appropriate capacity, as required.

] [ 2.24.2 Combination Motor Controllers

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect Combi nat i on Mot or Cont r ol l er s i f r equi r ed by pr oj ect document s. Sel ect opt i ons bel ow and i ncl ude shor t c i r cui t r at i ng r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************



JIS C 8201-5-1 and other requirements in paragraph, MOTOR CONTROLLERS. Provide in controller a[ molded case circuit breaker][ fusible switch with clips for [_____]-type fuses for branch circuit protection].[ Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller: [_____] rms symmetrical amperes.][ Circuit breakers for combination controllers: [ thermal magnetic][ magnetic only].]

][ 2.24.3 Space Heaters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Heat er s shoul d be connect ed t o an ext er nal power sour ce i n i nst al l at i ons wher e t he mot or cont r ol cent er wi l l not be ener gi zed cont i nuousl y.

**************************************************************************

Provide space heaters where indicated on the drawings, controlled using an adjustable 10 to 35 degrees C thermostat, magnetic contactor, and a molded-case circuit breaker[ and a [ 480 ][400] - [ 120 ][100] volt single-phase transformer]. Provide space heaters equipped with 250-watt, [210][ 240 ] volt strip elements operated at [105][ 120 ] volts and [ supplied from the motor control center bus][ wired to terminal blocks for connection to [105][ 120 ] -volt single-phase power sources located external to the control centers]. Contactors: open type, electrically-held, rated 30 amperes, 2-pole, with 120-volt ac coils.

] 2.25 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS

Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with MLIT ESS . Comply with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.

2.26 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph pr ovi des i nf or mat i on r el at ed t o t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em r equi r ement s f or pat hway and el ect r i cal ser vi ce. Compl et e syst em cabl i ng and i nt er connect i ng har dwar e ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM, and Sect i on 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS OUTSI DE PLANT ( OSP) . Wher e Section 27 10 00 i s not pr ovi ded and an empt y condui t syst em i s r equi r ed f or t el ecommuni cat i ons ser vi ce, copy and past e t he subpar agr aph BACKBOARDS under t he maj or par agr aph COMMUNI TY ANTENNA TELEVI SI ON ( CATV) SYSTEM as a subpar agr aph t o t hi s paragraph.

**************************************************************************

Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires[ wireways,][ cable trays,] and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein.[ Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00 , BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.]



[ 2.27 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM

**************************************************************************NOTE: 1. Use par agr aph CATV OUTLETS and CATV FACEPLATES f or empt y condui t syst ems onl y, wher e cabl e i s not pr ovi ded i n t he pr oj ect . 2. Desi gner : pr ovi de r i ser di agr am of syst em on dr awi ngs and pr ovi de empt y condui t t o ext er i or l ocat i on f or CATV ser vi ce ent r ance. 3. Choose Sect i on 27 54 00. 00 20 COMMUNI TY ANTENNA TELEVI SI ON ( CATV) SYSTEMS f or Navy pr oj ect s and Sect i on 27 05 14. 00 10 CABLE TELEVI SI ON PREMI SES DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM f or Ar my pr oj ect s wher e compl et e CATV syst em i s pr ovi ded. Del et e par agr aphs CATV OUTLETS and CATV FACEPLATES when sect i on 27 54 00. 00 20 COMMUNI TY ANTENNA TELEVI SI ON ( CATV) or sect i on 27 05 14. 00 10 CABLE TELEVI SI ON PREMI SES DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM ar e used on t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

[Additional CATV requirements are specified in[ Section 27 54 00.00 20 , COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS.][ Section 27 05 14.00 10 , CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.]]

[ 2.27.1 CATV Outlets

Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes[ with isolation barrier] with mounting frame.

][ 2.27.2 CATV Faceplates

Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets.[ Faceplate: include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification.] Faceplate color: match outlet and switch coverplates.

][ 2.27.3 Backboards

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he f i r st br acket ed sent ence when pr ovi di ng an empt y condui t syst em or choose t he second br acket ed sent ence when Sect i on 27 10 00 i s used. When usi ng " as i ndi cat ed" opt i on, ensur e i nf or mat i on r equi r ed i s shown on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

[Provide void-free, fire rated interior grade plywood, 19 mm thick, [ 1200 by 2400 mm] [ as indicated]. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard.][ Coordinate CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00 , BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING.]

] ] 2.28 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect gr ound r od t ype. Most appl i cat i ons wi l l onl y need copper - c l ad st eel .

I n hi gh r esi st i v i t y soi l s, 3000 mm sect i onal r ods



may be used t o obt ai n t he r equi r ed r esi st ance t o gr ound; however , wher e r ock i s encount er ed, addi t i onal r ods, a gr ound r i ng el ect r ode, or gr ound gr i d may be necessar y. Coor di nat e and st andar di ze r od sel ect i on f or i ndi v i dual f aci l i t i es wi t h ot her speci f i cat i on sect i ons.

St andar d gr ound r ods f r om Japan ar e l i mi t ed t o 14mm di amet er and 1500mm l engt h. Pr ovi de addi t i onal gr ound r ods as r equi r ed t o obt ai n t he r equi r ed r esi st ance t o gr ound.

**************************************************************************

2.28.1 Ground Rods

JIS C 60364-5-54 . Ground rods: [ copper-clad steel][ solid copper][ stainless steel], with minimum diameter of 14mm and minimum length 1500mm. Sectional ground rods are permitted.

[ 2.28.2 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus: provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated.

] 2.28.3 Telecommunications [and CATV] Grounding Busbar

**************************************************************************NOTE: 1. Mi ni mum wi dt h f or t he t el ecommuni cat i ons mai n gr oundi ng busbar ( TMGB) i s 100 mm and f or t he t el ecommuni cat i ons gr oundi ng busbar ( TGB) i s 50 mm. Tel ecommuni cat i ons gr oundi ng busbar pr ovi des gr oundi ng t er mi nat i on f or voi ce, dat a and vi deo ( CATV) syst ems.

2. Choose t he br acket ed opt i on f or Tel ecommuni cat i on Gr oundi ng Busbar s ( TGB) when t her e ar e mor e t han one t el ecommuni cat i ons r oom or t el ecommuni cat i ons equi pment r ooms i ncl uded i n t he project.

**************************************************************************

Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for[ indoor][ outdoor] installation in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 . Busbars: plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, clean the busbar prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar and apply an anti-oxidant to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility[ and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms]. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB)[ and the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB)]: sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs,

b. Minimum dimensions of 6 mm thick by 100 mm wide for the TMGB[ and 50 mm wide for TGBs] with length as indicated;



c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

[ 2.29 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e ver y c l ear l y t he l i mi t s of al l hazar dous l ocat i ons. Edi t t he l ast sent ence f or act ual equi pment r equi r ed i n hazar dous l ocat i ons.

**************************************************************************

Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous locations, as defined by JIS : specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations: as indicated. Equipment in hazardous locations: comply with JIS C 60079-0 and JIS C 60079-14 for electrical equipment and industrial controls and JIS C 60079-0 and JIS C 60079-14 for motors.

] 2.30 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.31 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph wher e namepl at es ar e f abr i cat ed t o i dent i f y speci f i c equi pment desi gnat ed on t he dr awi ngs. Pr ovi de not e on panel boar d schedul es t o i ndi cat e wher e r ed l abel s ar e r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:

a. JIS K 6911 .

b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.

c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when applicable, the position.

d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 3 mm thick, white with [black] [_____] center core.

[ e. Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated.

] f. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.

g. Minimum size of nameplates: 25 by 65 mm .



h. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.

2.32 WARNING SIGNS

Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer in accordance with NFPA 70E and JIS Z 9101 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers . Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

2.33 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 , FIRESTOPPING.

2.34 WIREWAYS

Material: steel[ epoxy painted][ galvanized] 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 150 by 150 mm , and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 305 by 305 mm . Provide in length[ indicated][ required for the application] with[ hinged-][ screw-] cover enclosure per [indoor][weatherproof][hazardous] IP rated enclosure per JIS C 8462-1 .

[ 2.35 METERING

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude " met er i ng" i nf or mat i on when a s i ngl e- phase sel f cont ai ned met er base i s r equi r ed. Coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 26 12 21 SI NGLE- PHASE PAD- MOUNTED TRANSFORMER and Sect i on 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DI STRI BUTI ON. Appr opr i at e ver bi age shoul d be added t o i dent i f y t he ext er i or equi pment ( such as met er i ng, suppor t s, and di sconnect swi t ches) t hat woul d t hen be cover ed by t hi s sect i on. When a t hr ee- phase ser vi ce i s desi gned, modi f y met er r equi r ement s accor di ngl y.

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Kadena, met er i ng may r equi r e compl i ance wi t h AMRS speci f i cat i on. Desi gner shal l obt ai n t he cur r ent r equi r ement s f or t he AMRS el ect r i c met er f r om t he Kadena Base I nst al l at i on Ener gy Manager .

**************************************************************************

JIS C 1210 . Provide a self-contained, socket-mounted, electronic programmable outdoor watthour meter. Meter: either programmed at the factory or programmed in the field. Turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Coordinate meter to system requirements. [Metering shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS) specification.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: For m 2S, i n t ext bel ow, i s f or s i ngl e- phase, t hr ee- wi r e syst ems. For ot her syst em conf i gur at i ons, det er mi ne t he appr opr i at e f or m desi gnat i on. Cl ass 200 met er s ar e f or 100A and 200A ser vi ces.

**************************************************************************



a. Design: Provide watthour meter designed for use on a single-phase, three-wire, [210/105] [ 240/120] [440/254][420/242] [480/240] volt system. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

b. Class: 200; Form: [ 2S][_____], accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent; Finish: Class II.

c. Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal.

d. Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type.

e. Demand Register:

(1) Provide solid state.

(2) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.

(3) Demand interval length: programmed for[ 15][ 30][ 60] minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Socket: JIS C 1210 . Provide [weatherproof][] IP rated , box-mounted socket, ringless, having[ manual circuit-closing bypass and having] jaws compatible with requirements of the meter. Provide manufacturers standard enclosure color unless otherwise indicated.

][ 2.36 METER BASE ONLY

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use METER BASE ONLY par agr aph f or pr oj ect s wher e met er s ar e not cur r ent l y r equi r ed, but may be r equi r ed i n t he f ut ur e, f or exampl e, mi l i t ar y housi ng uni t s.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 1210 . Provide [weatherproof][] IP rated , box-mounted socket, ringless, having jaws compatible with requirements of a class: 200 and Form: [ 2S][_____] self contained watthour meter. Provide gray plastic closing cover and bypass links. Provide manufacturers standard enclosure color unless otherwise indicated.

] 2.37 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sur ge pr ot ect i on shoul d be pr ovi ded f or t he f ol l owi ng t ypes of f aci l i t i es: Medi cal f aci l i t i es; Ai r navi gat i on ai ds and f aci l i t i es; Pet r ol eum, oi l and l ubr i cant ( POL) st or age and di spensi ng f aci l i t i es; Cr i t i cal ut i l i t y pl ant s and syst ems; Communi cat i on f aci l i t i es and t el ephone exchanges; Fi r e st at i ons, i ncl udi ng f i r e al ar m, f i r e cont r ol and r adi o equi pment ; Cr i t i cal comput er aut omat i c dat a pr ocessi ng f aci l i t i es; Ai r t r af f i c cont r ol f aci l i t i es; Base weat her st at i ons; Sur vei l l ance and war ni ng f aci l i t i es; Command and cont r ol f aci l i t i es; Weapon syst ems; Secur i t y l i ght i ng syst ems; Mi ssi on, pr oper t y and l i f e suppor t f aci l i t i es at r emot e and



not r eadi l y accessi bl e s i t es.

Consi der sur ge pr ot ect i on f or al l t ypes of f aci l i t i es l ocat ed i n r egi ons wi t h a hi gh l i ght ni ng st r i ke pr obabi l i t y ( r ef er t o I EEE C62. 41. 1 and C62. 41. 2) and f aci l i t i es l ocat ed near commer ci al ut i l i t y syst ems wi t h r out i ne subst at i on capaci t or switching.

Ref er t o UFC 3- 520- 01 f or addi t i onal cr i t er i a.**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Whenever possi bl e, connect sur ge pr ot ect or s t o a spar e c i r cui t br eaker i n t he associ at ed panel . Locat e t he sur ge pr ot ect or s i mmedi at el y adj acent t o t he pr ot ect ed equi pment .

I t i s not necessar y t o pr ovi de sur ge pr ot ect i on on al l panel boar ds; t he sel ect i on of whi ch panel boar ds shoul d have sur ge pr ot ect i ve devi ces depends on t he i mpor t ance of t he l oads ser ved and t he sensi t i v i t y of el ect r oni c equi pment connect ed t o t he c i r cui t s.

Swi t chi ng l oads such as mot or cont r ol cent er s shoul d have sur ge pr ot ect i on t o l i mi t t he t r ansmi ssi on of swi t chi ng t r ansi ent s t o t he r est of t he f aci l i t y .

HVAC equi pment usual l y cont ai n el ect r oni c cont r ol s t hat ar e sensi t i ve t o sur ges.

**************************************************************************

Provide surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with JIS C 5381-11 and JIS C 5381-12 at the service entrance[, load centers] [, panelboards] [, MCC] [and] [_____]. Provide surge protectors in a [indoor][weatherproof] IP rated enclosure per JIS C 8462-1 . Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he br acket ed sect i on bel ow when sur ge pr ot ect i on i s i nst al l ed as par t of a l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on syst em per NFPA 780.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide SPDs per JIS Z 9290-1 for the lightning protection system.

] 2.38 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph cover s onl y t he basi c pai nt i ng r equi r ement s f or most el ect r i cal equi pment . I ncl ude any speci al f i ni shes f or hi gh or l ow t emper at ur es and cor r osi ve at mospher es.

**************************************************************************

Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:



a. JIS C 0920 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.

b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.

c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.

d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.

e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.

f. Equipment located indoors: Light Gray,[ and equipment located outdoors: [ Light Gray][ Dark Gray]].

g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

2.39 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.39.1 Transformer Factory Tests

Submittal: include routine JEC 2200 and JIS C 61558-1 transformer test results on each transformer and also provide the results of Japanese standard "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified.

[ 2.40 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use on Navy pr oj ect s.

NOTE: The r equi r ement f or st udi es i n t hi s par agr aph depends on t he compl exi t y and ext ent of t he power syst em. Del et e t hi s r equi r ement f or pr oj ect s of l i mi t ed scope, pr oj ect s havi ng pr ot ect i ve devi ces whi ch ar e not adj ust abl e or f or whi ch coor di nat i on i s not possi bl e ( st andar d mol ded case ci r cui t br eaker s) ; pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om an exi st i ng t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) ; or pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om a new t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) .

**************************************************************************

Prepare analyses as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.

] PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations



and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements of MLIT ESS , IEEE C2 , JIS C 0365 and to requirements specified herein.

[ 3.1.1 Underground Service

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t hi s par agr aph or t he par agr aph, OVERHEAD SERVI CE. When usi ng t hi s par agr aph, desi gner may i nser t addi t i onal det ai l s descr i bi ng t he speci f i c pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.

][ 3.1.2 Overhead Service

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use Sect i on 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DI STRI BUTI ON f or over head ser vi ce r equi r ement s ( t ypi cal t hr oughout t hi s sect i on) .

**************************************************************************

Overhead service conductors into buildings: terminate at service entrance fittings or weatherhead outside building. Overhead service conductors and support bracket for overhead conductors are included in[ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.]

][ 3.1.3 Hazardous Locations

Perform work in hazardous locations, as defined by applicable codes and standards , for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Provide conduit and cable seals where required. Provide conduit with tapered threads.

] 3.1.4 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled and identified as such.

3.1.4.1 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, label each enclosure, new and existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 6.35 mm in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure: provided only as permitted.

3.1.5 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit or type G , IMC or type C , rigid nonmetallic conduit or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride , or EMT or Type E , except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide



insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways.[ Shared neutral, or multi-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit interrupters.] Minimum conduit size: 16 mm in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 150 mm . Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00 , FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.5.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum 890-N force tensile strength. Leave minimum 915 mm of slack at each end of pull wire.

[ 3.1.5.2 Metal Clad Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type MC cabl e i s UL l i s t ed; NFPA 70 i s r ecogni zed f or most common bui l di ng appl i cat i ons. MC cabl e does not pr ot ect conduct or s as wel l as r i gi d condui t but i s mor e f l exi bl e t o i nst al l and relocate.

**************************************************************************

Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements , Type MC cable.

][ 3.1.5.3 Armored Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type AC cabl e has mor e r est r i ct ed appl i cat i ons t han MC cabl e but of f er s t he same advant ages. Revi ew NFPA 70.

**************************************************************************

Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements , Type AC cable.

][ 3.1.5.4 Flat Conductor Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type FCC cabl e has been l i s t ed by UL and r ecogni zed by NFPA 70 f or under car pet t i l e appl i cat i ons. FCC cabl e i s avai l abl e of f t he shel f f or power , and t el ecommuni cat i ons t r ansmi ssi on applications.

**************************************************************************

Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements , Type FCC cable.

] 3.1.6 Conduit Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e exposed condui t i s i nst al l ed and subj ect t o vandal i sm or mi suse, such as i n t oi l et or l ocker r ooms, do not al l ow per pendi cul ar or r i ght angl e t o cei l i ng st r uct ur al member s. Pr ovi de det ai l s on dr awi ngs t o i dent i f y speci al t r eat ment s or of f set s as needed.



**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************Do not i nst al l exposed condui t syst ems i n i nmat e housi ng ar eas and ot her ar eas nor mal l y accessi bl e t o i nmat es unl ess such i nst al l at i ons ar e speci f i cal l y i ndi cat ed. Wher e exposed condui t i s i ndi cat ed, pr ovi de r i gi d met al l i c t ype condui t and cast met al - t ype out l et boxes wi t h t hr eaded hubs. I nst al l condui t s f l at agai nst wal l ; of f set s or " k i cks" ar e per mi t t ed onl y t o ent er out l et box. Suppor t condui t s on 1525 mm maxi mum cent er s and wi t hi n 305 mm of each out l et box usi ng t wo- hol e condui t st r aps at t ached t o sur f ace wi t h nonr emovabl e br eak of f secur i t y t ype bol t s.

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Japan, i nt er i or condui t r out i ng i s t ypi cal l y i n t he cei l i ng spaces vi ce wi t hi n concr et e s l ab unl ess ot her wi se i ndi cat ed.

**************************************************************************

Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 150 mm away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.[ Run conduits[ in crawl space][ under floor slab] as if exposed.]

3.1.6.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT or Type E

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT or Type E conduit .

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.

g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

[ 3.1.6.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit or Type VE, HIVE, VP, HIVP

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80 or Type VE, HIVE, VP, HIVP

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile magazines, and other such areas.



(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.

(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms.

(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.

(5) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

] 3.1.6.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.6.4 Underground Conduit

**************************************************************************NOTE: Soi l condi t i ons i n some l ocat i ons r equi r e t hat under gr ound condui t be suppor t ed t o pr event damage due t o set t l ement . The desi gner det er mi nes i f t he pr obl em exi st s, and, i f so, det er mi nes t he best met hod f or suppor t i ng t he condui t .

**************************************************************************

Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC or type C, LL or LT ; PVC, Type EPC-40 or Type VE, HIVE, VP, HIVP . Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 or Type VE, HIVE, VP, HIVP , to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor slab. Plastic coating: extend minimum 150 mm above floor.

[ 3.1.6.5 Conduit Interior to Buildings for 400 Hz Circuits

Aluminum or nonmetallic. Where 400-Hz circuit runs underground or through concrete, provide PVC Schedule[ 40][ 80] or Type VE, HIVE, VP, HIVP conduit.

] 3.1.6.6 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts

Rigid metal conduit or Type G only.

3.1.6.7 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner must c l osel y coor di nat e wi t h t he desi gn of bui l di ng f l oor s l ab and soi l condi t i ons and eval uat e t he accept abi l i t y of condui t bei ng i nst al l ed di r ect l y beneat h t he f l oor s l ab. Consi der whet her i t wi l l be necessar y t o suppor t condui t i n case of soi l set t l ement pr obl ems and vapor bar r i er penet r at i ons. Pr ovi de det ai l s on t he dr awi ngs t o c l ar i f y speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************



Conduit run under floor slab: located a minimum of [305] [_____] mm below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.6.8 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab.

[ 3.1.6.9 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs

**************************************************************************NOTE: When t hi s opt i on i s i ncl uded, ( such as i n BEQ' s and si mi l ar pr oj ect s wi t h pr ecast pl anks and t oppi ng sl abs) , i ndi cat e speci f i c l ocat i ons and pr ovi de i nst al l at i on det ai l s on t he el ect r i cal dr awi ngs. El ect r i cal desi gner must c l osel y coor di nat e t hi s i nf or mat i on wi t h t he desi gner of t he s l ab t o ensur e t hat s l ab t hi ckness, condui t pl acement / separ at i on, and r ei nf or cement spaci ng i s suf f i c i ent t o meet r equi r ement s of t hi s par agr aph. Do not speci f y met al condui t i n concr et e t hat cont ai ns cor al aggr egat e or i s made wi t h sal t or br acki sh wat er . Thi s t ype of concr et e i s r ar el y allowed.

For Navy pr oj ect s, use second br acket ed opt i on, l i mi t i ng condui t t ype t o PVC EPC- 40, unl ess r equi r ed ot her wi se f or medi cal f aci l i t i es.

**************************************************************************

[Rigid steel or Type G ; steel IMC or Type C ; fiberglass, or PVC, Type EPC-40.][PVC, Type EPC-40, unless indicated otherwise.] Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab.[ Do not stack conduits.][ Do not stack conduits more than two diameters high with minimum vertical separation of [_____] mm.] Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends must not be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum 25 mm cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings must allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than 27 mm trade size: installed parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, install conduit close to one of supports of slab.[ Where nonmetallic conduit is used, convert raceway to plastic coated rigid steel or Type G or plastic coated steel IMC or Type C; LL or LT before rising above floor, unless specifically indicated.]

] 3.1.6.10 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 150 mm above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.



3.1.6.11 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 40 mm in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 20 mm in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations.[ Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 3050 mm maximum intervals.] Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable[ watertight] expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 63 mm inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.6.12 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.6.13 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required.

3.1.6.14 Flexible Connections

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, do not use f l exi bl e nonmet al l i c condui t .

**************************************************************************

Provide flexible steel conduit between 915 and 1830 mm in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures[; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors]. Install



flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 16 mm diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible[ nonmetallic] conduit in wet and damp locations[ and in fire pump rooms] for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.6.15 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway

**************************************************************************NOTE: For gui del i nes on condui t s i z i ng, see UFC 3- 580- 01, " Tel ecommuni cat i ons Bui l di ng Cabl i ng Syst em Pl anni ng, Desi gn" and NFPA 70.

**************************************************************************

Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room: installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with JIS X 5150 . Size conduits[, wireways][, and cable trays] in accordance with JIS X 5150 [ and][ as indicated].

b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling): installed in accordance with JIS X 5150 . Size conduits[, wireways][, and cable trays] for telecommunications risers in accordance with JIS X 5150 [ and][ as indicated].

[ 3.1.6.16 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he br acket ed i t em dependi ng on t he CATV syst em desi gn. Del et e t hi s par agr aph i f an empt y condui t CATV syst em i s not used.

**************************************************************************

Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires[ wireways,][ cable trays,] and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway in accordance with JIS X 5150 . [Provide distribution system with star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet box to the telecommunications room and empty conduit and pullwire from each telecommunications room to the headend equipment location][Provide distribution system with star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet to the headend equipment location].

] 3.1.7 Busway Installation

Install busways parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support busways at 1525 mm maximum intervals, and brace to prevent lateral movement. Provide fixed type hinges on risers; spring-type are unacceptable. Provide flanges where busway makes penetrations through walls and floors, and seal to maintain smoke and fire ratings. Provide waterproof curb where busway riser passes through floor. Seal gaps with fire-rated foam and caulk. Provide expansion joints, but only where bus duct crosses building expansion joints. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.



3.1.8 Cable Tray Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, use t he second br acket ed par agr aph. I ncl ude br acket ed second sent ence wher e cabl e t r ay i s used f or t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em.

**************************************************************************

[ Install and ground in accordance with manufacturer's instructions .[ In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with JIS X 5150 , and JIS C 60364-5-54 ]. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support[ in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than [1830] [_____] mm intervals][ as indicated].[ Coat contact surfaces of aluminum connections with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly.] Adjacent cable tray sections: bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide 38 sqmm bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use 60 sqmm aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 255 mm from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Install conductors run through smoke and fire partitions in 103 mm rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 305 mm beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Firestop penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 , FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

][ Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support[ as indicated][ at maximum [1830] [_____] mm] intervals.[ In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with JIS X 5150 , and JIS C 60364-5-54 ][ Coat contact surfaces of aluminum connections with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly.] Ensure edges, fittings, and hardware are finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Provide 38 sqmm AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section. Use 60 sqmm aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Install conductors that run though smoke and fire partitions in 103 mm rigid steel conduits with grounding bushing, extending 305 mm beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

] [ 3.1.9 Telecommunications Cable Support Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ut i l ze open t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl e suppor t s ( J- Hooks / J- Suppor t s / D- r i ngs) onl y as speci f i cal l y per mi t t ed i n UFC 3- 580- 01, Tel ecommuni cat i ons, Bui l di ng Cabl i ng Syst em.

**************************************************************************

Install open top and closed ring cable supports on 1.2 m to 1.5 m centers to adequately support and distribute the cable’s weight. Use these types of supports to support a maximum of 50 6.4 mm diameter cables. Install suspended cables with at least 75 mm of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels (T-bars). Open top and closed ring cable supports: suspended from or attached to the structural ceiling or



walls with hardware or other installation aids specifically designed to support their weight.

] 3.1.10 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces,[ when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 2135 mm above floors and walkways,][ or when installed in hazardous areas] and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic[ sheathed cable] conduit system. Provide each box with volume required for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 100 mm square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel.[ Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts[ or nail-type nylon anchors] may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine screws.] In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 610 mm from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.10.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 40 mm deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 100 mm square, except that 100 by 50 mm boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets: a minimum of [ 100 mm square by 54 mm deep][ 120 mm square by 54 mm deep] [, except for [wall mounted telephones] [and] [outlet boxes for handicap telephone stations]]. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.

3.1.10.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required [ of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel,][ and][ compatible with nonmetallic raceway systems,] except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.



[ 3.1.10.3 Extension Rings

Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish.

] 3.1.11 Mounting Heights

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n Hazar dous Ar eas ext endi ng up t o 455 mm above t he f i ni shed f l oor , t he mount i ng hei ght of r ecept acl es t hat ar e not expl osi on- pr oof , must be measur ed t o t he bot t om of t he out l et box i n l i eu of t o t he cent er . Coor di nat e t he mount i ng hei ght wi t h t he hei ght i ndi cat ed on t he dr awi ngs and use t he l ast br acket ed sent ence.

**************************************************************************

Mount panelboards,[ enclosed] circuit breakers,[ motor controller] and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 1980 mm above floor. Mount lighting switches[ and handicapped telecommunications stations][ 1220 mm above finished floor]. Mount receptacles[ and telecommunications outlets] 460 mm above finished floor[, unless otherwise indicated].[ Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: mounted at height[ 1525 mm above finished floor][ indicated].] [ Mount other devices as indicated.][ Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets[ in non-hazardous areas ]to center of device or outlet.][ Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in the[ hazardous area][_____] to the bottom of the outlet box.]

[ 3.1.12 Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph onl y when Type NM or NMC cabl e i s i ndi cat ed.

**************************************************************************

Where possible, install cables concealed behind ceiling or wall finish. Thread cables through holes bored on approximate centerline of wood members; notching of end surfaces is not permitted. Provide sleeves through concrete or masonry for threading cables. Install exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to walls or structural members. Protect exposed nonmetallic sheathed cables less than 1220 mm above floors from mechanical injury by installation in conduit or tubing. When cable is used in metal stud construction, insert plastic stud grommets in studs at each point through which cable passes, prior to installation of cable.

][ 3.1.13 Mineral Insulated, Metal Sheathed (Type MI) Cable Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type MI cabl e used f or l ow t emper at ur e, hi gh t emper at ur e, hazar dous l ocat i ons, l i f e saf et y, and heat i ng appl i cat i ons. Ref er t o NFPA 70. Cl ear l y show on dr awi ngs t he MI cabl e. Consi der sur ge suppr essor s i n hazar dous l ocat i ons and wher e hi gh vol t age sur ges ar e l i kel y. MI cabl e i s not avai l abl e i n r at i ngs above 600 vol t s.

**************************************************************************



Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable system, Type MI, may be used in lieu of exposed conduit and wiring. Conductor sizes: not less than those indicated for the conduit installation. Fasten cables within 305 mm of each turn or offset and at 830 mm maximum intervals. Make cable terminations in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations. Terminate single-conductor cables of a circuit, having capacities of more than 50 amperes, in a single box or cabinet opening. Color code individual conductors in all outlets and cabinets.

] 3.1.14 Conductor Identification

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ref er ence t he sect i on pr ovi di ng det ai l s of i dent i f y i ng cont r ol c i r cui t wi r i ng. Use Sect i on 23 09 53. 00 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS f or Navy pr oj ect s onl y .

**************************************************************************

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors 14 sqmm and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors 22 sqmm and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with [ Section 23 09 53.00 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS.][ Section [_____], [_____]][ Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC][ manufacturer's recommendations].[ Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.]

3.1.14.1 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:

a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.

b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or provide two marking strips with each block.

d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.

e. Assign a device designation in accordance with JIS C 8201-4-1 and JIS C 8201-4-2 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.

f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Government's wire designations.

g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any



rearrangement of points required.

3.1.15 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors 5.5 sqmm and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors 8 sqmm and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.16 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 0.58 mm . Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.17 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.18 Grounding and Bonding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use r ef er ence t o NFPA 780 and l ast br acket ed sent ence wher e l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on i s pr ovi ded. I n addi t i on, s i ze and i ndi cat e t he gr oundi ng el ect r ode conduct or i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 780. Coor di nat e r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 26 41 00 LI GHTNI NG PROTECTI ON SYSTEM.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide in accordance with JIS Z 9290-1 ]. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment,[ access flooring support system,] metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, [grounding conductor of nonmetallic sheathed cables, ]and neutral conductor of wiring systems.[ Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode.][ Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building.][ Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This includes lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Make interconnection to the gas line on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system.] In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 . Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.



3.1.18.1 Ground Rods

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use chemi cal l y char ged gr ound r ods wi t hout aut hor i zat i on of t he l ocal Act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

Provide cone pointed ground rods. Measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in JIS C 60364-6 . Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod,[_____] additional rods, spaced on center, not less than twice the distance of the length of the rod,[ or if sectional type rods are used,[_____] additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod].[ In high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used.] If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.18.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible,[ excepting specifically those connections for which access for periodic testing is required,] by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.18.3 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of[ transformer neutrals and other electrical][ electrical] equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 100 mm above the floor. Make connections and splices of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.[ For raised floor equipment rooms in computer and data processing centers, provide a minimum of 4, one at each corner, ground buses connected to the building grounding system. Use bolted connections in lieu of thermoweld, so they can be changed as required by additions and/or alterations.]

3.1.18.4 Resistance

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f di f f i cul t i es ar e encount er ed i n obt ai ni ng t he pr oper r esi st ance, t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l



make a deci s i on on t he number of gr ound r ods t o be used, based on l ocal condi t i ons and on t he t ype and si ze of el ect r i cal i nst al l at i on i n t he pr oj ect . I nsul at ed gr oundi ng conduct or s wi l l be r equi r ed wher e el ect r ol yt i c cor r osi on may be encount er ed. I n most appl i cat i ons, i t i s desi r abl e t o have a maxi mum r esi st ance of much l ess, t ypi cal l y 5 ohms or l ess. NFPA 70, appr oves t he use of a s i ngl e made el ect r ode f or t he syst em- gr oundi ng el ect r ode, i f i t s r esi st ance does not exceed 25 ohms.

**************************************************************************

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed[ 5][_____] ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds[ 5][_____] ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.18.5 Telecommunications System

**************************************************************************NOTE: 1. I ncl ude t hi s par agr aph when t el ecommuni cat i ons ser vi ce i s pr ovi ded i n j ob and speci f i ed i n t hi s sect i on and ot her sect i ons. 2. Choose t he br acket ed opt i on f or Tel ecommuni cat i on Gr oundi ng Busbar s ( TGB) when t her e ar e mor e t han one t el ecommuni cat i ons r oom or t el ecommuni cat i ons equi pment r ooms i ncl uded i n t he project. 3. Choose Tel ecommuni cat i ons Bondi ng Conduct or s br acket ed opt i on when mor e t han one t el ecommuni cat i ons gr oundi ng busbar i s i nst al l ed as par t of t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. Install the TMGB as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable.[ Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms. Install the TGB as close to the telecommunications room panelboard as practicable, when equipped. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is not installed in the telecommunications room, locate the TGB near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In addition, locate the TGB to provide for the shortest and straightest routing of the grounding conductors. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located within the same room or space as a TGB, bond that panelboard’s alternating current equipment ground (ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard enclosure to the TGB.] Install telecommunications grounding busbars to maintain clearances as required and insulated from its support. A minimum of 50 mm separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and adjust the mounting height to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily



accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 1 m in length, bond the conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a 14 sqmm conductor, minimum.[ Provide a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) that originates at the TMGB extends throughout the building using the telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects to the TGBs in all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. Install the TBB conductors such that they are protected from physical and mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be installed without splices and routed in the shortest possible straight-line path. Make the bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be a minimum. Make the splices accessible and located in telecommunications spaces. Connect joined segments of a TBB using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. Install all joints to be adequately supported and protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multistory building, bond the TBBs together with a grounding equalizer (GE) at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in between. Do not connect the TBB and GE to the pathway ground, except at the TMGB or the TGB.]

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding connections to the TMGB[ or TGB]: utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. Bond all metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB[ or TGB] to the TMGB[ or TGB respectively]. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; bond each TMGB[ and TGB] to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum 14 sqmm conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, bond the metal frame to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum 14 sqmm conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building must be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.19 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.

3.1.20 Elevator

**************************************************************************NOTE: To achi eve a compl et e speci f i cat i on, t he ensur e t hat t he cont r ol s f or HVAC, f i r e al ar m syst em, el evat or s, cr anes, and speci al syst ems ar e def i ni t el y and pr oper l y cover ed by t he ot her sect i ons of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on. Shoul d



cont r ol s appear i n t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on, modi f y t hi s par agr aph accor di ngl y. I ndi cat e on t he dr awi ngs r equi r ed equi pment connect i ons. Coor di nat e el evat or par agr aph wi t h Section 14 21 13 ELECTRI C TRACTI ON FREI GHT ELEVATORS or Sect i on 14 21 23 ELECTRI C TRACTI ON PASSENGER ELEVATORS and Sect i on 14 24 13 HYDRAULI C FREI GHT ELEVATORS or 14 24 23 HYDRAULI C PASSENGER ELEVATORS f or al l pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft, and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.

[ 3.1.21 Government-Furnished Equipment

Contractor[ rough-in for Government-furnished equipment][ make connections to Government-furnished equipment] to make equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet boxes or fittings.

] 3.1.22 Repair of Existing Work

Perform repair of existing work[, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems] as follows:

3.1.22.1 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.

3.1.22.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed

Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through walls; and seal openings.

[ 3.1.22.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System

Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings,[ back to equipment's power source] as indicated.

][ 3.1.22.4 Continuation of Service

Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Maintain existing circuits of equipment energized. Restore circuits wiring and power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to original condition.

] [ 3.1.23 Watthour Meters

JIS C 1210 .



] 3.1.24 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 900 mm .

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use and coor di nat e pai nt and coat i ng r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS when pr ovi ded i n t he j ob. Use t he second br acket ed opt i on when Sect i on 09 90 00 i s not pr ovi ded or when r equi r ement s ar e beyond what i s speci f i ed i n Sect i on 09 90 00.

**************************************************************************

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. [Painting: as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.][Where field painting of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is specified to match adjacent surfaces, to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance to manufacturer's instructions.]


**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de any addi t i onal t est r equi r ement s f or equi pment r equi r i ng r unni ng t est s or t est s t hat must be coor di nat ed wi t h mechani cal equi pment .

**************************************************************************

Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer[ 5][_____] working days notice prior to[ each][_____] test[s].

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring



14 sqmm and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of 1,000 volts DC for 600 volt rated wiring and 500 volts DC for 300 voltrated wiring to provide direct reading of resistance. Allexisting wiring to be reused shall also be tested.

3.5.3 Transformer Tests

Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in Denki Hoan Kyoukai and MLIT DSKKS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.

3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f Gr ound- Faul t Recept acl e " l i ne" and " l oad" l eads ar e r ever sed, " t est " wi l l t r i p downst r eam l oads but not t r i p t he r ecept acl e.

Sel ect t he f i r st br acket ed opt i on i f gr ound- f aul t c i r cui t i nt er r upt er r ecept acl es ar e pr ovi ded. Sel ect t he second br acket ed opt i on i f Japanese gr ound f aul t pr ot ect i on i s pr ovi ded.

**************************************************************************

[ Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed. ][Test RCBO circuit breakers in accordance with JIS C 8222 , Annex G.]

3.5.5 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

[ 3.5.6 Watthour Meter


(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance



with approved shop drawings.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.

] -- End of Section --



**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 23 00 ( May 2015) Change 1 - 08/ 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 26 23 00 ( Jul y 2006)



SECTION 26 23 00

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR05/15


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s i s a r evi sed gui de speci f i cat i on t hat , i n par t , r epl aces 26 23 00, SWI TCHBOARDS AND SWI TCHGEAR. The or i gi nal gui de speci f i cat i on was separ at ed i nt o t wo speci f i cat i ons: 26 23 00, LOW- VOLTAGE SWI TCHGEAR, and 26 24 13, SWI TCHBOARDS.

Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or met al - encl osed l ow- vol t age power c i r cui t - br eaker swi t chgear assembl i es i n ei t her i nt er i or or ext er i or l ocat i ons. Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s i nt ended f or al t er nat i ng cur r ent appl i cat i ons; addi t i onal edi t i ng wi l l be necessar y t o t ai l or i t f or di r ect cur r ent applications.

Per UFC 3- 520- 01, speci f y met al - encl osed swi t chgear f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment onl y when t he ser vi ce i s 1200 amper es or l ar ger , and al l br anch and f eeder c i r cui t s ar e l ar ge, such as 600 amper es or 800 amper es each. Speci f y swi t chboar ds i n accor dance with 26 24 13 SWI TCHBOARDS f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment when t he ser vi ce i s 1200 amper es or l ar ger , and br anch and f eeder c i r cui t s ar e combi ned si zes f r om 20 amper es up t o 800 amper es. Ut i l i ze swi t chboar ds t hr oughout t he di st r i but i on syst em wher e f eeder s ar e 1200 amper es or l ar ger .

When t he pr oposed swi t chgear i s connect ed t o a secondar y uni t subst at i on, coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s not i nt ended t o be used f or gener at or cont r ol swi t chgear wi t hout ext ensi ve



modi f i cat i on and coor di nat i on wi t h appl i cabl e engi ne- gener at or set gui de speci f i cat i ons.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ver i f y t hat t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on i s i ndi cat ed on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs:

1. Si ngl e- l i ne di agr am showi ng buses and i nt er r upt i ng devi ces wi t h i nt er r upt i ng capaci t i es; cur r ent t r ansf or mer s wi t h r at i ngs; i nst r ument s and met er s r equi r ed; and descr i pt i on of i nst r ument s and meters.

2. Locat i on, space avai l abl e, ar r angement , and el evat i ons of swi t chgear .


4. Type and number of cabl es, s i ze of conduct or s f or each power c i r cui t , and poi nt of ent r y ( t op or bottom).

5. Speci al condi t i ons, such as al t i t ude, t emper at ur e and humi di t y, exposur e t o f umes, vapor s, dust , and gases; and sei smi c r equi r ement s.

6. Ar c f l ash l abel r equi r ement s. Downl oad t he l abel f or mat at http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

7. Avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent l abel f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment . Downl oad t he l abel f or mat at http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

8. Locat i ons wi t h ar c ener gy r educt i on met hods specified.

****************************************************************************************************************************************************

NOTE: For Honshu and Kyushu, t ypi cal vol t age r at i ngs ar e: Pr i mar y Vol t age Rat i ngs: 77kV, 66kV, 33kV, 22kV,



6. 6kV, 3. 3kV Secondar y Vol t age Rat i ngs: 440V, 440/ 254V, 420/ 242V, 220V, 210V, 210/ 105V, 208/ 120V





**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e. Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es. Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan Industrial Standard (JIS) or Japan Electrical Safety Inspection Associations for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.


IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)



National Electrical Safety Code




JIS B 1048 (2007) Fasteners - Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings



JIS C 1731-1 (1998) Instrument Transformers for Testing Purpose and Used with General Instrument Part 1: Current Transformer

JIS C 2110-1 (2016) Solid electrical insulation materials-Test methods for strength of dielectric breakdown-Part 1: Tests by applying commercial frequency alternating voltage


JIS C 8201-1 (2007) Low-voltage switchgear and control unit-Part 1: General rules



JIS C 8462-1 (2012) Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for household and similar fixed electrical installations -- Part 1: General requirements







JIS C 61000-4-5 (2018) Electromagnetic compatibility-Part 4-5: Test and measurement techniques- Surge immunity test


JIS K 6912 (1995) Laminated Thermosetting Sheets

JIS G 3352 (2014) Deck Plate

JIS G 4304 (2012) Hot-Rolled Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip


JIS Z 2371 (2015) Methods of Salt Spray Testing





**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude Sect i on 26 08 00 APPARATUS I NSPECTI ON AND TESTI NG on al l pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng medi um vol t age and speci al i zed power di st r i but i on equi pment

**************************************************************************


1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS


The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have



desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G. " Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a " G" t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .




**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor QC approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 , SUSTAINABITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Switchgear Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Switchgear ; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Switchgear Design Tests ;

Switchgear Production Tests ;





Switchgear Operation and Maintenance , Data Package 5;

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals ;

Equipment Test Schedule ;

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect " Request f or Set t i ngs" bel ow i f pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs wi l l be gover nment f ur ni shed. Sel ect " Requi r ed Set t i ngs" bel ow i f pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs ar e f ur ni shed by t he Desi gner of Recor d. Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he f i nal pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d pr oj ect s. Do not r el y on t he manuf act ur er ' s def aul t set t i ngs.

**************************************************************************

[ Request for Settings ;

][ Required Settings ; ]

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 Ar t i c l e 110. 24 r equi r es an avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent l abel t o be appl i ed at t he ser vi ce ent r ance. Sel ect " Avai l abl e Faul t Cur r ent Label " bel ow i f t he swi t chgear i s par t of t he ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment . Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he shor t c i r cui t cal cul at i on f or t he pr oj ect . Thi s may var y f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

[ Service Entrance Available Fault Current Label ;


1.5.1 Product Data

Include manufacturer's information on each submittal for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchgear including:

a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device.

1.5.2 Switchgear Drawings

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating



proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Include the nameplate data, size, and capacity on submittal. Also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references on submittals. Include the following:

a. One-line diagram including breakers[, fuses][, current transformers, and meters].

b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint, and overall dimensions.

c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars.

d. Markings and NEMA nameplate data[, including fuse information (manufacturer's name, catalog number, and ratings)].

e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

f. Wiring diagrams and elementary diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items.

g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. Use this information (designer of record) to provide breaker settings that ensures protection and coordination are achieved. [For Navy installations, provide electronic format curves using SKM's Power Tools for Windows device library electronic format or EasyPower device library format depending on installation modeling software requirements.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f sel ect i ng pr ovi s i ons f or f ut ur e expansi on, ensur e t he f aci l i t y and r oom si ze i s adequat e f or t he addi t i onal equi pment .

**************************************************************************

[ h. Provisions for future expansion by adding switchgear sections.













Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Switchgear Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.6.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Assemble and securely bind manuals in durable, hard covered, water resistant binders. Assemble and index the manuals in the following order with a table of contents:

a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph SD-10, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Catalog data required by the paragraph SD-03, PRODUCT DATA.

c. Drawings required by the paragraph SD-02, SHOP DRAWINGS.

d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

[ e. Information on metering.

] f. Design test reports.

g. Production test reports.



[ 1.6.3 Spare Parts

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use t hi s par agr aph f or Navy pr oj ect s. For ot her ser vi ces, coor di nat e wi t h Cont r act i ng Of f i cer on whet her t hi s par agr aph can be i ncl uded.

Edi t as r equi r ed i f addi t i onal spar e par t s ar e r equi r ed f or a speci f i c pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Provide spare parts as specified below. Provide spare parts that are of the same material and workmanship, meet the same requirements, and are interchangeable with the corresponding original parts furnished.

a. Quantity 2 - Fuses of each type and size.

[ b. [_____]

] ] 1.7 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items that are supported by service organizations reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be switchgear and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 SWITCHGEAR

JIS C 8201-1 .

2.2.1 Ratings

Provide equipment with the following ratings:

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect " as i ndi cat ed" i f t her e ar e mul t i pl e swi t chgear wi t h det ai l s of each shown on dr awi ngs. Most swi t chgear wi l l be 4- wi r e, but mi ght be a 3- wi r e desi gn f or del t a- connect ed or ungr ounded systems.

**************************************************************************

a. Voltage rating: [480Y/277] [440/254][420/242] [208Y/120] [220][210Y/105][_____] volts AC, [50][60] hertz, [3][4]-wire [three-phase, [3][4]-wire][as indicated].

b. Continuous current rating of the main bus: [_____ amperes][as indicated].

c. Short-circuit current rating: [_____ rms symmetrical amperes][as indicated].



d. UL listed and labeled[ for its intended use][ as service entrance equipment].

2.2.2 Construction

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t he sel ect i on opt i ons bel ow as needed f or t he i nt ended pr oj ect conf i gur at i on.

Det er mi ne i f an ar c- r esi st ant desi gn wi l l be speci f i ed f or t he i nst al l at i on. A sel ect i on of ar c- r esi st ant swi t chgear can af f ect t he i nst al l at i on desi gn. Ar c- r esi st ant swi t chgear i s t est ed and cer t i f i ed t o I EEE C37. 20. 7, and i s i nt ended t o pr ovi de added pr ot ect i on f or i nt er nal ar c i ng f aul t s. Sel ect Type 1 i f ar c pr ot ect i on i s onl y r equi r ed f or t he f r eel y accessi bl e f r ont of t he encl osur e. Sel ect Type 2 i f ar c pr ot ect i on i s r equi r ed f or f r eel y accessi bl e f r ont , s i des and r ear of t he encl osur e. Sel ect t he ' B' suf f i x f or addi t i onal pr ot ect i on appl i ed t o compar t ment s desi gnat ed as l ow vol t age cont r ol or i nst r ument at i on compar t ment s. Sel ect t he ' C' suf f i x wher e i sol at i on f r om t he ef f ect s of an i nt er nal ar c i ng f aul t i s desi r ed bet ween al l adj acent compar t ment s wi t hi n a swi t chgear assembl y. Most manuf act ur er s pr oduce Type 2B as a st andar d pr oduct , whi ch coul d i ncr ease t he swi t chgear cost by about 20 per cent . Revi ew I EEE C37. 20. 7 f or addi t i onal i nf or mat i on.

**************************************************************************


a. Switchgear: consisting of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and [rear][front and rear] aligned[ as indicated].

b. All circuit breakers: [ front accessible with rear load connections][as indicated] .

c. Compartmentalized switchgear: vertical insulating barriers between the front device section, the main bus section, and the cable compartment[ with full front to rear vertical insulating barriers between adjacent sections].

d. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" means to include all necessary components and hardware to be fully equipped for racking in a circuit breaker element.

e. Insulating barriers: provided in accordance with JIS K 6912 6.35 mm minimum thickness.

[ f. Moisture resistant coating: applied to all rough-cut edges of barriers.

][ g. Switchgear: Arc-resistant, tested in accordance with manufacturer's requirements .



] 2.2.2.1 Enclosure

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he l evel of cor r osi on pr ot ect i on r equi r ed f or t he speci f i c pr oj ect l ocat i on. Most swi t chgear pr oduct s wi l l be const r uct ed of a col d r ol l ed st eel and pai nt ed, whi ch i s adequat e f or most i ndoor l ocat i ons. Use gal vani zed st eel or st ai nl ess st eel encl osur es or bases f or out door appl i cat i ons wher e cor r osi on i s a concer n. Not al l manuf act ur er s of f er gal vani zed st eel or st ai nl ess st eel pr oduct s as a st andar d desi gn.

Sel ect I EEE C57. 12. 28 f or gal vani zed encl osur es. Sel ect I EEE C57. 12. 29 f or st ai nl ess st eel encl osur es.

I nf r ar ed vi ewi ng wi ndows ar e t ypi cal l y i nst al l ed i n t he swi t chgear r ear cover s t o f aci l i t at e t he use of I R camer as f or t her mal l y scanni ng cabl e t er mi nat i ons.

**************************************************************************


a. Enclosure: [outdoor] [indoor][weatherproof] IP rated [as indicated] per JIS C 8462-1 [fabricated entirely of 12 gauge , type 304 or 304L stainless steel] per JIS G 4304 .

b. Enclosure: bolted together with removable bolt-on side and[ hinged] rear covers[, and sloping roof downward toward rear].

[ c. Front[ and rear] doors: provided with[ stainless steel] padlockable vault handles with a three point catch.

][ d. Bases, frames and channels of enclosure: corrosion resistant and fabricated of[ type 304 or 304L stainless steel][ or][ galvanized steel] JIS G 4304 .

] e. Base: includes any part of enclosure that is within 75 mm of concrete pad.

[ f. Galvanized steel: coating per JIS H 8641 and JIS G 3352 , and JIS B 1048 , as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

] g. Paint color: light gray over rust inhibitor.

[ h. Paint coating system: comply with[ JIS C 8480 for galvanized steel][ and][ JIS Z 2371 for stainless steel].

][ i. Infrared viewing windows: install to allow the use of an infrared camera or thermal imager direct line of site to inspect electrical connections without requiring the opening of panels and doors. These windows are intended to allow thermographers the ability to inspect the electrical equipment without directly exposing themselves to live electrical components and energized devices.

] 2.2.2.2 Bus Bars

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Use copper wi t h s i l ver - pl at ed cont act sur f aces i n ext er i or or damp l ocat i ons or f or heavy mot or l oads.

Del et e t he neut r al bus br acket ed opt i on i f a 3- wi r e syst em was sel ect ed.

Onl y choose t he br acket ed opt i on r equi r i ng i nsul at i on on t he bus bar s f or out door l ocat i ons wi t h a hi gh concent r at i on of ai r bor ne cont ami nant s. Choose t hi s opt i on pr i mar i l y f or cor r osi ve and hi gh humi di t y appl i cat i ons as def i ned i n UFC 3- 501- 01. Most manuf act ur er s wi l l appl y an i nsul at i ng s l eeve r at her t han an epoxy coat i ng.

**************************************************************************


a. Bus bars: [copper with silver-plated contact surfaces][ or][ aluminum with tin-plated contact surfaces].

(1) Phase bus bars: [uninsulated][insulated with an epoxy finish coating powder or insulating sleeve providing a minimum breakdown voltage in accordance with JIS C 2110-1 ].

(2) Neutral bus: rated [100][_____] percent of the main bus continuous current rating[ as indicated].

b. Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts.

c. Main-bus (through bus): rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchgear.

d. Minimum 6.35 mm by 50.8 mm copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchgear.

2.2.2.3 Main Section

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses shoul d onl y be needed i f t he avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent exceeds t he ci r cui t br eaker shor t c i r cui t r at i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide the main section consisting of[ main lugs only][ an individually mounted][ air power circuit breaker[ with current-limiting fuses]][ and utility transformer compartment].

2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses shoul d onl y be needed i f t he avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent exceeds t he ci r cui t br eaker shor t c i r cui t r at i ng. Ut i l i t y t r ansf or mer compar t ment s ar e r ar el y used and wi l l r equi r e addi t i onal r evi ew i f t hi s br acket ed opt i on i s selected.

**************************************************************************



Provide the distribution section[s] consisting of[ [individually mounted,]][ air power circuit breakers[ with current-limiting fuses]][ and utility transformer compartments] as indicated.

[ 2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Sections

Provide auxiliary sections consisting of indicated[ instruments,][ metering equipment,][ control equipment,][ transformer,][ and][ current transformer compartments] as indicated.

][ 2.2.2.6 Handles

Provide handles for individually mounted devices of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating, color coded for device type. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking.

] 2.2.3 Protective Device

**************************************************************************NOTE: Swi t chgear shoul d be pl aced wher e t he ambi ent t emper at ur e i s l ess t han 40 degr ees C, whi ch i s t he basi s f or r at i ng i n accor dance wi t h I EEE C37. 13. However , shoul d t he ambi ent t emper at ur e be expect ed t o exceed 40 Deg. C, t he desi gner must r equi r e a speci al cal i br at i on f or t he c i r cui t br eaker s and conf i r m t he equi pment r at i ngs.

Thi s par agr aph assumes t hat c i r cui t br eaker s ar e avai l abl e r at ed f or t he speci f i ed shor t c i r cui t cur r ent . For ver y hi gh shor t c i r cui t cur r ent s, t he manuf act ur er mi ght have t o i nst al l cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses upst r eam of t he c i r cui t br eaker .

Pr ovi de gr ound f aul t pr ot ect i on of equi pment f or sol i dl y gr ounded wye el ect r i cal ser vi ces of mor e t han 150 vol t s t o gr ound f or each ser vi ce di sconnect r at ed 1000 amper es or mor e i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 70.

I f 48 Vdc or 125 Vdc el ect r i cal l y oper at ed ci r cui t br eaker s ar e r equi r ed, t he appr opr i at e DC cont r ol power suppl y i nf or mat i on must be added t o t he speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ main and] branch protective devices as indicated.


a. JIS C 8201-2-1 and JIS C 8201-2-2 . [105 Vac] [120 Vac][ electrically][ manually] operated, [unfused][fused], low-voltage power circuit breaker with a short-circuit current rating[ of [_____] rms amperes symmetrical][ as indicated] at [_____] volts.

b. Breaker frame size: [ as indicated][[_____] amperes].

[ c. Equip electrically operated breakers with motor-charged, stored-energy closing mechanism to permit rapid and safe closing of the breaker



against fault currents within the short time rating of the breaker, independent of the operator's strength or effort in closing the handle.

] 2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units

**************************************************************************NOTE: Swi t chgear c i r cui t br eaker s wi l l be suppl i ed wi t h el ect r oni c t r i p uni t s. Sel ect f r om t he br acket ed opt i ons bel ow. I n t he i t ems bel ow, choose t he br acket ed i t em " mai n" when t he i t em onl y appl i es t o t he mai n br eaker .

A di gi t al di spl ay f or t he mai n br eaker wi l l t ypi cal l y not be sel ect ed i f di gi t al met er i ng i s pr ovi ded per t he par agr aph DI GI TAL METERS i s selected.


NFPA 70 r equi r es ar c ener gy r educt i on wher e t he hi ghest cont i nuous cur r ent t r i p set t i ng f or whi ch t he act ual over cur r ent devi ce i nst al l ed i n a c i r cui t br eaker i s r at ed or can be adj ust ed t o 1200 amper es or hi gher . The opt i on i dent i f i ed bel ow i s based on an ener gy- r educi ng mai nt enance swi t ch. Add t he addi t i onal appr opr i at e i nf or mat i on i f ot her met hods such as di f f er ent i al r el ayi ng or an act i ve ar c f l ash mi t i gat i on syst em ar e i ncl uded. I dent i f y l ocat i ons of al t er nat e ar c ener gy r educt i on met hods i n t he design.

**************************************************************************

Equip[ main and][ distribution] breakers[ as indicated] with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a microprocessor-based trip unit that provides true rms sensing adjustable time-current circuit protection. Include the following:

a. Current sensors ampere rating: [ as indicated][ [_____] amperes][ the same as the breaker frame rating].

b. Trip unit ampere rating: [ as indicated][ [_____] amperes].

[ c. Ground fault protection: [ as indicated][ zero sequence sensing][ residual type sensing].

][ d. Electronic trip units: provide additional features[ as indicated]:][ (1) [Indicated ]Breakers: include long delay pick-up and time

settings, and indication of cause of circuit breaker trip.

][ (2) Main breakers: include[ short delay pick-up and time settings][ and][, instantaneous settings][ and][ ground fault settings][ as indicated].

][ (3) Distribution breakers: include[ short delay pick-up and time



settings][, instantaneous settings][, and ground fault settings][ as indicated].

][ (4) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for phase and ground current.

][ (5) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for watts, vars, VA, kWh, kvarh, and kVAh.

][ (6) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for phase voltage, and percent THD voltage and current.

][ (7) [Main ]Breakers: include provisions for communication via a network twisted pair cable for remote monitoring and control. Provide the following communications protocol:[DNP3][Modbus][IEC 61850].

][ (8) For electronic trip units that are rated for or can be adjusted to 1,200 amperes or higher, provide arc energy reduction capability with an energy-reducing maintenance switch with local status indicator.

] [ 2.2.5 Metering

[ 2.2.5.1 Digital Meters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Di gi t al met er i ng i ncor por at es newer t echnol ogy and pr ovi des addi t i onal i nf or mat i on, of t en wi t hout addi t i onal cost . A cont r ol power t r ansf or mer ( 115 V or 130 V) i s usual l y r equi r ed wi t h t hi s t ype of met er i ng.

Di gi t al met er s ar e cont i nual l y i mpr ovi ng. The di spl ay capabi l i t y can be a s i mpl e di spl ay of numer i cal val ues or a mor e sophi st i cat ed di spl ay showi ng wavef or ms. Over - speci f i cat i on of t he met er physi cal or sof t war e char act er i st i cs wi l l l i kel y r esul t i n speci f i cat i on of an ol der obsol et e met er .

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Kadena, met er i ng may r equi r e compl i ance wi t h AMRS speci f i cat i on. Ut i l i ze f i r st br acket ed par agr aph.

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Honshu, ut i l i ze t he second br acket ed par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 5381-11 and JIS C 61000-4-5 for surge withstand. [Metering shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS) specification.] Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in a sealed case with the following features. ]

[Provide meter(s) and connect the meter(s) to the existing Advanced Meter Infrastructure Data Aquisition System (AMI DAS). The contractor shall use the existing government laptop computers to configure the meter using existing software loaded on the computer. The contractor will not be allowed to modify any software or add any additional software to the



computer. Alternatively, the government will configure the meter(s), which must be compatible with the existing system, using existing software. Contract shall insure that the meter(s) will transmit the specified data to the DAS. Meters shall be compatible with the Base AMI DAS per NAVFAC Far East requirements.]

a. Display capability:

[ (1) Multi-Function Meter: Display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. Include a Form C KYZ pulse output relay on the meter.

][ (2) Power Meter: Display Watts, VARs, and selected KVA/PF. Detected alarm conditions include over/under KVA, over/under PF, over/under VARs, over/under reverse power.

][ (3) Volt Meter: Provide capability to be selectable between display of the three phases of phase to neutral voltages and simultaneous display of the three phases of the phase to phase voltages. Detected alarm conditions include over/under voltage, over/under voltage imbalance, over percent THD.

][ (4) Ammeter: Display phase A, B, and C currents. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over percent THD.

][ (5) Digital Watthour Meter: Provide a single selectable display for watts, total kilowatt hours (kWh) and watt demand (Wd). Include a Form C KYZ pulse output relay on the meter.

] b. Design meters to accept[ input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers][ and][ direct voltage monitoring range to [300][600] volts, phase to phase].

c. Provide programming via a front panel display and a communication interface accessible by a computer.

d. Provide password secured programming stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory.

e. Provide digital communications in a Modbus [RTU] protocol via a [RS232C][RS485] serial port[ and an independently addressable [RS232C][RS485] serial port].

f. Provide meter that calculates and stores average max/min demand values with time and date for all readings based on a user selectable sliding window averaging period.

g. Provide meter with programmable hi/low set limits with two dry contact relays when exceeding alarm conditions.

[ h. Meter shall have two-way communication with the existing DAS. Provide a communications interface utilizing fiber-optic LC connection.]



][ 2.2.5.2 Electronic Watthour Meter

**************************************************************************NOTE:

For t he Ar my, coor di nat e met er r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Engi neer i ng and Const r uct i on Bul l et i n ECB 2015- 2, Advanced Met er i ng and Connectivity.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 1210 . Provide a switchgear style electronic programmable watthour meter, semi-flush mounted, as indicated. Meter can be either programmed at the factory or programmed in the field. Turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Coordinate meter to system requirements.

a. Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire, [210Y/105] [208Y/120] [440Y/254][420Y/242] [480Y/277] volt system with 3 current transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

b. Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

c. Class: 20. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent. Finish: Class II.


e. Demand Register:


(2) Display actual values and readings of the metered circuit. No multipliers must be required.

(3) Demand interval length: programmed for [15][30][60] minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

g. Provide meter with a communications port, RS485, with Modbus RTU serial or Ethernet, Modbus-TCP communications.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he appr opr i at e cur r ent t r ansf or mer ( CT) r at i o, cont i nuous- t her mal - cur r ent r at i ng f act or ( RF) at 30 degr ees C and ANSI Met er i ng Accur acy Cl ass val ues based on t he CT Rat i o whi ch i s j ust bel ow t he r at i ng of t he mai n pr ot ect i ve devi ce.

Sel ect an ANSI Met er i ng Accur acy Cl ass i n accor dance wi t h t he f ol l owi ng t abl e:



CT Rat i o RF Accur acy Cl ass

200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

300/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

400/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

600/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

800/5 2.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1500/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 9

2000/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8

**************************************************************************

JIS C 1731-1 . Provide single ratio transformers, [50][ 60] hertz, [_____] to 5-ampere ratio, [_____] rating factor, with a metering accuracy class of 0.3 through [_____].

[ Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to voltage sensing meters. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

]] ][ 2.2.5.3 Submetering

**************************************************************************NOTE: For bases and act i v i t i es t hat have an act i ve submet er i ng pol i cy i n pl ace and wr i t t en aut hor i zat i on has been r ecei ved, edi t t hi s sect i on as necessar y t o speci f y t he desi r ed l evel of submet er i ng and l ocat i ons.

UFC 1- 200- 02 r ef er ences ASHRAE 90. 1- 2010. But ASHRAE 90. 1- 2010 does not addr ess submet er i ng cr i t er i a. The i nt ended r ef er ence f or t hi s sect i on i s ASHRAE 90. 1- 2013, whi ch does addr ess submet er i ng criteria.

I f submet er i ng i s sel ect ed as an opt i on, coor di nat e r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 wi t h t he l ead per son edi t i ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons. Typi cal l y, r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 i n t hi s Sect i on wi l l be t o t he 2013 edi t i on, wher eas r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 i n ot her Sect i ons wi l l be t o t he 2010 edi t i on.

**************************************************************************

. Provide submetering for [_____] [in accordance with drawings] .

] ][ 2.2.6 Transformer

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM, when t r ansf or mer sect i on i s provided.

**************************************************************************

Provide transformer section in switchgear as indicated. Provide the transformer and section that is suitable for the installation. Provide a transformer conforming to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

][ 2.2.7 Heaters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he heat er opt i on i f t he swi t chgear wi l l be i nst al l ed i n a non- envi r onment al l y cont r ol l ed ar ea.

**************************************************************************

Provide [105][ 120 ] -volt heaters in each switchgear section. Provide heaters of sufficient capacity to control moisture condensation in the section, 250 watts minimum, and controlled by a thermostat[ and humidistat] located in the section. Provide industrial type thermostat, high limit, to maintain sections within the range of 15 to 32 degrees C .[ Provide humidistat with a range of 30 to 60 percent relative humidity.] Obtain supply voltage for the heaters from a control power transformer within the switchgear. If heater voltage is different than switchgear voltage, provide transformer rated to carry 125 percent of heater full load rating. Provide transformer with a 220 degrees C insulation system with a temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C and conforming to JIS C 61558-1 .[ Energize electric heaters in switchgear assemblies while the equipment is in storage or in place prior to being placed in service. Provide method for easy connection of heater to external power source. Provide temporary, reliable external power source if commercial power at rated voltage is not available on site.]

] 2.2.8 Terminal Boards

Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies. Provide short-circuiting type terminal boards associated with current transformer. Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring-tongue lugs. Provide terminal board identification that is identical in similar units. Provide color coded external wiring that is color coded consistently for similar terminal boards.

2.2.9 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Provide a single letter or number on each sleeve, elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves. Indicate on each wire marker the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached.



2.3 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Provide a nameplate on each item of equipment bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he br acket ed sent ence t o speci f y l abel s f or swi t chgear wher e emer gency br eaker s ar e l ocat ed wi t hi n t he swi t chgear . Pr ovi de not e on t he dr awi ngs t o i ndi cat e wher e r ed l abel s ar e r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

JIS K 6911 . Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchgear, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Identify on each nameplate inscription the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide nameplates of melamine plastic, 3 mm thick, white with [black][_____] center core.[ Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated.] Provide matte finish surface. Provide square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Provide nameplates with minimum size of 25 by 65 mm . Provide lettering that is a minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.


2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

Provide the following as part of test equipment calibration:

a. Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

b. Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

c. Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

d. Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

e. Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

f. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:



(1) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(2) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.5.2 Switchgear Design Tests

JIS C 8201-1 .

2.5.2.1 Design Tests

Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.

a. Short-circuit current test.

b. Enclosure tests.

c. Dielectric test.

[ 2.5.2.2 Additional Design Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude addi t i onal desi gn t est s when t he swi t chgear mai n bus i s r at ed gr eat er t han 4000 amperes.

**************************************************************************

In addition to normal design tests, perform the following tests on the actual equipment. Furnish reports which include results of design tests performed on the actual equipment.

a. Temperature rise tests.

b. Continuous current.

] 2.5.3 Switchgear Production Tests

Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests include:

a. [50][ 60] -hertz dielectric tests.

b. Mechanical operation tests.

c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests.

d. Ground fault sensing equipment test.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph onl y f or Ar my pr oj ect s.

The r equi r ement f or st udi es i n t hi s sect i on depends on t he compl exi t y and ext ent of t he power syst em. Del et e t hi s r equi r ement f or pr oj ect s of l i mi t ed



scope, pr oj ect s havi ng pr ot ect i ve devi ces whi ch ar e not adj ust abl e or f or whi ch coor di nat i on i s not possi bl e ( st andar d mol ded case ci r cui t br eaker s) ; pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om an exi st i ng t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) ; or pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om a new t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) .

**************************************************************************

Provide a power system study as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.



**************************************************************************

Provide warning label of potential electrical arc flash hazards for switchgear in accordance with NFPA 70E and JIS Z 9101 .

[ 2.8 SERVICE ENTRANCE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LABEL

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 r equi r es t hat ser vi ce equi pment i n ot her t han dwel l i ng uni t s be l egi bl y mar ked i n t he f i el d wi t h t he maxi mum avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent , i ncl udi ng t he dat e t he f aul t - cur r ent cal cul at i on was per f or med. I n addi t i on, i ncl ude t he cont act i nf or mat i on f or t he or gani zat i on t hat compl et ed t he cal cul at i on. Sel ect t hi s opt i on i f t he swi t chgear wi l l be used as ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment .

Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di vi s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he shor t c i r cui t cal cul at i on f or t he pr oj ect . Thi s may var y f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d projects.

**************************************************************************

Provide label on exterior of switchgear used as service equipment listing the maximum available fault current at that location. Include on the label the date that the fault calculation was performed and the contact information for the organization that completed the calculation. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the switchgear. Provide label format as indicated.

][ 2.9 MIMIC BUS LABELING

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude a mi mi c bus i f t he syst em compl exi t y war r ant s pr ovi di ng a one- l i ne of t he syst em configuration.

**************************************************************************



Provide a mimic bus on the front of the equipment to diagrammatically show the internal bus structure of the lineup.

] PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he gr oundi ng sect i on bel ow f or i nst al l at i ons i nvol v i ng a swi t chgear i nst al l ed i n an ext er i or appl i cat i on. I f t he swi t chgear i s i nst al l ed adj acent t o a pad- mount ed di st r i but i on t r ansf or mer , t hen coor di nat e t he gr oundi ng r equi r ement s bet ween t he appl i cabl e speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

[ 3.2 GROUNDING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e r ock or ot her soi l condi t i ons pr event obt ai ni ng a speci f i ed gr ound val ue, speci f y ot her met hods of gr oundi ng. Wher e i t i s i mpr act i cal t o obt ai n t he i ndi cat ed gr ound r esi st ance val ues, make ever y ef f or t t o obt ai n gr ound r esi st ance val ues as near as possi bl e t o t he i ndi cat ed val ues.

Sel ect 25 ohms r esi st ance unl ess t he i nst al l at i on r equi r es a l ower r esi st ance t o gr ound.

**************************************************************************

IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 , except that grounds and grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding [25][_____] ohms.


Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Equipment Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than [100 sqmm][] not less than 610 mm below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections





JIS C 60364-5-54 , except as indicated or specified otherwise.

] 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

3.3.1 Switchgear

JIS C 8201-1 .

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

JIS C 1210 .

3.3.3 Field Applied Painting


3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings per manufacturer's recommendations , zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to.

3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting



**************************************************************************NOTE: Mount i ng s l ab connect i ons may have t o be gi ven i n det ai l dependi ng on t he r equi r ement s f or t he sei smi c zone i n whi ch t he equi pment i s l ocat ed. I ncl ude const r uct i on r equi r ement s f or concr et e s l ab onl y i f s l ab i s not det ai l ed i n dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

3.4.1 Exterior Location

Mount switchgear on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 200 mm thick, reinforced with a 150 by 150 mm - MW19 by MW19 (6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh placed uniformly 100 mm from the top of the slab.


c. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately



100 mm above the finished grade.



f. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

g. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

h. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm above slab surface.

i. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.4.2 Interior Location

Mount switchgear on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 100 mm thick.

b. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately 100 mm above the finished floor .

c. Provide edges above floor with 15 mm chamfer.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e di mensi on of concr et e s l ab t o pr oj ect beyond equi pment i n or der t o al l ow f or br eaker l i f t t r uck access f or br eaker mai nt enance.

**************************************************************************

d. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least [ 200 mm ][ ] beyond the equipment.

e. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

f. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

g. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm above slab surface.

h. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

i. Provide duct sealing in conduits after cables are installed to prevent entrance of insects and moisture.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect " Request f or Set t i ngs" bel ow i f pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs wi l l be gover nment f ur ni shed. Sel ect " Requi r ed Set t i ngs" bel ow i f



pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs ar e f ur ni shed by t he Desi gner of Recor d. Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he f i nal pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d pr oj ect s. Do not r el y on t he manuf act ur er ' s def aul t set t i ngs.

**************************************************************************

[ Submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchgear and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.

][ Submit Required Settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchgear and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.

] 3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with Denki Hoan Kyoukai .

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he opt i ons bel ow t hat appl y t o t he speci f i ed equi pment .

**************************************************************************

3.5.1.1 Switchgear





(4) Clean switchgear and verify shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation shipped inside cubicles have been removed.


(6) Verify that[ fuse and] circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings as well as to the circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages.

[ (7) Verify that current transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.

] (8) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(9) Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and



mechanical interlock systems.



(12) Verify correct barrier and shutter installation[ and operation].



(15) Verify that filters are in place and vents are clear.



b. Electrical Tests


(2) Perform dielectric withstand voltage tests.


(4) Perform control wiring performance test.


[ (6) Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to ensure correct bus phasing from each source.

][ (7) Verify operation of switchgear heaters.

] 3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers - Low Voltage - Power


(1) Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.



(4) Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker.

(5) Inspect arc chutes.

(6) Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and alignment.



(7) Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct.

(8) Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating mechanism.


(10) Verify cell fit and element alignment.

(11) Verify racking mechanism.


b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform contact-resistance tests on each breaker.


(3) Adjust Breaker(s) for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

(4) Determine long-time minimum pickup current by primary current injection.

(5) Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e each opt i on wi t h each br eaker t ype.

**************************************************************************

[ (6) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

][ (7) Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.

][ (8) Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.

][ (9) Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or undervoltage relays, to ensure operation of shunt trip devices; Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their cubicle.

] (10) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.

(11) Verify operation of charging mechanism.

3.5.1.3 Current Transformers







(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit.



b. Electrical Tests



(3) Perform polarity tests.

(4) Perform ratio-verification tests.






b. Electrical Tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale.



(4) Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact.

3.5.1.5 Grounding System





b. Electrical Tests

(1) JIS C 60364-6 . Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.



Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Trip circuit breakers by operation of each protective device. Test each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, provide the Contracting Officer 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.







**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 24 13 ( May 2015) Change 1 - 08/ 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC



SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS05/15


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s i s a new gui de speci f i cat i on t hat , i n par t , r epl aces 26 23 00, SWI TCHBOARDS AND SWI TCHGEAR. The or i gi nal gui de speci f i cat i on was separ at ed i nt o t wo speci f i cat i ons: 26 23 00, LOW- VOLTAGE SWI TCHGEAR, and 26 24 13, SWI TCHBOARDS.

Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or f r ee st andi ng deadf r ont swi t chboar d assembl i es r at ed 6000 amper es or l ess, 600 vol t s or l ess. Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s i nt ended f or al t er nat i ng cur r ent appl i cat i ons; addi t i onal edi t i ng wi l l be necessar y t o t ai l or i t f or di r ect cur r ent appl i cat i ons.

Per UFC 3- 520- 01, speci f y swi t chboar ds f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment when t he ser vi ce i s 1200 amper es or l ar ger , and br anch and f eeder c i r cui t s ar e combi ned si zes f r om 20 amper es up t o 800 amper es. Ut i l i ze swi t chboar ds t hr oughout t he di st r i but i on syst em wher e f eeder s ar e 1200 amper es or l ar ger . Speci f y met al - encl osed swi t chgear i n accor dance wi t h Section 26 23 00 LOW- VOLTAGE SWI TCHGEAR f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment onl y when t he ser vi ce i s 1200 amper es or l ar ger , and al l br anch and f eeder c i r cui t s ar e l ar ge, such as 600 amper es or 800 amper es each. Use Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM, f or power and di st r i but i on panel boar ds r at ed l ess t han 1200 amper es.

When t he pr oposed swi t chboar d i s connect ed t o a secondar y uni t subst at i on, coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNI T SUBSTATI ONS.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s not i nt ended t o be used f or



gener at or cont r ol swi t chboar ds wi t hout ext ensi ve modi f i cat i on and coor di nat i on wi t h appl i cabl e engi ne- gener at or set gui de speci f i cat i ons.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ver i f y t hat t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on i s i ndi cat ed on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs:

1. Si ngl e- l i ne di agr am showi ng buses and i nt er r upt i ng devi ces wi t h i nt er r upt i ng capaci t i es; cur r ent t r ansf or mer s wi t h r at i ngs; i nst r ument s and met er s r equi r ed; and descr i pt i on of i nst r ument s and meters.

2. Locat i on, space avai l abl e, ar r angement , and el evat i ons of swi t chboar ds.


4. Type and number of cabl es, s i ze of conduct or s f or each power c i r cui t , and poi nt of ent r y ( t op or bottom).

5. Speci al condi t i ons, such as al t i t ude, t emper at ur e and humi di t y, exposur e t o f umes, vapor s, dust , and gases; and sei smi c r equi r ement s.

6. Ar c f l ash l abel r equi r ement s. Downl oad t he l abel f or mat at http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

7. Avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent l abel f or ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment . Downl oad t he l abel f or mat at http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

8. Locat i ons wi t h 100 per cent r at ed ci r cui t breakers.

9. Locat i ons wi t h ar c ener gy r educt i on met hods specified.

**************************************************************************








**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e. Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan

Industrial Standard (JIS), Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (MLIT), Japan Electrical Safety Inspection Associations or Japanese



Architectural Standard Specifications (JASS) for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the ContractingOfficer's representative.



JAPANESE ARCHITECTURAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (JASS)

JASS 6 (2015) Structural Steelwork Specification for Building Construction




JIS B 1048 (2007) Fasteners - Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings



JIS C 1731-1 (1998) Instrument Transformers for Testing Purpose and Used with General Instrument Part 1: Current Transformer

JIS C 2110-1 (2016) Solid electrical insulation materials-Test methods for strength of dielectric breakdown-Part 1: Tests by applying commercial frequency alternating voltage




JIS C 8269-1 (2016) Low-Voltage Fuses -- Part 1: General Requirements

JIS C 8269-2 (2013) Low voltage fuse-Part 2: Additional requirements for expert fuses(Mainly industrial fuses)







JIS C 61000-4-5 (2018) Electromagnetic compatibility-Part 4-5: Test and measurement techniques- Surge immunity test


JIS G 3352 (2014) Deck Plate

JIS G 3601 (2012) Stainless clad steel

JIS G 4304 (2012) Hot-Rolled Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip








**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude Sect i on 26 08 00 APPARATUS I NSPECTI ON AND TESTI NG on al l pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng medi um vol t age and speci al i zed power di st r i but i on equi pment

**************************************************************************




1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS






**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor QC approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 , SUSTAINABITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Switchboard Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Switchboard ; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Switchboard Design Tests ;

Switchboard Production Tests ;



Switchboard Operation and Maintenance , Data Package 5;



**************************************************************************

Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals ;

Equipment Test Schedule ;

[ Request for Settings ;

][ Required Settings ; ]

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 Ar t i c l e 110. 24 r equi r es an avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent l abel t o be appl i ed at t he ser vi ce ent r ance. Sel ect " Avai l abl e Faul t Cur r ent Label " bel ow i f t he swi t chboar d i s par t of t he ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment . Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he shor t c i r cui t cal cul at i on f or t he pr oj ect . Thi s may var y f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************



[ Service Entrance Available Fault Current Label ;


1.5.1 Product Data

Include manufacturer's information on each submittal for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including:

a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device.

1.5.2 Switchboard Drawings

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Include the nameplate data, size, and capacity on submittal. Also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references on submittals. Include the following:

a. One-line diagram including breakers[, fuses][, current transformers, and meters].

b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint, and overall dimensions.

c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars.

d. Markings and rated IP code nameplate data[, including fuse information (manufacturer's name, catalog number, and ratings)].

e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

f. Wiring diagrams and elementary diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items.

g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. Use this information (designer of record) to provide breaker settings that ensures protection and coordination are achieved. [For Navy installations, provide electronic format curves using SKM's Power Tools for Windows device library electronic format or EasyPower device library format depending on installation modeling software requirements.]

**************************************************************************



NOTE: I f sel ect i ng pr ovi s i ons f or f ut ur e expansi on, ensur e t he f aci l i t y and r oom si ze i s adequat e f or t he addi t i onal equi pment .

**************************************************************************

[ h. Provisions for future expansion by adding switchboard sections.











Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.6.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Assemble and securely bind manuals in durable, hard covered, water resistant binders. Assemble and index the manuals in the following order



with a table of contents:

a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph SD-10, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Catalog data required by the paragraph SD-03, PRODUCT DATA.

c. Drawings required by the paragraph SD-02, SHOP DRAWINGS.

d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

[ e. Information on metering.

] f. Design test reports.

g. Production test reports.

[ 1.6.3 Spare Parts

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use t hi s par agr aph f or Navy pr oj ect s. For ot her ser vi ces, coor di nat e wi t h Cont r act i ng Of f i cer on whet her t hi s par agr aph can be i ncl uded.

Edi t as r equi r ed i f addi t i onal spar e par t s ar e r equi r ed f or a speci f i c pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Provide spare parts as specified below. Provide spare parts that are of the same material and workmanship, meet the same requirements, and are interchangeable with the corresponding original parts furnished.

a. Quantity 2 - Fuses of each type and size.

[ b. [_____]

] ] 1.7 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items that are supported by service organizations reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD

JIS C 8480 .

2.2.1 Ratings

Provide equipment with the following ratings:



**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect " as i ndi cat ed" i f t her e ar e mul t i pl e swi t chboar ds wi t h det ai l s of each shown on dr awi ngs. Most swi t chboar ds wi l l be 4- wi r e, but mi ght be a 3- wi r e desi gn f or del t a- connect ed or ungr ounded syst ems.

**************************************************************************

a. Voltage rating: [480Y/277][208Y/120][440][440Y/254][420Y/242][220][210Y/105] [_____] volts AC, [50][60] hertz, [three-phase, [3][4]-wire][as indicated].

b. Continuous current rating of the main bus: [_____ amperes][as indicated].

c. Short-circuit current rating: [_____ rms symmetrical amperes][as indicated].

d. UL listed and labeled[ as service entrance equipment].

2.2.2 Construction

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t he sel ect i on opt i ons bel ow as needed f or t he i nt ended pr oj ect conf i gur at i on. Rear al i gned swi t chboar ds ar e l i kel y t he l owest cost desi gn pr act i ce. Fr ont and r ear al i gned swi t chboar ds pr ovi de a mor e appeal i ng i nst al l at i on. Do not speci f y r ear connect i ons i f t he swi t chboar d wi l l be i nst al l ed agai nst a wal l .

**************************************************************************


a. Switchboard: consisting of one or more vertical sections[ bolted together to form a rigid assembly] and [rear][front and rear] aligned[ as indicated].

b. All circuit breakers: front accessible.

[ c. Rear aligned switchboards: front accessible load connections.

][ d. Front and rear aligned switchboards[: rear accessible load connections].

] e. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" means to include a vertical bus provided behind a blank front cover. Where indicated, "provision for future" means full hardware provided to mount a breaker suitable for the location.

f. Completely factory engineered and assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring.

2.2.2.1 Enclosure

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he l evel of cor r osi on pr ot ect i on r equi r ed f or t he speci f i c pr oj ect l ocat i on. Most



swi t chboar d pr oduct s wi l l be const r uct ed of a col d r ol l ed st eel and pai nt ed, whi ch i s adequat e f or most i ndoor l ocat i ons. Use gal vani zed st eel or st ai nl ess st eel encl osur es or bases f or out door appl i cat i ons wher e cor r osi on i s a concer n. Not al l manuf act ur er s of f er gal vani zed st eel or st ai nl ess st eel pr oduct s as a st andar d desi gn.

Sel ect I EEE C57. 12. 28 f or gal vani zed encl osur es. Sel ect I EEE C57. 12. 29 f or st ai nl ess st eel encl osur es.

**************************************************************************


a. Enclosure: [indoor][weatherproof] IP rated per JIS C 8462-1 [as indicated][ fabricated entirely of 12 gauge , type 304 or 304L stainless steel] per JIS G 3601 and JIS G 4304 .

b. Enclosure: bolted together with removable bolt-on side and[ hinged] rear covers[, and sloping roof downward toward rear].

[ c. Front[ and rear] doors: provided with[ stainless steel] padlockable vault handles with a three point catch.

][ d. Bases, frames and channels of enclosure: corrosion resistant and fabricated of[ type 304 or 304L stainless steel][ or][ galvanized steel] JIS G 3601 and JIS G 4304 .

] e. Base: includes any part of enclosure that is within 75 mm of concrete pad.

[ f. Galvanized steel: JIS H 8641 and JIS G 3352 coating, and JIS B 1048 and JIS H 8641 , as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

] g. Paint color: light gray over rust inhibitor.

[ h. Paint coating system: comply with[ JIS C 8480 for galvanized steel][ and][ JIS Z 2371 for stainless steel].

] 2.2.2.2 Bus Bars

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use copper wi t h s i l ver - pl at ed cont act sur f aces i n ext er i or or damp l ocat i ons or f or heavy mot or loads.

Del et e t he neut r al bus br acket ed opt i on i f a 3- wi r e syst em was sel ect ed.

Onl y choose t he br acket ed opt i on r equi r i ng i nsul at i onon t he bus bar s f or out door l ocat i ons wi t h a hi gh concent r at i on of ai r bor ne cont ami nant s. Choose t hi s opt i on pr i mar i l y f or cor r osi ve and hi gh humi di t y appl i cat i ons as def i ned i n UFC 3- 501- 01. Most manuf act ur er s wi l l t ape wr ap r at her t han appl y an i nsul at i ng s l eeve f or l ow vol t age equi pment .

**************************************************************************




a. Bus bars: [copper with silver-plated contact surfaces][ or][aluminum with tin-plated contact surfaces].

(1) Phase bus bars: [uninsulated][insulated with a tape wrap or insulating sleeve providing a minimum breakdown voltage in accordance with JIS C 2110-1 ].

(2) Neutral bus: rated [100][_____] percent of the main bus continuous current rating[ as indicated].

b. Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts.

c. Main-bus (through bus): rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard.

d. Minimum 6.35 mm by 50.8 mm copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard.

2.2.2.3 Main Section

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect f r om t he opt i ons bel ow t he conf i gur at i on t o be speci f i ed. Ref er t o UFC 3- 520- 01 f or al l owed conf i gur at i ons.

Si mpl er swi t chboar ds wi l l of t en have a s i ngl e sect i on t hat cont ai ns t he mai n c i r cui t br eaker and br anch ci r cui t br eaker s, r ef er r ed t o her e as a Combi nat i on Sect i on. Lar ger swi t chboar ds can have mul t i pl e sect i ons i nvol v i ng a mai n sect i on, one or mor e di st r i but i on sect i ons, and one or mor e auxi l i ar y sect i ons.

Low- vol t age power c i r cui t br eaker s ar e not nor mal l y r equi r ed f or swi t chboar d appl i cat i ons. Ut i l i t y t r ansf or mer compar t ment s ar e r ar el y used and wi l l r equi r e addi t i onal r evi ew i f t hi s br acket ed opt i on i s sel ect ed.

**************************************************************************

Provide the main section consisting of[a combination section with[ molded-case circuit breakers] for the[ main and] branch devices as indicated][ main lugs only][ an individually mounted [fixed][ air power circuit breaker[ with current-limiting fuses]][ insulated-case circuit breaker][ molded-case circuit breaker]][ and utility transformer compartment].

[ 2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect di st r i but i on sect i ons as an opt i on i f t he mai n sect i on i s not a combi nat i on sect i on t hat i ncl udes mai n and br anch ci r cui t br eaker s.

**************************************************************************

Provide the distribution section[s] consisting of[ [individually mounted,]][ air power circuit breakers[ with current-limiting fuses]][



insulated-case circuit breakers][ molded-case circuit breakers][ and utility transformer compartments] as indicated.

][ 2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Sections

Provide auxiliary sections consisting of indicated[ instruments,][ metering equipment,][ control equipment,][ transformer,][ and][ current transformer compartments] as indicated.

][ 2.2.2.6 Handles

Provide handles for individually mounted devices of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating, color coded for device type. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking.

] 2.2.3 Protective Device

**************************************************************************NOTE: Swi t chboar d shoul d be pl aced wher e t he ambi ent t emper at ur e i s l ess t han 40 deg. C. However , shoul d t he ambi ent t emper at ur e be expect ed t o exceed 40 Deg. C, t he desi gner must r equi r e a speci al cal i br at i on f or t he c i r cui t br eaker s and conf i r m t he equi pment r at i ngs.


I f 48 Vdc or 125 Vdc el ect r i cal l y oper at ed ci r cui t br eaker s ar e r equi r ed, t he appr opr i at e DC cont r ol power suppl y i nf or mat i on must be added t o t he specification.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ main and] branch protective devices as indicated.

[ 2.2.3.1 Power Circuit Breaker

**************************************************************************NOTE: Low- vol t age power c i r cui t br eaker s can be i nst al l ed i n l ar ger swi t chboar ds, but ar e not nor mal l y r equi r ed f or swi t chboar d appl i cat i ons. I f power c i r cui t br eaker s ar e sel ect ed, coor di nat e t he r at i ngs and pr ot ect i ve devi ce set t i ngs wi t h t he r at i ngs of t he swi t chboar d.

**************************************************************************


a. JIS C 8201-2-1 and JIS C 8201-2-2 . [120 Vac] [100 Vac] [ electrically][ manually] operated [stationary], [unfused][fused], low-voltage power circuit breaker with a short-circuit current rating[ of [_____] rms amperes symmetrical][ as indicated] at [_____] volts.

b. Breaker frame size: [ as indicated][ [_____] amperes].



[c. Equip electrically operated breakers with motor-charged, stored-energy closing mechanism to permit rapid and safe closing of the breaker against fault currents within the short time rating of the breaker, independent of the operator's strength or effort in closing the handle.

] ][ 2.2.3.2 Insulated-Case Breaker


**************************************************************************NOTE: El ect r i cal l y oper at ed i nsul at ed- case ci r cui t br eaker s ar e r ar el y used and woul d be accompl i shed by an accessor y.

I f 100 per cent c i r cui t br eaker s ar e ut i l i zed i n t he desi gn, sel ect t he 100 per cent r at ed ci r cui t br eaker opt i on bel ow and i ndi cat e t he speci f i c l ocat i ons on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

a. JIS C 8201-2-1 . UL listed and labeled,[ 100 percent rated main breaker][ standard rated branch breakers],[ electrically] [manually] operated, low voltage, insulated-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating[ of [_____] rms symmetrical amperes][ as indicated] at [_____] volts.

b. Breaker frame size: [ [_____] amperes][ as indicated].

c. Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable.

][ 2.2.3.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker


**************************************************************************NOTE: I f 100 per cent c i r cui t br eaker s ar e ut i l i zed i n t he desi gn, sel ect t he 100 per cent r at ed ci r cui t br eaker opt i on bel ow and i ndi cat e t he speci f i c l ocat i ons on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

a. JIS C 8201-2-1 . UL listed and labeled,[ 100 percent rated main breaker][ standard rated branch breakers],[ electrically][ manually] operated, low voltage molded-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating of[ [_____] rms symmetrical amperes][ as indicated] at [_____] volts.

b. Breaker frame size: [ [_____] amperes][ as indicated].


][ 2.2.3.4 Fusible Switches

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use f usi bl e over cur r ent devi ces except when necessar y t o compl y wi t h NFPA 70 r equi r ement s f or sel ect i ve coor di nat i on. Fusi bl e swi t ches ar e



pr ohi bi t ed by UFC 3- 520- 01 and wer e not l i s t ed as an opt i on above. Thei r use wi l l r equi r e appr oval by t he aut hor i t y havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on t o al l ow t hei r use i n swi t chboar ds.

For most Japan pr oj ect s, pr ovi de onl y dual - el ecment cur r ent l i mi t i ng t ype ( RK1 or RK5) unl ess ot her wi se indicated.

**************************************************************************


a. Fusible Switches: quick-make, quick-break, hinged-door type.

[ b. Switches serving as motor disconnects: horsepower rated.

] c. Fuses: current-limiting cartridge type conforming to[ , Class [RK1][RK5] for 0 to 600 amperes] per JIS C 8269-1 and JIS C 8269-2 .

d. Fuseholders: [ JIS C 8269-1 and JIS C 8269-2 ] .

][ 2.2.3.5 Integral Combination Breaker and Current-Limiting Fuses

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cur r ent - l i mi t i ng f uses shoul d onl y be needed i f t he avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent exceeds t he ci r cui t br eaker shor t c i r cui t r at i ng. Thi s opt i on wi l l not t ypi cal l y be sel ect ed.

**************************************************************************


a. JIS C 8201-2-1 .

b. Integral combination molded-case circuit breaker and current-limiting fuses:[ as indicated][ rated [_____] amperes] with a minimum short-circuit-current rating equal to the short-circuit-current rating of the switchboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted.


d. Coordination of overcurrent devices of the circuit breaker and current-limiting fuses: for overloads or fault currents of relatively low value, the overcurrent device of the breaker operates to clear the fault. The current-limiting fuses operate to clear the fault for high magnitude short circuits above a predetermined value[ crossover point].

e. Housing for the current-limiting fuses: an individual molding readily removable from the front and located at the load side of the circuit breaker. If the fuse housing is removed, a blown fuse is readily evident by means of a visible indicator.

f. Removal of fuse housing causes the breaker contacts to open, and the breaker contacts can not close with the fuse housing removed. The fuse housing can not be inserted with a blown fuse or with one fuse missing. The blowing of any of the fuses causes the circuit breaker contacts to open.



] 2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units

**************************************************************************NOTE: Swi t chboar ds can have a var i et y of c i r cui t br eaker s i zes. Det er mi ne whi ch ci r cui t br eaker s or ot her pr ot ect i ve devi ces shoul d have el ect r oni c t r i p uni t s and edi t t he opt i ons bel ow accor di ngl y. Smal l er c i r cui t br eaker s wi l l t ypi cal l y have t her mal - magnet i c t r i p uni t s.

**************************************************************************

Equip[ main and][ distribution] breakers[ as indicated] with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a microprocessor-based trip unit that provides true rms sensing adjustable time-current circuit protection. Include the following:

a. Current sensors ampere rating: [ as indicated][ [_____] amperes][ the same as the breaker frame rating].

b. Trip unit ampere rating: [ as indicated][ [_____] amperes].

[ c. Ground fault protection: [ as indicated][ zero sequence sensing][ residual type sensing].

][ d. Electronic trip units: provide additional features[ as indicated]:]

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n t he i t ems bel ow, choose t he br acket ed i t em " mai n" when t he i t em onl y appl i es t o t he mai n breaker.


NFPA 70 r equi r es ar c ener gy r educt i on wher e t he hi ghest cont i nuous cur r ent t r i p set t i ng f or whi ch t he act ual over cur r ent devi ce i nst al l ed i n a c i r cui t br eaker i s r at ed or can be adj ust ed t o 1200 amper es or hi gher . The opt i on i dent i f i ed bel ow i s based on an ener gy- r educi ng mai nt enance swi t ch. Add t he addi t i onal appr opr i at e i nf or mat i on i f ot her met hods such as di f f er ent i al r el ayi ng or an act i ve ar c f l ash mi t i gat i on syst em ar e i ncl uded. I dent i f y l ocat i ons of al t er nat e ar c ener gy r educt i on met hods i n t he design.

**************************************************************************

[ (1) [Indicated ]Breakers: include long delay pick-up and time settings, and LED indication of cause of circuit breaker trip.

][ (2) Main breakers: include[ short delay pick-up and time settings][ and][, instantaneous settings][ and][ ground fault settings][ as indicated].

][ (3) Distribution breakers: include[ short delay pick-up and time



settings][, instantaneous settings][, and ground fault settings][ as indicated].

][ (4) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for phase and ground current.

][ (5) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for watts, vars, VA, kWh, kvarh, and kVAh.

][ (6) [Main ]Breakers: include a digital display for phase voltage, and percent THD voltage and current.

][ (7) [Main ]Breakers: include provisions for communication via a network twisted pair cable for remote monitoring and control. Provide the following communications protocol:[DNP3][Modbus][IEC 61850].

][ (8) For electronic trip units that are rated for or can be adjusted to 1,200 amperes or higher, provide arc energy reduction capability with an energy-reducing maintenance switch with local status indicator.

] [ 2.2.5 Metering

**************************************************************************NOTE: When Sect i on 23 09 00 I NSTRUMENTATI ON AND CONTROL FOR HVAC i s used, coor di nat e met er requirements.

**************************************************************************

[ 2.2.5.1 Digital Meters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Di gi t al met er i ng i ncor por at es newer t echnol ogy and pr ovi des addi t i onal i nf or mat i on, of t en wi t hout addi t i onal cost . A cont r ol power t r ansf or mer ( 115 V or 130 V) i s usual l y r equi r ed wi t h t hi s t ype of metering.

Di gi t al met er s ar e cont i nual l y i mpr ovi ng. The di spl ay capabi l i t y can be a s i mpl e di spl ay of numer i cal val ues or a mor e sophi st i cat ed di spl ay showi ng wavef or ms. Over - speci f i cat i on of t he met er physi cal or sof t war e char act er i st i cs wi l l l i kel y r esul t i n speci f i cat i on of an ol der obsol et e met er .

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Kadena, met er i ng may r equi r e compl i ance wi t h AMRS speci f i cat i on. Ut i l i ze f i r st br acket ed par agr aph.

For pr oj ect s l ocat ed i n Honshu, ut i l i ze t he second br acket ed par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 5381-11 and JIS C 61000-4-5 for surge withstand. [Metering shall be compliant with the current Advanced Meter Reading System (AMRS) specification.] Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in a sealed case with the following features. ]



[Provide meter(s) and connect the meter(s) to the existing Advanced Meter Infrastructure Data Aquisition System (AMI DAS). The contractor shall use the existing government laptop computers to configure the meter using existing software loaded on the computer. The contractor will not be allowed to modify any software or add any additional software to the computer. Alternatively, the government will configure the meter(s), which must be compatible with the existing system, using existing software. Contract shall insure that the meter(s) will transmit the specified data to the DAS. Meters shall be compatible with the Base AMI DAS per NAVFAC Far East requirements.]

a. Display capability:

[ (1) Multi-Function Meter: Display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. Include a Form C KYZ pulse output relay on the meter.

][ (2) Power Meter: Display Watts, VARs, and selected KVA/PF. Detected alarm conditions include over/under KVA, over/under PF, over/under VARs, over/under reverse power.

][ (3) Volt Meter: Provide capability to be selectable between display of the three phases of phase to neutral voltages and display of the three phases of the phase to phase voltages. Detected alarm conditions include over/under voltage, over/under voltage imbalance, over percent THD.

][ (4) Ammeter: Display phase A, B, and C currents. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over percent THD.

][ (5) Digital Watthour Meter: Provide a single selectable display for watts, total kilowatt hours (kWh) and watt demand (Wd). Include a Form C KYZ pulse output relay on the meter.

] b. Design meters to accept[ input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers][ and][ direct voltage monitoring range to [300][600] volts, phase to phase].

c. Provide programming via a front panel display and a communication interface accessible by a computer.

d. Provide password secured programming stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory.

e. Provide digital communications in a Modbus [RTU] protocol via a [RS232C][RS485] serial port[ and an independently addressable [RS232C][RS485] serial port].

f. Provide meter that calculates and stores average max/min demand values with time and date for all readings based on a user selectable sliding window averaging period.



g. Provide meter with programmable hi/low set limits with two dry contact relays when exceeding alarm conditions.

[ h. Meter shall have two-way communication with the existing DAS. Provide a communications interface utilizing fiber-optic LC connection.]

][ 2.2.5.2 Electronic Watthour Meter

**************************************************************************NOTE:

For t he Ar my, coor di nat e met er r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Engi neer i ng and Const r uct i on Bul l et i n ECB 2015- 2, Advanced Met er i ng and Connectivity.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 1210 . Provide a switchboard style electronic programmable watthour meter, semi-flush mounted, as indicated. Meter can be either programmed at the factory or programmed in the field. Turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Coordinate meter to system requirements.

a. Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire, [208Y/120] [210Y/105] [480Y/277] [440Y/254][420Y/242] volt system with 3 current transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

b. Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

c. Class: 20. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent. Finish: Class II.


e. Demand Register:


(2) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.

(3) Demand interval length: programmed for [15][30][60] minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

g. Provide meter with a communications port, RS485, with Modbus RTU serial or Ethernet, Modbus-TCP communications.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he appr opr i at e cur r ent t r ansf or mer ( CT) r at i o, cont i nuous- t her mal - cur r ent r at i ng f act or ( RF) at 30 degr ees C and ANSI Met er i ng Accur acy Cl ass val ues based on t he CT Rat i o whi ch i s j ust bel ow t he r at i ng of t he mai n pr ot ect i ve devi ce.



Sel ect an ANSI Met er i ng Accur acy Cl ass i n accor dance wi t h t he f ol l owi ng t abl e:

CT Rat i o RF Accur acy Cl ass

200/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 1

300/5 3.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

400/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 2

600/5 4.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

800/5 2.0 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1200/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 5

1500/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 0. 9

2000/5 1.5 0. 3 t hr u B- 1. 8

**************************************************************************

JIS C 1731-1 . Provide single ratio transformers, [ 60 hertz ][50 hertz] , [_____] to 5-ampere ratio, [_____] rating factor, with a metering accuracy class of 0.3 through [_____].

[ Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to voltage sensing meters. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

]] ][ 2.2.5.3 Submetering

**************************************************************************NOTE: For bases and act i v i t i es t hat have an act i ve submet er i ng pol i cy i n pl ace and wr i t t en aut hor i zat i on has been r ecei ved, edi t t hi s sect i on as necessar y t o speci f y t he desi r ed l evel of submet er i ng and l ocat i ons.

UFC 1- 200- 02 r ef er ences ASHRAE 90. 1- 2010. But ASHRAE 90. 1- 2010 does not addr ess submet er i ng cr i t er i a. The i nt ended r ef er ence f or t hi s sect i on i s ASHRAE 90. 1- 2013, whi ch does addr ess submet er i ng criteria.

I f submet er i ng i s sel ect ed as an opt i on, coor di nat e r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 wi t h t he l ead per son edi t i ng t he Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons. Typi cal l y, r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 i n t hi s Sect i on wi l l be t o t he 2013 edi t i on, wher eas r ef er ences t o ASHRAE 90. 1 i n ot her Sect i ons wi l l be t o t he 2010 edi t i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide submetering for [_____] [in accordance with drawings] .



] ][ 2.2.6 Transformer

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM, when t r ansf or mer sect i on i s pr ovi ded.

**************************************************************************

Provide transformer section in switchboard in accordance with JIS C 8480 and as indicated. Provide the transformer and section that is suitable for the installation.[ Test transformers greater than 10 kVA in accordance with JIS C 8480 .] Provide a transformer conforming to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

][ 2.2.7 Heaters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he heat er opt i on i f t he swi t chboar d wi l l be i nst al l ed i n a non- envi r onment al l y cont r ol l ed ar ea.

**************************************************************************

Provide [ 120-volt ][100-volt] heaters in each switchboard section. Provide heaters of sufficient capacity to control moisture condensation in the section, 250 watts minimum, and controlled by a thermostat[ and humidistat] located in the section. Provide industrial type thermostat, high limit, to maintain sections within the range of 15 to 32 degrees C .[ Provide humidistat with a range of 30 to 60 percent relative humidity.] Obtain supply voltage for the heaters from a control power transformer within the switchboard. If heater voltage is different than switchboard voltage, provide transformer rated to carry 125 percent of heater full load rating. Provide transformer with a 220 degrees C insulation system with a temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C and conforming to JIS C 61558-1 .[ Energize electric heaters in switchboard assemblies while the equipment is in storage or in place prior to being placed in service. Provide method for easy connection of heater to external power source. Provide temporary, reliable external power source if commercial power at rated voltage is not available on site.]

] 2.2.8 Terminal Boards

Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies. Provide short-circuiting type terminal boards associated with current transformer. Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring-tongue lugs. Provide terminal board identification that is identical in similar units. Provide color coded external wiring that is color coded consistently for similar terminal boards.

2.2.9 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Provide a single letter or number on each sleeve, elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves.



Indicate on each wire marker the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached.


Provide a nameplate on each item of equipment bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he br acket ed sent ence t o speci f y l abel s f or swi t chboar ds wher e emer gency br eaker s ar e l ocat ed wi t hi n t he swi t chboar d. Pr ovi de not e on t he dr awi ngs t o i ndi cat e wher e r ed l abel s ar e r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

JIS K 6911 . Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Identify on each nameplate inscription the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide nameplates of melamine plastic, 3 mm thick, white with [black][_____] center core.[ Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated.] Provide matte finish surface. Provide square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Provide nameplates with minimum size of 25 by 65 mm . Provide l ettering that is a minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.


2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

Provide the following as part of test equipment calibration:

a. Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

b. Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

c. Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

d. Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

e. Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

f. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of



instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(1) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(2) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests

JIS C 8480 .

2.5.2.1 Design Tests

Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.

a. Short-circuit current test.

b. Enclosure tests.

c. Dielectric test.

[ 2.5.2.2 Additional Design Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude addi t i onal desi gn t est s when t he swi t chboar d mai n bus i s r at ed gr eat er t han 4000 amperes.

**************************************************************************

In addition to normal design tests, perform the following tests on the actual equipment. Furnish reports which include results of design tests performed on the actual equipment.

a. Temperature rise tests.

b. Continuous current.

] 2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests

JIS C 8480 . Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests include:

a. [ 60-hertz ][50-hertz] dielectric tests.

b. Mechanical operation tests.

c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests.

d. Ground fault sensing equipment test.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph onl y f or Ar my pr oj ect s.



The r equi r ement f or st udi es i n t hi s sect i on depends on t he compl exi t y and ext ent of t he power syst em. Del et e t hi s r equi r ement f or pr oj ect s of l i mi t ed scope, pr oj ect s havi ng pr ot ect i ve devi ces whi ch ar e not adj ust abl e or f or whi ch coor di nat i on i s not possi bl e ( st andar d mol ded case ci r cui t br eaker s) ; pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om an exi st i ng t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) ; or pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng s i mpl e ext ensi on of 600 vol t l evel ser vi ce t o a bui l di ng or f aci l i t y f r om a new t r ansf or mer ( 750 kVA or l ess) .

**************************************************************************

Provide a power system study as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.



**************************************************************************

Provide warning label of potential electrical arc flash hazards for switchboards in accordance with NFPA 70E and JIS Z 9101 . .

[ 2.8 SERVICE ENTRANCE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LABEL

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 70 r equi r es t hat ser vi ce equi pment i n ot her t han dwel l i ng uni t s be l egi bl y mar ked i n t he f i el d wi t h t he maxi mum avai l abl e f aul t cur r ent , i ncl udi ng t he dat e t he f aul t - cur r ent cal cul at i on was per f or med. I n addi t i on, i ncl ude t he cont act i nf or mat i on f or t he or gani zat i on t hat compl et ed t he cal cul at i on. Sel ect t hi s opt i on i f t he swi t chboar d wi l l be used as ser vi ce ent r ance equi pment .

Coor di nat e wi t h t he per son devel opi ng t he Di vi s i on 1 Sect i ons and ensur e t hat Di v i s i on 1 Sect i ons i dent i f y t he per son r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t he shor t c i r cui t cal cul at i on f or t he pr oj ect . Thi s may var y f or desi gn/ bui l d ver sus desi gn/ bi d/ bui l d projects..

**************************************************************************

Provide label on exterior of switchboards used as service equipment listing the fault current rating in accordance with NFPA 70E and JIS Z 9101 . Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the switchboard.

] PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2 , JIS C 0365 and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified



otherwise.

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he gr oundi ng sect i on bel ow f or i nst al l at i ons i nvol v i ng a swi t chboar d i nst al l ed i n an ext er i or appl i cat i on. I f t he swi t chboar d i s i nst al l ed adj acent t o a pad- mount ed di st r i but i on t r ansf or mer , t hen coor di nat e t he gr oundi ng r equi r ement s bet ween t he appl i cabl e speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

[ 3.2 GROUNDING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e r ock or ot her soi l condi t i ons pr event obt ai ni ng a speci f i ed gr ound val ue, speci f y ot her met hods of gr oundi ng. Wher e i t i s i mpr act i cal t o obt ai n t he i ndi cat ed gr ound r esi st ance val ues, make ever y ef f or t t o obt ai n gr ound r esi st ance val ues as near as possi bl e t o t he i ndi cat ed val ues.

Sel ect 25 ohms r esi st ance unl ess t he i nst al l at i on r equi r es a l ower r esi st ance t o gr ound.

**************************************************************************

IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 , except that grounds and grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding [25][_____] ohms.


Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Equipment Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than [100 sqmm] not less than 610 mm below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections



JIS C 60364-5-54 , except as indicated or specified otherwise.

] 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.



3.3.1 Switchboard

JIS C 8480 .

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

JIS C 1210 .

3.3.3 Field Applied Painting


3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings using JASS 6 , zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to.

3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting



**************************************************************************NOTE: Mount i ng s l ab connect i ons may have t o be gi ven i n det ai l dependi ng on t he r equi r ement s f or t he sei smi c zone i n whi ch t he equi pment i s l ocat ed. I ncl ude const r uct i on r equi r ement s f or concr et e s l ab onl y i f s l ab i s not det ai l ed i n dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

3.4.1 Exterior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 200 mm thick, reinforced with a 150 by 150 mm - MW19 by MW19 (6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh placed uniformly 100 mm from the top of the slab.


c. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately 100 mm above the finished grade.



f. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

g. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and



oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

h. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm above slab surface.

i. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.4.2 Interior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 100 mm thick.

b. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately 100 mm above the finished grade.

c. Provide edges above grade with 15 mm chamfer.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e di mensi on of concr et e s l ab t o pr oj ect beyond equi pment i n or der t o al l ow f or br eaker l i f t t r uck access f or br eaker mai nt enance.

**************************************************************************

d. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least [ 200 mm ][ ] beyond the equipment.

e. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

f. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

g. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm above slab surface.

h. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.



**************************************************************************

[ Submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.

][ Submit Required Settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after



approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.

] 3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with Denki Hoan Kyoukai .

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he opt i ons bel ow t hat appl y t o t he speci f i ed equi pment .

**************************************************************************

3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies





(4) Clean switchboard and verify shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation shipped inside cubicles have been removed.


(6) Verify that[ fuse and] circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings as well as to the circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages.

[ (7) Verify that current transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.

] (8) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(9) Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.



(12) Verify correct barrier installation[ and operation].





(15) Verify that filters are in place and vents are clear.



b. Electrical Tests


(2) Perform dielectric withstand voltage tests.


(4) Perform control wiring performance test.


[ (6) Perform phasing check on double-ended switchboard to ensure correct bus phasing from each source.

][ (7) Verify operation of switchboard heaters.

] [ 3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers - Low Voltage - Power





(4) Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker.

(5) Inspect arc chutes.

(6) Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and alignment.

(7) Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct.

(8) Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating mechanism.


(10) Verify cell fit and element alignment.



(11) Verify racking mechanism.


b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform contact-resistance tests on each breaker.


(3) Adjust Breaker(s) for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

(4) Determine long-time minimum pickup current by primary current injection.

(5) Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.


**************************************************************************


][ (7) Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.

][ (8) Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.

][ (9) Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or undervoltage relays, to ensure operation of shunt trip devices; Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their cubicle.

] (10) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.

(11) Verify operation of charging mechanism.

] 3.5.1.3 Circuit Breakers

[Low Voltage - Insulated-Case][ and ][Low Voltage Molded Case with Solid State Trips]



(2) Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

(3) Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

(4) Inspect case for cracks or other defects.

(5) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible



bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(6) Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform contact-resistance tests.


(3) Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

(4) Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests


**************************************************************************


][ (6) Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.

][ (7) Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection.

][ (8) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and anti-pump function.

] 3.5.1.4 Current Transformers





(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit.



b. Electrical Tests





(3) Perform polarity tests.

(4) Perform ratio-verification tests.






b. Electrical Tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale.



(4) Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact.




b. Electrical Tests

(1) JIS C 60364-6 . Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.



Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, show by



demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Trip circuit breakers by operation of each protective device. Test each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, provide the Contracting Officer 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 51 00 ( May 2016) Change 1 - 11/ 16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 26 51 00 ( Jul y 2007)



SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING05/16


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s l i ght i ng and l i ght i ng cont r ol syst em r equi r ement s f or i nt er i or installations.

Thi s speci f i cat i on does not cover al l possi bl e met hods or r equi r ement s f or i nt er i or l i ght i ng; t her ef or e, desi gner shoul d add speci al i nf or mat i on r equi r ed t o sui t a speci f i c pr oj ect . I ndust r y publ i cat i ons and web si t es exi st t o ai d t he desi gner i n choosi ng t he best l i ght i ng syst em f or t he pr oj ect . These i ncl ude, but ar e not l i mi t ed t o, t he I l l umi nat i ng Engi neer i ng Soci et y ( I ES) ' HB- 10- LI GHTI NG HANDBOOK' and ' RP- 1- 12 - AMERI CAN NATI ONAL STANDARD PRACTI CE FOR OFFI CE LI GHTI NG' , NFPA 101 - ' LI FE SAFETY CODE' , t he DESI GNLI GHTS CONSORTI UM, US Depar t ment of Ener gy' s FEDERAL ENERGY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM ( FEMP) and ENERGY STAR pr ogr am.



Comment s, suggest i ons and r ecommended changes f or



t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on ar e wel come and shoul d be submi t t ed as a Criteria Change Request (CCR) .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n r ecent year s, var i ous f eder al ener gy conser vat i on l egi s l at i ve r equi r ement s have been enact ed whi ch ar e af f ect i ng l i ght i ng desi gn and l umi nai r e speci f i cat i ons. The Ener gy Pol i cy Act ( EPACT, 2005) , Execut i ve Or der 13243 ( 2007) , and t he Ener gy I ndependence and Secur i t y Act ( EI SA, 2007) ar e t he most appl i cabl e exampl es. Al so, t he Feder al Acqui s i t i on Regul at i ons ( FAR) Sect i on 23 st at es t hat wher e l i f e cycl e cost - ef f ect i ve and avai l abl e, Ener gy St ar - qual i f i ed or FEMP- desi gnat ed pr oduct s must be speci f i ed and pur chased. These ener gy conser vi ng r equi r ement s and i ndust r y t r ends ar e pushi ng t he l i ght i ng i ndust r y t owar ds t he devel opment and use of mor e ener gy ef f i c i ent t echnol ogi es l i ke sol i d st at e ( or LED) . Whi l e i ncumbent t echnol ogi es l i ke f l uor escent , i nduct i on and HI D ar e al l st i l l val i d choi ces, LED has now been i ncl uded f or consi der at i on. The desi gner must use hi s or her knowl edge of l i ght sour ce appl i cabi l i t y and l i f e cycl e cost - ef f ect i veness t o det er mi ne t he most sui t abl e l umi nai r e t o ut i l i ze.

****************************************************************************************************************************************************

NOTE: TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHI CS

Go t o http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on cont ai ns t he f ol l owi ng sket ches ( det ai l s or pl at es) and ar e avai l abl e i n met r i c ( SI ) and U. S. Cust omar y ( I P) syst em di mensi ons. Sket ch t i t l es and st y l e number s ar e unchanged f or bot h types.

Do not i ncl ude l i s t of sket ches, or sket ches t hemsel ves, i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons. Use l umi nai r e sket ches as det ai l s on dr awi ngs whenever possi bl e. I f speci al f eat ur es ar e r equi r ed f or a pr oj ect , do not modi f y sket ches, but i ndi cat e t hese changes on not es i n l umi nai r e schedul e. The " NL" st y l e number s and dat es must r emai n on t he dr awi ng det ai l s. I f addi t i onal l umi nai r e t ypes ar e needed t hat ar e not cover ed i n sket ches, pr ovi de addi t i onal sket ches or det ai l s on dr awi ngs, but do not l abel as NL sket ch t ype.

Fi xt ur e l i s t i s now di v i ded i nt o 2004 sket ches and 2016 sket ches. Use t he 2016 sket ches i nst ead of t he 2004 when appr opr i at e. I ndi cat e on Fi xt ur e Schedul e i f t he f i x t ur e i s f r om t he 2016 or 2004 l i s t i f t he same sket ch number i s used.



2016SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE

NL-1 DI RECT/ I NDI RECT LED TROFFER

NL-2 DI RECT/ I NDI RECT FLUORESCENT TROFFER

NL-3 PRI SMATI C LENS LED TROFFER

NL-4 PRI SMATI C LENS FLUORESCENT TROFFER

NL-5 SURFACE LED WRAPAROUND

NL-6 SURFACE FLUORESCENT WRAPAROUND

NL-7 LED I NDUSTRI AL STRI P

NL-8 FLUORESCENT I NDUSTRI AL STRI P

NL-9 WALL MOUNTED LED

NL-10 WALL MOUNTED FLUORESCENT

NL-11 LED ENCLOSED AND GASKETED

NL-12 FLUORESCENT ENCLOSED AND GASKETED

NL-13 LED LI NEAR PENDANT

NL-14 FLUORESCENT LI NEAR PENDANT

NL-15 ROUND LED PENDANT

NL-16 ROUND FLUORESCENT PENDANT

NL-17 LED LI NEAR WALL WASH

NL-18 FLUORESCENT LI NEAR WALL WASH

NL-19 LED RECESSED DOWNLI GHT

NL-20 COMPACT FLUORESCENT RECESSED DOWNLI GHT

NL-21 LED HI GH- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-22 FLUORESCENT HI GH- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-23 HI D HI GH- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-24 LED LOW- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-25 HI D LOW- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-26 I NDUCTI ON LOW- BAY I NDUSTRI AL

NL-27 RESERVED

NL-28 RESERVED

NL-29 RESERVED

NL-30 RESERVED

NL-31 RESERVED

NL-32 RESERVED

NL-33 RESERVED

NL-34 RESERVED

NL-35 RESERVED

NL-36 RESERVED

NL-37 RESERVED

NL-38 RESERVED

NL-39 RESERVED



2016SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE

NL-40 RESERVED

NL-41 RESERVED

NL-42 RESERVED

NL-43 RESERVED

NL-44 RESERVED

NL-45 RESERVED

NL-46 RESERVED

NL-47 RESERVED

NL-48 RESERVED

NL-49 RESERVED

NL-50 RESERVED

NL-51 RESERVED

NL-52 RESERVED

NL-53 RESERVED

NL-54 RESERVED

NL-55 RESERVED

NL-56 RESERVED

NL-57 RESERVED

NL-58 RESERVED

NL-59 RESERVED

NL-60 RESERVED

NL-61 RESERVED

NL-62 RESERVED

NL-63 RESERVED

NL-64 RESERVED

NL-65 RESERVED

NL-66 RESERVED

NL-67 RESERVED

NL-68 RESERVED

NL-69 RESERVED

NL-70 RESERVED

NL-99 RESERVED

NOTE: Do not i ncl ude t hi s i ndex i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i on.

2004SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE

NL-1 PRI SMATI C LENS RECESSED 600mm X 1200mm 2' X 4' FLUORESCENT TROFFER



NL-4 PARABOLI C RECESSED 600mm X 1200mm 2' X 4' FLUORESCENT TROFFER




2004SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE


NL-7 RECESSED FLUORESCENT TROFFER OPTI ONS

NL-8 DI RECT/ I NDI RECT RECESSED 600mm X 1200mm 2' X 4' FLUORESCENT

NL-9 DI RECT/ I NDI RECT RECESSED 600mm X 600mm 2' X 2' FLUORESCENT

NL-10 FLUORESCENT WRAPAROUND - OFFI CE/ CLASSROOM AREAS

NL-11 FLUORESCENT WRAPAROUND - UTI LI TY

NL-12 LI NEAR FLUORESCENT WALL WASH

NL-13 I NDUSTRI AL FLUORESCENT

NL-14 STRI P FLUORESCENT

NL-15 STAGGERED- STRI P FLUORESCENT

NL-16 PENDENT- MOUNTED DI RECT/ I NDI RECT LI NEAR FLUORESCENT

NL-17 PENDENT- MOUNTED I NDI RECT/ OPEN LI NEAR FLUORESCENT

NL-18 PENDENT- MOUNTED SEMI - I NDI RECT LUMI NOUS BOWL

NL-19 FI BERGLASS HOUSI NG DAMP/ WET LOCATI ON FLUORESCENT

NL-20 STEEL- SI DED SURFACE- MOUNTED FLUORESCENT

NL-21 WALL- MOUNTED FLUORESCENT

NL-22 I NDI RECT WALL- MOUNTED FLUORESCENT

NL-23 FLUORESCENT COVE LI GHT

NL-24 FLUORESCENT VANI TY LI GHT

NL-25 FLUORESCENT UNDER- CABI NET TASK LI GHT

NL-26 OPAL ACRYLI C CEI LI NG- MOUNTED COMPACT FLUORESCENT

NL-27 OPAL ACRYLI C CEI LI NG- MOUNTED FLUORESCENT

NL-28 HAZARDOUS LOCATI ON I NDUSTRI AL FLUORESCENT

NL-29 LOUVERED FLUORESCENT HI GH- BAY

NL-30 ENCOLSED FLUORESCENT HI GH BAY

NL-31 RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLI GHT

NL-32 LOW- VOLTAGE RECESSED DOWNLI GHT

NL-33 RECESSED LENSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLI GHT

NL-34 RECESSED HI GH- WATTAGE COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLI GHT

NL-35 RECESSED CROSS- BAFFLE COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLI GHT

NL-36 RECESSED METAL HALI DE DOWNLI GHT

NL-37 RETRACTABLE I NCANDESCENT/ METAL HALI DE DOWNLI GHT

NL-38 RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT SHOWER LI GHT

NL-39 STEP/ NI GHT LI GHT

NL-40 SURFACE/ CEI LI NG CROSS- BAFFLE PARABOLI C DOWNLI GHT

NL-41 SURFACE/ PENDANT/ WALL COMPACT FLUORESCENT CYLI NDER

NL-42 SURFACE- MOUNTED TRACK LI GHTI NG

NL-43 TYPI CAL TRACK LI GHTI NG FI XTURES

NL-44 SURFACE- MOUNTED I NDI RECT ASYMMETRI CAL I NDI RECT FI XTURE

NL-45 I NDUSTRI AL TASK/ DOCK LI GHT

NL-46 COMPACT FLUORESCENT WALL SCONCE

NL-47 RESI DENTI AL TYPE ENTRANCE FI XTURE

NL-48 WALL- MOUNTED HI GH ABUSE FI XTURE

NL-49 SEMI - FLUSH HI GH ABUSE FI XTURE

NL-50 HI GH- BAY I NDUSTRI AL HI D FI XTURE

NL-51 LOW- BAY I NDUSTRI AL HI D FI XTURE

NL-52 WAREHOUSE AI SLE HI D FI XTURE



2004SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE

NL-53 PENDENT- MOUNTED I NDI RECT HI D FI XTURE

NL-54 SURFACE- MOUNTED HI D FI XTURE

NL-55 RECESSED HI D FI XTURE

NL-56 WALL- MOUNTED HI D/ COMPACT FLUORESCENT

NL-57 WALL- MOUNTED HALF- SHI ELDED CUTOFF FI XTURE

NL-58 DECORATI VE HI D/ COMPACT FLUORESCENT

NL-59 RECESSED LOW LEVEL FLOODLI GHT

NL-60 HI GH ABUSE WALL- MOUNTED EYELI D

NL-61 EXTERI OR CYLI NDER

NL-62 DECORATI VE EXTERI OR WALL- MOUNTED FI XTURE

NL-63 LED EXI T SI GN

NL-64 EDGE- LI T EXI T SI GN

NL-65 I NDUSTRI AL EMERGENCY LI GHTI NG UNI T

NL-66 REMOTE- MOUNTED FI XTURES FOR EMERGENCY LI GHTI NG UNI T

NL-67 DECORATI VE EMERGENCY LI GHTI NG UNI T

NL-68 PRI SMATI C LENS EMERGENCY LI GHTI NG UNI T

NL-69 HAZARDOUS LOCATI ON FI XTURE

NL-70 OBSTRUCTI ON LI GHT

NL-99 SAMPLE LI GHTI NG FI XTURE SCHEDULE


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs:

1. Lumi nai r e schedul e i ndi cat i ng l umi nai r e symbol ( t ype) , NL pl at e and t ype desi gnat i on, l i ght sour ce t ype and quant i t y, vol t age, i nput wat t s, out put l umens, ef f i cacy or ef f i c i ency, BUG r at i ng i f appl i cabl e, mount i ng t ype and hei ght , and any appl i cabl e opt i ons or not es.

2. Locat i on and mount i ng hei ght of nor mal l i ght i ng and emer gency l i ght i ng l umi nai r es and l i ght i ng cont r ol s f or each gi ven ar ea or r oom.

3. Cont r ol st r at egy descr i pt i on f or each gi ven ar ea or r oom.

4. Ref er enced NL pl at e or det ai l ( i f no NL pl at e i s avai l abl e) f or each l umi nai r e t ype pr ovi ded.

5. Al l accessor i es r equi r ed, such as mount i ng har dwar e, emer gency bat t er y backup i nver t er s, r emot e bal l ast s or dr i ver s, sensor s and cont r ol equi pment , and cent r al emer gency syst em component s.

6. Wher e wi r e f or humi d ar eas, r ods, or st r aps ar e



used ( i f mor e t han one t ype of hanger i s used) .

7. EMI f i l t er s, sur ge suppr essi on or shi el di ng required.

8. Occupancy, vacancy or dayl i ght sensor l ocat i ons, mount i ng, and sensor t echnol ogy t ype used.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Demol i t i on wor k t hat i nvol ves di sposal of f l uor escent and HI D l amps and bal l ast s wi l l r equi r e t he use of Sect i on 02 84 16 HANDLI NG OF LI GHTI NG BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAI NI NG PCBs AND MERCURY.

**************************************************************************





**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect



speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan Industrial Standard (JIS), Japan Luminaires Association (JIL) as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.






JIS C 7617-1 (2017) Double-capped fluorescent lamps -- Part 1: Safety specifications

JIS C 7620-1 (2017) Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps for general lighting service -- Part 1: Safety specifications


JIS C 8105-2-22 (2014) Luminaires - Part 2-22: Particular Requirements - Luminaires For Emergency Lighting

JIS C 8117 (2008) AC supplied electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps

JIS C 8152-2 (2012) Measurement method of white light emitting diode (LED) for lighting-Part 2: LED modules and LED light engines

JIS C 8152-3 (2013) Measurement method of white light emitting diode (LED) for lightingPart 3: Measurement of luminous flux maintenance rate

JIS C 8153 (2015) DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules -- Performance requirements

JIS C 8154 (2015) LED modules for general lighting -- Safety specifications

JIS C 8155 (2019) LED modules for general lighting -- Performance requirements



JIS C 8201-4-1 (2010) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -- Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters

JIS C 8201-5-1 (2007) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear - Part 5-1: Control Circuit Devices And Switching Elements - Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices

JIS C 8286 (2013) Electrical accessories -- Cord sets and interconnection cord sets

JIS C 8304 (2009) Small switches for indoor use



JIS C 5381-12 (2014) Low-voltage surge protective devices -- Part 12: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems -- Selection and application principles

JIS C 5402-20-2 (2005) Electromechanical components for electronic equipment -- Basic testing procedures and measuring methods -- Part 20-2: Test 20b -- Flammability tests -- Fireproofness

JIS C 60079-0 (2010) Explosive atmospheres -- Part 0: Equipment -- General requirements

JIS C 61000-3-2 (2019) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -- Part 3-2: Limits -- Limits for harmonic current emissions

JIS C 9730-2-7 (2019) Automatic electrical controls -- Part 2-7: Particular requirements for timers and time switches

JIS G 3141 (2017) Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet and strip

JIS G 3302 (2019) Hot Dip Zinc Coated Steel Sheet and Strip

JIS G 3547 (2015) Cold-rolled stainless steel plate, sheet and strip

JIS G 4309 (2013) Stainless Steel Wires



JIS H 8610 (1999) Electroplated-Coatings of Zinc on Iron or Steel

JIS Z 8113 (1998) Lighting vocabulary

JIS Z 9110 (2010) General rules of recommended lighting levels

JIS Z 9112 (2012) Classification of fluorescent lamps by chromacity and colour rendering property

JAPAN LUMINAIRES ASSOCIATION (JIL)

JIL 4003 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures with Electronic Ballast


NFPA 101 (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 18-2; TIA 18-3) Life Safety Code


UL 2043 (2013) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

UL 924 (2016; Reprint May 2018) UL Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 94 (2013; Reprint Sep 2017) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances


Materials not considered to be luminaires or luminaire accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, must be as defined in JIS Z 8113

1.4 SUBMITTALS








**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Data, drawings, and reports must employ the terminology, classifications and methods prescribed by the JIS Z 9110 as applicable, for the lighting system specified. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire Drawings ;

Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage Layout ;

SD-03 Product Data

Luminaires ; G[, [_____]]

Light Sources ; G[, [_____]]



**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose " Power Suppl i es ( Dr i ver s) " f or LED, " Bal l ast s" f or f l uor escent and HI D, and " Gener at or s" f or i nduct i on l umi nai r e appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

Drivers, Ballasts and Generators ; G[, [_____]]

LED Luminaire Warranty ;

Luminaire Design Data ;

Vacancy Sensors ; G[, [_____]]

Dimming Controllers (Dimmers) ; G[, [_____]]

Lighting Contactor ; G[, [_____]]

Timeswitch ; G[, [_____]]

Power Hook Luminaire Hangers ; G[, [_____]]

Exit Signs ; G[, [_____]]

Emergency Lighting Unit (EBU) ; G[, [_____]]

LED Emergency Drivers ; G[, [_____]]

Fluorescent Emergency Ballasts ; G[, [_____]]

Occupancy Sensors ; G[, [_____]]

Ambient Light Level Sensor ; G[, [_____]]

Lighting Control Panel ; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - Test Report ;

LED Light Source - Test Report ;

Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification Tests ;

Energy Efficiency ;

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

1.5.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data must accompany shop drawings.

1.5.2 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage Layout

Provide floor plans showing coverage layouts of all devices using manufacturer's product information.



1.5.3 Luminaire Design DataProvide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 . Data used for projections must be obtained from testing in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 Appendix B.

1.5.4 LED Luminaire - Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire.

1.5.5 LED Light Source - Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production LED light source (package, array or module). Include all applicable and required data, as outlined under "8 Report on Test Results" in JIS C 8152-3 .

1.5.6 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification Tests

Submit test report outlining post-installation coverage and operation of sensors.

1.5.7 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for JIS C 8152-2 and JIS C 8152-3 test reports must be a Japan Accredited Laboratory for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program for both LM-79 and LM-80 or JIS C 8152-2 and JIS C 8152-3 testing


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of applicable codes and standards , unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the two-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests,



is furnished.


Products manufactured more than six months prior to date of delivery to site must not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5.9.3 Energy Efficiency

**************************************************************************NOTE: The Ener gy Pol i cy Act of 2005 r equi r es new bui l di ngs t o use 30 per cent l ess ener gy t han t he 2007 ASHRAE 90. 1 basel i ne l evel , or 12 per cent l ess ener gy t han t he 2010 ASHRAE 90. 1 basel i ne l evel . Ef f i c i ent l i ght i ng equi pment cont r i but es t o t he f ol l owi ng LEED cr edi t s: EA Pr er equi s i t e 2; EA1.

**************************************************************************

Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficacy and color rendering index of light source.

1.6 WARRANTY

Support all equipment items by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.6.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

a. Provide a written 5 year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

(1) Include finish warranty to include failure and substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

(2) Material warranty must include:

(a) All drivers.

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Provide the Contracting Officer with signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


**************************************************************************NOTE: For t he pur pose of t hi s document , i nt er i or l umi nai r es onl y i ncl ude t hose i n t he i nt er i or por t i on of bui l di ngs or f aci l i t i es. Those l umi nai r es i nt ended t o i l l umi nat e ext er i or ar eas, i ncl udi ng t hose mount ed on ext er i or wal l s of



bui l di ngs and f aci l i t i es ar e consi der ed t o be ext er i or l umi nai r es.

**************************************************************************

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, luminaire controls, or associated equipment are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires, luminaire controls, and associated equipment for exterior applications are specified in Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

JIS C 8105-1 , JIS C 61000-3-2 JIS C 8154 and JIS C 8155 . Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and NL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. Provide all luminaires of the same type by the same manufacturer. Luminaires must be specifically designed for use with the driver, ballast or generator and light source provided.

2.2.1 LED Luminaires

Provide luminaires complete with power supplies (drivers) and light sources. Provide design information including lumen output and design life in luminaire schedule on project plans for LED luminaires. LED luminaires must meet the minimum requirements in the following table:

LUMINAIRE TYPE MINIMUM LUMINAIREEFFICACY (LE)

MINIMUM COLOR RENDERING INDEX(CRI)

LED TROFFER -1 x 4 300 x 12002 x 2 600 x 6002 x 4 600 x 1200

90 LPW 80

LED Downlight 50 LPW 90

LED Track or Accent 40 LPW 80

LED Low Bay/High Bay 80 LPW 70

LED Linear Ambient 80 LPW 80

LED luminaires must also meet the following minimum requirements:

a. Luminaires must have a minimum 5 year manufacturer's warranty.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Typi cal l y, ut i l i ze def aul t s of L70 and 50k hour s f or per f or mance unl ess hi gher speci f i c par amet er s ar e desi r ed.

**************************************************************************

b. Luminaires must have a minimum [_____] lumen maintenance value of [_____] hours as calculated by JIS C 8152-3 , with data obtained per JIS C 8152-3 requirements.

c. Luminaire drive current value must be identical to that provided by test data for luminaire in question.

d. Luminaires must be tested to JIS C 8152-2 and JIS C 8152-3 , with the results provided as required in the Submittals paragraph of this



specification.

2.2.2 Fluorescent Luminaires

JIS C 8105-1 and JIL 4003 . Provide linear and compact fluorescent luminaires complete with housing, ballast and light source. All fluorescent luminaires must be equipped with electronic ballasts.

2.2.3 Induction Luminaires

JIS C 8105-1 . Provide induction luminaires complete with housing, generator and light source.

2.2.4 Luminaires for Hazardous Locations

In addition to requirements stated herein, provide [LED,][fluorescent,][HID,][induction] luminaires for hazardous locations which conform to JIS C 60079-0 or which have Factory Mutual certification for the class and division indicated.

2.3 DRIVERS, BALLASTS and GENERATORS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose " dr i ver s f or LED, " bal l ast s" f or f l uor escent , and " gener at or s" f or i nduct i on l umi nai r e appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

2.3.1 LED Drivers

JIS C 8153 , JIS C 8154 and JIS C 8155 . LED drivers must be electronic, constant-current type and comply with the following requirements:

a. Output power (watts)and luminous flux (lumens) as shown in luminaire schedule for each luminaire type to meet minimum luminaire efficacy (LE) value provided.

b. Power Factor (PF) greater than or equal to 0.9 over the full dimming range when provided.

c. Current draw Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 20 percent.

d. Class A sound rating.

e. Operable at input voltage of [120][240][ 120-277 ][105][210] volts at [50][ 60] hertz.

f. Minimum 5 year manufacturer's warranty.

g. RoHS compliant.

h. Integral thermal protection that reduces or eliminates the output power if case temperature exceeds a value detrimental to the driver.

i. UL listed for dry or damp locations typical of interior installations.

j. [Non-dimmable], [step-dimmable to 50 percent output], or fully-dimmable using 0-10V control as indicated in luminaire schedule.



**************************************************************************NOTE: Di mmabl e LED dr i ver s shoul d usual l y be speci f i ed unl ess speci f i cal l y pr ovi di ng a l umi nai r e f or st ep- di mmi ng onl y, such as i n hal l ways or cor r i dor s. Onl y speci f y non- di mmabl e dr i ver s when l umi nai r e wi l l be i nst al l ed i n an ar ea t hat i s speci f i cal l y not goi ng t o be di mmed, such as an el ect r i cal or t el ecommuni cat i ons r oom.

**************************************************************************

2.3.2 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts

JIS C 8117 . Fluorescent ballasts must not contain any magnetic core and coil components, and must meet the following requirements:

a. Provide with protection as recommended by JIS C 5381-11 and JIS C 5381-12 .

b. Be designed for the wattage and type of light source provided in the luminaire specified, and have circuit diagrams and light source connection information printed on the exterior of the ballast housing.

c. Have a full replacement warranty of five years from date of manufacture.

[ d. Provide all fluorescent ballasts as highest-efficiency type.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: NEMA Pr emi um bal l ast s shoul d be speci f i ed when t he hi ghest - ef f i c i ency bal l ast i s desi r ed, and t he i ncr eased cost t o t he pr oj ect i s not an i ssue. I ni t i al cost i ncr ease i s appr oxi mat el y $0. 05 per squar e f oot . These t ype bal l ast s ar e onl y avai l abl e f or F32/ T8 l i ght sour ces.

**************************************************************************

2.3.2.1 T8 Programmed[Instant]-Start Fluorescent Ballasts

**************************************************************************NOTE: Typi cal l y, pr ogr ammed- st ar t bal l ast s ar e pr ef er r ed f or t hei r l onger l i f e when swi t chi ng on and of f f r equent l y compar ed t o i nst ant - st ar t t ype. Speci f y i nst ant - st ar t t ype onl y when speci f i cal l y desi r ed by t he desi gner

**************************************************************************

Provide programmed[ instant]-start T8 electronic fluorescent ballasts with the following characteristics:

**************************************************************************NOTE: Tot al har moni c di st or t i on of 20 per cent i s accept abl e f or most appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Must be [20 percent][_____ percent] (maximum).

b. Input wattage at [ 120/277 ][105][210] volts.



**************************************************************************NOTE: Mul t i l evel swi t chi ng f or l i ght cont r ol i s r ecommended f or l ocat i ons such as c l assr ooms and conf er ence r ooms wher e mul t i pl e l i ght i ng l evel s ar e desired.

**************************************************************************

[ c. Where indicated on project drawings,provide multi-light source luminaires with two or more ballasts to accomplish the switching scenario indicated.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: To avoi d pot ent i al mai nt enance pr obl ems, use f ol l owi ng br acket ed opt i on onl y when r equest ed by t he act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

[ d. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple luminaires if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway.

] 2.3.2.2 T5 (long twin tube) and T5HO Fluorescent Ballasts

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Not greater than[ 25 percent when operating one light source,][ 15 percent when operating two light sources,][ and][ 20 percent when operating three light sources].

b. Input wattage shall be per Annex B, JIS C 8117

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mul t i l evel swi t chi ng f or l i ght cont r ol i s r ecommended f or some l ocat i ons such as c l assr ooms and conf er ence r ooms wher e mul t i pl e l i ght i ng l evel s ar e desi r ed.

**************************************************************************

[ c. Provide three[ and four] light source luminaires with two ballasts per luminaire where multilevel switching is indicated.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: To avoi d pot ent i al mai nt enance pr obl ems, use f ol l owi ng br acket ed opt i on onl y when r equest ed by t he act i v i t y. Al so, ser vi ng mul t i pl e l umi nai r es f r om a si ngl e bal l ast may al t er t he mi ni mum st ar t i ng and oper at i ng t emper at ur e f or t he l umi nai r e. Desi gn accordingly.

**************************************************************************

[ d. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway.

] 2.3.2.3 Compact Fluorescent Ballasts

Provide programmed-start ballasts for compact fluorescent luminaires.



2.3.2.4 Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts

**************************************************************************NOTE: When possi bl e, l i ght i ng desi gner shoul d consi der LED sol i d st at e l i ght i ng when di mmi ng i s desi r ed. Over al l cost and per f or mance of LED di mmi ng has become f avor abl e over f l uor escent i n r ecent year s.

El ect r oni c di mmi ng bal l ast may have t he same syst em compat i bi l i t y pr obl ems as nor mal l i ght out put el ect r oni c bal l ast when i nst al l ed i n cer t ai n envi r onment s. The pr obl ems mai nl y concer n t he r adi at ed and conduct ed EMI due t o t he r el at i vel y hi gh swi t chi ng f r equenci es i nher ent i n el ect r oni c bal l ast and possi bl y due t o ut i l i zat i on of t he same power sour ce f or l i ght i ng and ot her equi pment . Envi r onment s wher e el ect r oni c bal l ast s have t he pot ent i al f or EMI ar e l i s t ed i n t he cr i t er i a not e f or el ect r oni c bal l ast s.

El ect r oni c di mmi ng bal l ast s as speci f i ed i n t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph, ar e f or gener al wor kpl ace di mmi ng and dayl i ght har vest i ng f or ener gy conser vat i on. For ar chi t ect ur al di mmi ng appl i cat i ons wi t h ver y l ow l i ght l evel s, 100 per cent t o 1 per cent , t he speci f i er must r evi ew al l par amet er s of t hi s par agr aph and ensur e compet i t i ve sources.

El ect r oni c di mmi ng bal l ast s can be cont r ol l ed by a number of devi ces: manual di mmer s, occupancy sensor s, l i ght l evel sensor , phot osensor s, and t i mer s, or wi t h ener gy management syst ems. Al l cont r ol t ypes ar e not speci f i ed her e and t he speci f i er must ensur e syst em compat i bi l i t y bet ween bal l ast and cont r ol s.

I f di mmi ng bal l ast and non- di mmi ng bal l ast ar e used i n t he same ar ea, desi gner and speci f i er may need t o coor di nat e t he bal l ast f act or s at f ul l l i ght out put .

**************************************************************************

Provide fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts with the following characteristics:

a. Comply with JIS C 8117 and JIL 4003 , unless specified otherwise. Provide ballast as recommended by JIS C 5381-11 and JIS C 5381-12 . Provide dimming capability range from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast must start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Provide ballasts designed for the wattage of the light sources used in the indicated application. Provide ballasts designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

**************************************************************************NOTE: A sour ce of l i ght ot her t han f l uor escent i s r ecommended f or ar eas subj ect t o t emper at ur es bel ow mi nus 17 degr ees C.



**************************************************************************

a. Ballast must be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of minus 17 degrees C unless otherwise indicated.

b. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller light sources must have protection circuits as required by JIS C 7617-1 and JIS C 7620-1 as applicable.

2.3.2.4.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

Input wattage shall be per Annex B, JIS C 8117

2.3.3 Induction Generators

Generator must be connected, and operate in conjunction with an inductive power coupler or coil(s). Provide solid-state, high-frequency (200 kHz - 2.67 MHz) type, with power factor greater than 0.95, Class A sound rating, maximum input current THD of 15 percent, operating voltage of [105-210][120-240][ 120-277 ] V, and a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees F. Provide generator dimmable to a minimum of 50 percent light output.

2.4 LIGHT SOURCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: The t er m ' l i ght sour ces' i s now used i n pl ace of t he pr evi ousl y used t er m ' l amps' i n t hi s specification.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8155 . Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans.

2.4.1 LED Light Sources

**************************************************************************NOTE: A col or t emper at ur e of 3500 K i s st andar d f or most appl i cat i ons. Make cool er or war mer sel ect i on onl y when speci f i cal l y desi r ed by t he desi gner .

**************************************************************************

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of [3000]3500[4000][_____] degrees K.

b. Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) value of 80.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Red, gr een, and bl ue ( RGB) LED t echnol ogy pr oduces an even hi gher CRI val ue t han phosphor conver si on ( PC) , and i s t ypi cal l y mor e expensi ve.

**************************************************************************

c. High power, white light output utilizing phosphor conversion (PC) process[ or mixed system of colored LEDs, typically red, green and blue (RGB)].

d. RoHS compliant.



[ 2.4.1.1 LED Retrofit T8 Tubes

**************************************************************************NOTE: Li ght i ng desi gner must ver i f y t hat bal l ast s i n exi st i ng l umi nai r es ar e ei t her i nst ant - st ar t or pr ogr ammed- st ar t and t hat t hey wi l l be compat i bl e wi t h r epl acement LED l i ght sour ces bei ng speci f i ed.

**************************************************************************

Provide linear T8 tubular LED light sources to replace fluorescent light sources in renovation or energy conservation projects. Provide only where entire luminaires are not being replaced. Light sources must be compatible with existing instant-start or programmed-start ballasts and have the following requirements:

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of [3000]3500[4000] degrees K.

b. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 20 percent, with Power Factor (PF) greater than 90 percent.

c. Minimum lumen per watt efficacy greater than 120.

d. Minimum beam angle of 180 degrees.

e. Minimum 5 year warranty.

f. Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 80.

] 2.4.2 Fluorescent Light Sources

**************************************************************************NOTE: For l i near l umi nai r es, T8 l i ght sour ces wi t h CRI of 85 and CCT of 3500 degr ees K ar e r ecommended f or most appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

JIS Z 9112 . Fluorescent light sources must be low-mercury, energy-savings type and be compliant with the most current TCLP test procedure at the time of manufacture.

2.4.2.1 Linear Fluorescent Light Sources

JIS C 7617-1 . Provide linear fluorescent light sources with minimum CRI of 85[_____] and CCT of 3500[_____] degrees K.

2.4.2.1.1 T8 Linear Fluorescent Light Sources

Provide T8 light sources with medium bi-pin base, rated [_____] watts (maximum), [_____] initial lumens (minimum), and with an average rated life of 30,000[_____] hours using a average three hour burn time and programmed-start ballast.

2.4.2.1.2 T5HO (High-Output) Linear Fluorescent Light Sources

Provide T5HO light sources with miniature bi-pin base, rated [_____] watts (maximum), [_____] initial lumens (minimum), and with an average rated life of 30,000[_____] hours using a average three hour burn time and programmed start ballast.



2.4.2.2 Compact Fluorescent (CFL) Light Sources

JIS C 7620-1 . Provide compact fluorescent (CFL) light sources with minimum CRI of 82[_____] and CCT of 3500[_____] degrees K.

2.4.3 Induction Light Sources

Provide induction light sources consisting of an electrodeless, inductively-coupled, phosphor-coated fluorescent envelope, with an average rated life of 100,000 hours minimum rated using three hours operation per start. Light sources must be compliant with the most current TCLP test procedure at the time of manufacture.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROLS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude br acket ed opt i on f or net wor k connect ed l i ght i ng cont r ol s.

**************************************************************************

Provide lighting controls and associated equipment in accordance with drawings and applicable energy codes. [ Provide network certification for all networked lighting control systems and devices per requirements of Section 25 05 11 CYBERSECURITY FOR FACILITY-RELATED CONTROL SYSTEMS .]

2.5.1 Toggle Switches

Provide line-voltage toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.5.2 Dimming Controllers (Dimmers)

**************************************************************************NOTE: The maj or i t y of di mmer s use ei t her pul se wi dt h modul at i on ( PWM) or const ant cur r ent r educt i on ( CCR) t echnol ogy t o di m l i ght sour ces. PWM t ype di mmer s ar e a bet t er choi ce when l evel s l ower t han 40 per cent ar e needed, because of t he mor e pr eci se col or cont r ol . CCR t ype di mmer s ar e mor e appl i cabl e when used wi t h l umi nai r es r equi r i ng UL Cl ass 2 r at ed out put and when st r i ct er EMI emi ssi on r equi r ement s ar e r equi r ed. Speci f y 0- 10V di mmi ng swi t ches onl y when usi ng 0- 10V f l uor escent bal l ast s and LED dr i ver s speci f i cal l y desi gned f or , and compat i bl e wi t h t hei r use. .

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8304 . [ 120/277 ][105/210] V[0-10 V] dimmers must provide flicker-free, continuously variable light output throughout the dimming range. Provide radio frequency interference suppression integral to device. Provide dimmers utilizing [pulse width modulation (PWM)][constant current reduction (CCR) technology]. Provide device with a vertical slider, paddle, rotary button, or toggle (with adjacent vertical slider) type control, with finish to match switches and outlets in same area. Provide back box in wall with sufficient depth to accommodate body of switch and wiring. Devices must be capable of operating at their full rated capacity regardless of being single or ganged-mounted, and be compatible with three-way and four-way switching scenarios. Dimmers must be capable of controlling [two-wire][three-wire][0-10 volt] fluorescent



ballasts or LED drivers. Ensure compatibility of dimmer with separate power packs when utilized for lighting control. Dimmers and the ballasts or drivers they control, must be provided from the same manufacturer, or tested and certified as compatible for use together.

2.5.3 Sensors for Lighting Control

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ut i l i ze occupancy sensor s when aut omat i c t ur n- on and t ur n- of f i s desi r ed. Vacancy sensor s r equi r e human act i vat i on t o t ur n on, and t ur n of f aut omat i cal l y. Occupancy sensor s t ur n on aut omat i cal l y when sensi ng movement or noi se, and al so t ur n of f aut omat i cal l y. I n gener al , use wal l box or cei l i ng- mount ed sensor s f or most i nt er i or appl i cat i ons. Keep i n mi nd wal l box mount ed sensor s may be i nef f ect i ve when obst r uct i ons such as par t i t i oned wor kst at i ons and st or age shel v i ng exi st . Use wal l - mount ed sensor s f or ar eas wi t h cei l i ngs hi gher t han 3. 6 met er s. Use hi gh- bay sensor s f or ar eas wi t h cei l i ngs hi gher t han 3. 6 meters . Wher e cei l i ng- mount ed sensor s ar e ut i l i zed, mount no cl oser t han 1. 8 met er s t o t he near est HVAC suppl y or r et ur n di f f user . Dual t echnol ogy sensor s ar e a bet t er choi ce f or most appl i cat i ons, wi t h PI R sensor s used i n smal l , l i ne- of - s i ght spaces such as s i ngl e t oi l et s, and ul t r asoni c sensor s used i n mul t i - per son t oi l et s and cor r i dor s.

**************************************************************************

UL 94 , JIS C 5402-20-2 and JIS C 8201-5-1 .

2.5.3.1 Occupancy Sensors

Provide occupancy sensors with coverage patterns as indicated on project plans. Provide no less quantity of sensors as shown on plans, but add additional sensors when required to fulfill coverage requirement for the specific model sensor provided. Sensor must be provided with an adaptive learning function that automatically sets sensor in optimum calibration in a set period of time after installation and a non-volatile memory that saves settings after a power outage. Provide sensors designed for ceiling, wall or wall-box installation as indicated. Operating voltage must be [105][ 120 ][210][240] [277] volts.[ Operating voltage must be 24V in conjunction with a control system or separate power pack which interacts with luminaire being controlled.] Provide housing of high-impact, injection-molded thermoplastic with a multi-segmented lens for PIR and dual technology sensors. Sensor operation requires movement to activate luminaires controlled, and turns luminaires off after a set time of inactivity.[ Provide integral photocell mounted in occupancy sensor housing when indicated.]

2.5.3.1.1 Passive Infrared (PIR) Sensors

Provide ceiling or wall-mounted PIR sensors meeting the following requirements:

a. Temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-element fresnel lens (Poly IR4 material).



b. Technology to optimize automatic time delay to fit occupant usage patterns.

c. No minimum load requirement for line voltage sensors and be capable of switching from zero to 800 W at [105][ 120 ] VAC, 50/60 Hz and from zero to 1200 W at [210][240][ 277 ] VAC, 50/60 Hz. Control voltage sensors must not exceed a maximum load requirement of 20 mA at 24VDC.

d. Time delay of five to 30 minutes in increments of five minutes with a walk through and test mode set by DIP switch.

e. LED indicator that remains active during occupancy.

f. Built-in light level sensor that is operational from 0.8 to 18 lux .

g. Coverage pattern tested to applicable standards.

h. Standard five year warranty .

i. No leakage current to load when in the off mode.

2.5.3.1.2 Ultrasonic Sensors

Provide ceiling-mounted ultrasonic sensors meeting the following requirements:

a. Operate at an ultrasonic frequency of [_____] kHz.

b. LED on exterior of device to indicate occupant detection.

c. Adjustable time delay period of 15 seconds to 15 minutes [_____].

d. Minimum five year warranty.

[ e. Provide with isolated relay for integrating control of HVAC or other automated systems.

] 2.5.3.1.3 Dual Technology Sensors

Provide dual technology sensors that meet the requirements for PIR sensors and ultrasonic sensors indicated above. If either the passive infrared or ultrasonic sensing registers occupancy, the luminaires must remain on.

2.5.3.1.4 High/Low-Bay Sensors

Provide occupancy sensors specifically designed for high/low-bay mounting application using passive infrared (PIR) technology, with the following characteristics:

a. Input voltage of [120][240][ 120/277 ][105][210] volts, at [ 50][ 60] hertz.

b. High-impact, injection-molded thermoplastic housing with interchangeable lenses for 360 degree open area coverage or narrow rectangular, warehouse aisle coverage.

c. Utilize zero-crossing circuitry to prevent damage from high inrush current and to promote long life operation.



d. Be designed to mount directly to or adjacent to high or low-bay luminaires.

2.5.3.1.5 Power Packs for Sensors

UL 2043 Power packs used to provide power to one or more lighting control sensors must meet the following requirements:

a. Input voltage - [105][210][120][240][ 120-277 ] VAC; output voltage - 24 VDC at 225 mA.

b. Plenum-rated, high-impact thermoplastic enclosure.

c. Utilizes zero-crossing circuitry to prevent damage from inrush current.

d. Maximum load rating of [_____] amps for electronic[_____] lighting loads.

e. RoHS compliant.

2.5.3.2 Vacancy Sensors

Provide vacancy sensors as indicated above under paragraph OCCUPANCY SENSORS, but with requirement of a manual operation to activate luminaires controlled. Provide automatic operation to turn luminaires off after a set period of inactivity.

2.5.4 [ Lighting Contactor

JIS C 8201-4-1 . Provide an electrically[mechanically]-held lighting contactor housed in a [indoor][weatherproof][ ] rated IP enclosure conforming to JIS C 8462-1 . Provide contactor with one[_____] normally-open(NO)[normally closed(NC)], single[double] pole contacts, rated 600 volts, 30 amps. Provide coil operating voltage of [24][120][277][480] [105][210][240][400] [_____] volts. ]

[ 2.5.5 Timeswitch

JIS C 9730-2-7 . [Provide electromechanical type timeswitch with a [24 hour][7 day][astronomic] dial [that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise]. Provide power to switch from integral synchronous motor with a maximum three watt rating. Rate contacts at 40 amps at [105][210][120][240][ 120-277 ] volts for general purpose loads. Provide contacts in a SPST[DPST][SPDT], [normally-open (NO)][normally-closed (NC)] configuration. [Provide switch with an automatic spring mechanism to maintain accurate time for up to 16 hours.] [Provide switch with function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain selected days of the week.][Provide switch with manual bypass[remote override] control function.]]

[Provide electronic type timeswitch with a [24 hour][7 day][astronomic] programming function [that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise], providing a total of 56[_____] on/off set points. Provide [12 hour AM/PM][24 hour] type digital clock display format. Provide power outage back-up for switch for a minimum of [seven][_____] days. Provide switch capable of controlling a minimum of [1][2][4][_____] channels or loads. Rate contacts at [30][_____] amps at [105][210][120][240][ 120/277 ] volts for general purpose loads. Provide contacts in a SPST[DPST][SPDT], [normally-open (NO)][normally-closed (NC)]



configuration. [Provide switch with [function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain selected days of the week][manual bypass or remote override control][daylight savings time adjustment][additional memory module][momentary function for output contacts][ability for photosensor input].]]

House timeswitch in a surface-mounted, lockable, [indoor][weatherproof][ ] rated IP enclosure constructed of painted steel or plastic polymer conforming to JIS C 8462-1 .

] 2.5.6 Lighting Control Panel

**************************************************************************NOTE: When pr ovi di ng a cont r ol panel t hat i nt er f aces wi t h t he bui l di ng aut omat ed cont r ol syst em, r ef er ence I ES Techni cal Memor andum I ES TM- 23- 11 f or t echni cal i nf or mat i on on var i ous pr ot ocol s, ar chi t ect ur es and t opol ogi es f or such systems.

**************************************************************************

Provide an electronic, programmable lighting control panel, capable of providing lighting control with input from internal programming, digital switches, time clocks, and other low-voltage control devices.

Enclose panel hardware in a surface[flush]-mounted, [indoor][weatherproof] rated IP enclosure in accordance with JIS C 0920 , painted, steel enclosure, with hinged, lockable access door and ventilation openings. Internal low-voltage compartment must be separated from line-voltage compartment of enclosure with only low-voltage compartment accessible upon opening of door.[ Provide additional remote cabinets that communicate back to main control panel.]

Input voltage - [105][210][ 120/277 ] V, [50][ 60] Hz, with internal 24 VDC power supply.

Provide 8[16][32][_____] single-pole latching[return to close] relays rated at [20][30] amps, [120][277] [105][210] volts.[ Provide provision for relays to close upon power failure that meets UL 924 and JIS C 8105-2-22 .]

Relay control module must operate at 24 VDC and be rated to control a minimum of 8[16][32][_____] relays.

2.5.7 Local Area Lighting Controller

Provide controller designed for single area or room with the following requirements:

a. [105] [120] [210][240] [277] volt input, designed for fluorescent or LED lighting loads.

b. 2[_____] zone, with 1[2][_____] relay[s] rated 20 amps[each].

c. Provide daylight harvesting capability with full-range dimming control.

d. Inputs for occupancy sensor, photocell, and low-voltage wall switch.

[ e. Provide capability for receptacle load control.



][ f. Provide full 'OFF' function with input from external time clock input.

] 2.6 EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

UL 924 , JIS C 8105-2-22 and NFPA 101 compliant.

2.6.1 Exit Signs

**************************************************************************NOTE: For NAVFAC pr oj ect s, pr ovi de LED t ype sel f - power ed exi t s i gns ( bat t er y backup) unl ess speci f i cal l y i nst r uct ed ot her wi se. Nor mal mode of power t o t hese si gns must be t he br anch ci r cui t ser vi ng nor mal l i ght i ng i n t he same ar ea, ahead of any l ocal swi t chi ng. The emer gency mode of power i s t he exi t s i gn' s sel f - cont ai ned emer gency bat t er y pack. Pr ovi de r emot e- power ed exi t s i gns onl y when pr ovi di ng cent r al l y di st r i but ed AC or DC emer gency power syst em.

**************************************************************************

Provide exit signs consuming a maximum of five watts total.

2.6.1.1 LED Self-Powered Exit Signs

Provide in [UV-stable, thermo-plastic][painted, die-cast aluminum][painted steel] housing with [UL damp label][UL wet label][using clear polycarbonate housing], configured for ceiling[wall][end] mounting. [Provide edge-lit type with clear acrylic, edge-lit face and aluminum trim having clear aluminum[white][chrome][brass][_____] finish.] Provide 150 mm high, 19 mm stroke red[green][_____] lettering on face of sign. Provide chevrons on either side of lettering to indicate direction. Provide single[double] face. Equip with automatic power failure device, test switch, and pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery must be sealed, maintenance free nickel-cadmium type, and must operate unattended for a period of not less than five years. Emergency run time must be a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. LEDs must have a minimum rated life of 10 years. [Provide self-diagnostic circuitry integral to emergency LED driver.]

2.6.1.2 LED Remote-Powered Exit Signs

Provide as indicated above for self-powered type, but without battery and charger. Exit sign must contain provision for [105][210][120][240][ 120/277] VAC or 6-48 VDC input from remote source.

2.6.2 Emergency Lighting Unit (EBU)

Provide in [UV-stable, thermo-plastic][painted, die-cast aluminum][painted steel] housing with [UL damp label][UL wet label] [IP rated enclosure in accordance with JIS C 0920 ] as indicated. Emergency lighting units must be rated for 12 volts, except units having no remote-mounted lamps and having no more than two unit-mounted light sources may be rated six volts. Equip units with brown-out sensitive circuit to activate battery when input voltage falls to 75 percent of normal. Equip with two[_____] LED, automatic power failure device, test switch, and pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery must be sealed, maintenance free



[lead-calcium][nickel-cadmium][_____] type, and must operate unattended for a period of not less than five years. Emergency run time must be a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. LEDs must have a minimum rated life of 10 years. [Provide self-diagnostic circuitry integral to emergency LED driver.]

2.6.3 LED Emergency Drivers

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de i nf or mat i on on mi ni mum t ot al power i n wat t s of LED( s) i n emer gency mode t o sat i sf y r equi r ement s of NFPA 101, Li f e Saf et y Code.

I f Japan manuf act ur ed dr i ver s or bal l ast s ar e speci f i ed, pr ovi de cent r al l i ght i ng i nver t er s t o suppl y a mi ni mum of 90 mi nut es. I ncl ude st ep up and/ or st ep down t r ansf or mer s accor di ngl y t o suppor t Japan manuf act ur ed dr i ver s and bal l ast s.

**************************************************************************

Provide LED emergency driver with automatic power failure detection, test switch and LED indicator (or combination switch/indicator) located on luminaire exterior, and fully-automatic solid-state charger, battery and inverter integral to a self-contained housing. [Provide self-diagnostic function integral to emergency driver.]Integral nickel-cadmium[lead-calcium][_____] battery is required to supply a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power at [5][7][10][_____] watts, [10-50][_____] VDC[compatible with LED forward voltage requirements], constant output. Driver must be RoHS compliant, rated for installation in plenum-rated spaces and damp locations, and be warranted for a minimum of five years. [Provide central lighting inverter(s) to supply a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power.]

2.6.4 Fluorescent Emergency Ballasts

Provide each 'system' with an automatic power failure device, test switch operable from the exterior of the luminaire (or remotely), a pilot light visible from the exterior of the luminaire, and fully automatic solid-state charger, battery, and inverter integral to a self-contained housing. [Provide self-diagnostic function integral to emergency ballast.] Integral [nickel-cadmium][lead-calcium][_____] battery is required to supply a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power to one[two][_____] light source[s] within luminaire at a minimum of [500][700][1200][_____] lumens output[each]. Provide open-circuit protection and time-delay function to counteract 'end-of-life' circuitry in normal power ballast from interfering with emergency ballast operation. Ballast must be RoHS compliant, rated for installation in plenum-rated spaces and damp locations, and be warranted for a minimum of five years. [Provide central lighting inverter(s) to supply a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power.]

[ 2.6.5 Self-Diagnostic Circuitry for LED and Fluorescent Emergency Drivers/Ballasts

Provide emergency lighting unit with fully-automatic, integral self-testing/diagnostic electronic circuitry. Circuitry must provide for a one minute diagnostic test every 28 days, and a 30 minute diagnostic test every six months, minimum. Any malfunction of the unit must be indicated by LED(s) visible from the exterior of the luminaire. A manual test switch must also be provided to perform a diagnostic test at any



given time.

] 2.6.6 Central Emergency Lighting System

**************************************************************************NOTE: Show cl ear l y on pr oj ect dr awi ngs ext ent and zoni ng of cent r al emer gency syst em.

**************************************************************************

Provide integrally-housed emergency system rated at [_____] VA/watts, [105][ 120 ][210][240] [277] volts (input and output), for a minimum period of 90 minutes. Output frequency must be a pure sine wave at [50][ 60] hertz, with maximum 5 percent total harmonic distortion. Provide system with minimum short circuit rating required for protection against available fault current.

2.6.6.1 System Operation

During normal power operation, system charges batteries as needed and allows normal power to pass through to load. Upon loss of normal power, system automatically transfers to emergency mode without interruption of connected loads. Internal batteries provide a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power at this time. Upon normal power being restored, system switches back to normal power mode and fully charges batteries within UL-approved time period.

2.6.6.2 Battery Charger

Solid state, monitored, three step float charging type, keeping batteries in a fully charged state. Provide circuitry to prevent deep discharge of batteries in prolonged power outage conditions.

2.6.6.3 Batteries

Provide sealed, lead calcium type, designed to operated unattended without maintenance, for a minimum of 10 years.

2.6.6.4 Enclosure

Provide system in [indoor][weatherproof][ ] rated IP enclosure in accordance with JIS C 0920 painted steel[aluminum] enclosure with exterior-mounted "push-to-test" button and LED indicator.

2.6.6.5 Accessories

Provide [_____] single pole, [_____] ampere output circuit breakers. [Voltmeter and ammmeter for battery[load].]

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT HARDWARE

2.7.1 Wire

JIS G 3547 ; Galvanized, soft tempered steel, minimum 2.7 mm in diameter, or galvanized, braided steel, minimum 2 mm in diameter.

2.7.2 Wire for Humid Spaces

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect st ai nl ess st eel or ni ckel copper al l oy



wi r e f or f aci l i t i es wher e hi gh humi di t y can be expect ed such as l ar ge ki t chens, di shwashi ng ar eas, et c. Use ni ckel copper al l oy when hangar s ar e used i n i ndoor pool envi r onment s. When spaci ng of hangar wi r es exceeds 1200 mmor when heavy l umi nai r es ar e suppor t ed, speci f y ei ght or 10 gauge wi r e.

**************************************************************************

JIS G 4309 ; Annealed stainless steel, minimum 2.7 mm in diameter.

Annealed nickel-copper alloy, minimum 2.7 mm in diameter.

2.7.3 Threaded Rods

Threaded steel rods, 4.76 mm diameter, zinc or cadmium coated.

2.7.4 Straps

Galvanized steel, 25 by 4.76 mm , conforming to JIS G 3302 , with a light commercial zinc coating or JIS G 3141 with an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to JIS H 8610 .

2.8 POWER HOOK LUMINAIRE HANGERS

JIS C 8105-1 . Provide an assembly consisting of through-wired power hook housing, interlocking plug and receptacle, power cord, and luminaire support loop. Power hook housing must be cast aluminum having two 19 mm threaded hubs. Support hook must have safety screw. Fixture support loop must be cast aluminum with provisions for accepting 19 mm threaded stems. Power cord must include 410 mm of 3 conductor 1.2 mm Type SO cord or power cord per JIS C 8286 . Assembly must be rated [105][ 120 ] volts or [210][ 277 ] volts, 15 amperes.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.9.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment must have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.9.2 Labels

**************************************************************************NOTE: Label i ng of l i ght i ng component s i s an i nexpensi ve and ef f ect i ve met hod f or hel pi ng f aci l i t i es per sonnel pr oper l y oper at e and mai nt ai n t he l i ght i ng syst ems. The l abel s must be easy t o r ead when st andi ng next t o t he equi pment , and dur abl e t o mat ch t he l i f e of t he equi pment t o whi ch t hey ar e at t ached.

**************************************************************************

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with JIS C 8105-1 requirements. All luminaires must be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts, generators or drivers. Note the following light source characteristics in the format "Use Only _____":



a. Light source diameter code (T-5, T-8), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Start type (programmed start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

All markings related to light source type must be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when light sources are in place. Ballasts, generators or drivers must have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.



**************************************************************************

Provide all luminaires and lighting equipment with factory-applied painting system that as a minimum, meets requirements of JIS C 0920 corrosion-resistance test.

2.11 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

Provide access to lamp and ballast from bottom of luminaire. Provide trim [and lenses]for the exposed surface of flush-mounted luminaires as indicated on project drawings and specifications.

2.12 SUSPENDED LUMINAIRES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e pendant sway br aci ng det ai l s wi t h t he ar chi t ect . The ar chi t ect may pr ef er t o pr ovi de pendant sway br aci ng det ai l s i n l ocat i ons wher e appear ance i s i mpor t ant . Speci f y shock absor bi ng hanger s f or l umi nai r es i n cer t ai n hazar dous l ocat i ons i f i ndi cat ed. Speci f y swi vel hanger s t o sat i sf y ant i t er r or i st / f or ce pr ot ect i on r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of luminaires supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Provide cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers must allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 0.79 rad . Brace pendants 1219 mm or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended luminaires must have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row luminaires must have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Provide rods in minimum 4.57 mm diameter.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations must conform to IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 and to the requirements specified herein. Install luminaires and lighting controls to meet the requirements of applicable codes and standards . To encourage consistency and uniformity, install luminaires of the same manufacture and model number when residing in the same facility or building.

3.1.1 Light Sources

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e al l l i ght sour ce descr i pt i ve i nf or mat i on i n t he l umi nai r e schedul e on t he pr oj ect drawings.

**************************************************************************

When light sources are not provided as an integral part of the luminaire, deliver light sources of the type, wattage, lumen output, color temperature, color rendering index, and voltage rating indicated to the project site and install just prior to project completion, if not already installed in the luminaires from the factory.

3.1.2 Luminaires

**************************************************************************NOTE: The el ect r i cal desi gner must coor di nat e t hese r equi r ement s wi t h ar chi t ect ur al pl ans and speci f i cat i ons. Ensur e r equi r ement s f or ant i t er r or i sm/ f or ce pr ot ect i on f or l umi nai r es i n suspended cei l i ngs ar e i ncl uded i n and coor di nat ed wi t h Sect i on 09 51 00 ACOUSTI CAL CEI LI NGS by r ef er enci ng ASTM E580 sei smi c r equi r ement s i n t hat section.

Lumi nai r es f or f aci l i t i es l ocat ed i n ear t hquake zones must have addi t i onal suppor t s and r est r ai ni ng devi ces as descr i bed i n UFC 1- 200- 01, " Gener al Bui l di ng Requi r ement s, wi t h Change 1" and UFC 3- 310- 04, " Sei smi c Desi gn f or Bui l di ngs" .

**************************************************************************

Set luminaires plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent luminaires and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation must meet requirements of applicable codes and standards . Mounting heights specified or indicated must be to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted luminaires and to center of luminaire for wall-mounted luminaires. Obtain approval of the exact mounting height on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire and located near each corner of the luminaire. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported luminaires. Round luminaires or luminaires smaller in size than the ceiling grid must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire, spaced



approximately equidistant around. Do not support luminaires by acoustical tile ceiling panels. Where luminaires of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support each independently and provide at least two 19 mm metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the luminaire. Provide wires, straps, or rods for luminaire support in this section. Luminaires installed in suspended ceilings must also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Luminaires

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e pendant sway br aci ng det ai l s wi t h t he ar chi t ect . The ar chi t ect may pr ef er t o pr ovi de pendant sway br aci ng det ai l s i n l ocat i ons wher e appear ance i s i mpor t ant .

**************************************************************************

Provide suspended luminaires with 0.79 rad swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and level. Locate so that there are no obstructions within the 0.79 rad range in all directions. The stem, canopy and luminaire must be capable of 0.79 rad swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 1.2 meters or longer excluding luminaire must be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 2.09 rad separation. Suspended luminaires in continuous rows must have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and must be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Utilize aligning splines on extruded aluminum luminaires to assure minimal hairline joints. Support steel luminaires to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Luminaire finishes must be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and must match the color and gloss specified. Match supporting pendants with supported luminaire. Aircraft cable must be stainless steel. Canopies must be finished to match the ceiling and must be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points must be 3.1 meters or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts, Generators and Power Supplies

Typically, provide ballasts, generators, and power supplies (drivers) integral to luminaire as constructed by the manufacturer.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph f or most pr oj ect s.

The br acket ed subpar agr aphs must onl y be used i n speci al cases such as wher e ener gy moni t or i ng syst ems ar e used, wher e f aci l i t i es use br eaker s as swi t ches, and wher e cent r al emer gency syst ems ar e used. I n t hese cases emer gency l i ght i ng may have t o be on separ at e c i r cui t s r at her t han connect ed ahead of t he l ocal swi t chi ng.

**************************************************************************

Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the local switch, to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.



[ 3.1.5.1 Exit Signs

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s subpar agr aph onl y i n speci al cases and as i ndi cat ed i n t he above r ef er enced not e.

**************************************************************************

Connect exit signs on separate circuits and serve from [an emergency panel][a separate circuit breaker][a fused disconnect switch]. Provide only one source of control, which would be [the circuit breaker in the emergency panel][the separate circuit breaker][the fused disconnect switch]. Paint source of control red and provide lockout capability.

][ 3.1.5.2 Emergency Lighting from Central Emergency System

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s subpar agr aph onl y f or pr oj ect s ut i l i z i ng a cent r al emer gency syst em. I ncl ude zone cont r ol det ai l s of emer gency syst em on pr oj ect dr awi ngs when used.

**************************************************************************

Connect emergency lighting from a central emergency system as indicated on the project drawings.

] 3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude sensor t est i ng r equi r ement her e when pr oj ect does not i ncl ude a separ at e commi ssi oni ng speci f i cat i on. When i t does, pr ovi de sensor t est i ng r equi r ement s i n t he commi ssi oni ng speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide testing of sensor coverage in all spaces where sensors are placed. This should be done only after all furnishings (carpet, furniture, workstations, etc.) have been installed. Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage must provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage.

3.1.8 Daylight or Ambient Light Level Sensor

Locate sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 300 lux or for the indicated light level measured at the work plane for that particular area.


**************************************************************************



NOTE: Use and coor di nat e pai nt and coat i ng r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS when pr ovi ded i n t he j ob. I f Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS i s not pr ovi ded or when r equi r ement s ar e beyond what i s speci f i ed i n Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS, speci f y t he r equi r ement s i n t hi s par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

Paint lighting equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Provide painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.







**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 26 56 00 ( May 2013) Change 1 - 08/ 18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 26 56 00 ( Jul y 2006)



SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING05/13


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s l i ght i ng syst em r equi r ement s f or ext er i or i nst al l at i ons.

Thi s speci f i cat i on does not cover al l possi bl e met hods or r equi r ement s f or ext er i or l i ght i ng; t her ef or e, desi gner shoul d add speci al i nf or mat i on r equi r ed t o sui t a speci f i c pr oj ect . I ndust r y publ i cat i ons exi st t o ai d t he desi gner i n choosi ng t he best l i ght i ng syst em f or t he pr oj ect . Publ i cat i ons i ncl ude, but ar e not l i mi t ed t o, t he I l l umi nat i ng Engi neer i ng Soci et y ( I ES) HB- 10, LI GHTI NG HANDBOOK and RP- 8, RECOMMENDED PRACTI CE FOR ROADWAY LI GHTI NG.




**************************************************************************



**************************************************************************NOTE: TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHI CSGo t o http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on cont ai ns t he f ol l owi ng sket ches ( pl at es) and ar e avai l abl e i n met r i c ( SI ) and U. S. Cust omar y ( I P) syst em di mensi ons. Sket ch t i t l es and st y l e number s ar e unchanged f or bot h t ypes.

Do not i ncl ude l i s t of sket ches, or sket ches t hemsel ves, i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons. Use l umi nai r e sket ches as det ai l s ( pl at es) on dr awi ngs whenever possi bl e. I f speci al f eat ur es ar e r equi r ed, do not modi f y sket ches, but i ndi cat e t hese changes as not es i n l umi nai r e schedul e. The " XL" st y l e number s and dat es shoul d r emai n on t he dr awi ng det ai l s. I f addi t i onal l umi nai r e t ypes ar e needed t hat ar e not cover ed i n sket ches, pr ovi de addi t i onal sket ches or det ai l s on dr awi ngs, but do not l abel as XL sket ch t ype.

Sket ch No. Title

XL-1 LED Roadway Lumi nai r e

XL-2 HI D/ I nduct i on Roadway Lumi nai r e

XL-3 LED Ar ea Lumi nai r e

XL-4 HI D Ar ea Lumi nai r e

XL-5 I nduct i on Ar ea Lumi nai r e

XL-6 Low Pr essur e Sodi um Ar ea Lumi nai r e

XL-7 HI D Hi gh Mast Lumi nai r e

XL-8 HI D Apr on/ Lar ge Spor t s Fi el d Lumi nai r e

XL-9 HI D Spor t s Fi el d Lumi nai r e

XL-10 LED Pedest r i an Post Top Lumi nai r e

XL-11 HI D/ CFL/ I nduct i on Pedest r i an Post Top Lumi nai r e

XL-12 Decor at i ve Bol l ar d

XL-13 LED Par ki ng Gar age Lumi nai r e

XL-14 HI D/ I nduct i on Par ki ng Gar age Lumi nai r e

XL-15 Ext er i or Recessed Downl i ght



Sket ch No. Title

XL-16 LED Li near Wal l Wash

XL-17 LED Wal l Pack

XL-18 HI D/ I nduct i on Wal l Pack

XL-19 Decor at i ve Wal l Sconce

XL-20 Avi at i on Obst r uct i on Lumi nai r e

XL-21 LED Fl ood Lumi nai r e

XL-22 HI D/ I nduct i on Fl ood Lumi nai r e

XL-23 Di r ect - Set Fi ber gl ass Pol e

XL-24 Di r ect - Set Concr et e Pol e

XL-25 Di r ect - Set St eel / Al umi num Pol e

XL-26 Anchor Base Fi ber gl ass Pol e

XL-27 Anchor Base St eel / Al umi num Pol e

XL-28 Anchor Base Concr et e Pol e

XL-29 Anchor Base Pol e Foundat i on

XL-30 Di r ect Set Pol e Gr oundi ng Det ai l

XL-31 Lumi nai r e Mount i ng Ar m Det ai l s

XL-32 Lumi nai r e Mount i ng Ar m Det ai l s

XL-33 Lumi nai r e Mount i ng Br acket Det ai l s

XL-34 Lumi nai r e Mount i ng Br acket Det ai l s


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: The f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on shal l be shown on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs or speci f i ed i n t he pr oj ect specifications:

a. Lumi nai r e schedul e i ndi cat i ng l umi nai r e t ype, mount i ng, and l i ght sour ce t ype and quant i t y;



b. Accessor i es r equi r ed, such as phot ocel l , mount i ng br acket s or ar ms and pol e t ype;

c. Wat t age, oper at i ng vol t age and f r equency;

d. Locat i on and mount i ng hei ght of pol es or standards;

e. Ref er enced XL sket ch or det ai l ;

f . NEMA di st r i but i on t ype and BUG r at i ng when appl i cabl e; and

g. Ext ent and l ocat i on of t he wor k t o be accompl i shed wi t h wi r i ng and equi pment necessar y f or a compl et e i nst al l at i on.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Demol i t i on wor k t hat i nvol ves di sposal of f l uor escent and HI D l i ght sour ces and bal l ast s wi l l r equi r e t he use of Sect i on 02 84 16 HANDLI NG OF LI GHTI NG BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAI NI NG PCBs AND MERCURY.

**************************************************************************





**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e,



and t i t l e.



**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible JapanIndustrial Standard (JIS) or Japan Luminaires Association (JIL) fornon-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer'srepresentative.




JIS A 5373 (2016) Precast Prestressed Concrete Products




JIS C 61000-3-2 (2019) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -- Part 3-2: Limits -- Limits for harmonic current emissions


JIS C 8105-2-3 (2011) Lighting-Part 2-3: Road and Street Lighting Fixtures Safety requirements

JIS C 8131 (2013) Luminaires for Road Lighting

JIS C 8152-2 (2012) Measurement method of white light emitting diode (LED) for lighting-Part 2:



LED modules and LED light engines

JIS C 8152-3 (2013) Measurement method of white light emitting diode (LED) for lightingPart 3: Measurement of luminous flux maintenance rate

JIS C 8153 (2015) DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules -- Performance requirements

JIS C 8154 (2015) LED modules for general lighting -- Safety specifications

JIS C 8155 (2019) LED modules for general lighting -- Performance requirements

JIS C 8201-5-2 (2017) Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear- Part 5-2: Control Circuit Devices And Switching Elements- Proximity Switches

JIS C 8201-4-3 (2010) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -- Part 4-3: Contactors and motor-starters -- AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads

JIS C 8369 (2012) Photoelectric Controls for Public Lighting




JIS Z 8113 (1998) Lighting vocabulary

JIS Z 9110 (2010) General rules of recommended lighting levels

JIS Z 9111 (1988) Lighting for roads


**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect appl i cabl e t r i - ser vi ce, Ar my, Navy, Ai r For ce or NASA speci f i cat i on sect i on r ef er ence( s) .

**************************************************************************

Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are specified in Section(s) [ 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION] [33 71 01.00 40 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION] [ 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION]. Luminaires and accessories installed in interior of buildings are specified in Section [ 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING] [ 26 51 00.00 40 INTERIOR LIGHTING].



1.3 DEFINITIONS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e def i ni t i ons t hat ar e not appl i cabl e t o project.

**************************************************************************

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as defined in JIS Z 8113 .

1.4 SUBMITTALS






**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the



submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


**************************************************************************NOTE: Requi r ed f or al l ar ea and r oadway desi gns. Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de cal cul at i ons t o ver i f y l umi nai r es and desi gn l ayout meet r equi r ed i l l umi nat i on and phot omet r i c val ues of t he desi gn. Thi s r equi r ement has been added as a qual i t y assur ance st ep. Absol ut e phot omet r y of LED l umi nai r es pr ovi ded by I ES LM- 79 dat a shoul d pr ovi de accur at e val ues t o assur e cont r act or ' s l umi nai r es meet t he st andar ds of t he i ni t i al desi gn.

**************************************************************************

Photometric Plan ; G[, [_____]]

LED Luminaire Warranty ;

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

Poles ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

[ [LED, ]Luminaires ; G[, [_____]]

] Luminaire Light Sources ; G[, [_____]]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose " Bal l ast s" f or HI D, LPS and f l uor escent ; " Gener at or s" f or i nduct i on; and " Power Suppl y Uni t s ( Dr i ver s) " f or LED appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

Luminaire[ Power Supply Units (Drivers)] ; G[, [_____]]

Lighting Contactor ; G[, [_____]]

Time Switch ; G[, [_____]]

Lighting Control Relay Panel ; G[, [_____]]

Motion Sensor ; G[, [_____]]

Photocell ; G[, [_____]]

Concrete Poles ; G[, [_____]]

Aluminum Poles ; G[, [_____]]

Steel Poles ; G[, [_____]]



Fiberglass Poles ; G[, [_____]]

Brackets

Obstruction Marker Luminaires ; G[, [_____]]

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for Luminaires ;

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - Test Report ;

LED Light Source - Test Report ;

[ Tests for Fiberglass Poles ;

] Operating Test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Concrete Poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.

Fiberglass Poles



Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and[ computerized] candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

[ 1.5.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with JIS C 8105-2-3 , pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.[ For concrete poles, include: section and details to indicate quantities and position of prestressing steel, spiral steel, inserts, and through holes;



initial prestressing steel tension; and concrete strengths at release and at 28 days.]

] 1.5.2 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the "designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:

Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum of every 3050 mm .

Vertical illuminance measurements at 1500 mm above finished grade.

Minimum and maximum lux levels.

Average maintained lux level.

Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.

1.5.3 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in JIS Z 9110 .

b. Shielding as defined by JIS Z 9111 or glare rating for the installed position as defined by JIS Z 9110 .

c. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles. Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area.

1.5.4 LED Luminaire - Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well as all other pertinent data per JIS C 8152-2 .

1.5.5 LED Light Source - Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being tested.

b. All data required by JIS C 8152-3 .

1.5.5.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the JIS C 8152-2 and JIS C 8152-3 test reports shall be:

A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires



and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.

2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with applicable stanards .

[ 1.5.6 Tests for Fiberglass Poles

a. Ultraviolet resistance tests: Perform using a UV-B light source having a 313 nanometer wavelength, operated at 54 degrees C , cycling the light source on for 4 hours and off for 4 hours for a total test period of 1500 hours minimum with the following results:

Fiber exposure: None

Crazing: None

Checking: None

Chalking: None

Color: May dull slightly

b. Flexural strength and deflection test: Test loading shall be as a cantilever beam with pole butt as fixed end and a force simulating wind load at the free end.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of applicable codes and standards unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and



production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 15-year period.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

[ 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

[ 1.6.1 Concrete Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least 305 mm above ground level and growing vegetation.

][ 1.6.2 [Fiberglass] [Aluminum] [Steel] Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least 305 mm above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

] ] 1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

[ 1.7.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t hi s par agr aph f or LED appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************


a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty



certificates prior to final payment.

] 1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mai nt enance agr eement s ar e st andar d pr act i ce i n t he bui l di ng i ndust r y. Take- back pr ogr ams r ef er t o pr ogr ams i n whi ch t he pr oduct manuf act ur er " t akes- back" scr ap mat er i al and/ or packagi ng associ at ed wi t h i t s pr oduct . Under a gr een l ease, when t he cust omer no l onger r equi r es t he use of t he par t i cul ar pr oduct or r equi r es an updat ed model , t he manuf act ur er i s obl i gat ed t o r ecl ai m i t and r ef ur bi sh i t or di sassembl e i t f or r ecycl i ng as appr opr i at e. Usi ng one of t hese manuf act ur er ' s ser vi ces may cont r i but e t o achi evement of sust ai nabi l i t y r equi r ement s.

NOTE: Thi s i s opt i onal f or Ar my Pr oj ect s.**************************************************************************

Coordinate with manufacturer for [maintenance agreement] [take-back program]. Collect information from the manufacturer about [maintenance agreement] [green lease] options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose br acket ed opt i ons as appl i cabl e f or Ar my, Navy or Ai r For ce pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or accessories are specified in[ Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION,][ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION,][ and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.] Luminaires and associated equipment and accessories for interior applications are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 [LED, ] LUMINAIRES

**************************************************************************NOTE: XL ser i es l umi nai r e pl at es and det ai l s shown on pr oj ect pl ans ar e pr ovi ded f or a v i sual per spect i ve of t he l umi nai r e desi r ed. Shapes, di mensi ons and ot her r equi r ement s shown ar e not i nt ended t o r est r i ct sel ect i on t o l umi nai r es of a speci f i c manuf act ur er . Lumi nai r es pr oduci ng compar abl e or compet i t i ve phot omet r i c r esul t s on a gi ven pl an ar ea, and of s i mi l ar or equal mat er i al , f i ni sh and cr af t smanshi p wi l l be consi der ed f or approval.



Choose appr opr i at e br acket ed opt i ons f or t ype of l umi nai r es bei ng used.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 61000-3-2 , JIS C 8154 and JIS C 8155 . Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.2.1 General Requirements

a.[ LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.][ Housings for luminaires other than LED shall be die cast, extruded, or fabricated aluminum. Fabricated aluminum housings shall have all seams and corners internally welded to resist weathering, moisture and dust.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: 40 degr ees C i s " st andar d" upper l evel r at i ng of most LED l umi nai r es. Choose hi gher 50 degr ees C r at i ng when an i nst al l at i on l ocat i on war r ant s a hi gher ambi ent t emper at ur e r at i ng and t he addi t i onal cost i t i ncur s.

**************************************************************************

[ b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 30 degrees C to[ 40 degrees C ][ 50 degrees C].

] c. Luminaires shall be listed for wet locations per JIS C 8105-1 .[ Optical compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65.]

[ d. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table, tested per JIS C 8152-2 . Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

Application Luminaire Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and Roadway Luminaires

65

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Decorative Luminaires

65

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60

Bollards 35

Parking Garage Luminaires 70

] e. Luminaires shall have lighting distribution and field angle



classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per JIS Z 9110 .

f. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving JIS Z 2371 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Li ght i ng zones r ef er enced bel ow ar e t aken f r om t he j oi nt I DA/ I ES Model Li ght i ng Or di nance, publ i shed i n 2011. Zones i ncl uded r ange f r om LZ- 0 t hr ough LZ- 4, and out l i ne r equi r ement s f or mi ni mal t o ver y hi gh ambi ent l i ght l evel s r espect i vel y.

**************************************************************************

g. Luminaires shall not exceed the following JIS Z 9110 Glare ratings:

1. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

h. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

i. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans.

[ j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

] k. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of[ clear][ frosted] tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic.[ Provide polycarbonate vandal-resistant lenses as indicated.]

[ l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws, bolts, or hardware.

] m. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver.

n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

[ o. Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with JIS C 8105-2-3 .

] p. Luminaire must pass vibration testing in accordance with JIS C 8105-2-3 and JIS C 8131 .

q. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.



2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources**************************************************************************

NOTE: The Ener gy I ndependence and Secur i t y Act ( EI SA) of 2007, Ti t l e I I I , Subt i t l e B, Sect i on 324 l i mi t s t he use of cer t ai n met al hal i de l i ght sour ces and bal l ast s. Do not speci f y any of t he l i ght sour ces l i s t ed i n t hat document .

**************************************************************************

[ 2.2.2.1 LED Light Sources

**************************************************************************NOTE: Typi cal l y, sel ect a CCT i n t he r ange of 4000 degr ees K. Some st udi es have shown t hat l umi nai r es wi t h hi gher CCT val ues appr oachi ng 6500 degr ees K at t r i but e t o skygl ow, cause er r at i c behavi or i n some ani mal s, and possi bl y cause ci r cadi um r hyt hm abnor mal i t i es. Al t hough al l of t hese i ssues have not been f ul l y document ed, a l ower col or t emper at ur e i s r ecommended.

**************************************************************************

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with JIS C 8155 :

[ Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

] b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:

Greater than or equal to [70] [_____] for 4000 degrees K light sources.

c. Color Consistency:

] 2.2.3 Luminaire[ Power Supply Units (Drivers)]**************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose " Power Suppl y Uni t s ( Dr i ver s) " f or LED appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

[ 2.2.3.1 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

JIS C 8153 . LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

**************************************************************************NOTE: 40 degr ees C i s " st andar d" upper l evel r at i ng of most LED l umi nai r es. Choose hi gher 50 degr ees C r at i ng when an i nst al l at i on l ocat i on war r ant s a hi gher ambi ent t emper at ur e r at i ng and t he addi t i onal cost i t i ncur s.

**************************************************************************

b. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 30 degrees C and 40 degrees C [ 50 degrees C ].



c. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V or 100V to 430V nominal.

d. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.

e. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

f . Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent.

g. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

h. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed.

[ i . Shall be dimmable, and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system.

] j . Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.

] 2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire as defined by JIS C 5381-11

[ 2.3 OBSTRUCTION MARKER LUMINAIRES

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f no ot her ai r f i el d l i ght i ng i s r equi r ed i n pr oj ect , cut and past e r equi r ed par agr aph on obst r uct i on mar ker l umi nai r es i n t hi s par agr aph. I f ot her ai r f i el d l i ght i ng i s r equi r ed, i ncl ude ent i r e sect i on i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons as not ed bel ow. Desi gner shal l al so be awar e of a conf l i c t bet ween LED obst r uct i on l umi nai r es and pi l ot s usi ng ni ght v i s i on goggl es ( NVG) . The out put wavel engt h and l ow heat s i gnat ur e of LED l umi nai r es r ender t hem i nvi s i bl e f or pi l ot s usi ng NVG.

Do not use LED obst r uct i on l umi nai r es f or Ai r For ce pr oj ect s. See Ai r For ce ETL 11- 29 " Use of Li ght - Emi t t i ng Di ode ( LED) Fi xt ur es i n Ai r f i el d Li ght i ng Syst ems on Ai r For ce I nst al l at i ons and Endur i ng/ Cont i ngency Locat i ons" f or mor e i nf or mat i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide obstruction marker luminaires for facilities as required by the FAA and in accordance with Section 26 56 20 AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS.

] 2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cur r ent l y, pol i cy f or net wor ked cont r ol of l i ght i ng syst ems ar e st i l l bei ng devel oped. I ssues such as secur i t y and st andar d pr ot ocol s need f ur t her r evi ew and cer t i f i cat i on. So, l i ght i ng cont r ol " syst ems" at t hi s poi nt shal l be l i mi t ed t o



st and- al one t ype, and wi r el ess cont r ol st r at egi es shal l not be empl oyed at t hi s t i me.

Typi cal l y, cont r ol s shal l be pr ovi ded t o t ur n l umi nai r es on at dusk and of f af t er a cer t ai n t i me per i od, when suf f i c i ent dayl i ght i s avai l abl e, or when i l l umi nat i on i s not r equi r ed.

Pr ovi de cont r ol at each i ndi v i dual l umi nai r e or by a s i ngl e devi ce or syst em cont r ol l i ng a gr oup of luminaires.

Use r ef er ence t o ASHRAE 189. 1 i n l i eu of ASHRAE 90. 1 f or Ar my pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

[ Provide a control system interface within each luminaire that is compatible with the energy management or control system used by the utility department in charge of the project area for control of site lighting.]

[ 2.4.1 Photocell**************************************************************************

NOTE: Cadmi um sul f i de i s t he ol der of t he t wo t echnol ogi es. Si l i con di ode sensor s ar e a sol i d st at e devi ce and mor e r esi st ant t o hi gher t emper at ur es and envi r onment al cont ami nat i on. Si l i con di ode t ype ar e usual l y speci f i ed when mount i ng di r ect l y t o l umi nai r es, but bot h t ypes ar e pr oven, r el i abl e t echnol ogi es. Sel ect l ast br acket ed opt i on f or LED f i xt ur es.

**************************************************************************

JIS C 8369 . Photocells shall be hermetically sealed,[ cadmium sulfide][ silicon diode] light sensor type, rated at [_____] watts, [_____] volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, [single][double]-throw contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be constructed of [polycarbonate] [die cast aluminum] [UV stabilized polypropylene], rated to operate within a temperature range of minus 40 to 70 degrees C .[ Photocell shall have a 13 mm threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide[ fixed][ swivel] base type housing.][ Photocell shall be twist-lock receptacle type =. Provide with solid brass prongs and voltage markings and color coding on exterior of housing.] Photocell shall turn on at 10-30 lux and turn off at 30 to 150 lux . A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources.[ Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition.][ Provide photocell with metal oxide varistor (MOV) type surge protection.][ Photocell to be designed for 20-year service to match life expectancy of long-life LED fixtures and exceeds 15,000 operations at full load. Provide photocell with zero-cross technology to withstand severe in-rush current and extend relay life.]

][ 2.4.2 Timeswitch

[ Timeswitch shall be electromechanical type with a[ 24 hour][ 7 day] [astronomic] dial[ that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise]. Switch shall be powered by an enclosed synchronous motor with a maximum 3 watt operating rating. Timeswitch



contacts shall be rated for [40][_____] amps at 120-277 or 100-230 VAC resistive load in a [SPST][DPST][SPDT][DPST][ normally open (NO)][ normally closed (NC)] configuration. Switch shall have an automatic spring mechanism to maintain accurate time for up to 16 hours during a power failure.[ Provide switch with function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain selected days of the week.][ Provide switch with manual bypass or remote override control.]

][ Timeswitch shall be an electronic type with a[ 24 hour][ 7 day] [astronomic] programming function [that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise], providing a total of [56][_____] on/off set points. Digital clock display format shall be[ AM/PM 12 hour][24 hour] type. Provide power outage backup for switch utilizing a[ capacitor][ alkaline batteries][ lithium battery] which provides coverage for a minimum of [7 days][3 years][8 years]. Timeswitch shall provide control to [1][2][4][_____] channels or loads. Contacts shall be rated for [30] [_____] amps at 120-277 or 100-230 VAC resistive load in a [SPST][DPST][SPDT][DPST] [normally open (NO)][normally closed (NC)] configuration. [Provide switch with [function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain selected days of the week][manual bypass or remote override control][daylight savings time automatic adjustment][EEPROM memory module][momentary function for output contacts][ability for photosensor input]].

] Timeswitch shall be housed in a surface-mounted, lockable [indoor][weatherproof][ ] IP rated enclosure constructed of painted steel or plastic polymer conforming to JIS C 8462-1 .

][ 2.4.3 Lighting Contactor

JIS C 8201-4-3 . Provide a [mechanically][electrically]-held lighting contactor [housed in a [indoor][weatherproof][ ] IP rated enclosure conforming to JIS C 8462-1 ]. Contactor shall have [2][4][6][_____] poles, configured as [normally open (NO)][normally closed (NC)]. Contacts shall be rated [600] [_____] volts, [30][_____] amperes for a resistive load. Coil operating voltage shall be [24] [105] [120] [210][240] [277][_____] volts. Contactor shall have silver cadmium oxide double-break contacts [and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactors] and shall require no arcing contacts. [Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic [on-off] selector switch.] [Provide contactor as specified above along with [disconnect switch][circuit breaker] in integral [indoor][weatherproof][ ] IP rated enclosure with flange-mounted handle to satisfy requirement for a "combination lighting contactor" when specified.]

][ 2.4.4 Lighting Control Relay Panel

**************************************************************************NOTE: When pr ovi di ng a cont r ol panel t hat i nt er f aces wi t h t he bui l di ng aut omat ed cont r ol syst em, r ef er ence I ES Techni cal Memor andum I ES TM- 23- 11 f or t echni cal i nf or mat i on on var i ous pr ot ocol s, ar chi t ect ur es and t opol ogi es f or such systems.

**************************************************************************

Panel shall consist of a single [indoor][weatherproof][ ] IP rated



[flush][surface]-mounted enclosure with two separate interior sections; one for Class 1 (branch circuit) and one for Class 2 (low voltage) wiring. Provide panel with [8][16][32][_____] relays. Panel shall be designed as [a stand alone][an automated control system interface] type. The Class 1 section shall contain the load side of all relays and the incoming branch circuit wiring. The Class 2 section shall contain the control power transformer (24 volt output), relays, relay control modules, and control wiring[, and native BACnet[LONworks] field-programmable application controller for panels connected to the facility automated control system]. Panel enclosure shall be constructed of [16][14] gauge cold-rolled steel with baked-on enamel finish.

Relays shall be [1][2]-pole, rated at 20 amperes [210] [300] [420][440] [480] VAC with rated life of 120,000 mechanical operations minimum.

Relay control module shall be 24 volt, electronic type and control up to 16 separate relays (16 channel) or programmed groups of relays. Provide with inputs for signals from devices such as photocells, timeclocks, and motion sensors. [Relay control module with integral timeclock function shall be 24 volt, electronic type with LCD display and control up to 8 separate relays (8 channel)].

][ 2.4.5 Motion Sensor

JIS C 8201-5-2 . Provide [passive infrared][microwave][dual technology passive infrared/microwave] type sensors with [270][_____] degree coverage, time delay that can be adjusted from 15 seconds to 15 minutes, and "fail to ON position" default state. Sensors shall be located to achieve coverage of areas as indicated on project plans. Coverage patterns shall be derated as recommended by manufacturer based on mounting height of sensor and any obstructions such as trees. Do not use gross rated coverage in manufacturer's product literature. Sensors installed integral to the luminaire must be provided by the luminaire manufacturer. Sensors shall have an integral light level sensor that does not allow luminaires to operate during daylight hours and shall be designed to operate on a voltage of [105 VAC][210 VAC] [120/277 VAC][24 VDC]. [Provide sensors to operate in conjunction with bi-level controllers that lower LED luminaires to a 50 percent output.] Sensor shall be [equipped with a threaded base for mounting to a weatherproof junction box][mounted directly to luminaire].

] [ 2.5 POLES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s speci f i cat i on does not cover decor at i ve pol es or hi gh- mast l i ght i ng syst ems. Pol es, l umi nai r e mount i ng assembl i es, and l ower i ng mechani sms f or hi gh- mast l i ght i ng ar e speci al l y f abr i cat ed and shoul d be i ndi v i dual l y desi gned t o sui t a speci f i c pr oj ect . Pol e speci f i cat i ons f or hi gh- mast syst em shoul d, as a mi ni mum, i ncl ude wi nd l oadi ng and ul t i mat e st r engt h meet i ng t he l oadi ng r equi r ement s of AASHTO LTS. Do not speci f y embedded t ype met al pol es f or Ar my f aci l i t i es.

**************************************************************************

Provide poles designed for wind loading of [161][_____] km/hr determined in accordance with JIS C 8105-2-3 while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of



luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be[ embedded][ anchor]-base type designed for use with[ underground][ overhead] supply conductors.[ Poles[, other than wood poles,] shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 65 by 130 mm . Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.][ Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole.] Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.


Provide concrete poles conforming to JIS A 5373 . Cross-sectional shape shall be[ round][ or][ multi-sided]. Provide poles designed for wind loading of [100][ ] meters per hour determined in accordance with JIS C 8105-2-3 while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole.

2.5.1.1 Steel Reinforcing

Prestressed concrete pole shafts shall be reinforced with steel prestressing members. Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either pretensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members.

2.5.1.2 Tensioned Reinforcing

Primary reinforcement steel used for a prestressed concrete pole shaft shall be tensioned between 60 to 70 percent of its ultimate strength. The amount of reinforcement shall be such that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70 percent of its ultimate strength, the total resultant tensile force does not exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete.

2.5.1.3 Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members

Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core openings, such as handhole and wiring inlet, reinforcing shall be protected with a vaporproof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 13 mm concrete coverage. Each steel reinforcing member which is to be post-tensioned shall have a nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to the addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout the length of such member.

2.5.1.4 Strength Requirement

As an exception to the requirements of JIS A 5373 , poles shall be naturally cured to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of 48.23 MPa . Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during the curing period.

2.5.1.5 Shaft Preparation

Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard, smooth, nonporous surface that is resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks of water and frost, and shall be clean, smooth, and free of surface voids and internal honeycombing. Poles shall not be installed for at least 15 days after manufacture.



][ 2.5.2 Aluminum Poles

Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to JIS C 8105-2-3 for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 4.8 mm wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast aluminum alloy and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast aluminum alloy. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel.[ Aluminum poles and brackets for [walkway][_____] lighting shall have a[ uniform satin][ dark anodic bronze][_____] finish to match fixtures and shall not be painted.] Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

][ 2.5.3 Steel Poles

JIS C 8105-2-3 . Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 331 MPa and[ hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with JIS H 8641 ][ iron-oxide primed] factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole shall be[ direct set][ anchor bolt mounted] type. Poles shall have tapered tubular members, either round in cross section or polygonal.[ Pole shafts shall be one piece. Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening except as specifically approved.] Pole markings shall be approximately 900 to 1270 mm above grade and shall include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length.[ Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 248 MPa .]

][ 2.5.4 Fiberglass Poles

Designed specifically for supporting luminaires and having factory-formed cable entrance and handhole. Resin color shall be[ dark bronze][ as indicated][_____], and pigment shall provide uniform coloration throughout entire wall thickness. Finish surface shall be pigmented polyurethane having a minimum dry film thickness of 0.038 mm . Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of the pole is inherently ultraviolet inhibited. Minimum fiberglass content shall be 65 percent with resin and pigment comprising the other 35 percent material content.

] ][ 2.6 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

JIS C 8105-2-3 , as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 31.75 mm[ galvanized steel pipe][ aluminum] secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets not less than 7320 mm above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.



][ 2.7 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 344.5 MPa; the top 305 mm of the rod shall be galvanized. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

] 2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.8.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.8.2 Labels

**************************************************************************NOTE: Label i ng of l i ght i ng component s i s an i nexpensi ve and ef f ect i ve met hod f or hel pi ng f aci l i t i es per sonnel pr oper l y oper at e and mai nt ai n t he l i ght i ng syst ems. The l abel s shal l be easy t o r ead when st andi ng next t o t he equi pment , and dur abl e t o mat ch t he l i f e of t he equi pment t o whi ch t hey ar e at t ached. Ref er t o t he FEMP gui del i nes f or l i ght i ng at http://www.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_lighting_guidance.cfm .

**************************************************************************

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with JIS C 8105-1 requirements. Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper light source type. The following light source characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.



**************************************************************************

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of JIS C 0920 corrosion-resistance test.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 , JIS C 0365 and to the requirements specified herein.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Pol es set i n swampy or r ocky soi l wi l l r equi r e di f f er ent set t i ngs or f oundat i ons t han t hose set i n aver age bear i ng soi l s. Consul t pol e manuf act ur er and st r uct ur al engi neer f or pr oper set t i ng or f oundat i on r equi r ement s f or t hese and ot her unusual soi l condi t i ons.

**************************************************************************

Install concrete poles per JIS A 5373 . Poles shall be [embedded] [anchor]-base type designed for use with [underground] [overhead] supply conductors. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

][ 3.1.2 Fiberglass Poles


**************************************************************************

Install fiberglass poles designed specifically for supporting luminaires and having factory-formed cable entrance and handhole. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions and applicable standards .

][ 3.1.3 [Aluminum][Steel] Poles


**************************************************************************

Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 1.57 rad at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.[ After installation, paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with two finish coats of[ exterior oil paint of a color as indicated][ aluminum



paint]. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions. Alterations to poles after fabrication will void manufacturer's warranty and shall not be allowed.]

] 3.1.4 Pole Setting

[Depth shall be as indicated. ][Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.]

[ 3.1.5 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.[ Mount switch on or beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof aluminum housing with swivel arm.][ Set adjustable window slide for [_____] lux photocell turn-on.]

] 3.1.6 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including[ metal poles,] luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.7 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use and coor di nat e pai nt and coat i ng r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS when pr ovi ded i n t he j ob. When r equi r ement s ar e beyond what i s speci f i ed i n Sect i on 09 90 00, speci f y t he r equi r ement s i n t hi s par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.







**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 27 10 00 ( August 2011) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 27 10 00 ( Januar y 2008)



SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM08/11


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s r equi r ement s f or bui l di ng t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng syst ems usi ng a physi cal st ar net wor k t opol ogy f or t r anspor t i ng t el ecommuni cat i ons s i gnal s wi t hi n a bui l di ng. Tel ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng syst ems i ncl ude t he copper and opt i cal f i ber hor i zont al and i nt er i or bui l di ng backbone syst ems and cabl e medi a, pat ch panel s, connect i ng bl ocks, f i r est oppi ng, gr oundi ng, cabl e suppor t , har dwar e, communi cat i ons out l et s, connect or s, and associ at ed har dwar e; st at i on wi r i ng, wor k ar ea st at i on out l et s ( adapt er s) ; and di st r i but i on t er mi nal s. Thi s speci f i cat i on cover s t el ecommuni cat i on cabl i ng syst ems suppor t i ng cust omer ' s voi ce, dat a, v i deo, audi o, secur i t y, di gi t al i magi ng and envi r onment al cont r ol f or t r anspor t i ng i nf or mat i on t hr oughout moder n bui l di ngs usi ng t wi st ed pai r and opt i cal f i ber cabl es.

Tel ecommuni cat i ons pat hways ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM. Coor di nat e el ect r i cal , gr oundi ng, and HVAC r equi r ement s wi t h t he associ at ed di sci pl i nes.






**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: The desi gner shal l pr ovi de si ngl e l i ne schemat i c t ype di agr ams of t he t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em, s i t e pl ans, and f l oor pl ans showi ng over head or under gr ound ser vi ce ent r ances, mai nt enance hol es, handhol es, condui t s i zes, conduct or s i ze and t ype, number of pai r s and f i ber s, and physi cal l ocat i ons and l ayout s of t el ecommuni cat i on ent r ance f aci l i t y , t el ecommuni cat i ons equi pment r ooms, campus di st r i but or , bui l di ng di st r i but or s, f l oor di st r i but or s, and t el ecommuni cat i ons out l et s.

****************************************************************************************************************************************************

NOTE: UFC 3- 580- 01, " Tel ecommuni cat i ons Bui l di ng Cabl i ng Syst ems Pl anni ng and Desi gn" pr ovi des r equi r ement s f or i nt er i or t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng syst ems f or DoD. I t i s cur r ent l y bei ng r evi sed t o accommodat e t he USAI SEC Techni cal Cr i t er i a f or I nst al l at i on I nf or mat i on I nf r ast r uct ur e Ar chi t ect ur e ( I 3A) and t he UFC 3- 580- 10, " Navy And Mar i ne Cor ps I nt r anet ( NMCI ) St andar d Const r uct i on Pr ocesses" . When UFC 3- 580- 01 i s compl et e, t hese document s wi l l no l onger be val i d.

Unt i l t hen, t he Ar my ECB 2007- 22, " Ar my I nst al l at i on I nf or mat i on I nf r ast r uct ur e Ar chi t ect ur e ( I 3A) Gui de" , avai l abl e el ect r oni cal l y at i nvokes t he I 3A, and t he I 3A pr ovi des t he cr i t er i a f or Ar my t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng syst ems.

Si mi l ar l y, UFC 3- 580- 01 and UFC 3- 580- 10, " Navy And Mar i ne Cor ps I nt r anet ( NMCI ) St andar d Const r uct i on Pr ocesses" pr ovi des desi gn r equi r ement s f or Navy sites.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of



t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible JapanIndustrial Standard (JIS), Japan Architectural Standard Specification (JASS), or Japan Wire Industry Association Standard (JCS) standards fornon-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer'srepresentative.


JCS 5507 (2010) LAN Twisted Pair Cable


JIS C 3665-1-1 (2007) Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions -- Part 1-1: Test for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable -- Apparatus

JIS C 5964-4 (2014) Fiber optic connector interfaces -- Part 4: Type SC connector family (F04 Type)

JIS C 5964-4-100 (2018) Fiber optic connector interfaces -- Part 4-100: Type SC connector family -- Simplified receptacle SC-PC connector interfaces (F16 type)

JIS C 5964-18 (2014) Fiber optic connector interfaces -- Part 18: Type MT-RJ connector family (F19 type)

JIS C 5964-20 (2015) Fiber optic connector interfaces -- Part 20: Type LC connector family

JIS C 6011-1 (2015) Mechanical structures for electronic equipment -- Tests for IEC 60917 and IEC 60297 series -- Part 1: Environmental requirements, test set-up and safety aspects for cabinets, racks, subracks and chassis under indoor conditions

JIS C 6012-3-100 (2015) Mechanical structures for electronic equipment -- Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series -- Part 3-100: Basic dimensions of front panels, subracks, chassis, racks and cabinets



JIS C 6185-2 (2014) Optical time-domain reflectometers (OTDR) -- Part 2: Calibration of OTDR for single mode fibers

JIS C 6185-3 (2014) Optical time-domain reflectometers (OTDR) -- Part 3: Calibration of OTDR for multimode fibers

JIS C 6820 (2018) General rules of optical fibers

JIS C 6850 (2006) General rules of optical fiber cables

JIS C 6870-2 (2006) Indoor optical fiber cables -- Part 2: Sectional specification

JIS C 8435 (2018) Boxes And Box Covers Of Plastic Conduits

JIS C 60364-4-42 (2006) Electrical installations of buildings -- Part 4-42: Protection for safety -- Protection against thermal effects


JIS C 61300-2-2 (2011) Fiber optic interconnecting devices and passive components -- Basic test and measurement procedures -- Part 2-2: Tests -- Mating durability




UL 1666 (2007; Reprint Jun 2012) Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

UL 723 (2018) UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


**************************************************************************NOTE: Ensur e t hat desi gn pr ovi des f or adequat e t el ecommuni cat i ons spaces usi ng TI A/ EI A- 569- A as a mi ni mum r equi r ement .



Net wor k t ype, s i ze and conf i gur at i on must be coor di nat ed wi t h t he user ' s r epr esent at i ve, i f known. The same cabl e pat hways and spaces ar e nor mal l y used f or bot h t el ephone and dat a ( i ncl udi ng l ocal ar ea net wor k) syst ems.

For Mi l i t ar y Const r uct i on pr oj ect s, t el ephone i nst r ument s and ot her equi pment ar e pr ocur ed and i nst al l ed usi ng pr ocur ement f undi ng out si de of t he const r uct i on cont r act . Ot her t ypes of pr oj ect s, such as Ar my and Navy Reser ve, DoD and wor k f or ot her s, may r equi r e t hat t el ephone i nst r ument s and ot her speci f i ed equi pment be added t o t hi s sect i on det ai l i ng what must be pr ocur ed and i nst al l ed as par t of t he const r uct i on cont r act .

**************************************************************************

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS, OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP), apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use Def i ni t i ons f r om HEADQUARTERS AI R FORCE MEDI CAL SUPPORT AGENCY DESI GN AND I MPLEMENTATI ON GUI DELI NES MEDI CAL SYSTEMS I NFRASTRUCTURE MODERNI ZATI ON PROGRAM ( 2001) f or Ai r For ce Medi cal pr oj ect s. I n t hi s sect i on t he t er ms cover pl at e, devi ce pl at e and f acepl at e r ef er t o t he same i t em and ar e used i nt er changeabl y. I n t hi s sect i on t he t er ms out l et / connect or and adapt er ar e used t o desi gnat e t he " j ack" or f emal e por t i on of i nt er mat eabl e i nt er connect i on component s and connect or s ar e used t o desi gnat e t he " pl ug" or mal e por t i on of i nt er mat eabl e i nt er connect i on component s.

**************************************************************************

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , JIS C 6820 , JIS C 6850 , and herein.

1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)

A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. (International expression for main cross-connect (MC).)

1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)

A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).)

1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)

A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)



1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)

An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.

1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the equipment room.

1.3.6 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.7 Open Cable

Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by applicable codes and standards . This refers to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space.

1.3.8 Open Office

A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls.

1.3.9 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use Sect i on 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS, OUTSI DE PLANT ( OSP) t o speci f y ext er i or di st r i but i on and i nt er bui l di ng cabl es and i ncl ude br acket ed sent ence.

For t he Navy: Coor di nat e wi t h t he Base Communi cat i ons Of f i cer ( BCO) f or t he Navy and wi t h t he G6 f or t he Mar i ne Cor ps and edi t t he l ast br acket ed sent ences appr opr i at el y. The Navy and Mar i ne Cor ps I nt r anet ( NMCI ) cont r act has been r epl aced by a " cont i nuat i on of Ser vi ces Cont r act ( COSC) " . Thi s wi l l event ual l y be r epl aced by " next Gener at i on" ( NGEN) Cont r act . These cont r act s ar e bei ng handl ed di f f er ent l y f or t he Navy and t he Mar i ne Cor ps.

For t he Ai r For ce: Pr oj ect devel opment and desi gn r equi r es coor di nat i on wi t h t he I nst al l at i on Communi cat i ons Squadr on, r egar dl ess of t he pl anned desi gn met hod or t he execut i on met hod ( DB, DBB,



ot her ) . The I nst al l at i on Communi cat i ons Squadr on shal l be one of t he appr ovi ng or gani zat i ons f or pr oj ect devel opment , desi gn, and const r uct i on.

**************************************************************************

The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway, and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as required. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the campus distributor at the center or hub of the star.[ The interbuilding backbone system provides connectivity between the campus distributors and is specified in Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP).] Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.[ The telecommunications contractor must coordinate with the NMCI/COSC/NGEN contractor concerning access to and configuration of telecommunications spaces. The telecommunications contractor may be required to coordinate work effort within the telecommunications spaces with the NMCI/COSC/NGEN contractor.]

1.5 SUBMITTALS








**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications drawings ; G[, [_____]]

Telecommunications Space Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G[, [_____]]

Patch panels ; G[, [_____]]

Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies ; G[, [_____]]

Equipment support frame ; G[, [_____]]

[ Connector blocks ; G[, [_____]] ]

SD-06 Test Reports

Telecommunications cabling testing ;

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications;

Key Personnel Qualifications;

Manufacturer Qualifications ;

Test plan ;




Factory reel tests ;


Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5;


Record Documentation ;


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan drawings shall be a minimum of 279 by 432 mm in size using a minimum scale of one mm per 100 mm [, except as specified otherwise]. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings

**************************************************************************NOTE: The Ar my and Navy r equi r e RCDD appr oved dr awi ngs f or al l A/ E desi gned pr oj ect s.

On gover nment desi gned ( i n- house desi gn) pr oj ect s, t he gover nment desi gner shal l make sur e t hat t he bi d document s r equi r e an RCDD st amp on t he cont r act or ' s t el ecommuni cat i ons dr awi ngs submi t t ed f or appr oval .

For smal l scal e pr oj ect s, l i mi t ed t o addi ng dr ops t o exi st i ng t el ecommuni cat i ons r ooms, an RCDD st amp i s not r equi r ed pr ovi ded t he wor k i s bei ng accompl i shed under t he t echni cal aut hor i t y of an RCDD or t he gover nment t el ecommuni cat i ons manager .

Act i v i t y Speci f i c Tel ecomuni cat i ons Manager : Thr oughout t hi s document , t he t er m " t el ecommuni cat i ons manager " r ef er s t o t he following:" For Ar my, t he Net wor k Ent er pr i se Cent er ( NEC) ." For Navy, t he Base Communi cat i ons Of f i cer ( BCO)" For Mar i ne Cor ps, t he G6" For Ai r For ce, t he Base/ I nst al l at i on Communi cat i ons Squadr on, Commander ' s Repr esent at i ve.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved,]



drawings in accordance with applicable codes and standards . The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's[, BD's], and FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets.[ Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling, CD's, BD's, FD's, and the EF and ER for telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in the EF telecommunications space as directed by the Contracting Officer.] The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:

a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective.

b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas.

c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.

1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings

Provide T3 drawings that include telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and [cabinet][, rack][, backboard][ and] wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

**************************************************************************NOTE: BI CSI Cabl i ng I nst al l er , Techni c i an Level cer t i f i cat i on i s pr ef er r ed f or super vi sor s and i nst al l er s i n l i eu of document at i on of t hr ee year s exper i ence. Cont r act or s have t he opt i on t o submi t ei t her BI CSI cer t i f i cat i on or exper i ence documentation.

**************************************************************************



Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor

The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor.

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel

Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.

In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of [3][_____] years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using [optical fiber and ]copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.



Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer.

Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.

1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of [3] [_____] years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 and JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 .

1.6.3 Test Plan

Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the components and accessories for each cable type specified, [60][_____] days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.




Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable



if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 0 to 60 degrees C and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.9 WARRANTY


1.10 MAINTENANCE

1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system , Data Package 5. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than [2] [_____] months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the as-built configuration.

1.10.2 Record Documentation

**************************************************************************NOTE: TI A- 606 descr i bes t he necessar y dat a f i el ds and r epor t s f or har d copy, spr eadsheet and el ect r oni c medi a as wel l as cabl e management sof t war e r equi r ement s. Check wi t h act i v i t y t o det er mi ne i f cabl e management sof t war e i s cur r ent l y empl oyed at t he act i v i t y and pr ovi de necessar y dat a i nput t o t he exi st i ng syst em t o i ncl ude i nf or mat i on associ at ed wi t h pr oj ect i nst al l at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate



assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided[ in hard copy format][ on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software.][ A licensed copy of the cable management software including documentation, shall be provided.] Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:

a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided. The cable records shall [include only the required data fields][include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility ]. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.

b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided. Documentation shall include the required data fields[ as a minimum][ only].

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ser vi ce ent r ance and pat hway r equi r ement s ar e pr ovi ded i n Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM. Sect i on 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS OUTSI DE PLANT ( OSP) pr ovi des r equi r ement s f or campus backbone cabl e syst ems.

For speci al i zed ci r cui t s, such as pay phones, coor di nat e wi t h t he l ocal t el ephone company. Pr ovi de el ect r i cal and t el ephone out l et s i nst al l ed per t he ADA t o accommodat e TTD' s and ot her devi ces.

**************************************************************************

Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with applicable codes and standards and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with JIS X 5150 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.



2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cabl es shal l be t er mi nat ed wi t hi n t el ecommuni cat i ons r ooms, t el ecommuni cat i ons equi pment r ooms, and wor k ar eas. Cr oss- connect j umper s may be pr ovi ded as par t of t he cont r act i f r equi r ed t o pr ovi de t he cust omer a compl et e and usabl e f aci l i t y . Opt i cal f i ber and copper pat ch cor ds shal l be pr ovi ded by t he Cont r act or when pat ch panel s ar e i nst al l ed. Opt i cal f i ber medi a may be si ngl e- mode, mul t i mode, or hybr i d combi nat i on. For i nf or mat i on on opt i cal f i ber l ocal ar ea net wor k syst em, v i s i t www.fols.org .

Ai r For ce Medi cal Faci l i t i es ar e i nst al l ed and l abel ed i n accor dance wi t h HEADQUARTERS AI R FORCE MEDI CAL SUPPORT AGENCY DESI GN AND I MPLEMENTATI ON GUI DELI NES MEDI CAL SYSTEMS I NFRASTRUCTURE MODERNI ZATI ON PROGRAM ( 2001) f or Ai r For ce medi cal pr oj ect s. Al l ot her pr oj ect s ar e l abel ed i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606.

When syst ems f ur ni t ur e i s pr ovi ded as par t of t he const r uct i on cont r act , ensur e t hat syst ems f ur ni t ur e speci f i cat i ons r equi r e compl i ance wi t h TI A- 568- C. 0, TI A- 568- C. 1, TI A- 568- C. 2, and TI A- 568- C. 3 cabl i ng st andar ds as appl i cabl e.

NFPA 70 pr ovi des det ai l ed i nf or mat i on f or opt i cal f i ber cabl es and communi cat i ons c i r cui t s i n var i ous spaces and l ocat i ons. Ar t i c l e 770, t abl e 770- 154( a) , pr ovi des appl i cat i on of opt i cal f i ber cabl es and ar t i c l e 800, Tabl e 800. 154( a) , pr ovi des appl i cat i on f or communi cat i ons c i r cui t s ( copper ) .

Tabl e 770. 179 pr ovi des t he f ol l owi ng def i ni t i ons f or opt i cal f i ber cabl e:

OFNP Nonconduct i ve opt i cal f i ber pl enum cabl eOFCP Conduct i ve opt i cal f i ber pl enum cabl eOFNR Nonconduct i ve opt i cal f i ber r i ser cabl eOFCR Conduct i ve opt i cal f i ber r i ser cabl eOFNG Nonconduct i ve opt i cal f i ber gener al - pur pose cableOFCG Conduct i ve opt i cal f i ber gener al - pur pose cabl eOFN Nonconduct i ve opt i cal f i ber gener al - pur pose cabl eOFC Conduct i ve opt i cal f i ber gener al - pur pose cabl e

Tabl e 800. 179 pr ovi des t he f ol l owi ng def i ni t i ons f or communi cat i ons c i r cui t s:

CMP Communi cat i ons pl enum cabl eCMR Communi cat i ons r i ser cabl eCMG Communi cat i ons gener al - pur pose cabl eCM Communi cat i onsgener al - pur pose cabl eCMX Communi cat i ons cabl e, l i mi t ed use



CMUC Under car pet communi cat i ons wi r e and cabl e**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n passi ve opt i cal net wor k ( PON) t opol ogi es, speci f y s i ngl e mode f i ber s i nce i t i s cur r ent l y t he onl y v i abl e cabl i ng sol ut i on. PON t echnol ogy i s not suppor t ed by al l cur r ent net wor ks and must be coor di nat ed wi t h t he agency speci f i c t el ecommuni cat i ons manager ( NEC, BCO, G6) and addi t i onal l y f or t he Navy, wi t h t he NMCI / COSC/ NGEN Contractor.

**************************************************************************

Cabling shall be listed for the application and shall comply with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 . Provide a labeling system for cabling as required. Ship cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair (UTP) in accordance with JCS 5507 [ and optical fiber cables in accordance with JIS C 6870-2 ] for all cable used on this project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

[ 2.3.1 Backbone Cabling

**************************************************************************NOTE: 150 ohm shi el ded t wi st ed pai r ( STP) i s not al l owed f or new const r uct i on. Backbone cabl e l engt hs shal l not exceed gui del i nes of TI A- 568- C. 1, TI A- 568- C. 2, and TI A- 568- C. 3. STP 100 ohm backbone and hor i zont al cabl e may be r equi r ed f or EMI i sol at i on i n compl ex bui l di ngs.

Use f i ber opt i c cabl e f or backbone dat a ser vi ce, unl ess expandi ng an exi st i ng s i t e wher e ot her backbone cabl e t ypes ar e r equi r ed or r equest ed by user.

**************************************************************************

[ 2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper

**************************************************************************NOTE: TI A- 568- C. 1 r ecogni zes Cat egor y 3 r at ed cabl e as t he mi ni mum backbone t r ansmi ssi on medi a. Use of cabl es r at ed hi gher t han Cat egor y 3 ar e not r equi r ed si nce t he copper backbone cabl e i s onl y used f or voi ce syst ems. Choose t he f i r st br acket ed j acket col or f or t he pr ef er r ed col or code f or cabl e j acket s. Coor di nat e wi t h act i v i t y and choose t he second br acket ed j acket col or opt i on t o speci f y an act i v i t y pr ef er r ed col or . Col or codi ng f or conduct or s wi t hi n t he 25 pai r bundl es i s cover ed by t he r ef er ence t o i ndust r y st andar ds.

I CEA S- 90- 661 speci f i es a di f f er ent cabl e mar ki ng i nt er val f or copper cabl es when mar ked i n SI ver sus empi r i cal uni t s. Thi s st andar d r equi r es: " Lengt h mar ki ng shal l appear at i nt er val s not t o



exceed 1 met er and t he wor d" METER" shal l appear af t er each l engt h mar ki ng. I f speci f i ed by t he user , l engt h mar ki ng shal l be pr ovi ded i n f eet and shal l appear at i nt er val s not t o exceed 0. 6 met er s. The wor d " FEET" shal l appear af t er each l engt h mar ki ng" .

Desi gner shal l coor di nat e wi t h act i v i t y on t he r equi r ed pai r bi nder gr oups. 10 pai r bi nder gr oups ar e common i n Japanese backbone copper cabl e.

**************************************************************************

Copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 0.2 sqmm , 100 ohm, [100] [_____]-pair, Category 3, UTP, in accordance with JCS 5507 , JIS X 5150 ,JCS 5507 and JCS 5000 series , formed into [ 25][10] pair binder groups covered with a[ gray][ ____] thermoplastic jacket[ and overall metallic shield]. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular length marking intervals in accordance with JCS 5507 . Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG)communications rated cabling as required . Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted upon approval prior to installation .

][ 2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n a f i ber opt i c communi cat i on cabl e a buf f er i s one t ype of component used t o encapsul at e one or mor e opt i cal f i ber s f or t he pur pose of pr ovi di ng such f unct i ons as mechani cal i sol at i on, pr ot ect i on f r om physi cal damage and f i ber i dent i f i cat i on. The buf f er may t ake t he f or m of a mi ni at ur e condui t , cont ai ned wi t hi n t he cabl e and cal l ed a l oose buf f er , or l oose buf f er t ube, i n whi ch one or mor e f i ber s may be encl osed, of t en wi t h a l ubr i cat i ng gel . A l oose buf f er i s t ypi cal l y used i n out si de pl ant appl i cat i ons. A t i ght buf f er consi st s of a pol ymer coat i ng i n i nt i mat e cont act wi t h t he pr i mar y coat i ng appl i ed t o t he f i ber dur i ng t he manuf act ur i ng pr ocess. A t i ght buf f er i s t ypi cal l y used f or i nt er i or di st r i but i on.

I ndi cat e t he pr oper col or codi ng of opt i cal f i ber cabl i ng on desi gn dr awi ngs. TI A/ EI A- 598 col or codi ng scheme f or cor dage j acket s used on mi l i t ar y pr oj ect s i s as f ol l ows:

Fi ber t ype and class

Fi ber di amet er m Jacket col or

Multimode 50/ 125 Laser Opt i mi zed ( OM3) Aqua

50/ 125 ( OM2) Orange

62. 5/ 125 ( OM1) Slate



Fi ber t ype and class

Fi ber di amet er m Jacket col or

Single-mode OS1 ( r anges bet ween 8 and 10) Yellow

**************************************************************************

NOTE: The Ar my I nst al l at i on and Campus Ar ea Net wor k ( I CAN) Gui de st andar d di ct at es t he use of s i ngl e mode f i ber cabl es f or bui l di ng backbones on Ar my projects.

For Navy pr oj ect s pr ovi de si ngl e mode f i ber cabl es ( OS1) f or bui l di ng backbones on al l new pr oj ect s t o f ut ur e pr oof t he net wor k and st andar di ze t he backbone. Addi t i onal l y, t hi s per mi t s t he opt i on of f l at t eni ng t he net wor k v i a di r ect connect i on t o swi t ches i n TRs ot her t han t he mai n TR.

I n exi st i ng f aci l i t i es wi t h mul t i mode cabl es and swi t ches, coor di nat e wi t h t he act i v i t y and t he NMCI / COSC/ NGEN cont r act or t o det er mi ne whet her t he swi t ch opt i cs wi l l be changed t o ut i l i ze t he s i ngl e mode backbone, or i f mul t i mode cabl e must al so be pr ovi ded i n addi t i on t o t he s i ngl e mode. I f usi ng mul t i mode, OM3 ( whi ch per mi t s dat a r at es up t o 10 Gi g) i s f i r st choi ce. OM2 and OM1 shoul d onl y be used t o suppl ement exi st i ng syst ems

For Ai r For ce pr oj ect s, coor di nat e f i ber cabl e r equi r ement s wi t h t he I nst al l at i on Communi cat i ons Squadron.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS C 6870-2 , JIS C 6820 , JIS C 6850 , UL 1666 and JIS C 3665-1-1 . Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 1 meter .

Provide the number of strands indicated, (but not less than 12 strands between the main telecommunication room and each of the other telecommunication rooms), of single-mode(OS1), tight buffered fiber optic cable.

[Provide tight buffered fiber optic multimode, [50/125-um diameter laser optimized(OM3)][50/125-um diameter(OM2)][62.5/125-um diameter(OM1)] cable as indicated.]

Provide plenum (OFNP), riser (OFNR), or general purpose (OFN or OFNG) rated non-conductive, fiber optic cable as required per application . Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

Provide plenum (OFNP) riser (OFNR) , or general purpose (OFN or OFNG) rated non-conductive, fiber optic cable as required per application . Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted . The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with JIS X 5150 .



] ] 2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e pr oj ect r equi r ement s and use of f i ber opt i c cabl e f or hor i zont al cabl i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide horizontal cable and performance characteristics in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he f i r st br acket ed j acket col or f or t he pr ef er r ed col or code f or cabl e j acket s. Coor di nat e wi t h act i v i t y and choose t he second br acket ed j acket col or opt i on t o speci f y an act i v i t y pr ef er r ed col or .

I CEA S- 90- 661 speci f i es a di f f er ent cabl e mar ki ng i nt er val f or copper cabl es when mar ked i n SI ver sus empi r i cal uni t s. Thi s st andar d r equi r es " Lengt h mar ki ng shal l appear at i nt er val s not t o exceed 1 meter and t he wor d " METER" shal l appear af t er each l engt h mar ki ng. I f speci f i ed by t he user , l engt h mar ki ng shal l be pr ovi ded i n f eet and shal l appear at i nt er val s not t o exceed 0. 6 met er s. The wor d " FEET" shal l appear af t er each l engt h mar ki ng. "

Scr eened t wi st ed pai r cabl e ( ScTP) may be r equi r ed OCONUS. Coor di nat e wi t h Act i v i t y f or speci f i c r equi r ement s and appl i cabl e r ef er ence st andar ds.

**************************************************************************

Provide horizontal copper cable, UTP, 100 ohm in accordance with JCS 5507 , and JIS X 5150 . Provide four each individually twisted pair, minimum size 0.2 sqmm conductors, Category 6, with a[ blue][ ____] thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) and length marking at regular intervals in accordance with JCS 5507 . Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG) communications rated cabling as required per application . Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted . Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs shall be listed and labeled for wet locations. [Provide residential Category 6 cabling as required .]

[ 2.3.2.2 Horizontal Optical Fiber

**************************************************************************NOTE: When usi ng f i ber t o t he wor k ar ea out l et , t he most common met hod i s t o use t he mul t i mode f i ber f or hor i zont al cabl i ng. I f usi ng mul t i mode, OM3 ( whi ch per mi t s dat a r at es up t o 10 Gi g) i s f i r st choi ce. OM2 and OM1 shoul d onl y be used t o suppl ement exi st i ng syst ems.



Cent r al i zed cabl i ng pr ovi des connect i on f r om t he wor k ar eas t o t he cent r al i zed cr oss connect by al l owi ng t he use of pul l t hr ough cabl e, an i nt er connect , or a spl i ce i n t he TR or ER. Al t hough t hi s i s usi ng t he same cabl e as hor i zont al , t he i ndust r y st andar d per mi t s r uns up t o 300 met er s. I n t hi s t opol ogy, l onger di st ances cor r esponds t o a l ower dat e r at e.

I n passi ve opt i cal net wor k ( PON) t opol ogi es, speci f y s i ngl e mode f i ber s i nce i t i s cur r ent l y t he onl y v i abl e cabl i ng sol ut i on. PON t echnol ogy i s not suppor t ed by al l cur r ent net wor ks and must be coor di nat ed wi t h t he agency speci f i c t el ecommuni cat i ons manager ( NEC, BCO, G6) and addi t i onal l y f or t he Navy, wi t h t he NMCI / COSC/ NGEN Contractor.

• For hor i zont al cabl i ng, 62. 5/ 125 µm or 50/ 125 µm mul t i mode opt i cal f i ber i s r ecommended f or : – Di st ances up t o 90 m. – Dat a r at es up t o 2. 5 Gb/ s.• For cent r al i zed cabl i ng, 62. 5/ 125 µm or 50/ 125 µm mul t i mode opt i cal f i ber i s r ecommended f or : – Di st ances up t o 300 m. – Dat a r at es up t o 1. 25 Gb/ s.

**************************************************************************

Provide optical fiber horizontal cable in accordance with JIS C 6870-2 and JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 . Cable shall be tight buffered, [multimode, 50/125-um diameter laser optimized, OM3][, ][multimode, 50/125-um diameter, OM2][multimode, 62.5.125-um diameter, OM1][single-mode, 8/125-um diameter, OS1]. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturer, flammability rating and fiber count at regular intervals not to exceed 1 meter .

Provide plenum (OFNP), riser (OFNR), or general purpose (OFN or OFNG) rated non-conductive, fiber optic cable as required per application . Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted. Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs be listed and labeled for wet locations. The cable jacket shall be of single jacket construction with color coding of cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

] [ 2.3.3 Work Area Cabling

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s t ype cabl i ng i s sel dom pr ovi ded on pr oj ect s and i s nor mal l y t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he act i v i t y. Coor di nat e wi t h t he act i v i t y and l ocal desi gn agency f or r equi r ement s concer ni ng wor k ar ea cabling.

**************************************************************************

2.3.3.1 Work Area Copper

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he f i r st br acket ed j acket col or f or t he pr ef er r ed col or code f or cabl e j acket s. Coor di nat e wi t h act i v i t y f or al t er nat e col or codi ng and choose t he second br acket ed j acket col or opt i on



t o enumer at e act i v i t y pr ef er r ed col or code. Coor di nat e wor k ar ea cabl i ng col or code wi t h wor k ar ea adapt er col or code.

**************************************************************************

Provide work area copper cable in accordance with JCS 5507 , with a[ blue,][ ____] thermoplastic jacket.

[ 2.3.3.2 Work Area Optical Fiber

Provide optical work area cable in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 .

] ] 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pr oj ect s t hat do not i ncl ude Sect i on 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS, OUTSI DE PLANT ( OSP) f or t er mi nat i on of i nt er bui l di ng cabl es, copy par agr aph BUI LDI NG PROTECTOR ASSEMBLI ES and PROTECTOR MODULES f r om Sect i on 33 82 00 and past e t he par agr aphs i nt o t hi s sect i on as par t of t he t el ecommuni cat i ons spaces.

Navy pr oj ect s adher e t o col or codi ng st andar ds i n accor dance wi t h t he f ol l owi ng col or s f r om TI A- 606.

Cr oss- Connect Fi el d Col or Codes

Color Identifies

Orange Demar cat i on poi nt ( e. g. , cent r al of f i ce t er mi nat i ons) .

Green Net wor k connect i ons ( e. g. , net wor k and auxi l i ar y equi pment ) .

Purple Common equi pment , pr i vat e br anch exchange ( PBX) , l ocal ar ea net wor k ( LANs) , mul t i pl exer s ( e. g. , swi t chi ng and dat a equipment).

White Fi r st - l evel backbone ( e. g. , CD ( MC) t o an FD ( HC) or t o a BD (IC)).

Gray Second- l evel backbone ( e. g. , BD ( I C) t o an FD ( HC) ) .

Blue Hor i zont al cabl e ( e. g. , hor i zont al connect i ons t o t el ecommuni cat i ons out l et s) .

Brown I nt er bui l di ng backbone ( campus cabl e t er mi nat i ons) .

Yellow Mi scel l aneous ( e. g. , auxi l i ar y, al ar ms, secur i t y) .

Red Reser ved f or f ut ur e use ( al so, key t el ephone syst ems) .



Cr oss- Connect Fi el d Col or Codes

Color Identifies

NOTE: Br own t akes pr ecedence over whi t e or gr ay f or i nt er bui l di ng r uns.

**************************************************************************

Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the telecommunications entrance facility[ and telecommunication equipment room[s]] to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with [base][facility] standards .

2.4.1 Backboards

Provide void-free, interior grade A-C plywood 19 mm thick [1200 by 2400 mm] [as indicated]. Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process. Fire stamp shall be clearly visible.[ Paint applied over fire retardant backboard shall be UL 723 and JIS C 60364-4-42 fire retardant paint. Provide label including paint manufacturer, date painted, UL listing and name of Installer. When painted, paint label and fire stamp shall be clearly visible.] Backboards shall be provided on a minimum of two adjacent walls in the telecommunication spaces.

[ 2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de equi pment suppor t f r ames onl y when pat ch panel s or cabi net / r ack mount ed i nt er connect i ng equi pment ar e pr ovi ded. I n most appl i cat i ons, a r ack i n l ocked communi cat i ons r oom i s suf f i c i ent . Pr ovi de l ockabl e cabi net s i n l ocat i ons wher e addi t i onal secur i t y i s r equi r ed. Use wal l - mount ed br acket s f or smal l syst ems wher e onl y a f ew pat ch panel s ar e r equi r ed. Use 482. 6 mm equi pment suppor t f r ames f or Navy pr oj ect s.

Pr ovi de adequat e space i n t el ecommuni cat i ons spaces t o f aci l i t at e t enant owned t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em suppor t equi pment r equi r ement s i n t enant i nst al l ed f r ee st andi ng cabi net s or r acks.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS C 6011-1 and JIS C 6012-3-100 .

[ a. Bracket, wall mounted, 8 gauge aluminum. Provide hinged bracket compatible with [ 482.6 mm ][ 584 mm] panel mounting.

][ b. Racks, floor mounted modular type, [16 gauge steel][ or ][11 gauge aluminum] construction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug[ and a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles]. Rack shall be compatible with[ 482.6 mm ][ 584 mm ] panel mounting.



][ c. Cabinets, freestanding modular type, [16 gauge steel][ or ][11 gauge aluminum] construction , minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Cabinet shall have removable and lockable side panels, front and rear doors, and have adjustable feet for leveling. Cabinet shall be vented in the roof and rear door. Cabinet shall have cable access in the roof and base and be compatible with[ 482.6 mm ][ 584 mm ] panel mounting. Provide cabinet with grounding bar[,][ [rack][roof] mounted 15 cu. m fan with filter ][ and][ a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles].[ All cabinets shall be keyed alike.]

][ d. Cabinets, wall-mounted modular type, [16 gauge steel][ or ][11 gauge aluminum] construction , minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Cabinet shall have have lockable front[ and rear] door[s], louvered side panels,[ 7 cu. m [roof][rack] mounted fan, ] ground lug, and top and bottom cable access. Cabinet shall be compatible with[ 482.6 mm][ 584 mm ] panel mounting.[ All cabinets shall be keyed alike.][ A [duplex AC outlet][surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles] shall be provided within the cabinet.]

] ][ 2.4.3 Connector Blocks

**************************************************************************NOTE: Type 66 bl ocks ar e not per mi t t ed f or new construction.

**************************************************************************

Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6 systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.

][ 2.4.4 Cable Guides

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph f or s i ngl e f ami l y r esi dent i al i nst al l at i ons.

**************************************************************************

Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on[ [482.6][584] mm equipment[ racks][ cabinets]][ and ][ telecommunications backboards]. Cable guides of ring or bracket type devices[ mounted on [rack][cabinet] panels][backboard] for horizontal cable management and individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount cable guides with screws,[ and ][ or ]nuts and lockwashers.

][ 2.4.5 Patch Panels

Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus [25][_____] percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized [optical fiber][ and ][copper] patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete assemblies, with matching connectors as specified.[ Provide fiber optic patch cables with crossover orientation in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ]. Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 [ and JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ] for cables, cable length and hardware specified.



2.4.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de i ndi v i dual pat ch panel s wi t h a maxi mum of 48 adapt er por t s per pat ch panel f or Navy pr oj ect s. Lar ger pat ch panel cr oss- connect f i el ds ar e mor e di f f i cul t f or cabl e and admi ni st r at i ve management . Ar my pr oj ect s al l ow t he use of 96 por t adapt er pat ch panel s

Wi r e 8- pi n modul ar por t s t o T568A conf i gur at i on unl ess speci f i cal l y r equest ed and appr oved by t he aut hor i t y havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS X 5150 and JCS 5507 . Panels shall be third party verified[ and shall comply with EIA/TIACategory 6 requirements]. Panel shall be constructed of 2.2 mm minimum aluminum and shall be [cabinet][rack][wall] mounted and compatible with JIS C 6012-3-100 [ 482.6 mm][ 584 mm ] equipment[ cabinet][ rack]. Panel shall provide [48][_____] non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to [T568A][T568B]. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each port.

[ 2.4.5.2 Fiber Optic Patch Panel

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de i ndi v i dual pat ch panel s and di st r i but i on panel s wi t h 12 dupl ex LC, SC or MT- RJ adapt er s or 24 ST adapt er s maxi mum. Lar ger pat ch panel s ar e mor e di f f i cul t t o manage

Sl eeves ar e used i n adapt er s t o al i gn t he f i ber s and r educe i nser t i on l oss. Zi r coni a cer ami c spl i t s l eeves ar e mor e expensi ve but pr ovi de hi gher dur abi l i t y t han phosphor br onze spl i t s l eeves.

Do not use ST or MT- RJ f i ber opt i c adapt er s and connect or s f or new const r uct i on unl ess speci f i cal l y r equi r ed f or i nt er f ace wi t h exi st i ng equi pment r eused on i nst al l at i ons. Check wi t h act i v i t y f or speci f i c r equi r ement s f or ST and MT- RJ adapt er s and connectors..

**************************************************************************

Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber cables. Panel shall be constructed of[ [16][18] gauge steel][ or][ 11 gauge aluminum] minimum and shall be [cabinet][rack][wall] mounted and compatible with a JIS C 6012-3-100 [ 482.6 mm ][ 584 mm ] equipment rack. Each panel shall provide [12][_____] [multimode][single-mode] adapters as [ duplex LC in accordance with JIS C 5964-20 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves,] [duplex SC in accordance with JIS C 5964-4 and JIS C 5964-4-100 with zirconia ceramic][MT-RJ in accordance with JIS C 5964-18 with thermoplastic][ST in accordance with with metallic] alignment sleeves. Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 203 mm deep



with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each adapter factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each adapter.

] ][ 2.4.6 Optical Fiber Distribution Panel

[Cabinet][Rack][Wall] mounted optical fiber distribution panel (OFDP) shall be constructed in accordance with JIS C 6012-3-100 utilizing[ [16][18] gauge steel][ or][ 11 gauge aluminum] minimum. Panel shall be divided into two sections, distribution and user. Distribution section shall have strain relief, routing guides, splice tray and shall be lockable, user section shall have a cover for patch cord protection. Each panel shall provide[ [12][_____] multimode][ and][ [12][_____] single-mode] pigtails and adapters. Provide adapters as [ duplex LC with zirconia ceramic] [ duplex SC with zirconia ceramic][ MT-RJ with thermoplastic][ ST with metallic] alignment sleeves. Provide dust covers for adapters. Provide patch cords as specified in the paragraph PATCH PANELS.

] 2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

**************************************************************************NOTE: When a bui l di ng has el evat or s, a f our - pai r copper cabl e wi t h an ei ght - posi t i on modul ar out l et adapt er shal l be i nst al l ed f or each el evat or . The exact l ocat i on of t he out l et assembl y shoul d be ver i f i ed wi t h t he el evat or i nst al l er or Cont r act or .

Condui t bend r adi us shal l be coor di nat ed wi t h cabl e bend r adi us. Condui t ent r i es at out l et and j unct i on boxes shal l be ar r anged so t hat cabl es passi ng t hr ough t he box shal l ent er and exi t at opposi t e s i des of t he box. Pr ovi de gr oundi ng and bondi ng as r equi r ed by TI A- 607. Wi r e 8- pi n modul ar out l et / connect or s t o T568A conf i gur at i on unl ess speci f i cal l y r equest ed and appr oved by t he aut hor i t y havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on. The t er m RJ- 45 r ef er s t o 8- pi n modul ar adapt er s/ connect or s wi r ed t o T568A or T568B conf i gur at i ons. Ensur e dr awi ngs i ndi cat e wor k ar ea out l et adapt er col or code f unct i onal i t y i f col or codi ng of adapt er s i s a r equi r ement of t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e out l et / connect or col or wi t h Section 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEMS.

**************************************************************************

Outlet/connectors shall comply with JIS X 5150 and JCS 5507 . UTP outlet/connectors shall be JIS X 5150 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified[ and shall comply with JCS 5507 Category 6 requirements.] Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired [T568A][ or ][T568B][as indicated]. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with JCS 5507



for [200] [_____] mating cycles.[ UTP outlet/connectors installed in outdoor or marine environments shall be jell-filled type containing an anti-corrosive, memory retaining compound.]

2.5.2 Optical Fiber Adapters(Couplers)

**************************************************************************NOTE: LC st y l e adapt er s and connect or s ar e t he def aul t st andar d f or new const r uct i on due t o smal l er f or m f act or ( s i ze) al l owi ng hi gher densi t y at bot h t he pat ch panel and t he out l et s. However , SC st y l e connect or s/ adapt er s ar e t he mi ni mum TI A- 568- C. 3 requirement.

Do not use ST or MT- RJ f i ber opt i c adapt er s and connect or s f or new const r uct i on unl ess speci f i cal l y r equi r ed f or i nt er f ace wi t h exi st i ng equi pment r eused on i nst al l at i ons. Check wi t h act i v i t y f or speci f i c r equi r ement s f or ST and MT- RJ adapt er s and connectors.

Sl eeves ar e used i n adapt er s t o al i gn t he f i ber s and r educe i nser t i on l oss. Zi r coni a cer ami c spl i t s l eeves ar e mor e expensi ve but pr ovi de hi gher dur abi l i t y t han phosphor br onze spl i t s l eeves.

**************************************************************************

Provide optical fiber adapters suitable for[ duplex LC in accordance with JIS C 5964-20 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves,][ duplex SC in Accordance with JIS C 5964-4 and JIS C 5964-4-100 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves,] [ MT-RJ in accordance with JIS C 5964-18 with thermoplastic alignment sleeves,][ and][ ST with metallic alignment sleeves] as indicated. Provide dust cover for adapters. Optical fiber adapters shall comply with JIS C 61300-2-2 for [500][_____] mating cycles.

2.5.3 Optical Fiber Connectors

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use ST st y l e connect or s f or new const r uct i on unl ess speci f i cal l y r equi r ed f or i nt er f ace wi t h exi st i ng equi pment r eused on i nst al l at i ons. Check wi t h act i v i t y f or speci f i c r equi r ement s f or ST connect or s. Use br acket ed opt i on f or cr i mp st y l e ST t ype connect or s. Sel ect 850 or 1300 nm f or mul t i mode f i ber opt i c cabl e and 1310 or 1550 nm f or s i ngl e- mode f i ber opt i c cabl e

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS C 61300-2-2 .[ Optical fiber connectors shall be[ duplex LC in accordance with JIS C 5964-20 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves,] [ duplex SC in accordance with JIS C 5964-4 and JIS C 5964-4-100 with zirconia ceramic][ MT-RJ in accordance with JIS C 5964-18 with thermoplastic][ ST in accordance with with metallic] ferrule, epoxyless[ crimp style] compatible with[ [62.5/125][50/125] multimode][8/125 single-mode] fiber. The connectors shall provide a maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB at[ 850][ 1300][ 1310][ 1550] nm with less than a 0.2 dB change after 500 mating cycles.]



2.5.4 Cover Plates

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e cover pl at e col or wi t h Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEMS.

**************************************************************************

Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with JIS C 8435 , and JIS X 5150 , [ JCS 5507 ], [ JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ]; [flush][ or ][oversized] design constructed of [high impact thermoplastic material [[ivory][white][brown] in color][to match color of receptacle/switch cover plates specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]][302 stainless material][ or ][brass material]. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

[ 2.6 MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mul t i - User Tel ecommuni cat i ons Out l et Assembl i es ( MUTOAs) ar e t er mi nat i on devi ces used f or open of f i ce cabl i ng. The use of mul t i - user t el ecommuni cat i ons out l et assembl i es al l ows hor i zont al cabl i ng t o r emai n i nt act when t he open of f i ce pl an i s changed. Wor k ar ea cabl es or i gi nat i ng f r om t he MUTOA shoul d be r out ed t hr ough wor k ar ea pat hways ( e. g. , f ur ni t ur e pat hways) . The wor k ar ea cabl es shal l be connect ed di r ect l y t o wor k st at i on equi pment wi t hout t he use of any addi t i onal i nt er medi at e connect i ons. MUTOAs shoul d be l ocat ed i n an open of f i ce ar ea so t hat each f ur ni t ur e c l ust er i s ser ved by at l east one MUTOA. The MUTOA shoul d be l i mi t ed t o ser vi ng a maxi mum of t wel ve wor k ar eas. Maxi mum wor k ar ea cabl e l engt h r equi r ement s shal l al so be t aken i nt o account . Spar e capaci t y shoul d al so be consi der ed when si z i ng t he MUTOA.

**************************************************************************

Provide MUTOA(s) in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

][ 2.7 TERMINAL CABINETS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nst al l wi r i ng and l abel i ng i n Ai r For ce medi cal f aci l i t i es i n accor dance wi t h HEADQUARTERS AI R FORCE MEDI CAL SUPPORT AGENCY DESI GN AND I MPLEMENTATI ON GUI DELI NES MEDI CAL SYSTEMS I NFRASTRUCTURE MODERNI ZATI ON PROGRAM ( 2001) f or Ai r For ce Medi cal pr oj ect s. Label ot her pr oj ect s i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606.

**************************************************************************

Construct of zinc-coated sheet steel,[ 915 by 610 by 150 mm deep][as indicated]. Trim shall be fitted with hinged door and locking latch. Doors shall be maximum size openings to box interiors. Boxes shall be provided with 16 mm backboard with two-coat varnish finish. Match trim, hardware, doors, and finishes with panelboards. Provide label and identification systems for telecommunications wiring and components.



] 2.8 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e gr oundi ng and bondi ng component s and conduct or s i zes on dr awi ngs. Use Sect i on 26 20 00 I NTERI OR DI STRI BUTI ON SYSTEM.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 . Components shall be identified as required by applicable codes and standards . Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.9 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Fi r est oppi ng mat er i al r equi r ement s ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 07 84 00 FI RESTOPPI NG.

**************************************************************************

Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.




JIS K 6911 . Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 3 mm thick, white with [black] [_____] center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 65 mm . Lettering shall be a minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.

2.12 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.12.1 Factory Reel Tests

Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 [, JIS C 6185-2 for single mode optical fiber ][, and JIS C 6185-3 for multimode optical fiber] cables.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e l ast sent ence associ at ed wi t h cabl i ng gui des f or s i ngl e f ami l y r esi dent i al i nst al l at i ons.

**************************************************************************

Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the



horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , [ JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 , ], and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network.[ Provide residential cabling in a star wiring architecture from the distribution device as required.] Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.[ Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.]

3.1.1 Cabling

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not exceed cabl e manuf act ur er ' s speci f i c mi ni mum bend r adi us or manuf act ur er ' s maxi mum pul l t ensi on ( t ensi l e) r at i ng.

**************************************************************************

Install [UTP,][ and][ optical fiber] telecommunications cabling system as detailed in JIS X 5150 , [ JCS 5507 , ] [ JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 , Appendix A][ and applicable codes and standards for residential cabling]. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 110 N pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section.

[ 3.1.1.1 Open Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de cabl i ng i n a wi r eway/ r aceway pat hway syst em onl y f or Navy pr oj ect s. Del et e br acket ed sent ences associ at ed wi t h cabl i ng not i n wi r eway and pat hway, st r uct ur al member r out i ng, cabl e pl acement and coi l i ng of cabl es f or Navy pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays, or below raised floors. Install in accordance with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 [ [and ] JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 , Appendix A ]. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the manufacturer.[ Copper cable not in a wireway or pathway shall be suspended a minimum of [200][_____] mm above ceilings by cable supports no greater than [1.5][_____] m apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 300 mm shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided.]



Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum areas. Cable routed exposed under raised floors shall be plenum rated. Plenum cables shall comply with flammability plenum requirements per applicable codes and standards . Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.[ Cable [1.8][_____] meters long shall be neatly coiled not less than [300][_____] mm in diameter below each feed point in raised floor areas.]

] 3.1.1.2 Backbone Cable

a. Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable, in indicated pathways, between the campus distributor, located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room, the building distributors and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings.

b. Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone optical fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 250 mm leaving strength members exposed for approximately 250 mm. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.1.3 Horizontal Cabling

Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than 12 mm from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form of a figure eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 3 m in the telecommunications room, and 304 mm in the work area outlet.

3.1.2 Pathway Installations

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use met al f l ex condui t f or t el ecommuni cat i ons wi r i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with JIS X 5150 . Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

[ 3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Overhead

Provide service entrance overhead as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

][ 3.1.4 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground

Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

] 3.1.5 Cable Tray Installation

Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Only [CMP] [and] [OFNP] type cable shall be installed in a plenum.



3.1.6 Work Area Outlets

3.1.6.1 Terminations

Terminate UTP cable in accordance with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 and wiring configuration as specified.[Terminate fiber optic cables in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ]

3.1.6.2 Cover Plates

As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.6.3 Cables

Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 304 mm of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

3.1.6.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.

[ 3.1.6.5 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA)

Run horizontal cable in the ceiling or underneath the floor and terminate each cable on a MUTOA in each individual zone. MUTOAs shall not be located in ceiling spaces, or any obstructed area. MUTOAs shall not be installed in furniture unless that unit of furniture is permanently secured to the building structure. MUTOAs shall be located in an open work area so that each furniture cluster is served by at least one MUTOA. The MUTOA shall be limited to serving a maximum of twelve work areas. Maximum work area cable length requirements shall also be taken into account. MUTOAs must be labeled to include the maximum length of work area cables. MUTOA labeling is in addition to the labeling, or other applicable cabling administration standards. Work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area device must also be uniquely identified and labeled.

] 3.1.7 Telecommunications Space Termination

Install termination hardware required for [Category 6][ and ][optical fiber] system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors.

[ 3.1.7.1 Connector Blocks

Connector blocks shall be [cabinet][rack][wall] mounted in orderly rows and columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard wire routing guides in accordance with JIS X 5150 .

] 3.1.7.2 Patch Panels

Patch panels shall be mounted [in equipment [cabinets]][racks][on the plywood backboard] with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed



cable plant plus [25][_____] percent spares.

[ a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel [with cable ties][as recommended by the manufacturer] to prevent movement of the cable.

][ b. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. Fiber optic cable loop shall be [ [900][_____] mm in length][provided as recommended by the manufacturer]. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel to prevent movement of the fibers within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically manufactured for that purpose.

] [ 3.1.7.3 Equipment Support Frames

Install in accordance with JIS X 5150 :

[a. Bracket, wall mounted. Mount bracket to plywood backboard in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount rack so height of highest panel does not exceed 1980 mm above floor.]

[b. Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.]

[c. Cabinets, freestanding modular type. When cabinets are connected together, remove adjoining side panels for cable routing between cabinets.[ Mount rack mounted fan in [roof][base] of cabinet.]]

[d. Cabinets, wall-mounted modular type. Mount cabinet to plywood backboard in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount cabinet so height of highest panel does not exceed 1980 mm above floor.]

] 3.1.8 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.9 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nst al l and l abel Ai r For ce medi cal f aci l i t i es i n accor dance wi t h HEADQUARTERS AI R FORCE MEDI CAL SUPPORT AGENCY DESI GN AND I MPLEMENTATI ON GUI DELI NES MEDI CAL SYSTEMS I NFRASTRUCTURE MODERNI ZATI ON PROGRAM ( 2001) . Label ot her pr oj ect s i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606 usi ng a mechani cal devi ce f or pr i nt i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide labeling in accordance with applicable codes and standards .



Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using[ thermal ink transfer process][ laser printer] [_____].

3.2.2 Cable

Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Use and coor di nat e pai nt and coat i ng r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS when pr ovi ded i n t he j ob. When r equi r ement s ar e beyond what i s speci f i ed i n Sect i on 09 90 00, speci f y t he r equi r ement s i n t hi s par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.3.1 Painting Backboards

If backboards are required to be painted, then the manufactured fire retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint, so as not to increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled. Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted.

3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING


3.5 TESTING

3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing

Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with JIS X 5150 , [ JCS 5507 ], [ JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ]. Test equipment shall conform to JIS X 5150 . Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.

3.5.1.1 Inspection

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm



compliance with JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , [ JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 ], [ and ][applicable codes and standards for residential cabling]. Visually confirm [ Category 6,] marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3.5.1.2 Verification Tests

UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but prior to being cross-connected.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Two met hods f or measur i ng t he i nst al l ed opt i cal f i ber cabl e pl ant l oss ar e descr i bed i n EI A TI A/ EI A- 526- 7 ( s i ngl e- mode cabl e) . Met hod A uses opt i cal power measur ement equi pment . Met hod B uses an Opt i cal Ti me Domai n Ref l ect omet er ( OTDR) . Met hod B i s not r ecommended f or cabl e pl ant s cont ai ni ng br anchi ng devi ces and/ or i sol at or s. EI A TI A/ EI A- 526- 14A ( mul t i mode cabl e) does not r ecommend t he use of an OTDR f or t est i ng. BI CSI r ecommends usi ng Met hod A f or al l t est i ng and i mpl ement i ng Met hod B t est i ng t o i sol at e opt i cal di spar i t i es i n f i ber l i nks t hat f ai l Met hod A t est i ng.

**************************************************************************

[[For multimode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 and JIS C 6850 and JIS C 6185-3 using[ Method A, Optical Power Meter and Light Source][ Method B, OTDR] for multimode optical fiber.][ For single-mode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 and JIS C 6185-2 using[ Method A, Optical Power Meter and Light Source][ Method B, OTDR] for single-mode optical fiber.] Perform verification acceptance tests.]

3.5.1.3 Performance Tests

Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:

[ a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with JIS X 5150 and JCS 5507 . Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.

][ . Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with JIS C 6820 and JIS C 6850 .

] 3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use br acket ed opt i ons f or Voi ce Test s and Dat a Test s on Navy pr oj ect s onl y.

**************************************************************************

Perform verification tests for UTP[ and optical fiber] systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.



[ a. Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN telephone call.

][ b. Data Tests. These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and are available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.







**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 31 00 00 ( August 2008) Change 1 - 11/ 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 31 00 00 ( Jul y 2006)



SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK08/08


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or ear t hwor k act i v i t i es f or bui l di ngs, ut i l i t i es, r oadways, r ai l r oads, and ai r f i el ds.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s speci f i cat i on i ncl udes sever al sect i ons r el at ed t o ut i l i t i es. Coor di nat i on wi t h ut i l i t i es speci f i cat i ons ( i . e. 33 11 00 Wat er Ut i l i t y Di st r i but i on Pi pi ng f or wat er r el at ed ut i l i t i es, et c. ) may be r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************



PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Consul t wi t h a soi l s engi neer whi l e edi t i ng t hi s sect i on t o det er mi ne speci f i c r equi r ement s f or each j ob.

The f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on wi l l be i ndi cat ed on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs:

1. Sur f ace el evat i ons, exi st i ng and new;

2. Locat i on of under gr ound obst r uct i ons and exi st i ng ut i l i t i es;

3. Locat i on and r ecor d of soi l bor i ngs and t est pi t s. I ncl ude gr ound wat er obser vat i ons and t opsoi l t hi ckness encount er ed i n bor i ng, soi l c l assi f i cat i ons, and pr oper t i es such as moi st ur e cont ent and At t er ber g l i mi t det er mi nat i ons;

4. Locat i on of bor r ow and di sposal ar ea i f l ocat ed on Gover nment pr oper t y;

5. Cl ear i ng st r i ppi ng and gr ubbi ng l i mi t s, i f di f f er ent f r om cl ear i ng l i mi t s;

6. Ar eas t o be seeded;

7. Hydr ol ogi cal dat a wher e avai l abl e;

8. Shor i ng and sheet i ng r equi r ed ( t r ench pr ot ect i on i s speci f i ed i n Cor ps of Engi neer s Manual EM 385- 1- 1) ; and

9. Pi pe t r ench excavat i on det ai l s.

10. Locat i on and l i mi t s of har d mat er i al ( r ocks) ;

11. Det ai l s of speci al const r uct i on such as under r ai l r oad and hi ghways r i ght - of - way r equi r ement s f or j acki ng and bor i ng;

12. Det ai l s of sewage absor pt i on t r enches, absor pt i on pi t s, and subsur f ace dr ai ns.

**************************************************************************

1.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

**************************************************************************NOTE: These par agr aphs wi l l be del et ed when l ump sum payment f or wor k under t hi s sect i on i s desi r ed and when t he wor k cover ed by t hi s sect i on i s i ncl uded i n one l ump sum cont r act pr i ce f or t he ent i r e wor k cover ed by t he I nvi t at i on f or Bi ds.

**************************************************************************



1.1.1 Excavation

The unit of measurement for excavation and borrow will be the cubic meter , computed by the average end area method from cross sections taken before and after the excavation and borrow operations, including the excavation for ditches, gutters, and channel changes, when the material is acceptably utilized or disposed of as herein specified. The measurements will include authorized excavation of rock (except for piping trenches that is covered below), authorized excavation of unsatisfactory subgrade soil, and the volume of loose, scattered rocks and boulders collected within the limits of the work; allowance will be made on the same basis for selected backfill ordered as replacement. The measurement will not include the volume of subgrade material or other material that is scarified or plowed and reused in-place, and will not include the volume excavated without authorization or the volume of any material used for purposes other than directed. The volume of overburden stripped from borrow pits and the volume of excavation for ditches to drain borrow pits, unless used as borrow material, will not be measured for payment. The measurement will not include the volume of any excavation performed prior to the taking of elevations and measurements of the undisturbed grade.

1.1.2 Piping Trench Excavation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph wi l l be coor di nat ed wi t h t he payment par agr aphs of appr opr i at e cont r act sect i ons t o ensur e t hat t her e ar e no dual payment s or omi ssi on of payment f or t r ench excavat i on. Ther e shoul d be separ at e payment i t ems est abl i shed f or t r ench excavat i on f or each di f f er ent s i ze of pi pe i n t he cont r act . Payment f or t r ench excavat i on f or heat - di st r i but i on syst em and f or under gr ound el ect r i cal - di st r i but i on syst em may be excl uded f or payment f r om t hi s par agr aph, and i ncl uded i n payment under t he appr opr i at e ut i l i t y sect i on, when t he wor k i s of such a nat ur e and ext ent and so cl ear l y i ndi cat ed t hat t he excavat i on quant i t i es i nvol ved can be est i mat ed wi t h r easonabl e accur acy.

**************************************************************************

Measure trench excavation by the number of linear meters along the centerline of the trench and excavate to the depths and widths specified for the particular size of pipe. Replace unstable trench bottoms with a selected granular material. Include the additional width at manholes and similar structures, the furnishing, placing and removal of sheeting and bracing, pumping and bailing, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work required by this section.

1.1.3 Rock Excavation for Trenches

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph when not r equi r ed i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Measure and pay for rock excavation by the number of cubic meters of acceptably excavated rock material. Measure the material in place, but base volume on a maximum 750 mm width for pipes 300 mm in diameter or less, and a maximum width of 400 mm greater than the outside diameter of



the pipe for pipes over 300 mm in diameter. Provide the measurement to include all authorized overdepth rock excavation as determined by the Contracting Officer. For manholes and other appurtenances, compute volumes of rock excavation on the basis of 300 mm outside of the wall lines of the structures.

1.1.4 Topsoil Requirements

Separate excavation, hauling, and spreading or piling of topsoil and related miscellaneous operations will be considered subsidiary obligations of the Contractor, covered under the contract unit price for excavation.

1.1.5 Overhaul Requirements

Allow the unit of measurement for overhaul to be the station-meter . The overhaul distance will be the distance in stations between the center of volume of the overhaul material in its original position and the center of volume after placing, minus the free-haul distance in stations. The haul distance will be measured along the shortest route determined by the Contracting Officer as feasible and satisfactory. Do no measure or waste unsatisfactory materials for overhaul where the length of haul for borrow is within the free-haul limits.

1.1.6 Select Granular Material

Measure select granular material in place as the actual cubic meters replacing wet or unstable material in trench bottoms [within the limits shown] [in authorized overdepth areas]. Provide unit prices which include furnishing and placing the granular material, excavation and disposal of unsatisfactory material, and additional requirements for sheeting and bracing, pumping, bailing, cleaning, and other incidentals necessary to complete the work.

1.2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

**************************************************************************NOTE: When l ump sum payment f or wor k under t hi s sect i on i s desi r ed, t hese par agr aphs wi l l be r evi sed accor di ngl y. These par agr aphs wi l l be del et ed when t he wor k cover ed by t hi s sect i on i s i ncl uded i n one l ump sum cont r act pr i ce f or t he ent i r e wor k cover ed by t he I nvi t at i on f or Bi ds. Payment f or over haul wi l l be separ at e f r om excavat i on and bor r ow.

**************************************************************************

Payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

1.2.1 Classified Excavation

Classified excavation will be paid for at the contract unit prices per cubic meter for common or rock excavation.

1.2.2 Piping Trench Excavation

Payment for trench excavation will constitute full payment for excavation and backfilling, [including specified overdepth] except in rock or unstable trench bottoms.



1.2.3 Rock Excavation for Trenches

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph when not r equi r ed i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Payment for rock excavation will be made in addition to the price bid for the trench excavation, and will include all necessary drilling and all incidentals necessary to excavate and dispose of the rock. Select granular material, used as backfill replacing rock excavation, will not be paid for separately, but will be included in the unit price for rock excavation.

1.2.4 Unclassified Excavation

Unclassified excavation will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for unclassified excavation.

1.2.5 Classified Borrow

Classified borrow will be paid for at the contract unit prices per cubic meter for common or rock borrow.

1.2.6 Unclassified Borrow

Unclassified borrow will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for unclassified borrow.

1.2.7 Authorized Overhaul

The number of station-meters of overhaul to be paid for will be the product of number of cubic meters of overhaul material measured in the original position, multiplied by the overhaul distance measured in stations of 100 meters and will be paid for at the contract unit price per station-meter for overhaul in excess of the free-haul limit as designated in paragraph DEFINITIONS.

1.2.8 Sheeting and Bracing

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e subpar agr aphs or i t ems not r equi r ed i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Sheeting and bracing, when shown or authorized by the Contracting Officer to be left in place, will be paid for as follows: [_____].

1.2.8.1 Timber Sheeting

Timber sheeting will be paid for as the number of board feet of lumber below finish grade measured in place prior to backfilling. Include in the measurement sheeting wasted when cut off between the finished grade and 300 mm below the finished grade.

1.2.8.2 Steel Sheeting and Soldier Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: The bl ank wi l l be f i l l ed wi t h an appr opr i at e



number not gr eat er t han 1 m. However , i f t he quant i t i es of sheet i ng i nvol ved ar e ant i c i pat ed t o be subst ant i al , and si nce t he cut of f st eel can be sol d by t he Cont r act or as scr ap, t he whol e par t i n br acket s can be del et ed and no payment pr ovi ded f or wast ed cut of f ends.

**************************************************************************

Steel sheeting, soldier piles, and steel bracing will be paid for according to the number of pounds of steel calculated. Calculate the steel by multiplying the measured in-place length in meters below finish grade by the unit weight of the section in kg per meter . Obtain unit weight of rolled steel sections from recognized steel manuals. [Included in the measurement sheeting wasted when cut off between the finished grade and a distance of up to [_____] meters below the finished grade.]

1.3 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

**************************************************************************NOTE: For most pr oj ect s, t he scope of ear t hwor k can accur at el y be det er mi ned. However , i f ear t hwor k i s appr oxi mat el y known, a uni t pr i ce f or ear t h wor k shoul d be pr ovi ded i n t he Bi d Schedul e.

Uni t - pr i ce i t ems ar e mul t i pl i ed by t he appr oxi mat ed and st at ed quant i t y gi v i ng a sum t hat i s t hen added t o t he pr i ce f or t he r est of t he wor k. The r esul t i s a l ump sum bi d wi t h aut omat i c pr ovi s i on f or payment or cr edi t due t o var i at i ons i n ear t hwor k wi t hi n 15 per cent of t hat shown and bi d upon. Var i at i ons exceedi ng 15 per cent of t hat shown and bi d upon wi l l become t he subj ect of negot i at i ons i n accor dance wi t h FAR 52. 211- 18 Var i at i on i n Est i mat ed Quantity.

**************************************************************************

Base bids on the following criteria:

a. Surface elevations are as indicated.

b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

c. [Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction.] [Ground water elevation is [_____] meters below existing surface elevation.]

d. [Ground water elevation is [_____] meters below existing surface elevation.]

e. [Material character is indicated by the boring logs.]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he f ol l owi ng opt i on i f no bor i ng i nf or mat i on i s avai l abl e, or i f t he bor i ng i nf or mat i on i s i nsuf f i c i ent t o per mi t a bi dder t o devel op an accur at e est i mat e of har d mat er i al or



r ock t o be encount er ed. I f har d mat er i al or r ock i s t o be encount er ed, t he f ol l owi ng opt i on shoul d be modi f i ed t o i ncl ude a per cent f i gur e or an appr oxi mat e dept h at whi ch har d mat er i al or r ock wi l l be encount er ed.

**************************************************************************

f. [Hard materials [and rock] [will not] [will] be encountered [in [_____] percent of the excavations] [at [_____] meter below existing surface elevations]].

1.4 REFERENCES




**************************************************************************



JIS A 1102 (2014) Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregates

JIS A 1103 (2014) Method of Test for Amount of Material Passing Test Sieve 75 µm in Aggregates

JIS A 1205 (2009) Test Method for Liquid Limit and Plastic Limit of Soils

JIS A 1210 (2009) Test Method for Soil Compaction Using a Rammer

JIS A 1211 (2009) Test Methods for the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of Soils in laboratory

JIS A 1214 (2013) Test Method for Soil Density by the Sand Replacement Method



JIS A 1218 (2013) Test Methods for Permeability of Saturated Soils

JIS A 5001 (2008) Crushed Stone for Road Construction

JIS A 5005 (2009) Crushed Stone and Manufactured Sand for Concrete

JAPAN MINISTRY OF THE ENVIRONMENT (MOE)

Notification No.46 (2001) Environmental Quality Standards for Soil Contamination

JAPANESE GEOTECHNICAL SOCIETY (JGS)

JGS 0051 (2000) Method of Classification of Geomaterials for Engineering Purposes

JGS 1614 (2003) Test Method for Soil Density Using Nuclear Gauge

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE HEADQUARTERS, U.S. FORCES JAPAN (USFJ)

JEGS (2018) Japan Environmental Governing Standards

1.5 DEFINITIONS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e def i ni t i ons t hat wi l l not be used i n t he speci f i cat i on t ext f or a speci f i c pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

1.5.1 Satisfactory Materials

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sat i sf act or y mat er i al wi l l be def i ned i n accor dance wi t h l ocal l y avai l abl e mat er i al s, desi gn sl opes, et c. , and sui t abl e c l asses, based on t he geot echni cal r epor t , wi l l be l i s t ed i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on i n accor dance wi t h JGS 0051. Maxi mum r ock s i ze wi l l be det er mi ned based on how t hi ck t he f i l l i s and how i t i s goi ng t o be accompl i shed. As a r ul e of t humb, i t shoul d be no l ar ger t han 1/ 2 t he al l owabl e l i f t t hi ckness. Cl ay mat er i al shoul d be checked f or expansi ve char act er i st i cs and t hi s sect i on shoul d be edi t ed accor di ngl y.

**************************************************************************

Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by JGS 0051 as G, G-M, G-C, [G-O], [G-V], GM, GC, [GO], [GV], S, S-M, S-C, [S-O], [S-V], SM, SC, [SO], [SV], ML, MH, CL, CH, [OL], [OH], [OV], [VH1], [VH2] . Satisfactory materials for grading comprise stones less than 200 mm , except for fill material for pavements and railroads which comprise stones less than 75 mm in any dimension.

1.5.2 Unsatisfactory Materials

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Unsat i sf act or y mat er i al wi l l be def i ned i n accor dance wi t h l ocal l y avai l abl e mat er i al s, desi gn sl opes, et c. , and unsui t abl e c l asses wi l l be l i s t ed i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons i n accor dance wi t h JGS 0051 . Thi s par agr aph shoul d be edi t ed t o del et e i nappl i cabl e mat er i al s.

**************************************************************************

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. Notify the Contracting Officer when encountering any contaminated materials.

1.5.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

**************************************************************************NOTE: When cl assi f i cat i on wi l l be necessar y dur i ng const r uct i on, det er mi nat i on of gr ai n s i ze f or c l assi f i cat i on wi l l be speci f i ed t o be made i n conf or mance wi t h JI S A 1102, JI S A 1103 and JI S A 1205 .

**************************************************************************

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in JGS 0051 as G, G-M, G-C, S, S-M, S-C . Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, CH . Materials classified as GM, SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform testing, required for classifying materials, in accordance with JIS A 1205 , JIS A 1102 and JIS A 1103 .

1.5.4 Degree of Compaction

**************************************************************************NOTE: JI S A 1210 wi l l be used f or maxi mum densi t y determinations .

**************************************************************************

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in JIS A 1210 (Methods C,D,E - non repeating method) abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density (Modified Proctor Test) .

1.5.5 Overhaul

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s t o be del et ed when t he ear t hwor k i s t o be pai d f or under a l ump sum cont r act . The bl ank wi l l be f i l l ed wi t h t he appr opr i at e number of st at i ons.

**************************************************************************

Overhaul is the authorized transportation of satisfactory excavation or borrow materials in excess of the free-haul limit of [_____] stations. Overhaul is the product of the quantity of materials hauled beyond the free-haul limit, and the distance such materials are hauled beyond the free-haul limit, expressed in station meters .



1.5.6 Topsoil

**************************************************************************NOTE: Addi t i onal r equi r ement s such as pH val ue and necessar y soi l condi t i oni ng, accor di ng t o appl i cabl e pr ovi s i ons of Sect i ons 32 92 19 t hr ough 32 92 26, shoul d be i nser t ed i n t hi s par agr aph. The dept h of t he t opsoi l shoul d be gi ven i n t he t ext of t he speci f i cat i on, pr ef er abl y i n t hi s par agr aph.

**************************************************************************

Material suitable for topsoils obtained from [offsite areas] [excavations] [areas indicated on the drawings] is defined as: Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 25 mm diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.

1.5.7 Hard/Unyielding Materials

**************************************************************************NOTE: St ones shoul d gener al l y not exceed 75 mm i n di amet er . However , pi pe manuf act ur er ' s cr i t er i a, i f any, shoul d be used.

**************************************************************************

Hard/Unyielding materials comprise weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" with stones greater than [_____] mm in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. These materials usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.

1.5.8 Rock

Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than pavement exceeding [0.375] [_____] cubic meter in volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling that is performed merely to increase production.

1.5.9 Unstable Material

Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure.

1.5.10 Select Granular Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: I t i s i mpor t ant t o speci f y sel ect mat er i al under f oot i ngs and sl abs t o mi ni mi ze set t l ement and t o ensur e st abi l i t y of a st r uct ur e. Consi der at i on shoul d be made of t he sensi t i v i t y of t he st r uct ur e t o t ot al and/ or di f f er ent i al set t l ement s r el at ed t o



t he st r uct ur al desi gn. Thi s i s par t i cul ar l y t r ue of add- on st r uct ur es and st r uct ur es t o be f ounded par t l y on f i l l and par t l y on nat ur al gr ound. For cr i b r et ai ni ng wal l , not mor e t han 10 per cent by wei ght of t he f i l l mat er i al shoul d be f i ner t han 75 micrometers s i eve. Al so, speci f y coef f i c i ent of per meabi l i t y wi t hi n t he r ange of 0. 01 t o 1. 0 mm per second and soi l c l assi f i cat i on GW, GP, SW and SP. I ndi cat e wi t h cr oss sect i ons or sect i on det ai l s on t he cont r act dr awi ngs t he l i mi t s or ext ent s of any cont r ol l ed f i l l s or backf i l l s . Speci f y c l ass of mat er i al t hat i s accept abl e i n t he f i l l or backf i l l gi v i ng pr ef er ence t o any t ypes avai l abl e at or near t he s i t e. Sel ect appr opr i at e val ues f or At t er ber g l i mi t s and per cent age of f i nes and speci f y maxi mum t hi ckness of l i f t s f or compact i on.

For pi pi ng beddi ng t he maxi mum si ze of aggr egat e shoul d be not mor e t han 8 mm per 100 mm of pi pe di amet er , or 75 mm maxi mum. Ref er t o pi pe manuf act ur er ' s cr i t er i a f or mor e st r i ngent r equi r ement s, i f any, on aggr egat e s i ze and gradation.

I f sui t abl e mat er i al s f or t hi s pr oj ect ar e l i mi t ed t o mat er i al s c l assi f i ed as GW, GP, SW, or SP, del et e t he br acket ed sent ences of t hi s par agr aph. Coor di nat e r equi r ement s wi t h a geot echni cal engi neer . Sel ect f i l l used f or st r uct ur es shoul d ext end a mi ni mum of 1. 5 m out si de t he bui l di ng f oundat i on l i nes or ot her bui l di ng el ement s gai ni ng suppor t f r om t he f i l l .

**************************************************************************

1.5.10.1 General Requirements

Select granular material consist of materials classified as [G], [G-M], [G-C], [S], [S-M], [S-C] or [_____] by JGS 0051 where indicated. [The liquid limit of such material must not exceed [35] [_____] percent when tested in accordance with JIS A 1205 . The plasticity index must not be greater than [12] [_____] percent when tested in accordance with JIS A 1205 , and not more than [35] [_____] percent by weight may be finer than 75 micrometers sieve when tested in accordance with JIS A 1103 .] [Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of [0.01] [_____] mm per second when tested in accordance with JIS A 1218 .]

1.5.10.2 California Bearing Ratio Values

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e Cal i f or ni a Bear i ng Rat i o val ues ar e needed i ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph:

**************************************************************************

[Bearing Ratio: Provide Design CBR ratio in accordance with JIS A 1211 for a laboratory soaking period of not less than 4 days. [Provide [_____] percent maximum expansion.] [Conform the combined material to the following sieve analysis:]]



Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

63 mm2-1/2 inches 100

4.75 mm No. 4 40 - 85

2.00 mm No. 10 20 - 80

425 µm No. 40 10 - 60

75 µm No. 200 5 - 25

1.5.11 Initial Backfill Material

Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks [_____] mm or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free the initial backfill material of stones larger than [_____] mm in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.

1.5.12 Expansive Soils

**************************************************************************NOTE: Addi t i onal l abor at or y t est i ng and anal ysi s mi ght be needed t o bet t er def i ne s i t e speci f i c expansi ve soi l s. I f expansi ve soi l s ar e ant i c i pat ed at t he const r uct i on s i t e, t hi s speci f i cat i on shoul d be edi t ed t o ensur e pr oper const r uct i on t echni ques ar e under t aken per UFC 3- 220- 01.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Expansi ve soi l s may al so be def i ned usi ng t he expansi on r at i o i n accor dance wi t h JI S A 1211.

**************************************************************************

Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to or greater than [_____] when tested in accordance with JIS A 1205 or have expansion/swelling ratios equal to or greater than [____] when tested in accordance with JIS A 1211 .

1.5.13 Nonfrost Susceptible (NFS) Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cont r act speci f i cat i ons f or nonf r ost - suscept i bl e f i l l and backf i l l wi l l f ol l ow t he gr adat i on r equi r ement s r ecommended i n UFC 3- 250- 01. For f i l l under cr i t i cal st r uct ur es, mat er i al s wi t h ML, MH, and CH cl assi f i cat i on wi l l be speci f i ed as unsat i sf act or y ( i f at al l f easi bl e f r om an economi c or mat er i al - avai l abi l i t y st andpoi nt ) . I f such mat er i al s must be used, t he speci f i cat i on wi l l poi nt out t he cr i t i cal nat ur e of t he mat er i al s and t he cont r ol di f f i cul t i es t o be ant i c i pat ed. Or gani c mat er i al s and t opsoi l havi ng OL, OH, and Pt c l assi f i cat i on wi l l not be used i n f i l l or backf i l l .



**************************************************************************

Nonfrost susceptible material are a uniformly graded washed sand with a maximum particle size of [_____] mm and less than 5 percent passing the 0.075 mm size sieve, and with not more than 3 percent by weight finer than 0.02 mm grain size.

1.5.14 Pile Supported Structure

As used herein, a structure where both the foundation and floor slab are pile supported.


Subsurface soil boring logs are [shown on the drawings] [appended to the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS]. The subsoil investigation report and samples of materials taken from subsurface investigations may be examined at [_____]. These data represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.

1.6.1 Classification of Excavation

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nappl i cabl e por t i ons wi l l be del et ed. Ot her c l assi f i cat i ons of excavat i on may be ut i l i zed as required. Al l excavat i ons shal l meet SAFETY REQUI REMENTS i n accor dance wi t h EM 385- 1- 1.

**************************************************************************

[No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.] [Finish the specified excavation on a classified basis, in accordance with the following designations and classifications.]

1.6.1.1 Common Excavation

Include common excavation with the satisfactory removal and disposal of all materials not classified as rock excavation.

1.6.1.2 Rock Excavation

Submit notification of encountering rock in the project. Include rock excavation with excavating, grading, disposing of material classified as rock, and the satisfactory removal and disposal of boulders 1/2 cubic meter or more in volume; solid rock; rock material that is in ledges, bedded deposits, and unstratified masses, which cannot be removed without systematic drilling; firmly cemented conglomerate deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock impossible to remove without systematic drilling; and hard materials (see Definitions). Include the removal of any concrete or masonry structures, except pavements, exceeding 1/2 cubic meter in volume that may be encountered in the work in this classification. If at any time during excavation, including excavation from borrow areas, the Contractor encounters material that may be classified as rock excavation, uncover such material and notify the Contracting Officer. Do not proceed with the excavation of this material until the Contracting Officer has classified the materials as common excavation or rock excavation and has taken cross sections as required. Failure on the part of the Contractor to uncover such material, notify the



Contracting Officer, and allow ample time for classification and cross sectioning of the undisturbed surface of such material will cause the forfeiture of the Contractor's right of claim to any classification or volume of material to be paid for other than that allowed by the Contracting Officer for the areas of work in which such deposits occur.

1.6.2 Dewatering Work Plan

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t hi s par agr aph wher e wat er l evel s wi l l i mpact excavat i on oper at i ons.

**************************************************************************

Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Revi ew submi t t al descr i pt i on ( SD) def i ni t i ons i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES and edi t t he f ol l owi ng l i s t t o r ef l ect onl y t he submi t t al s r equi r ed f or t he pr oj ect .

The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G. " Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a “ G” t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .




**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;



submittals not having a "G" designation are for [Contractor Quality Control approval.] [information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Shoring ; G[, [_____]]Dewatering Work Plan ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Utilization of Excavated Materials ; G[, [_____]]Rock ExcavationOpening of any Excavation or Borrow PitShoulder Construction

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing

Borrow Site Testing

Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, submit [_____] copies of test results, including calibration curves and results of calibration tests.

SD-07 Certificates

Testing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Check wi t h r egi onal and l ocal aut hor i t i es as wel l as t he act i v i t y t o det er mi ne act ual r equi r ement s of br acket ed i t ems; val ues shown come f r om t he Commonweal t h of Vi r gi ni a. Remove t hi s par agr aph i f not r equi r ed by t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Perform tests and verify threshold values in accordance with JAPAN Ministry of the Environment Notification No.46 guidelines and JEGS. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at least one test from each borrow site. Do not bring material onsite until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Del et e par agr aph i f t ape i s not r equi r ed i n t he pr oj ect . The use of a pl ast i c war ni ng t ape f or i dent i f i cat i on i s mandat or y f or bur i ed hazar dous ut i l i t i es such as el ect r i cal condui t , gas l i nes, f uel l i nes, hi gh pr essur e ni t r ogen, hi gh pr essur e wat er and st eam l i nes, domest i c sewage f or ce mai ns, i ndust r i al wast e f or ce mai ns and i ndust r i al sewer s car r y i ng hazar dous, expl osi ve, or t oxi c wast e. Coor di nat e col or codes wi t h ot her speci f i cat i on sect i ons and conf or m, i f possi bl e, t o l ocal pr act i ce f or i dent i f y i ng bur i ed ut i l i t i es.

**************************************************************************

Provide [polyethylene plastic] [and] [metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic] warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 75 mm minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red Electric

Yellow Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials

Orange Telephone and Other Communications

Blue Water Systems

Green Sewer Systems

White Steam Systems

Gray Compressed Air

2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping

Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.08 mm and a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa lengthwise, and 8.6 MPa crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping

Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.10 mm , and a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa lengthwise and 8.6 MPa crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 920 mm deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.



2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING

Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.

2.4 MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP

**************************************************************************NOTE: Make sur e t her e i s no dupl i cat i on of r i p- r ap r equi r ement s bet ween t hi s and ot her speci f i cat i on sect i ons. I n t hi s par agr aph r ef er t o st andar d speci f i cat i ons f or r i p- r ap i f l ocal speci f i cat i ons ar e sat i sf act or y and avai l abl e. Del et e t hi s par agr aph or subpar agr aphs not r equi r ed i n t he project.

**************************************************************************

Provide [Bedding material] [Grout] [Filter fabric] and rock conforming to [these requirements] [[_____] local Standard] for construction indicated.

2.4.1 Bedding Material

Provide bedding material consisting of sand, gravel, or crushed rock, well graded, [or poorly graded] with a maximum particle size of 50 mm . Compose material of tough, durable particles. Allow fines passing the 75 micrometers standard sieve with a plasticity index less than six.

2.4.2 Grout

Provide durable grout composed of cement, water, an air-entraining admixture, and sand mixed in proportions of one part portland cement to [two] [_____] parts of sand, sufficient water to produce a workable mixture, and an amount of admixture which will entrain sufficient air, as determined by the Contracting Officer. Mix grout in a concrete mixer. Allow a sufficient mixing time to produce a mixture having a consistency permitting gravity flow into the interstices of the rip-rap with limited spading and brooming.

2.4.3 Rock

**************************************************************************NOTE: Adj ust wei ght s i n br acket s t o f i t appl i cat i on. Take l ocal pr act i ce i nt o consi der at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide rock fragments sufficiently durable to ensure permanence in the structure and the environment in which it is to be used. Use rock fragments free from cracks, seams, and other defects that would increase the risk of deterioration from natural causes. Provide fragments sized so that no individual fragment exceeds a weight of [68] [_____] kg and that no more than 10 percent of the mixture, by weight, consists of fragments weighing 0.91 kg or less each. Provide rock with a minimum specific gravity of [2.50] [_____]. Do not permit the inclusion of more than trace [1 percent] [_____] quantities of dirt, sand, clay, and rock fines.

2.5 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or



without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below. Conform to JIS A 5005 for fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing JIS A 1103 , 75 micrometers sieve, [or] [ 37.5 mm and no more than 2 percent by weight passing the 4.75 mm size sieve] [or coarse aggregate with "S-x" designation (where x is the maximum nominal gravel size) in accordance with JIS A 5001 ].

PART 3 EXECUTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 31 11 00 CLEARI NG AND GRUBBI NG.

**************************************************************************

3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Topsoi l wi l l be separ at el y excavat ed, st or ed, and used f or sur f ace f i ni sh i n pr epar at i on f or seedi ng, soddi ng, or ot her pl ant i ng, onl y wher e t opsoi l i s def i ni t el y super i or f or gr ass and pl ant gr owt h as compar ed wi t h t he r emai nder of t he excavat ed mat er i al . Sur f ace soi l t hat i s a heavy cl ay, pr edomi nant l y sandy, or i s l ean i n gr ass- and pl ant - gr owt h qual i t i es, wi l l not be saved. The haul i ng, spr eadi ng, smoot hi ng, and mai nt enance of t he t opsoi l i n pr epar at i on f or t he seedi ng and pl ant i ng oper at i ons ar e gener al l y consi der ed under a separ at e sect i on, and t her ef or e ar e not consi der ed i n t hi s speci f i cat i on. The bl ank wi l l be f i l l ed wi t h t he appr opr i at e dept h di mensi on.

**************************************************************************

Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to a depth of [100] [_____] mm . Spread topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified. Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter, objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance operations. [Stockpile in locations indicated] [Remove from the site] any surplus of topsoil from excavations and gradings.

3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION

Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times.



Excavate material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as specified.

3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes

Finish excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on Drawing Sheet No. [_____]. Do not excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown. Backfill the excessive open ditch or gutter excavation with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown. Dispose excavated material as shown or as directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a maximum 1 meter from edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work.

3.2.2 Drainage Structures

**************************************************************************NOTE: The l ast t wo sent ences wi l l be r emoved except when pi l e f oundat i ons ar e t o be used.

**************************************************************************

Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or other hard foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or serrated surface. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed. Where pile foundations are to be used, stop the excavation of each pit at an elevation 300 mm above the base of the footing, as specified, before piles are driven. After the pile driving has been completed, remove loose and displaced material and complete excavation, leaving a smooth, solid, undisturbed surface to receive the concrete or masonry.

3.2.3 Drainage

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity [and] [or] provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed.



3.2.4 Dewatering

**************************************************************************NOTE: Check dept h of pr oposed ut i l i t i es and f oundat i ons r el at i ve t o t he exi st i ng gr ound wat er el evat i on pr i or t o edi t i ng.

**************************************************************************

Control groundwater flowing toward or into excavations to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. Do not permit French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches within 0.9 m of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Take control measures by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, maintain the water level continuously, at least [_____] m below the working level. [Operate dewatering system continuously until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Submit performance records weekly.] [Measure and record performance of dewatering system at same time each day by use of observation wells or piezometers installed in conjunction with the dewatering system.] [Relieve hydrostatic head in previous zones below subgrade elevation in layered soils to prevent uplift.]

3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements

**************************************************************************NOTE: The wi dt h of t he t r ench bel ow t he t op of t he pi pe wi l l depend on t he t ype of pi pe used and soi l condi t i ons. The pi pe manuf act ur er ' s i nst al l at i on manual shoul d pr ovi de t hi s i nf or mat i on, and i f so, i t wi l l be f ol l owed. I n gener al , t he wi dt h of t r ench wi l l be 300 mm t o 600 mm, pl us pi pe O. D. f or smal l er pi pe si zes, and 600 mm t o 900 mm pl us pi pe O. D. f or l ar ger pi pe si zes. Sl opi ng wal l s bel ow t he t op of t he pi pe ar e al l owed f or cer t ai n t ypes of pi pe i n speci al gr ound condi t i ons.

**************************************************************************

Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed installation manual is available. Shore trench walls more than [_____] meters high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in. Shore vertical trench walls more than [_____] meters high. Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of the soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 600 mm plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 600 mm inside diameter, and do not exceed 900 mm plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 600 mm inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures without any additional



cost to the Government.

3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation

**************************************************************************NOTE: St ones 75 mm or gr eat er shoul d be r emoved. However , pi pe manuf act ur er ' s cr i t er i a, i f any, shoul d be used.

**************************************************************************

Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of [_____] mm or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point bearing.

3.2.5.2 Removal of Unyielding Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mi ni mum of 100 mm shoul d be r emoved t o pr oduce a sui t abl e cushi on f or t he pi pe.

**************************************************************************

Where [overdepth is not indicated and] unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material [_____] mm below the required grade and replaced with suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.

3.2.5.3 Removal of Unstable Material

Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without additional cost to the Government.

3.2.5.4 Excavation for Appurtenances

Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures [sufficient to leave at least 300 mm clear between the outer structure surfaces and the face of the excavation or support members.] [of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown.] Clean rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.

3.2.5.5 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n s i t uat i ons wher e ut i l i t y l i nes must be i nst al l ed mor e t han 5 t o 7 met er s bel ow gr ound sur f ace, t hr ough embankment s, under mi nor r oads or



par ki ng ar eas, or wher e sur f ace condi t i ons make i t di f f i cul t or i mpr act i cal t o excavat e open t r enches, ut i l i t y l i nes may be i nst al l ed by j acki ng, bor i ng, or t unnel i ng as a Cont r act or opt i on. Wher e oper at i onal r equi r ement s pr ecl ude i nst al l at i on by t r enchi ng, t he use of j acki ng, bor i ng, or t unnel i ng shoul d be speci f i ed as mandat or y al t er nat i ves. Thi s r equi r ement wi l l nor mal l y exi st wher e ut i l i t i es must cr oss r ai l r oads, hi ghways, pr i mar y access r oads and ai r f i el d pavement s. Pi pe and condui t smal l er t han 900 mm ( 36 i nches) i n di amet er wi l l nor mal l y be i nst al l ed i n smoot h st eel pi pe casi ng. Desi gni ng engi neer s must coor di nat e wi t h i nst al l at i on f aci l i t y engi neer s t o i dent i f y and val i dat e ut i l i t y cr ossi ngs wher e j acki ng, bor i ng, or t unnel i ng wi l l be speci f i ed as mandat or y.

**************************************************************************

Unless otherwise indicated, provide excavation by open cut except that sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections.

3.2.6 Underground Utilities

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph i n i t s ent i r et y i f no known ut i l i t i es or subsur f ace const r uct i on i s l ocat ed bel ow or adj acent t o wor k cover ed i n t hi s specification.

**************************************************************************

The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. [Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company.] [Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within [600] [_____] mm of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer.] Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.

3.2.7 Structural Excavation

Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Excavate to bottom of pile cap prior to placing or driving piles, unless authorized otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Backfill and compact over excavations and changes in grade due to pile driving operations to 95 percent of JIS A 1210 maximum density.

3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e a subst ant i al quant i t y of bor r ow



excavat i on i s ant i c i pat ed, t he dr awi ngs and speci f i cat i ons wi l l i ndi cat e t he l ocat i on or l ocat i ons wi t hi n t he pr oj ect s i t e, and t he condi t i ons under whi ch bor r ow may be obt ai ned.

**************************************************************************

Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Obtain borrow material from the borrow areas [shown on Drawing Sheet No. [_____]] [within the limits of the project site, selected by the Contractor] [or] [from approved private sources]. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling from the owners. Borrow material from approved sources on Government-controlled land may be obtained without payment of royalties. Unless specifically provided, do not obtain borrow within the limits of the project site without prior written approval. Consider necessary clearing, grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of debris thereon related operations to the borrow excavation.

3.4 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS

**************************************************************************NOTE: The f i r st sent ence wi l l be del et ed when al l wor k cover ed by I nvi t at i on f or Bi ds i s t o be i ncl uded i n one l ump sum cont r act pr i ce.

**************************************************************************

Notify the Contracting Officer sufficiently in advance of the opening of any excavation or borrow pit or borrow areas to permit elevations and measurements of the undisturbed ground surface to be taken. Except as otherwise permitted, excavate borrow pits and other excavation areas providing adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed. Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits, or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental conditions.

3.5 SHORING


**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t hi s par agr aph when scope of wor k r equi r es excavat i ons whi ch ar e gr eat er t han 1. 5 m or wher e i t i s known t hat i n- s i t u soi l s l ack t he st abi l i t y t o hol d near ver t i cal f aces. Wher e suf f i c i ent r oom i s avai l abl e, t he Cont r act or may sl ope back t r ench wal l s r at her t han havi ng t o use a shor i ng syst em. However , t he Cont r act or shoul d not be gi ven t he oppor t uni t y t o s l ope t he f aces of excavat i ons i n l i eu of pr ovi di ng shor i ng unl ess al l t he f ol l owi ng condi t i ons ar e met :

1. The excavat i on i s l ess t han 6 m i n dept h.

2. Ther e ar e no adj acent st r uct ur es, r oads, or



pavement s t hat wi l l af f ect t he excavat i on.

3. No equi pment , st or ed mat er i al , or over l y i ng mat er i al wi l l af f ect t he excavat i on.

4. Vi br at i on f r om equi pment , t r af f i c , wi l l not af f ect t he excavat i on.

5. Ther e wi l l be no gr ound wat er pr obl ems.

6. Sur char ges wi l l not af f ect t he excavat i on.

7. St at i on oper at i onal consi der at i ons per mi t l ayi ng back t he sl opes of t he excavat i on.

**************************************************************************

Submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.

3.5.2 Geotechnical Engineer

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e si t e condi t i ons r equi r e ext ensi ve moni t or i ng of excavat i ons and wat er l evel s i ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************

Hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions. The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for updating the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect changing conditions and submit an updated plan if necessary. Submit a monthly written report, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any present or potential problems. The Contracting Officer is responsible for arranging meetings with the Geotechnical Engineer at any time throughout the contract duration.

3.6 GRADING AREAS

**************************************************************************NOTE: When spoi l ar eas or bor r ow ar eas ar e wi t hi n t he l i mi t s of Gover nment - cont r ol l ed l and, addi t i onal r equi r ement s based on t he f ol l owi ng, and as appr opr i at e f or t he pr oj ect , wi l l be i ncl uded i n t he cont r act document . Locat i ons of ar eas wi l l be i ndi cat ed, or t he appr oxi mat e di st ances f r om t he pr oj ect s i t e wi l l be speci f i ed. Gener al l y, unbur ned veget at i ve mat er i al and sur pl us excavat ed mat er i al wi l l be di sposed of i n i nconspi cuous spoi l ar eas wher e no f ut ur e const r uct i on i s pl anned. I f economi cal l y j ust i f i abl e, sur pl us sui t abl e excavat ed



mat er i al may be st ockpi l ed or may be di sposed of i n ar eas wher e f ut ur e const r uct i on i s pl anned and wher e f i l l wi l l be r equi r ed. Spoi l mat er i al s wi l l be so pl aced and t he wor ked por t i ons of spoi l ar eas and bor r ow ar eas wi l l be so gr aded and shaped as t o mi ni mi ze soi l er osi on, s i l t at i on of dr ai nage channel s, and damage t o exi st i ng veget at i on. The degr ee of compact i on wi l l be speci f i ed.

**************************************************************************

Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and grade stockpiles of satisfactory [and unsatisfactory] [and wasted materials] as specified. Keep stockpiles in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.

3.7 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE

Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed. [For pile foundations, stop the excavation at an elevation of from 150 to 300 mm above the bottom of the footing before driving piles. After pile driving has been completed, complete the remainder of the excavation to the elevations shown.] Only use excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid and unshattered condition. Roughen the level surfaces, and cut the sloped surfaces, as indicated, into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Protect shales from slaking and all surfaces from erosion resulting from ponding or water flow.

3.8 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION


Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 150 mm before the fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 150 mm , pulverizing, and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural ground portion to a depth of 300 mm and compact it as specified for the adjacent fill.

3.8.2 Frozen Material

Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Moisten material as necessary [to plus or minus [_____]



percent of optimum moisture] [to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used].

3.9 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f i cat i ons cover i ng excavat ed mat er i al s aut hor i zed t o be wast ed wi l l usual l y i ncl ude t he pr ovi s i on t hat t he sur f ace and si de sl opes f or med f r om such mat er i al be shaped and sl oped so as t o pr ovi de f or dr ai nage and f or l at er seedi ng and mowi ng oper at i ons.

**************************************************************************

Dispose unsatisfactory materials removing from excavations into designated waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar purposes. Submit procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material. Submit proposed source of borrow material . Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted, in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon. Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion. Do not dispose excavated material to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger a partly finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.

3.10 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE

3.10.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 300 mm below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 150 mm below top of subgrade.

3.10.2 Buried Detection Wire

Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 300 mm above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 0.9 m of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over it's entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

3.11 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: I t i s i mper at i ve t o speci f y a hi gh degr ee of compact i on i n f i l l s under st r uct ur es t o mi ni mi ze set t l ement and t o i nsur e st abi l i t y of a st r uct ur e.



I n addi t i on t o t he cr i t er i a set f or t h i n UFC 3- 220- 01, t he f ol l owi ng f act or s wi l l be consi der ed i n est abl i shi ng t he speci f i c r equi r ement s:

a. The sensi t i v i t y of t he st r uct ur e t o t ot al and/ or di f f er ent i al set t l ement as r el at ed t o t he st r uct ur al desi gn. Thi s i s par t i cul ar l y t r ue of st r uct ur es t o be f ounded par t l y on f i l l and par t l y on nat ur al ground.

b. The abi l i t y of nor mal compact i on equi pment t o pr oduce t he desi r ed densi t i es i n exi st i ng or l ocal l y avai l abl e mat er i al s wi t hi n a r easonabl e r ange of mol di ng moi st ur e cont ent . I f consi der ed essent i al , speci al equi pment wi l l be speci f i ed.

c. The compact i on r equi r ement s f or c l ean, cohesi onl ess, gr anul ar mat er i al s wi l l be gener al l y hi gher t han t hose f or cohesi ve mat er i al s because cohesi onl ess mat er i al s r eadi l y consol i dat e when subj ect ed t o v i br at i on. For st r uct ur es wi t h cr i t i cal st abi l i t y r equi r ement s and set t l ement l i mi t at i ons, t he mi ni mum densi t y r equi r ement s may be al t er ed. I f onl y a cohesi onl ess soi l or onl y a cohesi ve soi l i s used, t he i nappl i cabl e val ues wi l l be del et ed.

d. The except i on t o r equi r ed hi gh degr ee of compact i on i n f i l l s and backf i l l s i s i n expansi ve soi l s ( see UFC 3- 220- 01) . Wher e i t i s necessar y t o use mat er i al s havi ng swel l i ng char act er i st i cs, usual l y CL or CH cl assi f i cat i ons, t he speci f i ed degr ee of compact i on wi l l be r el at ed t o l abor at or y t est r esul t s f or swel l i ng under a consi der abl e r ange of mol di ng moi st ur e and compact i ve ef f or t . I n swel l i ng soi l s, i t i s i mpor t ant t o speci f y a densi t y and mol di ng moi st ur e r ange t hat wi l l enabl e t he soi l t o st ay st abl e, st r i k i ng a r easonabl e bal ance bet ween pot ent i al swel l and excessi ve set t l ement under l oad, even at t he expense of accept i ng a r educed bear i ng capaci t y. A maxi mum per mi ssi bl e densi t y shoul d be est abl i shed t o mi ni mi ze swel l i ng. I f possi bl e, soi l s wi t h swel l i ng char act er i st i cs wi l l be c l assi f i ed as unsat i sf act or y mat er i al , par t i cul ar l y under cr i t i cal st abi l i t y st r uct ur es.

e. JI S A 1210 ( C, D, E, non- r epeat i ng met hods) i s sat i sf act or y f or est abl i shi ng moi st ur e densi t y char act er i st i cs of a mat er i al i n most cases. The pr ocedur es and pr ecaut i ons i n t he subgr ade compact i on par agr aphs of DM 21. 3/ UFC 3- 260- 02, wi l l be consi der ed i n est abl i shi ng mi ni mum densi t y r equi r ement s f or a par t i cul ar pr oj ect .

Modi f i cat i ons wi l l be made t o meet t he backf i l l r equi r ement s f or deep- seat ed or subsur f ace st r uct ur es as di scussed i n UFC 3- 220- 04FA.

**************************************************************************



Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, in successive horizontal layers of loose materia not more than 200 mm in depth. Compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials in accordance with JIS A 1210 , to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.

Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.11.1 Trench Backfill

**************************************************************************NOTE: Most pr essur e t est s r equi r e backf i l l i ng t o at least 600 mm over t he pi pe wi t h t he j oi nt s and coupl i ngs l ef t open f or i nspect i on.

**************************************************************************

Backfill trenches to the grade shown. [Backfill the trench to [_____] meters above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. Leave the joints and couplings uncovered during the pressure test.] [Do not backfill the trench until all specified tests are performed.]

3.11.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material

Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with select granular material or initial backfill material.

3.11.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material

Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm loose thickness.

3.11.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill

**************************************************************************NOTE: Beddi ng i s pr ovi ded t o l evel out any i r r egul ar i t i es i n t he f oundat i on and t o assur e uni f or m suppor t al ong t he bar r el of each pi pe sect i on. Beddi ng i s al so const r uct ed t o di st r i but e t he l oad bear i ng r eact i on, due t o t he wei ght of t he backf i l l mat er i al , ar ound t he l ower por t i on of t he pi pe. I f t he pi pe or condui t i s pl aced di r ect l y on a f l at or shaped f oundat i on, del et e " beddi ng" f r om t he t i t l e and f r om any r ef er ence i n t he par agr aph. I f beddi ng wi l l be speci f i ed, det er mi ne t ype and t hi ckness and show on t he pl ans. Speci f y compact i on t o 90 per cent maxi mum densi t y f or cohesi onl ess soi l s, and 85 per cent maxi mum densi t y f or cohesi ve soils.

Any l ocal l y avai l abl e f i ne aggr egat e f or concr et e or asphal t mi xt ur es wi l l qual i f y as sand and may be



speci f i ed by l ocal gr adat i on and speci f i cat i on number . Dr awi ngs ( det ai l s) shoul d c l ear l y show wher e sand backf i l l or beddi ng i s r equi r ed.

Local l y avai l abl e coar se aggr egat e f or concr et e wi l l suf f i ce and may be speci f i ed by l ocal gr adat i on and speci f i cat i on number . Maxi mum si ze of aggr egat e shoul d not be mor e t han 25 mm per 300 mm of pi pe di amet er or 75 mm maxi mum. Ref er t o pi pe manuf act ur er ' s cr i t er i a f or mor e st r i ngent r equi r ement s, i f any, on aggr egat e s i ze and gr adat i on. On dr awi ngs ( det ai l s) , c l ear l y show wher e gr avel backf i l l or beddi ng i s r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

[Provide bedding of the type and thickness shown.] Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least 300 mm above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with as shown in design drawings , except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 9 0 percent of JIS A 1210 maximum density. Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:

3.11.1.3.1 Class I

Angular, 6 to 40 mm , graded stone, including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.

3.11.1.3.2 Class II

Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 40 mm , including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types G, G-M, G-C, S, S-M, S-C are included in this class as specified in JGS 0051 .

3.11.1.3.3 Sand

Clean, coarse-grained sand classified as [_____] in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL, [gradation [_____] of the [local Standard] or [S], [S-M], [S-C] by JGS 0051 for [bedding] [and] [backfill] [as indicated]].

3.11.1.3.4 Gravel and Crushed Stone

Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone or a combination thereof identified as [_____] in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL, [gradation [_____] of the [DOT] [State Standard]] or having a classification of [G], [G-M], [G-C] in accordance with JGS 0051 for [bedding] [and] [backfill] [as indicated]. [Do not exceed maximum particle size of [75] [_____] mm .]

3.11.1.4 Final Backfill

Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for roadways, railroads and airfields, with satisfactory material. Place



backfill material and compact as follows:

3.11.1.4.1 Roadways, Railroads, and Airfields

Place backfill up to the required elevation as specified. Do not permit water flooding or jetting methods of compaction.

3.11.1.4.2 Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas

Deposit backfill in layers of a maximum of 300 mm loose thickness, and compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. [Allow water flooding or jetting methods of compaction for granular noncohesive backfill material. Do not allow water jetting to penetrate the initial backfill.] [Do not permit compaction by water flooding or jetting.] Apply this requirement to all other areas not specifically designated above.

3.11.2 Backfill for Appurtenances

**************************************************************************NOTE: The number of days t he concr et e i s al l owed t o cur e bef or e backf i l l i ng t he st r uct ur e wi l l depend on t he t ype of mi x and t he concr et e st r engt h r equi r ement s speci f i ed. Thr ee days woul d be consi der ed as a mi ni mum.

**************************************************************************

After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been constructed [and the concrete has been allowed to cure for [_____] days], place backfill in such a manner that the structure is not be damaged by the shock of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified for final backfill, and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.

3.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows:

3.12.1 Gas Distribution

Excavate trenches to a depth that will provide a minimum 450 mm of cover in rock excavation and a minimum 600 mm of cover in other excavation.

3.12.2 Water Lines

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mi ni mum dept h of cover wi l l be t hat r equi r ed f or f r ost penet r at i on i n t he r egi on and f or saf e oper at i on of t he ut i l i t y . For f i r e pr ot ect i on yar d mains, coor di nat e wi t h t he pr oj ect ' s f i r e pr ot ect i on engineer.

**************************************************************************

Excavate trenches to a depth that provides a minimum cover of [_____] meters from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe. [For fire protection yard mains or piping, an additional [_____] mm of cover is required.]



3.12.3 Heat Distribution System

Free initial backfill material of stones larger than 6.3 mm in any dimension.

3.12.4 Electrical Distribution System

Provide a minimum cover of 600 mm from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.

3.12.5 Sewage Absorption Trenches or Pits

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hese par agr aphs when sewage absor pt i on t r enches or pi t s ar e not i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect . Consul t a geot echni cal engi neer and l ocal st andar ds i n sel ect i ng br acket ed i nf or mat i on.

**************************************************************************

3.12.5.1 Porous Fill

Provide backfill material consisting of clean crushed rock or gravel having a gradation [such that 100 percent passes the 50 mm sieve and zero percent passes the 12.5 mm sieve.] [conforming to the requirements of gradation [4.75 mm] [_____] for coarse aggregate in JIS A 5005 .]

3.12.5.2 Cover

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect appr opr i at e br acket ed i nf or mat i on t o cor r espond t o t he desi gn i ndi cat ed on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

[Filter fabric] [Concrete] [or a layer of straw at least 50 mm thick] as indicated.

3.12.6 Rip-Rap Construction

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect i nf or mat i on i n br acket s t o best descr i be r i p- r ap const r uct i on. Pr ovi de det ai l or t ypi cal sect i on t hr ough r i p- r ap on dr awi ngs as wel l as al l di mensi ons necessar y f or est i mat i ng and const r uct i on. I f DOT st andar d speci f i cat i ons ar e r ef er enced f or r i p- r ap const r uct i on, par agr aphs ent i t l ed " Pr epar at i on" t hr ough " Gr out i ng" may be deleted.

**************************************************************************

Construct rip-rap [on bedding material] [on filter fabric] [with grout] [in accordance with [_____] local Standard, paragraph [_____]] in the areas indicated. Trim and dress indicated areas to conform to cross sections, lines and grades shown within a tolerance of 30 mm .

3.12.6.1 Bedding Placement

Spread [filter fabric] bedding material uniformly to a thickness of at least [75] [_____] mm on prepared subgrade as indicated. [Compaction of bedding is not required. Finish bedding to present even surface free from



mounds and windrows.]

3.12.6.2 Stone Placement

Place rock for rip-rap on prepared bedding material to produce a well graded mass with the minimum practicable percentage of voids in conformance with lines and grades indicated. Distribute larger rock fragments, with dimensions extending the full depth of the rip-rap throughout the entire mass and eliminate "pockets" of small rock fragments. Rearrange individual pieces by mechanical equipment or by hand as necessary to obtain the distribution of fragment sizes specified above. [For grouted rip-rap, hand-place surface rock with open joints to facilitate grouting and do not fill smaller spaces between surface rock with finer material. Provide at least one "weep hole" through grouted rip-rap for every 4.65 square meters of finished surface. Provide weep holes with columns of bedding material, 100 mm in diameter, extending up to the rip-rap surface without grout.]

3.12.6.3 Grouting

[Prior to grouting, wet rip-rap surfaces. Grout rip-rap in successive longitudinal strips, approximately 3 m in width, commencing at the lowest strip and working up the slope. Distribute grout to place of final deposit and work into place between stones with brooms, spades, trowels, or vibrating equipment. Take precautions to prevent grout from penetrating bedding layer. Protect and cure surface for a minimum of 7 days.]

3.13 EMBANKMENTS

3.13.1 Earth Embankments

**************************************************************************NOTE: Moi st ur e cont ent l i mi t s f or compact i on shoul d be i ncl uded i n t hese par agr aphs when necessar y f or obt ai ni ng st r engt h and st abi l i t y i n embankment s and f i l l , f or cont r ol l i ng movement of expansi ve soi l s and when, i n t he opi ni on of t he pr oj ect geot echni cal engi neer , moi st ur e cont r ol i s r equi r ed f or t he soi l s bei ng used.

**************************************************************************

Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 75 mm . Place the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 200 mm in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed. After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise break up each layer; moisten or aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density in accordance with JIS A 1210 for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction , when required .

Compaction requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements are identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers,



pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.13.2 Rock Embankments

**************************************************************************NOTE: The desi gner wi l l det er mi ne t he appr opr i at e val ues f or al l bl ank spaces, except t he l ast one, on t he basi s of r ecent exper i ence on si mi l ar const r uct i on or of t est r esul t s obt ai ned f r om const r uct i on and t est i ng of a t est sect i on. The speci f i c met hod by whi ch densi t y wi l l be det er mi ned i n t he l abor at or y and measur ed i n t he f i el d wi l l be descr i bed i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on. The t ot al t hi ckness of t he pavement st r uct ur e, i ncl udi ng sel ect mat er i al subbase, base, and pavement wi l l be pl aced i n t he l ast bl ank space i n t hi s par agr aph.

The f i r st bl ank space appl i es t o r ock f i l l of smal l maxi mum di mensi on and maxi mum l i f t pl acement of 200 t o 250 mm. Coor di nat e maxi mum si ze wi t h sat i sf act or y mat er i al def i ni t i on. I f i t i s necessar y t o use l ar ger r ock and t hi cker l i f t s , t he second expr essi on i n br acket s i s appl i cabl e. When t hi cker l i f t s ar e used, i t may be necessar y t o speci f y a mi ni mum number of passes of t he compact or . Del et e l ast sent ence, unl ess t he r ock excavat i on i s engi neer ed t o be used under pavement s wi t h suf f i c i ent f i nes t o pr event consol i dat i on of t he embankment .

**************************************************************************

Construct rock embankments from material classified as rock excavation, as defined above, placed in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than [_____] mm in depth. Do not use pieces of rock larger than [_____] mm in the greatest dimension. Spread each layer of material uniformly, completely saturate, and compact to a minimum density of [_____] kg/cubic meter . Adequately bond each successive layer of material to the material on which it is placed. Finish compaction with vibratory compactors weighing at least [_____] metric tons , heavy rubber-tired rollers weighing at least [_____] metric tons , or steel-wheeled rollers weighing at least [_____] metric tons . [Do not use rock excavation as fill material for the construction of pavements.] [In embankments on which pavements are to be constructed, do not use rock above a point [_____] mm below the surface of the pavement.]

3.14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

3.14.1 Proof Rolling

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y pr oof r ol l i ng when t he qual i t y of t he exi st i ng subgr ade i s quest i onabl e. Pr oof r ol l i ng can be used t o ver i f y t hat no unsat i sf act or y mat er i al i s pr esent ( no bi d quant i t y r equi r ed, l ocat i on shown or speci f i ed) or t o l ocat e suspect ed unsat i sf act or y mat er i al ( i ndi cat e a bi d quant i t y t o be r emoved) . Remove t hi s par agr aph i f not r equi r ed i n t he pr oj ect .



**************************************************************************

Finish proof rolling on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. [After stripping,] proof roll the existing subgrade of the [_____] with six passes of a [dump truck loaded with 6 cubic meters of soil] [ 13.6 meter tons , pneumatic-tired roller.] Operate the [roller] [truck] in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 4 to 5.5 km/hour . [When proof rolling, provide one-half of the passes made with the roller in a direction perpendicular to the other passes.] Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Perform proof rolling in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Undercut rutting or pumping of material [as directed by the Contracting Officer] [to a depth of [_____] mm] and replace with [fill and backfill] [select] material. [Prepare bids based on replacing approximately [_____] square meters , with an average depth of [_____] mm at various locations.]

3.14.2 Construction

**************************************************************************NOTE: Moi st ur e cont ent l i mi t s f or compact i on shoul d be i ncl uded i n t hese par agr aphs when necessar y f or obt ai ni ng st r engt h and st abi l i t y i n embankment s and f i l l , f or cont r ol l i ng movement of expansi ve soi l s and when, i n t he opi ni on of t he pr oj ect geot echni cal engi neer , moi st ur e cont r ol i s r equi r ed f or t he soi l s bei ng used.

Speci al smoot hness t ol er ances ar e not r equi r ed f or subgr ades f or r ai l r oads; t her ef or e, bot h set s of br acket s wi l l be r emoved when wr i t i ng speci f i cat i ons f or pr epar at i on of r ai l r oad subgr ade onl y. When wr i t i ng speci f i cat i ons f or pr epar at i on of r oadway and/ or ai r f i el d pavement subgr ade, t he br acket s wi l l be r emoved f r om t he appl i cabl e sent ences and t he smoot hness t ol er ances showi ng per mi ssi bl e devi at i ons i n f r act i ons of a mi l l i met er and t he l engt h of st r ai ght edge i n met er s wi l l be i nser t ed i n t he bl anks as appr opr i at e.

**************************************************************************

Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered in the cut section to a depth of 150 mm below finished grade for the subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section and compact as specified. [After rolling, the surface of the subgrade for roadways shall not show deviations greater than 13 mm when tested with a 4 m straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area.] [After rolling, do not show deviations for the surface of the subgrade for airfields greater than [_____] mm when tested with a [_____] meter straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area.] Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade more than 15 mm from the established



grade and cross section.

3.14.3 Compaction

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use 90 per cent of JI S A 1210 f or Gener al Si t e Compact i on of cohesi onl ess mat er i al s on Ar my pr oj ect s and 85 per cent of same f or Navy pr oj ect s. For Ar my pr oj ect s see UFC 3- 220- 01, UFC 3- 260- 02 and DM 21. 3 f or cr i t er i a and desi gn gui del i nes. Speci f y compact i on i n t er ms of one compact i on ef f or t ( JI S A 1210).

**************************************************************************

Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. Except for paved areas and railroads, compact each layer of the embankment to at least [_____] percent of laboratory maximum density.

3.14.3.1 Subgrade for Railroads

Compact subgrade for railroads to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials in accordance with JIS A 1210 .

3.14.3.2 Subgrade for Pavements

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f t he compact i on r equi r ement s ar e not shown i n t abul ar f or m on t he dr awi ngs, and t he par agr aphs as wr i t t en ar e not adequat e, par agr aphs Subgr ade f or Pavement s and Subgr ade f or Shoul der s wi l l be r ewr i t t en as f ol l ows:

Subgr ade f or [ pavement s] [ and] [ shoul der s] shal l be compact ed t o at l east t he per cent age of l abor at or y maxi mum densi t y i n t he f ol l owi ng t abl e f or t he speci f i c dept hs bel ow t he sur f ace of t he [ pavement ] [ or ] [ shoul der s] shown.

Per cent age of Labor at or y Maxi mum Densi t y Requi r ed

Dept h Bel ow Pavement orShoul der Sur f ace ( mmInch )

Fill Cut

From To Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless Materials

Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless Materials

The desi r ed dept hs and densi t y per cent ages wi l l be ent er ed i n t he t abl e i n accor dance wi t h appl i cabl e dat a f r om t he f ol l owi ng manual s, as appr opr i at e:UFC 3- 250- 01 and UFC- 3- 260- 02.

**************************************************************************

Compact subgrade for pavements to at least [_____] percentage laboratory maximum density in accordance with JIS A 1210 for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more than one soil classification is



present in the subgrade, thoroughly blend, reshape, and compact the top [_____] mm of subgrade.

3.14.3.3 Subgrade for Shoulders

Compact subgrade for shoulders to at least [_____] percentage laboratory maximum density in accordance with JIS A 1210 for the [depth below the surface of shoulder shown] [full depth of the shoulder].

3.14.3.4 Subgrade for Airfield Pavements

Compact top 600 mm below finished pavement or top 300 mm of subgrades, whichever is greater, to [100] [_____] percent of JIS A 1210 ; compact fill and backfill material to [100] [_____] percent of JIS A 1210 .

3.15 SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Shoul der const r uct i on wi l l f or m a par t of t he wor k t o be per f or med under t hi s sect i on of t he speci f i cat i ons except when shoul der const r uct i on i s speci f i ed under t he subbase, base- cour se, wear i ng cour se, or pavement sect i ons of t he speci f i cat i ons and i s desi gnat ed i n t he cont r act t o be per f or med and pai d f or under one of t hese sect i ons.

**************************************************************************

Construct shoulders of satisfactory excavated or borrow material or as otherwise shown or specified.. Submit advanced notice on shoulder construction for rigid pavements. Construct shoulders immediately after adjacent paving is complete. In the case of rigid pavements, do not construct shoulders until permission of the Contracting Officer has been obtained. Compact the entire shoulder area to at least the percentage of maximum density as specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION above, for specific ranges of depth below the surface of the shoulder. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. Finish shoulder construction in proper sequence in such a manner that adjacent ditches will be drained effectively and that no damage of any kind is done to the adjacent completed pavement. Align the completed shoulders true to grade and shaped to drain in conformity with the cross section shown.

3.16 FINISHING

Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded areas within 30 mm of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required elevations and slopes.

3.16.1 Subgrade and Embankments

During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained.



Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base, surfacing, pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.

3.16.2 Capillary Water Barrier

**************************************************************************NOTE: The compact ed t hi ckness of capi l l ar y wat er bar r i er wi l l be i ndi cat ed and wi l l not be l ess t han 100 mm. The par agr aph wi l l be del et ed wher e si t e condi t i ons make t he bar r i er unnecessar y.

**************************************************************************

Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.

3.16.3 Grading Around Structures

Construct areas within 1.5 m outside of each building and structure line true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.

3.17 PLACING TOPSOIL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Topsoi l wi l l be separ at ed, excavat ed, st or ed, and used f or sur f ace f i ni sh i n pr epar at i on f or seedi ng, soddi ng, or ot her pl ant i ng onl y wher e t he t opsoi l i s def i ni t el y super i or f or gr ass and ot her pl ant gr owt h as compar ed t o t he bal ance of t he excavat ed mat er i al s. Gener al l y, t opsoi l wi l l be spr ead af t er ot her oper at i ons have been compl et ed. When t opsoi l spr eadi ng i s cover ed under a separ at e sect i on of t he speci f i cat i ons, t hi s par agr aph wi l l be del et ed.

**************************************************************************

On areas to receive topsoil, prepare the compacted subgrade soil to a 50 mm depth for bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly to a thickness of [_____] mm and grade to the elevations and slopes shown. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Obtain material required for topsoil in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from [offsite areas] [areas indicated].

3.18 TESTING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Densi t y t est s ot her t han t hose speci f i ed i n t hi s par agr aph may be r equi r ed f or cer t ai n t ypes of soi l , i n whi ch case par agr aph " Degr ee of Compact i on" wi l l be edi t ed accor di ngl y and t he l abor at or y compact i on r equi r ement appl i cabl e t o t he soi l encount er ed wi l l be speci f i ed. See UFC 3- 260- 02 f or



a di scussi on of condi t i ons r equi r i ng nonst andar d compact i on cont r ol t est s.

**************************************************************************

Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facility. Submit qualifications of the Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities. If the Contractor elects to establish testing facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved by the Contracting Officer.

a. Determine field in-place density in accordance with [ JIS A 1214 ][JGS 1614 ] . [When JGS 1614 is used, check the calibration curves and adjust using only the sand cone method as described in JIS A 1214 . results in a wet unit weight of soil in determining the moisture content of the soil when using this method. Since JGS 1614 uses equipment that contains radiactive materials, notify the Base BioEnvironmental and/or Environmental Office and the Contracting Officer if this method is used.

b. Check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges along with density calibration checks as described in JGS 1614 ; check the calibration of both the density and moisture gauges at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer.] When test results indicate, as determined by the Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified, remove the material, replace and recompact to meet specification requirements.

c. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil engineer to certify inspections and test results. These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.

3.18.1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation

One test per [_____] cubic meters stockpiled or in-place source material. Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with [JIS A 1102 ] [ JIS A 1103 ] .

3.18.2 In-Place Densities

**************************************************************************NOTE: Densi t y t est f r equency can var y f r om one t est per 10 squar e met er f or smal l ar eas up t o one t est per 900 squar e met er . The f ol l owi ng t abl e wi l l al so hel p est abl i sh t est f r equency f or var i ous s i t uat i ons:



Mat er i al Type Locat i on of Mat er i al Test Fr equency

Undi st ur bed nat i ve soi l Structures Two r andom t est s i n bui l di ng f oot i ngs and t wo t est s on subgr ade wi t hi n bui l di ng l i ne

Fi l l s and backf i l l s St r uct ur es ( adj acent t o) One t est per st r uct ur e per 200 sq m 2000 sq f t t aken 300 mm 1 f oot bel ow f i ni shed gr ade

Subgrades Si t e ( except ai r f i el ds) One t est per 250 sq m 2500 sq f t

Embankment s or bor r ow Any One t est per l i f t per 400 cubi c m 500 cubi c yds placed

Nat i ve soi l subgr ade ot her t han st r uct ur es and par ki ng

Any One t est or one t est per 900 sq m 10, 000 sq f t whi chever i s gr eat er

Borrow Any One t est per l i f t per 400 cubi c m 500 cubi c yds placed

**************************************************************************a. One test per [_____] square meters , or fraction thereof, of each lift

of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One test per [_____] square meters , or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

c. One test per [_____] linear meters , or fraction thereof, of each lift of embankment or backfill for [roads] [airfields].

d. One test per [_____] linear meters , or fraction thereof, of each lift of embankment or backfill for railroads.

3.18.3 Check Tests on In-Place Densities

If JGS 1614 is used, check in-place densities by JIS A 1214 as follows:

a. One check test per lift for each [_____] square meters , or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One check test per lift for each [_____] square meters , of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

c. One check test per lift for each [_____] linear meters , or fraction thereof, of embankment or backfill for [roads] [airfields].

d. One check test per lift for each [_____] linear meters , or fraction thereof, of embankment or backfill for railroads.

3.18.4 Moisture Contents

In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform tests as required, to meet compaction requirements, per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions. During unstable



weather, perform tests as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.18.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density

Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density values. One representative test per [_____] cubic meters of fill and backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.

3.18.6 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades

Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.

3.18.7 Displacement of Sewers

**************************************************************************NOTE: The t r ench shoul d be backf i l l ed t o at l east 600 mm.

**************************************************************************

After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill compacted to [[_____] , meters above the top of the pipe] [the finished grade surface], inspect the pipe to determine whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this inspection in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes larger than 900 mm , while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace or repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

3.19 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber [to a Government disposal area [as indicated][which is located within a haul distance of [_____] km ]][from Government property to an approved location ] [from Government property and delivered to a licensed/permitted facility or to a location approved by the Contracting Officer.].




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 31 62 13. 20 ( August 2009) Change 2 - 11/ 14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 31 62 13. 20 ( Apr i l 2006)



SECTION 31 62 13.20

PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES08/09


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or pr est r essed, pr et ensi oned pi l es.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHI CSGo t o http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: The ext ent and l ocat i on of t he wor k t o be accompl i shed shoul d be i ndi cat ed on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs or i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on.

**************************************************************************



**************************************************************************NOTE: The f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on shal l be shown on t he dr awi ngs:

1. Locat i ons and desi gn l oads of pi l es. I f bot h t ensi on and compr essi on pi l es ar e cont ai ned i n desi gn, i dent i f y by t ype.

2. Si ze, shape, and l engt h of pi l es.

3. Locat i ons, s i zes, and number of pr est r essi ng st eel st r ands. Uni t st r esses f or pr est r essi ng strands.

4. Det ai l s of r ei nf or cement .

5. Det ai l s of spl i ces, i f r equi r ed.

6. Locat i ons of t est pi l es, i f r equi r ed.

7. Soi l dat a, wher e r equi r ed.**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e. Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es. Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Not e t hat most of t he ASTM st andar ds l i s t ed i n t he Ref er ences sect i on of t he UFGS may not be appl i cabl e t o Japan pr oj ect s s i nce pi l es ar e t ypi cal l y manuf act ur ed l ocal l y. Pr ecast / Pr est r essed Concr et e pi l es shal l be manuf act ur ed i n accor dance wi t h JI S A 5373

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by



the basic designation only.


JIS A 1108 (2018) Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete

JIS A 1132 (2014) Method of Making and Curing Concrete Specimens

JIS A 5373 (2016) Precast Prestressed Concrete Products

JIS A 7201 (2009) Standard Practice for Execution of Spun Concrete Piles


JGS 1811 (2002) Method for Static Axial Compressive Load Test of Single Piles

JGS 1813 (2002) Method for Static Axial Tensile Load Test of Single Piles

JGS 1816 (2002) Method for Dynamic Load Test of Single Piles

JGS 1831 (2010) Method for Lateral Load Test of Piles

JAPAN MINISTRY OF THE ENVIRONMENT (MOE)

Notification No.46 (2001) Environmental Quality Standards for Soil Contamination

[ 1.2 LUMP SUM PAYMENT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph f or l ump- sum cont r act s, consul t wi t h Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s Techni cal Repr esent at i ve ( Geot echni cal Br anch) on appl i cabi l i t y of use pr i or t o sel ect i on. Thi s par agr aph wi l l be t ypi cal l y used when t her e ar e 1) r el at i vel y smal l quant i t y of pi l es, 2) al l owabl e pi l e l oadi ng i s l ess t han 40 t ons, and 3) t he subsur f ace condi t i ons ar e wel l def i ned. Fi l l i n Tabl e I as r equi r ed sel ect i ng col umns appl i cabl e t o pr oj ect . Gener al l y, pi l e capaci t y, l ocat i on, and mi ni mum t i p el evat i on ar e shown on pl ans. Test pi l es and l oad t est s ar e not i ncor por at ed on l ump sum cont r act s. Del et e t hi s par agr aph f or uni t - pr i ce contracts.

**************************************************************************

Base bids upon providing the number, size, capacity, and length of piles as indicated on the [drawings.] [following Table I:



Table 1

[Location] Number Size [Capacity] Length (tip to cut-off)

]

The contract price for piling shall include the cost of all necessary equipment, tools, material, labor, and supervision required to: deliver, handle, install, cut-off, dispose of any cut-offs, and meet the applicable contract requirements. The contract price also includes mobilization, pre-drilling, and redriving heaved piles. If, in redriving, it is found that any pile is not of sufficient length to provide the capacity specified, notify the Contracting Officer, who reserves the right to increase or decrease the total length of piles to be furnished and installed by changing the pile locations or elevations, requiring the installation of additional piles, or directing the omission of piles from the requirements shown and specified. Should total number of piles or number of each length vary from that specified as the basis for bidding, an adjustment in the contract price or time for completion, or both, will be made in accordance with the contract documents. Payment for piles will be based on successfully installing piles to both the minimum tip elevation and satisfying the acceptance criteria identified herein. No additional payment will be made for: damaged, rejected, or misplaced piles; withdrawn piles; any portion of a pile remaining above the cut-off elevation; backdriving; cutting off piles; splicing; build-ups; any cut-off length of piles; or other excesses beyond the assumed pile length indicated for which the Contractor is responsible.

1.2.1 Acceptance Criteria

Safe design capacity for piles is [_____] KiloNewtons (KN) . Piles shall be driven to a minimum depth of [_____] feet below cut-off elevation, and to such additional depth as required to obtain a bearing capacity of not less than [_____] KN.

The following formulas are presented only as a guide to aid in establishing the controlling penetration per blow, which, together with the minimum depth of penetration will serve to determine the required minimum depth of penetration of each individual pile:

**************************************************************************NOTE: THESE EQUATI ONS ARE NOT USED I N JAPAN. RATHER, THI S EQUATI ON I S USED PER JI S A 7201:

R = ( 2WH) / ( 5s pl us 0. 1)

Where: R - i s t he appr oxi mat e al l owabl e pi l e l oad i n KNW - i s t he wei ght of t he hammer i n KNH - i s t he hei ght of f al l of hammer i n mS - i s t he aver age of penet r at i on f or t he l ast t en bl ows i n m

**************************************************************************

R = (2WH) / (5s plus 0.1)

Where: R - is the approximate allowable pile load in KN



W - is the weight of the hammer in KNH - is the height of fall of hammer in mS - is the average of penetration for the last ten blows in m

][ 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph f or l ump- sum cont r act s.

For NAVFAC PAC pr oj ect s: Wher e t her e i s uni t pr i c i ng f or pi l es, use t hi s par agr aph and edi t appl i cabl e at t achment s f r om Sect i on 00 22 13. 00 20 SUPPLEMENTARY I NSTRUCTI ONS TO OFFERORS f or i ncl usi on i n St andar d For m 1442, " Sol i c i t at i on, Of f er and Awar d" and " Schedul e of Bi d I t ems. " Sel ect f i r st br acket ed t ext .

For NAVFAC Sout heast pr oj ect s, wher e t her e i s a need f or uni t pr i c i ng of pi l es, i ncl ude t hi s par agr aph. Ref er t o NAVFAC SE I nst r uct i on 00010, " I nst r uct i ons f or Pr epar i ng Basi s of Bi d St at ement Wi t h Uni t - Pr i ced I t ems, " f or met hod of speci f y i ng uni t pr i ce bi d i t ems. Sel ect f i r st br acket ed t ext .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s ent i r e sect i on shoul d be coor di nat ed wi t h t he Gover nment and/ or JED Cost Sect i on.

**************************************************************************

[ For unit price bid, see SF 1442, "Solicitation, Offer and Award" and "Schedule of Bid Items."] [Section 00 22 13.00 20 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: For NAVFAC LANT pr oj ect s, use t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph f or measur ement and payment and subsequent sub-parts.

**************************************************************************

Requirements of FAR 52.211-18 Variation in Estimated Quantity shall not apply to payment for piling. Each pile and test pile acceptably provided will be paid for at the bid unit price per unit length, which price shall include items incidental to furnishing and driving the piles including mobilization and demobilization,[ jetting][ predrilling][ probing], redriving uplifted piles, [an additional 1.5 m in furnished length for any test pile not driven beyond estimated pile length,] and cutting off piles at the cut-off elevation. [The cost for additional length for the test piles shall be included in the total unit price cost for the job.] Payment will be made for job [and test piles] at the bid unit price for the length of pile, from tip to final cut-off, actually provided, excluding buildups and splices directed by the Contracting Officer to be made. Should the actual cumulative pile length driven (tip to cut-off) vary more than 25 percent from the total pile length specified as a basis for bidding, at the direction of the Contracting Officer, the unit price per unit length will be adjusted in accordance with provisions of FAR 52.236-2 Differing Site Conditions.



1.3.1 Pile Cut-Off

Where the tip to cut-off length is less than that calculated from the results of test pile driving [and load testing], payment for that portion of pile not driven will be made at 75 percent of the bid unit price and no other payment will be made for making the cut-off.

1.3.2 Pile Build-ups

Payment for buildups will be made at 125 percent of the bid unit price.

1.3.3 Pile Splices

Payment for splices, as specified, will be made at 25 times the unit price per 300 mm bid for 250 mm piling, 22 times the unit price per 300 mm bid for 300 mm piling, and 18 times the unit price per 300 mm bid for all other piling.

1.3.4 Pulled Piles

Piles required to be pulled at no fault of the Contractor will be paid for at the bid unit price for furnishing and driving the pile in its original position plus 25 percent of the amount to cover the cost of pulling. Such pulled piles when redriven will be paid for at 25 percent of the bid unit price for the length driven.

[ 1.3.5 Pile Load Test

Payment for each acceptably provided complete test loading of a single pile will be made at the contract unit price per test, which price shall include furnishing, placing, and removing testing equipment, and placing and removing test loads. At the direction of the Contracting Officer, load tests may be waived at a credit to the Government of the unit price bid therefore.

] ][ 1.4 UNIT PRICES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph f or l ump- sum cont r act s.

I f Sect i on 01 22 00. 00 10 PRI CE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES i s i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons, t hi s par agr aph t i t l e ( UNI T PRI CES) shoul d be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on and t he r emai ni ng appr opr i at el y edi t ed subpar agr aphs bel ow shoul d be i nser t ed i nt o Sect i on 01 22 00. 00 10 PRI CE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: NOTE: Thi s ent i r e sect i on shoul d be coor di nat ed wi t h t he Gover nment and/ or JED Cost Section.

**************************************************************************



1.4.1 Furnishing and Delivering Prestressed Concrete Piles

1.4.1.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing and delivering the required lengths of permanent prestressed concrete piles, [including H-pile extensions,] which includes costs of furnishing and delivering piles to the work site. No payment will be made for the driving head or lengths of piles exceeding required lengths. No payment will be made for piles damaged during delivery, storage, or handling to the extent that they are rendered unsuitable for the work, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer.

1.4.1.2 Measurement

Furnishing and delivering permanent prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment by the linear meter of piles required below the cut-off elevation as [determined by the Contracting Officer and furnished to the Contractor] [indicated].

1.4.1.3 Unit of Measure

Unit of measure: linear meter .

1.4.2 Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles

1.4.2.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with driving permanent prestressed concrete piles, which includes costs of handling, driving, [and splicing of piles,] [performing dynamic testing, interpreting data and submitting reports,] measuring heave, redriving heaved piles, removal of [build-ups] driving heads or cutting off piles at the cut-off elevation and removing from the work site, compiling and submitting pile driving records, backfilling voids around piles, and any other items incidental to driving piles to the required elevation.

1.4.2.2 Measurement

Permanent prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment for driving on the basis of lengths, to the nearest hundredth of a linear meter , along the axis of each pile acceptably in place below the cut-off elevation shown.



1.4.3 Pulled Prestressed Concrete Piles

1.4.3.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with piles pulled at the direction of the Contracting Officer and found to be undamaged. The cost of furnishing and delivering pulled and undamaged piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Furnishing and Delivering Prestressed Concrete Piles". The cost of driving pulled and undamaged piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles". The cost of pulling



pulled and undamaged piles will be paid for at twice the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles", which includes backfilling any remaining void. The cost of redriving pulled and undamaged piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles". No payment will be made for furnishing, delivering, driving, pulling, and disposing of piles, including pile driving points, pulled and found to be damaged and backfilling voids. New piles replacing damaged piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment items "Furnishing and Delivering Prestressed Concrete Piles" and "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles".

1.4.3.2 Measurement

Furnishing and delivering pulled and undamaged permanent prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph FURNISH AND DELIVER PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES. Pulling undamaged prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES. Redriving pulled undamaged prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES. New piles replacing damaged piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraphs FURNISH AND DELIVER PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES and DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES.



1.4.4 [ Prestressed Concrete Pile Driving Tests ]

1.4.4.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing, delivering, driving, pulling, and disposing of driven test piles, [including [pile driving points] [and] [splices]]; conducting pile driving tests; backfilling voids around piles; compiling pile driving test records [; performing dynamic testing; interpreting data; and submitting reports].

1.4.4.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete pile driving tests will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per pile driving test.


Unit of measure: each.

1.4.5 [ Prestressed Concrete Piles for Load Tests ]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Tensi l e and Lat er al l oad t est s ar e ver y expensi ve and not common i n Japan f or r egul ar pr oj ect s. Compr essi ve ( st at i c) l oad t est can be per f or med but i s ver y expensi ve. However , Dynami c Test i ng may be used i n l i eu of compr essi ve t est s. Dynami c Test i ng i s abl e t o pr ovi de compr essi ve l oad capaci t i es. Typi cal l y bet ween 2% - 5% of pi l es



shoul d be t est ed dynami cal l y.**************************************************************************

1.4.5.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with furnishing, delivering, driving, pulling, and disposing of load test piles [including [pile driving points] [and] [splices]]; backfilling voids around piles; compiling pile driving records [; furnishing, fabricating, and mounting of strain rods and protective assembly] [; furnishing, fabricating, and mounting of inclinometer and inclinometer protective assembly] [; performing dynamic testing; interpreting data; and submitting reports]. No additional payment will be made for load test piles incorporated in the permanent work other than as provided.

1.4.5.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete piles for load tests will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per load test pile.



1.4.6 [ Prestressed Concrete Pile Compressive Load Tests ]

1.4.6.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with prestressed concrete pile compressive load tests, including material and labor for fabricating and furnishing load frames; calibrating load cells and hydraulic jacks; furnishing specified test equipment; installing strain rods; placing and removing test loads and test equipment; recording, reducing, and submitting test data; and compiling and submitting pile load test reports. No payment will be made for rejected pile compressive load tests.

1.4.6.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete pile compressive load tests will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per load test.



1.4.7 [ Prestressed Concrete Pile Tensile Load Tests ]

1.4.7.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with prestressed concrete pile tensile load tests, including material and labor for fabricating and furnishing load frames; calibrating load cells and hydraulic jacks; furnishing specified test equipment; installing strain rods; placing and removing test loads and test equipment; recording, reducing, and submitting test data; and compiling and submitting pile load test reports. No payment will be made for rejected pile tensile load tests.



1.4.7.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete pile tensile load tests will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per number of tensile load test.



1.4.8 [ Prestressed Concrete Pile Lateral Load Tests ]

1.4.8.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with prestressed concrete pile lateral load tests, including material and labor for fabricating and furnishing load frames; calibrating load cells and hydraulic jacks; furnishing specified test equipment; installing inclinometers; placing and removing test loads and test equipment; recording, reducing, and submitting test data; and compiling and submitting pile load test reports. No payment will be made for rejected pile lateral load tests.

1.4.8.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete pile lateral load tests will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per lateral load test.



1.4.9 [ Pulled Load Test Prestressed Concrete Piles ]

1.4.9.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with load test prestressed concrete piles pulled prior to load testing at the direction of the Contracting Officer and found to be undamaged. The cost of furnishing, delivering, driving, and pulling undamaged load test piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Prestressed Concrete Piles for Load Tests". The cost of pulling undamaged load test piles the second time after redriving and testing will be paid for at twice the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles". The cost of redriving pulled undamaged load test piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Driving Prestressed Concrete Piles". No payment will be made for furnishing, delivering, driving, pulling, and disposing of load test piles pulled at the direction of the Contracting Officer and found to be damaged. New load test piles replacing damaged piles will be paid for at the applicable contract unit price for payment item "Prestressed Concrete Piles for Load Tests".

1.4.9.2 Measurement

Pulled undamaged load test prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES FOR LOAD TESTS. Pulling undamaged load test prestressed concrete piles the second time after redriving and testing will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph



DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES. Redriving pulled undamaged prestressed concrete piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES. New load test prestressed concrete piles replacing damaged piles will be measured for payment as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraph PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES FOR LOAD TESTS.


Unit of measure: as specified in paragraph UNIT PRICES, subparagraphs DRIVING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES and PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES FOR LOAD TESTS, respectfully.

1.4.10 [ Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices ]

1.4.10.1 Payment

Payment will be made for costs associated with prestressed concrete pile splices, including all plant, labor, and material required to make the splice.

1.4.10.2 Measurement

Prestressed concrete pile splices will be measured for payment on the basis of the applicable contract unit price per pile splice.



] 1.5 PILE REQUIREMENTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e sent ence i n br acket s when t est pi l es ar e not r equi r ed. On l ar ge scal e Desi gn- Bi d- Bui l d pr oj ect s, t he Gover nment may st i l l r equi r e t he Cont r act or t o empl oy a Geot echni cal Consul t ant t o det er mi ne t he cal cul at ed t i p el evat i on and pr ovi de over si ght of pi l i ng i nst al l at i on and t est i ng.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I t i s our under st andi ng t hat t he " Pi l e Li st " wi l l be pr epar ed by t he Cont r act or .

**************************************************************************

Provide precast prestressed concrete piles per JIS A 5373 . Production of piles shall be in accordance with JIS A 5373 . The Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant will determine and list "calculated" tip elevations or driving resistance for each pile[ from test pile data]. This information will be given to the Contractor no later than 7 days from receipt of complete test data. Use this list as the basis for ordering the piles. Do not order piles until list is provided by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant . [Test piles shall be [1.5] [_____] meter longer than the bid length.]

1.6 SUBMITTALS

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Revi ew Submi t t al Descr i pt i on ( SD) def i ni t i ons i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES and edi t t he f ol l owi ng l i s t t o r ef l ect onl y t he submi t t al s r equi r ed f or t he pr oj ect .





**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Installation Procedures ; G[, [_____]]

[ Geotechnical Consultant Documentation ; G[, [_____]]

][ Wave Equation Analysis ; G[, [_____]]

] Order List ; G[, [_____]]



Precasting manufacturer's quality control procedures ; G[, [_____]]

**************************************************************************NOTE: I t i s our under st andi ng t hat Dynami c Pi l e Test i ng I nspect i on and Moni t or i ng of pi l es shoul d be conduct ed by t he cont r act or .

**************************************************************************

Provide instructions and procedures for the processes of Dynamic Pile Testing, Inspection and Monitoring of piles during installation and testing.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

**************************************************************************NOTE: When t he si ze and compl exi t y of pr oj ect war r ant s cer t i f i cat i on by a r egi st er ed engi neer , i nser t r equi r ement s; ot her wi se del et e.

**************************************************************************

Piles ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Pile Driving Equipment ; G[, [_____]]

Submit descriptions of pile driving equipment, including hammers, power packs, driving helmets, cap blocks, pile cushions, leads, extractors, jetting equipment, and preboring equipment at least 30 days prior to commencement of work.

SD-05 Design Data

Concrete mix design ; G[, [_____]]

Submit a concrete mix design before concrete is placed, for each type of concrete used for the piles.

Cement milk mix design ; G

SD-06 Test Reports

[ Silica Fume [; G][; G, [_____]]]

Concrete Compressive Strength ; G[, [_____]]

Cement milk Compressive Strength ; G

[ Test piles ; G[, [_____]] ]

[ Load tests ; G[, [_____]] ]

Submit concrete cylinder compressive strength test results. [Submit test pile records] [and] [load test data].

[ Dynamic Pile Analysis ; G[, [_____]]



Submit a summary report of dynamic test results for test piles within [7][_____] calendar days of completing field work. [For permanent piles, submit a field summary report within one (1) day of testing. Submit a typed report summarizing the results of dynamic testing of permanent piles on a monthly basis.] ]

SD-07 Certificates

Admixtures ; G[, [_____]]

[ Silica fume manufacturer's representative [; G][; G, [_____]]]

Prestressing steel ; G[, [_____]]

Cement; G[, [_____]]

[ Load Test Supporting Data ; G[, [_____]] ]


Pile records ; G[, [_____]]

Submit pile [and test pile] records.[ Submit load test data and results.]


1.7.1 Piles

Prepare in accordance with JIS A 5373 and JIS A 7201 . Indicate placement of reinforcement including tendons. Indicate location of special embedded or attached lifting devices, employment of pick-up points, support points other than pick-up points, and any other methods of pick-up. [Provide certification of a Professional Engineer registered in any jurisdiction of the U. S. or its territories or Japan , that layout and details of reinforcement and tendons conform with that shown on the structural design drawings.]

1.7.2 Quality Control Procedures

Submit the precasting manufacturer's quality control procedures and inspection records established in accordance with JIS A 5373 .

1.7.3 Installation Procedures

a. Submit information on the type of equipment proposed to be used, proposed methods of operation, pile driving plan including proposed sequence of driving, and details of all pile driving equipment and accessories.

[ b. Provide details of pile driving equipment and a Wave Equation Analysis of pile drivability for selection of the hammer along with a statement of driving procedures. The Wave Equation Analysis is to be completed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant for each test pile location where different subsurface conditions exist and is to include the following information pertaining to the proposed pile driving equipment:



(1) Complete Pile and Driving Equipment Data Form, (which can be downloaded at: http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf ) for each proposed pile hammer and pile type combination.

(2) Copies of computer input and output sheets and graphs showing soil resistance versus blow count as well as maximum tension and compression stresses versus blow count. Analysis shall be run at the estimated tip elevation as well as other required elevations to define maximum stress levels in the pile during driving.

c. Provide detailed procedures for conducting the dynamic pile load test and equipment to be used for conducting the load test. The detailed description shall explain how specific information of pile performance will be evaluated.

] [ 1.7.4 Geotechnical Consultant Documentation

The services of an independent, Registered Professional Geotechnical Engineer, experienced in soil mechanics and Pile Dynamic Analysis, shall be hired by the Contractor to observe test pile installation and job pile installation as specified herein. The Geotechnical Consultant shall be independent of the Contractor and shall have no employee of employer relationship which could constitute a conflict of interest.

] 1.7.5 Concrete Mix Design

Certify, using a Government-approved independent commercial testing laboratory, that proportioning of mix is in accordance with JIS A 5373 for specified strength and is based on aggregate data which has been determined by laboratory tests during last twelve months. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement , fly ash, pozzolan, ground slag, and admixtures ; and applicable reference specifications. Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate changes. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used when more than one mix design is submitted.

[ 1.7.6 Load Test Supporting Data

Submit Jack calibration records, a testing arrangement description and diagram, and the proposed loading sequence.

] 1.7.7 Silica Fume Manufacturer's Representative

Provide statement that the manufacturer's representative will be present at plant to ensure proper mix, including high range water reducer (HRWR), and batching methods.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Piles shall be stored, handled, and transported in accordance with JIS A 5373 except as follows. Methods used for handling and storage of piles shall be such that the piles are not subjected to excessive bending stress, cracking, spalling, or other damage.

1.8.1 Damaged Piles

The Contractor shall inspect each pile for sweep and structural damage such as cracking and spalling before transporting them to the project site



and immediately prior to placement in the driving leads. Any unusual cracks (cracks other than crazing, surface drying, shrinkage cracks and end cracks) shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer. Piles which are damaged during delivery, storage, or handling to the extent they are rendered unsuitable for the work, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be rejected and removed from the project site, or may be repaired, if approved, at no cost to the Government.

1.8.1.1 Repairable Cracks

Piles with cracks equal to or greater than 0.15 mm but less than 1.5 mm shall be rejected or repaired. As an alternate to pile rejection, the Contractor may submit a proposal to repair deficient piles, which shall be restored prior to driving to provide its required design capacity, perform its intended function in the structure, and take into consideration long term durability in corrosive environment.

1.8.1.2 Non-Repairable Cracks

Piles with cracks equal to or greater than 1.5 mm shall be rejected.

1.8.2 Pile Sweep

Sweep shall be limited to 3 mm per 3 M over the length of the pile. Piles having excessive sweep shall be rejected.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: The ent i r e Par t 2 shal l al so compl y wi t h JI S A 5373.

**************************************************************************

2.1 MATERIALS

Materials used for manufacturing precast/prestressed concrete piles shall comply with JIS A 5373 .

2.2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nser t t he mi ni mum 28 day compr essi ve st r engt h r equi r ed by t he desi gn. A mi ni mum of 80 MPa i s gener al l y r equi r ed. I nser t aggr egat e s i ze, either 19 mm or 25 mm i s gener al l y maxi mum. For mar i ne exposur e, ( or moder at e and sever e sul f at e exposur e) i ncl ude l ast br acket ed sent ence, whi ch l i mi t s t he wat er - cement r at i o t o a maxi mum of 0. 40.

****************************************************************************************************************************************************

NOTE: Ai r - ent r ai nment may be consi der ed opt i onal onl y i n r egi ons t hat do not exper i ence f r eezi ng temperatures.

**************************************************************************Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 80 MPa at 28 days and a maximum size aggregate of [_____] mm. Concrete shall be air entrained with a minimum of 4.5 percent and a maximum of 7.5 percent. Mix shall contain fly ash, ground iron blast furnace slag or silica fume to



meet the requirements specified herein to mitigate Alkali-Silica Reactivity (ASR).[ For marine exposure, ensure a dense concrete free of shrinkage cracks, with a minimum degree of permeability. The maximum water cement ratio shall be 0.40 .]

2.3 FABRICATION

2.3.1 Formwork

Formwork and dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with JIS A 5373 , and as specified herein. Provide forms of metal, braced and stiffened against deformation, accurately constructed, watertight, and supported on unyielding casting beds. Forms shall permit movement of pile without damage during release of prestressing force. Form precast dowel holes with galvanized flexible metal conduit. [Inside forms or void tubes not to be grouted may be treated cardboard, plywood, or other material.]

2.3.2 Pretensioning

Pretensioning shall be performed in accordance with JIS A 5373 , and as specified herein. Use gage calibrated within last 6 months by a laboratory approved by Contracting Officer. Provide means for measuring elongation of steel to nearest 3 mm . Give tensioning steel a uniform prestress prior to being brought to design prestress. Induce same initial prestress in each unit when several units of prestressing steel in a pile are stretched simultaneously.

2.3.3 Casting

2.3.3.1 Conveying

Convey concrete to formwork in accordance with JIS A 5373 , and as specified herein. Clean conveying equipment thoroughly before each run. During placing, make any free vertical drop of the concrete less than 0.91 m. Remove concrete which has segregated in conveying or placing.

2.3.3.2 Placing and Casting

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he s i ze of chamf er r equi r ed. Consul t wi t h l ocal pr oducer s. Wher e pr oj ect r equi r es a l ar ge quant i t y of pi l i ng a speci f i c val ue may be speci f i ed, ot her wi se, use a mi ni mum or a r ange of values.

**************************************************************************

Perform concrete casting within 3 days after pretensioning steel; however, do not deposit concrete in forms until placement of reinforcement and anchorages has been inspected and approved by pile manufacturer's quality control representative. Produce each pile of dense concrete straight with smooth surfaces with reinforcement retained in its proper position during fabrication. Use vibrator with heads smaller than the minimum distance between steel for pretensioning. Make surface of pile ends perpendicular to axis of pile. Chamfer, [a minimum of 19 mm ,] [ [_____] mm ,] [between 19 mm and 31 mm ,] ends of piles and corners of square piles.

2.3.4 Curing of Piles

Cure piles using moist or accelerated curing. Curing of piles shall be in



accordance with JIS A 5373 except as follows.

2.4 PRODUCT QUALITY CONTROL

Where piling is manufactured in a plant with an established quality control program as attested to by a current certification in the PCI "Certification Program for Quality Control" perform product quality control in accordance with JIS A 5373 . Where piling is manufactured by specialists or in plants not currently enrolled in the PCI "Certification Program for Quality Control," set-up a product quality control system in accordance with JIS A 5373 and perform concrete and aggregate quality control testing using an independent commercial testing laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer in accordance with the following.

2.4.1 Aggregate Tests

Aggregate tests shall comply with JIS A 5373 .

2.4.2 Slump and Strength Tests

Slump and compressive strength tests shall comply with JIS A 5373 .

2.4.3 Changes in Proportions

If, after evaluation of strength test results, compressive strength is less than specified compressive strength, make adjustments in proportions and water content and changes in temperature, moisture, and curing procedures as necessary to secure specified strength. Submit changes in mix design to Contracting Officer in writing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PILE DRIVING EQUIPMENT

3.1.1 Pile Hammers

Furnish a hammer capable of developing the indicated ultimate pile capacity considering hammer impact velocity; ram weight; stiffness of hammer and pile cushions; cross section, length, and total weight of pile; and character of subsurface material to be encountered. [Use the same pile hammer, operating at the same rate and in the same manner, as that used for driving test piles.] Obtain required driving energy of hammer, except for diesel hammers, by use of a heavy ram and a short stroke with low impact velocity. At final driving, operate pile hammer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for driving either end bearing piles or friction piles. At final driving, operate diesel powered hammers at rate recommended by manufacturer for hard driving. Maintain pressure at steam or air hammer so that: (1) for double-acting hammer, the number of blows per minute during and at completion of driving of a pile is equal approximately to that at which hammer is rated; (2) for single-acting hammer, there is a full upward stroke of the ram; and (3) for differential type hammer, there is a slight rise of hammer base during each upward stroke.

3.1.2 Driving Helmets and Cushion Blocks

3.1.2.1 Driving Helmets or Caps and Pile Cushions

Use a steel driving helmet or cap including a pile cushion between top of



pile and driving helmet or cap to prevent impact damage to pile. Use a driving helmet or cap and pile cushion combination capable of protecting pile head, minimizing energy absorption and dissipation, and transmitting hammer energy uniformly over top of pile. Provide driving helmet or cap that fits sufficiently loose around top of pile so that pile may be free to rotate without binding within driving helmet. [During test pile installation, demonstrate to satisfaction of Contracting Officer that equipment to be used on project performs specified function.] Use pile cushion of solid wood or of laminated construction using plywood, softwood or hardwood boards with grain parallel to end of pile. Provide pile cushion with thickness of [_____] [75] mm minimum and the thickness shall be increased so as to be suitable for the size and length of pile, character of the sub-surface material to be encountered, hammer characteristics, and the required driving resistance. Replace pile cushion at the start of driving of each pile and when it becomes highly compressed, charred or burned, or has become spongy or deteriorated in any manner. Show details of driving helmets, capblocks, and pile cushions. Submit 2 weeks prior to [test] pile installation.

3.1.2.2 Hammer Cushion or Capblock

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect ei t her wood or al umi num/ mi car t a capbl ock. Del et e i nappr opr i at e sent ences. An al umi num/ mi car t a capbl ock i s r ecommended because of i t s consi st ent el ast i c pr oper t i es and l ong l i f e. I f f i nal pi l e penet r at i on r esi st ance i s based on a Wave Equat i on anal ysi s, t he t ype capbl ock used shoul d be t he same as t hat used i n t he anal ysi s.

**************************************************************************

Use a hammer cushion or capblock between driving helmet or cap and hammer ram consisting of [a solid hardwood block with grain parallel to the pile axis and enclosed in a close-fitting steel housing] [aluminum and micarta (or equal) discs stacked alternately in a steel housing or a suitable polymer designed for this specific purpose as indicated by the hammer manufacturer]. Use steel plates at top and bottom of capblock. [Replace wood capblock when it becomes highly compressed, charred or burned or becomes spongy or deteriorated in any manner]. [Replace aluminum, micarta or polymer discs that have become damaged, split or deteriorated in any manner]. [Do not replace wood capblock during final driving of any pile.] Do not use small wood blocks, wood chips, rope or other materials that permit excessive loss of hammer energy.

3.2 PRELIMINARY WORK

[ 3.2.1 Wave Equation Analysis of Pile Drivability

a. Prior to driving any pile, the Contractor shall submit a pile Wave Equation Analysis, performed by his Geotechnical Consultant, for each size pile and distinct subsurface profile condition. These analyses shall take into account the proposed hammer assembly, pile cap block and cushion characteristics, the pile properties and estimated lengths and the soil properties anticipated to be encountered throughout the installed pile length based on static capacity analysis with consideration of driving gain/loss factors. Only one specific model of pile hammer may be used for each pile type and capacity.

b. The Wave Equation Analysis shall demonstrate that the piles will not



be damaged during driving, shall indicate that the driving stresses will be maintained within the limits below and indicate the blow count necessary to achieve the required ultimate static pile capacities.

Al l owabl e Dr i v i ng St r esses

Steel Piles Compression - 0.9 fy (MPa) Tension - 0.9 fy (MPa)

Where fy is yield strength of steel

Concrete

Compression - 0.85f'c minus UPL (MPa) Tension - ( 0.25 times (the square root of f'c)) plus UPL (MPa)

f'c is compressive strength of concrete (MPa) UPL = Unit Prestress after Losses (MPa) (Obtain values from pile manufacturer)

c. Upon completion of the dynamic and static testing programs outlined in this specification section, a refined Wave Equation Analysis shall be performed taking into consideration the evaluated capacities, gain/loss factors and recommended production pile lengths. Production pile driving criteria shall be developed based on the results of the refined Wave Equation Evaluations.

d. All pile driving equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant. Complete the attached pile and driving equipment data form, including hammer information, in full as part of the submittal of the results of the Wave Equation Analyses.

e. The cost of performing the Wave Equation Analyses shall be paid for by the Contractor and included in the base bid.

] 3.2.2 Order List

The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for approval, an itemized list for piles prior to placing the order with the supplier. The list shall indicate the pile lengths required at each location as shown on the plans and the corresponding ordered length of each pile.[ Load testing and refined wave equation analysis shall be completed prior to submission of an order list.]

3.2.3 Pile Length Markings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Mar ks and number s ar e t ypi cal l y done at 1 met er i nt er val s.

**************************************************************************

The Contractor shall mark each pile prior to driving with horizontal lines at 1 m intervals, and the number of feet from pile tip at 1 m intervals.



3.3 PILE DRIVING

3.3.1 Driving Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e br acket ed opt i on f or f oundat i on excavat i on when not r equi r ed. Del et e i t ems i n br acket s deal i ng wi t h t i p el evat i on and dr i v i ng r esi st ance when t est pi l es or l oad t est s ar e not used. Del et e i t em i n br acket s r egar di ng pr edr i l l i ng or j et t i ng when pr ocedur e i s not used. I f needed, i nser t maxi mum hammer ener gy f or no t i p r esi st ance. Thi s can be det er mi ned by compar i ng t ensi l e st r esses i n pi l e r esul t i ng f r om a Wave Equat i on Anal ysi s wi t h ef f ect i ve pr est r ess i n pi l e.

**************************************************************************

Notify Contracting Officer 10 days prior to driving of [test] piles [and load test]. [Foundation excavation shall be stopped at 300 mm above foundation grade before piles are driven. When pile driving is completed, excavation shall be completed to lines and grade shown. ]Piles may be driven when the specified 28-day concrete strength has been achieved but not less than 7 days after casting. Drive piles to [or below "calculated"] [indicated] tip elevation [to reach a driving resistance established by the wave equation analyses (WEAP) in accordance with the schedule which the Government Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant will prepare from the test-pile driving data]. During initial driving and until pile tip has penetrated beyond layers of very soft soil [or below bottom of predrilled or prejetted holes], use a reduced driving energy of the hammer as required to prevent pile damage. Refusal criteria shall be established by the Contracting Officer. If a pile fails to reach ["calculated"] [indicated] tip elevation, [or if a pile reaches ["calculated"] tip elevation without reaching required driving resistance,] notify Contracting Officer and perform corrective measures as directed. Provide hearing protection when noise levels exceed 140 dB. Piles or pile sections shall not be handled or moved in any manner that would result in cracking or permanent damage to the concrete or to the grout surrounding the prestressing cables. Piles may be driven without pile guides or leads providing a hammer guide frame is used to keep the pile and hammer in alignment.

3.3.2 Protection of Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e r ef er ences t o bat t er pi l es when not appl i cabl e t o t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Take care to avoid damage to piles during handling, placing pile in leads, and during pile driving operations. Support piles laterally during driving, but allow rotation in leads. [Where pile or projecting reinforcement orientation is essential, take precautionary measures to maintain the orientation during driving. ][Take special care in supporting battered piles to prevent excessive bending stresses in pile.] Square top of pile to longitudinal axis of pile. Maintain axial alignment of pile hammer with that of the pile. If the Contractor elects to use a pile head with projecting strands or mild steel reinforcement, prevent direct impact forces from being transmitted through the reinforcement, by using a special driving head.



3.3.3 Tolerances in Driving

**************************************************************************NOTE: Omi t r ef er ences t o bat t er pi l es when not appl i cabl e t o t he pr oj ect . Sel ect appr opr i at e t ol er ances f or t ype of pi l e.

**************************************************************************

Drive piles with a variation of not more than 2 percent from vertical for plumb piles or more than 4 percent from required angle for batter piles. Maintain and check axial alignment of pile and leads at all times. If subsurface conditions cause pile drifting beyond allowable axial alignment tolerance, notify Contracting Officer and perform corrective measures as directed. Place butts within 100 mm of location indicated. [Manipulation of piles within specified tolerances [will not be permitted.][will be permitted, to a maximum of 1 1/2-percent of their exposed length above ground surface or mudline.]] In addition to specified tolerances, maintain a location to provide a clear distance of at least 125 mm from butt to edge of pile cap. If clear distance can not be maintained, then notify Contracting Officer. Check each pile for heave. Redrive heaved piles to required point elevation.

3.3.4 Rejected Piles

Piles damaged or impaired for use during handling or driving, mislocated, or driven out of alignment beyond the maximum tolerance shall be withdrawn and replaced by new piles or shall be cut-off and abandoned and new piles driven as directed. Excess cut-off from piles and unacceptable piles shall be removed from the work site. All work in connection with withdrawing and removing rejected piles from the site shall be done at no additional cost to the Government.

3.3.5 Jetting of Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Jet t i ng shoul d gener al l y not be per mi t t ed f or piles:

1. Dependent on si de f r i ct i on i n f i ne- gr ai ned l ow per meabi l i t y soi l s ( hi gh cl ay or s i l t cont ent ) wher e consi der abl e t i me i s r equi r ed f or t he soi l t o r econsol i dat e ar ound t he pi l es.

2. Subj ect t o upl i f t or l at er al f or ces.

3. Adj acent t o exi st i ng st r uct ur es.

4. I n c l osel y spaced cl ust er s unl ess t he l oad capaci t y i s conf i r med by t est .

**************************************************************************

Water jets will[ not] be permitted.[ Jetting [may] [shall] be used to assist driving piles through strata that cannot be penetrated practicably by use of the hammer alone. [Driving shall be restricted to a static weight while water is being injected to prevent inducing tensile stresses in the piles which damage the concrete.] After the penetration of the strata requiring jetting has been accomplished, jetting shall be discontinued and hammer driving shall be resumed.][ Discontinue jetting



when the pile tip is approximately 1.5 m above the [calculated] [indicated] pile tip elevation. Drive pile the final 1.5 m of penetration.][Adequate measures shall be taken for collecting and disposing of runoff water.][ Jetting method and equipment shall be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to commencing jetting operation.] Before starting final driving, firmly seat piles in place by application of a number of reduced energy hammer blows.[Measures, including use of a silt curtain, shall be employed to contain turbid water created by jetting piles.]

3.3.6 Predrilling of Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr edr i l l i ng shoul d gener al l y not be per mi t t ed f or pi l es:

1. Dependent on si de f r i ct i on i n f i ne- gr ai ned l ow per meabi l i t y soi l s ( hi gh cl ay or s i l t cont ent ) wher e consi der abl e t i me i s r equi r ed f or t he soi l t o r econsol i dat e ar ound t he pi l es.

2. Subj ect t o upl i f t or l at er al f or ces.

3. Locat ed i n cohesi onl ess soi l s.

4. I n c l osel y spaced cl ust er s unl ess t he l oad capaci t y i s conf i r med by t est .

**************************************************************************

Predrilling to remove soil or other material representing the bulk of the volume of the pile to be driven[ will[ not] be permitted][ shall be provided]. [The diameter of the hole should not exceed two-thirds the width of the pile.][Predrill only to a depth of [_____] meters below cut-off elevation prior to setting piles.][Discontinue drilling when the pile tip is approximately 1.5 m above the [calculated] [indicated] pile tip elevation. Drive pile the final 1.5 m of penetration.]

3.3.7 Splices

**************************************************************************NOTE: Spl i c i ng of pi l es nor mal l y shoul d not be per mi t t ed except wher e ext r emel y l ong or heavy pi l es ar e r equi r ed. I f spl i ces ar e per mi t t ed, dr awi ngs shoul d i ndi cat e spl i ce det ai l s. ( See PCI st andar d dr awi ngs f or t ypi cal spl i ce det ai l s) .

**************************************************************************

[ Splicing of piles is not permitted.] [Make splices as indicated. Splices shall be capable of developing the full strength of the member in compression, tension, shear, and bending. Detail drawings of splices and design calculations demonstrating the strength of the splice shall be submitted for approval.

] 3.3.8 Build-Ups

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nser t compr essi ve st r engt h r equi r ed by desi gn, usual l y a mi ni mum of 80 MPa. I nser t maxi mum per cent of bui l d- ups per mi t t ed f or pr oj ect . The



per cent wi l l depend on cr i t i cal i t y of pi l e f ai l ur e at bui l d- up; whet her t he t op of t he pi l e i s desi gned as a moment connect i on; exposur e of pi l es t o ext er nal physi cal or cor r osi ve damage. Nor mal l y, f or pi l es suppor t i ng pi er s exposed t o seawat er , l i mi t per cent age of bui l d- ups t o 10 per cent .

**************************************************************************

Where required, pile section may be extended to cut-off elevation by means of a cast-in-place reinforced concrete build-up or by adding a new pile segment with same properties of the below pile . Make build-up in accordance with JIS A 5373 . Construct build-ups made after completion of driving in accordance with detail, "Build-Up Without Driving." Make build-ups to be driven in accordance with detail "Build-Up With Driving." Have details of means for protecting joints by a suitable mortar or epoxy approved by Contracting Officer. Where build-ups are exposed to water, protect cast-in-place section from water during curing period. Concrete in build-up shall have a minimum compressive strength of [_____] MPa. Build-ups will not be permitted on more than [_____] percent of total number of piles. If this percent figure is exceeded, or if in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the clustered location of build-ups is undesirable, withdraw piles of insufficient length and replace with longer piles. Payment for such withdrawal and replacement will be made as an adjustment to the contract price.

3.3.9 Pile Cut-Off

Cut-off piles with a smooth level cut using pneumatic tools, sawing, or other suitable methods approved by Contracting Officer. Use of explosives for cutting is not permitted. Cut-off sections of piles shall be removed from the site upon completion of the work.


3.4.1 Test Piles

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he second br acket ed opt i on when soi l condi t i ons di ct at e t he use of a t est pi l e l onger t han j ob pi l es. The or der ed pi l e l engt h f or t est pi l es shoul d be 1. 5 m l onger t han or der ed l engt h f or j ob pi l es t o al l ow addi t i onal penet r at i on i f dr i v i ng condi t i ons di ct at e. I ndi cat e l ocat i on and number ( i f r equi r ed) of t est pi l es on pl ans , or l i s t appr opr i at e soi l bor i ng t est hol e number s.

**************************************************************************

[ Use test piles of type, and drive as specified for piling elsewhere in this section. ][Order test piles [_____] meters longer in length than production piles. The additional test pile length shall be driven only at the direction of the Contracting Officer. ]The Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant will use test pile data to determine "calculated" pile tip elevation or necessary driving resistance. Drive test piles [at the locations indicated] [in vicinity of soil boring test holes Nos. [_____,] [_____,] and [_____]]. Drive test piles to [indicated tip elevation] [indicated bidding lengths]. Use test piles, if located properly and offering adequate driving resistance in finished work. [Pre-drilling or



jetting is permitted only when test piles clearly establish validity of its use, or as directed by the Contracting Officer. ][A pile dynamic analyzer shall be provided and operated as specified in paragraph DYNAMIC PILE ANALYSIS during the driving of each test pile. Modify driving as required based upon recommendation of Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant and approval of the Contracting Officer.

] [ 3.4.2 Dynamic Pile Analysis

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on may be del et ed i f Dynami c Pi l e Test i ng wi l l not be per f or med

**************************************************************************

The purpose of dynamic testing is to provide supplemental information for evaluating pile hammer performance, driving stresses, and bearing capacities. Dynamic testing shall be conducted during the entire time piles are initially driven or redriven and during pile restrike testing. Use test piles of type as specified elsewhere in this section. Equipment to obtain dynamic measurements, record, reduce and display its data shall be furnished and meet the requirement of JGS 1816 . The equipment shall have been calibrated within 12 months thereafter throughout the contract duration. Drive test piles at the locations indicated. The contractor shall employ an independent inspection firm, hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant", experienced in the pile driving process, monitoring of test pile installation, and in the use of the Pile Driving Analyzer and its related equipment. Dynamic pile analysis shall be performed as follows:

a. Each dynamic pile analysis shall be performed in two steps. The first step is to check the hammer, pile and soil performance, and to determine the suitability of the proposed hammer for the size, length and type of pile being installed for the soil types encountered as the piles are driven. This initial monitoring shall determine whether pre-augering or jetting is appropriate, efficiency of the hammer relative to specified efficiency, effectiveness of cushion, level of compressive and tensile stress in pile and extent/location of any pile damage caused by the initial driving. With each blow of the pile the information listed below shall be electronically recorded and analyzed by the Pile Driving Analyzer:

(1) Blow number

(2) Blow rate per minute and/or stroke.

(3) Input and reflected values of force and velocity.

(4) Value of upward and downward traveling force wave with time.

(5) Maximum and final transferred energy to pile, hammer system efficiency.

(6) Maximum compressive stress, velocity, acceleration and displacement.

(7) Maximum tensile stress in pile.

(8) Pile structural integrity, damage detection, extent and location.



(9) Bearing capacity of pile by Case method.

If the pile, hammer and soil performance evaluation recommends changes to the hammer stroke, pile cushioning, augering or any other aspect for the pile driving operation these changes shall be incorporated into production pile driving in an effort to control excessive stresses and pile damage. Test piles damaged or broken during installation shall be replaced, incorporating driving modifications as determined by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant and reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer. This procedure shall be repeated until allowable tensile and compressive stresses are achieved in the pile and/or pile damage is minimized. Selected initial driving records shall be subjected to rigorous computer analysis based on the Case Method for determination of resistance distribution, soil resistance and properties, and estimation of anticipated gain/loss factors.

b. Upon completion of test pile driving the piles shall be allowed to set-up for at least 72 hours. After evaluation of pile, hammer and soil performance by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant, the second step of the dynamic pile analysis may proceed. This portion of the evaluation requires striking the set-up piles a minimum of 20-50 times, or as directed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant using the same hammer which was used for the test pile driving and which will be used for production pile driving. The hammer shall be "warmed up" and in optimal readiness prior to restriking, in order to avoid capacity losses during evaluation of restrike data. Maximum hammer energy shall be applied during restrike in order to fully mobilize the soil resistance. However, care should be exercised as to not overstress the pile. In addition to those items listed above, selected restrike driving records (as directed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant are to be subjected to rigorous computer analysis based on the Case method for determination of resistance distribution, soil resistance and properties, and plot of applied load vs. average pile displacement based on the calculated soil properties.

c. Performance Report:

(1) Upon satisfactory completion of each dynamic load test a minimum of three copies of a Pile Performance Report shall be submitted for the Contractor by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant. The submittal shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in any jurisdiction of the U.S. or its territories or Japan and shall be made within three working days of the completion of the dynamic load test.

(2) The report for the Dynamic Pile Analysis shall contain the following information:

(a) Bearing capacity of pile. Information resulting from analysis of a selected restrike blow.

(b) Maximum and final transferred energy, hammer system efficiency during pile installation.

(c) Maximum compressive stress, velocity, acceleration and displacement.



(d) Maximum tensile stress in pile.

(e) Pile structural integrity, damage detection, extent and location.

(f) Blows per minute and blow number.

(g) Input and reflection values of force and velocity, upward and downward traveling force wave with time.

(h) Pile skin friction and toe resistance distribution.

(i) Maximum energy transferred to pile.

(3) The maximum allowable pile design load will be proposed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant based upon the results of a satisfactory pile load test conducted on a pile driven as specified herein and shall include the effects of load transfer to the soil above the foundation stratum.

d. The equipment to be used for dynamic testing of the pile hammer and soil performance and for dynamic load testing of the test pile shall meet the requirements of JGS 1816 .

e. All services of the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant shall be paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant shall be available throughout the pile driving operation to consult with the Contracting Officer when required by the Contracting Officer. The cost of changes in the Contractor's procedure, as required by evaluation of the results of the Pile Driving Analysis, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

] 3.4.3 Static Load Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on may be del et ed i f St at i c Load Test i ng wi l l not be per f or med.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f pi l e l oad t est s ar e r equi r ed and appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , speci f y number and l ocat i on of pi l es. Sel ect appr opr i at e accept ance criteria.

**************************************************************************

Perform compressive load tests on [_____] test piles in accordance with JGS 1811 as modified herein. [Allow a minimum of 72 hours following final test pile driving for pile set-up prior to load testing. ][Do not use anchor piles.] Provide apparatus for applying vertical loads as required by method, using load from weighted box or platform [or reaction frame attached to sufficient uplift piles to safely take required load] applied to pile by hydraulic jack. Increase load in increments until rapid progressive settlement takes place or until application of total compressive load of [_____] metric tons for compressive load tests . Consider load test satisfactory when [after one hour at full test load gross settlement of pile butt is not greater than gross elastic pile compression plus 4 mm plus one percent of pile tip diameter or width in



[_____] mm,] [slope of gross load-settlement curve under full test load does not exceed 1.5 mm per metric ton ,] [net settlement after removal of test load does not exceed 19 mm .] Perform load tests at locations[ as proposed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Consultant and] as directed by the Contracting Officer. Additional load tests, at Government expense, may be required by the Contracting Officer. Loading, testing, and recording and analysis of data shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer, registered in the state of project location, and provided and paid for by the Contractor.

3.4.3.1 Safe Design Capacity

The safe design capacity of a test pile as determined from the results of load tests shall be the lesser of the two values computed according to the following:

a. One-half of that load which causes a net settlement after rebound of not more than 0.28 mm per metric ton of total test load.

b. One-half of the load that causes a gross settlement of not more than 25 mm, provided the load settlement curve shows no sign of failure.

[ 3.4.4 Tensile Load Test

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on may be del et ed i f Tensi l e Load Test wi l l not be per f or med.

**************************************************************************

Perform tensile load tests on [_____] test piles in accordance with JGS 1813 , as modified [and] in paragraph LOAD TESTS. A tensile load of [_____] kN shall be applied to each tensile load test pile. In performing the tension load test, the ultimate load to be applied shall be one and one-half times the safe tension capacity, and the Standard Loading Procedure shall be employed.

][ 3.4.5 Lateral Load Test

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on may be del et ed i f Lat er al Load Test wi l l not be per f or med.

**************************************************************************

Perform lateral load tests on [_____] piles in accordance with JGS 1831 , as modified [and] in paragraph LOAD TESTS. Lateral load tests shall consist of jacking two piles apart with a hydraulic jack, with one pile serving as the reaction pile for the other. A lateral load of [_____] kN shall be applied to each pair of lateral load test piles. Required movement readings shall be made and recorded for each pile.

] 3.4.6 Pile Records

**************************************************************************NOTE: Omi t r ef er ence t o l oad t est when not r equi r ed i n pr oj ect . Omi t r ef er ence t o t est pi l es and " cal cul at ed t i p el evat i on" when t est pi l es ar e not dr i ven. Wher e speci al or unusual soi l condi t i ons ar e expect ed, consul t at i on wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s Techni cal Repr esent at i ve ( Geot echni cal



Br anch) r egar di ng speci al engi neer i ng super vi s i on of dr i v i ng, t est i ng, r ecor di ng and anal ysi s of dat a f or pr oj ect may be usef ul .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: The Speci f i er shal l at t ach t he speci f i cat i ons pi l e dr i v i ng l og gr aphi c ( f or al l pi l e dr i v i ng pr oj ect s) and t he pi l e dr i v i ng equi pment dat a f or m ( f or pr oj ect s usi ng PDA) t o t he end of t hi s speci f i cat i on sect i on.

**************************************************************************

Keep a complete and accurate record of each pile driven. Indicate the pile location, deviations from pile location, cross section shape and dimensions, original length, ground elevation, tip elevation, cut-off elevations, [batter alignment,] number of blows required for each 300 mm of penetration and number of blows for the last 150 mm penetration or fraction thereof [as required] for the "calculated" [driving resistance]. Include in the record the beginning and ending times of each operation during driving of pile, type and size of hammer used, rate of operation, stroke or equivalent stroke for diesel hammer, type of driving helmet, and type and dimension of hammer cushion (capblock) and pile cushion used. Record retap data and unusual occurrences during pile driving such as redriving, heaving, weaving, obstructions, [jetting,] and any driving interruptions. A preprinted pile driving log for recording pile driving data[ and pile driving equipment data form], which can be downloaded at: http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf . For piles installed by the Cement-Milk Method, provide the actual grout amount pumped into the predrilled hole on the Pile Record.

[ 3.5 SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t hi s par agr aph only when speci al i nspect i on and t est i ng f or sei smi c- r esi st i ng syst ems i s r equi r ed by t he I nt er nat i onal Bui l di ng Code ( I BC) .

Thi s par agr aph wi l l be appl i cabl e t o bot h new bui l di ngs desi gned and t o exi st i ng bui l di ng sei smi c r ehabi l i t at i on desi gns done accor di ng t o UFC 1- 200- 01, " Gener al Bui l di ng Requi r ement s" and UFC 3- 310- 04, " Sei smi c Desi gn f or Bui l di ngs" .

The desi gner must i ndi cat e on t he dr awi ngs al l l ocat i ons and al l f eat ur es f or whi ch speci al i nspect i on and t est i ng i s r equi r ed i n accor dance wi t h Chapt er 17 of t he I BC. Thi s i ncl udes i ndi cat i ng t he l ocat i ons of al l s t r uct ur al component s and connect i ons r equi r i ng i nspect i on.

Add any addi t i onal r equi r ement s as necessar y.



**************************************************************************

Special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and components shall be done in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS.

] 3.6 PILE INSTALLATION BY PLACING METHODS ("Cement-Milk" Method)

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n Japan, Pr ecast / Pr est r essed Concr et e pi l es ar e al so i nst al l ed by means of t he " Cement - Mi l k" met hod. Thi s sect i on i s added t o cover t he gener al r equi r ement s f or t he " Cement - Mi l k" met hod. Wave equat i on anal ysi s i s not appl i cabl e f or t hi s met hod. Dynami c pi l e anal ysi s shal l be per f or med i n onl y one st ep af t er t he cement - mi l k r eaches t he r equi r ed compr essi ve st r engt h.

**************************************************************************

Pile installation by placing methods consists of pre-drilling with earth auger system and filling with cement grout ("cement milk").

If required, use borehole stabilizing liquid during pre-drilling operations. Excavation liquid shall be Bentonite plus cement plus water with following standard mixing quantities

Bentonite (kg) Cement (kg) Water (l)

25 - 50 80 - 160 450 - 500

The cement milk compressive strength at 28-Days shall be greater than 20 MPa. The cement milk mix design that can provide the required compressive strength shall be submitted before concrete is placed. Piles shall be open-end piles.

3.6.1 PILE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

(1) Conduct pre-drilling operations as indicated in drawings.

(2) Earth auger head diameter is approximately pile diameter plus 100 mm.

(3) The electric current of earth auger motor shall be recorded continuously.

(4) Drilling and Pile Erection

(a) Perform drilling in a vertical direction aligned with the pile centerline and prevent soil on the lateral surface of a borehole from collapsing by using soil stabilizing liquid. Do not rotate the earth auger in a reverse direction when it is pulled out.

(b) After the earth auger reaches the specified bearing ground and subsequently cement milk for condensation is injected, pull out the earth auger while injecting perimeter condensation liquid, place a pile into the borehole while being careful of not damaging the lateral surface of the borehole, either applying pressure with the pile equipment or by slightly driving the pile with a hammer.

(c) After placing the pile into the borehole, allow for curing process



for approximate 7 days while keeping it as it is aligned with the pile centerline.

(5) Stabilizing Liquid, Cement Milk for Condensation, and Perimeter Condensation Liquid

(a) Use borehole stabilizing liquid for preventing the lateral surface of a borehole from collapsing.

(b) Cement milk for condensation is a cement-grout material that is injected at the pile top zone.

(c) Perimeter condensation liquid is a cement-grout material injected to fill the gap between the pile and the borehole.

(6) Perform supervision tests for cement milk for condensation and perimeter condensation liquid as follows:

(a) The number of samples per test shall be three.

(b) Collect samples as follows: 1) Collect the amount of cement milk for condensation for one test from a grout plant at one time. 2) Collect the amount of perimeter condensation liquid from the cement milk flown over a drilled hole at one time after inserting a pile into it.

(c) Collect samples by using polyethylene bags and make cylindrical samples with the approximate diameter of 50 mm and the approximate height of 100 mm.

(d) Cure samples in accordance with the standard cure method which is in the water curing at 20+2 degrees C specified in JIS A 1132 .

(e) Strength test shall be in accordance with JIS A 1108 (Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete).

(f) The compressive strengths of cement milk for condensation and perimeter condensation liquid are those determined on the 28th day of curing. Required compressive strengths are listed below.

Compressive Strength (Unit: N/mm2)

Type Compressive Strength

Cement Milk for Condensation 20 or greater

Perimeter Condensation Liquid 0.5 or greater

3.6.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Tests indicated in Section 3.4.2, 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and 3.4.5 may also be applicable to piles installed by the "cement-milk" method.

3.6.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

The Soil Mixing Contractor shall use cement materials in order to comply



with the regulations from the Japanese Ministry of the Environmentindicated in Notification No.46 (i.e. limits for Hexavalent ChromiumLeachate in Soils) or other applicable local environmental regulations.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 32 01 16. 71 ( Febr uar y 2017) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 32 01 16. 17 ( August 2008)



SECTION 32 01 16.71

COLD MILLING ASPHALT PAVING02/17


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or col d mi l l i ng of bi t umi nous pavement f or ai r f i el ds, r oads, st r eet s, par ki ng ar eas, and ot her gener al appl i cat i ons.

Adher e t o UFC 1-300-02 Uni f i ed Faci l i t i es Gui de Speci f i cat i ons ( UFGS) For mat St andar d when edi t i ng t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on or pr epar i ng new pr oj ect speci f i cat i on sect i ons. Edi t t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on f or pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement s by addi ng, del et i ng, or r evi s i ng t ext .

Remove i nf or mat i on and r equi r ement s not r equi r ed i n r espect i ve pr oj ect .


**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on can be used t o speci f y col d mi l l i ng al one on st r uct ur al l y sound pavement s f or sur f ace t ext ur i ng t o i ncr ease ski d r esi st ance of a wor n pavement , or f or pavement r emoval t o r est or e r oadway geomet r y. Col d mi l l i ng can al so be used i n conj unct i on wi t h mi l l and f i l l operations.



On t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs, show:

1. Locat i on and ext ent of mi l l i ng oper at i on.

2. Requi r ed el evat i on of mi l l ed sur f ace and f i ni sh sur f ace of new pavement .

3. Sect i on i ndi cat i ng i n mm t he dept h t hat exi st i ng pavement has t o be r emoved.

4. Locat i on of exi st i ng manhol es, val ve boxes and ut i l i t y l i nes.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s f or a basi c Japan Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . Desi gner shal l t ai l or as appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************


1.1.1 Grade

Mill pavement such that the finished surface conforms to the lines, grades, and cross sections indicated. The maximum allowable deviation of the finished milled pavement surfaces from the established plan grade line and elevation will be 6 mm . The deviations from the plan grade line and elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant structures involved.

1.1.2 Surface Smoothness

The maximum allowable deviation of the finished surfaces from the testing edge in the transverse or longitudinal direction will be 6 mm .

1.1.3 Traffic Control

Provide all necessary traffic controls during milling operations.

1.2 EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, AND MACHINES

Maintain in a satisfactory working condition equipment, tools, and machines used in the performance of the work.

1.2.1 Cold-Milling Machine

Provide a cold-milling machine which is self-propelled, capable of milling the pavement to a specified depth and smoothness and of establishing grade control; with means of controlling transverse slope and dust produced during the pavement milling operation. Machine will have capability of adding water in front of equipment to minimize dust during milling operation. The machine will have the ability to remove the millings or cuttings from the pavement and load them into a truck. The milling machine will not damage any part of the pavement structure that is not to be removed.



1.2.2 Cleaning Equiment

Provide cleaning equipment suitable for removing and cleaning loose material from the pavement surface.

1.2.3 Straightedge

Furnish and maintain at the site, in good condition, one 3.66 meter straightedge or other suitable device for each milling machine, for testing the finished surface. Make straightedge available for Government use. Use straightedges constructed of aluminum or other lightweight metal, with blades of box or box-girder cross section with flat bottom reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Use straightedges with handles to facilitate movement on the pavement.


Do not perform milling when there is accumulation of snow or ice on the pavement surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MILLING OPERATION

**************************************************************************

When t he mi l l ed mat er i al ( cut t i ng) i s t o be col d r ecycl ed, t he maxi mum si ze of t he cut t i ngs shoul d be equal t o or l ess t han one- hal f of t he r ecycl ed pavement t hi ckness. Gener al l y, t he maxi mum si ze f or a s i ngl e 100 mm l i f t of pavement wi l l be 50 mm or l ess. For hot r ecycl i ng t he r ecommended maxi mum si ze of t he mi l l ed mat er i al i s 50 mm.

I f desi gn does not i ncl ude r emoval of base cour se mat er i al and i t i s desi r ed not t o di st ur b t he base cour se t hen t he f ol l owi ng may be i ncl uded i n t hi s paragraph:

Conduct col d- mi l l i ng oper at i on t o ensur e t hat onl y bi t umi nous pavement i s r emoved and base cour se i s not di st ur bed. Leave i n pl ace a l ayer of bi t umi nous pavement, 25 mm t hi ck, over t he undi st ur bed base course.

**************************************************************************

A minimum of seven days notice is required, prior to start work, for the Contracting Officer to coordinate the milling operation with other activities at the site. Make sufficient passes so that the designated area is milled to the grades and cross sections indicated. Mill the pavement in depth increments that will not damage the pavement below the designated finished grade. If scabbing occurs, the surface will not meet smoothness requirements. Take steps to modify the process as needed to prevent scabbing from occuring. Repair or replace, as directed, items



damaged during milling such as manholes, valve boxes, utility lines, pavement that is torn, cracked, gouged, broken, or undercut. Remove the milled material from the pavement and load into trucks.

3.2 GRADE AND SURFACE-SMOOTHNESS TESTING

3.2.1 Grade-Conformance Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pavement s i n ai r cr af t t r af f i c ar eas such as ai r f i el d r unways and t axi ways, l i nes of l evel s t o det er mi ne el evat i on of t he mi l l ed pavement wi l l be r un l ongi t udi nal l y and t r ansver sel y at i nt er val s not exceeding 8 met er s.

**************************************************************************

Test the finished milled surface of the pavement for conformance with the plan-grade requirements and for acceptance by the Contracting Officer by running lines of levels at intervals of 7.5 meters longitudinally and 7.5 meters transversely to determine the elevation of the completed pavement. Correct variations from the designated grade line and elevation in excess of the plan-grade requirements as directed. Skin patching for correcting low areas will not be permitted. Remove and replace the deficient low area. Remove sufficient material to allow at least 25 mm of asphalt concrete to be placed.

3.2.2 Surface-Smoothness Tests

After completion of the final milling, the finished milled surface will be tested by the Government with a straightedge. Other approved devices may be used, provided that when satisfactorily and properly operated, such devices reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified. Correct surface irregularities that depart from the testing edge by more than 6 mm . Skin patching for correcting low areas will not be permitted. Remove and replace the deficient low area. Remove sufficient material to allow at least 25 mm of asphalt concrete to be placed.

3.3 REMOVAL OF MILLED MATERIAL

Stockpile material that is removed as specified and in such a manner to prevent segregation or contamination. Material that is removed will become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 32 11 20 ( August 2017) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 32 11 16 ( August 2008)


Ref er ences ar e i n agr eement wi t h UMRL dat ed Januar y 2019

**************************************************************************

SECTION 32 11 20

BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND SUBBASES FOR FLEXIBLE PAVING08/17


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or subbase and r i gi d base cour ses f or ai r f i el d pavement s, r oads and st r eet s.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s appl i cabl e t o subbase cour ses f or ai r f i el d pavement s, r oads and st r eet s. Thi s speci f i cat i on wi l l be used f or any subbase cour se t hat has a desi gn Cal i f or ni a bear i ng r at i o ( CBR) bet ween 20 and 50.

Thi s speci f i cat i on may al so be used f or :

a. The base cour se di r ect l y beneat h t he bi t umi nous



sur f ace of a pavement desi gn f or r oads and st r eet s wher e t he r equi r ed CBR val ue of t he mat er i al i s 50 or mor e.

b. The base cour se beneat h r i gi d pavement s.

When t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s used f or aggr egat e base cour se under r i gi d pavement , sect i on t i t l e of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on wi l l be: BASE COURSE FOR RI GI D PAVI NG and t he wor ds " r i gi d pavement base cour se" sel ect ed t hr oughout . When t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s used i n combi nat i on f or a subbase cour se under f l exi bl e pavement s and a base cour se under r i gi d pavement s, t he sect i on t i t l e wi l l be: BASE COURSE FOR RI GI D AND SUBBASES FOR FLEXI BLE PAVI NG and t he wor ds " or r i gi d pavement base cour se" wi l l be i ncl uded af t er " subbase" t hr oughout .

**************************************************************************


**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES


Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a RI D out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************




JIS A 1103 (2014) Method of Test for Amount of



Material Passing Test Sieve 75 µm in Aggregates

JIS A 1104 (2006) Methods of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Fine Aggregates

JIS A 1121 (2007) Method of Test for Resistance to Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine

JIS A 1201 (2009) Practise for Preparing Disturbed Soil Samples for Soil Testing





JIS Z 8801 (2006) Test Sieves Part 1: Test Sieves of Metal Wire Cloth



1.2 DEGREE OF COMPACTION

Degree of compaction required is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in JIS A 1210 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y.



Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s.


**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Plant, Equipment, and Tools

SD-06 Test Reports

Initial Tests ; G

In-Place Tests ; G


**************************************************************************NOTE: I f desi r abl e, r equi r ement s f or t ypes of equi pment appl i cabl e t o met hods of const r uct i on based on l ocal condi t i ons wi l l be i ncl uded.

**************************************************************************

All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer before the work is started. Maintain all plant, equipment, and tools in satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed equipment, including descriptive data. Use equipment capable of minimizing segregation, producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.


Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform sampling and testing using a laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10 01 45 00.00 20 01 45 00.00 40 QUALITY CONTROL. Work



requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements and perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.

1.5.1 Sampling

Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with JIS A 1201 . When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting Officer.

1.5.2 Tests

1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis

Perform sieve analysis in conformance with JIS A 1103 and JIS A 1102 using sieves conforming to JIS Z 8801 .

1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index

Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with JIS A 1205 .

1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations

Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture in accordance with paragraph DEGREE OF COMPACTION.

1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests

Measure field density in accordance with JIS A 1214 .

1.5.2.5 Wear Test

Perform wear tests on subbase course and or rigid pavement base course material in conformance with JIS A 1121 .

1.5.2.6 Weight of Slag

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph wi l l be omi t t ed when i t i s hi ghl y unl i kel y t hat s l ag wi l l be suppl i ed.

**************************************************************************

Determine weight per cubic meter of slag in accordance with JIS A 1104 .


**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph may be del et ed i n l ocal i t i es wher e f r eezi ng t emper at ur es do not occur , and el sewher e when i t i s def i ni t el y known t hat t he wor k wi l l not be car r i ed on dur i ng per i ods when such t emper at ur es ar e t o be expect ed. Ot her wi se, t hi s r equi r ement wi l l be r et ai ned, but t he pr ot ect i ve measur es speci f i ed may be modi f i ed t o sui t l ocal condi t i ons and i ndi v i dual pr oj ect r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************



Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 2 degrees C . When the temperature falls below 2 degrees C , protect all completed areas by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Flexible Paving Subbase Course

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he aggr egat e gr adat i on as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************Provide aggregates conforming to JIS A 5001 , C-30/RC-30 and C-40/RC-40consisting of crushed stone or slag, gravel, shell, sand, or other sound, durable, approved materials processed and blended or naturally combined. Provide aggregates which are free from lumps and balls of clay, organic matter, objectionable coatings, and other foreign material. The percentage of loss of material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve must not exceed 50 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with JIS A 1121 . Provide aggregate that is reasonably uniform in density and quality. Provide slag that is an air-cooled, blast-furnace product having a dry weight of not less than 1050 kg/cubic meter . Provide aggregates with a maximum size of 37.5 mm for C-40/RC-40 and 31.5 mm for C-30/RC-30 and within the limits specified as follows:



Maximum Allowable Percentage by WeightPassing Square-Mesh Sieve

_______________________________________

Sieve Designation (mm) C-30 / RC-30 C-40 /RC-40

53.0 ---- 100

37.5 100 95-100

31.5 95-100 ----

26.5 ---- ----

19 55-85 50-80

13.2 ---- ----

4.75 15-45 15-40

2.36 5-30 5-25

The portion of any blended component and of the completed course passing the 0.425 mm must be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.

2.1.2 Rigid Pavement Base Course


**************************************************************************

Provide aggregates for rigid pavement base course as specified for flexible paving subbase course.


2.2.1 Initial Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests on the proposed material prior to commencing construction to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements prior to installation. Complete this testing for each source if materials from more than one source are proposed.

a. Sieve Analysis .

b. Liquid limit and plasticity index.

c. Moisture-density relationship.

d. Wear.

e. Weight per cubic meter of Slag.



Submit certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30 days before material is required for the work.

2.2.2 Approval of Material

Tentative approval of material will be based on initial test results.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Provide adequate drainage during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or standing on the working area.

3.2 STOCKPILING MATERIAL

Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Stockpile aggregates on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Stockpile materials obtained from different sources separately.

3.3 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE OR SUBGRADE

Clean the underlying course or subgrade of all foreign substances prior to constructing the subbase or rigid pavement base course. Do not construct subbase or rigid pavement base course on underlying course or subgrade that is frozen. Construct the surface of the underlying course or subgrade to meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. Correct ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of the surface from the specified requirements set forth herein by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses or subgrades containing sands or gravels, as defined in JGS 0051 , stabilize the surface prior to placement of the overlying course. Stabilize by mixing the overlying course material into the underlying course and compacting by approved methods. Consider the stabilized material as part of the underlying course and meet all requirements of the underlying course. Do not allow traffic or other operations to disturb the finished underlying course and maintain in a satisfactory condition until the overlying course is placed.

3.4 GRADE CONTROL

Provide a finished and completed subbase and rigid pavement base courses conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown. Place line and grade stakes as necessary for control.

3.5 MIXING AND PLACING MATERIALS

Mix and place the materials to obtain uniformity of the material at the water content specified. Make such adjustments in mixing or placing procedures or in equipment as may be directed to obtain the true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or accelerate loss or increase of water, and to insure a satisfactory subbase course.



3.6 LAYER THICKNESS

Compact the completed course to the thickness indicated. No individual layer may be thicker than 150 mm nor be thinner than 75 mm in compacted thickness. Compact the course(s) to a total thickness that is within 13 mm of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm thicker than indicated, the course will be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. The average job thickness will be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job and must be within 6 mm of the thickness indicated. Measure the total thickness of the course(s) at intervals of one measurement for each 500 square meters of completed course. Measure total thickness using 75 mm diameter test holes penetrating the completed course.

3.7 COMPACTION

Compact each layer of the material, as specified, with approved compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of optimum water content determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller. Slightly vary the length of alternate trips of the roller. Adjust speed of the roller as needed so that displacement of the aggregate does not occur. Compact mixture with hand-operated power tampers in all places not accessible to the rollers. Continue compaction of the subbase until each layer is compacted through the full depth to at least 100 percent of laboratory maximum density. Continue compaction of the rigid base course until each layer is compacted through the full depth to at least 95 percent of laboratory maximum density. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory subbase and rigid pavement base course. Remove any materials that are found to be unsatisfactory and replace with satisfactory material or rework, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.

3.8 PROOF ROLLING

In addition to the compaction specified, proof roll subbase course under a flexible airfield pavement in areas designated on the drawings by application of 30 coverages for Class IV runways, 8 coverages for runways that support fighter aircraft only, and 4 coverages to all other paved areas, of a heavy pneumatic-tired roller having four or more tires abreast, each tire loaded to a minimum of 13,600 kg and inflated to a minimum of 862 kPa . A coverage is defined as the application of one tire print over the designated area. In the areas designated, apply proof rolling to the top layer of the completed subbase course. Maintain water content of the top layer of the subbase course as specified in paragraph COMPACTION from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling. Remove any subbase course materials that produce unsatisfactory results by proof rolling and replace with satisfactory materials. Then recompact and proof roll to meet specifications.



3.9 EDGES OF SUBBASE AND RIGID PAVEMENT BASE COURSE

Place approved material along the outer edges of the subbase and rigid pavement base course in sufficient quantity to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers, simultaneously roll and compact at least a 600 mm width of this shoulder material with the rolling and compacting of each layer of the subbase and rigid pavement base course, as directed.

3.10 FINISHING

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e par agr aph i f r i gi d pavement base cour se i s not i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Finish the surface of the top layer of rigid pavement base course after final compaction and proof rolling by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a steel-wheeled roller. Do not add thin layers of material to the top layer of rigid pavement base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer of rigid pavement base course is 13 mm or more below grade, scarify the top layer to a depth of at least 75 mm and blend new material in and compact and proof roll to bring to grade. Make adjustments to rolling and finishing procedures as directed by the Contracting Officer to minimize segregation and degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an acceptable rigid pavement base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated, uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, scarify the unsatisfactory portion and rework and recompact it or replace as directed.

3.11 SMOOTHNESS TEST

Construct the top layer so that the surface shows no deviations in excess of 10 mm when tested with a 3. 00 m straightedge. Take measurements in successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Also take measurements perpendicular to the centerline at 15 meter intervals. Correct deviations exceeding this amount by removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to meet these specifications.


3.12.1 In-Place Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and compacted subbase and rigid pavement base course. Take samples and test at the rates indicated.

a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one set of tests for every 500 square meters , or portion thereof, of completed area.

b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every 1,000 square meters , or portion thereof, of material placed.

c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency as the sieve analysis.



d. Measure the thickness of each course at intervals providing at least one measurement for each 500 square meters or part thereof. Measure the thickness using test holes, at least 75 mm in diameter through the course.


Final approval of the materials will be based on tests for gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).

3.13 TRAFFIC

Do not allow traffic on the completed subbase and rigid pavement base course for airfield pavements . For roads, d o not allow heavy equipment on the completed rigid pavement base course except when necessary for construction. When it is necessary for heavy equipment to travel on the completed rigid pavement base course, protect the area against marring or damage to the completed work.

3.14 MAINTENANCE

Maintain the completed course in a satisfactory condition until the full pavement section is completed and accepted. Immediately repair any defects and repeat repairs as often as necessary to keep the area intact. Retest any course that was not paved over prior to the onset of winter to verify that it still complies with the requirements of this specification. Rework or replace any area that is damaged as necessary to comply with this specification.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS

Dispose of any unsuitable materials that have been removed as directed . No additional payments will be made for materials that have to be replaced.










SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES08/17


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or base cour se t o be used di r ect l y under bi t umi nous pavement cour ses.



Comment s, suggest i ons and r ecommended changes f or t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on ar e wel come and shoul d be submi t t ed as a Cr i t er i a Change Request ( CCR) .

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s appl i cabl e t o base cour ses pl aced di r ect l y beneat h bi t umi nous sur f ace cour ses. The f ol l owi ng must be t aken i nt o consi der at i on when edi t i ng t hi s speci f i cat i on.

a. The mat er i al i n t hi s speci f i cat i on and on t he dr awi ngs shoul d be r ef er r ed t o as " aggr egat e base cour se ( ABC) " whenever a base cour se mat er i al wi t h a Cal i f or ni a Bear i ng Rat i o ( CBR) of 80 i s r equi r ed. " Aggr egat e Base Cour se" shoul d be r et ai ned i n t he



t i t l e and t he r est of t he speci f i cat i on shoul d be edi t ed accor di ngl y t o r et ai n t he i nf or mat i on necessar y f or t hi s mat er i al .

b. The mat er i al i n t hi s speci f i cat i on and on t he dr awi ngs shoul d be r ef er r ed t o as " gr aded- cr ushed aggr egat e base cour se ( GCA) " wher ever a base mat er i al wi t h a CBR of 100 i s r equi r ed. " Gr aded- Cr ushed Aggr egat e Base Cour se" shoul d be r et ai ned i n t he t i t l e and t he r est of t he speci f i cat i on shoul d be edi t ed accor di ngl y t o r et ai n t he i nf or mat i on necessar y f or t hi s mat er i al .

c. When t hi s speci f i cat i on i s t o be used i n pr oj ect s t hat r equi r e bot h t ypes of mat er i al s, t he t i t l e of t hi s speci f i cat i on shoul d be " Aggr egat e and/ or Gr aded- Cr ushed Aggr egat e Base Cour se" . Car e must t hen be t aken t o assur e t hat t he dr awi ngs cl ear l y cal l out whi ch mat er i al i s bei ng used i n any par t i cul ar pl ace and t hat t hi s speci f i cat i on i s edi t ed t o r et ai n t he i nf or mat i on f or bot h t ypes of mat er i al s. I f onl y a smal l amount of one of t hese t ypes of mat er i al s i s needed f or t he pr oj ect , consi der at i on shoul d be made t o det er mi ne i f onl y one of t hese mat er i al s shoul d be speci f i ed and t he desi gn adj ust ed.

**************************************************************************


**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES


Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a RI D out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the



extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.




JIS A 1104 (2006) Methods of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Fine Aggregates

JIS A 1109 (2006) Method of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Fine Aggregates

JIS A 1110 (2006) Methods of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Coarse Aggregates

JIS A 1112 (2012) Method of Test for Washing Analysis of Fresh Concrete










1.2 DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.

1.2.1 Aggregate Base Course

Aggregate base course (ABC) is well graded, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.



1.2.2 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.

1.2.3 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in JIS A 1210 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y. Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s.


**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to



Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Plant, Equipment, and Tools

SD-06 Test Reports

Initial Tests ; G

In-Place Tests ; G



**************************************************************************

All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer before the work is started. Maintain all plant, equipment, and tools in satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed equipment, including descriptive data. Use equipment capable of minimizing segregation, producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.


Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform sampling and testing using a laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10 01 45 00.00 20 01 45 00.00 40 QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements and perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.

1.5.1 Sampling


1.5.2 Tests


Perform sieve analysis in conformance with JIS A 1103 and JIS A 1102 using sieves conforming to JIS Z 8801 . .






Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content in accordance with paragraph DEGREE OF COMPACTION.



1.5.2.5 Wear Test

Perform wear tests on ABC and GCA course material in conformance with JIS A 1121 .

1.5.2.6 Soundness

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ret ai n t hi s par agr aph onl y f or gr aded- cr ushed aggr egat e base cour se.

**************************************************************************

Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with JIS A 1112 .

1.5.2.7 Weight of Slag

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph wi l l be omi t t ed when i t i s hi ghl y unl i kel y t hat s l ag wi l l be suppl i ed as base cour se mat er i al .

**************************************************************************

Determine weight per cubic meter of slag in accordance with JIS A 1104 on the ABC and GCA course material.



**************************************************************************

Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 2 degrees C . When the temperature falls below 2 degrees C , protect all completed areas by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

Provide Aggregate Base Course (ABC) and Graded-Crushed Aggregate (GCA) base course consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed



stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, crushed recycled concrete, angular sand, or other approved material. Provide ABC that is free of lumps of clay, organic matter, and other objectionable materials or coatings. Provide GCA that is free of silt and clay as defined by JGS 0051 , organic matter, and other objectionable materials or coatings. The portion retained on the 4.75 mm sieve is known as coarse aggregate; that portion passing the 4.75 mm sieve is known as fine aggregate. Base course shall conform to JIS A 5001 , M-30/RM-30 and M-40/RM-40. When the coarse and fine aggregate is supplied form more than one source, provide aggregate from each source that meets the specified requirements.

2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate

Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. Separately stockpile coarse aggregate supplied from more than one source.

a. Crushed Gravel: Provide crushed gravel that has been manufactured by crushing gravels and that meets all the requirements specified below.

b. Crushed Stone: Provide crushed stone consisting of freshly mined quarry rock, meeting all the requirements specified below.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ver i f y t he subgr ade soi l cont ai ns l ess t han 0. 3 per cent of sul f at es, t o pr event expansi ve et t r i ngi t e r eact i on wi t h t he r ecycl ed concr et e. See UFC 3- 250- 11, Appendi x C f or t est i ng pr ocedur e. Ot her wi se, del et e r ecycl ed concr et e opt i on.

Do not per mi t r ecycl ed concr et e aggr egat e ( RCA) t o be used i n a ai r f i el d pavement sect i on wi t hout eval uat i ng f or Al kal i - Si l i ca React i v i t y ( ASR) . See I PRF- 01- G- 002- 03- 5, " Eval uat i on, Desi gn and Const r uct i on Techni ques f or Ai r f i el d Concr et e Pavement Used as Recycl ed Mat er i al f or Base. " For Ai r For ce pr oj ect s, per f or m r i sk assessment i n accor dance wi t h ETL 07- 06, " Ri sk Assessment Pr ocedur es f or Recycl i ng Por t l and Cement Concr et e ( PCC) Suf f er i ng Fr om Al kal i - Si l i ca React i on ( ASR) i n Ai r f i el d Pavement St r uct ur es. "

**************************************************************************

c. Crushed Recycled Concrete: Provide crushed recycled concrete consisting of previously hardened portland cement concrete or other concrete containing pozzolanic binder material. Provide recycled concrete that is free of all reinforcing steel, bituminous concrete surfacing, and any other foreign material and that has been crushed and processed to meet the required gradations for coarse aggregate. Reject recycled concrete aggregate exceeding this value. Provide crushed recycled concrete that meets all other applicable requirements specified below.

d. Crushed Slag: Provide crushed slag that is an air-cooled blast-furnace product having an air dry unit weight of not less than 1120 kg/cubic meter as determined by JIS A 1104 , and meets all the requirements specified below.



2.1.1.1 Aggregate Base Course

The percentage of loss of ABC coarse aggregate must not exceed 50 percent when tested in accordance with JIS A 1121 .

2.1.1.2 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

The percentage of loss of GCA coarse aggregate must not exceed 40 percent loss when tested in accordance with JIS A 1121 . Provide GCA coarse aggregate that does not exhibit a loss greater than 18 percent weighted average, at five cycles, when tested for soundness in magnesium sulfate, or 12 percent weighted average, at five cycles, when tested in sodium sulfate in accordance with JIS A 1112 .

2.1.2 Fine Aggregate

Provide fine aggregates consisting of angular particles of uniform density.

2.1.2.1 Aggregate Base Course

Provide ABC fine aggregate that consists of screenings, angular sand, crushed recycled concrete fines, or other finely divided mineral matter processed or naturally combined with the coarse aggregate.

2.1.2.2 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

Provide GCA fine aggregate consisting of angular particles produced by crushing stone, slag, recycled concrete, or gravel that meets the requirements for wear and soundness specified for GCA coarse aggregate. Produce fine aggregate by crushing only particles larger than 4.75 mm sieve in size. Provide fine aggregate that contains at least 90 percent by weight of particles having two or more freshly fractured faces in the portion passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 2 mm sieve, and in the portion passing the 2 mm sieve and retained on the 0.425 mm sieve. Manufacture fine aggregate from gravel particles 95 percent of which by weight are retained on the 12.5 mm sieve.

2.1.3 Gradation Requirements


**************************************************************************

Apply the specified gradation requirements to the completed base course. Provide aggregates that are continuously well graded within the limits specified in TABLE 1. Use sieves that conform to JIS Z 8801 .



TABLE 1. GRADATION OF AGGREGATES

Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve

Sieve Designation (mm) M-30 / RM-30 M-40 / RM-40

53.0 ---- 100

37.5 100 95-100

31.5 95-100 ----

26.5 ---- ----

19.0 60-90 60-90

13.2 ---- ----

4.75 30-65 30-65

2.36 20-50 20-50

1.18 ---- ----

0.425 10-30 10-30

0.075 2-10 2-10

NOTE 1: The values are based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity. If materials from different sources are used for the coarse and fine aggregates, test the materials in accordance with JIS A 1110 and JIS A 1109 to determine their specific gravities. Correct the percentages passing the various sieves as directed by the Contracting Officer if the specific gravities vary by more than 10 percent.

2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX

Apply liquid limit and plasticity index requirements to the completed course and to any component that is blended to meet the required gradation. The portion of any component or of the completed course passing the 0.425 mm sieve must be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.


2.3.1 Initial Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements when furnished. Complete this testing for each source if materials from more than one source are proposed.

a. Sieve Analysis.





d. Wear.

e. Soundness.

f. Weight per cubic meter of Slag.




PART 3 EXECUTION


When the ABC or GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or standing on the working area.


Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Stockpile aggregates on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Stockpile materials obtained from different sources separately.

3.3 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE OR SUBGRADE

**************************************************************************NOTE: The sur f ace of a cohesi onl ess subgr ade or subbase may r equi r e st abi l i zat i on pr i or t o pl acement of t he base cour se. Thi s may be accompl i shed by compact i ng a l ayer of cr ushed aggr egat e i nt o t he sur f ace. I t may al so be obt ai ned by met hods based on l ocal exper i ence. The addi t i onal cr ushed aggr egat e wi l l be consi der ed as par t of t he under l y i ng cour se and may be pai d f or or i ncl uded i n t he speci f i cat i on sect i on t hat cover s t he pr epar at i on of subgr ade or subbase f or t he par t i cul ar pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Clean the underlying course or subgrade of all foreign substances prior to constructing the base course(s). Do not construct base course(s) on underlying course or subgrade that is frozen. Construct the surface of the underlying course or subgrade to meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. Correct ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of the surface from the specified requirements set forth herein by loosening and removing



soft or unsatisfactory material and adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses or subgrades containing sands or gravels, as defined in JGS 0051 , stabilize the surface prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilize by mixing ABC or GCA into the underlying course and compacting by approved methods. Consider the stabilized material as part of the underlying course and meet all requirements of the underlying course. Do not allow traffic or other operations to disturb the finished underlying course and maintain in a satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.

3.4 GRADE CONTROL

Provide a finished and completed base course conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown. Place line and grade stakes as necessary for control.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Mor e det ai l s of appl i cabl e met hods on pl aci ng, mi xi ng, and spr eadi ng wi l l be i ncl uded when appropriate.

**************************************************************************

. Make adjustments in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements of this specification. Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of uniform thickness with an approved spreader. Place the layers so that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is placed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layers of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Make adjustments in placing procedures or equipment as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water content, and to insure an acceptable base course.

3.6 LAYER THICKNESS

Compact the completed base course to the thickness indicated. No individual layer may be thicker than 150 mm nor be thinner than 75 mm in compacted thickness. Compact the base course(s) to a total thickness that is within 13 mm of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm thicker than indicated, the course will be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. The average job thickness will be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job and must be within 6 mm of the thickness indicated. Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals of one measurement for each 500 square meters of base course. Measure total thickness using 75 mm diameter test holes penetrating the base course.



3.7 COMPACTION

Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller. Slightly vary the length of alternate trips of the roller. Adjust speed of the roller as needed so that displacement of the aggregate does not occur. Compact mixture with hand-operated power tampers in all places not accessible to the rollers. Continue compaction until each layer is compacted through the full depth to at least 100 percent of laboratory maximum density. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Remove any materials found to be unsatisfactory and replace with satisfactory material or rework, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.

3.8 PROOF ROLLING

In addition to the compaction specified, proof roll base course under a flexible airfield pavement in areas designated on the drawings by application of 30 coverages for Class IV runways, 8 coverages for runways that support fighter aircraft only, and 4 coverages to all other paved areas, of a heavy pneumatic-tired roller having four or more tires abreast, each tire loaded to a minimum of 13,600 kg and inflated to a minimum of 862 kPa . A coverage is defined as the application of one tire print over the designated area. In the areas designated, apply proof rolling to the top of the underlying material on which the base course is laid and to the top of each layer of the completed base course. Maintain water content of the underlying material and each layer of the base course as specified in Paragraph COMPACTION from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling of that layer. Remove any base course materials or any underlying materials that produce unsatisfactory results by proof rolling and replace with satisfactory materials. Then recompact and proof roll to meet these specifications.

3.9 EDGES OF BASE COURSE

Place the base course(s) so that the completed section will be a minimum of 600 mm wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be placed above it. Place approved material along the outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantity to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers, simultaneously roll and compact at least a 600 mm width of this shoulder material with the rolling and compacting of each layer of the base course, as directed.

3.10 FINISHING

Finish the surface of the top layer of base course after final compaction and proof rolling by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a steel-wheeled roller. Do not add thin layers of material to the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer of base course is 13 mm or more below grade, scarify the top layer to a depth of at least 75 mm and blend new material in and compact and proof roll to



bring to grade. Make adjustments to rolling and finishing procedures as directed by the Contracting Officer to minimize segregation and degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated, uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, scarify the unsatisfactory portion and rework and recompact it or replace as directed.

3.11 SMOOTHNESS TEST

Construct the top layer so that the surface shows no deviations in excess of 10 mm when tested with a 3. 00 meter straightedge. Take measurements in successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Also take measurements perpendicular to the centerline at 15 meter intervals. Correct deviations exceeding this amount by removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to meet these specifications.



Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and compacted ABC and GCA. Take samples and test at the rates indicated. Perform sampling and testing of recycled concrete aggregate at twice the specified frequency until the material uniformity is established.


b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square meters , or portion thereof, of material placed.


d. Measure the thickness of the base course at intervals providing at least one measurement for each 500 square meters of base course or part thereof. Measure the thickness using test holes, at least 75 mm in diameter through the base course.


Final approval of the materials will be based on tests for gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).

3.13 TRAFFIC

Do not allow traffic on the completed base course for airfield pavements . For roads, d o not allow heavy equipment on the completed base course except when necessary for construction. When it is necessary for heavy equipment to travel on the completed base course, protect the area against marring or damage to the completed work.

3.14 MAINTENANCE

Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full



pavement section is completed and accepted. Immediately repair any defects and repeat repairs as often as necessary to keep the area intact. Retest any base course that was not paved over prior to the onset of winter to verify that it still complies with the requirements of this specification. Rework or replace any area of base course that is damaged as necessary to comply with this specification.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS

Dispose of any unsuitable materials that have been removed as directed . No additional payments will be made for materials that have to be replaced.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 32 12 13 ( May 2017) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 32 12 10 ( August 2008)



SECTION 32 12 13

BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS05/17


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or bi t umi nous t ack and pr i me coat s f or ai r f i el d pavement s, r oads, par ki ng ar eas and gener al pavi ng needs.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL


**************************************************************************1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e.



**************************************************************************



JIS K 2208 (2009) Asphalt Emulsion

JIS K 2251 (2003) Crude Petroleum and Petroleum Products - Sampling

1.2 SUBMITTALS



For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y. Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy and



Ai r For ce pr oj ect s.


**************************************************************************


SD-06 Test Reports

Sampling and Testing ; G


Certificates of compliance for asphalt materials delivered will be obtained and checked to ensure that specification requirements are met. Tack coat materials will not be diluted. Prime coat materials when emulsions are used can be diluted on site with potable water up to 1 part emulsion to 1 part water.


Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage. Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling.

1.5 EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND MACHINES


Equipment, tools and machines used in the work are subject to approval. Maintain in a satisfactory working condition at all times. Calibrate equipment such as asphalt distributors, scales, batching equipment, spreaders and similar equipment within 12 months of their use. If the calibration expires during project, recalibrate the equipment before work can continue.

1.5.2 Bituminous Distributor

Provide a self propelled distributor with pneumatic tires of such size and number to prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the surface being sprayed. Design and equip the distributor to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled total liquid rates from 0.14 to 4.5 L/square meter , with a pressure range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa and with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent, and at



variable widths. Include with the distributor equipment a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars, tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor. The distributor will be capable of circulating and agitating the bituminous material during the heating process.

1.5.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks

Use steam, electric, or hot oil heaters for heating the bituminous material. Provide steam heaters consisting of steam coils and equipment for producing steam, so designed that the steam cannot come in contact with the bituminous material. Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature range from 4.4 to 204.4 degrees C so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be determined at all times.

1.5.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers

Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to which the bituminous coat is to be applied.


Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat is dry. A limited amount of moisture (approximately 0.14 liter/square meter ) can be sprayed on the surface of unbound material when prime coat is used to improve coverage and penetration of asphalt material. Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 10 degrees C or above and when the temperature has not been below 2 degrees C for the 12 hours prior to application, unless otherwise directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIME COAT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he pr i me coat mat er i al speci f i cat i ons as r ecommended by Japan Road Association.

**************************************************************************

2.1.1 Emulsified Asphalt

Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to JIS K 2208 , Type PK-3. . Asphalt emulsion can be diluted up to 1 part water to 1 part emulsion for prime coat use. Do not dilute asphalt emulsion for tack coat use.

2.2 TACK COAT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he t ack coat mat er i al speci f i cat i ons as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************



2.2.1 Emulsified Asphalt

Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to JIS K 2208 , Type PK-4. For prime coats the emulsified asphalt can be diluted with up to 1 part emulsion to 1 part water. No dilution is allowed for tack coat applications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f t he sur f ace t o be t r eat ed r equi r es r epai r , t he met hod of r epai r and ext ent of wor k i nvol ved shoul d be shown or descr i bed.

**************************************************************************

Immediately before applying the bituminous coat, remove all loose material, dirt, clay, or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms. Apply treatment only when the surface is dry and clean.

3.2 APPLICATION RATE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he appl i cat i on r at es as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer.

3.2.1 Tack Coat

Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than 0. 30 L nor more than 0. 60 L/square meter of residual asphalt onto the pavement surface as approved by the Contracting Officer. Do not dilute asphalt emulsion when used as a tack coat.

3.2.2 Prime Coat

Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than 1.0 L nor more than 2.0 L/square meter of residual asphalt for asphalt emulsion up to a 1 to 1 dilution rate or for residual asphalt for cutback asphalt.

3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE

3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship

Apply asphalt at a temperature that will provide a viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 square mm/sec , kinematic. Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting Officer.

3.3.2 Temperature Ranges

The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be used. The following is a normal range of application temperatures:



Asphalt Emulsion

All Grades 20-70 degrees C

3.4 APPLICATION

3.4.1 General

Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, apply the bituminous prime or tack coat with the bituminous distributor at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated. Properly treat all areas and spots, not capable of being sprayed with the distributor, with the hand spray. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, maintain the surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient areas at no additional cost to the Government. If required, spread clean dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material. No smoking, fires, or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part of the equipment are permitted within 8 meters of heating, distributing, and transferring operations of cutback materials. Prevent all traffic, except for paving equipment used in constructing the surfacing, from using the underlying material, whether primed or not, until the surfacing is completed. The bituminous coat requirements are described herein.

3.4.2 Prime Coat

The prime coat is required if it will be at least 7 days before the asphalt mixture is constructed on the underlying (base course, etc.) compacted material. The type of liquid asphalt and application rate will be as specified herein. Protect the underlying layer from any damage (water, traffic, etc.) until the surfacing is placed. If the Contractor places the surfacing within seven days, the choice of protection measures or actions to be taken is at the Contractor's option. Repair (recompact or replace) damage to the underlying material caused by lack of, or inadequate, protection by approved methods at no additional cost to the Government. If the Contractor opts to use the prime coat, apply as soon as possible after consolidation of the underlying material. Apply the bituminous material uniformly over the surface to be treated at a pressure range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa ; the rate will be as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. To obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the surface treated at the junction of previous and subsequent applications, spread building paper on the surface for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper and to ensure that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated. Immediately after application remove and destroy the building paper.

3.4.3 Tack Coat

A tack coat should be applied to every bound surface (asphalt or concrete pavement) that is being overlaid with asphalt mixture and at transverse and longitudinal joints. Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is clean and dry. Immediately following the preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature specified herein and at a rate as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed



by the distributor by spraying with a hand wand or using other approved method. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed.

3.5 CURING PERIOD

Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of asphalt mixture allow the bituminous coat to cure and water or volatiles to evaporate prior to overlaying. Maintain the tacked surface in good condition until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and recoating deficient areas. Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for a period of at least 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary to attain penetration into the treated course. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up excess bituminous material.


Obtain certificates of compliance for all asphalt material delivered to the project. Obtain samples of the bituminous material under the supervision of the Contracting Officer. The sample may be retained and tested by the Government at no cost to the Contractor.

3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING

Furnish certified copies of the manufacturer's test reports indicating temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt or asphalt cement, compliance with applicable specified requirements, not less than 5 days before the material is required in the work.

3.7.1 Sampling

Unless otherwise specified, sample bituminous material in accordance with JIS K 2251 .

3.7.2 Calibration Test

Furnish all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to calibrate the bituminous distributor. Calibrate using the approved job material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared surface.

3.7.3 Trial Applications

Before applying the spray application of tack or prime coat, apply three lengths of at least 30 meters for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied.

3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate

Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous tack coat materials in the amount of 0.23 L/square meter . Make other trial applications using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.



3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate

Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous materials in the amount of 0.66 L/square meter . Make other trial applications using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.

3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction

Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS

Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated surfaces.







SECTION 32 12 16

HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS08/09


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or hot - mi x asphal t ( HMA) cour ses ( cent r al - pl ant hot - mi x) f or r oads.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL


**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he



publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e.



**************************************************************************



JIS A 1110 (2006) Methods of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Coarse Aggregates


JIS A 1122 (2014) Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate

JIS A 1137 (2014) Method of Test for Clay Lumps Contained in Aggregates


JIS A 5008 (2008) Limestone Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

JIS K 2207 (2006) Petroleum Asphalts

JAPAN ROAD ASSOCIATION (JRA)

JRA HAP (2019) Handbook for Asphalt Pavement


All materials, equipment, and construction procedures of hot-mix asphalt pavement for this project shall be in accordance with the Japan Road Association standards per publication identified in this specification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Revi ew submi t t al descr i pt i on ( SD) def i ni t i ons



i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES and edi t t he f ol l owi ng l i s t t o r ef l ect onl y t he submi t t al s r equi r ed f or t he pr oj ect .




**************************************************************************


SD-03 Product Data

Mix Design ; G

Quality Control ; G

Material Acceptance ; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Aggregates ; G

QC Monitoring



SD-07 Certificates

Asphalt Cement ; G

Testing Laboratory


Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if requested; however, meet all other requirements, including compaction.

Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course

Mat Thickness, mm inches Degrees C F

75 3 or greater 4 40

Less than 75 3 7 45

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections indicated. Construct each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and roll, finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course.

2.2 AGGREGATES

Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The portion of material retained on the 5 mm sieve is coarse aggregate. The portion of material passing the 5 mm sieve and retained on the 0.07 4 mm sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the 0.07 4 mm sieve is defined as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to start of construction.

2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he coar se aggr egat e gr adat i on as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles, free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other deleterious substances and conforming to JIS A 5001 . All individual coarse aggregate sources shall meet the following requirements:

Percent Passing (by Weight)



Sieve Size (mm) S-20 (20-13 mm) S-13 (13-5 mm) S-5 (5-2.5 mm)

25 100 - -

20 85 - 100 100 -

13 0 - 15 85 - 100 100

5 - 0 - 15 85 - 100

2.5 - - 0 - 25

a. At least 75 percent by weight of the aggregate shall have two or more fractured faces in accordance with JRA HAP

b. It shall be of uniform quality, clean, hard and durable, and shall not contain deleterious substances over the maximum percent by weight, such as clay or loam (0.25% maximum), soft stone pieces (5.0% maximum), and flat or elongated stone pieces (10.0% maximum) in accordance with JRA HAP.

c. Specific gravity shall be 2.45 or more when tested with JIS A 1110 , water absorption shall be 3.0 percent or less when tested with JIS A 1110 , and wear shall be not more than 30 percent when tested with JIS A 1121 .

d. Soundness of aggregate shall be not more than 12 percent when tested with JIS A 1122 .

2.2.2 Fine Aggregate

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he f i ne aggr egat e gr adat i on as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

Fine aggregate shall consist of natural or manufactured sand, and screenings conforming to JIS A 5001 , except as modified herein. Fine aggregate shall meet requirements for wear and soundness specified for coarse aggregate. Since screenings may contain deleterious substances, such as silt and clay, it is necessary to perform sufficient examination before use. Clay lumps content shall be less than 0.25% when tested with JIS A 1137 . Gradation of fine aggregate shall be as follows:

Sieve Size (mm) Percent Passing (by Weight)

5 100

2.5 85 - 100

0.6 25 - 55

0.3 15 - 40




0.15 7 - 28

0.074 0 - 20

2.2.3 Mineral Filler

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he mi ner al f i l l er aggr egat e gr adat i on as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

Mineral filler shall be pulverized limestone or igneous rock that is sufficiently dry and free of lumps and meeting the requirements of JIS A 5008 . Moisture content shall be less than 1.0 percent, and specific gravity shall be more than 2.60 percent. Gradation of mineral filler shall be as follows:


0.6 100

0.15 Over 90

0.074 Over 70

2.2.4 Composition of Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixture

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he combi ned aggr egat e gr adat i on as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

2.2.4.1 Aggregate Gradation

The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in Table 1 and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.

Table 1

Total Percent Passing (By Weight)



Sieve Size (mm) Binder Course (Max. 20 mm)

Wearing Course (Max. 20 mm)

Wearing Course (Max. 13 mm)

25 100 100 -

20 95 - 100 95 - 100 100

13 70 - 90 75 - 90 95 - 100

5 35 - 55 45 - 65 55 -70

2.5 20 - 35 35 - 50 35 -50

0.6 11 - 23 18 - 30 18 - 30

0.3 5 - 16 10 - 21 10 - 21

0.15 4 - 12 6 - 16 6 - 16

0.074 2 - 7 4 - 8 4 - 8

2.2.4.2 Quantity of Asphalt Cement

Mix asphalt cement with aggregates of corresponding mixes in the following proportions:

Asphalt Cement Percent by Weight of Total Mix

Binder Course Wearing Course

4.5 - 6 5 - 7

2.3 ASPHALT CEMENT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y t he asphal t cement bi nder as r ecommended by Japan Road Associ at i on.

**************************************************************************

Asphalt cement shall conform to JIS K 2207 , penetration grade 40-60 (high traffic areas), 60-80 (general traffic conditions), 80-100 (snowy regions), and 100-120 (extremely cold places).

2.4 MIX DESIGN

a. Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in separate size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula (JMF). Submit proposed JMF; do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until a JMF has been approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 5 of the JRA HAP - Handbook for Asphalt Pavement and the criteria shown in Table 2.



2.4.1 JMF Requirements

Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior to the start of the test section including as a minimum:

a. Source and proportions, percent by weight, of each ingredient of the mixture.

b. Correct gradation, the percentages passing each size sieve listed in the specification for the mixture to be used, for the aggregate and mineral filler from each separate source and from each different size to be used in the mixture and for the composite mixture.

c. Amount of material passing the JIS 0.074 mm sieve as determined by dry sieving.

d. Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen.

e. Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt pavement.

f. Stability, flow, percent voids in mineral aggregate, percent air voids, and unit weight.

g. Asphalt absorption by the aggregate.

h. Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix.

i. Temperature of the mixture immediately upon completion of mixing.

j. Asphalt viscosity grade and/or penetration range.

k. Curves for the binder and wearing courses.

2.4.1.1 Marshall Test

Marshall test specimen of hot-mix asphalt mixture shall be prepared in a laboratory to determine the optimum composition of aggregates and the optimum quantity of asphalt cement. Aggregate gradation and asphalt cement content used in the mixtures shall be within the limits specified. Standard value for Marshall test shall be as follows:

Table 25. Mix Design Criteria

Test Property Type of Mixture 50 Blows or MixGyrations Binder

Course

75 Blows or MixGyrations Wearing Course

Stability, N pounds , minimum (NA for Superpave) Number of Blows (Traffic Classification C or heavier)

* 4450 1000 75 * 8000 1800 75

Number of Blows (Traffic Classification B or ligher)

8-18 50 8-16 50

Percentage of Air Voids (%) 3-5 3-7 3-5 3-6



Table 25. Mix Design Criteria

Test Property Type of Mixture 50 Blows or MixGyrations Binder

Course

75 Blows or MixGyrations Wearing Course

Voids Filled with Asphalt (%) Percent Voids in mineral aggregate (VMA),(minimum)

65-85 70-85

Gradation 1 Marshall Stability (kgf) 13.0 500 or more 13.0 750 or more

Gradation 2 Flow Value (1/100cm) 14.0 20-40 14.3 20-40

2.4.2 Adjustments to Field JMF

Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Should a change in sources of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and a new JMF approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below to optimize mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting Officer. Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field (plant) established JMF and limited to those values as shown. Adjustments shall be targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix (VTM).

TABLE 36. Field (Plant) Established JMF Tolerances

Sieves , mm Adjustments (plus or minus), percent

12.5 1/2 inch 13 3

4.75 No. 4 5 3

2.36 No. 8 2.5 3

0.075 No. 200 0.074 1

Binder Content 0.4

If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be outside the limits shown in Table 1; while not desirable, this is acceptable, except for the 0.07 4 mm sieve, which shall remain within the aggregate grading of Table 1.

2.5 RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Recl ai med Asphal t Pavement ( RAP) can be used up t o 30 per cent as l ong as t he r esul t i ng r ecycl ed mi x meet s al l r equi r ement s t hat ar e speci f i ed f or



vi r gi n mi xt ur es. The 30 per cent i s a gener al l i mi t . I f t he exi st i ng asphal t pavement i s r el at i vel y ol d, t he amount of RAP used wi l l not appr oach t hi s l i mi t . I f t he r ecycl i ng i nvol ves r el at i vel y new RAP mat er i al s, t he per cent age of RAP speci f i ed bel ow coul d be gr eat er t han 30 per cent . Remove t hese par agr aphs i f RAP i s not used. Ref er t o UFC 3- 250- 03, " St andar d Pr act i ce Manual f or Fl exi bl e Pavement s" f or f ur t her desi gn gui dance.

**************************************************************************

Recycled HMA shall consist of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt cement to produce a consistent gradation and asphalt content and properties. When RAP is fed into the plant, the maximum RAP chunk size shall not exceed 50 mm . The amount of RAP shall not exceed 30 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL

Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than 160 degrees C when added to the aggregates.

3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE

Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall not exceed 175 degrees C when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.

3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE

Accurately weigh or gauge the aggregates and the dry mineral filler and convey into the mixer in the proportionate amounts of each aggregate size required to meet the job-mix formula. Introduce required amount of asphalt into the mixer at a temperature at which it can be applied uniformly to the aggregate but not to exceed 163 degrees C . In batch mixing, after the aggregates and mineral filler have been introduced into the mixer and mixed for not less than 15 seconds, add asphalt by spraying or other approved methods, and continue mixing for a period of not less than 20 seconds or as much longer as may be required to obtain a homogeneous mixture. The time required to add or spray the asphalt into the mixer will not be added to the total wet-mixing time provided this operation does not exceed 10 seconds and a homogeneous mixture is obtained. The additional mixing time, when required, will be as directed. The temperature of the mixture at the time of discharge shall not exceed 168 degrees C . The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler in the mixer shall not exceed 177 degrees C when the asphalt is added. When the mixture is prepared in a twin-pugmill mixer, the volume of the aggregates, mineral filler, and asphalt shall not extend above the tips of the mixer blades when the blades are in a vertical position. Overheated and carbonized mixtures, or mixtures that foam or show indication of free moisture, will be rejected. When free moisture is



detected in batch mix plant produced mixture, withdraw the aggregates in the hot bins immediately and return to the respective stockpiles.

3.4 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE

**************************************************************************NOTE: I f t he under l y i ng sur f ace t o be paved i s an unbound gr anul ar l ayer , a pr i me coat shoul d be appl i ed, especi al l y i f t hi s l ayer wi l l be exposed t o weat her f or an ext ended per i od of t i me pr i or t o cover i ng wi t h an asphal t mi xt ur e. The pr i me coat may be del et ed i f t he base cour se i s cover ed wi t h hot mi x wi t hi n 7 days and no si gni f i cant r ai nf al l i s ant i c i pat ed. I f t he base cour se i s t o r ecei ve t r af f i c pr i or t o appl i cat i on of t he sur f ace cour se, i t shoul d f i r st be pr i med and cur ed.

I f t he under l y i ng sur f ace t o be paved i s an exi st i ng asphal t or concr et e l ayer , a t ack coat shoul d al ways be used t o ensur e an adequat e bond bet ween l ayer s.

Del et e r equi r ement f or pr i me coat i f a dr ai nage l ayer i s used beneat h t he hot mi x l ayer .

**************************************************************************

Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying course of dust and debris. Apply a [prime coat] [and/or] [tack coat] in accordance with the contract specifications.

3.4.1 Raising of Existing Manhole, Handhole, Valve Box and Catch Basin

If there are existing manhole, handhole, valve box and catch basins in existing asphalt concrete pavement to be overlaid, those shall be raised up to flush with the finished surface of new hot-mix asphalt pavement before new asphalt concrete is placed. Existing mortar leveling course under the manhole, handhole and valve box shall be replaced with new up to new level to provide a flush setting.

3.5 TESTING LABORATORY

Submit laboratory certification issued by the local prefectural or central government (Japan Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism (MLIT)) . Use a laboratory to develop the JMF. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations. The laboratory shall maintain a valid certification for the duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum:

a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising technician, and testing technicians.

b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.

c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.



3.6 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING

3.6.1 Transporting

Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean, tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver. Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 60 degrees C . To deliver mix to the paver, use a material transfer vehicle operated to produce continuous forward motion of the paver.

3.6.2 Placing

Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 3 m . The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at least 300 mm ; however, the joint in the surface course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall be offset by at least 3 m from transverse joints in the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of 3 m . On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.

3.7 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE

After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Furnish sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened but excessive water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not be allowed.

3.8 JOINTS

The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond



between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for smoothness and grade.

3.8.1 Transverse Joints

Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from the project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.

3.8.2 Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less than 80 degrees C at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 75 mm from the top of the course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.

3.9 Finishing at Edge and Limit of Paving

Overlay of new hot-mix asphalt mixture shall be finished evenly in the same thickness indicated. Overlay shall be finished in gentle slope so that the edge of new overlaying pavement shall meet the edge elevation of existing asphalt concrete pavement. And where the drawing indicates "Limit of Paving," overlay shall be finished to provide a smooth transition to existing concrete pavement.

3.10 Compacted Earth Shoulder

Place and compact earth at edges of course for at least 30 cm of the shoulder.

3.11 QUALITY CONTROL

**************************************************************************NOTE: The Cont r act or may be abl e t o meet t he speci f i ed qual i t y cont r ol r equi r ement s wi t h i n- house capabi l i t y or may have t o hi r e a mat er i al t est i ng f i r m t o pr ovi de t he r equi r ed qual i t y cont r ol t est i ng.

**************************************************************************

3.11.1 General Quality Control Requirements

Develop and submit an approved Quality Control Plan. Submit aggregate and QC test results. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until the quality control plan has been approved addressing all elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to:

a. Mix Design



b. Aggregate Grading

c. Quality of Materials

d. Stockpile Management

e. Proportioning

f. Mixing and Transportation

g. Mixture Volumetrics

h. Moisture Content of Mixtures

i. Placing and Finishing

j. Joints

k. Compaction

l. Surface Smoothness

3.11.2 Testing Laboratory

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pr oj ect s l ess t han 1000 met r i c t ons del et e t he r equi r ement s f or a j ob s i t e l abor at or y. For smal l pr oj ect s t he Cont r act or may use a commer ci al l y appr oved l abor at or y.

**************************************************************************

Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job site. Laboratory facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.

3.11.3 Quality Control Testing

Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications in accordance with the testing criteria and frequency requirements as set forth in Chapter 6 of the JRA HAP - Handbook for Asphalt Pavement . Develop a Quality Control Testing Plan as part of a Quality Control Program. The testing program shall include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (, flow , in-place density, grade and smoothness.

3.11.3.1 Additional Testing

Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control



the process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.

3.11.3.2 QC Monitoring

Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.

3.11.4 Sampling

When directed by the Contracting Officer, sample and test any material which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard procedures specified.

3.12 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

**************************************************************************NOTE: As wr i t t en, t hi s speci f i cat i on r equi r es t he Cont r act or t o hi r e an i ndependent mat er i al t est i ng l abor at or y t o per f or m t he t est i ng l i s t ed i n t hi s Sect i on. The r esul t s ar e r equi r ed t o be f or war ded dai l y t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer as t he basi s f or acceptance.

The pr oj ect engi neer may choose t o have addi t i onal t est s conduct ed by t he QA t est agency t o moni t or aggr egat e gr adat i on, asphal t cont ent , Mar shal l st abi l i t y and f l ow. These t est s woul d ser ve as a check t o t he Cont r act or ' s QC t est i ng. Mar shal l st abi l i t y and f l ow coul d be done at mi ni mal cost s i nce t he speci mens have t o be made anyway f or l abor at or y ai r voi d det er mi nat i on.

**************************************************************************

3.12.1 Grade

The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 15 mm from the plan grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running lines of levels at intervals of 7.6 m , or less, longitudinally and transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high areas will not be permitted.



3.12.2 Surface Smoothness

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t hese par agr aphs as appr opr i at e t o t he pr oj ect . Speci f y t he pr of i l ogr aph met hod f or t est i ng i n t he l ongi t udi nal di r ect i on f or r oad l engt h exceedi ng 0. 4 km. Speci f y t he st r ai ght edge met hod f or l ongi t udi nal t est i ng on r oad l engt hs l ess t han 0. 4 km and f or al l t r ansver se smoot hness t est i ng. Use st r ai ght edge t est i ng i n bot h l ongi t udi nal and t r ansver se di r ect i ons f or par ki ng l ot s and al l ot her r oads and f or r oads wi t h desi gn speeds l ess t han 50 km/ hr .

**************************************************************************

Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Use the profilograph method for all longitudinal testing, except where the runs would be less than 60 m in length and the ends where the straightedge will be used.

3.12.2.1 Smoothness Requirements

3.12.2.1.1 Straightedge Testing

The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances of 6 mm in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, when tested with an approved 3 m straightedge.

3.12.2.1.2 Profilograph Testing

The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 3 mm or more, and each 0.1 km segment of each pavement lot shall have a Profile Index not greater than 140 mm/km when tested with an approved Japanese construction practice using profilometer . If the extent of the pavement in either direction is less than 60 m , that direction shall be tested by the straightedge method and shall meet requirements specified above.

3.12.2.2 Testing Method

After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 4.5 m or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 6.1 m wide and at the third points for lanes 6.1 m or wider. Also test other areas having obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across all joints.

3.12.2.2.1 Straightedge Testing

Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and move it ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding



(unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two high points.

3.12.2.2.2 Profilograph Testing

Perform profilograph testing using approved equipment and procedures. The equipment shall utilize electronic recording and automatic computerized reduction of data to indicate "must-grind" bumps and the Profile Index for each 0.1 km segment of each pavement lot. Grade breaks on parking lots shall be accommodated by breaking the profile segment into shorter sections and repositioning the blanking band on each segment. The "blanking band" shall be 5 mm wide and the "bump template" shall span 25 mm with an offset of 7.5 mm . Compute the Profile Index for each pass of the profilograph in each 0.1 km segment. The Profile Index for each segment shall be the average of the Profile Indices for each pass in each segment. Furnish a copy of the reduced tapes to the Government at the end of each day's testing.







**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 32 15 00 ( May 2017) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 32 15 00 ( Apr i l 2008)



SECTION 32 15 00

AGGREGATE SURFACING05/17


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or aggr egat e sur f aci ng f or r oads, par ki ng ar eas and Ar my ai r f i el ds.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e



when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************


**************************************************************************












1.2 DEGREE OF COMPACTION

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in JIS A 1210 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density.



1.3 SUBMITTALS



For submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval on Ar my pr oj ect s, a code of up t o t hr ee char act er s wi t hi n t he submi t t al t ags may be used f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on t o i ndi cat e t he appr ovi ng aut hor i t y. Codes f or Ar my pr oj ect s usi ng t he Resi dent Management Syst em ( RMS) ar e: " AE" f or Ar chi t ect - Engi neer ; " DO" f or Di st r i ct Of f i ce ( Engi neer i ng Di v i s i on or ot her or gani zat i on i n t he Di st r i ct Of f i ce) ; " AO" f or Ar ea Of f i ce; " RO" f or Resi dent Of f i ce; and " PO" f or Pr oj ect Of f i ce. Codes f ol l owi ng t he " G" t ypi cal l y ar e not used f or Navy and Ai r For ce projects.

An " S" f ol l owi ng a submi t t al i t em i ndi cat es t hat t he submi t t al i s r equi r ed f or t he Sust ai nabi l i t y eNot ebook t o f ul f i l l f eder al l y mandat ed sust ai nabl e r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 29 SUSTAI NABI LI TY REPORTI NG. Locat e t he " S" submi t t al under t he SD number t hat best descr i bes t he submi t t al i t em.

**************************************************************************


SD-03 Product Data

Plant, Equipment, and Tools ;

SD-06 Test Reports

Initial Tests ; GIn-Place Tests ; G





**************************************************************************

All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer before the work is started. Maintain all plant, equipment, and tools in satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed equipment, including descriptive data. Provide adequate equipment having the capability of minimizing segregation, producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.


Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform sampling and testing using a laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10 01 45 00.00 20 01 45 00.00 40 QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements and perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.

1.5.1 Sampling


1.5.2 Testing


Perform sieve analysis in conformance with JIS A 1103 and JIS A 1102 using sieves conforming to JIS Z 8801 .




Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content in accordance with paragraph DEGREE OF COMPACTION.



1.5.2.5 Wear Test

Perform wear tests on aggregate surface course material in conformance with JIS A 1121 .





**************************************************************************

Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 2 degrees C . It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect, by approved method or methods, all areas of surfacing that have not been accepted by the Contracting Officer. Bring surfaces damaged by freeze, rainfall, or other weather conditions to a satisfactory condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

Provide aggregates consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of natural gravel, crushed gravel, crushed stone, sand, slag, soil, or other approved materials processed and blended or naturally combined. Provide aggregates free from lumps and balls of clay, organic matter, objectionable coatings, and other foreign materials. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining materials that meet the specification and can be used to meet the grade and smoothness requirements specified herein after all compaction and proof rolling operations have been completed. Aggregates shall conform to JIS A 5001 , M-30/RM-30.

2.1.1 Coarse Aggregates

The material retained on the 5 mm sieve is known as coarse aggregate. Use only coarse aggregates that are reasonably uniform in density and quality. Use only coarse aggregate having a percentage of wear not exceeding 50 percent after 500 revolutions as determined by JIS A 1121 . The amount of flat and/or elongated particles must not exceed 20 percent. A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than three; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than three. When the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from each source must meet the requirements set forth herein.

2.1.2 Fine Aggregates

The material passing the 5 mm sieve is known as fine aggregate. Fine aggregate consists of screenings, sand, soil, or other finely divided mineral matter that is processed or naturally combined with the coarse aggregate.

2.1.3 Gradation Requirements




**************************************************************************

Gradation requirements specified in TABLE I apply to the completed aggregate surface. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain materials that will meet the gradation requirements after mixing, placing, compacting, and other operations. TABLE I shows permissible gradings for granular material used in aggregate surface roads and airfields. Use sieves conforming to JIS Z 8801 .

GRADATION OF AGGREGATES

Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve

Sieve Designation M-30 / RM-30

37.5 100

31.5 95-100

19.0 60-90

4.75 30-65

2.36 20-50

0.425 10-30

0.075 2-10

2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX

The portion of the completed aggregate surface course passing the 0.425 mm sieve must have a maximum liquid limit of 35 and a plasticity index of 4 to 9.


2.3.1 Initial Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements when furnished. Complete this testing for each source if materials from more than one source are proposed.

a. Sieve Analysis.



d. Wear.






PART 3 EXECUTION


Prior to stockpiling the material, clear and level the storage sites. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Stockpile aggregates in such a manner that will prevent segregation. Stockpile aggregates and binders obtained from different sources separately.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE SUBGRADE

Clean the underlying course subgrade and shoulders of all foreign substances. Do not construct the surface course on underlying course subgrade that is frozen material. Correct ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying course subgrade, areas having inadequate compaction and deviations of the surface from the requirements set forth herein by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade and recompacting to density requirements specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK Section 32 11 20 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND SUBBASES FOR FLEXIBLE PAVING. Do not allow traffic or other operations to disturb the completed underlying course subgrade and maintain in a satisfactory condition until the surface course is placed.

3.3 GRADE CONTROL

During construction, maintain the lines and grades including crown and cross slope indicated for the aggregate surface course by means of line and grade stakes placed by the Contractor in accordance with the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.


Mix and place the materials to obtain uniformity of the material and a uniform optimum water content for compaction. Make adjustments in mixing, placing procedures, or in equipment to obtain the true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to obtain the desired water content, and to ensure a satisfactory surface course.

3.5 LAYER THICKNESS

Place the aggregate material on the underlying course subgrade in layers of uniform thickness. Compact the completed aggregate surface course to the thickness indicated. No individual layer may be thicker than 150 mm nor be thinner than 75 mm in compacted thickness. Compact the aggregate surface course to a total thickness that is within 13 mm of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm thicker than indicated, the course will be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. The average job thickness will be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job and must be within 6 mm of the thickness indicated. Measure the



total thickness of the aggregate surface course at intervals of one measurement for each 500 square meters of surface course. Measure total thickness using 75 mm diameter test holes penetrating the aggregate surface course.

3.6 COMPACTION

Degree of compaction is a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in JIS A 1210 abbreviated herein as percent laboratory maximum density. Compact each layer of the aggregate surface course with approved compaction equipment, as required in the following paragraphs. Maintain the water content during the compaction procedure at optimum or at the percentage specified by the Contracting Officer. Compact the mixture with mechanical tampers in locations not accessible to rollers. Continue compaction until each layer through the full depth is compacted to at least 100 percent of laboratory maximum density. Remove any materials that are found to be unsatisfactory and replace them with satisfactory material or rework them to produce a satisfactory material.

3.7 EDGES OF AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE

Place approved material along the edges of the aggregate surface course in such quantity as to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed. Simultaneously roll and compact at least 300 mm of shoulder width with the rolling and compacting of each layer of the surface course when the course is being constructed in two or more layers.

3.8 SMOOTHNESS TEST

Construct each layer so that the surface shows no deviations in excess of 10 mm when tested with a 3 m straightedge applied both parallel with and at right angles to the centerline of the area to be paved. Correct deviations exceeding this amount by removing material, replacing with new material, or reworking existing material and compacting, as directed.



Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and compacted aggregate surface course. Take samples and test at the rates indicated.


b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square meters , or portion thereof, of material placed.


d. Measure the thickness of the aggregate surface course at intervals providing at least one measurement for each 500 square meters of base course or part thereof. Measure the thickness using test holes, at least 75 mm in diameter through the aggregate surface course.




Final approval of the materials will be based on tests for gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken from the completed and full coompacted aggregate surface course.

3.10 MAINTENANCE

Maintain the aggregate surface course in a condition that will meet all specification requirements until accepted.










SECTION 32 16 19

CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS05/18


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or concr et e s i dewal ks and cur bs and gutters.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

************************************************************************** NOTE: Thi s speci f i cat i on may be adj ust ed t o cover separ at e cur bs and gut t er s or combi nat i on cur bs and gut t er s. Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on wi l l not be used f or i nt egr al or monol i t hi c cur bs of concr et e pavement or f or cur bs and gut t er s f or br i dges.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s f or a basi c Japan



Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . Desi gner shal l t ai l or as appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES




**************************************************************************


ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM D1751 (2004; E 2013; R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)


JIS A 1101 (2014) Method of Test for Slump of Concrete

JIS A 1115 (2014) Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete

JIS A 1118 (2017) Method of Test for Air Content of Fresh Concrete by Volumetric Method

JIS A 1128 (2014) Method of Test for Air Content of Fresh Concrete by Pressure Method

JIS A 1132 (2014) Method of Making and Curing



Concrete Specimens

JIS A 5308 (2014) Ready-Mixed Concrete

JIS A 5371 (2010) Precast Unreinforced Concrete Product

JIS A 5758 (2016) Sealants for Sealing and Glazing in Buildings

JIS G 3112 (2010) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

JIS G 3551 (2005) Welded Wire Mesh and Rebar Grid

JIS K 6781 (1994) Polyethylene Films for Agriculture

1.2 SUBMITTALS





**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;



submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Concrete ; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control



Plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work will be subject to approval and must be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. Use equipment capable of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Discontinue using equipment that produces unsatisfactory results. Allow the Contracting Officer access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications.

1.3.2 Slip Form Equipment

Slip form paver or curb forming machines, will be approved based on trial use on the job and must be self-propelled, automatically controlled, crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in one pass.


1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 5 degrees C and is falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 2 degrees C and is rising, or is already above 5 degrees C . Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 2 degrees C , placement and protection must be approved in writing. Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. Prepare and protect the underlying material so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Heat mixing water and aggregates as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 10 and 30 degrees C . Methods and equipment for heating must be approved. Use only aggregates that are free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Provide covering or other means as needed to maintain the concrete at a temperature of at least 10 degrees C for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.



1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed must not exceed 30 degrees C except where an approved retarder is used. Cool the mixing water and aggregates as necessary to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The placing temperature must not exceed 35 degrees C at any time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y l ocal mat er i al s f or concr et e wor ks t hat conf or m t o t he Japanese I ndust r i al St andar ds ( JI S) r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE , JIS A 5308 except as otherwise specified. Concrete must have a minimum compressive strength of 24 MPa at 28 days. Size of aggregate must not exceed 37.5 mm . Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.

2.1.1 Air Content

Use concrete mixtures that have an air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.

2.1.2 Slump

Use concrete with a slump of 75 mm plus or minus 25 mm for hand placed concrete or 25 mm plus or minus 10 mm for slipformed concrete as determined in accordance with JIS A 1101 .

2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel

Use reinforcement bars conforming to JIS G 3112 . Use wire mesh reinforcement conforming to JIS G 3551 .

2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials

Use impervious sheet materials conforming to JIS K 6781 , type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, must be white opaque.

2.2.2 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

Use Japanese manufactured white pigmented membrane-forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type 2.

2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS

Use concrete protection materials consisting of a linseed oil mixture of equal parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may



be used, except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.

2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e cont r act i on j oi nt f i l l er when not cont empl at ed f or t he pr oj ect . Cur b and gut t er const r uct i on i n Japan use pr ecast concr et e cur bs wi t h cast - i n- pl ace concr et e gut t er s, and onl y expansi on j oi nt s ar e pr ovi ded f or t he gut t er por t i on. A pr ecast concr et e cur b and gut t er sect i on i s al so avai l abl e l ocal l y.

**************************************************************************

2.4.1 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ei t her t ype of j oi nt seal er may be speci f i ed i f det er mi ned necessar y by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer and t he i nappl i cabl e publ i cat i on r emoved. Joi nt seal i ng mat er i al may be omi t t ed wher e seal i ng of expansi on j oi nt s i s not deemed essent i al or advisable.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Modi f y t he t hi ckness of t he expansi on j oi nt t o mat ch l ocal l y avai l abl e pr oduct . A 10- mm t hi ck j oi nt f i l l er i s nor mal l y used f or cast - i n- pl ace gut t er s and si dewal ks i n Japan.

**************************************************************************

Unless otherwise indicated, use 10 mm thick Japanese manufactured premolded expansion joint filler conforming to ASTM D1751.

2.5 JOINT SEALANTS

Use Japanese manufactured cold-applied joint sealant conforming to JIS A 5758 .

2.6 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Use wood or steel forms that are straight and of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete.

2.6.1 Wood Forms

Use forms that are surfaced plank, 50 mm nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Use forms with a nominal length of 3 m . Radius bends may be formed with 19 mm boards, laminated to the required thickness.

2.6.2 Steel Forms

Use channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Use forms with



interlocking and self-aligning ends. Provide flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers as needed. Use forms with a nominal length of 3 m and that have a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Use stake pins consisting of solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.

2.6.3 Sidewalk Forms

Use sidewalk forms that are of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk.

2.6.4 Curb and Gutter Forms

Use curb and gutter outside forms that have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. Use rigid forms for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 3 m or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 38 mm benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing this surface, provided the results are approved.

2.6.5 Precast Concrete Curb or Precast Concrete Curb and Gutter

Precast concrete curb or precast concrete curb and gutter, where indicated, shall conform to JIS A 5371 .

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Construct subgrade to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement.

3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade

Place and compact the subgrade in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK . Test the subgrade for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.

3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade

Place and compact the subgrade in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK Section 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES . Test the subgrade for grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. Use subgrade materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent pavement.

3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade

Maintain subgrade in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade must be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. Prepare and protect subgrade so that it is free from frost when the concrete is deposited.



3.2 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 1.2 m . Use additional stakes and braces at corners, deep sections, and radius bends, as required. Use clamps, spreaders, and braces where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Remove forms in a manner that will not injure the concrete. Do not use bars or heavy tools against the concrete when removing the forms. Promptly and satisfactorily repair concrete found to be defective after form removal. Clean forms and coat with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory.

3.2.1 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 3 mm in any 3 m long section. After forms are set, grade and alignment must be checked with a 3 m straightedge. Sidewalks must have a transverse slope of 20 mm per meter Unless otherwise indicated, construct sidewalks that are located adjacent to curbs with the low side adjacent to the curb. Do not remove side forms less than 12 hours after finishing has been completed.

3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters

Remove forms used along the front of the curb not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Do not remove forms used along the back of curb until the face and top of the curb have been finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Do not remove gutter forms while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction.

3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished, the sidewalks must be of the thickness indicated. Use a strike-off guided by side forms after concrete has been placed in the forms to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. Consolidate concrete by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator. Finish the surface to grade with a strike off.

3.3.2 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. Produce a scored surface by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.

3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing

Finish all slab edges, including those at formed joints, with an edger having a radius of 3 mm . Edge transverse joints before brooming. Eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger with brooming. Clean and solidly fill corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing with a



properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finish.

3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces must not vary more than 8 mm from the testing edge of a 3 m straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 6 mm .

3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter

Place concrete to the required section in a single lift. Consolidate concrete using approved mechanical vibrators. Curve shaped gutters must be finished with a standard curb "mule".

3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing

Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand placement.

3.4.3 Concrete Finishing

Float and finish exposed surfaces with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Brush floated surfaces with a fine-hair brush using longitudinal strokes. Round the edges of the gutter and top of the curb with an edging tool to a radius of 13 mm . Immediately after removing the front curb form, rub the face of the curb with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. Brush the front curb surface, while still wet, in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. Finish the top surface of gutter and entrance to grade with a wood float.

3.4.4 Joint Finishing

Finish curb edges at formed joints as indicated.

3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces must not vary more than 6 mm from the testing edge of a 3 m straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 6 mm .

3.4.6 Precast Concrete Curbs or Precast Concrete Curb and Gutter

Precast concrete curbs or precast concrete curbs and gutters where used shall be installed to line and grade as indicated. Joint width shall be 10 mm. Cement mortar shall be provided to set the curbs and fill the joints. Where only precast concrete curb is used, gutter shall be constructed with cast-in-place concrete. Curbs and gutter shall be accomplished to match existing grade at transition point to existing curbs and gutters.

3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Construct sidewalk joints to divide the surface into rectangular areas. Space transverse contraction joints at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or not to exceed 1.25 times the width , whichever is less, and continuous across the slab. Construct longitudinal contraction joints along the centerline of all sidewalks 3 m or more in width. Construct



transverse expansion joints at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, install transverse expansion joints as indicated. Form expansion joints around structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally.

3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

Form contraction joints in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness. Unless otherwise approved or indicated, either use a jointer to cut the groove or saw a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw. Construct sawed joints by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 3 mm blade. Provide an ample supply of saw blades on the jobsite before concrete placement is started. Provide at least one standby sawing unit in good working order at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations.

3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Form expansion joints using 1 0 mm joint filler strips. Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1751. Hold joint filler in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, round joint edges using an edging tool having a radius of 3 mm . Remove any concrete over the joint filler. At the end of the curing period, clean the top of expansion joints and fill with cold-applied joint sealant. Use joint sealant that is gray or stone in color. Thoroughly clean the joint opening before the sealing material is placed. Do not spill sealing material on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Apply joint sealing material only when the concrete at the joint is surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures are above 10 degrees C . Immediately remove any excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete and clean the concrete surfaces.

3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Accurately and securely fasten reinforcement steel in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.

3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS

Construct curb and gutter joints at right angles to the line of curb and gutter.

3.6.1 Expansion Joints

Form expansion joints by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter. Construct expansion joints in curb and gutter directly opposite expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement using the same type and thickness of joints as joints in the pavement. Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, provide expansion joints at least 1 0 mm in width at intervals not less than 10 meters nor greater than 36 meters . Seal expansion joints immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit. Seal



expansion joints and the top 25 mm depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints with joint sealant. Thoroughly clean the joint opening before the sealing material is placed. Do not spill sealing material on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint must be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures must be above 10 degrees C at the time of application of joint sealing material. Immediately remove excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete and clean concrete surfaces. Precast concrete curbs will not require expansion joints.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION


Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete must be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protect concrete as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period.

3.7.1.1 Mat Method

Cover the entire exposed surface with two or more layers of burlap. Overlap mats at least 150 mm . Thoroughly wet the mat with water prior to placing on concrete surface and keep the mat continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method

Wet the entire exposed surface with a fine spray of water and then cover with impervious sheeting material. Lay sheets directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 300 mm when a continuous sheet is not used. Use sheeting that is not less than 450 mm wider than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure sheeting using heavy wood planks or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Satisfactorily repair or replace sheets that are torn or otherwise damaged during curing. Sheeting must remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method

Apply a uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Coat formed surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Do not allow concrete surface to dry before application of the membrane. If drying has occurred, moisten the surface of the concrete with a fine spray of water and apply the curing compound as soon as the free water disappears. Apply curing compound in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 5 square meters/L for the total of both coats. Apply the second coat in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound must form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and must be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, apply an additional coat to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Respray concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied by the method and at the



coverage specified above. Respray areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period. Take precautions necessary to ensure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. Tightly seal the top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. Use a method used for sealing the joint groove that prevents loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Provide approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Adequately protect concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.

3.7.2 Backfilling

After curing, remove debris and backfill, grade, and compact the area adjoining the concrete to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.

3.7.3 Protection

Protect completed concrete from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Remove and reconstruct concrete that is damaged for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Dispose of removed material as directed.

3.7.4 Protective Coating

Apply a protective coating of linseed oil mixture to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Moist cure concrete to receive a protective coating.

3.7.4.1 Application

Complete curing and backfilling operation prior to applying two coats of protective coating. Concrete must be surface dry and clean before each application. Spray apply at a rate of not more than 11 square meters/L for first application and not more than 15.5 square meters/L for second application, except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture must be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect coated surfaces from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry.

3.7.4.2 Precautions

Do not heat protective coating by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and protect the coating from exposure to open flame, sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Do not apply material at ambient or material temperatures lower than 10 degrees C .




Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.


Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and additional tests to ensure that the requirements of these specifications are met.

3.8.2 Concrete Testing

3.8.2.1 Strength Testing

Take concrete samples in accordance with JIS A 1115 not less than once a day nor less than once for every 190 cubic meters of concrete placed. Mold cylinders in accordance with JIS A 1132 for strength testing by an approved laboratory. Each strength test result must be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 4 MPa .

3.8.2.2 Air Content

Determine air content in accordance with JIS A 1118 , or JIS A 1128 . Use JIS A 1128 with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Make two tests for air content on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift. Make additional tests when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector. Notify the placing forman if results are out of tolerance. The placing foreman must take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified.

3.8.2.3 Slump Test

Perform two slump tests on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 190 cubic meters , or fraction thereof, of concrete placed during each shift. Perform additional tests when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.

3.8.3 Thickness Evaluation

Determine the anticipated thickness of the concrete prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, construct the subgrade true to grade prior to concrete placement. The thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.



3.8.4 Surface Evaluation

Provide finished surfaces for each category of the completed work that are uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.

3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 6 mm the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.

3.9.2 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, reduce high areas either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete must not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding must not exceed 6 mm. Remove and replace pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified.

3.9.3 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Contracting Officer and deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Remove and replace areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 32 31 13 ( November 2016) Change 1 - 05/ 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NASA Super sedi ng UFGS- 32 31 13 ( August 2010)



SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES11/16


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or st eel f enci ng, i ncl udi ng post s, f abr i c, gat es, and mi scel l aneous accessor i es. Col or ed f abr i c and accessor i es may be used i f r equi r ed. Edi t speci f i cat i ons t o sui t t he pr oj ect scope.

Use Sect i on 32 31 13. 53 HI GH- SECURI TY CHAI N LI NK FENCES AND GATES when cover i ng t he r equi r ement s f or chai n l i nk f ence f or hi gh secur i t y appl i cat i ons.




**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s f or a basi c Japan Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . Desi gner shal l t ai l or as



appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement .**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES




**************************************************************************




JIS A 5540 (2008) Turnbuckle for Building

JIS B 1180 (2014) Hexagon Head Bolts and Hexagon Head Screws

JIS B 1181 (2014) Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts

JIS B 1256 (2008) Plain Washers

JIS G 3101 (2017) Rolled Steels for General Structure (Amendment 1)

JIS G 3444 (2016) Carbon Steel Tubes for General Structure

JIS G 3532 (2011) Low Carbon Steel Wires

JIS G 3533 (2008) Barbed Wires

JIS G 3552 (2011) Chain Link Wire Netting




1.2 SUBMITTALS




An " S" f ol l owi ng a submi t t al i t em i ndi cat es t hat t he submi t t al i s r equi r ed f or t he Sust ai nabi l i t y eNot ebook t o f ul f i l l f eder al l y mandat ed sust ai nabl e r equi r ement s i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 29 SUSTAI NABI LI TY REPORTI NG. Locat e t he " S" submi t t al under t he SD number t hat best descr i bes t he submi t t al i t em.

**************************************************************************


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fence Assembly ; G

Location of Gate, Corner, End, and Pull Posts ; G

Gate Assembly ; G

Gate Hardware and Accessories ; G



Erection/Installation Drawings ; G

SD-03 Product Data

Fence Assembly ; G

Gate Assembly ; G

Gate Hardware and Accessories ; G

Zinc Coating ; G

PVC Coating ; G

Fabric ; G

Stretcher Bars ; G

Barbed Wire ; G

Precast Concrete Posts ; G

Padlocks ; G

Turnbuckles ; G

Truss Rod ; G

Tension Wires ; G

Wire Ties ; G

Concrete ; G

SD-07 Certificates

Certificates of Compliance


Fence Assembly

Gate Assembly

Hardware Assembly

Accessories


Recycled Material Content

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

1.3.1 Certificates of Compliance

Submit certificates of compliance in accordance with the applicable reference standards and descriptions of this section for the following:



a. Zinc coating

b. PVC coating

c. Fabric

d. Stretcher bars

e. Gate hardware and accessories

f . Concrete


Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y Japanese manuf act ur ed pr oduct s f or chai n l i nk f ence and gat es t hat conf or m t o t he appl i cabl e Japanese I ndust r i al St andar ds ( JI S) as l i s t ed i n t hi s speci f i cat i on sect i on.

**************************************************************************


Provide fencing and gate materials , as specified.Submit reports of listing chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in grams for zinc coating, thickness of PVC coating .

Submit manufacturer's catalog data for complete fence assembly , gate assembly, hardware assembly and accessories . Provide chain link fence on concrete posts for Okinawa Area and chain link fence on pipe posts for all other regions in Japan.

2.2 COMPONENTS FOR CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATE

2.2.1 Fabric

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e t ype of f abr i c wi t h pr oj ect r equi r ement s. Fabr i c wi t h heavi er z i nc or al umi num coat i ng or pol yvi nyl chl or i de ( PVC) coat i ngs may be usef ul i n hi ghl y cor r osi ve envi r onment s.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose cor e wi r e gage appr opr i at e f or t he desi gn. Gages ar e not t he same f or al l mat er i al s. Pol yvi nyl chl or i de ( PVC) coat i ng may be speci f i ed f or ot her t han secur i t y pur poses when aest het i cs ar e of pr i me i mpor t ance and t he addi t i onal cost i s j ust i f i ed. Ther e ar e di f f er ent PVC- coat ed f abr i cs on t he mar ket . Var i at i ons may i ncl ude: The met hods of appl y i ng PVC coat i ng, wal l t hi ckness of PVC coat i ng, adhesi on of PVC coat i ng t o wi r e, and cost .



Take t hese f act or s i nt o consi der at i on when sel ect i ng a f ence f abr i c f or di f f er ent envi r onment al appl i cat i ons. PVC coat i ng of f enci ng f or cer t ai n secur i t y appl i cat i ons and gr ounded f enci ng r equi r es det ai l ed desi gn and speci f y i ng.

**************************************************************************

Fabric for fence and gates shall be galvanized steel chain link wire netting conforming to JIS G 3552 No. 8, 50 mm standard wire mesh.

2.2.2 Posts , Rails and Braces

2.2.2.1 Fence Posts for Okinawa Area

Shall be the commercial precast concrete posts of the type and size as indicated.

2.2.2.2 Fence Posts for Other Regions in Japan

Shall be carbon steel pipe conforming to JIS G 3444 , size and thickness as indicated, and galvanized.

2.2.2.3 Fence Rails and Braces, and Pipe Connectors


2.2.3 Structural Steel Bars, Plates and Shapes

Shall be JIS G 3101 , SS 400, galvanized.

2.2.4 Barbed Wire

Shall be JIS G 3533 , #12-gage, two-wire strand, a pitch of 102 mm, 4-pointed barbs and 2 to 7 twists.

2.2.5 Fastening Accessories

Shall be galvanized steel and shall be manufacturer's standard product.

2.2.6 Stretcher Bars

Provide bars that have one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric with a minimum cross section of 5 by 20 millimeter or of size as recommended by the fence manufacturer and conforming to JIS G 3101 .

2.2.7 Stretcher Bar Bands

Provide bar bands for securing stretcher bars to posts that are steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron spaced not over 381 millimeter on center or of size as recommended by the fence manufacturer . Bands may also be used in conjunction with special fittings for securing rails to posts. Provide bands with projecting edges chamfered or eased.

2.2.8 Post Tops

Provide tops that are steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron designed as a weathertight closure cap. Provide one cap for each post, unless equal protection is provided by a combination post-cap and wire supporting arm.



Provide caps with an opening to permit through passage of the top rail.

2.2.9 Gate Posts


2.2.10 Gates

2.2.10.1 Gate Assembly

Shape and size of the gate frame shall be as indicated. Framing and bracing members shall be of steel pipe specified herein.

2.2.10.2 Gate Leaves

For gate leaves, more than 2.44 m wide, provide intermediate members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate leaves less than 2.44 m wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Provide intermediate braces on all gate frames with an electro-mechanical lock. Attach fabric to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that welding will not be permitted.

2.2.10.3 Gate Hardware And Accessories

Submit manufacturer's catalog data. Furnish and install latches, hinges, stops, keepers, rollers, and other hardware items as required for the operation of the gate and shall be zinc-coated steel having weight of zinc-coating not less than HDZ 40B, JIS H 8641 . Gate latches shall be fork or plunger bar type. Arrange latches for padlocking so that the padlock will be accessible from both sides of the gate. Provide stops for holding the gates in the open position. For high security applications, each end member of gate frames shall be extended sufficiently above the top member to carry three strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence.

2.2.10.4 Turnbuckles for Gates

JIS A 5540 , galvanized, size as indicated.

2.2.10.5 Truss Rod

Shall be JIS G 3101 , 10 mm diameter, welded to fence post where indicated.

2.2.10.6 Tension Wires

Provide galvanized, coiled spring wire conforming to JIS G 3532 SWM-G3. Provide Zinc coating that weighs not less than 370 gram per square meter.

2.2.11 Wire Ties

Provide 2.3 millimeter galvanized steel wire conforming to JIS G 3532 for tying fabric to line posts,spaced 300 millimeter on center. For tying fabric to rails and braces, space wire ties 600 millimeter on center. For tying fabric to tension wire, space 2.7 millimeter hog rings 600 millimeter on center.

Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability.



Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric. Provide accessories with polyvinyl (PVC) coatings when PVC-coated fence fabric is required .

2.2.12 Bolts, Nuts and Washers

Steel conforming to JIS B 1180 , JIS B 1181 , JIS B 1256 respectively.

2.2.13 Padlocks

**************************************************************************NOTE: Consul t st at i on r egar di ng padl ocks. Most st at i ons wi l l pr ovi de padl ocks. I f Cont r act or f ur ni shed padl ocks ar e r equi r ed f or cer t ai n secur i t y appl i cat i ons, a padl ock conf or mi ng t o an appr opr i at e Mi l i t ar y or Agency Speci f i cat i on may need t o be speci f i ed. See r ef er enced speci f i cat i on f or t ypes, gr ades, and opt i ons avai l abl e.

**************************************************************************

Provide Japanese manufactured padlocks with keys and chain in conformance with the appropriate specification of the installation agency having jurisdiction.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

2.3.1 Zinc Coating

Hot dip galvanization shall be in conformance with JIS H 8641 .

2.3.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete for Fence and Gate Posts

Shall be of size as indicated. Concrete in conformance with JIS A 5308 and shall be a minimum compressive strength of 18 MPa at 28 days.

2.3.3 Grout

Provide grout of proportions one part portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.

2.4 GROUNDING

Ground the chain link fence and gates as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Submit manufacturer's erection/installation drawings and instructions that detail proper assembly and materials in the design for fence, gate, hardware and accessories.

3.1 PREPARATION

Ensure final grading and established elevations are complete prior to commencing fence installation.



3.1.1 Clearing and Grading

Clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles to install fencing . Establish a graded, compacted fence line prior to fencing installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Security

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph i f new f enci ng does not i nvol ve r el ocat i on or r epl acement of exi st i ng f enci ng. Dependi ng on nat ur e of f ence wor k, par agr aph may need f ur t her el abor at i on r egar di ng necessar y const r uct i on t o mai nt ai n per i met er .

**************************************************************************

Install new chain link fencing, remove existing fencing, and perform related work to provide continuous security for facility. Schedule and fully coordinate work with Contracting Officer and cognizant Security Officer.

3.2.2 Fence Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cer t ai n secur i t y appl i cat i ons r equi r e conf or mance t o an appl i cabl e OPNAVI NST.

**************************************************************************

Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Install fence in accordance with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.

3.2.2.1 Post Spacing

Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 3.048 m on center. Provide gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Do not exceed 152.4 m on straight runs between braced posts. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions, for changes in direction of 0.26 rad or more, or for abrupt changes in grade. Submit drawings showing location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts .

3.2.2.2 Top and Bottom Tension Wire

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e wi t h r equi r ement s f or t op and bot t om r ai l s. Speci f y bot t om t ensi on wi r e t o mai nt ai n f ence al i gnment , except f or desi gns r equi r i ng bot t om r ai l .

**************************************************************************

Install top and bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top and bottom tension wires within 203 mm of respective fabric line.

3.2.3 Excavation

Provide excavations for post footings which are drilled holes in virgin or compacted soil, of minimum sizes as indicated.



Space footings for line posts 3048 millimeter on center maximum and at closer intervals when indicated, with bottoms of the holes approximately 75 millimeter below the bottoms of the posts. Set bottom of each post not less than 915 millimeter below finished grade when in firm, undisturbed soil. Set posts deeper, as required, in soft and problem soils and for heavy, lateral loads.

Remove excavated soil from Government property.

When solid rock is encountered near the surface, drill into the rock at least 305 millimeter for line posts and at least 457 millimeter for end, pull, corner, and gate posts. Drill holes at least 25.4 millimeter greater in diameter than the largest dimension of the placed post.

If solid rock is below the soil overburden, drill to the full depth required except that penetration into rock need not exceed the minimum depths specified above.

3.2.4 Setting Posts

Remove loose and foreign materials from holes and moisten the soil prior to placing concrete.

Provide tops of footings that are trowel finished and sloped or domed to shed water away from posts. Set hold-open devices, sleeves, and other accessories in concrete.

Keep exposed concrete moist for at least 7 calendar days after placement or cured with a membrane curing material, as approved.

Grout all posts set into sleeved holes in concrete with an approved grouting material.

Maintain vertical alignment of posts in concrete construction until concrete has set.

3.2.4.1 Earth and Bedrock

**************************************************************************NOTE: Al t er nat e dr i ve anchor met hod may be speci f i ed as an opt i on wher e evi dence i ndi cat es t hat opt i onal met hod under s i mi l ar gr ound condi t i ons has sat i sf act or y and pr oven per f or mance r ecor d.

**************************************************************************

Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated on the manufactures installation drawings, except in bedrock. Compact concrete to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of 25.4 mm of grout around each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape.

3.2.4.2 Concrete Slabs and Walls

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph wher e r equi r ed by t he desi gn, ot her wi se del et e. Sl eeve j oi nt s f or non- r emovabl e f ence sect i ons ar e usual l y f i l l ed wi t h l ead or nonshr i nk gr out . Removabl e f ence sect i ons



may be usef ul as an economi cal means f or pr ovi di ng access t o equi pment . Sl eeve j oi nt s i n r emovabl e f ence sect i ons may be a t i ght s l i di ng t ype, or wher e moi st ur e ent r y coul d be a pr obl em, f i l l ed wi t h pi pe sul phur j oi nt i ng compound.

**************************************************************************

Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 305 mm . Fill sleeve joint with lead, nonshrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for support of removable fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold posts aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material.

3.2.4.3 Bracing

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use a s i ngl e di agonal t r uss r od f or f ences l ess t han 3. 7 m hi gh. Use t wo di agonal t r uss r ods on f ences 3. 7 m and hi gher .

**************************************************************************

Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a compression member, placed at least 305 mm below top of fence, and two diagonal tension rods.

a. Tolerances

Provide posts that are straight and plumb within a vertical tolerance of 6.35 millimeter after the fabric has been stretched. Provide fencing and gates that are true to line with no more than 12.7 millimeter deviation from the established centerline between line posts. Repair defects as directed.

3.2.5 Concrete Strength

Provide concrete that has attained at least 75 percent of its minimum 28-day compressive strength, but in no case sooner than 7 calendar days after placement, before rails, tension wire, or fabric are installed. Do not stretch fabric and wires or hang gates until the concrete has attained its full design strength.

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph i f t he r ef er enced sect i on i s not i ncl uded.

**************************************************************************

Take samples and test concrete to determine strength as specified.

3.2.6 Supporting Arms (only for Security Chain Link Fence and Gates)

It is the Contractor's option to choose the following type of supporting arms; type (1) or type (2). Type (1): Supporting arm shall be top part of fence and gate post, which shall be one length, seamless pipe through post to arm. Type (2): If the selected manufacturer's standard product uses the sectional type supporting arms, that shall be designed to accomodate the top rail. Install supporting arms as recommended by the manufacturer. In addition to manufacturer's standard connections, securely anchor supporting arms to posts to prevent easy removal with hand tools.



3.2.7 Top Rails

Provide top rails that run continuously through post caps or extension arms, bending to radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by the fencing manufacturer.

3.2.8 Brace Assembly

Provide bracing assemblies at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with the horizontal brace located at midheight of the fabric.

Install brace assemblies so posts are plumb when the diagonal rod is under proper tension.

Provide two complete brace assemblies at corner and pull posts where required for stiffness and as indicated.

3.2.9 Tension Wire Installation

Install tension wire by weaving them through the fabric and tying them to each post with not less than 3.9 millimeter galvanized wire or by securing the wire to the fabric with 3.5 millimeter ties or clips spaced 610 millimeter on center.

3.2.10 Fabric Installation

Provide fabric in single lengths between stretch bars with bottom barbs placed approximately 38 millimeter above the ground line. Pull fabric taut and tied to posts, rails, and tension wire with wire ties and bands.

Install fabric on the security side of fence, unless otherwise directed.

Ensure fabric remains under tension after the pulling force is released.

3.2.11 Stretcher Bar Installation

Thread stretcher bars through or clamped to fabric 102 millimeter on center and secured to posts with metal bands spaced 381 millimeter on center.

3.2.12 Barbed Wire (only for Security Chain Link Fence and Gate)

Install barbed wire on supporting arms above fence posts. Extend each end member of gate frames sufficiently above top member to carry three strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence. Pull each strand taut and securely fasten each strand to each supporting arm and extend member. The method of securing wires shall be as follows: twist tie barbed wire to arm using wire which has been looped through a hole in the supporting arm. Other methods of securing barbed wire are acceptable provided they are equally secure, and are approved in advance by the Contracting Officer.

3.2.13 Gate Installation

Install gates plumb, level, and secure, with full opening without interference. Install ground set items in concrete for anchorage as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricated where necessary.



3.2.14 Tie Wires

Provide tie wires that are U-shaped to the pipe diameters to which attached. Twist ends of tie wires not less than two full turns and bent so as not to present a hazard.

3.2.15 Fasteners

Install nuts for tension bands and hardware on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts to prevent removal of nuts.

3.2.16 Zinc-Coating Repair

Clean and repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasion, and cut ends of fabric, or other cut sections with specified galvanizing repair material applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2.17 Accessories Installation

3.2.17.1 Post Caps

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e wi t h r equi r ement s f or t op r ai l s or suppor t i ng ar ms.

**************************************************************************

Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2.17.2 Padlocks

Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.

3.2.18 Grounding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph i f gr oundi ng i s not r equi r ed. I f gr oundi ng i s r equi r ed and l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on i s not par t of pr oj ect desi gn, t he r equi r ement s i n t he second set of br acket s wi l l be used i n l i eu of t hose i n t he f i r st set of br acket s.

Pr ovi de f ence gr oundi ng det ai l s when composi t e t ype post s ar e speci f i ed wher e gr oundi ng of t he f ence i s r equi r ed. Gr oundi ng r equi r ement s may be i ndi cat ed on t he dr awi ngs or i ncl uded i n t hi s sect i on.

Speci f y pol yvi nyl chl or i de coat ed f enci ng wi t h car e when gr oundi ng i s a pr oj ect r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************

Ground all fences crossed by overhead power lines in excess of 600 volts, and all electrical equipment attached to the fence. Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the closest approach to each building located within 15 m of the fence, and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding locations can not exceed 198 m .



Bond each gate panel with a flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by power lines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 45 m on each side of crossing. Provide ground conductor consisting of No. 6 AWG solid copper wire. Provide copper-clad steel rod grounding electrodes 19 mm by 3.05 m long. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 152 mm below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, bury electrodes a minimum of 305 mm deep and radially from the fence, with top of the electrode not less than 610 mm or more than 2.4 m from the fence. Clamp ground conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground cannot exceed 25 ohms.

3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site.

Submit manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycled material content in protective fence materials, including chain link fence, fabric, and gates to verify affirmative procurement compliance.

3.4 RESTORATION

The Contractor shall restore all damaged and disturbed areas caused by this project work to match existing condition as directed.

3.4.1 Surface Course Restoration

Concrete and/or asphalt concrete surface course which has been damaged and disturbed to accomplish this project shall be restored to match existing condition with new concrete and/or new asphalt concrete, including crushed stone base course.

3.4.2 Turf Restoration

Sodded area which has been damaged and disturbed to accomplish this project shall be restored to match existing condition by reusing existing sod or new sod. Water thoroughly immediately after replanting.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 33 11 00 ( Febr uar y 2018) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS- 33 11 00 ( May 2016)



SECTION 33 11 00

WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING02/18


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or pot abl e and non- pot abl e ( i . e. , r aw wat er , sea, sal t wat er ) syst ems, i n whi ch t he l ar gest s i ze pi pe i s 1200 mm i n di amet er and t he maxi mum syst em wor ki ng pr essur e i s 1000 kPa. Thi s maxi mum wor ki ng pr essur e depends on pi pi ng mat er i al s and appur t enances l i s t ed i n t hi s speci f i cat i on. Ensur e t hat t he pr essur e c l ass of pi pi ng mat er i al s and appur t enances exceeds t he maxi mum wor ki ng pr essur e of t he syst em. Thi s sect i on cover s wat er syst ems f or use out si de of bui l di ngs, i ncl udi ng wat er mai ns, wat er t r ansmi ssi on mai ns and wat er ser vi ce l i nes t o a poi nt appr oxi mat el y 1. 5 m f r om t he per i met er of bui l di ngs or st r uct ur es. . Wat er l i nes wi t hi n 1. 5 m of t he bui l di ng ar e t ypi cal l y cover ed by Di v i s i on 22 speci f i cat i ons and occasi onal l y Di v i s i on 40 speci f i cat i ons.

When cont r ol syst ems ar e used t o moni t or wat er ut i l i t y syst ems i ncl ude Sect i on 25 05 11 CYBERSECURI TY FOR FACI LI TY- RELATED CONTROL SYSTEMS.

For cor r osi ve soi l s sel ect mat er i al s, coat i ngs or cat hodi c pr ot ect i on syst ems i n accor dance wi t h UFC 3- 230- 01. When cat hodi c pr ot ect i on i s used i ncl ude Section 26 42 13. 00 20 CATHODI C PROTECTI ON BY GALVANI C ANODES.

When pi pi ng i s beneat h open pi er s and ot her exposed l ocat i ons i s subj ect t o f r eezi ng t emper at ur es, i ncl ude r equi r ement s f or i nsul at i on and pr ot ect i ve



cover i ngs i n t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on. I nf or mat i on on t hi s subj ect r el at ed t o open pi er s may be f ound i n Techni cal Repor t R593, Sept ember 1968, " Fr eeze Pr ot ect i on f or Fr eshwat er and Sani t ar y Pi pi ng Under Open Pi er s, " by t he Naval Faci l i t i es Engi neer i ng Ser vi ces Cent er , 560 Cent er Dr i ve, Por t Hueneme, Cal i f or ni a 93043- 4328.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Ar my and Ai r For ce, i mpr ess cur r ent cat hodi c pr ot ect i on( I CCP) may be used. When I CCP i s used i ncl ude Sect i on 26 42 17. 00 10 CATHODI C PROTECTI ON SYSTEM ( I MPRESSED CURRENT) .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy, compl y wi t h CNI C I nst r uct i ons 5090. 1, 5090. 2 and 5090. 3.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL


**************************************************************************1.1 REFERENCES


Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e



t o updat e t he i ssue dat es.


**************************************************************************



NFPA 24 (2016; ERTA 2016) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

UFC 3-600-01 (2016; with Change 1) Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities


UL 246 (2011; Reprint Dec 2018) UL Standard for Safety Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service

UL 262 (2004; Reprint Oct 2011) Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 312 (2010; Reprint Mar 2018) UL Standard for Safety Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 789 (2004; Reprint May 2017) UL Standard for Safety Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service



JIS A 5314 (2014) Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipes

JIS B 1171 (2015) Cup Head Square Neck Bolts (Amendment 1)



JIS B 2011 (2013) Bronze, Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves (Amendment 2)

JIS B 2031 (2015) Gray Cast Iron Valves (Amendment 1 )

JIS B 2404 (2018) Dimensions of Gaskets for Use with



Pipe Flanges

JIS B 7552 (2011) Procedures for Calibration and Testing for Liquid Flowmeter

JIS B 8570-1 (2013) Meters for Cold Water and Hot Water - Part 1: General Specifications

JIS G 5526 (2014) Ductile Iron Pipes

JIS G 5527 (2014) Ductile Iron Fittings

JIS K 1102 (2000) Liquid Chlorine for Industrial Use - Determination of the Chlorine Content.

JIS K 6353 (2011) Rubber Goods for Water Works

JIS K 6742 (2016) Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) pipes for water supply


JIS K 6762 (2012) Double Wall Polyethylene Pipes for Water Supply

JIS S 3200-1 (1997) Equipment for Water Supply Use - Test methods of Hydrostatic Pressure

JIS S 3200-4 (1997) Equipment for Water Supply Use - Test Method of Prevention from Back Current

JAPAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (JWWA)

JWWA B 116 (2012) Polyethylene Pipe Metal Fittings for Water Supply

JWWA B 120 (2017) Soft Seal Gate Valve for Water Supply

JWWA B 122 (2013) Ductile Cast Iron Gate Valve for Water Supply

JWWA B 129 (2013) Backflow Prevention Valve for Water Supply

JWWA B 137 (2013) Water Supply Rapid Air Valve

JWWA B 138 (2013) Water Supply Butterfly Valve

JWWA G 113 (2010) Ductile Iron Pipes for Water Works

JWWA K 129 (2019) Rubber Ring-Shaped Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe for Water Supply

JWWA K 130 (2019) Rubber Ring-Shaped Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Joint for Water Supply

JWWA K 144 (2017) Polyethylene Pipe for Water



Distribution

JWWA K 145 (2017) Polyethylene Pipe Fitting for Water Distribution

JWWA K 156 (2015) Rubber Material for Water Supply Facilities

JWWA K 158 (2017) Polyethylene Sleeve for Ductile Cast Iron Pipe for Water Supply

JAPAN DUCTILE IRON PIPE ASSOCIATION (JDPA)

JDPA T 01 (2017) Ductile Iron Pipe Laying Standard Manual

JDPA Z 2010 (2009) Synthetic Resin Coating for Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings

JAPAN CAST IRON COVER & WASTE FITTING ASSOCIATION (JCW)

JCW-104 (2012) Valve Box

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Water Transmission Mains

Water transmission mains include water piping having diameters greater than 350 mm , specific materials, methods of joining and any appurtenances deemed necessary for a satisfactory system.

1.2.2 Water Mains

Water mains include water piping having diameters 100 through 350 mm , specific materials, methods of joining and any appurtenances deemed necessary for a satisfactory system.

1.2.3 Water Service Lines

Water service lines include water piping from a water main to a building service at a point approximately 1.5 m from building or the point indicated on the drawings, specific materials, methods of joining and any appurtenances deemed necessary for a satisfactory system.

1.2.4 Additional Definitions

For additional definitions refer to the definitions in the applicable referenced standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment



appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G. " Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a " G" t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .



**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe, Fittings, Joints and Couplings ; G

Valves ; G

Valve Boxes ; G

Fire Hydrants ; G

Pipe Restraint ; G

Indicator Post ; G

Meters ; G

Tapping Sleeves ; G

Corporation Stops ; G



Backflow Preventer ; G

Railroad Crossing Casing Pipe ; G

Disinfection Procedures ; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Backflow Preventer Tests ; G

Bacteriological Samples ; G

Hydrostatic Sewer Test ; G

Leakage Test ; G

Hydrostatic Test ; G

SD-07 Certificates

Pipe, Fittings, Joints and Couplings

Shop-Applied Lining

Lining

Valves

Fire Hydrants

Propeller Type Meters

Displacement Type Meters

Compound Type Meters

Backflow Certificate


Ductile Iron Piping

PVC Piping

PVCO Piping

Polyethylene (PE) Pipe

PVC Piping For Service Lines

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL


**************************************************************************NOTE: Ef f ect i ve Januar y 2014, t he Saf e Dr i nki ng Wat er Act ( SDWA) r equi r ement s f or " l ead f r ee" wer e



updat ed. The amended def i ni t i on of " l ead f r ee* " i s 0. 20 per cent max l ead f or sol der and f l ux; 0. 25 per cent max l ead f or pr oduct s by wei ght ed aver age; Mul t i pl e component pr oduct s ar e cal cul at ed t o addr ess t ot al wet t ed exposur e based upon wet t ed sur f ace ar ea of each component and t hat component ' s l ead cont ent by per cent age

NSF/ ANSI 61 was r evi sed i n 2008 t o est abl i sh Annex G f or r equi r ement s when a 0. 25 per cent l ead cont ent r equi r ement needed t o be met s i nce some st at es ( Cal i f or ni a, Ver mont , Mar yl and, and Loui s i ana) i ncor por at ed t hese r equi r ement s pr i or t o t he SDWA. I n 2010 t he l ead cont ent eval uat i on pr ocedur es of Annex G wer e moved t o NSF/ ANSI 372.

**************************************************************************

Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installation, and testing of fire main piping and components.


1.5.1 Delivery and Storage

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves, fire hydrants, and other accessories free of dirt and debris.

1.5.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, valves, fire hydrants, and other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place other material, hooks, or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Inspect the pipe for defects before installation. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. Clean the interior of pipe and accessories of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and keep them clean during laying operations by plugging. Replace defective material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber gaskets, not immediately installed, under cover or out of direct sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y f i t t i ngs t o wi t hst and t he hydr ost at i c t est pr essur e speci f i ed i n par agr aphs SPECI AL TESTI NG REQUI REMENTS FOR FI RE SERVI CE.

Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ect



drawings:

Locat i on of al l new pi pel i nes, di amet er of pi pe, f i t t i ngs and appur t enances i ncl udi ng but not l i mi t ed t o val ves, f i r e hydr ant s, yar d hydr ant s, t hr ust bl ocks, r est r ai ned j oi nt s and det ai l s wher e necessary;

Locat i on, s i ze, and t ype of ser vi ce of exi st i ng connect i ng, i nt er sect i ng, and adj acent pi pel i nes and ot her ut i l i t i es;

Paved ar eas and r ai l r oads whi ch pass over new pipelines;

Connect i on of ser vi ce l i ne t o wat er mai n, i f di f f er ent f r om t hat speci f i ed;

Wher e di f f er ent mat er i al s ar e r equi r ed, show t he mat er i al , c l ass or t hi ckness of pi pe and l i mi t s wher e c l ass or t hi ckness must be di f f er ent f or di f f er ent sect i ons of pi pel i ne;

Beddi ng condi t i ons;

Locat i on of f l anged j oi nt s, j oi nt s made wi t h s l eeve- t ype mechani cal coupl i ngs, gr ooved and shoul der ed t ype j oi nt s, and i nsul at i ng j oi nt s;

Si ze and shape of f i r e hydr ant oper at i ng nut and cap nut s i f nonst andar d nut s ar e r equi r ed; di mensi ons of t hr eads ( maj or di amet er , mi nor di amet er , pi t ch di amet er , t hr ead f or m, and number of t hr eads per i nch) on f i r e hydr ant hose and pumper connect i ons i f nonst andar d t hr eads ar e r equi r ed.

Ref er t o f i r e suppr essi on Sect i ons f or i t ems such as f i r e depar t ment connect i ons and post i ndi cat or valves.

**************************************************************************

Provide all materials in accordance with JIS, JWWA and other approved Japanese commercial products as indicated herein. Provide valves and fittings with pressure ratings equivalent to the pressure ratings of the pipe. Provide Japanese manufactured materials and components for fire protection service meeting the requirements of NFPA 24 and related UL standards.

2.1.1 Pipe, Fittings, Joints And Couplings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cont ami nat ed Ar eas:

Sel ect i on of mat er i al s i s cr i t i cal f or wat er pi pe i n l ocat i ons wher e t her e i s l i kel i hood t he pi pe wi l l be exposed t o s i gni f i cant concent r at i ons of pol l ut ant s composed of l ow- mol ecul ar - wei ght pet r ol eum pr oduct s or or gani c sol vent s or t hei r vapor s. Document ed r esear ch has shown t hat pi pe mat er i al s ( such as



polyethylene and pol yvi nyl chl or i de) and el ast omer s used i n mechani cal l y j oi ned pi pi ng syst ems ( such as t hose used i n j oi nt i ng gasket s and packi ng gl ands) may be subj ect t o permeation by l ower mol ecul ar wei ght or gani c sol vent s or pet r ol eum pr oduct s. I f a wat er pi pe must pass t hr ough such a cont ami nat ed ar ea or an ar ea subj ect t o cont ami nat i on, consul t wi t h t he manuf act ur er r egar di ng per meat i on of pi pe wal l s, j oi nt i ng mat er i al s, and so f or t h, before sel ect i ng mat er i al s f or use i n t hat ar ea and r ef er to JWWA or AWWA st andar ds and AWWA, Wat er Resear ch Foundat i on, r epor t Number 91204 I mpact of Hydr ocar bons on PE/ PVC Pi pes and Gasket s.

Use t ai l or i ng opt i ons t o sel ect al l pi pi ng mat er i al s f or wat er t r ansmi ssi on mai ns, wat er mai ns and wat er ser vi ce l i nes whi ch ar e sui t abl e f or use i n t he project.

Ref er t o t he appr opr i at e Uni f i ed Faci l i t i es Criteria, JWWA or AWWA St andar ds and pi pe manuf act ur er ' s i nf or mat i on when eval uat i ng suitability.

Pi pe mat er i al s whi ch ar e known t o be unsui t abl e f or par t i cul ar l ocal condi t i ons ( i . e. , cor r osi on, det er i or at i on, et c. ) shoul d not be del et ed wi t hout consi der at i on of pr ot ect i ve coat i ngs, wher e economi cal l y f easi bl e.

**************************************************************************

Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on [and rubber-gasketed bell-and-spigot] joints. Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings.

2.1.1.1 Ductile-Iron Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE:

I nser t t he necessar y Pr essur e Cl ass/ Thi ckness Cl ass t o meet pr oj ect condi t i ons.

Mat er i al s r at ed f or a mi ni mum of 1000 kPa pi pe wi l l t ypi cal l y be speci f i ed f or wat er syst ems. I n some cases a hi gher c l assi f i cat i on may be r equi r ed, compl y wi t h t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s i n t hi s speci f i cat i on and as r equi r ed by t he aut hor i t y havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on.

Cl ass 150 pi pe i s f ur ni shed wi t h wal l t hi ckness sui t abl e f or i nst al l at i on wi t h a st andar d desi gn dept h of cover and compact ed backf i l l wi t hout bl ocks.

Cement - mor t ar l i ni ngs wi t h t wi ce t he st andar d t hi ckness may be speci f i ed f or duct i l e- i r on pi pe conveyi ng unusual l y aggr essi ve wat er s. Consi der at i on wi l l be gi ven t o t he ser vi ce l i f e of



t he pi pe and t he pot ent i al f or changes i n t r eat ment methods.

Pol yet hyl ene encasement wi l l appl y wher e soi l condi t i ons war r ant .

When pi pe wi l l be i nst al l ed i n cont ami nat ed gr ound condi t i ons, sel ect appr opr i at e gasket mat er i al based on t ype and concent r at i on of cont ami nant s.

For Ar my and Ai r For ce: Coor di nat e wi t h t he cat hodi c pr ot ect i on engi neer bef or e usi ng pol yet hyl ene encasement.

**************************************************************************

2.1.1.1.1 Pipe and Fittings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Duct i l e i r on pi pi ng may be used f or transmission.

**************************************************************************

Pipe, except flanged pipe, JIS G 5526 or JWWA G 113, Pressure Class [_____] Thickness Class [_____]. Flanged pipe, JIS G 5527 . Fittings, JIS G 5527 or JWWA G 113; fittings with push-on joint ends are to meet the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except for the factory modified bell design. Provide fittings with pressure ratings equivalent to that of the pipe. Provide compatible pipe ends and fittings for the specified joints. Provide cement-mortar lining , JIS A 5314 , twice the standard thickness on pipe and fittings.

2.1.1.1.2 Joints and Jointing Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: Push- on j oi nt or mechani cal j oi nt may be used except when t he gr eat er def l ect i on af f or ded by t he mechani cal j oi nt ( as compar ed t o t he push- on j oi nt ) i s consi der ed necessar y f or al l j oi nt s i n t he wat er system.

When mechani cal j oi nt s, f l anged j oi nt s, j oi nt s usi ng sl eeve- t ype mechani cal coupl i ngs, gr ooved or shoul der ed t ype j oi nt s, and i nsul at i ng j oi nt s ar e speci f i ed as except i ons t o t he basi c j oi nt i ng met hod, i ndi cat e t hei r l ocat i on( s) on t he pr oj ect drawings.

Show f l anged j oi nt s, on bur i ed pi pel i nes i n val ve pi t s or chamber s on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide push-on joints or mechanical joints for pipe and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Provide mechanical joints where indicated. Provide flanged joints where indicated. Provide mechanically coupled type joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling where indicated. Provide insulating joints where indicated. Sleeve-type mechanical couplings in lieu of push-on joints are acceptable, subject to the limitations specified in the paragraph SLEEVE-TYPE MECHANICAL COUPLINGS.



a. Push-On Joints: Shape of pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint assembly as recommended in JWWA K 156.

b. Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets as recommended in JWWA K 156.

c. Flanged Joints: Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections compatible with JIS G 5527 or JWWA G 113 joints . Provide JIS G 5527 ductile iron flanges. Provide epoxy coated steel set screw flanges. Gasket and lubricants for set screw flanges, in accordance with mechanical-joint gaskets conforming to JWWA K 156 or JIS B 2404 .

d. Insulating Joints: Designed to prevent metal-to-metal contact at the joint between adjacent sections of piping. Provide flanged type joint with insulating gasket, insulating bolt sleeves, and insulating washers. Provide full face dielectric type gaskets, for JIS G 5527 fittings . Bolts and nuts, for JIS G 5527 fittings .

e. Sleeve-Type Mechanical Coupled Joints: As specified in the paragraph SLEEVE-TYPE MECHANICAL COUPLINGS.

2.1.1.1.3 Pipe, Joint, Valve, and Fitting Coatings

Provide epoxy resin bonded coating meeting the requirements of JDPA Z 2010 . Bonded coating shall have minimum thickness of 0.1 mm for pipe and 0.08 mm for bends.

2.1.1.2 Plastic Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use pl ast i c pi pe when i t wi l l be subj ect t o t emper at ur e i n excess of 37. 8 degr ees C i n i nst al l ed usage or exposed t o a sour ce of heat f r om adj acent l i nes or equi pment .

Do not use pl ast i c pi pi ng i n ar eas subj ect t o pot ent i al spi l l age of ar omat i c hydr ocar bons wi t hout consul t i ng wi t h t he pi pe manuf act ur er and r ef er r i ng to JWWA or AWWA St andar ds. Ar omat i c hydr ocar bons such as benzene and t ol uene wi l l di ssol ve some t ypes of pl ast i c pi pes.

When usi ng pl ast i c pi pe i n ar eas wi t h cont ami nat ed soi l or gr oundwat er , consul t wi t h t he manuf act ur er r egar di ng per meat i on of pi pe wal l s. When pi pe i s i nst al l ed i n cont ami nat ed soi l or gr oundwat er consul t wi t h t he manuf act ur er r egar di ng sel ect i on of appr opr i at e gasket mat er i al based on t ype and concent r at i on of cont ami nant s.

**************************************************************************

2.1.1.2.1 PVC and PVCO Piping

2.1.1.2.1.1 PVC Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use a mi ni mum Pr essur e Cl ass 150 ( DR 27. 55) . Do not i ncl ude PVC wat er mai n pi pe when pi pe of gr eat er st r engt h t han Pr essur e Cl ass 305 i s r equi r ed.



**************************************************************************

JWWA K 129 or JIS K 6742 plain end or gasket bell end pipe, with a minimum Pressure Class 150 (DR27.5) with ductile iron outside diameter.

2.1.1.2.1.2 PVCO Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use a mi ni mum Pr essur e Cl ass 165. Do not i ncl ude PVCO wat er mai n pi pe when pi pe of gr eat er pr essur e c l ass 305 i s r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

JWWA K 129 plain end or gasket bell end pipe, Pressure Class 165 PVCO pressure pipe, with ductile iron outside diameter.

2.1.1.2.1.3 Fittings for PVC and PVCO Pipe

Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe with elastomeric gaskets, in conformance with JWWA K 130 or JIS K 6742 .

2.1.1.2.1.4 Joints and Jointing Material for PVC and PVCO Piping

a. Push-on joints: Use jointing material as recommended by PVC and PVCO pipe manufacturers between pipes, pipes and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories or compression-type joints/mechanical joints. Provide each joint connection with an elastomeric gasket compatible for the bell or coupling used. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, JIS K 6353 for push-on joints and mechanical joints.

b. Mechanical Joint: Use mechanically coupled joints having a sleeve-type mechanical coupling, as specified in the paragraph SLEEVE-TYPE MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, as an optional jointing method for plain-end PVC pipe, subject to the limitations specified for mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling as specified for compression-type joints. Provide jointing material in conformance with PVC and PVCO pipe manufacturer's recommendation between pipe and sleeve-type mechanical couplings.

2.1.1.2.2 PVC Piping for Service Lines

2.1.1.2.2.1 Pipe and Fittings

Provide JIS K 6742 pipes and JIS K 6743 fittings .

2.1.1.2.2.2 Joints and Connections

Fittings may be joined by the solvent-cement method or threading.

2.1.1.2.2.3 Solvent Joining

Provide solvent joints per pipe manufacturer's recommendation .

2.1.1.2.3 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Pol yet hyl ene ( PE) pi pe i s subj ect t o oxi dat i ve degr adat i on by many var i abl es i ncl udi ng pH, t he concent r at i on and t ype of di s i nf ect ant , wat er t emper at ur e, i nst al l at i on pr ocedur e and condi t i ons. Di s i nf ect ant s l i ke chl or i ne, chl or ami nes, chl or i ne di oxi de, ozone and ot her s may cr eat e an Oxi dat i on Reduct i on Pot ent i al ( ORP) i n PE Pipe.

Use PE4710, CC2 wi t h a mi ni mum Pr essur e Cl ass 200 ( DR 11) . Sel ect ei t her CC2 or CC3 based on comput ed ser vi ce l i f e; see TN- 44/ 2015. Use AWWA M55 and https://plasticpipe.org/pdf/ppi-position-paper-hdpe-potable-water-pc-pipe-size.pdf

**************************************************************************

JWWA K 144 or JIS K 6762 with a minimum Pressure Class 200 (DR11) with ductile iron outside diameter.

2.1.1.2.3.1 Fittings For PE Pipe

JWWA K 145 or JWWA B 116.

2.1.1.2.3.2 Joints and Jointing Materials

Mechanical Joint: JWWA K 156 Mechanical joint adapter and gaskets for mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories.

2.1.1.3 Piping Beneath Railroad Right-of-Way

Piping passing under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad is to conform to the specifications for pipelines conveying nonflammable substances. Provide ductile-iron pipe in lieu of cast-iron pipe. Ductile-iron railroad crossing casing pipe is to conform to and have strength computed in accordance with JIS G 5526 .

2.1.2 Valves

Provide a JWWA compliant protective interior coating for all valves whose interiors are exposed to sea water or salt water, or where there is a serious corrosion problem other than galvanic corrosion for water having a pH range from 4 to 9.

2.1.2.1 Gate Valves 80 mm Size and Larger on Buried Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE:

For UL 262 gat e val ves i n syst ems on whi ch pi pe i s pr essur e r at ed at 1000 kPa, use a wor ki ng pr essur e of 1200 kPa f or val ve s i zes 300 mm and smal l er , and 1000 kPa f or val ves l ar ger t han 300 mm.

I ndi cat or shoul d be r equi r ed f or gear ed gat e val ves wher e val ve i s i n l ocat i on wher e gat e posi t i on cannot r eadi l y be seen.

**************************************************************************



a. JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122: nonrising stem type with double-disc gate and mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends compatible for the adjoining pipe

b. JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122: nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or resilient-seated gate valves 80 to 300 mm in size

c. JWWA compliant locally manufactured gate valve meeting the requirements of UL 262 for pipe protection service : inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 1200 kPa , and have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined.

Match materials for gate valves meeting UL 262 to the reference standards specified in JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122. Gate valves open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes have 0-ring stem seals, except for those valves for which gearing is specified, in which case use conventional packing in place of 0-ring seal. Stuffing boxes are bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Use gate valves with special ends for connection to sleeve-type mechanical coupling in lieu of mechanical-joint ends and push-on joint ends. Provide valve ends and gaskets for connection to sleeve-type mechanical couplings that conform to the requirements specified respectively for the joint or coupling. Provide JWWA B 122 _____ mm gate valves with gearing and indicator. Where an indicator post are shown, provide an indicator post flange for JWWA B 122 or locally manufactured gate valves conforming to the requirements of UL 262 . Provide all valves from one manufacturer.

2.1.2.2 Gate Valves 75 mm Size and Larger in Valve Pit(s) and Aboveground Locations

**************************************************************************NOTE: For or di nar y condi t i ons, out s i descr ew- and- yoke r i s i ng- st em t ype i s pr ef er r ed t o nonr i s i ng st em/ i nsi descr ew t ype.

For or di nar y condi t i ons, t he doubl e- di sc or spl i t - wedge t ype gat e i s pr ef er r ed t o t he sol i d- wedge/ sol i d or one- pi ece gat e.

For UL 262 gat e val ves i n syst em on whi ch pi pe i s pr essur e r at ed at 1000 kPa, use a wor ki ng pr essur e of 1200 kPa f or val ve s i zes 300 mm and smal l er , and 1000 kPa f or gat e val ves l ar ger t han 300 mm.

I ndi cat or i s r equi r ed f or gear ed val ves wher e val ve i s i n l ocat i on wher e gat e posi t i on cannot r eadi l y be seen.

**************************************************************************

a. JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122 or JIS B 2031 : nonrising stem type with double-disc gates and flanged ends

b. JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122 or JIS B 2031 : nonrising stem type with flanged ends



c. JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122 or JIS B 2031 or JWWA compliant locally manufactured gate valve meeting the requirements of UL 262 for fire protection service : inside-screw type, with double-disc or split-wedge type gate and flanged ends, and designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 1200 kPa

Match materials for gate valves meeting UL 262 to the reference standards specified in JWWA B 120 or JWWA B 122 or JIS B 2031 . Provide gate valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Bolt and construct stuffing boxes so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Provide all valves from one manufacturer.

2.1.2.3 Check Valves

Provide a JWWA compliant protective interior coating for all valves whose interiors are exposed to sea water or salt water, or where there is a serious corrosion problem other than galvanic corrosion for water having a pH range from 4 to 9.

a. JWWA B 129 or JIS B 2031 : Iron or steel body and cover and flanged ends

b. JWWA compliant locally manufactured check valve meeting the requirements of UL 312 for fire protection service : Cast iron or steel body and cover, flanged ends, and designed for a minimum working pressure of 1000 kPa .

Materials for check valves meeting UL 312 are to match the reference standards specified in JWWA B 129. Provide check valves with a clear port opening. Provide all check valves from one manufacturer.

2.1.2.4 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves

**************************************************************************NOTE: Al t hough but t er f l y val ves ar e accept abl e f or use i n 75 mm t hr ough 1, 800 mm si zes, t hey ar e t ypi cal l y used i n s i zes gr eat er t han 300 mm.

**************************************************************************

Provide rubber-seated butterfly valves and wafer type valves that match the performance requirements of JWWA B 138. Wafer type valves not meeting laying length requirements are acceptable if supplied and installed with a spacer, providing the specified laying length. Meet all tests required by JWWA B 138. Flanged-end valves are required in a pit. Provide a union or sleeve-type coupling in the pit to permit removal. Direct-bury mechanical-end valves 80 through 250 mm in diameter. Provide a valve box, means for manual operation, and an adjacent pipe joint to facilitate valve removal. Provide valve operators that restrict closing to a rate requiring approximately 60 seconds, from fully open to fully closed.

2.1.2.5 Pressure Reducing Valves

Maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in demand. Using pressure reducing valves capable of providing 1720 kPa operating pressure on the inlet side, with outlet pressure set for 340 kPa . Provide hydraulically-operated, pilot controlled, globe or angle type valves that are capable of being actuated either by diaphragm or piston. Provide diaphragm-operated, adjustable, spring-loaded type pilot controls made of lead-free bronze with stainless steel working parts, designed to



permit flow when controlling pressure exceeds the spring setting. Construct the bodies of bronze, cast iron or cast steel with lead-free bronze trim; the valve stem of stainless steel; the seat of lead-free bronze; and the valve discs and diaphragms of synthetic rubber. Provide flanged ends.

2.1.2.6 Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves

Provide JWWA B 137 air release , air vacuum and combination air valves that release air and prevent the formation of a vacuum. Provide valves with an iron body, lead-free bronze trim and stainless steel float that automatically releases air when the lines are being filled with water and admits air into the line when water is being withdrawn in excess of the inflow.

2.1.2.7 Water Service Valves

2.1.2.7.1 Gate Valves Smaller than 75 mm in Size on Buried Piping

Gate valves smaller than 75 mm size on Buried Piping JIS B 2011 , Class 150, solid wedge, nonrising stem, with flanged or threaded end connections, a union on one side of the valve, and a handwheel operator.

2.1.2.7.2 Gate Valves Smaller Than 75 mm Size in Valve Pits

JIS B 2011 , Class 150, solid wedge, inside screw, rising stem. Provide valves with flanged or threaded end connections, a union on one side of the valve, and a handwheel operator.

2.1.2.7.3 Check Valves Smaller than 50 mm in Size

Provide check valves with a minimum working pressure of 1000 kPa or as indicated with a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves open to permit flow when inlet pressure is greater than the discharge pressure, and close tightly to prevent return flow when discharge pressure exceeds inlet pressure. Cast the size of the valve, working pressure, manufacturer's name, initials, or trademark on the body of each valve.

Provide valves for screwed fittings, made of lead-free bronze and in conformance with JIS B 2011 , Class 150, Types compatible for the application.

2.1.2.8 Indicator Post

Provide upright gate valve with indicator post conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial products meeting the requirements of UL 789 and NFPA 24 . Construct indicator post body of cast iron, ductile iron or a combination of both, bronze operating nut, cast iron locking wrench with open and shut target window.

2.1.2.9 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping, except where indicator post is shown. Construct adjustable valve boxes manufactured from cast iron of a size compatible for the valve on which it is used. Provide cast iron valve boxes conforming to JCW-104. Coat the cast-iron box with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The minimum diameter of the shaft of the box



is 135 mm or as indicated.

2.1.2.10 Valve Pits

Construct the valve pits at locations indicated or as required above and in accordance with the details shown.

2.1.3 Blowoff Valve Assemblies

**************************************************************************NOTE: Show l ocat i ons of bl owof f val ve assembl i es on dr awi ngs and det ai l s.

**************************************************************************

Provide blowoff valve assemblies complete with all pipe, fittings, valve, valve box, riser box and lid, riser extension, discharge fitting and other materials required to connect to the water main. Provide blow off valve assemblies 100 mm or larger conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial products.

2.1.4 Fire Hydrants

2.1.4.1 Fire Hydrants

Provide fire hydrants where indicated. Paint fire hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of enamel paint. Paint barrel and bonnet colors in accordance with UFC 3-600-01 . Stencil fire hydrant number and main size on the fire hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.

Provide a JWWA compliant protective epoxy interior coating on those portions of the fire hydrant continuously in contact with sea water or salt water.

2.1.4.1.1 Dry-Barrel Type and Wet-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants

Provide Dry-barrel type fire hydrants conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial product of aboveground fire hydrants and meeting the requirements of UL 246 , "Base Valve" with 150 mm inlet, 135 mm valve opening, one 115 mm pumper connection, and two 65 mm hose connections. Provide Wet-barrel type fire hydrants conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial product of aboveground fire hydrants and meeting the requirements of UL 246 , "Wet Barrel" with 150 mm inlet, one 115 mm pumper connection, and two 65 mm hose connections. Individually valve pumper connection and hose connections with independent nozzle gate valves. The locally manufactured and JWWA compliant commercial product of fire hydrants shall be compatible with the 115 mm pumper and two 65 mm hose connection and shall be of the type as applicable to U.S. military construction projects in Japan.

Provide mechanical-joint or push-on joint end inlet , except where flanged end is indicated. Provide fire hydrants with breakable features . Provide fire hydrant with special couplings joining upper and lower sections of fire hydrant barrel and upper and lower sections of fire hydrant stem that break from a force imposed by a moving vehicle.

2.1.5 Meters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wat er met er s ar e r equi r ed t o be i nst al l ed f or



most f aci l i t i es. Ref er t o UFC 1- 200- 02 Hi gh Per f or mance and Sust ai nabl e Bui l di ng Requi r ement s f or cr i t er i a and gui dance. I n some si t uat i ons, submet er i ng may be r equi r ed.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s pr i mar i l y wr i t t en f or out si de met er set t i ngs used f or measur i ng wat er consumpt i on f r om pot abl e wat er syst ems del i ver ed t o f aci l i t i es such as t hose met er s f or bui l di ngs, st r uct ur es, pi er s, and shi ps.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s f or met er s wi t h wor ki ng pr essur es of 150 psi or l ess.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s f or col d wat er met er s. Ref er t o t he appr opr i at e JWWA or AWWA St andar d f or wat er t emper at ur e l i mi t at i ons.

Thi s speci f i cat i on i s not i nt ended t o cover ot her t ypes of dedi cat ed oper at i onal met er s such as t hose used i n boost er pump st at i ons or pr oduct i on sour ces.

Si ze met er s accor di ng t o AWWA M22. I t i s common t hat t he needed met er s i ze i s smal l er t han t he ser vi ce l i ne pi pe si ze, t o avoi d over s i z i ng.

Coor di nat e wi t h t he I nst al l at i on' s Publ i c Wor ks Depar t ment t o det er mi ne I nst al l at i on speci f i c met er r equi r ement s. I n some cases t he Gover nment may pr ovi de a wat er met er t o be i nst al l ed by t he Contractor.

**************************************************************************

Submit certificates certifying all required and recommended tests set forth in the referenced standard and JIS B 8570-1 have been performed and comply with all applicable requirements of the referenced standard and JIS B 8570-1 within the past three years. Include certification that each meter has been tested for accuracy of registration and that each meter complies with the accuracy and capacity requirements of the referenced standard when tested in accordance with JIS B 7552 .

Include a register with all meters whether they are or are not connected to a remote reading system.

2.1.5.1 Propeller Type Meters

Provide Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) and Direct Digital Communication (DDC) compatible meter for waterworks of sizes 50mm to 1800mm, conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial products . Flow tubes or main cases constructed of cast iron or fabricated steel with JWWA compliant protective coating.

2.1.5.2 Displacement Type Meters

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ther e ar e t wo var i at i ons of di spl acement



met er s, t he nut at i ng pi st on ( di sc) and t he osci l l at i ng pi st on. Bot h ar e essent i al l y equal i n per f or mance. These met er s have a combi nat i on of accur acy, l ong l i f e, s i mpl e desi gn, moder at e cost , and easy mai nt enance.

Wher e hi ghl y aggr essi ve wat er i s encount er ed, t he manuf act ur er s shoul d be consul t ed f or r ecommendat i ons concer ni ng t he use of mat er i al s t hat ar e mor e r esi st ant t o cor r osi ve at t ack.

**************************************************************************

Provide Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) and Direct Digital Communication (DDC) compatible meter for waterworks of sizes 50 mm or smaller, conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial products . Pressure casings constructed of copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper. Provide registers with non-breakable covers and straight-reading registers. Provide non-breakable covers of copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper. For meter sizes 13mm through 25 mm provide frost-protection-type design.

2.1.5.3 Compound Type Meters

Provide Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) and Direct Digital Communication (DDC) compatible meter with strainers for waterworks of sizes 50 mm through 200 mm, conforming to JWWA compliant local commercial products . Main casing constructed of cast iron or fabricated steel with JWWA compliant protective coating. Equip with tapped bosses near the outlet for field testing purposes.

2.1.5.4 Register

**************************************************************************NOTE: Met er r egi st er s i nst al l ed bel ow gr ade, r egar dl ess of opt i onal mechani cal pumpi ng f eat ur es, must be sui t abl e f or submer ged/ pi t envi r onment s. Such r egi st er s gener al l y have a negl i gi bl e i ncr ease i n t he met er i ng cost . Al so use a submer gi bl e t ype wher e exposur e t o wet envi r onment s i s possi bl e. The most common wat er met er r egi st er i s a 6- wheel t ype mechani cal di spl ay.

**************************************************************************

Provide open straight-reading register supplied by the meter manufacturer. Equip register with cubic meters readings. Use encoder type remote register designed in accordance with JWWA compliant local commercial product of water meter .

2.1.5.5 Strainers

Provide strainer recommended and supplied by the local meter manufacturer. Provide strainer of the same material as the meter body (i.e., bronze, ductile, or stainless).



2.1.5.6 Meter Connections

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s wr i t t en f or met er s l ocat ed out si de of t he bui l di ng. I nsi de met er set t i ngs as wel l as t hose used out si de above gr ound or i n hot - boxes, woul d f ol l ow t he same pr i nci pl es.

**************************************************************************

Provide connections compatible with the type of pipe and conditions encountered.

2.1.5.7 Advanced Metering Infrastructure

**************************************************************************NOTE: Advanced Met er i ng I nf r ast r uct ur e ( AMI ) Wat er Met er s ar e r equi r ed per t he Ut i l i t y Met er Pol i cy Memo dat ed 16 Apr i l 2013 f r om t he Of f i ce of Under Secr et ar y of Def ense. Coor di nat e advance met er i ng wi t h t he I nst al l at i on AMI manager .

**************************************************************************

The Government will supply an Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) compatible water meter(s) for the Contractor to install and connect to the existing AMI Data Acquisition System (DAS). Use the existing Government laptop computers to configure the meter using existing software loaded on the computer. Modifications to existing software on the computer or the addition of software to the computer is not allowed. The Contractor must ensure that the meter(s) transmit the metered data to the DAS. The current meters being used by [_____] are: [_____].

2.1.5.8 Direct Digital Control System Interface

Provide all meters with the capability of providing pulse output to the DDC system.

2.1.5.9 Meter Setter

**************************************************************************NOTE: Met er set t er s ar e i nt ended t o al l ow t he met er t o be pl aced or r emoved i n a met er box or vaul t . Met er set t er s may bought or assembl ed of separ at e component s. Assembl ed met er set t er s usual l y i ncr ease const r uct i on cost s and decr ease uni f or mi t y among met er set t i ngs.

Thr ee basi c st y l es of set t er s i ncl ude yokes, copper set t er s, and yoke met er boxes. Var i at i ons coul d al so i ncl ude t he met er set t er bei ng pr e- assembl ed and pi ped i nt o a pl ast i c met er box.

**************************************************************************

For water meter 50 mm or greater, p rovide a by-pass assembly with the valve located outside the vault. Provide valve box for valve located outside of vault.

2.1.5.10 Meter Boxes Vaults

**************************************************************************



NOTE: I ndi cat e t r af f i c r at ed and non t r af f i c r at ed met er boxes on t he dr awi ngs.

Use cast i r on and concr et e met er boxes i n t r af f i c areas.

Met er Vaul t s ar e i nt ended f or l ar ge met er s ( i . e. , 75 mm and above) . Met er boxes ar e i nt ended f or l ess than 75 mm di amet er pi pes.

When met er vaul t s ar e used pr ovi de const r uct i on det ai l s of met er set t i ng on t he dr awi ngs.

Ensur e met er boxes and vaul t s pr ovi de adequat e c l ear ance f or met er r emoval , access f or val ve oper at i on or mai nt enance.

Use r ounds l i ds when possi bl e. Round l i ds pr ovi de an advant age over ot her shapes si nce t hey do not f al l down i nt o t he met er pi t damagi ng t he met er i ng equi pment bel ow. When used i n ar eas wi t h f oot t r af f i c , a r ound l i d can al so r educe t he r i sk f or someone f al l i ng i nt o t he pi t and causi ng an i nj ur y. The oval or r ect angul ar met er box can somet i mes pr ovi de an advant age si nce t hey can be used i n a mor e nar r ow space whi l e pr ovi di ng t he needed l engt h.

**************************************************************************

Provide meter boxes vaults of sufficient size to completely enclose the meter and shutoff valve or service stop and in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. Provide a meter boxes or vaults with a height equal to the distance from invert of the service line to finished grade at the meter location.

2.1.5.10.1 Cast Iron

Provide cast iron meter box and lid. Provide a round lid with precast holes for remote electronic meter reading modules having the word "WATER" cast on the top surface.

2.1.5.10.2 Meter Boxes Vaults

2.1.5.10.2.1 Vault Access Door

Provide a single-leaf or double-leaf cast-in aluminum or painted steel diamond-plate access door with the following dimensions:

Width: [_____] mm

Length: [_____] mm

Include stainless steel spring or pneumatic lift assist, type 316 stainless steel slam locking latch, automatic hold-open arm with a red release handle, and flush mounted retractable lifting handle. Door must have a minimum load rating 6,800 kg load.



2.1.5.10.2.2 Fittings

Provide flanged fittings for pipe 75 mm and larger.

2.1.5.10.2.3 Vault Valves

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use i ndi cat i ng t ype val ves i nsi de t he vaul t ( i . e. , OS&Y, bal l , but t er f l y) so t hat t he val ve' s posi t i on can be obser ved wi t hout ent er i ng t he conf i ned space.

**************************************************************************

Provide ball or outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) or butterfly valves in meter vault.

2.1.6 Backflow Preventers

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s speci f i cat i on cover s backf l ow pr event er s i nst al l ed used t o pr ot ect t he pot abl e wat er syst em i n out si de appl i cat i ons.

Requi r e a mi ni mum wor ki ng pr essur e of 1000 kPa.

Backf l ow pr event er s ( i . e. , t he doubl e check val ve assembl y ( DC) and t he r educed pr essur e pr i nci pl e assembl y ( RP) ) must be i nst al l ed above gr ound t o pr event cr oss cont ami nat i on.

Locat e backf l ow pr event er s assembl i es i n ar eas wi t h adequat e dr ai nage. Doubl e check val ves may get t he sur r oundi ng ar ea wet when t est i ng i s bei ng per f or med. RPs can di schar ge l ar ge quant i t i es of wat er . A 25 mm RP may di schar ge up t o 125 gal l ons per mi nut e of wat er , so havi ng adequat e dr ai nage i s crucial.

**************************************************************************

Provide a JWWA compliant local commercial product reduced pressure principle type backflow preventer meeting the following requirements:

a. Size: [_____]

b. Maximum Rated Flow: [_____]

c. Allowable Pressure Loss: [_____]

d. Flanged cast iron, mounted gate valve

e. Strainer of the same material as the backflow preventer

The particular make, model, and size of backflow preventers to be installed must be included in the latest edition of the List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies and be accompanied by a backflow certificate . Select materials for piping, strainers, and valves used in assembly installation that are galvanically compatible. Materials joined, connected, or otherwise in contact are to have no greater than 0.25 V difference on the Anodic Index, unless separated by a dielectric type



union or fitting.

2.1.6.1 Backflow Preventer Enclosure

Provide an insulated enclosure where freezing temperature are possible .

2.1.7 Disinfection

Chlorinating materials are to conform to: Chlorine, Liquid: JIS K 1102 ; Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium: Approved local commercial product .

2.2 ACCESSORIES

2.2.1 Pipe Restraint

2.2.1.1 Thrust Blocks

Use JIS A 5308 concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 18 MPa at 28 days.

2.2.1.2 Joint Restraint

Provide restrained joints in accordance with NFPA 24 , Chapter 10 and in accordance with applicable JWWA standard test method for joint restrain .

Provide mechanical joint restraint restraint devices with gripper wedges incorporated into a follower gland and specifically designed for the pipe material and meeting the requirements of JIS G 5527 or metal harness fabricated by the pipe manufacturer.

2.2.2 Protective Enclosures

Provide Freeze-Protection Enclosures that are insulated and designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage.

[ 2.2.3 Tapping Sleeves

**************************************************************************

NOTE: Show si ze of t appi ng sl eeve on dr awi ngs.**************************************************************************

Provide cast gray, ductile, malleable iron or stainless steel, split-sleeve type tapping sleeves of the sizes indicated for connection to existing main with flanged or grooved outlet, and with bolts, follower rings and gaskets on each end of the sleeve. Utilize similar metals for bolts, nuts, and washers to minimize the possibility of galvanic corrosion. Provide dielectric gaskets where dissimilar metals adjoin. Provide a tapping sleeve assembly with a maximum working pressure of 1000 kPa. Provide bolts with square heads and hexagonal nuts. Longitudinal gaskets and mechanical joints with gaskets as recommended by the manufacturer of the sleeve. When using grooved mechanical tee, utilize an upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning which engages a machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing an elastomeric gasket which conforms to the pipe outside diameter around the hole and a lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified, pre-torqued to 67.8 Newton meters .



] 2.2.4 Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings

Use couplings to join plain-end piping by compression of a ring gasket at each end of the adjoining pipe sections. The coupling consists of one middle ring flared or beveled at each end to provide a gasket seat; two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and bolts and nuts to draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the gaskets. Provide true circular middle ring and the follower rings sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets. For ductile iron and PVC pipe, the middle ring is cast-iron; and the follower rings are malleable or ductile iron. Use gaskets for resistance to set after installation and to meet the requirements specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in JIS B 2404 . Provide track-head type bolts JIS B 1180 , with nuts, JIS B 1181 ; or round-head square-neck type bolts, JIS B 1171 with hex nuts JIS B 1181 . Provide 16 mm diameter bolts. Shape bolt holes in follower rings to hold fast to the necks of the bolts used. Do not use mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling as an optional method of jointing except where pipeline is adequately anchored to resist tension pull across the joint. Provide a tight flexible joint with mechanical couplings under reasonable conditions, such as pipe movements caused by expansion, contraction, slight settling or shifting in the ground, minor variations in trench gradients, and traffic vibrations. Match coupling strength to that of the adjoining pipeline.

2.2.5 Insulating Joints

Provide a rubber-gasketed insulating joint or dielectric coupling between pipe of dissimilar metals which will effectively prevent metal-to-metal contact between adjacent sections of piping.

2.2.6 Bonded Joints

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use bonded j oi nt s t o mai nt ai n el ect r i cal cont i nui t y i n met al l i c pi pel i ne wher e cat hodi c pr ot ect i on i s pr ovi ded dur i ng const r uct i on or wher e i t i s ant i c i pat ed t hat cat hodi c pr ot ect i on wi l l be pr ovi ded i n t he f ut ur e.

Coor di nat e bonded j oi nt s wi t h near by exi st i ng cat hodi c pr ot ect i on syst ems.

**************************************************************************

For all ferrous pipe, provide a metallic bond at each joint, including joints made with flexible couplings, caulking, or rubber gaskets, of ferrous metallic piping to effect continuous conductivity. Provide Size 1/0 copper conductor thermal weld type bond wire designed for direct burial and shaped to stand clear of the joint.

2.2.7 Dielectric Fittings

Install dielectric fittings between threaded ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe, fittings and valves, except where corporation stops join mains to prevent metal-to-metal contact of dissimilar metallic piping elements and compatible with the indicated working pressure.



2.2.8 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping

Provide a continuous bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 2.5 mm in diameter in sufficient length over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.

2.2.9 Water Service Line Appurtenances

2.2.9.1 Corporation Stops

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t he par agr aph when t her e i s no wat er ser vi ce pi pi ng of 50 mm di amet er or l ess i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Ground key type; lead-free bronze, compatible with the working pressure of the system and solder-joint, or flared tube compression type joint. Threaded ends for inlet and outlet of corporation stops, coupling nut for connection to flared copper tubing.

2.2.9.2 Curb or Service Stops

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph when t her e i s no wat er ser vi ce pi pi ng of 40 mm di amet er or l ess i ncl uded i n t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Ground key, round way, inverted key type; made of lead-free bronze, and compatible with the working pressure of the system. Provide compatible ends for connection to the service piping. Cast an arrow into body of the curb or service stop indicating direction of flow.

2.2.9.3 Service Clamps

Provide single or double flattened strap type service clamps used for repairing damaged cast-iron, steel or PVC pipe with a pressure rating not less than that of the pipe being repaired. Provide clamps with a galvanized malleable-iron body with cadmium plated straps and nuts and a rubber gasket cemented to the body.

2.2.9.4 Goosenecks

Manufacture goosenecks from Type K copper tubing; provide joint ends for goosenecks compatible with connecting to corporation stop and service line. Where multiple gooseneck connections are required for an individual service, connect goosenecks to the service line through a compatible lead-free brass or bronze branch connection; the total clear area of the branches to be at least equal to the clear area of the service line.

2.2.9.5 Curb Boxes

Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop manufactured from cast iron, size capable of containing the stop where it is used. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. Factory coat the box with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Connections to Existing System

Perform all connections to the existing water system in the presence of the Contracting Officer.

3.1.2 Operation of Existing Valves

Do not operate valves within or directly connected to the existing water system unless expressly directed to do so by the Contracting Officer.

3.1.3 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install all materials in accordance with the applicable reference standard, manufacturers instructions and as indicated herein.

3.2.1 Piping


Install pipe, fittings, joints and couplings in accordance with the applicable referenced standard, the manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.

3.2.1.1.1 Termination of Water Lines

Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 1.5 m from the building, unless otherwise indicated.

Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines, fuel lines, electric wiring, or any other utility. Do not install copper tubing in the same trench with ferrous piping materials. Where nonferrous metallic pipe (i.e., copper tubing) crosses any ferrous piping, provide a minimum vertical separation of 300 mm between pipes.

3.2.1.1.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circumstances is it permissible to drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe cleanly, squarely, and accurately to the length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace a pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots is not permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at the design elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking is not permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting rests solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to



accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports for fastening work into place. Make provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been assembled. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation.[ Provide a minimum of 760 mm depth of cover over top of pipe under non-traffic areas and minimum of 900 mm under traffic areas .]

3.2.1.1.3 Tracer Wire

Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations.

3.2.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Water Lines

Make connections to existing water lines after coordination with the facility and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped and as indicated.

3.2.1.1.5 Sewer Manholes

No water piping is to pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole.

3.2.1.1.6 Water Piping Parallel With Sewer Piping

Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay water line closer than 3.0 m , horizontally, from any sewer line.

a. Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 3.0 m horizontally from sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance from outside edge to outside edge of pipe or outside edge of manhole. When local conditions prevent horizontal separation install water piping in a separate trench with the bottom of the water piping at least 450 mm above the top of the sewer piping.

b. Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent vertical separation, construct sewer piping of JWWA compliant ductile iron water piping and perform hydrostatic sewer test , without leakage, prior to backfilling. When local conditions prevent vertical separation, test the sewer manhole in place to ensure watertight construction.

3.2.1.1.7 Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping

Provide at least 450 mm above the top (crown) of the sewer piping and the bottom (invert) of the water piping whenever possible. Measure the distance edge-to-edge. Where water lines cross under gravity sewer lines, construct sewer line of JWWA compliant ductile iron water piping with rubber-gasketed joints and no joint located within 3 m horizontally, of the crossing. Lay water lines which cross sewer force mains and inverted siphons at least 600 mm above these sewer lines; when joints in the sewer line are closer than 900 mm horizontally from the water line relay the sewer line to ensure no joint closer than 900 mm .



a. Normal Conditions: Provide a separation of at least 450 mm between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the sewer piping in cases where water piping crosses above sewer piping.

b. Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, construct sewer piping passing over or under water piping of JWWA compliant ductile iron water piping and perform hydrostatic sewer test, without leakage, prior to backfilling. Construct sewer crossing with a minimum 6.1 m length of the JWWA compliant ductile iron water piping, centered at the point of the crossing so that joints are equidistant and as far as possible from the water piping. Protect water piping passing under sewer piping by providing a vertical separation of at least 450 mm between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on or damage to the water piping.

3.2.1.1.8 Penetrations

Provide ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves for pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures. Fill annular space between walls and sleeves with rich cement mortar. Fill annular space between pipe and sleeves with mastic.

3.2.1.1.9 Flanged Pipe

Only install flanged pipe aboveground or with the flanges in valve pits.

3.2.1.2 Ductile-Iron Piping

Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with the paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and with the requirements of JDPA T 01for pipe installation, joint assembly, valve-and-fitting installation, and thrust restraint.

a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of pipe manufacturer for joint assembly. Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of of pipe manufacturer for joint assembly . Make flanged joints with the gaskets, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint. Make flanged joints up tight; avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves, and other accessories. Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts will not be permitted. Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such degree that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without overstraining the flange. When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow the making of a flanged joint as specified, replace it. Use set screw flanges to make flanged joints where conditions prevent the use of full-length flanged pipe and assemble in accordance with the recommendations of the set screw flange manufacturer. During installation of set screw gasket provide for confinement and compression of gasket when joint to adjoining flange is made. Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer. Make insulating joints with the gaskets, sleeves, washers, bolts, and nuts previously specified for this type



joint. Assemble insulating joints as specified for flanged joints, except that bolts with insulating sleeves are to be full size for the bolt holes. Ensure that there is no metal-to-metal contact between dissimilar metals after the joint has been assembled.

b. Allowable Deflection: Follow ductile iron pipe manufacturer's recommendation for the maximum allowable deflection. If the alignment requires deflection in excess of the above limitations, provide special bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe to achieve angular deflections within the limit set forth.

c. Exterior Protection: Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines with polyethylene film, in conformance with JWWA K 158.

3.2.1.3 PVC and PVCO Water Main Pipe

Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with the paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, setting of fire hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance per pipe manufacturer's installation instructions.

a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use a lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections ; assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other accessories ; make compression-type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel ; assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings , all in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instructions.

b. Joint Offset: Construct joint offset . Do not exceed the minimum longitudinal bending as recommended by pipe manufacturer .

c. Fittings: Install in accordance with PVC and PVCO pipe manufacturer's installation standards .

3.2.1.4 Polyethylene (PE) Piping

Install PE pipes in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instruction .

3.2.1.5 Plastic Service Piping

Install pipe and fittings in accordance with the paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and with the applicable requirements , pipe manufacturer's installation instructions , unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instructions .



3.2.1.5.1 Jointing

Make solvent-cemented joints for PVC piping using the solvent cement previously specified for this material; assemble joints in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instructions . Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.2.1.5.2 Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances

Connect plastic service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.2.1.6 Fire Protection Service Lines for Sprinkler Supplies

Connect water service lines used to supply building sprinkler systems for fire protection to the water main in accordance with NFPA 24 .

3.2.1.7 Water Service Piping

3.2.1.7.1 Location

Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 1.5 m from the building line at the points indicated; close such water service lines with plugs or caps.

3.2.1.7.2 Water Service Line Connections to Water Mains

Connect water service lines to the main by a corporation stop and gooseneck and install a service stop below the frostline. Connect water service lines to ductile-iron water mains in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instructions for service taps. Connect water service lines to PVC water mains in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.2.2 Railroad Right-of-Way

Install piping passing under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad in accordance with the specifications for pipelines conveying nonflammable substances . For PVC water main pipe, also install in accordance with the recommendations of pipe manufacturer for installation of casings.

3.2.3 Meters

Install meters and meter boxes vaults at the locations shown on the drawings. Center meters in the boxes vaults to allow for reading and ease of removal or maintenance. Set top of box or vault at finished grade.

3.2.4 Backflow Preventers

Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated a minimum of 300 mm and a maximum of 900 mm above concrete base. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to the manufacturers requirements and the requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. Support NPS 63 mm and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor with 300 mm minimum air gap, and on concrete piers or steel pipe supports. Do not install backflow



preventers that have a relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding. Do not install by-pass piping around backflow preventers.

3.2.4.1 Backflow Preventer Enclosure

Install a level concrete base with top of concrete surface approximately 50 mm above grade. Install protective enclosure over valve and equipment. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.

3.2.5 Disinfection

Disinfection of systems supplying non-potable water is not required.

**************************************************************************NOTE: The cont i nuous- f eed met hod of chl or i nat i on i s r ecommended f or di s i nf ect i ng new wat er syst ems.

**************************************************************************

Prior to disinfection, provide disinfection procedures , proposed neutralization and disposal methods of waste water from disinfection as part of the disinfection submittal. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with the applicable JWWA standards . Ensure a free chlorine residual of not less than 10 mg/L after 24 hour holding period and prior to performing bacteriological tests.

3.2.6 Flushing

Perform bacteriological tests prior to flushing. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5 mg/L , the residual chlorine content of the distribution system, or acceptable for domestic use. Use neutralizing chemicals as recommended by JWWA standards .

3.2.7 Pipe Restraint

3.2.7.1 Concrete Thrust Blocks

Install concrete thrust blocks where indicated.

3.2.7.2 Restrained Joints

Install restrained joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or NFPA 24 where indicated. For metal harness use tie rods and clamps as shown in NFPA 24 . Provide metal harness fabricated by the pipe manufacturer and furnished with the pipe.

3.2.8 Valves

3.2.8.1 Gate Valves

Install gate valves in accordance with the requirements for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the gate valve manufacturer. Install gate valves on PVC and PVCO water mains in accordance with the recommendations of the gate valve manufacturer. Make and assemble joints to gate valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.



3.2.8.2 Check Valves

Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements for valve-and-fitting installation , except as otherwise indicated. Make and assemble joints to check valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.

3.2.8.3 Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves

Install pressure vacuum assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to the requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding.

3.2.9 Blowoff Valve Assemblies

Install blowoff valve assemblies as indicated on the drawings or in accordance with the manufactures recommendations. Install discharge fitting on the end of riser pipe to direct the flow of water so as to minimize damage to surrounding areas.

3.2.10 Fire Hydrants

Install fire hydrants in accordance with NFPA 24 and with the requirements of JDPA T 01 for pipe installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Provide metal harness as specified under pipe anchorage requirements for the respective pipeline material to which fire hydrant is attached. Install fire hydrants with the 115 mm connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, install fire hydrants with the 115 mm connection facing the paved surface where the connecting main is located.


3.3.1 Tests

Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five days in advance of hydrostatic testing. Coordinate the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing, except that water needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in paragraph AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES in Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. Provide documentation that all items of work have been constructed in accordance with the Contract documents.

3.3.1.1 Hydrostatic Test

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 24 r equi r es a mi ni mum t est pr essur e of 1, 400 kPa or 375 kPa i n excess of t he syst em wor ki ng pr essur e. Sever al of t he AWWA st andar ds do not meet t he r equi r ement s of NFPA 24. Wher e wat er mai ns or wat er ser vi ce l i nes pr ovi de f i r e ser vi ce or wat er and f i r e ser vi ce, t hey must be t est ed i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 24.



**************************************************************************

Test the water system in accordance with the applicable JWWA standards . Where water mains provide fire service, test in accordance with the special testing requirements given in the paragraph SPECIAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SERVICE. Test ductile-iron water mains in accordance with the requirements of JIS S 3200-1 for hydrostatic testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with mechanical-joints or push-on joints is not to exceed the amounts given in pipe manufacturer's installation instructions. No leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other methods. Test PVC and PVCO plastic water systems made with PVC pipe for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC water main pipe is not to exceed the amounts given in pipe manufacturer's installation instructions , except that at joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings, no leakage will be allowed. Test water service lines for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at copper pipe joints, copper tubing joints (soldered, compression type, brazed), plastic pipe joints, flanged joints, and screwed joints . Do not backfill utility trench or begin testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust blocks have been provided until at least 7 days after placing of the concrete.

3.3.1.2 Hydrostatic Sewer Test

The hydrostatic pressure sewer test will be performed in accordance with the applicable JWWA standard for the piping material with a minimum test pressure of 200 kPa .

3.3.1.3 Leakage Test

For leakage test , use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.

For PE perform leak testing in accordance with the applicable JWWA standards .

3.3.1.4 Bacteriological Testing

Perform bacteriological tests in accordance with the applicable JWWA standards. Analyze samples by a certified laboratory, and submit the results of the bacteriological samples .

3.3.1.5 Backflow Preventer Tests

After installation conduct Backflow Preventer Tests and provide test reports verifying that the installation meets the JIS S 3200-4 or applicable JWWA testing standards .

3.3.1.6 Special Testing Requirements for Fire Service

**************************************************************************NOTE: NFPA 24 r equi r es a mi ni mum t est pr essur e of 1400 kPa or 375 kPa i n excess of t he syst em wor ki ng pr essur e. Wher e wat er mai ns or wat er ser vi ce l i nes pr ovi de f i r e ser vi ce or wat er and f i r e ser vi ce, t hey must be t est ed i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 24.

**************************************************************************



Test water mains and water service lines providing fire service or water and fire service in accordance with NFPA 24 . The additional water added to the system must not exceed the limits given in NFPA 24

3.3.1.7 Tracer Wire Continuity Test

**************************************************************************NOTE: To ensur e f ut ur e abi l i t y t o l ocat e nonmet al l i c mai ns, r equi r e t r acer wi r e cont i nui t y ver i f i cat i on. Del et e t hi s r equi r ement f or met al l i c mai ns, i ncl udi ng concr et e mai ns wi t h st eel cyl i nder s.

**************************************************************************

Test tracer wire for continuity after service connections have been completed and prior to final pavement or restoration. Verify that tracer wire is locatable with electronic utility locating equipment. Repair breaks or separations and re-test for continuity.

3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP

Water mains and appurtenances must be completely installed, disinfected, flushed, and satisfactory bacteriological sample results received prior to permanent connections being made to the active distribution system. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer prior to the new water piping being placed into service.

3.5 CLEANUP

Upon completion of the installation of water lines and appurtenances, remove all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work.










SECTION 33 30 00

SANITARY SEWERAGE05/18


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or pi pi ng and appur t enant st r uct ur es f or an ext er i or sani t ar y sewer syst em.




For cor r osi ve soi l s sel ect mat er i al s, coat i ngs or cat hodi c pr ot ect i on syst ems i n accor dance wi t h UFC 3-230-01.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Ar my and Ai r For ce, i mpr ess cur r ent cat hodi c pr ot ect i on( I CCP) may be used. When I CCP i s used i ncl ude Sect i on 26 42 17. 00 10 CATHODI C PROTECTI ON SYSTEM ( I MPRESSED CURRENT.

**************************************************************************



PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n ar eas wher e pr obl ems wi t h r oot penet r at i on ar e ant i c i pat ed, speci f y pi pe whi ch has t he ki nd of j oi nt whi ch wi l l successf ul l y r esi st r oot penet r at i on. Gener al l y speaki ng, t he mor e wat er t i ght t he j oi nt , t he gr eat er t he r esi st ance t o r oot penet r at i on wi l l be. Rubber - gasket ed and compr essi on- t ype j oi nt s ar e consi der ed t o gi ve t he best per f or mance f or t hi s appl i cat i on.

When usi ng pl ast i c pi pe i n ar eas wi t h cont ami nat ed soi l or gr oundwat er , consul t wi t h t he manuf act ur er r egar di ng per meat i on of pi pe wal l s. When pi pe i s i nst al l ed i n cont ami nat ed soi l or gr oundwat er consul t wi t h t he manuf act ur er r egar di ng sel ect i on of appr opr i at e gasket mat er i al based on t ype and concent r at i on of cont ami nant s.

Pl ast i c pi pe i s subj ect t o t emper at ur e l i mi t at i ons whi ch must be obser ved.

Use caut i on i f consi der i ng concr et e pi pe f or sept i c f l ows. Dependi ng on sept i c i t y, t hese pi pes may not be sat i sf act or y.

Gi ve speci al at t ent i on i n t he desi gn st age of pr oj ect t o pl ast i c pi pe mat er i al s, par t i cul ar l y wi t h r espect t o super i mposed ext er nal l oads whi ch coul d cause excessi ve def l ect i on of t he pi pe. The degr ee of s i def i l l compact i on shoul d be consi der ed r eal i st i cal l y, par t i cul ar l y i n mar gi nal cases.

Wher e di f f er ent c l asses, st r engt hs, et c. , of pi pe ar e r equi r ed f or di f f er ent sect i ons of l ong pi pel i nes due t o s i gni f i cant di f f er ences i n ext er nal l oadi ng, expand or modi f y t he appl i cabl e par agr aphs of t hi s speci f i cat i on accor di ngl y. Show t he l i mi t s f or each cl ass, st r engt h, et c. , ei t her on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs or appr opr i at el y descr i be t hem i n t he appl i cabl e par agr aph of t he pr oj ect specification.

Pi pe j oi nt s: When mor e t han one t ype of j oi nt i s appl i cabl e f or t he speci f i ed pi pi ng, per mi t each as a Cont r act or ' s opt i on except wher e wat er t i ght j oi nt s ar e necessar y or i n ar eas wher e r oot penet r at i on pr obl ems ar e ant i c i pat ed. I n t hese cases, r ubber - gasket ed or compr essi on- t ype, or sol vent - cement ed j oi nt s ar e pr ef er r ed. Use f uel r esi st ant j oi nt gasket s when r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s f or a basi c Japan



Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . Desi gner shal l t ai l or as appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement .

**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES




**************************************************************************






JIS A 5314 (2014) Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipes

JIS A 5372 (2016) Precast Reinforced Concrete Products

JIS A 5506 (2008) Manhole Covers for Sewerage Works

JIS B 1171 (2015) Cup Head Square Neck Bolts (Amendment 1)



JIS B 2404 (2018) Dimensions of Gaskets for Use with Pipe Flanges




JIS G 5526 (2014) Ductile Iron Pipes

JIS G 5527 (2014) Ductile Iron Fittings


JIS K 0102 (2019) Testing Methods for Industrial Wastewater (Amendment 1)


JIS K 6739 (2016) Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) Pipe Fittings for Drain


JIS K 6742 (2016) Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) pipes for water supply


JIS R 5210 (2009) Portland Cement

JAPAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (JWWA)

JWWA K 158 (2017) Polyethylene Sleeve for Ductile Cast Iron Pipe for Water Supply

JAPAN SEWERAGE WORKS ASSOCIATION STANDARDS (JSWAS)

JSWAS K-1 (2010) Rigid PVC Pipe for Sewer

THE SOCIETY OF HEATING, AIR-CONDITIONING AND SANITARY ENGINEERS OF JAPAN STANDARD (SHASE-S)

SHASE-S 209 (2009) Manhole Cover

JAPAN DUCTILE IRON PIPE ASSOCIATION (JDPA)

JDPA Z 2010 (2009) Synthetic Resin Coating for Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings

1.2 SUBMITTALS


The Gui de Speci f i cat i on t echni cal edi t or s have desi gnat ed t hose i t ems t hat r equi r e Gover nment appr oval , due t o t hei r compl exi t y or cr i t i cal i t y, wi t h a " G. " Gener al l y, ot her submi t t al i t ems can be r evi ewed by t he Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Onl y add a “ G” t o an i t em, i f t he submi t t al



i s suf f i c i ent l y i mpor t ant or compl ex i n cont ext of t he pr oj ect .



**************************************************************************


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings ; G

SD-03 Product Data

Precast Concrete Manholes ; G

Frames and Covers ; G

Gravity Pipe ; G

Pressure Pipe ; G

Sewage Treatment Tanks ; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Hydrostatic Sewer Test

Infiltration Tests or Exfiltration Tests

Tests For Pressure Lines ; G

Deflection Testing



SD-07 Certificates

Portland Cement

Gaskets

Pre-Installation Inspection Request ; G

Post-Installation Inspection ; G



Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials.

1.3.1.1 Piping

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

1.3.1.2 Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement

As specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.3.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged, make satisfactory repairs. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench. Store solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install the plastic pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and discard those materials if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Discard solvents in use when the recommended pot life is exceeded.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline

Provide mains and laterals of concrete pipe or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide building connections of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation. The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship as specified herein more than 1.5 m outside of building walls.



2.1.2 Sanitary Sewer Pressure Lines

Provide pressure lines of ductile iron pressure pipe or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pressure pipe.

2.2 MATERIALS**************************************************************************

NOTE: Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he pr oj ect drawings:

Locat i on of al l new pi pel i nes, di amet er of pi pe, f i t t i ngs and appur t enances i ncl udi ng but not l i mi t ed t o val ves, f i r e hydr ant s, yar d hydr ant s, t hr ust bl ocks, r est r ai ned j oi nt s and det ai l s wher e necessary;

Locat i on, s i ze, and t ype of ser vi ce of exi st i ng connect i ng, i nt er sect i ng, or adj acent pi pel i nes and ot her ut i l i t i es;

Paved ar eas and r ai l r oads whi ch pass over new pipelines;

Pr of i l e, wher e necessar y t o show unusual condi t i ons

I nver t el evat i ons at begi nni ng and end of pi pel i nes and at manhol es or s i mi l ar st r uct ur es;

Wher e di f f er ent mat er i al s ar e r equi r ed, show t he mat er i al , c l ass or t hi ckness of pi pe and l i mi t s wher e c l ass or t hi ckness must be di f f er ent f or di f f er ent sect i ons of pi pel i ne;

Det ai l s f or manhol es, and sewage t r eat ment t anks;

Beddi ng condi t i ons, wher e di f f er ent f r om t hose speci f i ed i n t he appr opr i at e speci f i cat i on ;

Locat i on and si ze of t hr ust bl ocks on pr essur e l i nes

Locat i on of f l anged j oi nt s on pr essur e sewer s;

Locat i on of mechani cal j oi nt s on duct i l e- i r on pi pi ng ( when used on onl y par t of t he syst em) .

**************************************************************************

Provide materials conforming to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below. Submit manufacturer's product specification,standard drawings or catalog cuts.

2.2.1 Gravity Pipe

2.2.1.1 Concrete Gravity Sewer Piping

2.2.1.1.1 Concrete Gravity Pipe

Provide reinforced concrete pipe conforming to JIS A 5372 , external pressure type, Class 1 or Class 2, Type B.



2.2.1.1.2 Jointing Materials for Concrete Gravity Piping

Provide gaskets and pipe ends for rubber gasket joint conforming toJIS K 6353 . Use gaskets suitable for use with sewage.

Submit certificates of compliance stating that the fittings or gaskets used for waste drains or lines are oil resistant.

2.2.1.2 PVC Gravity Sewer Piping


a. Pipe: JIS K 6741 , Class VP or VU.

b. Fittings: JIS K 6739

2.2.1.2.2 Joints and Jointing Material

Jointing Materials: Rubber gasket conforming to JIS K 6353 . Gaskets shall be suitable for use in sewerage.

2.2.1.2.3 PVC Branch Pipe Connectors

Shall be standard product compatible with the PVC plastic pipe and conforming to JSWAS K-1 and JIS K 6739 . Adhesive materials shall be as per branch pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

2.2.2 Pressure Pipe

2.2.2.1 Ductile Iron Pressure Piping

**************************************************************************NOTE: Duct i l e i r on pi pe i s used f or s i zes 75 mm t o 1600 mm.

**************************************************************************

2.2.2.1.1 Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

Provide mechanical joint or flanged ductile-iron pipe conforming to JIS G 5526 . Provide fittings conforming to JIS G 5527 . Use fittings which have a pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe. Pipe and fittings are to have interior cement-mortar lining conforming to JIS A 5314 and exterior pipe coating conforming to JDPA Z 2010 .

2.2.2.1.2 Ductile Iron Pressure Joints and Jointing Materials

a. Joints, general: Use mechanical joints for pipe and fittings . Use flanged joints where indicated. Joints made with sleeve-type mechanical coupling may be used in lieu of push-on joint.

b. Mechanical joints: Gaskets are to conform to JIS B 2404 .

c. Flanged joints: Provide bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections compatible with JIS G 5527 joints.

**************************************************************************NOTE: At t he t ext bel ow, del et e " or st eel " when mi ddl e r i ng of cast i r on onl y i s consi der ed necessar y due t o ant i c i pat ed cor r osi on pr obl ems.



Del et e r equi r ement f or st r engt h of st eel when st eel i s not al l owed as a mat er i al f or mi ddl e r i ng.

At t he t ext bel ow, mi ni mum number s of bol t s f or each pi pe si ze shoul d be as f ol l ows:

75 mm 3 i nch 3

100 mm 4 i nch 4

150 mm 6 i nch 5

200 mm 8 i nch 6

250 mm 10 i nch 7

300 and 350 mm 12 and 14 inch

8

400 mm 16 i nch 9

450 mm 18 i nch 10

500 mm 20 i nch 12

550 mm 22 i nch 13

600 mm 24 i nch 14

**************************************************************************

d. Joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings: Provide bolts conforming to the tensile requirements of JIS B 1180 with nuts conforming to the tensile requirements of JIS B 1181 or round-head square-neck type bolts conforming to JIS B 1171 with hex nuts conforming to JIS B 1181 .

2.2.2.2 PVC Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings


Pipe, couplings and fittings are to be manufactured of materials conforming to JIS K 6742 and fittings conforming to JIS K 6743 .

2.2.2.2.2 Solvent Cement Joint

Provide solvent cement joint per pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

2.2.3 Piping Beneath Railroad Right-of-Way

Where pipeline passes under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad, piping is to conform to the specifications for pipelines conveying nonflammable substances. For casing pipe provide ductile-iron pipe in lieu of cast-iron soil pipe. Ductile-iron pipe is to conform to and have strength computed in accordance with JIS G 5526 .



2.2.4 Portland Cement

Portland cement shall conform to JIS R 5210 .

2.2.5 Portland Cement Concrete

Provide portland cement concrete conforming to JIS A 5308 , compressive strength of 2 4 MPa at 28 days, except for concrete cradle and encasement or concrete blocks for manholes. Concrete used for cradle and encasement is to have a compressive strength of 1 8 MPa minimum at 28 days. Protect concrete in place from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days.

2.2.6 Precast Concrete Manholes

Approved commercial products as shown on drawings and conforming to JIS A 5372 . Joints between precast concrete manhole sections shall be made with flexible watertight, rubber-type gaskets per manhole manufacturer's standards.

2.2.7 Invert Mortar

Mortar for forming manhole inverts shall be composed of cement, sand and water mixed in proportion of 1 part cement to 2 parts of sand, sufficient water to produce a workable mixture. Mortar shall be used in the work within one hour after mixing.

2.2.8 Gaskets and Connectors

Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole are to conform to pipe manufacturer's standards.

2.2.9 Sewage Treatment Tanks

Shall be three functions of primary, secondary, and final sewage treatment and shall meet the requirements of biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) value as indicated by testing in accordance with JIS K 0102 .

2.2.10 Frames And Covers for Manholes

Shall be local manufacturer's standard product conforming to SHASE-S 209 , and shall be of cast iron per JIS A 5506 . Size, configuration and loading capacity shall be as indicated on drawings. A letter "S" shall be stamped or cast into covers.

2.2.11 Manhole Steps

Materials shall conform to JIS G 3101 , Type SS400, galvanized, and of the size and configuration as shown on drawing. Manhole steps are not required in manholes and inlets less than 1.2 m deep.

2.2.12 Manhole Ladders

Provide a steel ladder conforming to JIS G 3101 where the depth of a manhole exceeds 3.6 m . The ladder is not to be less than 406 mm in width, with 19 mm diameter rungs spaced 305 mm apart. The two stringers are to be a minimum 10 mm thick and 51 mm wide. Galvanize ladders and inserts after fabrication in conformance with JIS H 8641 .



2.2.13 Miscellaneous Items

2.2.13.1 Warning Tape

Provide in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK

2.2.13.2 Sand Fill

Fill around PVC drainage pipes shall be cleaned sand conforming to JIS A 5005 .

2.2.13.3 Gravel Base Course

Crushed stone for base course at concrete structures shall be crusher run conforming to JIS A 5001 , RC-40.

2.2.13.4 Surface Cleanouts

Surface cleanout shall have cast iron cover and fitting adaptable for connection to the lower PVC pipe. Traffic loading capacity shall be as required for the manhole covers located within the same ground surface condition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Installation Drawings

Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail, both plan and side view details with proper layout and elevations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Backfill after inspection by the Contracting Officer. Before, during, and after installation, protect plastic pipe and fittings from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer.

3.2.1 Connections to Existing Lines

Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making connection to existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of service on existing line.

3.2.2 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."

3.2.2.1 Location

Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 1.5 m from the building, unless otherwise indicated. Install pressure sewer lines beneath water lines only, with the top of the sewer line being at least 0.60 m below bottom of water line. When these separation distances



can not be met, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.

3.2.2.1.1 Sanitary Piping Installation Parallel with Water Line

3.2.2.1.1.1 Normal Conditions

Install sanitary piping or manholes at least 3 m horizontally from a water line whenever possible. Measure the distance from edge-to-edge.

3.2.2.1.1.2 Unusual Conditions

When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 3 m , the sanitary piping or manhole may be laid closer to a water line provided that:

a. The top (crown) of the sanitary piping is to be at least 450 mm below the bottom (invert) of the water main.

b. Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, construct the sanitary piping with JWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe pressure and conduct a hydrostatic sewer testwithout leakage prior to backfilling.

c. The sewer manhole is to be of watertight construction and tested in place.

3.2.2.1.2 Installation of Sanitary Piping Crossing a Water Line

3.2.2.1.2.1 Normal Conditions

Lay sanitary sewer piping by crossing under water lines to provide a separation of at least 450 mm between the top of the sanitary piping and the bottom of the water line whenever possible.

3.2.2.1.2.2 Unusual Conditions

When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, use the following construction:

a. Construct sanitary piping passing over or under water lines with JWWA-approved ductile iron water pressure piping and conduct a hydrostatic sewer test without leakage prior to backfilling.

b. Protect sanitary piping passing over water lines by providing:

(1) A vertical separation of at least 450 mm between the bottom of the sanitary piping and the top of the water line.

(2) Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water line.

(3) That the length, minimum 6.1 m , of the sanitary piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints are equidistant and as far as possible from the water line.

3.2.2.1.3 Sanitary Sewer Manholes

No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sanitary sewer manhole.



3.2.2.2 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL .

3.2.2.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell or groove ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 7.50 m apart in trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose. Construct branch connections by use of regular fittings or with matching branch pipe connectors from the same pipe manufacturer.

3.2.3 Special Requirements

3.2.3.1 Installation of Concrete Gravity Sewer Piping

Make joints with the gaskets specified for concrete gravity sewer pipe joints. Clean and dry surfaces receiving lubricants, cements, or adhesives. Affix gaskets to pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe. Protect gaskets from sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Before installation of the pipe, inspect gaskets and remove and replace loose or improperly affixed gaskets. Align each pipe section with the previously installed pipe section, and pull the joint together. If, while pulling the joint, the gasket becomes loose and can be seen through the exterior joint recess when the pipe is pulled up to within 25 mm of closure, remove the pipe and remake the joint.

3.2.3.2 Installation of Ductile-Iron Pressure Lines

a. Make mechanical-joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint . Make flanged joints with gaskets, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint. Make flanged joints up tight, taking care to avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, and other accessories. Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts to make up for misalignment of bolt holes or for any other purpose will not be permitted. Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such degree that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without overstraining the flange. When flanged pipe or fittings have dimensions that do not allow the making of a proper flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of proper dimensions.

b. Exterior protection: Completely wrap buried ductile iron pipelines with 8 mil (minimum) polyethylene sheet in conformance with JWWA K 158.

c. Pipe anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Size and position thrust blocks as indicated. Use



concrete conforming to JIS A 5308 having a minimum compressive strength of 18 MPa at 28 days.

3.2.3.3 Installation of PVC Piping

Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.2.3.4 Installation of PVC Pressure Pipe

3.2.3.4.1 Pipe

Make push-on joints with elastomeric gasket . For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel. For push-on joint connections to fittings, use cut spigot end of pipe off square, marked to match the manufacturer's insertion line and beveled to match factory supplied bevel. . Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of the pipe manufacturer for laying the pipe . Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings in accordance with the requirements of the pipe manufacturer for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories .

3.2.3.4.2 Pipe Anchorage

Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Size and position thrust blocks as indicated. Use concrete conforming to JIS A 5308 having a minimum compressive strength of 18 MPa at 28 days.

3.2.3.5 Pipeline Installation Beneath Railroad Right-of-Way

Where pipeline passes under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad, install piping in accordance with the specifications for pipelines conveying nonflammable substances.

3.2.4 Concrete Work

Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Support the pipe on a concrete cradle, or encased in concrete where indicated or directed.

3.2.5 Manhole Construction

Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast concrete construction, make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this purpose; install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete piping. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes. Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make joints between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the



resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors to concrete manholes.

3.2.6 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation

3.2.6.1 Connecting to Existing Manholes

Connect pipe to existing manholes such that finish work will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including all necessary concrete work, cutting, and shaping. Center the connection on the manhole. Holes for the new pipe are be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the diameter of the pipe. Cut the manhole in a manner that will cause the least damage to the walls.

3.2.6.2 Metal Work

3.2.6.2.1 Workmanship and Finish

Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and support.

3.2.6.2.2 Field Painting

After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in concrete to bare metal, remove mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.

3.2.7 Installations of Wye Branches and Branch Connectors

Install wye branches and branch connectors in an existing sewer using a method which does not damage the integrity of the existing sewer. Do not cutinto piping for connections except when approved by the Contracting Officer. When the connecting pipe cannot be adequately supported on undisturbed earth or tamped backfill, support on a concrete cradle as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide and install concrete required because of conditions resulting from faulty construction methods or negligence without any additional cost to the Government. Do not damage the existing sewer when installing wye branches in an existing sewer.

3.2.8 Construction of Sewage Treatment Tanks

Construct sewage tank in accordance with approved drawings and manufacturer's catalog data.




The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. Be able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

3.3.1 Tests

Perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing, except that water and electric power needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in Section [_____].

3.3.1.1 Hydrostatic Sewer Test

When unusual conflicts are encountered between sanitary sewer and waterlines a hydrostatic pressure sewer test will be performed in accordance with the applicable JWWA standard for the piping material with a minimum test pressure of 200 kPa .

3.3.1.2 Leakage Tests for Nonpressure Lines

Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests . Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit inspection. When leakage exceeds the allowable amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner. When the water table is 60 cm or more above top of pipe at upper end of pipeline section to be tested, measure infiltration using a suitable weir or other acceptable device. When the water table is less than 60 cm above top of pipe at upper end of pipeline section to be tested, make exfiltration test by filling the line to be tested with water so that the head will be at least 1.2 m above top of pipe at upper end of pipeline section being tested. Allow filled pipeline to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, reestablish the head and measure amount of water needed to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period. Amount of leakage, as measured by either infiltration or exfiltration test shall not exceed one liter per cm of diameter per hour per 100 m of pipeline. When leakage exceeds the amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner as previously specified. Correct all visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.

3.3.1.3 Tests for Pressure Lines

Test pressure lines in accordance with the applicable standards as recommended by pipe manufacturer's installation manual for the respective pressure pipes specified in this specification. For hydrostatic pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 345 kPa in excess of the maximum working pressure of the system, but not less than 690 kPa , holding the pressure for a period of not less than one hour. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.

3.3.1.4 Deflection Testing

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Speci f y def l ect i on t est i ng onl y when war r ant ed by scope or s i ze of pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Perform a deflection test on entire length of installed plastic pipeline on completion of work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including leakage tests, backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, concreting, and any other superimposed loads. Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads is not to exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter of pipe. Determine whether the allowable deflection has been exceeded by use of a pull-through device or a deflection measuring device.

3.3.1.4.1 Pull-Through Device

This device is to be a spherical, spheroidal, or elliptical ball, a cylinder, or circular sections fused to a common shaft. Space circular sections on the shaft so that the distance from external faces of front and back sections will equal or exceed the diameter of the circular section. Pull-through device may also be of a design recommended by the pipe manufacturer , provided the device meets the applicable requirements specified in this paragraph, including those for diameter of the device, and that the mandrel has a minimum of 9 arms. Ball, cylinder, or circular sections are to conform to the following:

a. A diameter, or minor diameter as applicable, of 95 percent of the average inside diameter of the pipe; tolerance of plus 0.5 percent will be permitted.

b. Homogeneous material throughout, is to have a density greater than 1.0 as related to water at 4 degrees C , and a surface Brinell hardness of not less than 150.

c. Center bored and through-bolted with a 6 mm minimum diameter steel shaft having a yield strength of not less than 483 MPa , with eyes or loops at each end for attaching pulling cables.

d. Suitably Back each eye or loop with a flange or heavy washer such that a pull exerted on opposite end of shaft will produce compression throughout remote end.

3.3.1.4.2 Deflection Measuring Device

Sensitive to 1.0 percent of the diameter of the pipe being tested and be accurate to 1.0 percent of the indicated dimension. Prior approval is required for the deflection measuring device.

3.3.1.4.3 Pull-Through Device Procedure

Pass the pull-through device through each run of pipe, either by pulling it through or flushing it through with water. If the device fails to pass freely through a pipe run, replace pipe which has the excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.

3.3.1.4.4 Deflection measuring device procedure

Measure deflections through each run of installed pipe. If deflection readings in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained, retest pipe by a run from the opposite direction. If retest



continues to show a deflection in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe, replace pipe which has excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.

3.3.2 Field Tests for Cast-In-Place Concrete

Field testing requirements are covered in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.3.3 Inspection

Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; the light must show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line.

3.3.3.1 Pre-Installation Inspection

Prior to connecting the new service, perform pre-installation inspection after trenching and layout is complete. Submit pre-installation inspection request for field support at least 14 days in advance. The Installation's Utilities Field Support personnel will perform the pre-installation inspection.

3.3.3.2 Post-Installation Inspection

Perform a post-installation inspection after connection has been made and before the connection is buried. Submit post-installation inspection request for field support at least 14 days in advance. The Installation's Utilities Field Support personnel will perform the post-connection inspection.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 33 40 00 ( Febr uar y 2010) Change 6 - 02/ 19 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: USACE Super sedi ng UFGS- 33 40 00 ( August 2009)



SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES02/10


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or st or m dr ai nage pi pi ng syst ems usi ng concr et e, pol yvi nyl chl or i de ( PVC) and pol yet hyl ene (PE).




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on has been edi t ed t o cover t he mi ni mum r equi r ement s f or a basi c Japan Engi neer Di st r i ct pr oj ect . Desi gner shal l t ai l or as appl i cabl e t o meet pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

**************************************************************************NOTE: On t he pr oj ect dr awi ng, show:



1. Pl an and l ocat i on of al l new pi pel i nes, i ncl udi ng t ype of ser vi ce and si ze of pi pe.

2. Locat i on, s i ze, and t ype of ser vi ce of exi st i ng connect i ng, i nt er sect i ng, or adj acent pi pel i nes and ot her ut i l i t i es.

3. Paved ar eas and r ai l r oads whi ch pass over new pipelines.

4. Pr of i l e, wher e necessar y t o show unusual conditions.

5. I nver t el evat i ons at begi nni ng and end of pi pel i nes and at manhol es or s i mi l ar st r uct ur es.

6. Cl ass or st r engt h of pi pe and l i mi t s f or same wher e cl ass or st r engt h wi l l be di f f er ent f or di f f er ent sect i ons of pi pel i ne. Pr ovi de shape r equi r ement s i f di f f er ent shapes avai l abl e.

7. Desi gn det ai l s f or per t i nent manhol es, cat ch basi ns, cur b i nl et s, and head wal l s.

8. St or e dr ai nage l i nes and cul ver t s r equi r ed t o be watertight.

9. Beddi ng condi t i ons, wher e di f f er ent f r om t hose speci f i ed and l ocat i on of cr adl e( s) , when cr adl e i s r equi r ed i f not cover ed under t he appr opr i at e specifications.

**************************************************************************


**************************************************************************

1.1 REFERENCES



Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y



be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************













JIS K 6739 (2016) Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) Pipe Fittings for Drain


JIS K 6761 (2017) Polyethylene Pipes for General Purposes

JIS L 1908 (2000) Geotextile Test Method

JAPAN SEWERAGE WORKS ASSOCIATION STANDARDS (JSWAS)

JSWAS K-1 (2010) Rigid PVC Pipe for Sewer

THE SOCIETY OF HEATING, AIR-CONDITIONING AND SANITARY ENGINEERS OF JAPAN STANDARD (SHASE-S)


1.2 SUBMITTALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Revi ew submi t t al descr i pt i on ( SD) def i ni t i ons



i n Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES and edi t t he f ol l owi ng l i s t t o r ef l ect onl y t he submi t t al s r equi r ed f or t he pr oj ect .




**************************************************************************


SD-03 Product Data

Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains

Other Drainage Conveyance Materials

Miscellaneous Materials

SD-07 Certificates

Precast Concrete Pipe-Type Gutter

Precast Concrete Pipe Culvert Type Ditch



Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

Polyethylene (PE) Pipe

PVC Branch Pipe Connectors

Precast Concrete Free Gradient Ditch

Precast Concrete U-Ditch

Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes

Sand Fill and Leveling Sand

Crushed Stone for Perforated Pipes

Gravel Base Course

Frames, Covers and Grating

Geotextile Filter Fabric for Perforated Pipes

Leakage Test ; G

Determination of Density

Post-Installation Inspection Report ; G


Placing Pipe



Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.

1.3.2 Handling

Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not dragged.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e t he t ype of pi pe i s t o be t he Cont r act or ' s opt i on, t he t ypes ( wi t h s i ze, c l ass, shape, st r engt h, sheet t hi ckness, or gauge) t hat ar e accept abl e shoul d be l i s t ed. The i nappl i cabl e t ypes of pi pe wi l l be del et ed. I n speci f y i ng pl ast i c and concr et e pi pe f or cul ver t s and st or m dr ai ns, pi pe of compar abl e st r engt h f or t he var i ous s i zes shoul d be specified.

Pi pe mat er i al s whi ch ar e known t o be unsui t abl e f or l ocal condi t i ons ( i . e. , cor r osi on, r oot penet r at i on, et c. ) shoul d not be per mi t t ed f or t he pr oj ect . However , consi der at i on shoul d be gi ven t o t he use of pr ot ect i ve coat i ngs and j oi nt i ng met hods wher e economi cal l y f easi bl e.

I n ar eas wher e pr obl ems wi t h r oot penet r at i on ar e ant i c i pat ed, speci f y pi pe whi ch has t he ki nd of j oi nt whi ch wi l l successf ul l y r esi st r oot penet r at i on. Gener al l y speaki ng, t he mor e wat er t i ght t he j oi nt , t he gr eat er wi l l be t he r esi st ance t o r oot penet r at i on. Rubber - gasket ed and compr essi on- t ype j oi nt s ar e consi der ed t o gi ve t he best per f or mance f or t hi s appl i cat i on.

Amer i can Soci et y of Ci v i l Engi neer s ( ASCE) Manual No. 37, " Desi gn and Const r uct i on of Sani t ar y and St or m Sewer s, " cont ai ns met hods of cal cul at i on f or st r uct ur al r equi r ement s of pi pe; f r om t hese, t he r equi r ed st r engt hs f or pi pe of var i ous mat er i al s may det er mi ned. I nvest i gat e ext er nal l oads, i ncl udi ng ear t h l oads, t r uck l oads, sei smi c l oads, and i mpact , i n t he desi gn st age of t he pr oj ect . Gi ve speci al at t ent i on, i n t he desi gn st age of t he pr oj ect , t o pl ast i c pi pe mat er i al s, par t i cul ar l y wi t h r espect t o super i mposed ext er nal l oads whi ch coul d cause excessi ve def l ect i on of t he pi pe. The degr ee of s i def i l l compact i on shoul d be consi der ed r eal i st i cal l y, par t i cul ar l y i n mar gi nal cases.

**************************************************************************

Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to the requirements specified.

2.1.1 Concrete Pipe

Provide reinforced concrete pipe conforming to JIS A 5372 , external pressure type, Class 1 or 2, Type B. Provide gaskets and pipe ends for rubber gasket joint conforming to JIS K 6353 . Use gaskets suitable for use with sewage.



2.1.2 Precast Concrete Pipe-Type Gutter

Japanese manufactured precast concrete product that comes in standard length of 2 m . Locally known as DO pipe or acceptable alternative, and to be used along curb lines to function as gutter with water conveyance underneath. Shall be of the cross section shown on drawing and panels are supplied both with grating and without grating. Traffic loading capacity shall be 25 tons. Jointing materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards.

2.1.3 Precast Concrete Pipe Culvert Type Ditch

Japanese manufactured precast concrete product that comes in standard length of 2 m . Locally known as DO pipe or acceptable alternative, and to be used for below grade construction in place of PVC pipe whenever the sand fill layer above the PVC pipe is less than 300 mm. Shall be of the cross section shown on drawing and to be installed where specified on drainage plans. Traffic loading capacity shall be 25 tons. Jointing materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards.

2.1.4 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

a. PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6741 , Type VP or VU.

b. Fitting for PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6739 .

c. Jointing material for PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with PVC pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

d. PVC branch pipe connectors shall be standard product compatible with the PVC plastic pipe and conforming to JSWAS K-1 and JIS K 6739 . Adhesive materials shall be per branch pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

2.1.5 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe

a. Polyethylene pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6761 .

b. Jointing material shall conform with polyethylene pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

2.2 PERFORATED PIPING

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy, do not use pi pe si zes gr eat er t han 250 mm i n di amet er .

**************************************************************************

2.2.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

a. Perforated PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6741 ,Type VP or VU.

b. Fitting for perforated PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6739 .

c. Jointing material for perforated PVC plastic pipe shall be in conformance with PVC pipe manufacturer's recommendation.



2.2.2 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe

a. Flexible perforated polyethylene pipe shall be in conformance with JIS K 6761 .

b. Jointing material shall conform with polyethylene pipe manufacturer's recommendation.

2.3 OTHER DRAINAGE CONVEYANCE MATERIALS

2.3.1 Precast Concrete Free Gradient Ditch

Manufactured precast concrete product that comes in standard length of 2 m , and to be used as an interceptor trench along curb lines. Typically of inverted U shaped with the flat top functioning as gutter surface with grated inlets while the bottom is open and filled with plain concrete to obtain the desired gradient of the water conveyance underneath. Shall be of the varying cross sections as shown on drawing. Traffic loading capacity shall be 25 tons. Jointing materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards.

2.3.2 Precast Concrete U-Ditch

Manufactured precast concrete product conforming to JIS A 5372. Comes in 600 mm panel length and shall be of the cross section shown on drawing. Ditch shall be non-traffic type and with or without cover where specified on drawing.

2.3.3 Cast-in-Place Concrete Trench

A reinforced concrete trench of varying cross sections as shown on drawing. Concrete in conformance with JIS A 5308 shall be 24 MPa and shall have frame and grating.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

**************************************************************************NOTE: The shape, s i ze, t hi ckness of sect i ons, k i nds of mat er i al s, and wei ght s f or f r ames, cover s, and gr at i ngs f or i nl et s and manhol es, as wel l as t he amount of wat er way openi ng f or i nl et s and gr at i ngs shoul d be i ndi cat ed on t he dr awi ngs. The cover s and gr at i ngs shoul d be desi gned t o have ampl e st r engt h f or t he t r af f i c condi t i ons t o whi ch t hey may be subj ect ed. Fi xed, st r ai ght - t ype gal vani zed st eel l adder s shoul d be pr ovi ded f or manhol es over 3. 66 m deep measur ed f or m t op of gr at e t o i nver t of out l et pipe.

**************************************************************************

2.4.1 Concrete

Reinforced concrete drainage structures shall use concrete with compressive strength of 24 MPa .

2.4.2 Leveling Mortar

Mortar for setting precast concrete pipe type gutter and culvert pipe



ditch (both locally known as DO pipe) shall composed of cement, sand and water mixed in proportion of 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand, sufficient water to produce a workable mixture. Mortar shall be used in the work within one hour after mixing. 2.4.3 Leveling Concrete and Concrete Fill

Plain concrete to be used where specified on drainage drawing details shall have a compressive strength of 18 MPa .

2.4.4 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes

Approved commercial products as shown on drawings and conforming to JIS A 5372 . Joints between precast concrete manhole sections shall be made with flexible watertight, rubber-type gaskets per manhole manufacturer's standards.

2.4.5 Frames, Covers And Grating

2.4.5.1 Manhole Frames and Covers

Shall be Japanese manufacturer's standard product conforming to SHASE-S 209 , and shall be of cast iron per JIS A 5506 . Size, configuration and loading capacity shall be as indicated on drawings. A letter "D" shall be stamped or cast into covers.

2.4.5.2 Ditch and Inlet Frame and Grating

Shall be Japanese manufacturer's standard product of steel materials and of the size, shape, grating pattern, and loading capacity as indicated on drawings. Grating shall be finished with factory-zinc-coated in accordance with JIS H 8641 , and frame shall be finished with factory-bake coated.

2.4.6 Sand Fill And Leveling Sand

Fill around PVC drainage pipes and for setting non-traffic type precast U-ditch shall be cleaned sand conforming to JIS A 5005 .

2.4.7 Crushed Stone For Perforated Pipes

Granular aggregates for use in perforated pipes shall be single-sized crushed stone S-20 (#5) of size 13 mm to 20 mm and conforming to JIS A 5001 .

2.4.8 Gravel Base Course

Crushed stone for base course at concrete structures shall be crusher run conforming to JIS A 5001 , RC-40.

2.4.9 Flap Gates

Flap Gates shall be medium or heavy-duty with circular or rectangular opening and double-hinged. Top pivot points shall be adjustable. The seat shall be one-piece cast iron with a raised section around the perimeter of the waterway opening to provide the seating face. The seating face of the seat shall be cast iron or stainless steel. The cover shall be one-piece cast iron with necessary reinforcing rib, lifting eye for manual operation, and bosses to provide a pivot point connection with the links. The seating face of the cover shall be cast iron or stainless steel. Links or hinge arms shall be cast or ductile iron. Holes of pivot points shall be bronze bushed. All fasteners shall be either galvanized steel, bronze or stainless steel.



2.5 STEEL LADDER

Steel ladder conforming to JIS G 3101 shall be provided where the depth of the storm drainage structure exceeds 3.66 m . These ladders shall be not less than 406 mm in width, with 19 mm diameter rungs spaced 305 mm apart. The two stringers shall be a minimum 10 mm thick and 63 mm wide. Ladders and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with JIS H 8641 .

2.5.1 Manhole Steps

Materials shall conform to JIS G 3101 , Type SS 400, galvanized, and of the size and configuration as shown on drawing. Manhole steps are not required in manholes and inlets less than 1.2 m deep.

2.6 RESILIENT CONNECTORS

Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to pipe manufacturer's standards .

2.7 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC FOR PERFORATED PIPES

Submit certification from the manufacturers attesting that the filter fabric meets specification requirements. Provide geotextile that is a nonwoven pervious sheet of polymeric material conforming to JIS L 1908 .

2.8 Warning Tape

Provide in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

2.9 Cleanouts

Cleanouts installed at vertical PVC downspouts shall use the standard Y-fitting with the compatible PVC cleanout cover conforming to JIS K 6739 . Surface cleanout at paved and turfed areas shall be cast iron cover and fitting adaptable for connection to the lower PVC pipe. Traffic loading capacity for surface cleanout shall be as required for manhole covers located within the same ground surface condition.

2.10 EROSION CONTROL RIP RAP

Provide non-erodible rock not exceeding 375 mm in its greatest dimension and choked with sufficient small rocks to provide a dense mass with a minimum thickness of [200 mm] [as indicated].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL and the requirements specified below.

3.1.1 Trenching

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Economi c consi der at i ons shoul d det er mi ne t he wi dt h of t r ench t o be used i n t he desi gn anal ysi s and t o be speci f i ed f or const r uct i on. Wher e i t i s mor e economi cal t o cont r ol t r ench wi dt h and t her eby use l ess cost l y pi pe, t he wi dt h of t he t r ench shal l var y wi t h t he pi pe di amet er and shoul d be hel d t o a mi ni mum consi st ent wi t h t he space r equi r ed f or pr oper i nst al l at i on of t he pi pe and t he backf i l l at t he s i des of t he pi pe. Wher e t he si des of t he excavat i ons ar e t o be suppor t ed, pr oper al l owance shoul d be made f or t he space occupi ed by t he sheet i ng and br aci ng.

**************************************************************************

The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 500 mm to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

3.1.2 Removal of Rock

**************************************************************************NOTE: Unl ess ot her wi se speci f i ed, mat er i al used t o r epl ace unst abl e mat er i al or r ock excavat i on shoul d be compact ed t o a mi ni mum densi t y of 90 per cent f or cohesi ve soi l s and 95 per cent f or noncohesi ve soi l s, as det er mi ned by JI S A 1210.

**************************************************************************

Rock in either ledge or boulder formation shall be replaced with suitable materials to provide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between unremoved rock and the pipe of at least 200 mm or 13 mm for each meter of fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not more than three-fourths the nominal diameter of the pipe. Where bell-and-spigot pipe is used, the cushion shall be maintained under the bell as well as under the straight portion of the pipe. Rock excavation shall be as specified and defined in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL .

3.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material

Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material, compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government.



3.2 BEDDING

The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe.

3.2.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements

Concrete pipe shall be bedded with sand material minimum 200 mm in depth in trenches with soil foundation. Depth of sand bedding in trenches with rock foundation shall be 13 mm in depth per 300 mm of depth of fill, minimum depth of bedding shall be 200 mm up to maximum depth of 600 mm . Where concrete pipes are laid in deep trenches or where traffic loads are expected, the entire pipe line length shall be supported uniformly by concrete foundation or cradle.

3.2.2 Precast, Concrete Pipe Type Gutter/Ditch and Free-Gradient Ditch

These type of Precast drainage materials shall be laid using leveling mortar over a concrete foundation base.

3.2.3 Precast Concrete U-Ditch

Use leveling sand for non-traffic areas and leveling mortar over concrete foundation for traffic areas.

3.2.4 Plastic Pipe

Use clean sand for bedding, haunching and initial backfill for PVC and PE pipes. Minimum depth of bedding shall be 200 mm

3.3 PLACING PIPE

**************************************************************************NOTE: The Cont r act or shoul d be r equi r ed t o per f or m def l ect i on t est i ng when war r ant ed by t he scope and si ze of t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary. Deflection of installed flexible pipe shall not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diamater of pipe.

3.3.1 Concrete and Plastic Pipe s

Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.



3.3.2 Precast Concrete Pipe Type Gutter/Ditch, Free Gradient Ditch and U-Ditch

Lay the drainage materials in conformance with product manufacturer's instructions.

3.3.3 Multiple Culverts

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e encasement or ot her speci al condi t i ons ar e speci f i ed, mi ni mum spaci ng as speci f i ed i n t hi s par agr aph shoul d not appl y.

**************************************************************************

Where multiple lines of pipe are installed, adjacent sides of pipe shall be at least half the nominal pipe diameter or 1 meter apart, whichever is less.

3.4 JOINTING

3.4.1 Concrete Pipes and Other Precast Concrete Drainage Conveyance Materials.

3.4.1.1 Flexible Watertight Joints

Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular manufacturer . Cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.

3.4.2 Plastic Piping

Install pipes and fittings per pipe manufacturer's installation manual.

3.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

3.5.1 Manholes and Inlets

Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, precast reinforced concrete, precast concrete segmental blocks complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized steel ladders or manhole steps where indicated. Pipe connections to concrete manholes and inlets shall be made with flexible, watertight connectors in conformance with pipe manufacturer .

3.5.2 Walls and Headwalls

Construction shall be as indicated.

3.6 Metal Steps

Individual metal steps shall be adequately anchored to precast manhole walls per manhole or metal step manufacturer's installation standards.



3.7 STEEL LADDER INSTALLATION

Ladder shall be adequately anchored to the wall by means of steel inserts spaced not more than 1.83 m vertically, and shall be installed to provide at least 152 mm of space between the wall and the rungs. The wall along the line of the ladder shall be vertical for its entire length.

3.8 BACKFILLING

3.8.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches

After the pipe has been properly bedded clean sand shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 150 mm in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation of at least 300 mm above the top of the pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled with select material from excavation or borrow and compacted by spreading and rolling or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly. Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or pavements.

3.8.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections

For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 150 mm in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a height of 300 mm above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or 4 m , whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 300 mm above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Use sand material for this entire region of backfill for flexible and concrete pipe installations.

3.8.3 Movement of Construction Machinery

When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced.

3.8.4 Compaction


Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels, gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays,



silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density curves.

3.8.4.2 Minimum Density

Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as specified below.

a. Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade materials and compaction shall control.

b. Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material.

c. Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the surrounding material.

3.9 FIELD PAINTING

3.9.1 Cast-Iron Covers and Frames

After installation, clean cast-iron, not buried in masonry or concrete, of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials to bare metal and apply a coat of bituminous paint.


3.10.1 Tests

Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform all testing and retesting at no additional cost to the Government.


Lines shall be tested for leakage by exfiltration tests prior to completing backfill. Prior to exfiltration tests, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is 600 mm or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other device acceptable to the Contracting Officer. An exfiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 600 mm is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period shall be



measured. Leakage as measured by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 9 mL per mm in diameter per 100 meters of pipeline per hour.

3.10.1.2 Determination Of Density

Testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density relations shall be made in accordance with JIS A 1210 except that mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance withJIS A 1214 .


**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y Laser pr of i l er or mandr el i nspect i on onl y when war r ant ed by scope or s i ze of pr oj ect or when wat er t i ght ness i s r equi r ed.

For Navy, del et e l aser pr of i l er i nspect i on.**************************************************************************

Conduct deflection test no sooner than 30 days after completion of final backfill and compaction testing. Clean or flush all lines prior to testing. Perform a deflection test on entire length of installed flexible pipeline upon completion of work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, placement of concrete, and any other superimposed loads. Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads shall not exceed limits in paragraph PLACING PIPE above as percent of the average inside diameter of pipe. Use a laser profiler or mandrel to determine if allowable deflection has been exceeded.

3.10.1.3.1 Laser Profiler

Inspect pipe interior with laser profiling equipment. Utilize low barrel distortion video equipment for pipe sizes 1.22 m or less. Use a camera with suitable lighting to allow a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe interior. Center the camera in the pipe both vertically and horizontally. The camera must be able to pan and tilt to a 90 degree angle with the axis of the pipe rotating 360 degrees. Use equipment to move the camera through the pipe that will not obstruct the camera's view or interfere with proper documentation of the pipe's condition. The video image shall be clear, focused, and relatively free from roll static or other image distortion qualities that would prevent the reviewer from evaluating the condition of the pipe. For initial post installation inspections for pipe sizes larger than 1.22 m , a visual inspection shall be completed of the pipe interior.

3.10.1.3.2 Mandrel

Pass the mandrel through each run of pipe by pulling it by hand. If deflection readings in excess of the allowable deflection of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained, stop and begin test from the opposite direction. The mandrel must meet the Pipe Manufacture's recommendations and the following requirements. Provide a Mandrel that is rigid, nonadjustable, has a minimum of 9 fins, pulling rings at each end,



and is engraved with the nominal pipe size and mandrel outside diameter. The mandrel must be 4. 5 percent less than the certified-actual pipe diameter for Plastic Pipe. The Government will verify the outside diameter(OD)of the Contractor provided mandrel through the use of Contractor provided proving rings.

3.10.2 Inspection

3.10.2.1 Post-Installation Inspection

Visually inspect each segment of concrete pipe for alignment, settlement, joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, buckling, bulging and deflection. An engineer must evaluate all defects to determine if any remediation or repair is required.

3.10.2.1.1 Concrete

Cracks with a width greater than 0.25 mm . An engineer must evaluate all pipes with cracks with a width greater than 0.25 mm but less than 2.5 mm to determine if any remediation or repair is required.

3.10.2.1.2 Flexible Pipe

Check each flexible pipe (PE, PVC ) for rips, tears, joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, localized bucking, bulges, settlement and alignment.

3.10.2.1.3 Post-Installation Inspection Report

The deflection results and final post installation inspection report must include: a copy of all video taken, pipe location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name, deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and deformation of flexible pipe, inspector notes, condition of joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).

3.10.3 Repair Of Defects


When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, correct source of excess leakage by replacing damaged pipe and gaskets and retest.


When deflection readings are in excess of the allowable deflection of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained, remove pipe which has excessive deflection and replace with new pipe. Retest 30 days after completing backfill, leakage testing and compaction testing.

3.10.3.3 Inspection

Replace pipe or repair defects indicated in the Post-Installation Inspection Report.

3.10.3.3.1 Concrete

Replace pipes having cracks with a width greater than 2.5 mm .



3.10.3.3.2 Flexible Pipe

Replace pipes having cracks or splits.

3.11 PROTECTION

Protect storm drainage piping and adjacent areas from superimposed and external loads during construction.

3.12 WARRANTY PERIOD

Pipe segments found to have defects during the warranty period must be replaced with new pipe and retested.




**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS 33 71 02 ( Febr uar y 2015) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Super sedi ng UFGS 33 71 02 ( Febr uar y 2014)



SECTION 33 71 02

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION02/15


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s t he r equi r ement s f or under gr ound el ect r i cal wor k.




**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on does not cover al l possi bl e met hods or r equi r ement s f or pr ovi di ng under gr ound f aci l i t i es. To do so woul d be t o pr oduce an i nvol ved, conf usi ng document . Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on pr esent s t he usual met hods and t he most used al t er nat i ves. Di f f er ent mat er i al s and met hods, pr oper l y speci f i ed, i ndi cat ed, and economi cal l y used wi l l be accept abl e when appr oved by cogni zant aut hor i t y.

**************************************************************************





**************************************************************************Not e: Thi s sect i on use t he f ol l owi ng manhol e / handhol e sket ches.

NOTE: TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHI CS

Go t o http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tables

LI ST OF SKETCHES

Sket ches ar e avai l abl e i n met r i c ( SI ) and U. S. Cust omar y ( I P) syst em di mensi ons. Sket ch t i t l es and st y l e number s ar e unchanged f or bot h t ypes.

The met r i c val ues i ndi cat ed ar e a conver si on of t he I P syst em di mensi ons.

Do not i ncl ude l i s t of sket ches, or sket ches t hemsel ves, i n pr oj ect speci f i cat i ons. Use manhol e / handhol e sket ches as det ai l s on dr awi ngs whenever possi bl e. I f speci al f eat ur es ar e r equi r ed f or a pr oj ect , do not modi f y sket ches, but i ndi cat e t hese changes on not es bel ow t he sket ch. The " UG" st y l e number s and dat es shoul d r emai n on t he dr awi ng details.

SKETCHNUMBER

TITLE

UG - 1 St andar d El ect r i cal Manhol e ( Nont r af f i c) , Types 1 and 2

UG - 2 St andar d El ect r i cal Manhol e ( Tr af f i c) , Types 3 and 4

UG - 3 St andar d El ect r i cal Manhol e ( Ai r f i el d) , Types 5 and 6

UG - 4 St andar d El ect r i cal Handhol e ( Nont r af f i c) , Types 1 and 2

UG - 5 St andar d El ect r i cal Handhol e ( Tr af f i c/ Ai r f i el d) , Types 3 and 4

UG - 6 St andar d El ect r i cal Handhol e ( Nont r af f i c) , ( Composi t e/ Fi ber gl ass) Types 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

UG - 7 Det ai l s ( Pul l i ng- I n I r ons, Cabl e Rack, and Duct Ent r ance)

**************************************************************************NOTE: The f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on must be shown on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs:

1. Wher e speci f i cat i on i dent i f i es t ype, s i ze, col or , f i ni sh, or ot her def i ni t i ve i nf or mat i on t o be " as i ndi cat ed, " i ncl ude t he i nf or mat i on on t he drawings.

2. Locat i on of duct s, and cabl es.

3. Types of wi r e and cabl e; number and si zes of



conductors.

4. Gr ound r ods and gr ound r i ngs.

5. Locat i ons of f aul t ed c i r cui t i ndi cat or s, when used.

6. Speci al condi t i ons, i ncl udi ng l i ve end caps and duct bank r ei nf or ci ng, as r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************






**************************************************************************


Sel ect Hi gh or Ext r a- Hi gh br acket ed opt i on as r equi r ed f or pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n



t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e.



**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible Japan Industrial Standard (JIS), Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (MLIT), Japan Electrical Safety Inspection Associations or Japan Power Cable Accessories Association (JCAA) standards for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.




JEC 3408 (2015) High voltage test of extra high voltage (11 kV to 500 kV) cross-linked polyethylene cable and connections







JIS C 2805 (2010) Crimp terminal for copper wire

JIS C 2806 (2003) Bare crimping sleeve for copper wire

JIS C 2810 (1995) General rules on non-separable type wire connectors for interior wiring




JIS C 3102 (1984) Annealed Copper Wires for Electrical Purposes


JIS C 3108 (2016) Hard-drawn aluminium wires for electric purposes

JIS C 3109 (1994) Hard-drawn aluminium stranded conductors

JIS C 3341 (2000) Polyvinyl chloride insulated drop service wires

JIS C 3362 (2009) 600 V Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cables

JIS C 3367 (2008) Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV -- Cables for rated voltages of 0.6/1 kV

JIS C 3605 (R2002) 600 V Polyethylene Insulated Cables, Type CV

JIS C 3606 (R2003) High-Voltage Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated Cables, Type CV or CE

JIS C 3612 (2002) 600V Flame Retardant Polyethylene Insulated Wires

JIS C 3653 (2004) Installation methods of power cables buried ground

JIS C 8305 (2019) Rigid Steel Conduits

JIS C 8330 (1999) Fittings for rigid metal conduits

JIS C 8340 (1999)Boxes And Box Covers For Rigid Metal Conduits

JIS C 8350 (1999) Fittings for pliable metal conduits

JIS C 8380 (1993) Plastic coated steel pipes for cable-ways

JIS C 8430 (2019) Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) conduits

JIS C 8432 (2019) Fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) conduits

JIS C 60364-5-54 (2006) Building Electrical Equipment-Part 5-54: Selection Of Electrical Equipment and Contruction-Grounding Equipment, Protective Conductor and Protective



Bonding Conductor


JIS C 60695-2-4-0 (1995) Fire hazard testing Part 2: Test methods -- Section 4/sheet 0: Diffusion type and premixed type flame test methods





JAPAN POWER CABLE ACCESSORIES ASSOCIATION STANDARDS

JCAA A 202 (1989) Indoor / outdoor termination connection for 3300V cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 203 (1992) Straight connection for 3300V cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 302 (1992) Indoor termination connection for 6600V cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 303 (1992) Outdoor termination connection for 6600V cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 305 (1992) Straight connection for 6600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 501 (1988) Indoor termination connection for 22kV 33kV cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 502 (1988) Outdoor termination connection for 22kV 33kV cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable

JCAA A 503 (1988) Straight connection for 22kV and 33kV cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cable


JCS 0168-4 (2010) Calculation of allowable current for power cables under 33 kV- Part 4: Allowable current for 22 kV, 33 kV



crosslinked polyethylene cables

JCS 0501 (2014) Allowable current calculation for power cables above 66kV

JCS 4516 (2010) 3300V Cross-Linked Polyethylene Cable





SOCIETY OF HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND SANITARY ENGINEERS OF JAPAN



UL 94 (2013; Reprint Sep 2017) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

[ 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Do not use t hi s par agr aph f or Navy pr oj ect s.

For Ar my pr oj ect s, sel ect t he f eat ur es and f i l l i n bl anks wi t h sel ect i ons appr opr i at e f or t he desi gn condi t i on and i n accor dance wi t h gui dance cont ai ned i n UFC 3- 550- 01, " Ext er i or El ect r i cal Power Distribution".

See UFC 3- 550- 01 f or gui dance r egar di ng ser vi ce condi t i ons. Ret ai n or add t he r equi r ed condi t i ons.

Pr ovi de sei smi c r equi r ement s, i f a Gover nment desi gner i s t he Engi neer of Recor d, and show on t he dr awi ngs. Del et e t he i nappr opr i at e br acket ed phr ase. Per t i nent por t i ons of UFC 3- 310- 04, " Sei smi c Desi gn f or Bui l di ngs" and Sect i ons 13 48 00 [ SEI SMI C] BRACI NG FOR MI SCELLANEOUS EQUI PMENT and 26 05 48. 00 10 SEI SMI C PROTECTI ON FOR ELECTRI CAL EQUI PMENT pr oper l y edi t ed, must be i ncl uded i n t he cont r act document s.

**************************************************************************

Items provided under this section must be specifically suitable for the following service conditions. Seismic details must [conform to UFC



3-310-04, "Seismic Design for Buildings" and Sections 13 48 00 [SEISMIC] BRACING FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT] [be as indicated].

a. Fungus Control [_____]

b. Altitude [_____] m.

c. Ambient Temperature [_____] degrees C .

d. Frequency [_____]

e. Ventilation [_____]

f. Seismic Parameters [_____]

g. Humidity Control [_____]

h. Corrosive Areas [_____]

i. [_____]

] 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect Hi gh or Ext r a- Hi gh br acket ed opt i on as r equi r ed f or pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude Sect i on 26 08 00 APPARATUS I NSPECTI ON AND TESTI NG on al l pr oj ect s i nvol v i ng [High] [Extra-High] vol t age and gr oundi ng syst ems.

**************************************************************************


1.4 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined.

b. In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.

c. Japan voltage range categories are defined as follows:Low Voltage (Voltages less than 1kV)High Voltage (Voltages 1kV thru 7kV)Extra High Voltage (Voltages over 7kV)

d. In the text of this section, "[High][Extra-High] voltage cable splices," and "[High][Extra-High] voltage cable joints" are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, ar eas subj ect t o ai r cr af t l oadi ng ar e gener al l y def i ned as f ol l ows:



1. For f i xed wi ng ai r cr af t f aci l i t i es:a) On or wi t hi n 61 m of r unway si del i neb) On or wi t hi n 15 m of t axi way or apr on si del i nec) Wi t hi n Type 1 c l ear zone ar ea as def i ned by UFC 3- 260- 01, " Ai r f i el d and Hel i por t Pl anni ng and Design".

2. For r ot ar y wi ng ai r cr af t f aci l i t i es:On l andi ng sur f aces, pr i mar y sur f aces, or wi t hi n ar eas def i ned as " paved and unpaved shoul der s" i n UFC 3- 260- 01, " Ai r f i el d and Hel i por t Pl anni ng and Design".

**************************************************************************

[ d. Underground structures subject to aircraft loading are indicated on the drawings.

] 1.5 SUBMITTALS








**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

[ Aluminum conductors ; G[, [_____]]

][ Submit modified drawings and engineering calculations associated with design changes required for use of aluminum conductors.

] Precast underground structures ; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

**************************************************************************NOTE: Submi t t al s ar e r equi r ed f or each ki nd, vol t age, or t ype used on t he pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

[High][Extra-High] voltage cable ; G[, [_____]]

[High][Extra-High] voltage cable joints ; G[, [_____]]

[High][Extra-High] voltage cable terminations ; G[, [_____]]

[ Live end caps ; G[, [_____]]

] Precast concrete structures ; G[, [_____]]

Sealing Material

Pulling-In Irons

Manhole frames and covers ; G[, [_____]]

Handhole frames and covers ; G[, [_____]]

[ Frames and Covers for Airfield Facilities ; G[, [_____]]

][ Ductile Iron Frames and Covers for Airfield Facilities ; G[, [_____]]

] Composite/fiberglass handholes ; G[, [_____]]

Cable supports (racks, arms and insulators); G[, [_____]]

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, do not use pr ot ect i ve devi ce coor di nat i on st udi es.

**************************************************************************



[ Protective Devices and Coordination Study; G[, [_____]]

][ The study must be submitted with protective device equipment submittals. No time extension or similar contract modifications will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study. Approval of protective devices proposed must be based on recommendations of this study. The Government must not be held responsible for any changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered or procured prior to approval of the study.

] SD-06 Test Reports

[High][Extra-High] voltage cable qualification and production tests ; G[, [_____]]

Field Acceptance Checks and Tests ;

Arc-proofing test for cable fireproofing tape; G[, [_____]]

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use Cabl e I nst al l at i on onl y when pul l i ng cabl e bet ween manhol es; do not use f or pul l i ng f r om pol e r i ser t o manhol e onl y.

**************************************************************************

[ Cable Installation Plan and Procedure ; G[, [_____]]

][ [Six][_____] copies of the information described below in 215.9 by 279.4 mm binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for each cable pull. Separate sections by heavy plastic dividers with tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull.

][ a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified.

][ b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications. The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.

][ c. The cable manufacturer and type of cable.

][ d. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient temperature.

][ e. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions.

][ f. The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.

]1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Precast Underground Structures

Submittal required for each type used. Provide calculations and drawings for precast manholes and handholes bearing the seal of a registered professional engineer including:



a. Material description (i.e., f'c and Fy)

b. Manufacturer's printed assembly and installation instructions

c. Design calculations

d. Reinforcing shop drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

e. Plans and elevations showing opening and pulling-in iron locations and details


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable, unless specified otherwise.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS

2.1.1 Rigid Metal Conduit or Type G

JIS C 8305 , Type G. Diameter of conduit shall be as indicated .



2.1.1.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit, PVC Coated or Type G; LL or LT

JIS C 8380 , Type G; LL or LT .

2.1.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit or Type C

JIS C 8305 , Type C .

2.1.2.1 Intermediate Metal Conduit, PVC Coated or Type C; LL or LT

JIS C 8380 , Type C; LL or LT .

2.1.3 Plastic Conduit or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride for Direct Burial and Riser Applications

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y EPC- 40- PVC or EPC- 80- PVC f or di r ect - bur i al and r i ser appl i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

[ As indicated] [ JIS C 3653 , Type FEP] [or] JIS C 8430 for Type HIVE conduit of diameter of less than 100mm and JIS K 6741 for Type HIVP conduit diameter or 100mm and larger .

2.1.4 Plastic Duct or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride for Concrete Encasement

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose EB- 35 wher e condui t def or mi t y i s a concer n. Choose EPC- 40 wher e r equi r ed by t he act i v i t y. I ncl ude " as i ndi cat ed" when dr awi ngs desi gnat e di f f er ent appl i cat i ons, such as, Type EB f or pr i mar y di st r i but i on and Type EPC f or secondar y di st r i but i on t o avoi d t r ansi t i ons f or r i ser s. .

**************************************************************************

Provide[ as indicated] [ or JIS C 8430 for Type VE conduit of diameter of less than 100mm and JIS K 6741 for Type VP conduit diameter or 100mm and larger] .

2.1.5 Innerduct

Provide corrugated [or solid wall] polyethylene (PE) or PVC innerducts, or fabric-mesh innerducts, with pullwire. Size as indicated.

2.1.6 Duct Sealant

UL 94 and JIS C 60695-2-4-0 . Provide high-expansion urethane foam duct sealant that expands and hardens to form a closed, chemically and water resistant, rigid structure. Sealant must be compatible with common cable and wire jackets and capable of adhering to metals, plastics and concrete. Sealant must be capable of curing in temperature ranges of 2 degrees C to 35 degrees C . Cured sealant must withstand temperature ranges of -29 degrees C to 93 degrees C without loss of function.



2.1.7 Fittings

2.1.7.1 Metal Fittings

JIS C 8330 and JIS C 8350 .

2.1.7.2 PVC or Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose UL l i s t ed f i t t i ngs f or most appl i cat i ons and wher e condui t i s r equi r ed t o compl y wi t h NFPA 70.

**************************************************************************

[ JIS C 8432 for diameters less than 100mm ] [ JIS K 6743 for diameters 100mm or larger] .

[ 2.1.7.3 Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit

Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit must be cast-metal cadmium or zinc-coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and must conform to JIS C 8340 .

] 2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

**************************************************************************NOTE: I n most cases NFPA 70 r equi r es l i s t ed conduct or s and cabl e. Choose br acket ed i t em f or NEMA WC 70 onl y when compl i ance wi t h NFPA 70 i s not required.

**************************************************************************

Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of applicable codes and standards , including listing requirements[, or in accordance with JIS C 3362 or JIS C 3367 ]. Wires and cables manufactured more than [24][12] months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable. Service entrance conductors must conform to JIS C 3341 .

2.2.1 Conductor Types

**************************************************************************NOTE: Al l ow al umi num conduct or s f or new under gr ound lines.

**************************************************************************

Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and [ THHN/THWN][EM-IE][EM-CE] unless otherwise noted. Conductors 5.5 sqmm and smaller must be solid. Conductors 8 sqmm and larger must be stranded.[ Conductors 14 sqmm and smaller must be copper. Conductors 22 sqmm and larger may be either copper or aluminum, at the Contractor's option. Do not substitute aluminum for copper if the equivalent aluminum conductor size would exceed 250 sqmm. When the Contractor chooses to use aluminum for conductors 22 sqmm and larger, the Contractor must: increase the conductor size to have the same ampacity as the copper size indicated; increase the conduit and pull box sizes to accommodate the larger size aluminum conductors in accordance with applicable codes and standards ; ensure that the pulling tension rating of the aluminum conductor is sufficient; relocate equipment, modify equipment terminations, resize



equipment, and resolve to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer problems that are direct results of the use of aluminum conductors in lieu of copper.][ All conductors must be copper.]

2.2.2 Conductor Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pr oj ect appl i cat i ons whi ch r equi r e a di f f er ent i nsul at i on t han t hose l i s t ed bel ow, r ef er ence a Gover nment or i ndust r y st andar d t hat t he cabl e or conduct or must meet . For pr oj ect s whi ch r equi r e mul t i pl e t ypes of i nsul at i ons, i ndi cat e t he t ype f or each cabl e on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs. Ref er t o UFC 3- 550- 01, " Ext er i or El ect r i cal Power Di st r i but i on" f or f ur t her gui dance.

**************************************************************************

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required, wires in conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt,conforming to [Type EM-IE conforming to JIS C 3612 ][ or ][Type EM-CE, EM-CET or EM-ECEQ conforming to JIS C 3605 ] . Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying with JCS 1226 and JIS C 3102 and JIS C 3105 .[ Aluminum conductors must be Type AA-8000 aluminum conductors complying with JIS C 3108 and JIS C 3109 , and must be of an aluminum alloy listed or labeled by UL as "component aluminum-wire stock (conductor material). Type 1350 is not acceptable. Intermixing of copper and aluminum conductors in the same raceway is not permitted.]

[ 2.2.3 Jackets

Multiconductor cables must have an overall PVC outer jacket.

][ 2.2.4 Direct Buried

Single-conductor [and multi-conductor ]cables must be of a type identified for direct burial.

][ 2.2.5 In Duct

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Ar my and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s onl y, coi l abl e pl ast i c duct may be used as an al t er nat i ve t o di r ect bur i al wher e ext r a physi cal pr ot ect i on i s required.

**************************************************************************

Cables must be single-conductor cable.[ Cables in factory-installed, coilable-plastic-duct assemblies where extra physical protection is required .]

] 2.2.6 Cable Marking

Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length.

Identify each cable by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag must contain the following information; cable



type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.

Conductors must be color coded. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat shrink type sleeves,or colored electrical tape. Control circuit terminations must be properly identified. Color must be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals must be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows:

a. Three -phase - Primary

(1) Phase A - red

(2) Phase B - white

(3) Phase C - blue

b. Three -phase - Secondary

(1) Phase A - red

(2) Phase B - black

(3) Phase C - blue

c. 480/277 volt, three phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

d. Single phase: Black and red

[ d. On three-phase, four-wire delta system, high leg must be orange, as required.

] 2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS

Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

a. For use with copper conductors: JIS C 2805 , JIS C 2806 and JIS C 2810 .

[ b. For use with aluminum conductors: JIS C 2805 , JIS C 2806 and JIS C 2810 . For connecting aluminum to copper, connectors must be the circumferentially compressed, metallurgically bonded type.

] 2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES

Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water.



2.4.1 Heat Shrinkable Splice

Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4.2 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice

Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation. The installation must not require heat or flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It must be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor, outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.

2.5 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE CABLE

Cable (conductor) sizes are designated by millimeters (mm) and square milimeters (sqmm) . Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length. Wires and cables manufactured more than [24][12] months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable. Provide single conductor type cables unless otherwise indicated.

2.5.1 Cable Configuration

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose 133 per cent i nsul at i on l evel on 5 kV, 15 kV and 25 kV r at ed cabl es. Pr ovi de i nsul at i on r esi st ance l evel f or hi gh vol t age and ext r a- hi gh vol t age r at ed cabl es per manuf act ur er recommendations.

**************************************************************************

Provide [Type CVT, conforming to JCS 4516 for 3.3kV][Type EM-CET, conforming to JIS C 3606 for 6.6kV][ or ][Type EM-CET, conforming to JCS 0168-4 for 22kV and 33kV][Type CV-CVT, conforming to JCS 0501 for 66kV and 77kV]. [concentric neutral underground distribution cable][metallic armored cables, consisting of three-conductor, multi-conductor cables, with insulation and shielding, as specified, using [a galvanized steel][an aluminum] interlocked tape armor and thermoplastic jacket] . Provide cables manufactured for use in[ duct][ or][ direct burial] applications[ as indicated]. Cable must be rated [3.3kV] [5 kV] [6.6kV] [15 kV] [22kV] [25 kV][28 kV] [33kV] [35 kV] [66kV][77kV] [as indicated] with [ [100][133] percent insulation level ][[ ] insulation resistance] .

2.5.2 Conductor Material

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de al umi num conduct or s f or new under gr ound ci r cui t s and ext ensi ons of exi st i ng c i r cui t s. Thi s i ncl udes al l new hi gh or ext r a- hi gh vol t age syst ems desi gns t hat do not r equi r e i nt er f ace ( spl i c i ng copper t o al umi num i n under gr ound st r uct ur es) wi t h exi st i ng copper



i nf r ast r uct ur e. Ref er t o UFC 3- 550- 01, " Ext er i or El ect r i cal Power Di st r i but i on" par agr aph ent i t l ed " Under gr ound El ect r i cal Syst ems" f or addi t i onal guidance.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: A concent r i c compr essed conduct or has a di amet er t hat i s 3 per cent l ess t han a r egul ar concent r i c conduct or . A compact conduct or has a di amet er t hat i s 10 per cent l ess t han a r egul ar concent r i c conduct or . Edi t t o speci f y compact conduct or s wher e necessar y t o l i mi t duct f i l l ( i . e. wher e new conduct or s ar e i nst al l ed i n exi st i ng ducts).

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Copper conduct or s f or under gr ound ci r cui t s wi l l r equi r e appr oval f r om t he AHJ.

**************************************************************************

Provide concentric-lay-stranded, Class B[ compact round] conductors. Provide[ aluminum alloy conductors complying with JIS C 3108 and JIS C 3109][ aluminum alloy cables, 3/4 hard minimum for regular concentric and compressed stranding or for compacted stranding][ soft drawn copper cables complying with JCS 1226 and JIS C 3102 and JIS C 3105 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or JIS C 3606 for compact stranding].

2.5.3 Insulation

**************************************************************************NOTE: For pr oj ect s whi ch r equi r e mul t i pl e t ypes of i nsul at i ons, or speci al t ypes of cabl es, such as submar i ne cabl e, i ndi cat e t he t ype f or each cabl e on t he pr oj ect dr awi ngs. Choose XLP or t r ee r et ar dant XLP f or " UD or URD" cabl e and ei t her XLP or EPR f or Type MV cabl e.

**************************************************************************

Provide [ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation][tree-retardant cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLP) insulation ].

2.5.4 Shielding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t ape shi el di ng unl ess wi r e shi el di ng i s al l owed or r equi r ed by t he Act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

Cables rated for 2 kV and above must have a semiconducting conductor shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper[ tape][ or][ wire] shield for each phase.

2.5.5 Neutrals

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Use f i r st br acket ed sent ence f or t ype MV cabl e and second br acket ed sent ence f or t ype UD/ URD cabl e.

I n second br acket ed sent ence, sel ect f ul l ampaci t y concent r i c neut r al f or s i ngl e- phase appl i cat i ons and one- t hi r d ampaci t y f or t hr ee- phase appl i cat i ons.

I ncl ude t he l ast br acket ed sent ence wher e hi gh i mpedance gr ounded neut r al syst ems ar e empl oyed.

**************************************************************************

[ Neutral conductors must be [copper][aluminum], employing the same insulation and jacket materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation rating is acceptable.] [Concentric neutrals conductors must be copper, having a combined ampacity [equal to][1/3 of] the phase conductor ampacity rating.] [ For high impedance grounded neutral systems, the neutral conductors from the neutral point of the transformer or generator to the connection point at the impedance must utilize [copper][aluminum] conductors, employing the same insulation level and construction as the phase conductors.

] 2.5.6 Jackets

**************************************************************************NOTE: PVC i s accept abl e f or duct appl i cat i ons. Pol yet hyl ene ( LLDPE) i s except i onal f or di r ect bur i al and i n duct appl i cat i ons wher e t her e i s s i gni f i cant amount s of wat er . Ther e ar e many ot her t ypes of j acket mat er i al s avai l abl e ( neopr ene, hypal on, t her mopl ast i c CPE) f or speci al envi r onment s i nvol v i ng exposur e t o sunl i ght , pet r ol eum pr oduct s, and cor r osi ve chemi cal s. Consul t l ocal cabl e r epr esent at i ves t o speci f y t he appr opr i at e j acket f or t he appl i cat i on.

Choose t he l ast br acket ed sent ence when PVC i s specified.

**************************************************************************

Provide cables with a [PVC][_____] jacket.[ Direct buried cables must be rated for direct burial.] [ Provide type UD cables with an overall jacket.][ Provide PVC jackets with a separator that prevents contact with underlying semiconducting insulating shield.]

2.6 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f i cat i on sect i ons f or equi pment , such as pad- mount ed t r ansf or mer s, SF- 6 swi t ches, and uni t subst at i ons, cont ai n par agr aphs f or t er mi nat i ons, and have not been updat ed t o coor di nat e wi t h t hi s speci f i cat i on sect i on. When t hi s par agr aph i s used onl y f or t hat equi pment , speci f y t er mi nat i ons ei t her i n t hat sect i on or i n t hi s sect i on, and del et e par agr aph f r om t he ot her sect i on.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Pr ovi de i ndoor t er mi nat or / out door t er mi nat i ons wi t h ski r t s. By i ncl udi ng ski r t s f or " i ndoor " and " wi t hi n equi pment " l ocat i ons, t r acki ng r esi st ance i s s i gni f i cant l y i mpr oved. Pr ovi s i on of ski r t s f or i ndoor t er mi nat i ons aut omat i cal l y makes t hem I EEE 48 Cl ass 1.

**************************************************************************

Provide indoor terminator/outdoor terminations with skirts. [ JCAA A 202 for 3.3kV][ JCAA A 302 and JCAA A 303 for 6.6kV][ JCAA A 501 and JCAA A 502 for 22kV and 33kV][ JEC 3408 for 66kV and 77kV] ; of the molded elastomer, prestretched elastomer, or heat-shrinkable elastomer. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations, where required, must be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding, metallic sheath, or armor. Terminations must be provided in a kit, including: skirts, stress control terminator, ground clamp, connectors, lugs, and complete instructions for assembly and installation. Terminations must be the product of one manufacturer, suitable for the type, diameter, insulation class and level, and materials of the cable terminated. Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the terminator.

2.6.1 Cold-Shrink Type

Terminator must be a one-piece design, utilizing the manufacturer's latest technology, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber. Termination must not require heat or flame for installation. Termination kit must contain all necessary materials (except for the lugs). Termination must be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor locations and must resist ultraviolet rays and oxidative decomposition.

2.6.2 Heat Shrinkable Type

Terminator must consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed outer covering that is nontracking, resists heavy atmospheric contaminants, ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition. Provide heat shrinkable sheds or skirts of the same material. Termination must be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor locations.

[ 2.6.3 Separable Insulated Connector Type

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e t he connect or r at i ngs r equi r ed wi t h t he equi pment speci f i cat i on f or t r ansf or mer s and swi t ches.

Separ abl e connect or s must not be used i n manhol es.**************************************************************************

Provide connector with steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye,



test point, and arc-quenching contact material. Provide connectors of the loadbreak or deadbreak type as indicated, of suitable construction for the application and the type of cable connected, and that include cable shield adaptors. Provide external clamping points and test points. Separable connectors must not be used in manholes/handholes.

[ a. 200 Ampere loadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Short time rating: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, pr ovi de 200 amper e bushi ng i nt er f ace on al l 600 amper e connect or s.

**************************************************************************

[ b. 600 Ampere deadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Short time rating: 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes.[ Connectors must have 200 ampere bushing interface[ for surge arresters][ as indicated].]

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph onl y when t he act i v i t y r equi r es addi t i onal gr oundi ng el bows and f eed- t hr u i nser t s.

**************************************************************************

[ c. Provide[ [one][_____] set[s] of three grounding elbows][ and][ [one][_____] set[s] of three feed-thru inserts]. Deliver [grounding elbows][ and ][feed-thru inserts] to the Contracting Officer.

]**************************************************************************

NOTE: I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph onl y when t he act i v i t y r equi r es f aul t ed c i r cui t i ndi cat or s.

**************************************************************************

[ d. Install one set of faulted circuit indicators on the test points of each set of separable insulated connectors. Indicators must be self powered; with automatic trip with mechanical flag indication upon overcurrent followed by loss of system voltage, and automatic reset upon restoration of system voltage. Indicators must be compact, sealed corrosion resistant construction with provision for hotstick installation and operation.

] ] 2.7 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS

Provide joints (splices) in accordance with [ JCAA A 203 for 3.3kV][JCAA A 305 for 6.6kV][ JCAA A 503 for 22kV and 33 kV][ JEC 3408 for 66kV and 77kV] suitable for the rated voltage, insulation level, insulation type, and construction of the cable. Joints must be certified by the manufacturer for waterproof, submersible applications. Upon request, supply manufacturer's design qualification test report in accordance with [JCAA A 203 for 3.3kV][ JCAA A 305 for 6.6kV][ JCAA A 503 for 22kV and 33 kV][JEC 3408 for 66kV and 77kV] . Connectors for joint must be tin-plated electrolytic copper, having ends tapered and having center stops to equalize cable insertion.

2.7.1 Heat-Shrinkable Joint

Consists of a uniform cross-section heat-shrinkable polymeric construction



with a linear stress relief system, a high dielectric strength insulating material, and an integrally bonded outer conductor layer for shielding. Replace original cable jacket with a heavy-wall heat-shrinkable sleeve with hot-melt adhesive coating.

2.7.2 Cold-Shrink Rubber-Type Joint

Joint must be of a cold shrink design that does not require any heat source for its installation. Splice insulation and jacket must be of a one-piece factory formed cold shrink sleeve made of black EPDM rubber. Splice must be packaged three splices per kit, including complete installation instructions.

2.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

Provide telecommunications cabling in accordance with Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP).

[ 2.9 LIVE END CAPS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Li ve end caps ar e onl y r equi r ed when cabl e i s r equi r ed t o r emai n unt er mi nat ed, but ener gi zed. Li ve end cap l ocat i ons must be i ndi cat ed on t he drawings.

**************************************************************************

Provide live end caps using a "kit" including a heat-shrinkable tube and a high dielectric strength, polymeric plug overlapping the conductor. End cap must conform to applicable portions of [ JCAA A 202 for 3.3kV][JCAA A 302 and JCAA A 303 for 6.6kV][ JCAA A 501 and JCAA A 502 for 22kV and 33kV][ JEC 3408 for 66kV and 77kV] .

] 2.10 TAPE

2.10.1 Insulating Tape

JIS C 2336 and JIS C 2338 , plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C.

2.10.2 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, use Sect i on 31 23 00. 00 20, EXCAVATI ON AND FI LL.

**************************************************************************

Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section [ 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL][ 31 00 00 EARTHWORK].

2.10.3 Fireproofing Tape

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph wher e hi gh or extra-high vol t age cabl e ( 2200 vol t s or gr eat er ) i s i nst al l ed i n manhol es, handhol es and vaul t s.

**************************************************************************

Provide tape composed of a flexible, conformable, unsupported intumescent



elastomer. Tape must be not less than 0.762 mm thick, noncorrosive to cable sheath, self-extinguishing, noncombustible, adhesive-free, and must not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage, and fungus.

2.11 PULL ROPE

Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of 890 N .


2.12.1 Driven Ground Rods

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de sol i d copper gr ound r ods when soi l condi t i ons ar e cor r osi ve.

**************************************************************************

Provide [copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to JIS C 60364-5-54][solid copper ground rods conforming to JIS C 60364-5-54 ][solid stainless steel ground rods] not less than [ 19 mm ] in diameter by [ 3.1 m ] in length. Sectional type rods may be used for rods 6 meters or longer.

2.12.2 Grounding Conductors

Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to JIS C 3105 soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Solid-bare copper conductors must conform to JIS C 3101 for sizes 8 sqmm and smaller. Insulated conductors must be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts. Aluminum is not acceptable.

2.13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t he f i r st br acket ed par agr aph when pr oj ect i ncl udes a concr et e sect i on i n Di v i s i on 3; ot her wi se, t he second br acket ed par agr aph may be used. Coor di nat e r equi r ement s wi t h Sect i on 03 30 00 CAST- I N- PLACE CONCRETE.

**************************************************************************

Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. In addition, provide concrete for encasement of underground ducts with 20 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts must be 30 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise.

2.14 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t hi s par agr aph t o compl y wi t h pr oj ect r equi r ement s concer ni ng t he t ype of st r uct ur e or duct , st r engt h of concr et e, concr et e mi x, met al accessor i es, and excavat i ng and gr adi ng. I ndi cat e speci al r ei nf or ci ng wher e r equi r ed, par t i cul ar l y wi t h duct banks of non- r ect angul ar cr oss- sect i on.



Cont act l ocal t el ephone company, wher e appl i cabl e, concer ni ng t he si ze of al l s i gnal manhol es and t he number and t ype of s i gnal duct r equi r ed. Det er mi ne avai l abi l i t y s i nce ai r cr af t or H20 hi ghway l oadi ngs may not be avai l abl e i n pr ecast .

For Navy pr oj ect s onl y, see st andar d sket ches UG- 1 t hr ough UG- 7, cover i ng manhol es and handhol es l ocat ed at http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs/forms-graphics-tablesI ncl ude t he r equi r ed sket ches on t he pr oj ect drawings.

**************************************************************************

Provide precast concrete underground structures or standard type cast-in-place manhole types as indicated, conforming to JIS A 5372 . Top, walls, and bottom must consist of reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom must be of monolithic concrete construction. Locate duct entrances and windows near the corners of structures to facilitate cable racking. Covers must fit the frames without undue play. Form steel and iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Install a pulling-in iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. Cable racks, including rack arms and insulators, must be adequate to accommodate the cable.

2.14.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t br acket ed i t ems at desi gner ' s di scr et i on and as r equi r ed wher e ai r cr af t l oadi ng i s i n pr oj ect .

**************************************************************************

Concrete must conform to Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.[ Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete except that precast concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete manhole risers.][ Concrete block must conform to Section 04 20 00 , MASONRY.][ Concrete block is not allowed in areas subject to aircraft loading.]

2.14.2 Precast Concrete Structures, Risers and Tops

Precast concrete underground structures may be provided in lieu of cast-in-place subject to the requirements specified below. Precast units must be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete products, including precast manholes.

2.14.2.1 General

Precast concrete structures must have the same accessories and facilities as required for cast-in-place structures. Likewise, precast structures must have plan area and clear heights not less than those of cast-in-place structures. Concrete materials and methods of construction must be the same as for cast-in-place concrete construction, as modified herein. Slope in floor may be omitted provided precast sections are poured in reinforced steel forms. Concrete for precast work must have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 30 MPa . Structures may be precast to the design and details indicated for cast-in-place construction,



precast monolithically and placed as a unit, or structures may be assembled sections, designed and produced by the manufacturer in accordance with the requirements specified. Structures must be identified with the manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached to an interior wall face.

2.14.2.2 Design for Precast Structures

In the absence of detailed on-site soil information, design for the following soil parameters/site conditions:

a. Angle of Internal Friction (phi) = 0.523 rad

b. Unit Weight of Soil (Dry) = 1760 kg/m 3, (Saturated)

= 2080 kg/m 3

c. Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure (Ka) = 0.33

d. Ground Water Level = 915 mm below ground elevation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Speci f y H20 hi ghway l oadi ng f or most l ocat i ons. Revi se as r equi r ed i f l oadi ng i n excess of H20 hi ghway l oadi ng i s r equi r ed.

I ndi cat e st r uct ur es subj ect t o ai r cr af t l oadi ng on t he dr awi ngs. Al so show st r uct ur e desi gn r equi r ement s on t he dr awi ngs. Decks and cover s subj ect t o ai r cr af t l oadi ngs must be desi gned f or l oadi ngs per FAA AC- 150/ 5320- 6 except as f ol l ows:

a. Cover s must be desi gned f or 45 000 kg wheel l oads wi t h 1. 72 MPa t i r e pr essur e.

b. For spans of l ess t han 0. 6 m i n t he l east di r ect i on, a uni f or m l i ve l oad of 2. 24 Mpa must be used.

c. For spans of 0. 6 m or gr eat er i n t he l east di r ect i on, t he desi gn must be based on t he number of wheel s whi ch wi l l f i t t he span. Wheel l oads of 34, 000 kg each must be used.

**************************************************************************

e. Vertical design loads must include full dead, superimposed dead, and live loads including a 30 percent magnification factor for impact. Live loads must consider all types and magnitudes of vehicular (automotive, industrial, or aircraft) traffic to be encountered. The minimum design vertical load must be for H20 highway loading.

f. Horizontal design loads must include full geostatic and hydrostatic pressures for the soil parameters, water table, and depth of installation to be encountered. Also, horizontal loads imposed by adjacent structure foundations, and horizontal load components of vertical design loads, including impact, must be considered, along with a pulling-in iron design load of 26,700 N .

g. Each structural component must be designed for the load combination



and positioning resulting in the maximum shear and moment for thatparticular component.

h. Design must also consider the live loads induced in the handling, installation, and backfilling of the manholes. Provide lifting devices to ensure structural integrity during handling and installation.

2.14.2.3 Construction

Structure top, bottom, and wall must be of a uniform thickness of not less than 150 mm . Thin-walled knock-out panels for designed or future duct bank entrances are not permitted. Provide quantity, size, and location of duct bank entrance windows as directed, and cast completely open by the precaster. Size of windows must exceed the nominal duct bank envelope dimensions by at least 305 mm vertically and horizontally to preclude in-field window modifications made necessary by duct bank misalignment. However, the sides of precast windows must be a minimum of 150 mm from the inside surface of adjacent walls, floors, or ceilings. Form the perimeter of precast window openings to have a keyed or inward flared surface to provide a positive interlock with the mating duct bank envelope. Provide welded wire fabric reinforcing through window openings for in-field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes. Provide additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least two No. 13 bars around window openings. Provide drain sumps a minimum of 305 mm in diameter and 100 mm deep for precast structures.

2.14.2.4 Joints

Provide tongue-and-groove joints on mating edges of precast components. Shiplap joints are not allowed. Design joints to firmly interlock adjoining components and to provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip. Install sealing material in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide waterproofing at conduit/duct entrances into structures, and where access frame meets the top slab, provide continuous grout seal.

2.14.3 Manhole Frames and Covers

Provide cast iron frames and covers for manholes conforming to SHASE-S 209 and JIS A 5506 . Cast the words "ELECTRIC" or "TELECOMMUNICATIONS" in the top face of power and telecommunications manhole covers, respectively.

2.14.4 Handhole Frames and Covers

Frames and covers of steel must be welded by qualified welders in accordance with standard commercial practice. Steel covers must be rolled-steel floor plate having an approved antislip surface. Hinges must be of [stainless steel with bronze hinge pin] [wrought steel], 125 by 125 mm by approximately 4.75 mm thick, without screw holes, and must be for full surface application by fillet welding. Hinges must have nonremovable pins and five knuckles. The surfaces of plates under hinges must be true after the removal of raised antislip surface, by grinding or other approved method.

[ 2.14.5 Frames and Covers for Airfield Facilities

**************************************************************************



NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph f or st r uct ur es subj ect t o ai r cr af t l oadi ng.

**************************************************************************

Fabricate frames and covers for airfield use of standard commercial grade steel welded by qualified welders. Covers must be of rolled steel floor plate having an approved anti-slip surface. Steel frames and covers must be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

][ 2.14.6 Ductile Iron Frames and Covers for Airfield Facilities

**************************************************************************NOTE: As an opt i on, t he desi gner may al so al l ow t he use of t hi s par agr aph f or st r uct ur es subj ect t o ai r cr af t l oadi ng.

**************************************************************************

At the contractor's option, ductile iron covers and frames designed for a minimum proof load of 45,000 kg may be provided in lieu of the steel frames and covers indicated. Covers must be of the same material as the frames (i.e. ductile iron frame with ductile iron cover, galvanized steel frame with galvanized steel cover). Perform proof loading in accordance with applicable codes and standards . Proof loads must be physically stamped into the cover. Provide the Contracting Officer copies of previous proof load test results performed on the same frames and covers as proposed for this contract. Modify the top of the structure to accept the ductile iron structure in lieu of the steel structure indicated. The finished structure must be level and non-rocking, with the top flush with the surrounding pavement.

] 2.14.7 Brick for Manhole Collar

Provide sewer and manhole brick as required per applicable codes and standards .

2.14.8 Composite/Fiberglass Handholes and Covers

Provide handholes and covers of polymer concrete, reinforced with heavy weave fiberglass with a design load (Tier rating) appropriate for or greater than the intended use. All covers are required to have the Tier level rating embossed on the surface and this rating must not exceed the design load of the box.

2.15 CABLE SUPPORTS (RACKS, ARMS, AND INSULATORS)

The metal portion of racks and arms must be zinc-coated after fabrication.

2.15.1 Cable Rack Stanchions

The wall bracket or stanchion must be 100 mm by approximately 38 mm by 4.76 mm channel steel, or 100 mm by approximately 25 mm glass-reinforced nylon with recessed bolt mounting holes, 1220 mm long (minimum) in manholes. Slots for mounting cable rack arms must be spaced at 200 mm intervals.

2.15.2 Rack Arms

Cable rack arms must be steel or malleable iron or glass reinforced nylon and must be of the removable type. Rack arm length must be a minimum of



200 mm and a maximum of 305 mm .

2.15.3 Insulators

Insulators for metal rack arms must be dry-process glazed porcelain. Insulators are not required for nylon arms.

2.16 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ver i f y cabl e l abel i ng r equi r ement s wi t h t he l ocal Act i v i t y.

**************************************************************************

Provide tags for each power cable located in manholes. The tags must be polyethylene. Do not provide handwritten letters. The first position on the power cable tag must denote the voltage. The second through sixth positions on the tag must identify the circuit. The next to last position must denote the phase of the circuit and include the Greek "phi" symbol. The last position must denote the cable size. As an example, a tag could have the following designation: "11.5 NAS 1-8(Phase A)500," denoting that the tagged cable is on the 11.5kV system circuit number NAS 1-8, underground, Phase A, sized at 500 kcmil.

2.16.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags

Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 22.4 MPa; and that are 2 millimeter thick (minimum), non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 77 degrees C . Provide 1.3 mm (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties must have a minimum loop tensile strength of 778.75 N . The cable tags must have black block letters, numbers, and symbols 25 mm high on a yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols must not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.

2.17 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE ABOVE GROUND CABLE TERMINATING CABINETS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Cabl e t er mi nat i ng cabi net s may be used f or above gr ound appl i cat i ons onl y. They may be ut i l i zed i n pl ace of manhol es f or cabl e spl i c i ng wher e t he l ocal wat er t abl e does not al l ow f or manhol e dr ai nage, or i n l i mi t ed appl i cat i ons wher e i t i s desi r abl e t o pr ovi de a dead- br eak ci r cui t sect i onal i z i ng poi nt f or c i r cui t i sol at i on. Loadbr eak connect or s ar e not avai l abl e f or appl i cat i ons above 200 A.

**************************************************************************

Cable terminating cabinets must be hook-stick operable, deadfront construction. Provide cabinets with [200 A. loadbreak junctions and elbow-type separable loadbreak connectors, cable parking stands, and grounding lugs][600 A. dead-break junctions and elbow-type separable dead-break connectors, cable parking stands, and grounding lugs]. Provide cable terminating equipment [as indicated] .



Ratings at [50][ 60] Hz must be:

Nominal voltage (kV) [_____]

Rated maximum voltage (kV) [ [3.3][6.6] [15] [22][25] [33] [35] [66][77] ]

Rated continuous current (A) [[200][600]]

One-second short-time current-carrying capacity (kA) [_____]

BIL (kV) [_____]

2.18 LOW VOLTAGE ABOVE GROUND TERMINATION PEDESTAL

Provide copolymer polypropylene, low voltage above ground termination pedestal manufactured through an injection molding process. Pedestals must resist fertilizers, salt air environments and ultra-violet radiation. Pedestal top must be imprinted with a "WARNING" and "ELECTRIC" identification. Pedestal must contain [three][four] lay-in six port connectors. Connectors must be dual rated for aluminum or copper, and capable of terminating conductors ranging from [5.5 sqmm to 250 sqmm] . Protect each connector with a clear, hard lexan (plastic) cover. Pedestal must be provided with rust-free material and stainless steel hardware. Pedestal must be lockable.

2.19 PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND COORDINATION

**************************************************************************

NOTE: Do not use on Navy Pr oj ect s. Per UFC 3- 501- 01, " El ect r i cal Engi neer i ng" , t he desi gner of r ecor d i s r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng a desi gn st age and a f i nal coor di nat i on st udy based on as bui l t conditions.

For t he Ar my and Ai r For ce, t he desi gner i s r esponsi bl e f or speci f y i ng t he r equi r ement f or f uses, c i r cui t br eaker s, pr ot ect i ve r el ays, or ot her pr ot ect i ve devi ces associ at ed wi t h t he pr oj ect and depi ct i ng t hem on t he dr awi ngs. Sel ect and speci f y t he pr ot ect i ve devi ces t o pr ot ect el ect r i cal power syst em conduct or s or equi pment agai nst sust ai ned over l oads, i n- r ush condi t i ons, el ect r i cal f aul t s, or ot her abnor mal power syst em or equi pment oper at i ng condi t i ons, i n accor dance wi t h I EEE 242, and I EEE 141. Ut i l i ze sect i on 26 28 01. 00 10 COORDI NATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTI ON and coor di nat e t he i ncor por at i on of t he pr ot ect i ve devi ce r equi r ement s i dent i f i ed i n t he ot her equi pment speci f i cat i on sections.

**************************************************************************

Provide protective devices and coordination as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.




2.20.1 Arc-Proofing Test for Cable Fireproofing Tape

Manufacturer must test one sample assembly consisting of a straight lead tube 305 mm long with a 65.5 mm outside diameter, and a 3.175 mm thick wall, and covered with one-half lap layer of arc and fireproofing tape per manufacturer's instructions. The arc and fireproofing tape must withstand extreme temperature of a high-current fault arc 13,000 degrees K for 70 cycles as determined by using an argon directed plasma jet capable of constantly producing and maintaining an arc temperature of 13,000 degrees K. Temperature (13,000 degrees K) of the ignited arc between the cathode and anode must be obtained from a dc power source of 305 (plus or minus 5) amperes and 20 (plus or minus 1) volts. The arc must be directed toward the sample assembly accurately positioned 5 (plus or minus 1) millimeters downstream in the plasma from the anode orifice by fixed flow rate of argon gas (0.18 g per second). Each sample assembly must be tested at three unrelated points. Start time for tests must be taken from recorded peak current when the specimen is exposed to the full test temperature. Surface heat on the specimen prior to that time must be minimal. The end point is established when the plasma or conductive arc penetrates the protective tape and strikes the lead tube. Submittals for arc-proofing tape must indicate that the test has been performed and passed by the manufacturer.

2.20.2 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] Voltage Cable Qualification and Production Tests

Results of qualification and production tests as applicable for each type of [high][extra-high] voltage cable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Soi l t r eat ment f or t er mi t e cont r ol must conf or m t o Sect i on 31 31 16. 13 CHEMI CAL TERMI TE CONTROL, except t hat appl i cat i on t o di r ect bur i al cabl e i nst al l at i on must be as speci f i ed. I n l i eu of soi l poi soni ng, cabl e i n di r ect - bur i ed EPC- 40- PVC condui t can be a mor e economi cal and pr act i cal way of pr ot ect i ng cabl e f r om t er mi t es.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: CALPUC publ i cat i on appl i es onl y t o St at e of Cal i f or ni a Publ i c Ut i l i t i es Commi ssi on CALPUC G. O. 128, " Const r uct i on of Under gr ound El ect r i c Suppl y and Communi cat i on Syst em" f or under gr ound el ect r i cal wor k. For ot her st at es, del et e t hi s publ i cat i on and i nser t ot her publ i cat i ons whi ch gover n under gr ound el ect r i cal wor k f or t hat st at e. Revi se r ef er ence par agr aph t o i ncl ude del et i on or addi t i on of st at e publ i cat i on.

**************************************************************************

Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of



applicable codes and standards and IEEE C2 . In addition to these requirements, install telecommunications in accordance with MLIT ESS .

3.2 CABLE INSPECTION

Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals prior to installation. If end seal is broken, remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

[ 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph when pul l i ng cabl e bet ween manhol es. Do not use t hi s par agr aph when onl y i nst al l i ng bet ween pol es and manhol es

Choose checkl i st f or smal l el ect r i cal di st r i but i on j obs, and cal cul at i ons f or l ar ge j obs.

**************************************************************************

Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable diameter, bending radius, cable temperature limits for installation, lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures, moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, maximum allowable pulling tension, and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure. [Prepare a checklist of significant requirements][Perform pulling calculations and prepare a pulling plan] and submit along with the manufacturer's instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS. Install cable strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations and the approved installation plan.

[Calculations and pulling plan must include:

a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.

b. List of cable installation equipment.

c. Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.

d. Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering cable.

e. Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.

f. Cable percentage conduit fill.

g. Cable sidewall bearing pressure.

h. Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.

i. Cable jam ratio.

j. Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of conductor.

k. Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.



] ] 3.4 UNDERGROUND FEEDERS SUPPLYING BUILDINGS

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy onl y, choose PVC.

**************************************************************************

Terminate underground feeders supplying building at a point 1525 mm outside the building and projections thereof, except that conductors must be continuous to the terminating point indicated. Coordinate connections of the feeders to the service entrance equipment with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide [PVC, Type EPC-40][IMC][RGS] [Type G][Type FEP][Type VP][Type VE][Type HIVP][Type HIVE] conduit from the supply equipment to a point 1525 mm outside the building and projections thereof. Protect ends of underground conduit with plastic plugs until connections are made.

[ Encase the underground portion of the conduit in a concrete envelope and bury as specified for underground duct with concrete encasement.

] 3.5 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t hi s par agr aph t o compl y wi t h pr oj ect r equi r ement s concer ni ng t he t ype of st r uct ur e, st r engt h of concr et e, concr et e mi x, met al accessor i es, and excavat i ng and gr adi ng. I ndi cat e speci al r ei nf or ci ng wher e r equi r ed. Cont act l ocal t el ephone company, wher e appl i cabl e, concer ni ng t he si ze of al l s i gnal manhol es and t he number and t ype of s i gnal duct r equi r ed. Det er mi ne avai l abi l i t y s i nce H20 or ai r cr af t l oadi ngs may not be avai l abl e i n pr ecast .

For Navy pr oj ect s, see st andar d sket ches UG- 1 t hr ough UG- 7 cover i ng manhol es and handhol es. I ncl ude t he r equi r ed sket ches on t he pr oj ect drawings.

**************************************************************************

Provide standard type cast-in-place construction as specified herein and as indicated, or precast construction as specified herein. Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors must have a smooth trowel finish. Cure concrete by applying two coats of white pigmented membrane forming-curing compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, except that precast concrete may be steam cured. Curing compound must conform to manufacturer's recommendations . Locate duct entrances and windows in the center of end walls (shorter) and near the corners of sidewalls (longer) to facilitate cable racking and splicing. Covers for underground structures must fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron must be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Manhole locations, as indicated, are approximate. Coordinate exact manhole locations with other utilities and finished grading and paving.



3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures

[Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete except that precast concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete manhole risers.][Provide concrete block conforming to Section 04 20 00 MASONRY.][Concrete block is not allowed in areas subject to aircraft loading.]

3.5.2 Precast Concrete Construction

Set commercial precast structures on 150 mm of level, 90 percent compacted granular fill, 19 mm to 25 mm size, extending 305 mm beyond the structure on each side. Compact granular fill by a minimum of four passes with a plate type vibrator. Installation must additionally conform to the manufacturer's instructions.

3.5.3 Pulling-In Irons

Provide steel bars bent as indicated, and cast in the walls and floors. Alternatively, pipe sleeves may be precast into the walls and floors where required to accept U-bolts or other types of pulling-in devices possessing the strengths and clearances stated herein. The final installation of pulling-in devices must be made permanent. Cover and seal exterior projections of thru-wall type pulling-in devices with an appropriate protective coating. In the floor the irons must be a minimum of 150 mm from the edge of the sump, and in the walls the irons must be located within 150 mm of the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window in the opposite wall. However, the pulling-in iron must not be located within 150 mm of an adjacent interior surface, or duct or precast window located within the same wall as the iron. If a pulling-in iron cannot be located directly opposite the corresponding duct bank or precast window due to this clearance limitation, locate the iron directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window the minimum distance required to preserve the 150 mm clearance previously stated. In the case of directly opposing precast windows, pulling-in irons consisting of a 915 mm length of No. 5 reinforcing bar, formed into a hairpin, may be cast-in-place within the precast windows simultaneously with the end of the corresponding duct bank envelope. Irons installed in this manner must be positioned directly in line with, or when not possible, directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern entering the opposite wall, while maintaining a minimum clear distance of 75 mm from any edge of the cast-in-place duct bank envelope or any individual duct. Pulling-in irons must have a clear projection into the structure of approximately 100 mm and must be designed to withstand a minimum pulling-in load of 26,700 N . Irons must be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

3.5.4 Cable Racks, Arms and Insulators

Cable racks, arms and insulators must be sufficient to accommodate the cables. Space racks in power manholes not more than 915 mm apart, and provide each manhole wall with a minimum of two racks. Space racks in signal manholes not more than 420 mm apart with the end rack being no further than 305 mm from the adjacent wall. Methods of anchoring cable racks must be as follows:

a. Provide a 15 mm diameter by 125 mm long anchor bolt with 75 mm foot cast in structure wall with 50 mm protrusion of threaded portion of bolt into structure. Provide 15 mm steel square head nut on each



anchor bolt. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing nuts.

b. Provide concrete channel insert with a minimum load rating of 1192 kg per meter . Insert channel must be steel of the same length as "vertical rack channel;" channel insert must be cast flush in structure wall. Provide 15 mm steel nuts in channel insert to receive 15 mm diameter by 75 mm long steel, square head anchor bolts.

c. Provide concrete "spot insert" at each anchor bolt location, cast flush in structure wall. Each insert must have minimum 365 kg load rating. Provide 15 mm diameter by 75 mm long steel, square head anchor bolt at each anchor point. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing bolts.

3.5.5 Field Painting

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t o mat ch pr oduct s cont ai ned i n Par t 2. Choose cast - i r on f or most appl i cat i ons. Duct i l e i r on or st eel may be r equi r ed f or ar eas subj ect t o heavy l oadi ng such as ai r f i el ds or i ndust r i al ar eas.

**************************************************************************

Cast-iron frames and covers not buried in concrete or masonry must be cleaned of mortar, rust, grease, dirt and other deleterious materials, and given a coat of bituminous paint.

[ 3.6 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE SYSTEM

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ref er t o UFC 3- 550- 01, " Ext er i or El ect r i cal Power Di st r i but i on" , f or gui dance on when di r ect bur i ed wi r i ng may be per mi t t ed.

**************************************************************************

Cables must be buried directly in the earth below the frostline [as indicated][to the requirements of IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 , whichever is more stringent].

3.6.1 Trenching

Excavate trenches for direct-burial cables to provide a minimum cable cover of 610 mm below finished grade for power conductors operated at 600 volts or less, and 765 mm below finished grade for over 600 volts in accordance with IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 . When rock is encountered, remove to a depth of at least 75 mm below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 6 mm . Bottoms of trenches must be smooth and free of stones and sharp objects. Where materials in bottoms of trenches are other than sand, a 75 mm 3 inch layer of sand must be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil. Trenches must be not less than [150][200] mm wide, and must be in straight lines between cable markers.[ Cable plows must not be used.] Bends in trenches must have a radius [of not less than 915 mm ][consistent with the cable manufacturer's published minimum cable bending radius for the cable installed].



3.6.2 Cable Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e soi l i s known t o be r ocky, pr ovi de sel ect ed backf i l l f or cabl e pr ot ect i on. Speci f y bend r adi us i n accor dance wi t h NFPA 70.

**************************************************************************

Unreel cables along the sides of or in trenches and carefully place on sand or earth bottoms. Pulling cables into direct-burial trenches from a fixed reel position is not permitted, except as required to pull cables through conduits under paving or railroad tracks.

Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same trench, space cables laterally at not less than 75 mm apart, except that communication cable must be separated from power cable by a minimum distance of 305 mm .

Where direct-burial cables cross under roads or other paving exceeding 1.5 m in width, such cables must be installed in[ concrete-encased] ducts. Where direct-burial cables cross under railroad tracks, such cables must be installed in [reinforced concrete-encased ducts][ducts installed through rigid galvanized steel sleeves]. Ducts must extend at least 1.5 m beyond each edge of any paving and at least 1.5 m beyond each side of any railroad tracks. Cables may be pulled into duct from a fixed reel where suitable rollers are provided in the trench. Where direct burial cable transitions to duct-enclosed cable, direct-burial cables must be centered in duct entrances, and a waterproof nonhardening mastic compound must be used to facilitate such centering. If paving or railroad tracks are in place where cables are to be installed, coated rigid steel conduits driven under the paving or railroad tracks may be used in lieu of concrete-encased ducts. Prevent damage to conduit coatings by providing ferrous pipe jackets or by predrilling. Where cuts are made in any paving, the paving and subbase must be restored to their original condition. Where cable is placed in duct(e.g. under paved areas, roads, or railroads), slope ducts to drain.

3.6.3 Splicing

**************************************************************************NOTE: Di r ect ear t h bur i al cabl es gener al l y r equi r e di r ect bur i al spl i ces. Obser ve mar ker s l ab r equi r ement s pr evi ousl y cover ed i n t hi s speci f i cat i on. Di r ect bur i al spl i ces ar e al l owabl e f or NAVFAC pr oj ect s onl y, do not speci f y f or Ar my and Ai r For ce Pr oj ect s. For Ar my and Ai r For ce pr oj ect s, use t he second br acket ed opt i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide cables in one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which cables are manufactured.[ Where splices are required, provide splices designed and rated for direct burial.][ Where splices are required, install splices only in maintenance manholes/handholes or cabinets/pedestals.]

3.6.4 Bends

Bends in cables must have an inner radius not less than those specified for the type of cable, per manufacturer's recommendation.



3.6.5 Horizontal Slack

Leave approximately 915 mm of horizontal slack in the ground on each end of cable runs, on each side of connection boxes, and at points where connections are brought above ground. Where cable is brought above ground, leave additional slack to make necessary connections.[ Enclose splices in lead-sheathed or armored cables in split-type cast-iron splice boxes; after completion of the connection, fill with insulating filler compound and tightly clamp the box.]

3.6.6 Identification Slabs[ or Markers]

Provide a slab at each change of direction of cable, over the ends of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and roadways[, over the ends of ducts or conduits stubbed out for future use][, and over each splice]. Identification slabs must be of concrete, approximately 500 mm square by 150 mm thick and must be set flat in the ground so that top surface projects not less than 20 mm , nor more than 30 mm above ground. Concrete must have a compressive strength of not less than 20 MPa and have a smooth troweled finish on exposed surface. Inscribe an identifying legend such as "electric cable," "telephone cable," "splice," or other applicable designation on the top surface of the slab before concrete hardens. Inscribe circuit identification symbols on slabs as indicated. Letters or figures must be approximately 50 mm high and grooves must be approximately 6 mm in width and depth. Install slabs so that the side nearest the inscription on top must include an arrow indicating the side nearest the cable. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section [ 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL][ 31 00 00 EARTHWORK].

] 3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS

3.7.1 Requirements

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e di r ect bur i ed condui t and concr et e encased condui t on dr awi ngs. Ensur e t hat duct i s speci f i ed t o be i nst al l ed bel ow t he f r ost l i ne dept h. Show pl acement of gr oundi ng conduct or bel ow duct bank on dr awi ngs as i t wi l l be physi cal l y pr ot ect ed by t he concr et e encasement ; however , coor di nat e wi t h t he Act i v i t y r egar di ng pl acement bel ow or above duct bank.

**************************************************************************

Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary. Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated. Provide a 100 sqmm bare copper grounding conductor for [high][extra-high] -voltage distribution duct banks as indicated in drawings . Bond grounding conductor to ground rings (loops) in all manholes and to ground rings (loops) at all equipment slabs (pads). Route grou nding conductor into manholes with the duct bank (sleeving is not required). Ducts must have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings, laid with a minimum slope of [75 mm][100 mm] per 30 m . Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures.

Perform changes in ductbank direction as follows:



a. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable.

b. The minimum manufactured bend radius must be 450 mm for ducts of less than 80 mm diameter, and 900 mm for ducts 80 mm or greater in diameter.

c. As an exception to the bend radius required above, provide field manufactured longsweep bends having a minimum radius of 7.6 m for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically, using a combination of curved and straight sections. Maximum manufactured curved sections: 30 degrees.

3.7.2 Treatment

Ducts must be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances. Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.

3.7.3 Conduit Cleaning

As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 75 mm and larger, draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 305 mm long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs. For conduit sizes less than 75 mm , draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.

3.7.4 Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures

Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be disturbed, and under roads and railroad tracks, must be zinc-coated, rigid steel, jacked into place. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement, rigid steel conduit must be installed because of its strength. To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 15 m in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used. Separators or spacing blocks must be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 1.2 m on centers. [Hydraulic jet method must not be used.]

[ 3.7.5 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations

Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs, pavement, and walls) in wet locations must be PVC coated and must extend from at least 50 mm within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete (minimum of 150 mm from penetration).



] 3.7.6 Multiple Conduits

Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 75 mm [, except that light and power conduits must be separated from control, signal, and telephone conduits by a minimum distance of [300] mm ]. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly must consist of base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 3050 mm of conduit assembly.

3.7.7 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope

New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 915 mm of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.

3.7.8 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement

Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade. Provide not less than 75 mm clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench. Grade bottom of trench smooth; where rock, soft spots, or sharp-edged materials are encountered, excavate the bottom for an additional 75 mm , fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles, that would be retained on a 6.25 mm sieve. The first 150 mm layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously specified. The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in 75 to 150 mm layers. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section [ 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL][ 31 00 00 EARTHWORK].

3.7.8.1 Encasement Under Roads and Structures

Under roads, paved areas, and railroad tracks, install conduits in concrete encasement of rectangular cross-section providing a minimum of 75 mm concrete cover around ducts. Concrete encasement must extend at least 1525 mm beyond the edges of paved areas and roads, and 3660 mm beyond the rails on each side of railroad tracks. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade[, and under railroad tracks not less than 1270 mm below the top of the rails].

[ 3.7.8.2 Directional Boring

HDPE conduits must be installed below the frostline and as specified herein.

[For distribution voltages greater than 1000 volts and less than 34,500 volts, depths to the top of the conduit must not be less than 1220 mm in pavement-covered areas and not less than 3050 mm in non-pavement-covered areas.][ For distribution voltages less than 1000 volts, depths to the top of the conduit must not be less than 1220 mm in pavement- or non-pavement-covered areas.][ For branch circuit wiring less than 600 volts, depths to the top of the conduit must not be less than 610 mm in pavement- or non-pavement-covered areas.]



] 3.7.9 Duct Encased in Concrete

**************************************************************************NOTE: Edi t t hi s par agr aph t o compl y wi t h pr oj ect r equi r ement s concer ni ng t ype of st r uct ur e or duct , st r engt h of concr et e, concr et e mi x, met al accessor i es, and excavat i ng and gr adi ng. I ndi cat e speci al r ei nf or ci ng wher e r equi r ed, par t i cul ar l y wi t h duct banks of non- r ect angul ar cr oss- sect i on, and f or duct banks under r oad cr ossi ngs, r ai l r oad cr ossi ngs and ai r f i el d pavi ng cr ossi ngs. Rei nf or ci ng shoul d ext end at l east 1. 5 m beyond t he edge of pavement or r ai l r oad t r acks.

Hi gh or ext r a- hi gh vol t age cabl es and campus di st r i but i on cabl es of t el ecommuni cat i ons backbone di st r i but i on syst em must be i n duct encased i n concr et e, unl ess ot her wi se r equi r ed by l ocal Act i v i t y. Cont act l ocal t el ephone company, wher e appl i cabl e, concer ni ng si ze of s i gnal manhol es and number and t ype of s i gnal duct r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************

NOTE: Pr ovi de st eel r ei nf or ci ng per t he f ol l owi ng table:

COVER UNREINFORCED REINFORCED*

>450 mm 18 i n and <1220 mm 48 i n

Undevel oped ar eas. Tr ansi t i on f r om good t o poor soi l condi t i ons wher e differential set t l ement i s anticipated.

>610 mm 24 i n and <1220 mm 48 i n

Roads/ paved ar eas f or l i ght t o moder at e t r af f i c loads.

Ot her r oads/ paved ar eas ( i . e. suppor t i ng t r ucks, cr anes, ul t r a- heavy loads.)



COVER UNREINFORCED REINFORCED*

>1220 mm 48 i n Al l duct banks ( except as not ed) .

Under r ai l r oad tracks.Tr ansi t i on f r om good t o poor soi l condi t i ons wher e differential set t l ement i s anticipated.

* Use mi ni mum r ei nf or cement of 4 #13 w/ #10 t i es at 915 mm o/ c f or duct banks 760 mm or l ess wi de.* Use mi ni mum r ei nf or cement of 6 #13 w/ #10 t i es at 915 mm o/ c f or duct banks gr eat er t han 760 mm wi de.* Consul t wi t h st r uct ur al or geot echni cal engi neer f or assi st ance.

**************************************************************************

Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in concrete. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 450 mm below finished grade[, except under roads and pavement, concrete envelope must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade][, and under railroad tracks not less than 1270 mm below the top of the rails]. Do not mix different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank. Concrete encasement surrounding the bank must be rectangular in cross-section and must provide at least 75 mm of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm . Before pouring concrete, anchor duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating during concrete pouring. Anchoring must be done by driving reinforcing rods adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer assembly.[ Provide steel reinforcing in the concrete envelope as indicated.][ Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section [31 00 00 EARTHWORK][31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.]]

3.7.9.1 Connections to Manholes

Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground structures must be flared to have enlarged cross-section at the manhole entrance to provide additional shear strength. Dimensions of the flared cross-section must be larger than the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 300 mm in each direction. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground structure must be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure. Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a seal between the envelope and the wall of the structure.

3.7.9.2 Connections to Existing Underground Structures

For duct bank connections to existing structures, break the structure wall out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall. Cut steel and [extend into][bend out to tie into the reinforcing of] the duct bank envelope. Chip the perimeter surface of the duct bank opening to form a key or flared surface, providing a positive connection with the duct bank envelope.



3.7.9.3 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose second br acket ed opt i on wher e exi st i ng concr et e i s r ei nf or ced.

**************************************************************************

For duct bank connections to concrete pads, break an opening in the pad out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad. Cut the steel and [extend into][bend out to tie into the reinforcing of] the duct bank envelope. Chip out the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope.

3.7.9.4 Connections to Existing Ducts

Where connections to existing duct banks are indicated, excavate the banks to the maximum depth necessary. Cut off the banks and remove loose concrete from the conduits before new concrete-encased ducts are installed. Provide a reinforced concrete collar, poured monolithically with the new duct bank, to take the shear at the joint of the duct banks.[ Remove existing cables which constitute interference with the work.][ Abandon in place those no longer used ducts and cables which do not interfere with the work.]

3.7.9.5 Partially Completed Duct Banks

During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris such as mud, and, and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 610 mm back into the envelope and a minimum of 610 mm beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 13 bar in each corner, 75 mm from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 10 ties, spaced approximately 305 mm apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring.

[ 3.7.9.6 Removal of Ducts

Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures, close the openings to waterproof the structure. Chip out the wall opening to provide a key for the new section of wall.

] 3.7.10 Duct Sealing

Seal all electrical penetrations for radon mitigation, maintaining integrity of the vapor barrier, and to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.8 CABLE PULLING

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Navy pr oj ect s, choose br acket ed i t em f or t ape shi el di ng and coor di nat e wi t h Par t 2 PRODUCTS.

**************************************************************************

[Test existing duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove foreign material before pulling cables. ]Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Use



flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs. Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions, including turnups into switches, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with[ tape][ or][ wire] shield must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable. If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place, cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating.

3.8.1 Cable Lubricants

Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.

3.9 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable insulators. Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the splice. Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath. Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks, leaving top space open for future cables, except as otherwise indicated for existing installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure.

3.9.1 Cable Tag Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: On cont r act s wher e exi st i ng cabl es ar e r eci r cui t ed speci al at t ent i on shoul d be gi ven t o changi ng exi st i ng cabl e i dent i f i cat i on t ags i n each manhol e t o r ef l ect new ci r cui t number s.

**************************************************************************

Install cable tags in each manhole as specified, including each splice. Tag wire and cable provided by this contract. Install cable tags over the fireproofing, if any, and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes.

3.10 CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL

Conductors must be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run contains 1 Phase A conductor, 1 Phase B conductor, 1 Phase C conductor, and 1 neutral conductor.

3.11 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING

Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set.[ Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, or aboveground termination pedestals.]

[ 3.11.1 Terminating Aluminum Conductors

a. Use particular care in making up joints and terminations. Remove



surface oxides by cleaning with a wire brush or emery cloth. Apply joint compound to conductors, and use UL-listed solid aluminum connectors for connecting aluminum conductors. When connecting aluminum to copper conductors, use connectors specifically designed for this purpose.

b. Terminate aluminum conductors to copper bus either by: (1) in line splicing a copper pigtail to the aluminum conductor (copper pigtail must have a ampacity at least that of the aluminum conductor); or (2) using a circumferential compression type, aluminum bodied terminal lug UL listed for AL/CU and steel Belleville spring washers, flat washers, bolts, and nuts. Belleville spring washers must be cadmium-plated hardened steel. Install the Belleville spring washers with the crown up toward the nut or bolt head, with the concave side of the Belleville bearing on a heavy-duty, wide series flat washer of larger diameter than the Belleville. Tighten nuts sufficient to flatten Belleville and leave in that position. Lubricate hardware with joint compound prior to making connection. Wire brush and apply joint compound to conductor prior to inserting in lug.

c. Terminate aluminum conductors to aluminum bus by using all-aluminum nuts, bolts, washers, and lugs. Wire brush and apply inhibiting compound to conductor prior to inserting in lug. Lubricate hardware with joint compound prior to making connection; if bus contact surface is unplated, scratch-brush and coat with joint compound (without grit).

] 3.12 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS

Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the termination kit manufacturer.

3.13 [HIGH][EXTRA-HIGH] VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS

Provide power cable joints (splices) suitable for continuous immersion in water. Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions of the joint kit manufacturer.

3.13.1 Joints in Shielded Cables

Cover the joined area with metallic tape, or material like the original cable shield and connect it to the cable shield on each side of the splice. Provide a bare copper ground connection brought out in a watertight manner and grounded to the manhole grounding loop as part of the splice installation. Ground conductors, connections, and rods must be as specified elsewhere in this section. Wire must be trained to the sides of the enclosure to prevent interference with the working area.

[ 3.13.2 Joints in Armored Cables

Armored cable joints must be enclosed in compound-filled, cast-iron or alloy splice boxes equipped with stuffing boxes and armor clamps of a suitable type and size for the cable being installed.

] 3.14 CABLE END CAPS

Cable ends must be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps. Cables ends must be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The



caps must remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated. Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected.

[ 3.15 LIVE END CAPS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Li ve end caps ar e onl y r equi r ed when cabl e i s r equi r ed t o r emai n unt er mi nat ed, but ener gi zed. Li ve end cap l ocat i ons must be i ndi cat ed on t he drawings.

**************************************************************************

Provide live end caps for single conductor [high][extra-high] voltage cables where indicated.

] 3.16 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

Fireproof (arc proof) wire and cables which will carry current at 2200 volts or more in underground structures.

3.16.1 Fireproofing Tape

Tightly wrap strips of fireproofing tape around each cable spirally in half-lapped wrapping. Install tape in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

[ 3.16.2 Tape-Wrap

Tape-wrap metallic-sheathed or metallic armored cables without a nonmetallic protective covering over the sheath or armor prior to application of fireproofing. Wrap must be in the form of two tightly applied half-lapped layers of a pressure-sensitive 0.254 mm thick plastic tape, and must extend not less than 25 mm into the duct. Even out irregularities of the cable, such as at splices, with insulation putty before applying tape.

] 3.17 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Det er mi ne t he gr oundi ng r equi r ement s f or each pr oj ect . Show al l necessar y gr ound r ods and gr ound r i ngs on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 , except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding [25][_____] ohms.


**************************************************************************NOTE: I nvest i gat e t he soi l r esi st i v i t y dur i ng t he pr el i mi nar y desi gn phase t o det er mi ne t he desi gn r equi r ed t o ensur e t hat t he gr oundi ng val ues ar e obt ai ned. For ar eas wher e t he wat er t abl e i s l ow or t he soi l r esi st i v i t y i s hi gh ( such as vol cani c soi l s, sand, or r ock) , del et e t he addi t i onal el ect r ode pr ovi s i ons and pr ovi de a desi gn t o meet



t he s i t e r equi r ement s.**************************************************************************

Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus[ 150 mm ][ 300 mm], installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded.If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod must be provided (placed not less than 1830 mm from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

3.17.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies must be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.17.3 Grounding Conductors

Provide bare grounding conductors, except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors. Ground cable sheaths, cable shields, conduit, and equipment with 14 sqmm. Ground other noncurrent-carrying metal parts and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment. Ground metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided, copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of 14 sqmm.[ Provide direct connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated, full-size conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit, which is spliced within the manhole.]

3.17.4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints

Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement. Use stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across such separations.

3.17.5 Manhole Grounding

Loop a 100 sqmm grounding conductor around the interior perimeter, approximately 305 mm above finished floor. Secure the conductor to the manhole walls at intervals not exceeding 914 mm . Connect the conductor to the manhole grounding electrode with 100 sqmm conductor. Connect all incoming 100 sqmm grounding conductors to the ground loop adjacent to the point of entry into the manhole. Bond the ground loop to all cable shields, metal cable racks, and other metal equipment with a minimum 14 sqmm conductor.



[ 3.17.6 Fence Grounding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use t hi s par agr aph onl y when f ence i s r equi r ed t o be gr ounded i n accor dance wi t h I EEE C2, NFPA 70, or ot her r equi r ement s.

**************************************************************************

[Provide grounding for fences as indicated.][Provide grounding for fences with a ground rod at each fixed gate post and at each corner post.] Drive ground rods until the top is 305 mm below grade. Attach a 22 sqmm copper conductor, by exothermic weld to the ground rods and extend underground to the immediate vicinity of fence post. Lace the conductor vertically into 305 mm of fence mesh and fasten by two approved bronze compression fittings, one to bond wire to post and the other to bond wire to fence. Each gate section must be bonded to its gatepost by a 3 by 25 mm flexible braided copper strap and ground post clamps. Clamps must be of the anti-electrolysis type.

] [ 3.17.7 Metal Splice Case Grounding

Metal splice cases for [high][extra-high] -voltage direct-burial cable must be grounded by connection to a driven ground rod located within 600 mm of each splice box using a grounding electrode conductor having a current-carrying capacity of at least 20 percent of the individual phase conductors in the associated splice box, but not less than 14 sqmm.

] 3.18 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING

Provide in accordance with Section [ 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL][31 00 00 EARTHWORK].

3.18.1 Reconditioning of Surfaces

3.18.1.1 Unpaved Surfaces

Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct [or direct burial cable]. Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed. When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding, and provide topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.[ Provide work in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING and Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS.]

3.18.1.2 Paving Repairs

**************************************************************************NOTE: Wher e pavi ng r epai r s ar e a ver y mi nor par t of pr oj ect , t he f i r st br acket ed par agr aph may be used; ot her wi se, use t he second br acket ed par agr aph and i ncl ude ot her sect i ons as needed ( al so i ncl ude necessar y cut t i ng and pat chi ng det ai l s on t he drawings.)

**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************



NOTE: I nser t appr opr i at e Sect i on number and t i t l e i n t he bl ank bel ow.

**************************************************************************

Where trenches, pits, or other excavations are made in existing roadways and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists [, restore such surface treatment or pavement the same thickness and in the same kind as previously existed, except as otherwise specified, and to match and tie into the adjacent and surrounding existing surfaces.][ Make repairs as specified in Section [ 32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES][_____].]

3.19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.19.1 Concrete Slabs (Pads) for Equipment

Unless otherwise indicated, the slab must be at least 200 mm thick, reinforced with a 15 0 mm by 15 0 mm - MW19 by MW19 (6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh, placed uniformly 100 mm from the top of the slab. Slab must be placed on a 150 mm thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab must be approximately 100 mm above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above grade must have 15 mm chamfer. Slab must be of adequate size to project at least 200 mm beyond the equipment.

Stub up conduits, with bushings, 50 mm into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.

[ 3.19.2 Sealing

**************************************************************************NOTE: Requi r e seal i ng of hol es ( wi ndows) i n t he concr et e pad i f r odent i nt r usi on i s a pr obl em.

**************************************************************************

When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals must be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.

] 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.20.1 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with Denki Hoan Kyoukai and MLIT DSKKS.

3.20.1.1 [High][Extra-High] Voltage Cables

Perform tests after installation of cable, splices, and terminators and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.


(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.



(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications.

(3) Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support, and cable termination.

(4) Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius.

(5) Inspect for proper fireproofing.

(6) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.

(7) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method. Record ohmic value, resistance values in excess of 10 ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified.

(2) Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including terminations and joints. Perform maintenance test on complete cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including existing cable, terminations, and joints. Tests must be very low frequency (VLF) alternating voltage withstand tests. VLF test frequency must be 0.05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes using a sinusoidal waveform. Test voltages must be as follows:

CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE forACCEPTANCE TESTING

3.3kV 9kV (peak)

5 kV 10kV rms(peak)

6.6 kV 17kV rms(peak)

8 kV 13kV rms(peak)

15 kV 20kV rms(peak)



33 kV 63kV (peak)


66 kV 85kV (peak)



CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE forACCEPTANCE TESTING

77 kV 95kV (peak)

CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE forMAINTENANCE TESTING

3.3kV Per manufacturer requirements.

5 kV 7kV rms(peak)

6.6 kV Per manufacturer requirements.

8 kV 10kV rms(peak)


22 kV Per manufacturer requirements.






(3) In lieu of the acceptance testing required in item (2), High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) test is an alternative acceptance test on newly installed cables. Maximum applied DC test voltage shall be determined in consultation with the manufacturer of the cable and cable accessories for the type of cable being tested. The maximum test voltage to be maintained for 10 minutes. After reaching the maximum test voltage, the current magnitude should be recorded at least twice: once at approximately 2 min and again at the end of the test period (10 min) Contractor shall submit test procedure and standard use as reference for testing to the government for review and approval.

3.20.1.2 Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt

Perform tests after installation of cable, splices and terminations and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.


(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.

(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with



contract plans and specifications.

(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.

(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.

(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring 14 sqmm and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 1000 volts dc for one minute.

(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.



Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical tests

Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method in accordance with JIS C 60364-6 . On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument must be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test. Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with associated distances, and provide a plot of resistance vs. distance.


Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.

.... -- End of Section --






**************************************************************************USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS- 33 82 00 ( Apr i l 2006) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Pr epar i ng Act i v i t y: NAVFAC Repl aci ng wi t hout change UFGS- 16711 ( August 2004)



SECTION 33 82 00

TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)04/06


**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on cover s ext er i or t el ecommuni cat i ons Out si de Pl ant consi st i ng of t he campus di st r i but or , out s i de copper and f i ber opt i c ( FO) cabl e medi a, and associ at ed har dwar e necessar y t o suppor t communi cat i ons syst ems at f aci l i t y i nst al l at i ons i ncl udi ng per manent l y const r uct ed bui l di ngs. Thi s speci f i cat i on cover s out si de pl ant ( OSP) campus f i ber opt i c and copper cabl e medi a f or suppor t i ng i nf or mat i on t echnol ogy t r ansf er syst ems t o i ncl ude voi ce, dat a, v i deo, i magi ng, secur i t y, and audi o syst ems used by var i ous f aci l i t i es. Thi s gui de speci f i cat i on i s t o be used i n t he pr epar at i on of pr oj ect const r uct i on speci f i cat i ons.

Coor di nat e wi t h Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM and ensur e t hat copper cabl e and f i ber opt i c cabl e i nt er connect i ng component s and pat ch cor d assembl i es mechani cal l y intermate.

Use Sect i on 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DI STRI BUTI ON and Sect i on 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRI CAL DI STRI BUTI ON.

For Navy pr oj ect s use UFC 3- 580- 10, " Navy And Mar i ne Cor ps I nt r anet ( NMCI ) St andar d Const r uct i on Pr ocesses" f or desi gn gui dance r el at ed t o t el ecommuni cat i ons i nf r ast r uct ur e. Conf i r m speci f i c syst em r equi r ement s wi t h t he usi ng Act i v i t y.

Adher e t o UFC 1-300-02 Uni f i ed Faci l i t i es Gui de Speci f i cat i ons ( UFGS) For mat St andar d when edi t i ng t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on or pr epar i ng new pr oj ect



speci f i cat i on sect i ons. Edi t t hi s gui de speci f i cat i on f or pr oj ect speci f i c r equi r ement s by addi ng, del et i ng, or r evi s i ng t ext . For br acket ed i t ems, choose appl i cabl e i t em( s) or i nser t appr opr i at e i nf or mat i on.



**************************************************************************

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s sect i on wi l l be used i n conj unct i on wi t h any ot her gui de speci f i cat i ons r equi r ed by t he desi gn. Show f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on pr oj ect drawings:

1. Wher e speci f i cat i on i dent i f i es t ype, s i ze, col or , f i ni sh, or ot her def i ni t i ve i nf or mat i on t o be " as i ndi cat ed" t he engi neer shal l show t he i nf or mat i on on t he dr awi ngs.

2. Locat i on and di mensi ons of manhol es, handhol es, duct s, and l ocat i on and si ze of cabl es.

3. Types of wi r e and cabl e; number and si zes of conduct or s and condui t s.

4. Speci al condi t i ons.

5. I ncl ude t ensi oni ng and sag dat a on dr awi ngs i n t abul ar f or m f or aer i al cabl e i nst al l at i on.

Pr ovi de a mi ni mum of 12 si ngl e- mode f i ber s per f i ber opt i c cabl e. Coor di nat e wi t h act i v i t y and Base Communi cat i ons Of f i ce ( BCO) t o det er mi ne f i ber opt i c cabl i ng r equi r ement s. Pr ovi de f i ber opt i c cabl i ng t o pi er s i n accor dance wi t h UFC 4- 150- 02, " Desi gn: Docksi de Ut i l i t i es f or Shi p Ser vi ce" f or Navy pr oj ect s onl y.

**************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

**************************************************************************NOTE: Thi s par agr aph i s used t o l i s t t he publ i cat i ons c i t ed i n t he t ext of t he gui de speci f i cat i on. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o i n t he t ext by basi c desi gnat i on onl y and l i s t ed i n t hi s par agr aph by or gani zat i on, desi gnat i on, dat e, and t i t l e. Use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e



when you add a Ref er ence I dent i f i er ( RI D) out si de of t he Sect i on' s Ref er ence Ar t i c l e t o aut omat i cal l y pl ace t he r ef er ence i n t he Ref er ence Ar t i c l e. Al so use t he Ref er ence Wi zar d' s Check Ref er ence f eat ur e t o updat e t he i ssue dat es. Ref er ences not used i n t he t ext wi l l aut omat i cal l y be del et ed f r om t hi s sect i on of t he pr oj ect speci f i cat i on when you choose t o r econci l e r ef er ences i n t he publ i sh pr i nt pr ocess.

**************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Contractor may substitute compatible JapanIndustrial Standard (JIS) or Japan Wire Industry Association Standard (JCS) standards for non-Japanese standards, as approved by the Contracting Officer's representative.









JIS C 3307 (2000) 600 V Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires

JIS C 3401 (2002) Control Cables

JIS C 6188 (1999) Test methods of measuring optical attenuators

JIS C 6189 (2004) Test methods of optical return loss meters

JIS C 6823 (2010) Measuring methods for attenuation of optical fibers

JIS C 6824 (2009) Test methods for bandwidth of multimode optical fibers



JIS C 6835 (2017) Silica glass single-mode optical fibers

JIS C 6837 (2015) All Plastic Multimode Optical Fibers

JIS C 6850 (2006) General rules of optical fiber cables

JIS C 6870-3 (2006) Outdoor optical fiber cables-Part 3: Sectional specification

JIS C 6870-3-10 (2011) Optical fiber cables-Part 3-10: Outdoor cables-Family specification for duct, directly buried and lashed aerial optical telecommunications cables



JIS X 5151 (2018) Information technology -- Implementation and operation of customer premises cabling -- Part 3: Testing of optical fibre cabling


JCS 5503 (2011) Flame retardant polyolefin sheath LAN twisted pair cable

JCS 5507 (2010) LAN Twisted Pair Cable


**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM i f i t i s used on t he pr oj ect . Choose Sect i on 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMI SSI ON AND DI STRI BUTI ON, and Sect i on 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRI CAL DI STRI BUTI ON.

**************************************************************************

[ Section 27 10 00 , BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM, ][Section 33 71 01 , OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION, and[Section 33 71 02 , UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION] apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

] 1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in JIS X 5150 , JCS 5507 , JIS C 6850 and herein.



1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)

A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. (International expression for main cross-connect - (MC).)

1.3.2 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.

1.3.3 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.4 Building Distributor (BD)

A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect - (IC).)

1.3.5 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.


**************************************************************************For Ar my pr oj ect s onl y: For MCA pr oj ect s, t el ephone swi t ch upgr ades and l i ne car ds ar e pr ocur ed and i nst al l ed usi ng f unds pr ovi ded by I SEC out si de of t he const r uct i on cont r act . Ot her t ypes of pr oj ect s, such as Ar my Reser ve, DOD and wor k f or ot her s, may r equi r e t hat t he swi t ch upgr ade and l i ne car ds be added t o t hi s sect i on t o be pr ocur ed and i nst al l ed as par t of t he const r uct i on cont r act . Choose t he l ast br acket ed sent ences f or Navy and Mar i ne Cor ps pr oj ect s onl y.

**************************************************************************

The telecommunications outside plant consists of cable, conduit, manholes, poles, etc. required to provide signal paths from the closest point of presence to the new facility, including free standing frames or backboards, interconnecting hardware, terminating cables, lightning and surge protection modules at the entrance facility. The work consists of providing, testing and making operational cabling, interconnecting hardware and lightning and surge protection necessary to form a complete outside plant telecommunications system for continuous use.[ The telecommunications contractor must coordinate with the NMCI contractor concerning layout and configuration of the EF telecommunications and OSP. The telecommunications contractor may be required to coordinate work effort for access to the EF telecommunications and OSP with the NMCI contractor.]



1.5 SUBMITTALS






**************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for information only.][for Contractor Quality Control approval.] When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications Outside Plant ; G[, [_____]]

Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings ; G[, [_____]]

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop



drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Wire and cable ; G[, [_____]]

Cable splices, and connectors ; G[, [_____]]

Closures ; G[, [_____]]

Building protector assemblies ; G[, [_____]]

Protector modules ; G[, [_____]]

Cross-connect terminal cabinets ; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Pre-installation tests ;

Acceptance tests ;

Outside Plant Test Plan ;


Building protector assembly installation ;

Cable tensions ;

Fiber Optic Splices ;



Factory Reel Test Data ;


Telecommunications outside plant (OSP) , Data Package 5;

Commercial off-the-shelf manuals shall be provided for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications outside plant (OSP). Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 , OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than[ 2][_____] months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT SHOP DRAWINGS and TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY DRAWINGS.


Record Documentation ;



In addition to other requirements, provide in accordance with paragraph RECORD DOCUMENTATION.


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Outside Plant Shop Drawings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e dr awi ngs wi t h Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM, i f used, t o ensur e act i v i t y r esponsi bl e f or t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em mai nt enance and admi ni st r at i on mai nt ai ns a s i ngl e compl et e and accur at e set of dr awi ngs f or t he ent i r e t el ecommuni cat i ons syst em.

Choose br acket ed opt i on f or RCDD appr oved dr awi ngs on Navy pr oj ect s wher e mul t i pl e spl i ces i n t he out si de cabl e pl ant ar e r equi r ed or when mor e t han one t el ecommuni cat i ons manhol e and associ at ed duct banks ar e r equi r ed. Choose t he l ast br acket ed sent ence f or f aci l i t i es t hat cur r ent l y have t el ecommuni cat i ons out si de pl ant dr awi ngs t hat r equi r e updat i ng as a r esul t of pr oj ect i nst al l at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide Outside Plant Design in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 for aerial system design, and for underground system design. Provide T0 shop drawings that show the physical and logical connections from the perspective of an entire campus, such as actual building locations, exterior pathways and campus backbone cabling on plan view drawings, major system nodes, and related connections on the logical system drawings. Drawings shall include wiring and schematic diagrams for fiber optic and copper cabling and splices, copper conductor gauge and pair count, fiber pair count and type, pathway duct and innerduct arrangement, associated construction materials, and any details required to demonstrate that cable system has been coordinated and will properly support the switching and transmission system identified in specification and drawings.[ Provide Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) approved drawings of the telecommunications outside plant.][ Update existing telecommunication Outside Plant T0 drawings to include information modified, deleted or added as a result of this installation.] The telecommunications outside plant (OSP) shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.



1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose t he l ast br acket ed sent ence when Section 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEMS i s i ncl uded i n t he speci f i cat i ons.

**************************************************************************

[Provide T3 drawings for EF Telecommunications that include telecommunications entrance facility plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and[ cabinet][, rack][, backboard][ and] wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.][Provide T3 drawings for EF Telecommunications as specified in the paragraph TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS of Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.] The telecommunications entrance facility shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, the supervisor (if different from the installer), and the cable splicing and terminating personnel. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.3 Outside Plant Test Plan

Prepare and provide a complete and detailed test plan for field tests of the outside plant including a complete list of test equipment for the[ copper conductor][ and][ optical fiber] cables, components, and accessories for approval by the Contracting Officer. Include a cut-over plan with procedures and schedules for relocation of facility station numbers without interrupting service to any active location. Submit the plan at least[ 30][_____] days prior to tests for Contracting Officer approval. Provide outside plant testing and performance measurement criteria in accordance with JIS X 5150 and JIS X 5151 . Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing that includes fiber optic link performance criteria.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose 2 year s and 6000 hour s f or Navy pr oj ect s and 1 year and 3000 hour s f or Ar my pr oj ect s.

**************************************************************************

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which



are of equal material, design and workmanship and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for at least[ 2][ 1] year[s] prior to bid opening. The[ 2][ 1]-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the[ 2][ 1]-year period. Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a[ 2][ 1]-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than[ 6000][ 3000] hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is provided.


Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.



1.6.5.1 Independent Testing Organization Certificate

In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.


Ship cable on reels in [152][305][_____] meter length with a minimum overage of 10 percent. Radius of the reel drum shall not be smaller than the minimum bend radius of the cable. Wind cable on the reel so that unwinding can be done without kinking the cable. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be accessible for testing. Attach permanent label on each reel showing length, cable identification number, cable size, cable type, and date of manufacture. Provide water resistant label and the indelible writing on the labels. Apply end seals to each end of the cables to prevent moisture from entering the cable. Reels with cable shall be suitable for outside storage conditions when temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C to plus 65 degrees C, with relative humidity from



0 to 100 percent. Equipment, other than cable, delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Record Documentation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Coor di nat e r ecor d document at i on wi t h Sect i on 27 10 00, BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM and choose t he second br acket ed par agr aph i f Sect i on 27 10 00 i s used on t he pr oj ect . TI A- 606 descr i bes t he necessar y dat a f i el ds and r epor t s f or har d copy, spr eadsheet and el ect r oni c medi a as wel l as cabl e management sof t war e r equi r ement s. Check wi t h act i v i t y t o det er mi ne i f cabl e management sof t war e i s cur r ent l y empl oyed at t he act i v i t y and ensur e cont r act or i s r equi r ed t o pr ovi de necessar y dat a i nput t o updat e t he exi st i ng syst em wi t h i nf or mat i on associ at ed wi t h pr oj ect i nst al l at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide the activity responsible for telecommunications system maintenance and administration a single complete and accurate set of record documentation for the entire telecommunications system with respect to this project.

[ Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided[ in hard copy format][ on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software.][ A licensed copy of the cable management software including documentation, shall be provided.][ Update existing record documentation to reflect campus distribution T0 drawings and T3 drawing schedule information modified, deleted or added as a result of this installation.] Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:

a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided. The cable records shall [include only the required data fields][include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility ]. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.

b. Termination Hardware - Provide a record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, campus distributor and terminating block arrangements and type. Documentation shall include [only ]the required data fields[ as a minimum].

][ Provide record documentation as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

] 1.9 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render



satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY

**************************************************************************NOTE: The EF Tel ecommuni cat i ons consi st s of t he t el ecommuni cat i ons ser vi ce ent r ance t o t he bui l di ng, i ncl udi ng t he ent r ance t hr ough t he bui l di ng wal l , and cont i nui ng t o t he ER Tel ecommuni cat i ons ( i f r equi r ed) . The EF Tel ecommuni cat i ons cont ai ns t he backbone pat hways and campus di st r i but or t hat l i nk t he bui l di ng di st r i but or s ( BD) s i n t he mai n t er mi nal space and t o ot her bui l di ngs i n campus si t uat i ons. Ant enna ent r ances, i f used, al so const i t ut e par t of t he EF Tel ecommuni cat i ons.

The EF Tel ecommuni cat i ons may cont ai n bot h t he CD and BD f or t he bui l di ng. Faci l i t i es wi t h f ew t el ecommuni cat i ons r equi r ement s may house al l t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng and equi pment r equi r ed f or t hat f aci l i t y i n t he EF Tel ecommuni cat i ons. Coor di nat e t hi s sect i on wi t h Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM and pr ovi der of bui l di ng t el ecommuni cat i ons cabl i ng syst em when Sect i on 27 10 00 i s used on a pr oj ect . Ot her t han bui l di ng pr ot ect or assembl i es and modul es, component s f or t el ecommuni cat i ons spaces ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 27 10 00. I f Sect i on 27 10 00 i s not used, copy t he r equi r ed component s f r om Sect i on 27 10 00 and past e t hem under t hi s par agr aph. Edi t t he component r equi r ement s as necessary.

**************************************************************************

2.2.1 Building Protector Assemblies

**************************************************************************NOTE: I nt er bui l di ng backbone cabl es shal l be t er mi nat ed on pr ot ect ed ent r ance t er mi nal s and i n a housi ng ( when so di r ect ed) usi ng cur r ent i ndust r y st andar d pr act i ce. Cer t ai n t ypes of t er mi nal s ar e mount ed on t he out si de wal l s of bui l di ngs. Out si de t er mi nal shoul d be t he except i on and not t he nor m, and shoul d onl y be i nst al l ed on smal l bui l di ngs ( e. g. , st or age sheds, smal l war ehouses, guar d gat es, et c. ) . Copper cabl e t er mi nat i on component s ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM. I f t he pr oj ect does not i ncl ude Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM copy connect or bl ocks or pat ch panel i nf or mat i on and past e



i nf or mat i on i nt o t hi s sect i on under t hi s par agr aph headi ng and edi t as necessar y.

**************************************************************************

Provide self-contained[ 5 pin][ screw type] unit supplied with a field cable stub factory connected to protector socket blocks to terminate and accept protector modules for [_____] pairs of outside cable. Building protector assembly shall have interconnecting hardware for connection to interior cabling at full capacity. Provide manufacturers instructions for building protector assembly installation . Provide copper cable interconnecting hardware as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.2.2 Protector Modules

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ot ect or modul es ar e not r equi r ed f or i nt er bui l di ng cabl e r uns of 42. 7 m ( 140 f eet ) or l ess, di r ect l y bur i ed or i n under gr ound condui t , wher e a cont i nuous met al l i c cabl e shi el d or a cont i nuous met al l i c condui t cont ai ni ng t he cabl e i s bonded t o each bui l di ng gr oundi ng el ect r ode syst em.

Sol i d- st at e sur ge pr ot ect or s pr ovi de pr ot ect i on f or sensi t i ve equi pment because i t i ncor por at es a f ast semi conduct or swi t ch wi t h oper at i ng vol t age near l y i ndependent of t r ansi ent r i se t i me. Ot her wi se, use heavy dut y gas t ube pr ot ect i on modul es unl ess ar ea l i ght ni ng damage pr obabi l i t y i s ver y hi gh. Sel ect t he t ype of pr ot ect or modul e r equi r ed dependi ng on t hei r per f or mance i n cat egor i es of i mpul se l i f e, maxi mum sur ge i mpul se and 60 Hz cur r ent car r y i ng capacity.

**************************************************************************

Provide [ three][ two]-electrode gas tube or solid state type[ 5 pin][ screw type] rated for the application. Provide gas tube protection modules [ heavy duty, A>10kA, B>400, C>65A][ maximum duty, A>20kA, B>1000, C>200A] where A is the maximum single impulse discharge current, B is the impulse life and C is the AC discharge current. The gas modules shall shunt high voltage to ground, fail short, and be equipped with an external spark gap and heat coils. Provide the number of surge protection modules equal to the number of pairs of exterior cable of the building protector assembly.

2.2.3 Fiber Optic Terminations

**************************************************************************NOTE: Fi ber Opt i c t er mi nat i on component s ar e speci f i ed i n Sect i on 27 10 00 BUI LDI NG TELECOMMUNI CATI ONS CABLI NG SYSTEM. I f t he pr oj ect does not i ncl ude Sect i on 27 10 00 copy encl osur e t ype connect or s and adapt er s and past e i nf or mat i on i nt o t hi s sect i on under t hi s par agr aph headi ng and edi t as necessar y.

**************************************************************************

Provide fiber optic cable terminations as specified in 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.



2.3 CLOSURES

2.3.1 Copper Conductor Closures

2.3.1.1 Aerial Cable Closures

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gn of aer i al pl ant shoul d be i n accor dance wi t h RUS Bul l 1751F- 630, Desi gn of Aer i al Pl ant . I ndi cat e s i zes on dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide cable closure assembly consisting of a frame with clamps, a lift-off polyethylene cover, cable nozzles, and drop wire rings. Closure shall be suitable for use on Figure 8 cables. Closures shall be free breathing and suitable for housing[ straight-through type][ branch type][ of the type indicated] splices of non-pressurized communications cables and shall be sized as indicated. The closure shall be constructed with ultraviolet resistant PVC.

2.3.1.2 Underground Cable Closures

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e s i zes on dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

a. Aboveground: Provide aboveground closures constructed of[ not less than 14 gauge steel][ ultraviolet resistant PVC] and acceptable for[ pole][ stake] mounting. Closures shall be sized and contain a marker as indicated. Covers shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry.

b. Direct burial: Provide buried closure suitable for enclosing a

straight, butt, and branch splice in a container into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall have adequate strength to protect the splice and maintain cable shield electrical continuity in the buried environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure. Provide filled splice cases.

c. In vault or manhole: Provide underground closure suitable to house a straight, butt, and branch splice in a protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall be of suitable thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel material supplying structural strength necessary to pass the mechanical and electrical requirements in a vault or manhole environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure. Provide filled splice cases.

2.3.2 Fiber Optic Closures

2.3.2.1 Aerial

Provide aerial closure that is free breathing and suitable for housing splice organizer of non -pressurized cables. Closure shall be constructed from heavy PVC with ultraviolet resistance.



2.3.2.2 Direct Burial

Provide buried closure suitable to house splice organizer in protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall have adequate strength to protect the splice and maintain cable shield electrical continuity, when metallic, in buried environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter chemical stability of the closure.

2.3.2.3 In Vault or Manhole

Provide underground closure suitable to house splice organizer in a protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall be of thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel material supplying structural strength necessary to pass the mechanical and electrical requirements in a vault or manhole environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure.

2.4 PAD MOUNTED CROSS-CONNECT TERMINAL CABINETS

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e s i ze on t he dr awi ngs.

**************************************************************************

Provide in accordance with the following:

a. Constructed of 14 gauge steel or [_____].

b. Equipped with a double set of hinged doors with closed-cell foam weatherstripping. Doors shall be locked and contain a marker as indicated.

c. Equipped with spool spindle bracket, mounting frames, binding post log,[ and] jumpering instruction label[, and load coil mounting provisions].

d. Complete with cross connect modules to terminate number of pairs as indicated.

e. Sized as indicated.

2.5 CABLE SPLICES, AND CONNECTORS

2.5.1 Copper Cable Splices**************************************************************************

NOTE: Mul t i pai r spl i ces ar e i nsul at i on di spl acement ( I DC) t ype spl i ces.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ multipair,[ foldback][ in-line]][ single pair,[ in-line][ butt][ box tap]] splices of a moisture resistant,[ two][ three][_____]-wire [ insulation displacement] connector held rigidly in place to assure maximum continuity. Cables greater than 25 pairs shall be spliced using multipair splicing connectors, which accommodate 25 pairs of conductors at a time. Provide correct connector size to accommodate the cable gauge of the supplied cable.



[ 2.5.2 Copper Cable Splice Connector

Provide splice connectors with a polycarbonate body and cap and a tin-plated brass contact element. Connector shall accommodate 0.65 to 0.4 mm solid wire with a maximum insulation diameter of 1.65 mm . Fill connector with sealant grease to make a moisture resistant connection.

][ 2.5.3 Fiber Optic Cable Splices

Provide fiber optic cable splices and splicing materials for[ fusion][ mechanical] methods at locations shown on the construction drawings. The splice insertion loss shall be 0.3 dB maximum when measured in accordance with JIS C 6823 using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Splices shall be designed for a return loss of 40.0 db max for single mode fiber when tested in accordance with JIS C 6189 . Physically protect each fiber optic splice by a splice kit specially designed for the splice.

][ 2.5.4 Fiber Optic Splice Organizer

Provide splice organizer suitable for housing fiber optic splices in a neat and orderly fashion. Splice organizer shall allow for a minimum of 1 m of fiber for each fiber within the cable to be neatly stored without kinks or twists. Splice organizer shall accommodate individual strain relief for each splice and allow for future maintenance or modification, without damage to the cable or splices. Provide splice organizer hardware, such as splice trays, protective glass shelves, and shield bond connectors in a splice organizer kit.

] 2.5.5 Shield Connectors

Provide connectors with a stable, low-impedance electrical connection between the cable shield and the bonding conductor.

2.6 CONDUIT

**************************************************************************NOTE: Use Sect i on 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRI CAL DISTRIBUTION.

**************************************************************************

Provide conduit as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.7 PLASTIC INSULATING TAPE

JIS C 2336 or JIS C 2338 .

2.8 WIRE AND CABLE

**************************************************************************NOTE: For Ar my pr oj ect s f ol l ow gui del i nes set f or t h i n USAI SEC Techni cal Gui de f or I nst al l at i on I nf or mat i on I nf r ast r uct ur e Ar chi t ect ur e ( I 3A) or The Ar my Common User I nf or mat i on Tr anspor t Net wor k ( CUI TN) . Ar my ECB 2007- 22 i s avai l abl e el ect r oni cal l y. I nt er bui l di ng backbone cabl i ng i s t he cabl e ( opt i cal f i ber and copper ) medi a bet ween t he campus di st r i but or s of mul t i pl e bui l di ngs wi t hi n a base compl ex ( campus envi r onment ) . I nt er bui l di ng



backbone cabl e pl ant t er mi nat es i n t he t el ecommuni cat i ons ent r ance f aci l i t y , t he f i r st t er mi nat i ng poi nt i n a bui l di ng. Cabl e may be di r ect bur i ed, aer i al , or under gr ound ( i n condui t and duct s) . The pr ef er r ed met hod i s under gr ound wi t h t he cabl e t er mi nat i ng i n t he t el ecommuni cat i ons ent r ance f aci l i t y .

U. S. t ype OSP cabl es ar e pr ef er r ed at Kadena Ai r Base. OSP cabl es shal l compl y wi t h t hi s speci f i cat i on and t he l at est Kadena Ai r Base standard.

Copper OSP cabl es i s gener al l y PE- 89 gel - f i l l ed cable.

The col or codi ng scheme shal l f ol l ow t ypi cal U. S. st andar d t o mi ni mi ze conf usi on when spl i c i ng new cabl es t o exi st i ng cabl es. Desi gner shal l coor di nat e col or codi ng of cabl e st r ands wi t h act i v i t y i f di f f er ent col or i ng scheme i s r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

2.8.1 Copper Conductor Cable

Solid copper conductors, covered with an extruded solid insulating compound. Insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. For special high frequency applications, the cable core shall be separated into compartments. Cable shall be completed by the application of a suitable core wrapping material, a corrugated copper or plastic coated aluminum shield, and an overall extruded jacket. Telecommunications contractor shall verify distances between splice points prior to ordering cable in specific cut lengths. Gauge of conductor shall determine the range of numbers of pairs specified; 19 gauge (6 to 400 pairs), 22 gauge (6 to 1200 pairs), 24 gauge (6 to 2100 pairs), and 26 gauge (6 to 3000 pairs). Copper conductor shall conform to the following:

2.8.1.1 Underground

**************************************************************************NOTE: For WESTNAVFACENGCOM pr oj ect s, del et e t hi s paragraph.

Use RUS 1755. 390 f or f i l l ed cabl e and RUS 1755. 890 f or f i l l ed cabl e wi t h expanded i nsul at i on.

**************************************************************************

Provide filled cable meeting the requirements of applicable codes and standards .

2.8.1.2 Aerial

Provide filled cable meeting the requirements of JCS 5503 .

2.8.1.3 Screen

Provide screen-compartmental core cable filled cable [ ][as indicated] .



2.8.2 Fiber Optic Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: Si ngl e- mode f i ber opt i c cabl e i s r ecommended f or al l f i ber opt i c cabl e r uns. Desi gner shoul d i dent i f y whet her mul t i mode wi l l be used. Mul t i mode f i ber syst em may be i nst al l ed onl y i f an exi st i ng communi cat i on net wor k i s bei ng ext ended. I f mul t i mode f i ber i s used, s i ngl e- mode f i ber shoul d al so be pl aced f or f ut ur e use. Desi gner wi l l i ndi cat e on t he dr awi ngs t he number of opt i cal f i ber s r equi r ed.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1310 nm fiber optic cable in accordance with JIS C 6835 ][ single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1550 nm fiber optic cable in accordance with JIS C 6835 ][ and ][ multimode 62.5/125-um, 0.275 aperture fiber optic cable in accordance with JIS C 6837][ multimode 50/125-um, 0.275 aperture fiber optic cable JIS C 6837 ], JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 including any special requirements made necessary by a specialized design. Provide[ 12][ ____] optical fibers[ as indicated]. Fiber optic cable shall be specifically designed for outside use with loose buffer construction. Provide fiber optic color code in accordance with JIS C 6870-3-10 .

2.8.2.1 Strength Members

Provide[ central][ non-central],[ non-metallic][ metallic] strength members with sufficient tensile strength for installation and residual rated loads to meet the applicable performance requirements in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 . The strength member is included to serve as a cable core foundation to reduce strain on the fibers, and shall not serve as a pulling strength member.

[ 2.8.2.2 Shielding or Other Metallic Covering

**************************************************************************NOTE: Del et e t hi s par agr aph i f no addi t i onal physi cal pr ot ect i on i s r equi r ed or i f aer i al cabl e i s speci f i ed. Desi gner must sel ect t he shi el d or met al l i c cover i ng mat er i al r equi r ed. Bar e al umi num, coat ed al umi num, copper , copper al l oy and copper and st eel l ami nat e ar e used as shi el di ng t apes. Copper and st ai nl ess st eel , coat ed st ai nl ess st eel and bar e l ow car bon st eel ar e use f or cabl e ar mor i ng. The copper al l oy or st ai nl ess st eel shoul d be used f or r odent pr ot ect i on. I f addi t i onal physi cal pr ot ect i on i s r equi r ed use t he dual al umi num and st eel t ape shi el d. Dual t ape const r uct i on i s nor mal l y used f or ar mor pr ot ect i on of cabl es.

**************************************************************************

Provide[ copper, copper alloy or copper and steel laminate][ copper and stainless steel, coated stainless steel or bare low carbon steel][ bare aluminum or coated aluminum],[ single][ dual] tape covering or shield in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 .



] 2.8.2.3 Performance Requirements

Provide fiber optic cable with optical and mechanical performance requirements in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 .

2.8.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors

Provide grounding and bonding conductors in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 , IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 . Solid bare copper wire meeting the requirements of JIS C 3101 for sizes 8 sqmm and smaller and stranded bare copper wire meeting the requirements of JIS C 3105 , for sizes 14 sqmm and larger. Insulated conductors shall have 600-volt, Type TW insulation meeting the requirements of JIS C 3307 and JIS C 3401 .

2.9 T-SPAN LINE TREATMENT REPEATERS

Provide as indicated. Repeaters shall be pedestal mounted with non-pressurized housings, sized as indicated.

2.10 POLES AND HARDWARE

Provide poles and hardware as specified in Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.

2.11 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND VAULTS

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner must coor di nat e wi t h t he base communi cat i ons of f i ce and use t he cur r ent base st andar d f or l abel i ng, i f one exi st s and choose t he as i ndi cat ed br acket ed opt i on. Show t he l abel i ng scheme on t he dr awi ngs t hat t he t el ecommuni cat i ons cont r act or i s r equi r ed t o f ol l ow. I f no l abel i ng st andar d exi st s pr ovi de l abel i ng f or cabl e t ags i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606 and choose t he br acket ed opt i on f or TI A- 606 l abel i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults. Cable tags shall be[ stainless steel][ or][ polyethylene] and labeled[ as indicated]. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable.

[ 2.11.1 Stainless Steel

Provide stainless steel, cable tags 41.25 mm in diameter 1.58 mm thick minimum, and circular in shape. Tags shall be die stamped with numbers, letters, and symbols not less than 6.35 mm high and approximately 0.38 mm deep in normal block style.

][ 2.11.2 Polyethylene Cable Tags

Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 22.4 MPa; and that are two millimeter thick (minimum), non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 77 degrees C . Provide 1.3 mm (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 778.75 N . The cable tags shall have black block



letters, numbers, and symbols 25 mm high on a yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.

] 2.12 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

**************************************************************************NOTE: Bur i ed war ni ng t ape r equi r ement s ar e speci f i ed i n par agr aph BURI ED WARNI NG AND I DENTI FI CATI ON TAPE i n Sect i on 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

**************************************************************************

Provide fiber optic media marking and protection. Provide color, type and depth of tape as specified in paragraph BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00 , EARTHWORK.

2.13 GROUNDING BRAID

Provide grounding braid that provides low electrical impedance connections for dependable shield bonding. Braid shall be made from flat tin-plated copper.




Provide laminated plastic nameplates in accordance with JIS K 6911 for each patch panel, protector assembly, rack, cabinet and other equipment or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 3 mm thick, white with[ black][_____] center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 65 mm . Lettering shall be a minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.


2.16.1 Factory Reel Test Data

Test 100 percent OTDR test of FO media at the factory in accordance with JIS X 5150 and JIS C 6850 . Use JIS C 6823 for single mode fiber and for multi mode fiber measurements. Calibrate OTDR to show anomalies of 0.2 dB minimum. Enhanced performance filled OSP copper cables, referred to as Broadband Outside Plant (BBOSP). Enhanced performance air core OSP copper cables shall meet the requirements of JCS 5503 . Submit test reports, including manufacture date for each cable reel and receive approval before delivery of cable to the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with



manufacturer's instructions IEEE C2 , JIS C 0365 and as indicated. Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable telecommunications system.

3.1.1 Contractor Damage

Promptly repair indicated utility lines or systems damaged during site preparation and construction. Damages to lines or systems not indicated, which are caused by Contractor operations, shall be treated as "Changes" under the terms of the Contract Clauses. When Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a nonindicated line or system, such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with "indicated" status in determining liability for damages. In every event, immediately notify the Contracting Officer of damage.

3.1.2 Cable Inspection and Repair

Handle cable and wire provided in the construction of this project with care. Inspect cable reels for cuts, nicks or other damage. Damaged cable shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Reel wraps shall remain intact on the reel until the cable is ready for placement.

3.1.3 Direct Burial System

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ndi cat e mi ni mum r adi us al l owed. Bur i ed war ni ng t ape r equi r ement s ar e speci f i ed i n par agr aph BURI ED WARNI NG AND I DENTI FI CATI ON TAPE i n Sect i on 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

**************************************************************************

Installation shall be in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 . Under railroad tracks, paved areas, and roadways install cable in conduit encased in concrete. Slope ducts to drain. Excavate trenches by hand or mechanical trenching equipment. Provide a minimum cable cover of 610 mm below finished grade. Trenches shall be not less than 155 mm wide and in straight lines between cable markers. Do not use cable plows. Bends in trenches shall have a radius of not less than [915][_____] mm . Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same trench, space laterally at least 78 mm apart. When rock is encountered, remove it to a depth of at least 78 mm below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 6 mm . Do not unreel and pull cables into the trench from one end. Cable may be unreeled on grade and lifted into position. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in paragraph BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.1.3.1 Cable Placement

a. Separate cables crossing other cables or metal piping from the other cables or pipe by not less than [78][_____] mm of well tamped earth. Do not install circuits for communications under or above traffic signal loops.

b. Cables shall be in one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which the cable is furnished.



c. Avoid bends in cables of small radii and twists that might cause damage. Do not bend cable and wire in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire.

d. Leave a horizontal slack of approximately 915 mm in the ground on each end of cable runs, on each side of connection boxes, and at points where connections are brought aboveground. Where cable is brought aboveground, leave additional slack to make necessary connections.

3.1.3.2 Identification Slabs [Markers]

Provide a marker at each change of direction of the cable, over the ends of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and roadways and over each splice. Identification markers shall be of concrete, approximately 508 mm square by 155 mm thick.

3.1.3.3 Backfill for Rocky Soil

When placing cable in a trench in rocky soil, the cable shall be cushioned by a fill of sand or selected soil at least 53 mm thick on the floor of the trench before placing the cable or wire. The backfill for at least 103 mm above the wire or cable shall be free from stones, rocks, or other hard or sharp materials which might damage the cable or wire. If the buried cable is placed less than 610 mm in depth[, a protective cover of[ metal][ concrete] shall be used].

3.1.4 Cable Protection


**************************************************************************

Provide direct burial cable protection in accordance with applicable codes and standards and as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs, pavement, and walls) shall be PVC coated and shall extend from the first coupling or fitting outside either side of the concrete minimum of 155 mm per 305 mm burial depth beyond the edge of the surface where cable protection is required; all conduits shall be sealed on each end. Where additional protection is required, cable may be placed in galvanized iron pipe (GIP) sized on a maximum fill of 40 percent of cross-sectional area, or in concrete encased 103 mm PVC pipe. Conduit may be installed by jacking or trenching. Trenches shall be backfilled with earth and mechanically tamped at 155 mm lift so that the earth is restored to the same density, grade and vegetation as adjacent undisturbed material.

3.1.4.1 Cable End Caps

Cable ends shall be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps. Cables ends shall be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The caps shall remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated. Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected.



3.1.5 Underground Duct


**************************************************************************

Provide underground duct and connections to existing[ manholes,][ handholes,][ concrete pads,][ and][ existing ducts] as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION with any additional requirements as specified herein.

3.1.6 Reconditioning of Surfaces


**************************************************************************

Provide reconditioning of surfaces as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

3.1.7 Penetrations

Caulk and seal cable access penetrations in walls, ceilings and other parts of the building. Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.8 Cable Pulling

Test duct lines with a mandrel and swab out to remove foreign material before the pulling of cables. Avoid damage to cables in setting up pulling apparatus or in placing tools or hardware. Do not step on cables when entering or leaving the manhole. Do not place cables in ducts other than those shown without prior written approval of the Contracting Officer. Roll cable reels in the direction indicated by the arrows painted on the reel flanges. Set up cable reels on the same side of the manhole as the conduit section in which the cable is to be placed. Level the reel and bring into proper alignment with the conduit section so that the cable pays off from the top of the reel in a long smooth bend into the duct without twisting. Under no circumstances shall the cable be paid off from the bottom of a reel. Check the equipment set up prior to beginning the cable pulling to avoid an interruption once pulling has started. Use a cable feeder guide of suitable dimensions between cable reel and face of duct to protect cable and guide cable into the duct as it is paid off the reel. As cable is paid off the reel, lubricate and inspect cable for sheath defects. When defects are noticed, stop pulling operations and notify the Contracting Officer to determine required corrective action. Cable pulling shall also be stopped when reel binds or does not pay off freely. Rectify cause of binding before resuming pulling operations. Provide cable lubricants recommended by the cable manufacturer. Avoid bends in cables of small radii and twists that might cause damage. Do not bend cable and wire in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire.

3.1.8.1 Cable Tensions

Obtain from the cable manufacturer and provide to the Contracting Officer,



the maximum allowable pulling tension. This tension shall not be exceeded.

3.1.8.2 Pulling Eyes

Equip cables 32 mm in diameter and larger with cable manufacturer's factory installed pulling-in eyes. Provide cables with diameter smaller than 32 mm with heat shrinkable type end caps or seals on cable ends when using cable pulling grips. Rings to prevent grip from slipping shall not be beaten into the cable sheath. Use a swivel of 19 mm links between pulling-in eyes or grips and pulling strand.

3.1.8.3 Installation of Cables in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults

Do not install cables utilizing the shortest route, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. [Provide a minimum of 15 meter maintenance loop for all cables at maintenance hole feeding building entrance facilities.] Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support cables on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of 1220 mm . In existing manholes, handholes, and vaults where new ducts are to be terminated, or where new cables are to be installed, modify the existing installation of cables, cable supports, and grounding as required with cables arranged and supported as specified for new cables. Identify each cable with corrosion-resistant embossed metal tags.

3.1.9 Aerial Cable Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t ensi oni ng and sag dat a on dr awi ngs i n t abul ar f or m.

**************************************************************************

Pole installation shall be as specified in Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION. Where physical obstructions make it necessary to pull distribution wire along the line from a stationary reel, use cable stringing blocks to support wire during placing and tensioning operations. Do not place ladders, cable coils, and other equipment on or against the distribution wire. Wire shall be sagged in accordance with the data shown. Protect cable installed outside of building less than 2.5 meters above finished grade against physical damage.

3.1.9.1 Figure 8 Distribution Wire

Perform spiraling of the wire within 24 hours of the tensioning operation. Perform spiraling operations at alternate poles with the approximate length of the spiral being 4575 mm . Do not remove insulation from support members except at bonding and grounding points and at points where ends of support members are terminated in splicing and dead-end devices. Ground support wire at poles to the pole ground.

3.1.9.2 Suspension Strand

**************************************************************************NOTE: I ncl ude t ensi oni ng and sag dat a on dr awi ngs i n t abul ar f or m.

**************************************************************************

Place suspension strand as indicated. Tension in accordance with the data indicated. When tensioning strand, loosen cable suspension clamps enough



to allow free movement of the strand. Place suspension strand on the road side of the pole line. In tangent construction, point the lip of the suspension strand clamp toward the pole. At angles in the line, point the suspension strand clamp lip away from the load. In level construction place the suspension strand clamp in such a manner that it will hold the strand below the through-bolt. At points where there is an up-pull on the strand, place clamp so that it will support strand above the through-bolt. Make suspension strand electrically continuous throughout its entire length, bond to other bare cables suspension strands and connect to pole ground at each pole.

3.1.9.3 Aerial Cable

Keep cable ends sealed at all times using cable end caps. Take cable from reel only as it is placed. During placing operations, do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of cable. Place temporary supports sufficiently close together and properly tension the cable where necessary to prevent excessive bending. In those instances where spiraling of cabling is involved, accomplish mounting of enclosures for purposes of loading, splicing, and distribution after the spiraling operation has been completed.

3.1.10 Cable Splicing

3.1.10.1 Copper Conductor Splices

Perform splicing in accordance with manufacturer's requirements except that direct buried splices and twisted and soldered splices are not allowed. Exception does not apply for pairs assigned for carrier application.

3.1.10.2 Fiber Optic Splices

Fiber optic splicing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and shall exhibit an insertion loss[ not greater than 0.2 dB for fusion splices][ not greater than 0.4 db for mechanical splices].

3.1.11 Surge Protection

All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cable, which serve as communication lines through off-premise lines, shall have surge protection installed at each end.

3.1.12 Grounding

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner shoul d ver i f y t he exi st ence of gr oundi ng f aci l i t i es. I t i s essent i al t hat al l gr oundi ng f aci l i t i es, new and exi st i ng, conf or m wi t h I EEE C2, NFPA 70, MI L- HDBK- 419, and MI L- STD- 188- 124.

**************************************************************************

Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with JIS C 60364-5-54 and IEEE C2 and JIS C 0365 . Ground exposed noncurrent carrying metallic parts of telephone equipment, cable sheaths, cable splices, and terminals.

3.1.12.1 Telecommunications Master Ground Bar (TMGB)

The TMGB is the hub of the basic telecommunications grounding system



providing a common point of connection for ground from outside cable, CD, and equipment. Establish a TMGB for connection point for cable stub shields to connector blocks and CD protector assemblies as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.12.2 Incoming Cable Shields

Shields shall not be bonded across the splice to the cable stubs. Ground shields of incoming cables in the EF Telecommunications to the TMGB.

3.1.12.3 Campus Distributor Grounding

a. Protection assemblies: Mount CD protector assemblies directly[ on the telecommunications backboard][ in the telecommunications [rack][cabinet]]. Connect assemblies mounted on each vertical frame with No. 6 AWG copper conductor to provide a low resistance path to TMGB.

[ b. TMGB connection: Connect TMGB to TGB with copper conductor with a total resistance of less than 0.01 ohms.

] [ 3.1.13 Cut-Over

All necessary transfers and cut-overs, shall be accomplished by the telecommunications contractor.

] 3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

**************************************************************************NOTE: Pr ovi de l abel i ng i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606 usi ng a mechani cal devi ce f or pr i nt i ng.

**************************************************************************

Provide labeling for new cabling and termination hardware located within the facility. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for cable and termination hardware shall be provided using[ thermal ink transfer process][ laser printer][_____].

3.2.2 Cable Tag Installation

**************************************************************************NOTE: Ver i f y cabl e l abel i ng r equi r ement s wi t h t he l ocal Act i v i t y. Label i n accor dance wi t h TI A- 606 f or act i v i t i es wi t hout cur r ent l abel i ng st andar ds. Choose appr opr i at e cabl e l abel i ng r equi r ement s based on ver i f i cat i on r esul t s.

**************************************************************************

Install cable tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults including each splice.[ Tag only new wire and cable provided by this contract.][ Tag new wire and cable provided under this contract and existing wire and cable which are indicated to have splices and terminations provided by this contract.] The labeling of telecommunications cable tag identifiers shall be[ as indicated].[ Tag legend shall be as indicated.] Do not provide handwritten letters. Install cable tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes, handholes, and vaults.



3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Label patch panels, distribution panels, connector blocks and protection modules using color coded labels with identifiers.


**************************************************************************NOTE: Sel ect t he second br acket ed sent ence i f Section 09 90 00 PAI NTS AND COATI NGS i s used on t he pr oj ect and del et e t he subpar agr aphs f or CLEANI NG, PRI MI NG, and FI NI SH COAT.

**************************************************************************

[Provide ferrous metallic enclosure finishes in accordance with the following procedures. Ensure that surfaces are dry and clean when the coating is applied. Coat joints and crevices. Prior to assembly, paint surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Apply primer and finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.][Provide ferrous metallic enclosure finishes as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.]

[ 3.3.1 Cleaning

Clean surfaces as required per applicable codes and standards .

][ 3.3.2 Priming

Prime with a two component polyamide epoxy primer which has a bisphenol-A base, a minimum of 60 percent solids by volume, and an ability to build up a minimum dry film thickness on a vertical surface of 0.127 mm . Apply in two coats to a total dry film thickness of 0.127 to 0.2 mm .

][ 3.3.3 Finish Coat

Finish with a two component urethane consisting of saturated polyester polyol resin mixed with aliphatic isocyanate which has a minimum of 50 percent solids by volume. Apply to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 to 0.076 mm . Color shall be the manufacturer's standard.

] 3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING



Provide the Contracting Officer[ 10][_____] working days notice prior to[ each][_____] test. Provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Correct defective material and workmanship disclosed as the results of the tests. Furnish a signed copy of the test results to the Contracting Officer within 3 working days after the tests for each segment of construction are completed. Perform testing as construction progresses and do not wait until all construction is complete before starting field tests.



3.5.1 Pre-Installation Tests

Perform the following tests on cable at the job site before it is removed from the cable reel. For cables with factory installed pulling eyes, these tests shall be performed at the factory and certified test results shall accompany the cable.

3.5.1.1 Cable Capacitance

Perform capacitance tests on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if cable capacitance is within the limits specified.

3.5.1.2 Loop Resistance

Perform DC-loop resistance on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if DC-loop resistance is within the manufacturer's calculated resistance.

3.5.1.3 Pre-Installation Test Results

Provide results of pre-installation tests to the Contracting Officer at least[ 5][_____] working days before installation is to start. Results shall indicate reel number of the cable, manufacturer, size of cable, pairs tested, and recorded readings. When pre-installation tests indicate that cable does not meet specifications, remove cable from the job site.

3.5.2 Acceptance Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: Desi gner shoul d del et e t est s t hat ar e not required.

**************************************************************************

Perform acceptance testing in accordance with JIS X 5150 and JIS X 5151 and as further specified in this section. Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform required testing. Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least[ 14][_____] days prior to any test unless specified otherwise. Testing shall not proceed until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer's approval of the test plans as specified. Test plans shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications. The test plans shall define milestones for the tests, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The test plans shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested. Provide test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Measurements shall be tabulated on a pair by pair or strand by strand basis.

3.5.2.1 Copper Conductor Cable

Perform the following acceptance tests in accordance with JIS C 6870-3 and JIS C 6870-3-10 :

a. Wire map (pin to pin continuity)

b. Continuity to remote end

c. Crossed pairs



d. Reversed pairs

e. Split pairs

f. Shorts between two or more conductors 3.5.2.2 Fiber Optic Cable

**************************************************************************NOTE: The OTDR wor ks on t he pr i nci pal of t he amount of l i ght t hat i s r ef l ect ed back t o t he sour ce and t her ef or e gi ves an est i mat ed l oss val ue. Typi cal l y, t he OTDR can be used f or l ocat i ng pr obl ems causi ng hi gh at t enuat i on. I t shoul d be not ed, however , t hat t he di st ances needed f or accur at e OTDR r eadi ngs must exceed 100 m. To over come t he l ong t ai l on t he t r ace due t o t he i ni t i al r ef l ect i on at t he OTDR connect or , a " dead- zone f i ber " wi t h a l engt h exceedi ng t he di spl ayed pul se dur at i on may be used bet ween t he OTDR connect or and t he speci men. ( Numer i cal l y, pul se l engt h i n met er s cor r esponds t o appr oxi mat el y one- t ent h t he pul se dur at i on i n ns. ) To avoi d t he t ai l , t he dead- zone f i ber l engt h may be up t o 20 t i mes t he pul se l engt h, dependi ng upon char act er i st i cs of t he i ndi v i dual OTDR. Recommend a 20 met er j umper mi ni mum, f or t est i ng f i ber opt i c cabl i ng usi ng t he OTDR, however on l ong cabl i ng r uns t hi s l engt h may be i nadequat e t o over come t he dead- zone and pot ent i al l y skew t est r esul t s. Sel ect 850 or 1300 nanomet er l i ght sour ce f or mul t i mode f i ber and 1310 or 1550 nanomet er l i ght sour ce f or s i ngl e- mode f i ber .

**************************************************************************

Test fiber optic cable and as further specified in this section. Two optical tests shall be performed on all optical fibers: Optical Time Domain Reflectometry (OTDR) Test, and Attenuation Test. In addition, a Bandwidth Test shall be performed on all multimode optical fibers. These tests shall be performed on the completed end-to-end spans which include the near-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly, outside plant as specified, and the far-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly.

a. OTDR Test: The OTDR test shall be used to determine the adequacy of the cable installations by showing any irregularities, such as discontinuities, micro-bendings or improper splices for the cable span under test. Hard copy fiber signature records shall be obtained from the OTDR for each fiber in each span and shall be included in the test results. The OTDR test shall be measured in both directions. A reference length of fiber, [ 20][ ____] m minimum, used as the delay line shall be placed before the new end connector and after the far end patch panel connectors for inspection of connector signature. Conduct OTDR test and provide calculation or interpretation of results in accordance with JIS C 6823 for single-mode fiber and for multimode fiber. Splice losses shall not exceed 0.3 db.

b. Attenuation Test: End-to-end attenuation measurements shall be made on all fibers, in both directions, using a[ 850][ 1300][ 1310][ 1550]



nanometer light source at one end and the optical power meter on the other end to verify that the cable system attenuation requirements are met in accordance with[ JIS C 6188 for multimode][ and][ JIS C 6823 for single-mode] fiber optic cables. The measurement method shall be in accordance with JIS C 6823 . Attenuation losses shall not exceed 0.5 db/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fiber. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 5.0 db/km at 850 nm and 1.5 db/km at 1300 nm for multimode fiber.

c. Bandwidth Test: The end-to-end bandwidth of all multimode fiber span links shall be measured by the frequency domain method. The bandwidth shall be measured in both directions on all fibers. The bandwidth measurements shall be in accordance with JIS C 6824 .

3.5.3 Soil Density Tests

**************************************************************************NOTE: Choose one of t he f ol l owi ng opt i ons.

**************************************************************************

[ a. Determine soil-density relationships for compaction of backfill material.

][ b. Determine soil-density relationships as specified for soil tests in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.



Documents

ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE JAPANESE STANDARDS